B r i n g i n e < t h e w o r l d music • Brass & Woodwinds • S t r i n g I n s t r u m e n t s • Drums & Percussion • Pro Audio • Guitars *& Amplifiers • Keyboards^ Modules • Digital Pianos & Controllers • Music software and hardware s g r e a t e s s e l e c t i o n WARD MUSIC VANCOUVER 412 West Hastings Street Phone (604) 682-5288 LANGLEY 305-6339 200th St. Phone (604) 530-8704 RICHMOND 8080 Westminster Hwy. Phone (604) 244-8077 NORTH VANCOUVER 1615 Lonsdale Ave. Phone (604) 986-0911 www. wardmusic. com VICTORIA 911 Fort Street Phone (604) 682-5288 C A P I L A N O Calendar • 1 9 9 C O L L E G E 9 * 2 0 0 0 NORTH VANCOUVER CAMPUS AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICES 2055 Purcell Way North Vancouver, BC V7J3H5 6049861911 FAX 604 984 4985 TDD (for deaf and hard of hearing) 6049907848 SECHELT CAMPUS 5627 Inlet Avenue P0 Box 1609 Sechelt, BC V0N3A0 604885 9310 TOLL-FREE FROM VANCOUVER 6049871535 FAX 604 885 9350 SQUAMISH CAMPUS 1150 Carson Place P0 Box 1538 Squamish, BC V0N3G0 6048925322 TOLL-FREE FROM VANCOUVER 6049863515 FAX 604 892 9274 w w w . c a p c o l l e g e . b c . c a Table of C o n t e n t s Maps 5, 7 Frequently C a l l e d Numbers 9 A b o u t Capilano College 11 Health Services and Sports M e d i c i n e C l i n i c 51 Security 52 Career Planning Information Career Resource Centre GENERAL INFORMATION A c a d e m i c Schedule 19 A d m i s s i o n and Readmission 20 52 Campus Activities Athletics and Recreation 52 Student U n i o n 53 Application Dates 21 A d m i s s i o n Requirements 21 Transfer Credit 27 The Capilano R e v i e w 54 54 Campus Publications 29 Student Newspaper Right to Register... 29 General Campus Services Instructional Y e a r 29 Bookstore 54 M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) 29 Student S t o r e — C a p Corner 54 E n g l i s h Diagnostic Test ( E D T ) 29 Parking 54 Add/DropAVithdrawal Procedures 30 Lost and Found 55 Course Overload 32 Food and Beverage Service 55 Course Challenge 32 College Policies 56 Fees 33 Governance and Administration 62 Graduation 35 A c a d e m i c Policies and Procedures 39 Registration PREPARATORY PROGRAMS General Information Student Services Educational Advice The A d v i s i n g Centre 44 Registrar's Office 44 Disability Services 44 First Nations Student Services 45 Learning Support Services . 67 Pre-College L e v e l Courses 67 College Success Strategies Credit Courses 67 A d u l t Basic Education 68 Alternative Career Training 70 English as a Second Language 71 First Nations College Preparation Program 72 Speech Assisted Reading and W r i t i n g ( S A R A W ) 74 Library 45 Learning Specialist 46 UNIVERSITY TRANSFER W r i t i n g Centre 46 General Information The Mathematics Learning Centre 47 Anthropology 81 International Student Centre 47 A r t History 81 International Exchanges 47 Biology 82 Student Financial Support Employment Centre for Students 48 Financial A i d and A w a r d s 48 Alternative Learning Formats 77 Chemistry 83 Chinese 83 Commerce 84 Computing Science 85 Criminology 86 Distance Education 49 Economics 86 Co-operative Education 50 Engineering 87 English 89 Personal Support Services Counselling 50 French 90 C h i l d Care 51 Geography 91 Conflict Resolution A d v i s o r 51 Geology 91 German 92 M e d i a Program 147 History 92 M e d i c a l Office Assistant 149 Japanese 93 M u s i c Therapy, Bachelor of 150 Kinesiology 93 Office Assistant 152 Linguistics 94 Online Publishing 153 Mathematics and Statistics 94 Outdoor Recreation Management 154 M u s i c Transfer, Bachelor of 96 Performing Arts Management 156 Philosophy 99 Personal Care Attendant W o r k i n g for Persons Physics 99 Political Studies 100 Resident Care Attendant 159 Psychology 100 Special Education Teacher Assistant 160 Sociology 101 Studio A r t 161 Spanish 101 Textile Arts 164 Thai 102 Theatre 166 Women's Studies 102 Tourism Management 169 CAREER/VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS with Disabilities 157 POST-GRADUATE PROGRAMS General Information 105 A r t Institute 173 Accounting Assistant 106 A s i a Pacific Management Cooperative 174 A c c o u n t i n g Support 106 Environmental Science 176 Administrative Assistant 107 A p p l i e d Information Technology (Infotec) 108 CONTINUING EDUCATION 109 Continuing Education Business Administration Bachelor of Business Administration Degree 179 Community M u s i c School 179 179 113 Eldercollege C o - o p Education D i p l o m a 113 Certified Financial Planner Program 179 Advanced Diploma 114 F i l m Studies 180 Business Computing C o - o p D i p l o m a 115 Educational Travel 180 D i p l o m a Programs — T w o - y e a r 116 Contracts and Educational Partnerships 180 Retail Marketing C o - o p 117 Custom-Designed Programs 180 Evening Certificate Programs 118 Career Assessments 180 (BBA) Accelerated Business Administration D i p l o m a 119 Provincial Rafting E x a m s 180 Professional Accounting Transfer 120 International Programs 180 Computer Specialist Program 121 Certified Financial Planner 121 C O U R S E DESCRIPTIONS 185 INDEX 287 L o c a l Government Administration Professional Certificate 122 Network Specialist Certificate 122 123 1999 - 2000 Capilano College Calendar Commercial Animation 123 Communications 125 Published by: C o m m u n i t y Relations Design and Layout: M e d i a Production Services C o v e r Design: Jana H o t k o v a Business Fundamentals Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education 126 Fisheries and Forestry Science 129 Graphic Design and Illustration 131 H o m e Support Attendant 132 Jazz Studies 133 Labour Studies 141 Landscape Horticulture 143 Legal Assistant 144 Legal Secretarial 146 Changes to Curricula, Regulations, and Services Capilano College reserves the right to make such changes in the College Calendar as necessary, including the cancellation or adjustment of programs or courses and changes in fee structure or other regulations or services, without liability for any resulting loss or damage. Although every effort is made to ensure accuracy at the time of printing, the statements in the Calendar do not constitute an irrevocable contract between the student and the College. 3 N K L C I N D Y I K E 1 C I N P O U L I N PACIFIC RIM COMMUNICATIONS ; Virtual Consultant "As a v i r t u a l c o n s u l t a n t , I'm p a r t o f t h e new economy, b r e a k i n g new ground i n e-commerce, t h e i n t e r n e t and a c c o u n t i n g . My CGA d e s i g n a t i o n opens up a w o r l d o f o p p o r t u n i t y . I t ' s d e f i n i t e l y t h e s t r e n g t h o f my c a r e e r p o r t f o l i o . " T H I N C G A . K C G - A The Certified offers General A c c o u n t a n t s Association of British unparalleled career opportunities in f i n a n c i a l Columbia management. COMBINE YOUR DIPLOMA WITH T H E POWER O F AC G ADESIGNATION. Call I-800-565-I 2 I I o r (604) 732-121 I o r visit: Information sessions are held every Tuesday 1:30 - 2 : 3 0 p m a t C G A - B C ' s h e a d o f f i c e , 1555 W e s t 8 t h A v e n u e , V a n c o u v e r . 4 www.cga-bc.org H o w To Find Us SECHELT Georgia Strait 5 We have a reputation for being a leader in our industry. Now here's your chance. For 28 years we've operated restaurants and bars known for mouthwatering steaks and great people. We offer an extensive training package, opportunity for growth, comprehensive benefits and competitive wages. If you're interested in joining our winning team, let us know. W h y not start your career perking now? I f y o u t h i n k o f y o u r c a r e e r as a n i n v e s t m e n t o f y o u r t i m e , h o w w o u l d y o u l i k e to be p a i d b a c k ? W i t h dollars, of course. But w o u l d n ' t y o u also like to be r e c o g n i z e d for y o u r efforts? A n d p r o m o t e d a c c o r d i n g to y o u r p o t e n t i a l ? A n d h a v e s o m e f u n w h i l e y o u ' r e at it? As Starbucks e x p a n d s across C a n a d a , we're p r o v i n g t h a t w e ' r e e v e r y b i t as m u c h o f a g r o w t h i n d u s t r y a s h i g h t e c h n o l o g y o r h e a l t h c a r e . W e t h i n k o u r success has c o m e f r o m o u r d e t e r m i n a t i o n to m a k e every o n e o f o u r customers smile... w i t h a perfect c u p o f coffee. F o r a t a s t e o f w h a t i t ' s l i k e t o w o r k at S t a r b u c k s , w e have openings for part-time baristas right now. also have m a n a g e m e n t t r a i n i n g if you're We thinking l o n g t e r m . W h y n o t i n v e s t y o u r c a r e e r i n cofTee Send your resume to: futures? W e t h i n k y o u ' l l f i n d t h e m very satisfying. T o f i n d out m o r e , just visit o n e o f o u r stores o r o u r Human Resources Keg Restaurants Ltd. w e b s i t e a t www.starbucks.com. To ask about career o p p o r t u n i t i e s , d r o p us a l i n e . 295 The West Mall Suite 420, Etobicoke M9C 4Z4 Fax: 416-695-2401 The Human Resource Department Starbucks CofTee Company Suite #200 - 128 West 6th Avenue Vancouver, British Columbia.V5Y 1K6 THE STARBUCKS Make the choice that makes a difference. The Correctional Service of Canada The Correctional Service of Canada is about people. We encourage and assist offenders in assessing and confronting their behavior through effective programming and with a team approach. We believe in respect for the individual, a desire to learn and change, integrity, teamwork, and being results oriented. If you possess the values of our organization, the flexibility and desire to work in a demanding environment and are motivated to work with offenders, then a career in corrections may be for you. We are accepting applications for the positions of Corrections Officers and Parole Officers. Resumes should be forwarded to: Regional Recruitment Coordinator Box 4500, Abbotsford, B.C., V2T 5L7 or call (604) 870-2625 1 c t C C C S S EXPERIENCE - Knowieage. en ? apply for admission on-line Z 2. former student follow-up reports career information £ J* Centre For Education Information F i n d i n g a p l a c e to live! •Immediate search results •Automatic updates via fax or email •Over 1 2 years experience m C a n a d a ~ You'll like the company ~ 1542 West 8th Ave (at Granville) Vancouver, BC We are committed to employment equity 6 604.732.4350 info@roomies.com N o r t h V a n c o u v C a l l 983-7526 for a wheelchair access map. e r C a m p u s SAVINGS ON TRANSIT ALL DAY, ANY DAY 15 VISITS $15 INTRODUCTORY STUDENT OFFER INCLUDES: ElExclusive Women's Only Facilities 0 C o - e d Facilities ALL-ZONE PUBLIC TRAVEL FOR POST-SECONDARY STUDENTS FastTrax Makes the Grade Using FastTrax on B C Transit's buses, SkyTrain and SeaBus makes travel to and from Capilano College fast, easy and affordable. Best of all, there's no parking to consider. Many campus bound routes are also wheelchair lift-equipped. Each time you use public transit, you are E x p e r i e n c e our un- m a t c h e d facilities for HChildminding only $ 1 5 . 0 B o d y composition test friendly qualified staff Let our El Fitness evaluation s h o w you h o w BEquipment orientation m a k e f i t n e s s enjoyable. we can H l n i t i a l program design Call or s t o p by t o d a y to H l n i t i a l nutritional consultation find out 0Program exercising w i t h us! monitoring more about This package regularly valued at $ 100 Serious Fitness since 1965 Isomerestn^is^Iv) Q v e c r 5 u 0 0 ) s ' ' Worldwide J | helping to preserve our environment. FastTrax - The Smart Choice The FastTrax strip is available to full-rime students attending (qualified) post-secondary institutions in the Lower Mainland. Simply pick up the FastTrax strip at your student union office and attach it to your student ID card. You will be charged $2.00 by your university or college for the FastTrax strip. When combined with your One Zone monthly FareCard, the FastTrax strip allows you to travel all day, any day, throughout B C Transits system (one, two, or three zones) for the price of One Zone fare travel. Remember to always carry your One Zone monthly FareCard and your student ID Card, with attached FastTrax strip. Information at Your Fingertips • Departure times are listed on the stops at the College bus loop. • Tickets and monthly passes are available at Fare Dealer outlets throughout the Lower Mainland. • Free timetables are available at the student union and many other campus locations. • Call Talking Yellow Pages at 299-9000, local 2233 for pre-recorded transit information. • Call B C Transit Customer Information: 521-0400 or West Vancouver 985-7777. This program is currently under review and changes will be considered by the Greater Vancouver Transit Authority. Schedules now on-line: www.bctransit.com B C T r a n s i t $ $ * www.facfronsif.com Well get you there. #1 In Fitness Worldwide 9 8 6 - 9 1 7 7 1 2 5 - 9 4 9 West 3rd Street, North Vancouver 1 Block South of Capilano Mall Frequently Called Numbers Web Site: www.capcollege.bc.ca A Student Services & Foundation Programs 984-1749 984-4959 Disability Services Accounting Support Program 984-4959 E Administrative Assistant Program 984-4959 Early C h i l d h o o d Care & Education A d u l t Basic Education 983-7598 Program 984-4960 A d u l t Special Education 990-7869 Eldercollege 984-4906 A d v i s i n g Centre Accounting Assistant Program 983-7526 984-4990 English as a Second Language ( E S L ) 984-4971 Alternative Career Training 984-1711 Environmental Science Program 983-7562 A l u m n i Relations 983-7566 F A p p l i e d Business Technology Program 984-4959 Faculty Association . Program Art 990-7868 984-1727 Financial A i d 984-4966 984-4911 First A i d 984-1772 First Nations College Preparatory Program 983-7573 A s i a Pacific Management C o - o p Program Athletics and Recreation 984-4948 F i l m Studies A p p l i e d Information Technology (Infotec) 984-4981 First Nations Student Services 984-4977 Fisheries Science - Sechelt 984-4972 Foundations Initiatives 984-1762 (toll free) 987-1535 or (604) 885-9310 B Bookstore 984-1759 G Business Administration General Information 984-4960 Graphic Design & Illustration Program C o - o p Education 984-1735 H 990-7820 or 983-7557 Health Programs 984-4960 984-4959 Health Services 984-4964 C H o m e Support Attendant Program 984-4960 Capilano College Foundation 984-4983 Humanities D i v i s i o n 984-4957 Capilano Review 984-1712 I Career Access Centre 984-1784 Impark Cashiers' Office 984-1786 International Student Centre C h i l d Care Centre 984-4950 Manager 983-7544 C o m m e r c i a l A n i m a t i o n Program 990-7820 International Student A d v i s o r 983-7539 Communications 990-7820 International Student Counsellor 983-7535 Business Fundamentals Program 329-5171 C o m m u n i t y Relations 984-1729 J Computer Services 984-4952 Jazz Studies Conflict Resolution A d v i s o r 990-7863 L Continuing Education 984-4901 Labour Studies Program 984-4954 Counselling 984-1744 Landscape Horticulture Program 984-4960 Courier Newspaper 984-4949 Legal Assistant Program 983-7594 L e g a l Secretarial Program 984-4959 D Library Deans' Offices Arts 984-1747 Business, H u m a n Services & International Education 984-4923 College/Community Partnerships 984-4924 Science & M e d i a Technology 984-4951 984-1748 Circulation 984-4944 Reference 984-1769 L o c a l Government Administration Professional Certificate Program 984-4960, ext. 2340 or 983-7570, ext. 2340 9 M Media Program Medical Office Assistant Program Music Therapy Program Music Transfer Program 984-4940 984-4959 984-4951 984-4951 0 Office Assistant Program 984-4959 Online Publishing Program 990-7819 Outdoor Recreation Program 984-4960 P Peer Support Centre 986-1911, ext. 2229 Performing Arts Management Program 984-4911 Personal Care Attendant Program 984-4960 President's Office 984-4987 Prior Learning Assessment 984-1788 Pure & Applied Sciences Division 984-4955 R Registrar's Office 984-4900 Resident Care Attendant Program 984-4960 Retail Marketing Co-op Program 984-1721 S SARAW Sechelt Campus 983-7552 (604) 885-9310 Toll-free from Vancouver 987-1535 Security 984-1763 Social Sciences Division 984-4953 Special Education Teacher Assistant Program 990-7802 Sports Medicine Clinic 984-4964 Sportsplex 984-1737 Squamish Campus (604) 892-5322 Toll-free from Vancouver 986-3515 Student Employment Centre 984-4965 Student Union 984-4969 Studio Art Program 984-4911 T Television Lab 986-1911, ext. 2171 Textile Arts Program 984-4911 Theatre Box Office Manager Program Information Tourism Management Program V Vice President, Academic Affairs Visual and Performing Arts Division o l f e s 990-7810 984-1775 984-4911 984-4960 984-1738 984-4911 ' o i f o k i c z i o >1 FREE APPETIZER to Cap Students Show your valid Cap student ID card and get an order of tasty spring rolls or crispy wontons with a purchase of 00 $I0. or more. offer expires December 31,1999 The North Shore's Only School For Realistic Self Defence SELF-DEFENCE TRAINING Kicks Handstrikes Ground Grappling Joint Locks Boxing Takedowns "Fitness Training with a Purpose" LADIES KICKIN'CARDIO Qualified Instructors Full Body Workout Self-Defence N a m e d Vancouver's Best of '98, Georgia Straight 1445 Lonsdale Avenue, North Vancouver 990-9349 10 Contact us today for your Free Introductory 904-9653 Class! wolfeshapkido.com A b o u t Capilano College In 1968 Capilano College opened its doors to just over 700 students. Since then, it has grown steadily to become one of British C o l u m b i a ' s most outstanding colleges, with enrolment nearing 6,500 students. The College is a dynamic source o f leadership within the communities it serves. The main campus is i n N o r t h Vancouver, nestled i n a natural setting on the slopes o f the N o r t h Shore mountains. Regional campuses i n Squamish and Sechelt provide educational opportunities to students i n the communities o f H o w e Sound and the Sunshine Coast. Approximately 40 per cent o f student enrolment comes from the rest o f the L o w e r M a i n l a n d , British C o l u m b i a , Canada and around the world. Capilano College has earned a reputation for teaching excellence and innovation. Faculty members are experts in their fields and bring extensive knowledge to the classroom. In support o f a wide range o f educational goals, the College offers a quality learning experience in a variety o f program areas: University Transfer Capilano College provides a solid academic foundation that can lead to many educational and career opportunities. The College offers a wide range of courses w h i c h are transferable to universities i n British C o l u m b i a and elsewhere i n Canada. Capilano College offers several options, including: • • • Associate degrees i n Arts or Science Bachelor degrees, offered i n partnership with the Open University: Bachelor o f M u s i c i n Jazz Studies, Bachelor of M u s i c Therapy, Bachelor o f Business Administration, and Bachelor o f T o u r i s m Management Post-baccalaureate programs i n Environmental Science, A s i a Pacific Management, and A r t . Career/Vocational Programs Capilano College offers a variety of employmentoriented programs leading to certificates, diplomas and degrees. They are constantly reviewed to ensure that students are taught the latest techniques and skills required i n today's workplace. A d v i s o r y committees, composed of business and community leaders and employers, advise on the content o f all career and vocational programs. Preparatory Courses The College offers a full range o f preparatory courses to assist students i n meeting their educational and career goals. After upgrading or refreshing their skills, students may seek employment or move into a career program or university transfer courses. International Education Capilano College is an active participant i n the international community. Its multicultural character is enhanced by international students from more than 40 countries. Capilano College partners with institutions, governments and organizations worldwide, i n countries such as Japan, Thailand, C h i n a , V i e t n a m , C o l u m b i a , and Lebanon. Continuing Education Each year, thousands of students enrol in non-credit courses, seminars, workshops and lectures for personal and professional development, or just for pure enjoyment. Contract Services Capilano College specializes i n flexible, customized, short-term training, adapted for the classroom, conference r o o m or computer lab, and offered on-campus or at the worksite. MISSION A N D VALUES A t Capilano C o l l e g e our mission is to enable student success i n current and continuing studies, i n a chosen career, i n the pursuit o f knowledge, and i n contributing effectively as responsible citizens i n a rapidly changing and diverse global community. T o accomplish its mission, Capilano College strives to produce a dynamic and secure learning environment committed to excellence i n education and to equity o f access. It seeks to offer, either selectively within its own resources, or more broadly i n partnership with others, high-quality and flexible preparatory, academic, career and vocational programs that provide opportunities for a wide range o f students. It does so i n the context o f the following values: Students Student needs are the first concern o f Capilano College. The College values the diverse backgrounds and cultures from w h i c h our students come and strives to provide curricula and support services that w i l l sustain all students' personal growth and cultural enrichment. It believes that students should leave the College with the knowledge, skills and attitudes that w i l l enable them to become independent learners and thinkers; with enhanced skills i n literacy, numeracy, and critical thinking, and with a positive attitude toward learning. The College expects and values the commitment o f students to the learning process and to the maintenance o f secure and supportive learning conditions. 11 Community Accountability The College is an important resource i n the educational, economic and cultural life o f all the communities it serves. The College is accountable fiscally, educationally, and socially. It commits itself to allocating resources fairly to ensure that students receive an education suited to their needs; to explaining its policies and achievements to the public; and to exercising its influence within the community in a thoughtful and ethical way. T o this end it establishes policies and procedures that reflect the best standards o f financial management, graduate assessment, personnel practice, and environmental stewardship. It recognizes the unique needs o f its regional centres, and o f the diverse populations served by its programs. The College offers its expertise and leadership by actively helping all its communities anticipate future problems and opportunities, and actively seeking partnerships to meet those needs w h i c h are identified. The College serves as a model for its community by providing equality of access to its services, its facilities and its employment opportunities. Employees The College values everyone involved i n the teaching and learning process. It regards its employees as its greatest assets i n providing excellent programming and services. The College recognizes that faculty, staff and administrators serve as active models o f citizenship, scholarship and professionalism, and expects that they w i l l work together i n a responsive, equitable, and collegial manner. The College strives to establish and maintain exemplary teaching, learning, and w o r k i n g conditions. 12 Innovation The College encourages rigorous, continuing analysis and evaluation o f its o w n effectiveness. It supports those wishing to develop instructional methods and curricula to improve the teaching o f present programs and to meet the emerging needs o f students and the community. It supports the use o f appropriate partnerships and technologies to meet these needs. The College accepts the reality o f constant change and the need for planning and flexibility to meet the demands of change. JEREMY D A L T O N , M.LA. Complsis C2AJJAIA' & $b PROVINCE OF ^J?" (West Vancouver-Capilano) Province of British Columbia 1 0 % Room 201, Parliament Buildings Victoria, B C , V 8 V 1X4 Phone: (250) 356-3070 Fax: (250) 356-7109 S t u d e n t Suite 306, 1497 Marine Drive West Vancouver, B C V 7 T 1 B 8 Phone: (604)925-1611 Fax: (604) 925-9658 D i s c o u n t on all Artists' Materials (with your student ID) Watercolour-Oil-AcrylicGouache" Textile Design Supplies' Petrov's Art & Craft Supplies 51 Lonsdale Avenue North Vancouver, BC V7M 2E5 985-1545 FOR STUDENTS ONLY Subscribe to The Globe and Mail now and save o •Get Canada's best daily information package delivered Monday through Saturday - plus - at no extra cost. Report on Business Magazine monthly. •Your choice of 13,26 or 52-week term. memade EfaJLJ ^ffia-tfasi &e3tat/st2/i£ever fiadtaj North Vancouver 5 Lonsdale Ave. cA&oteflos/i, /node c^u^. North Van's Pest Souvlaki Since 1985 Open for lunch and dinner 7 days a week cwd(Ae tfeJf .SS&lSri/fj and/(un/fin. foiv/i/ #3 Lonsdale Ave., N o r t h Van Reservations 9 8 5 - 9 8 5 3 Tel. 984-3337 THE NORTH SHORE'S FULL SERVICE PRINT SHOP DIGITAL DESIGN © 20% O F F P O O L 0 OUTPUT SERVICES ± Join us for lunch and play pool for free (30 min) Contact ONE PRINTING & M A I L I N G LTD COLOUR 339 W. 2ND ST., NORTH VANCOUVER 9 8 0 - 6 0 5 2 COLOUR * & TYPESETTING PRE-PRESS Bring in your Student ID to receive TO FULL POOL w e PRINTING POOL TIME CAFE AND BILLIARDS 990-9498 #101 - 1550 Marine Drive, North Vancouver C O M P L E T E YOUR BACHELOR DEGREE IN O N E YEAR. B.SC. INENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE B . C O M . INENTREPRENEURIAL M A N A G E M E N T C O M M U N I T Y C O L L E G E A N D UNIVERSITY TRANSFER STUDENTS: If you have completed an environmentrelated or business diploma and have a strong academic background, you may be eligible for a block transfer into the 3rd year of one of our Bachelor's degrees. MID CAREER STUDENTS: W i t h prior learning assessment, based upon your academic and work experience, you may qualify for direct entry into the 3rd year of either of these programs. Both programs start in September . They are challenging and exciting programs focused on the development of strategic thinking, problem solving and decision making skills necessary to compete effectively in the national and international marketplace in the 21st century. For program information, call toll free 1-800-788-8028. Fax (250) 391-2522, E-mail: rruregistrar@royalroads.ca or visit our website: www.royalroads.ca You can also write to: Royal Roads University's unique quarter system allows students to complete their 3rd and 4th years in only 12 months. The Registrar, Royal Roads University, 2005 Sooke Road, Victoria, B.C. V9B 5Y2 R o y a l R p A D S U n i v e r s i t y 24 c m New Brunswick Applicants must supply evidence o f completion of an academic (i.e. college preparatory) program w h i c h w i l l lead to graduation and includes at least four courses as follows: 1. E n g l i s h 12, 121 or 122 (or Francais 121 or 122); and 2. at least three additional grade 12 academic (college preparatory) courses selected from among B i o l o g y , Chemistry, Computer Science, English, Francais, French, Geography, History, Mathematics, Physics. A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on English 120, 121 or 122 and the three best courses in group two. 2. any three o f B i o l o g y 3201, Chemistry 3202, Geology 3203, Physics 3204, Mathematics 3201 or 3203, Geography, History or languages at the 3000 level. A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on E n g l i s h and the three best courses in group two. Other Countries International students are eligible for admission i f they have completed the equivalent of secondary school graduation (Grade 12) i n British C o l u m b i a . Examples of Equivalence: China Senior M i d d l e School D i p l o m a Prince Edward Island Applicants must supply evidence o f completion of an academic or advanced academic program w h i c h w i l l lead to graduation and includes at least four academic and/or advanced academic subjects selected as follows: France Baccalaureate (2ieme partie) (Series A - E ) Germany and Austria Reifezeugnis or A b i t u r Hong Kong 1. English 621 or English 611; and Passes in five G C E / H K C E E subjects, two o f w h i c h must be at the A d v a n c e d L e v e l . 2. at least three additional courses numbered 621 and/ or 611 selected from among B i o l o g y , Chemistry, Francais, French, Geography, History, other languages, Physics, or Mathematics (621 or 611). Indonesia A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on English 621 or 611 and the three best courses i n group two. Sekolah Menengah Atas ( S M A ) Leaving Certificate Japan Grade 12 D i p l o m a from K o t o G a k k o Korea H i g h School Grade 12 D i p l o m a Malaysia Nova Scotia Applicants must supply evidence o f completion o f an academic (i.e. university preparatory) program w h i c h w i l l lead to graduation, including at least four subjects selected as follows: S P M / S T P M or C O S C / C O H S C Singapore Singapore-Cambridge General Certificate o f Education ( G C E ) with two A d v a n c e d level subjects Taiwan H i g h School Grade 12 D i p l o m a 1. E n g l i s h 441 or English 541; and United Kingdom and Commonwealth 2. at least three additional courses numbered 441 and/ or 541 selected from among the following subjects: B i o l o g y , Chemistry, Computer Science, Francais, French, History, M a t h , other languages, Physics or M a t h 442, E c o n o m i c s , Geography or L a w . Passes in five G C E subjects, two o f w h i c h must be at the A d v a n c e d L e v e l A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on English 441 or 541 and the three best courses in group two. CAREER/VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS British C o l u m b i a secondary school graduation (grade 12) or equivalent. A d d i t i o n a l admission requirements are noted i n the Newfoundland individual program descriptions i n this publication. Applicants must supply evidence o f completion of an academic program which w i l l lead to graduation and includes at least 13 credits as follows: 1. Language 3101 and either E n g l i s h 3201 or 3202; and General Information — Admission 25 20% Off SERVICE REGULAR AT S I M O N S ' B I K E ARRANGEMENT WITH LOU PRICED SHOP ITEMS, WHEN CROSSIE PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND YOU PURCHASE TRAVEL FULL 602-1181 TRAVEL AGENCY. LOU CROSSIE S I A A O N S BIf<€ S H O P 6 0 8 Robson Street Vancouver YOUR SERVICE T R A V E L LTD. Lou Crossie Travel Ltd. #104-135 East 15th St. North Vancouver 980-6561 ai, loucmssietravel@hotmail.com Op *° You en Looking for credit options that fit your life? Take a look at us. Quality Partners i n BC's public post-secondary system since 1978, we're committed to providing educational access and quality. Our courses and programs are fully accredited and recognized, and are led by highly qualified faculty dedicated to alternative delivery methods. Flexibility Open admission policies mean you can register year-round, and distance formats let you study when you want, where you want. Student services such as program advising, credit evaluation or transfer and full library access mean that we're with you every step of the way. Choice Open College offers 14 certificate and diploma programs, with many leading into Open University's 22 degree programs in arts, science, business, health and technology. Partnerships and credit transfer arrangements with other colleges, universities, institutes and professional associations give you an even greater range of educational choice. 431-3300 1-800-663-9711 (toll-free in BC) www.ola.bc.ca/ou/ OPEN COLLEGE DIVISIONS OF THE OPEN LEARNING AGENCY a OPEN UNIVERSITY TRANSFER CREDIT A l l public B . C . colleges accept each other's credit upon transfer i f applicable to a program at the admitting college and i f there is suitable equivalency. Transfer credit may be granted for courses completed at other post-secondary institutions. Students seeking transfer credit must complete the "Request for Transfer Credit" form, attach official transcripts, i f not already submitted, or note that transcripts w i l l be sent from another institution, and submit all to the Registrar's Office. F o r courses completed at out-of-province institutions, detailed course outlines must also be submitted. A l l approved transfer credit is noted on the permanent student record. W h i l e the credit awarded does not affect the grade point average, the credit w i l l be included i n the total number o f credits completed and may be used to complete certificate or diploma requirements i f applicable. Limit of Transfer Credits For diplomas and certificates, the final 50 percent o f the credit required must be completed while i n attendance at Capilano College. For students who are no longer residents of the College region and lack one or two courses for certificate or diploma completion, credit may be granted for an additional one or two courses from another institution. This arrangement must be made i n consultation with the Registrar's Office in advance of enrolment at another institution. For the Associate degrees, at least 30 o f the 60 credits must be completed at Capilano C o l l e g e within five years preceding the awarding o f the degree. A D V A N C E D PLACEMENT Applicants who have passed an A d v a n c e d Placement Examination administered by the College Entrance Examination Board, with a mark of 4 or better w i l l receive credit as follows: B i o l o g y - those completing A P B i o l o g y w i l l receive credit for B I O L 110 (3) and B I O L 111 (3). Chemistry - those completing A P Chemistry w i l l receive credit for C H E M 110 (3) and C H E M 111 (3). Computer Science - those completing A P Computer Science A w i l l receive credit for C O M P 120. Economics - those completing A P Economics w i l l receive credit for Economics unassigned (6). English - those completing E n g l i s h Language/Composition w i l l receive credit for E N G L 100 (3). Those completing English Literature/Composition w i l l receive credit for E N G L 103 (3). In addition, the E D T requirement w i l l be waived. Mathematics - those completing Calculus A B w i l l receive credit for M A T H 116 (3.0). Those completing Calculus B C w i l l receive credit for M A T H 116 (3.0) and M A T H 126 (3.0). Physics - those completing Physics B w i l l receive credit for P H Y S 110 (3) and P H Y S 111 (3). Those completing Physics C (Mechanics) w i l l receive credit for P H Y S 114 (3). Those completing Physics C (Electricity) w i l l receive credit for P H Y S 115 (3). Note: Transfer credit granted for International Baccalaureate and Advanced Placement courses will apply to certificates or diplomas at Capilano College. Students should be aware that other colleges and universities may not accept these courses for transfer credit. INTERNATIONAL B A C C A L A U R E A T E COURSES Applicants who have completed the International Baccalaureate D i p l o m a w i l l receive credit or waivers for some higher level subjects passed as follows: Anthropology -students presenting a mark of 4 w i l l receive credit for A N T H 121 (3). B i o l o g y - students presenting mark o f 6 w i l l receive credit for B I O L 110 (3) and B I O L 111 (3). Chemistry - students presenting mark o f 4 or better w i l l receive credit for C h e m 110 (3) and C h e m 111 (3). Computing Science - students presenting mark o f 4 or better i n C o m p u t i n g Science A w i l l receive credit for C O M P 120. Economics - students presenting mark o f 4 or better i n Economics w i l l receive credit for Economics unassigned (6). English - students presenting mark o f 6 or better for E n g l i s h Language A w i l l receive credit for E N G L 103 (3). Students presenting a mark o f 6 or better for English Language B w i l l receive credit for E N G L 100 (3). In addition, the E D T requirement is waived for those with a mark o f 6 or better on English Language AorB. Mathematics - students presenting mark o f 6 or better for Higher Level Mathematics w i l l receive credit for M A T H 116 (3.0). Students presenting a mark of 6 or better for Further Mathematics w i l l receive credit for M A T H 116 (3.0) and M A T H 126 (3.0). Physics - students presenting a mark o f 6 or better w i l l receive credit for P H Y S 110 (3) and P H Y S 111 (3). General Information — Admission 27 PRIOR LEARNING ASSESSMENT A n innovative process is available at Capilano College whereby students may receive college credits for learning acquired i n formal and informal situations. This process, called Prior Learning Assessment ( P L A ) , w i l l be of immense benefit to mature students who have work and life experiences that equate to courses offered at the College. For example, i f you have on-the-job work experience in computers you may be able to receive credits offered in one or more office or business administration courses. Y o u w i l l need to prove that you have acquired the knowledge, skills and values required in the formal course you are requesting credit for. This is done by providing evidence of what you have learned. This might include any one or combination o f the following: a work site visit, documentation, interview and oral presentation, portfolio. A t present only the following program areas offer P L A credits: A p p l i e d Business Technology, Business Administration, Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education, Legal Assistant, M u s i c Therapy (prerequisite courses only), Tourism Management. M o r e courses w i l l be assessed as the number o f individual inquiries increases. For more information, contact the C o l l e g e ' s P L A Office at 984-1788. General 28 Information —Admission Registration RIGHT T O REGISTER A student who has not maintained satisfactory standing in a program i n any term may be denied permission to register i n that program in a subsequent term. Individual programs may require a G P A higher than that stated i n the Probation P o l i c y to continue enrolment. INSTRUCTIONAL YEAR The instructional year is comprised o f three terms: To write the Precalculus placement test, students should have at least a " C " grade i n M a t h 11 or at least a " C - " grade in M a t h 12. T o write the Calculus placement test, students should have at least a " C " grade in M a t h 12. W i t h i n a given year students are not allowed to rewrite the Calculus or Precalculus M P T . A study guide is available for the M P T which provides topic coverage and suggested review material as w e l l as a list of the scheduled test dates. Please contact the A d v i s i n g Centre or the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n for more information. F a l l : September through December Spring: January through A p r i l Summer: Session #1: M a y through June Session #2: July through August F u l l T e r m : M a y through August Note: A limited number of courses are offered during the Summer term. MATH PLACEMENT TEST (MPT)* Students wanting to enrol i n a Precalculus course ( M A T H 105 or 107), a Calculus I course ( M A T H 108 or 116), or a discrete mathematics course ( M A T H 124), must write a mathematics placement test i f either (or both) of the following two conditions apply: (a) Their mathematics prerequisite course was c o m pleted prior to 1998 for admission into F a l l 1999 courses; prior to 1999 for admission into Spring 2000 and Summer 2000 courses. (b) Their mathematics prerequisite course was c o m pleted at a B . C . secondary school (or equivalent) with a final letter grade standing below: ENGLISH DIAGNOSTIC TEST* The E D T (or the L P I ) is required before registration in any English course at the College, unless the student has achieved one o f the following w h i c h allows exemption: " A " in E n g l i s h 12, or " A " i n Literature 12, or " A " i n B E N G 42, or 4 or higher i n A . P . English C o m p o s i t i o n , or 4 or higher i n A . P . E n g l i s h Literature, or 6 or higher i n L B . English A or B " B - " or better in an English transfer course from another college or university a degree from an English-speaking university, or a pass on U B C ' s E C T (English Competency Test) N o t e : Successful completion of ESL 099 does not qualify a student to directly enter a regular English 010 or English 100. Students who wish to enrol i n any university transfer E n g l i s h course who do not qualify for an exemption must submit the results o f the Language Proficiency Index Test (LPI), or must sit the Capilano C o l l e g e E n g l i s h Diagnostic Test ( E D T ) prior to registration. E D T schedules w i l l be printed in the timetable. " C " i n M a t h 12 for admission to M A T H 105 or M A T H 107; * N o t e : You may register for both the EDT and MPT, " B " in M a t h 12 for admission to M A T H 108; through the Registrar's Office, North Vancouver campus. A writing fee is charged for both exams. " A " i n M a t h 12, or at least a " B " in both M a t h 12 and Calculus 12, for admission to M A T H 116 or 124. General Information — Registration 29 A D D , DROP, WITHDRAWAL PROCEDURES See also: procedure for condensed courses/terms and procedure for Summer term in this section BEFORE CLASSES C O M M E N C E Course Change Procedure 1. Students may drop or add courses or change sections following their registration appointment and until the first day o f classes. A course change form must be submitted to the Registrar's Office. 2. Faculty signatures are not required before classes commence. 3. Drops w i l l not be printed on the official transcript, but w i l l be maintained i n the permanent student record for accounting and statistical purposes. Complete Withdrawal Procedure For complete withdrawal before classes commence, a course change form listing all the courses to be dropped must be submitted to the Registrar's Office. A copy o f the course change form listing the complete withdrawal w i l l be forwarded to the career or vocational department by the Registrar's Office. A D D / D R O P PERIOD 6. If a complete withdrawal is requested, the request w i l l be granted with the signature o f the instructor of each course. Note: Failure to attend classes does not constitute a course drop. Students who do not formally drop a course(s) will be assessed tuition fees, refunds will not be made, and a grade of Fail (F) will be noted on the permanent student record. Requests for late adds or late drops will not be granted simply because the student was unaware of, or neglected to comply with, the College policies and procedures. WITHDRAWAL PERIOD Withdrawal period: 11th through the 30th day of each term (third week through the end of the sixth week). Withdrawal Procedure: 1. D u r i n g this period, with the signature o f the appropriate instructor(s) on the Course Change form, students may withdraw from a course(s). 2. The Course Change form must be submitted to the Registrar's Office no later than 7 p.m. o f the 30th instructional day (sixth week) o f each term. 3. A withdrawal ("W") w i l l be noted on the permanent student record. 4. Complete Withdrawal: If a complete withdrawal is requested, the request w i l l be granted i f the Course Change form bears the signature o f each faculty member instructing each course o f withdrawal. Add/Drop Period: 1st through the 10th day of each term. Add/Drop Procedure 1. Students wishing to add or drop a course(s), change from credit to audit, or change from audit to credit, must complete a Course Change form, and take the form to the instructor for approval and signature. 2. W i t h the instructor's signature appearing on the Course Change form, students must then submit the form to the Registrar's Office. Forms w i l l be accepted until 7 p.m. on the 10th instructional day o f the term. 3. Instructors may indicate a 48 hour deadline for submission o f the Course Change form, i n order to allow other students to gain entry to the class during this period. 4. Course drops w i l l not be noted on the student transcript during this period; however, a record for drops w i l l be maintained on the permanent student record for accounting and statistical purposes. 5. If a course change is requested by the instructor or student to a lower or less difficult level o f instruction i n a subject, the course change form must bear the signatures o f the instructor o f each course. General 30 Information — Registration - The Course Change form listing the request for complete withdrawal must be submitted to the Registrar's Office no later than the end o f the 30th instructional day (end o f the sixth week) o f term. - A withdrawal ("W") w i l l be noted on the official transcript and the permanent student record. AFTER THE WITHDRAWAL PERIOD After the 30th day (or after the end o f the sixth week) of the term, and until the end o f the term, course withdrawals or complete withdrawals are not permitted except for the reasons listed below: 1. the student record is incorrect as the result o f an error by the College; 2. the student transfers to a lower level o f the same course by instructor request. In this instance, only the final course o f enrolment w i l l show on the official transcript. A record o f the change w i l l also be maintained on the permanent student record; 3. exceptional circumstances, usually for medical reasons. Official documentation is required to substantiate all claims o f such circumstances and COURSE CHANGE PROCEDURES (ADD, DROP/WITHDRAWAL) A L L O W E D TO REQUIRES DROP/ C H A N G E BETWEEN FACULTY APPEARS ON TRANSACTION PERIOD ADD WITHDRAW CREDIT AND AUDIT SIGNATURE TRANSCRIPT FEE** REFUND** before classes start yes yes not applicable no no no partial 1st to 10th day of term yes yes yes yes no yes partial 11th to 30th day of term no yes no yes yes yes no 31st until end of term no no* no no yes not applicable no * check "WE", Grading System section. ** please refer to Fees section. should be submitted on the Request for Course Withdrawal form available from the Registrar's Office. T h i s form must be supplemented with official documentation such as a typed letter from the physician, an official copy o f an accident report, or official documentation o f a family emergency, death certificate, and so forth. Note: A completed Course Change form is required for (1), (2) or (3) listed above. Procedure 1. Students who wish to apply for special status under (3) above must submit the Request for Course Withdrawal form with a letter explaining the circumstances leading to withdrawal, and the Course Change form, to the Registrar with official documentation. If, i n the opinion of the Registrar, the request does not fall under (3) above, or the documentation is insufficient to support the request, the request w i l l be denied. If the request is granted, the Registrar w i l l inform the student's instructors of the " W E " status. 2. The permanent student record w i l l be annotated as withdrawal for extenuating circumstances ( " W E " ) . 3. W i t h d r a w a l with extenuating circumstances w i l l not be granted for lack o f academic performance on the part of the student. AFTER THE ELEVENTH WEEK OF CLASSES INCOMPLETE GRADE "I" 1. If the student believes an exceptional circumstance exists w h i c h prevents him/her from completing the course during the regular time frame, the student may petition the course instructor for an incomplete ("I") grade. 2. A n incomplete ("I") grade may be given where, i n the judgment o f the instructor, the student should have reasonable expectation o f passing the course, but has not completed the required work. 3. A n incomplete is assigned only when the instructor and student have arranged for the work to be c o m pleted by a specified date w h i c h is noted on the grade sheet class list. If the student does not c o m plete the work by the specified date, the instructor w i l l automatically assign a predetermined grade reflecting the work not completed. 4. If the student completes the work by the specified time, the instructor w i l l assign the final grade. 5. If this incomplete procedure cannot be applied in the opinion o f the instructor, the instructor is directed to contact the Registrar directly for resolution o f the issue. PROCEDURE FOR CONDENSED COURSES/TERMS Deadline w i l l be prorated to the duration o f the intensive courses. PROCEDURE FOR SUMMER TERM Same process as above, with the following restrictions: 1. F o r Summer courses seven or eight weeks in length: a) The A d d / D r o p Refund Period is five instructional days. b) The Withdrawal Period ends on the 10th instructional day. 2. F o r Summer courses 12 to 15 weeks i n length: a) The regular Add/Drop/Refund/Withdrawal policies apply. General Information — Registration REFUNDS — A d d / D r o p / W i t h d r a w a l Periods 1. If a course is dropped and another course is added at the same time and on the same course change form, the deposit w i l l be applied to the course added, provided the number o f credits remains the same. 2. If the number of credits falls below the original number o f credits o f enrolment, the difference of the deposit fee for the course dropped w i l l be retained and the m i n i m u m deposit w i l l not be refunded. 3. If a course add increases the number o f credits, the student w i l l be responsible for the non-refundable m i n i m u m payment o f the deposit at the time o f the addition. 4. However, i f the deposit is paid before June 30 for Fall term and/or November 30 for Spring term, students may have the deposit refunded by withdrawing from the College on or before June 30 or November 30. Those who pay this deposit after June 30 or November 30 are not eligible for any refund o f deposit. COURSE O V E R L O A D 1. Registration in more than five academic courses or more than the full requirements specified for a career program constitutes a course overload. 2. Students may choose to register for a course overload (up to a total of 21 credits) as long as they have discussed their need or wish for an overload with a counsellor or advisor and the Course Change form bears the counsellor's or advisor's signature. Science students, however, are automatically allowed to register for more than 16 credits, as long as the total credits do not exceed 21 credits and does not arise from registration in more than five courses. 3. Students may not register for a course overload until after the in-person registration period. General 32 Information — Registration COURSE CHALLENGE Registered students may request a course challenge whereby an examination for achievement may be awarded for a very specific and limited selection o f courses at the institution. Certain courses may not be challenged. Students interested i n this procedure should contact their instructor. The regular tuition fee must be paid for a challenged course. A course challenged successfully w i l l be recorded on the permanent student record. N o t e : Credit for courses challenged successfully will apply to certificates or diplomas at Capilano College. Students should be aware that other colleges and universities may not grant credit or transfer creditfor credit received by course challenge. Fees Fees listed i n this calendar are those in effect at the time o f publication and are subject to change subsequent to the printing o f this publication. Tuition fees are generally $42.50 per credit hour. A typical full-time student who enrols in 15 credits w i l l pay fees o f $711.25 per term or $ 1,422.50 for a twoterm academic year. The table below includes some examples o f tuition fees plus incidental fees for the students' union, student newspaper and application/enrolment fees. Some program or course tuition fees w i l l vary from those stated above. TUITION A N D RELATED FEES APPLICATION FEE - ADMISSION A N D RE-ADMISSION A $20 ($100 for international students) non-refundable application fee is payable by all applicants. TERM ENROLMENT FEE A $20 non-refundable term enrolment fee is payable by all students registering. INTERNATIONAL STUDENTS D O C U M E N T EVALUATION FEE International student tuition fees are $235 per credit hour. T y p i c a l l y , a full-time international student would pay approximately $7,200 in tuition and incidental fees annually for a two-term, 32-week program. FEE EXAMPLES This non-refundable fee is assessed for applicants whose academic records originate outside B . C . and are required for admission, transfer credit or advance standing. The fee is waived i f the documents originate from a secondary school located in Canada. Canadian & Landed Immigrant Students Application: admission/re-admission $20.00 Document Evaluation (tuition and related fees) $25.00 English Diagnostic Test $25.00 M a t h Placement Test $10.00 Registration (term enrolment) $20.00 Late Registration Penalty (past 10th day of term) $45.00 Late Payment Penalty ($/credit) $3.00 (minimum $25.00) Tuition ($/credit) $42.50 Graduation $20.00 International Students $100.00 no fee (included above) $25.00 $10.00 $20.00 $45.00 $3.00 (minimum $25.00) $235.00 $20.00 O t h e r Fees: Course Change Transaction (per form) Grade A p p e a l Student Card Replacement $10.00 $42.50 $5.00 $10.00 $10.00 $42.50 $5.00 $10.00 T 2 2 0 2 A Education Deduction F o r m Replacement Transcript Fee (each transcript) $5.00 Student U n i o n Fees ($/credit) $3.67 (max $36.70) Student Paper (Capilano Courier) 0.75 (max $10.00) Prior Learning Assessment ( P L A ) ($/credit) $42.50 Diploma/Certificate Replacement $20.00 $5.00 $3.67 (max $36.70) 0.75 (max $10.00) $235.00 $20.00 Refunds A l l fees are non-refundable unless specified as "partial refund" i n the Course Change Procedures section. Partial refund = course fee minus deposit. Deposits retained for the purpose o f refunds = $16.00/credit for Canadian and landed immigrant students and $90/credit for international students. General Information Fees 33 TUITION FEES REFUNDS The standard tuition fee for most programs is $42.50 Students who officially withdraw within the first 10 days o f the term w i l l receive a refund o f $26.50 per credit. Students withdrawing after the 10th day are not eligible for a refund o f tuition or tuition-related fees and are responsible for all fees incurred. per credit hour with no m a x i m u m . The following programs or courses have varying tuition fees: • Early C h i l d h o o d Education, Fisheries Science, Landscape Horticulture, Legal Secretarial, M e d i c a l Office Assistant, Personal Care Attendant, Resident Care Attendant, all Office Technology programs, and A d u l t Basic Education programs: $42.50 per credit hour to a m a x i m u m o f $637.50 per term. • Bachelor o f M u s i c Transfer, Bachelor o f M u s i c Therapy and Bachelor o f M u s i c in Jazz Studies: $42.50 per credit hour with a possible fee m a x i m u m of $ 1,225 per term. • Business Administration 300 and 400 level and all Evening courses: $75 per credit hour. • Private M u s i c Instruction: $43 per instructional hour • Senior Citizens: Persons 60 years and older, providing proper identification may enrol in most courses on a tuition-free basis. There are exceptions, and these include all Art Institute courses, Private M u s i c Instruction and courses where the standard tuition fee exceeds $42.50 per credit hour. • Students' U n i o n Fees: A compulsory fee o f $2.75 per credit hour, to a m a x i m u m of $41.25 per term, is payable by all North Vancouver campus students. This fee is optional for students at other campuses. • Capilano Courier Newspaper Fee: A compulsory fee of $.75 per credit hour to a m a x i m u m o f $10 per term is payable by all students. • Graduation Fee: A graduation fee o f $20 is payable by all students i n their final term o f enrolment and must be submitted with their application for program evaluation at registration or within the first 30 days of term. • Laboratory Fee: The College may assess additional laboratory or materials fees in specific courses or programs. Students w i l l be notified of these fees. • Late Payment Fee: A fee o f $25 or $3 per credit, whichever is greater, is charged to all students paying tuition fees later than the fee deadline dates established by the College. General 34 Information — Fees Graduation Convocation ceremonies are held in the Spring and Fall terms. D i p l o m a s and certificates are issued only at these two ceremonies. Students completing all coursework before the ceremonies w i l l have their permanent student records and transcripts annotated as Program Requisites complete. The date that the diploma or certificate is awarded w i l l then be placed on the permanent student record and transcript at the date of the appropriate graduation. average o f 3.75, with no grade lower than a C + i n the program requirements, w i l l be awarded Graduated with Distinction. Students who believe they w i l l complete their program of study by the end o f their current semester o f enrolment must submit a Request for Program Evaluation form to the Registrar's Office, together with the $20 program evaluation fee at registration (See Fee Schedule), or no later than the following deadline: Note: A previously-awarded Academic Studies Diploma may be exchanged for an Associate Degree in Arts or Science as appropriate, provided that the degree meets all the requirements for the Associate Degree. This includes the five-year requirement which is applied to the date of exchanging a diploma for an Associate Degree. F a l l Graduation i n November: September 15 Spring Graduation i n M a y : February 15 MINIMUM DURATION A N D NUMBER OF CREDITS REQUIRED FOR CERTIFICATES A N D DIPLOMAS Diploma: requires at least two academic years or four terms and completion o f 60 credits, O R at least one academic year, or two terms, and 60 credits, with 30 credits and the final 50% taken at Capilano College and following completion o f a prior credential and/or the granting o f one or more of: • Transfer Credit • Prior Learning Assessment (under review) • Challenge Credit • Equivalence to another Capilano College program Certificate: requires at least one academic term and completion o f 15 credits. Citation: requires six to 14 credits. Statement of Completion: offered for particular courses i n Labour Studies, and other contract courses to fulfil M i n i s t r y and business requests, and where documentation other than a transcript is required. With Distinction Designation: A student completing university transfer, career, vocational, adult basic education, or English as a second language program with a m i n i m u m program cumulative grade point DIPLOMAS Capilano College offers a variety o f diplomas upon completion o f two years o f study at the university transfer level. ASSOCIATE OF ARTS DEGREE To be eligible for the Associate o f Arts Degree, a student must have: 1. completed 60 credits of courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100level or higher at the University o f British C o l u m bia, S i m o n Fraser University, or the University o f Victoria; 2. completed at least 30 o f these 60 credits within five years preceding the awarding o f the Associate Degree; 3. completed at least 30 o f these 60 credits at Capilano College within five years preceding the awarding o f the degree, o f which at least 12 credits are in courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 200-level or higher; 4. completed at least six credits i n courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level in English; 5. completed at least 18 credits in Arts courses (other than English) that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level; at least six of these credits must be i n the Humanities, and at least six o f these credits must be i n the Social Sciences, and no more that six credits shall be i n any one subject area; 6. completed at least 18 credits in Arts courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 200-level or higher, these credits must be in at least two different subject areas; 7. completed at least nine credits in Science courses, including at least three credits in Mathematics or General Information — Graduation 35 Computing Science or Statistics (i.e. any statistics course that transfers to a university as a 100-level or higher Science course) and at least three credits in a Laboratory Science course (i.e. any course i n the Science's list worth three credits or more and with a lab of at least two hours, but excluding any course in A p p l i e d Science or Computing Science); 8. completed at least nine credits in courses that have assigned or unassigned transfer credit at the 100level or higher; credits may be for university transfer courses i n subjects listed on the following page or for university transfer courses in other subjects (e.g. Commerce, Physical Education, Business A d m i n i s tration, Communications, M e d i a Resources); 9. achieved a grade o f at least C - i n each course counting towards the 60-credit requirement, and a cumulative grade point average o f at least 2.0 over all o f the courses counting towards the requirement. Note: History courses will be considered ties courses for the purpose as of the Associate HumaniDegree. General Course Requirements for Associate of Arts Degree Courses/Programs Credits Conditions English 6 6 100 Level Arts Courses Humanities Social Sciences 100 Level 6 6 - excludes English - only six credits max. in one subject area Social Sciences or 6 18 Humanities 200 Level or Higher Arts Courses - credits must be i n at least two subject areas 18 Science Courses 100 Level or Higher Mathematics or C o m p . Science or 3 Statistics Laboratory Science* 3 3 Science Course - *requires m i n . two-hr. lab and excludes any course in A p p l i e d or Computing Science 9 Electives** 9 9 Total 60 100 Level or Higher * * M a y be Arts or Science courses or other subjects, e.g. Commerce, Business Administration, Physical Education with university transfer credits. General 36 Information — Graduation ASSOCIATE OF SCIENCE DEGREE T o be eligible for the Associate o f Science Degree, a student must have: 1. completed 60 credits o f courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100level or higher at the University o f British C o l u m bia, S i m o n Fraser University, or the University o f Victoria; 2. completed at least 30 of these 60 credits within five years preceding the awarding o f the Associate Degree; 3. completed at least 30 of these 60 credits at Capilano College within five years preceding the awarding o f the degree, of w h i c h at least 12 credits are i n courses w h i c h have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 200-level or higher; 4. completed at least six credits i n courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level i n English; 5. completed a least six credits from the following Capilano Calculus courses: Mathematics 108, 109, 110, 111, 116, 117, 126, 127, 230, or 231; 6. completed at least 18 credits i n Science courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level; no more than six credits shall be in one subject area; 7. completed at least 18 credits i n Science courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 200-level or higher; these credits must be i n at least two subject areas; 8. completed at least six credits i n Arts courses at the 100-level or higher, excluding English and excluding any course that has university transfer credit i n both Arts and Science (e.g. Mathematics); 9. completed at least six credits i n courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level or higher; these credits may be for university transfer courses i n subjects listed on the following page or for university transfer courses in other subjects (e.g. Commerce, Physical Education, Business Administration, Communications, M e d i a Resources); 10. achieved a grade o f at least C - i n each course counting towards the 60-credit requirements, and a cumulative grade point average o f a least 2.0 over all the courses counting towards the requirement. General Course Requirements for an Associate of Science Degree Courses/Programs Credits Conditions English 6 100 L e v e l Mathematics 6 - from Mathematics 108, 109, 115, 116, 230 or 231 Science Science 18 18 Arts Elective Electives** 100 L e v e l - only six credit max. in one subject area 200 L e v e l or Higher - must be in at least two subject areas 100 L e v e l or Higher - excluding E n g l i s h and courses that have transfer credit in both Arts and Science _6 100 L e v e l or Higher 60 * * M a y be Arts or Science courses or other subjects, e.g. Commerce, Business Administration, Physical Education with university transfer credits. Classification of Subjects for Associate Degrees O n l y those Capilano College courses with university transfer credit at the University of British C o l u m b i a , S i m o n Fraser University, or the University of V i c t o r i a , w i l l count towards the Associate Degree. For the purpose of the above requirements, Capilano College courses are categorized as follows: ARTS Music German History Philosophy Spanish Studio A r t Theatre Thai Japanese Linguistics W o m e n ' s Studies (100, 104, 106, 130) Social Sciences: Anthropology Criminology Geography (Human) (100, 101, 102, 106, 108, 200, 201,205) Political Studies Psychology Sociology W o m e n ' s Studies (100, 102, 110, 113, 120, 122, 140, 220) SCIENCES A p p l i e d Science Biology Chemistry Computing Science Geography (Physical) (112, 114, 214, 221) Geology H u m a n Kinetics and Kinesiology Mathematics & Statistics Physics Note: Some courses in the subjects listed above not carry transfer credit and/or ments at a particular B.C. Transfer Advising satisfy major may require- university. Please consult the Guide, university calendars, or the Centre. DIPLOMA IN A C A D E M I C STUDIES T o be eligible for a D i p l o m a in A c a d e m i c Studies, a student must have: 1. completed 60 credits, 50% of w h i c h must be c o m pleted at Capilano College; 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average of 2.00 or better; 3. Successfully completed at least 45 credits from the following subject areas (List A and B ) , including at least six credits from English (100-level or higher), at least six credits from subjects i n L i s t A ; and at least 15 credits selected from 200-level courses; 4. A l l courses must be university transferable courses. A Humanities: A r t History Chinese English French Economics A p p l i e d Science Biology Chemistry Computing Science Geography (Physical) Geology H u m a n Kinetics Kinesiology Mathematics Physics General B Anthropology A r t History Chinese Linguistics Music Philosophy Political Commerce Criminology Economics English French Geography (Human) Studies Psychology Sociology Spanish Studio A r t Thai German History Japanese Theatre Women's Studies Information — Graduation 37 DIPLOMA IN GENERAL STUDIES T o be eligible for a D i p l o m a i n General Studies, a student must have: 1. completed 60 credits at the 100 level or higher, 5 0 % of w h i c h must be completed at Capilano College; 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average o f 2.00 or higher. DIPLOMAS IN CAREER/VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS T o be eligible for a Career/Vocational program diploma, a student must have: 1. completed program requirements, 5 0 % of w h i c h must be completed at Capilano College; 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average o f 2.00 or higher. CERTIFICATES IN CAREER/VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS T o be eligible for a Career/Vocational certificate, a student must have: 1. completed program requirements, 50% o f w h i c h must be completed at Capilano College. 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average of 2.00 or higher. DIPLOMAS/CERTIFICATES IN ADULT BASIC EDUCATION/ESL T o be eligible for a diploma or certificate, a student must have: 1. completed program requirements, 5 0 % of w h i c h must be completed at Capilano College. 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average o f 2.00 or higher. General 38 Information — Graduation Academic Policies and Procedures ATTENDANCE EXAMINATION PERIOD Students are expected to attend all classes, seminars, labs in which they are officially registered, as evaluation o f progress i n any course is cumulative and based on class assignments, participation and examinations. ENROLMENT STATUS F u l l - t i m e status: A student registered i n a m i n i m u m of 12 credits is classified as a full-time student. Generally, for provincial and federal financial aid purposes, a student registered i n a m i n i m u m o f nine credits is classified as a full-time student. A u d i t : A n audit enrolment indicates the student has registered in and w i l l attend a course without writing examinations or submitting work, papers, lab reports, etc. F u l l fees are required for audit enrolment. Attendance at lectures, labs and seminars is required. H o w ever, for those students who do not meet the attendance requirement, their permanent student record and transcript w i l l be annotated with the comment A U D I T D E N I E D - A u d i t status in a particular course is not calculated in the G P A , does not have credit attached, may not be used toward completion o f a diploma, certificate, associate degree, or degree. Students are permitted to register for audit status i n a particular course only after the last day o f in-person registration, on a space available basis, with the instructor's signature. Students may change their registration i n a course from credit to audit or audit to credit on or before the last day o f the two week A d d / Drop Period with the instructor's approval and signature. S e c o n d Y e a r S t a n d i n g : Second year standing is based on the number o f credits completed within a program as noted below: i) U n i v e r s i t y T r a n s f e r : successful completion o f 24 credits i n that program; ii) C a r e e r p r o g r a m s : successful completion o f 50 percent of the total credits required for a two-year diploma in a specified program, or 30 credits. General The last two weeks of each instructional term is designated as an examination period. If a final examination is to be given, it w i l l take place during the examination period and w i l l be up to three hours i n duration. For some Career/V ocational programs, classes w i l l continue as regularly scheduled throughout the examination period. In addition, a special examination schedule may be set. Detailed information is available from instructors or program coordinators. The examination schedule w i l l be posted each term by the end o f the eighth week o f instruction. STUDENT RECORDS 1. A l l official permanent student records are kept i n the Registrar's Office, and are considered confidential. The information on file for a student is always available to that individual. Information w i l l not be given to any agency or person other than the student, unless the student has given their permission in writing, or for institutional research projects approved by the College. Release o f Information forms are available i n the Registrar's Office and from your local college campus. 2. Grade statements: • Grade statements are mailed from the Registrar's Office at the end o f each session; 3. Transcripts: • Official transcripts are issued by the Registrar's Office, only at the request o f the student, and are mailed directly to the institution or agency or to the student i n a sealed envelope. • Unofficial transcripts are issued by the Registrar's Office at the request o f the student. 4. The records o f First Nations students (including registration, transcripts and grades) held by the Registrar's Office may be released to the sponsoring band or the Capilano College First Nations A d v i s o r only i f a release has been signed by the student. A copy of this release must be on file in the Registrar's Office. Alternatively, a band may submit a copy o f a release signed by the student, together with their request for information. Requests must be received Information — Academic Policies and Procedures 39 in writing and shall be responded to by letter from the Registrar or the Registrar's designate. Requests w i l l not be received by telephone. Band officials are to direct their inquiries to designated College representatives, including the Registrar and/or project coordinator. USE OF PERSONAL IDENTIFICATION NOTIFICATION Student personal information contained on this form w i l l be used to verify your Personal Education Number ( P E N ) or to assign one to you. The main uses o f the P E N w i l l be for measuring participation in postsecondary education and for student registration purposes. A s well, the P E N w i l l be used for program research and evaluation but any personal information disclosed for these purposes w i l l be i n non-identifiable form. These uses have been reviewed and approved by the Information and Privacy Commissioner. Students are required to supply this information to complete their registration i n courses or programs at the institution. If you have any questions about the use o f P E N please contact the Freedom of Information coordinator: vcochran@capcollege.bc.ca PROTECTION OF PRIVACY AND ACCESS TO INFORMATION Capilano College gathers and maintains information used for the purposes o f admission, registration, alumni and other fundamental activities related to being a member o f the Capilano College community and attending a public post-secondary institution i n British C o l u m b i a . In signing an application for admission, graduation, or registration form, all applicants are advised that both the information they provide and any other information placed into the student record w i l l be protected and used i n compliance with the B . C . Freedom o f Information and Privacy Protection A c t (1992). General 40 Information — Academic Policies EQUIVALENCE, EXEMPTION, SUBSTITUTION, TRANSFER CREDIT A l l requests for equivalence, exemption, substitution or transfer credit must be submitted to the Office M a n ager, Registrar's Office, on the Transfer Credit Request form. A decision w i l l be made with the recommendation o f an appropriate program coordinator, i f applicable. The credit or action w i l l be noted and approved by the Registrar's Office. Students w i l l be notified in writing o f the final decision. Equivalence: A n equivalence indicates two courses within the institution deemed to be practically equal i n content and credits, although they may be offered i n two different program areas under different course numbers. Exemption: A n exemption indicates a student is not required to complete a particular course(s) i n a program because o f successful completion o f a combination o f post-secondary courses which, overall, constitute equal content. Substitution: A substitution indicates a Capilano course used in lieu o f another Capilano course to complete a program requirements. Credit must be equal. Transfer Credit: Transfer credit is credit given for work successfully completed at another institution. The transfer credits reduce the total number o f credits required to complete a certificate, diploma, or associate degree. A p p r o v e d transfer credit is noted on the Permanent Student Record as type one, two or three credit, as per the B . C . Transfer Guide. W h i l e grades are noted, they are not included i n the calculation o f the GPA. and Procedures Grade Point Average (GPA) GRADING SYSTEM Grade performance is expressed i n terms of a grade point average ( G P A ) . G P A s are reported on each permanent student record. T o find the term G P A , the grade point value for each grade is multiplied by the credit hours to produce a number o f grade points for each course. F o r example: an " A " received i n a threecredit course w o u l d become, for purposes o f the calculation: The College employs a letter grade system. Letter Grade Point Value Classification A+ 4.33 A 4.00 A- 3.67 B+ 332 B 3.00 B- 2.67 C+ 233 C 2.00 C- 1.67 D 1.00 M i n i m a l Pass F~~ 0.00 Fail Excellent A = 4.00 x 3cr = 12 grade points T o find the term G P A , the sum o f the grade points is then divided by the number o f credit hours taken i n one term only. Similarly, the cumulative G P A recorded is the sum of total grade points for all terms, divided by the number o f credits for all terms of enrolment. Good The m i n i m u m grade point average for graduation is 2.00. Satisfactory Audit A n audit indicates the student has registered i n and attended a course without writing examinations or submitting work, papers, lab reports, etc. A n A u d i t status is not calculated in the G P A , does not have credit attached, and may not be used toward completion o f a diploma, certificate, associate degree or degree. Non-Grade Designation CIP* - Course in Progress CR* - Credit Granted NC* - N o Credit Granted NGR* - N o Grade Reported I* - Incomplete W* - Withdrawn WE* - Withdrawal — Withdrawal — Extenuating Circumstances Withdrawal from a course after the end o f the withdrawal period given for circumstances usually related to a medical situation. CR or NC Grade Extenuating Circumstances AUD* - Audit ADN* - A u d i t Denied not calculated i n grade point average The grades " C R " or " N C " are assigned to courses i n w h i c h a level of mastery is required for successful completion but is not included i n the G P A calculation. F Grade A l l F a i l or " F " grades recorded on the student's transcript are assigned a value of zero in the calculation of a student's term and cumulative G P A . I Grade A n " I " grade or Incomplete may be assigned in exceptional circumstances when the student can achieve a passing grade by completing one or more units o f the course. It is the student's responsibility to determine from the instructor what must be done to complete the course. If an Incomplete is not cleared within four months, the grade w i l l be changed to the evaluation attained at the time the " I " was assigned. General Information — Academic Policies and Procedures 41 GRADE APPEALS REPEATED TERMS Students must take immediate action for a grade appeal. Students must contact a counsellor no later than two weeks after receipt of grades or Change o f Grade Notification. The counsellor w i l l discuss the grade and appeal procedure with the student and with the instructor, w i l l provide the student with a " F i n a l Grade A p p e a l " form, and w i l l submit a report to the Appeals Committee. If the student wishes to pursue the appeal, he/she must complete the " F i n a l Grade A p p e a l " form and submit it to the Appeals Committee, along with a fee o f $42.50 for each grade to be appealed, within 14 days after the counsellor's report has been received by the Appeals Committee Secretary. Failure to meet this timeline w i l l be grounds for dismissal o f the appeal. Appeals are considered by an Appeals Committee chaired by one o f the College deans. The Committee consists o f representatives from faculty, students, and a counsellor. During the appeal process all term grades, including the final examination mark, are taken into consideration. In all cases the students are informed in writing o f the Committee's decision. Should the mark be changed, the fee is refunded. O n l y those appeals that follow the above process w i l l be considered. REPEATED COURSES A course may be repeated for the purpose o f improving a grade, but no more than once. The grade for each attempt w i l l be recorded with the higher grade used in the computation of the cumulative G P A . N o course may be taken more than twice i f the student has received two failures, or made two withdrawals or any combination of failure and withdrawal. Subsequently, a student w i l l not be allowed to enrol i n a third attempt unless all o f the following have been satisfied: Students who enrol but withdraw from all courses i n two consecutive terms w i l l be ineligible to re-register for one term, F a l l or Spring. Students who receive grades o f " F " (fail), " W " (withdraw), or a combination of these grades i n all courses o f enrolment i n two consecutive terms shall be ineligible to re-register for one term, F a l l or Spring. If following a third term of enrolment, students who receive grades o f " F " , " W " , or a combination of these grades i n all courses o f enrolment, w i l l not be allowed to enrol for two terms, F a l l and Spring. Students who must withdraw from all courses i n two consecutive terms due to medical reasons may appeal to the Registrar for a permit to re-enrol. A C A D E M I C PERFORMANCE Students at Capilano College are expected to maintain acceptable standards of scholarship. Specifically, they are expected to maintain a m i n i m u m 1.80 C G P A (cumulative grade point average). A student who does not maintain this m i n i m u m C G P A w i l l be considered to be performing unsatisfactorily. The following procedures w i l l apply for evaluating the student performance i n accordance with policy governing continuance, withdrawal and readmission. 1. A c a d e m i c performance w i l l be evaluated on courses for which Capilano College grades have been assigned. (Assigned grade w i l l include grades A + through D , F , but w i l l exclude W , C R and A U D ) . 2. F o l l o w i n g admission, no formal assessment w i l l take place until the student has completed a m i n i mum o f nine credits o f assigned grades. 3. Students who were admitted to the College with an admission average below 1.80, and who have attempted nine credits at a previous post-secondary institution, w i l l be admitted on academic probation. a. a term G P A o f 2.5 or better is achieved; b. the signature o f either an advisor, or counsellor is entered on the registration form; c. the" signature o f the faculty coordinator responsible for that subject is entered on the registration form. The Repeated Courses Policy also applies to courses deemed to be equivalent, have a similar curriculum, and the same subject material; for example, B i o l o g y 106 and 107, and B i o l o g y 110. General 42 Information — Academic Policies and Procedures ACADEMIC PROBATION REQUIRED TO WITHDRAW Students who have received assigned grades for at least nine Capilano College credits with a G P A o f less than 1.80 based on the four-point scale, w i l l be placed on academic probation. Students w i l l be notified in writing o f their status and may be advised to book an appointment with an advisor or counsellor prior to reregistering. Students permitted to register w i l l be limited to enrolling i n nine credits or a m a x i m u m o f three courses. F o l l o w i n g completion o f the nine credits or three courses, the student records w i l l be reassessed. If, at the end o f the probation period: • the term G P A on assigned grades during the probation period and the cumulative G P A are 1.80 or higher, the student w i l l be returned to good academic standing; • the term G P A on assigned grades during the probation period is 1.80 or higher, but the cumulative G P A is less than 1.80, the student w i l l continue on academic probation; • the term G P A on assigned grades during the probation period is less than 1.80, the student w i l l be required to withdraw from the College for at least one term (fall or spring). General Students who have been Required to Withdraw ( R T W ) , may not apply for readmission for one full term. W e strongly advise students to contact an advisor or a counsellor before submitting an application for readmission. Students who have been required to withdraw must make application for readmission. Permission for readmission w i l l be granted by the Registrar i n consultation with the appropriate department and an advisor or counsellor, i f necessary. If admitted, the nine credit enrolment limit w i l l apply, as consistent with the probation policy. Required to Withdraw students granted readmission i n the original program of registration or a new program must achieve a grade point average of 2.00 or better on those credits attempted. Students w h o do not achieve this level w i l l be required to withdraw from the College for one full year and may only be readmitted by application to, and with the approval of the Admissions Appeal Committee. Note: Some Career-/V'ocationalprograms reserve the right to review performance after each term. This review could result in denied permission to register. Information — Academic Policies and Procedures 43 Student Services pertinent to those areas. In addition, all semester and examination timetables and official course articulation and graduation is coordinated by the Registrar's Office. EDUCATIONAL ADVICE THE ADVISING CENTRE Tel: 604-984-4900 Fax: 604-984-1798 Admissions Advising/ Educational P l a n n i n g / High School Liaison Anna Lee B O U L T O N , Supervisor, B . A . (Alberta) Jean B E R R Y , Academic Advisor and International Student Advisor, B.Sc. (Wisconsin) Rosemary M E E C H , Academic Advisor, B . S c , B.Ed. (British Columbia) Marni B U S H , Educational Planning Assistant The Advising Centre • • • • • • • provides prospective students with educational planning consistent with their career goals assists students and prospective students in making course selections consistent with their career goals organizes admission and course planning workshops on campus to help prospective students make an easy and successful transition into college provides on-going educational planning for students on campus assists students in planning their transfer to other institutions provides the general public with information on all college programs through the "Advising Hotline" telephone visits high schools in the lower mainland to provide information on all college programs and to assist students in their transition from high school to college. Appointments may be made at the Advising Centre in Birch Building, Room 238 or by calling the Advising Hotline at 984-4990. Drop-in advising is also available. REGISTRAR'S OFFICE Itidal S A D E K , Registrar, B.Arch, B.Sc. (Egypt) Barbara R O B E R T S O N , Associate Registrar, B.Ed.(UBC) Cheryl H E L M , Office Manager, B.A. (UBC) The Registrar's Office is responsible for admission, maintenance of all permanent student records, registration procedures for all prospective and continuing students, and administration of College policies General 44 Information — Student Services DISABILITY SERVICES Faculty Jolene B O R D E W I C K , B.Sc. (Ed) (Idaho), M.Ed. (UBC), P.D.P. (SFU), A . R . W . — Office of Educational Planning Lucas FOSS, B.A. (Carleton), M . A . Counselling Psychology, (Adler School of Professional Psychology), R . C . C . , A.R.W. — Office of Educational Support Support Staff Sandra C O O P E R , Secretary Services to students with disabilities are provided by the Office of Educational Planning for Students with Disabilities (located in the Advising Centre — Birch Building, Room 241) and the Office of Educational Support for Students with Disabilities (located in Counselling — Birch Building, Room 272). Students with learning disabilities may be referred to the Learning Specialist in the Counselling Department (984-1744). Contact with the Office of Educational Planning must be made at least four months before students plan to begin courses. Following an intake interview and provision of appropriate and current documentation, a variety of services can be provided for students: • • • • • transition and educational planning college orientation and access information registration assistance instructor notification for classroom accommodation exam invigilation • • • • • individualized support services taped texts interpreting services notetakers and scribes exit planning Faculty are available Monday through Thursday. Call 983-7526 for more information. FIRST NATIONS STUDENT SERVICES Faculty Peggy S H A N N O N , M . E d . ( U B C ) , First Nations Advisor Darell G A D D I E , M . B . A . (City U o f Washington State), L i a i s o n Officer The First Nations Student A d v i s o r provides direct services to First Nations students i n a variety o f ways: assistance with course selection and registration; information concerning College resources; advisor for special programs; liaison with First Nations B a n d education officers and college instructors; consultation regarding personal and educational matters. The advisor also acts as resource to the student-based First Nations Issues Committee. The L i a i s o n Officer is responsible for special programs and services to First Nations students and prospective students in regions served by the Sechelt and Squamish campuses. Internal calls 3067, external calls 986-1911. The A d v i s o r is located on the North Vancouver campus, B i r c h B u i l d i n g , third floor. Internal calls 1762, external calls 984-1762. G a i l O W E N , Circulation Services Diane P A R K E R , Technical Services E d n a S A K A T A , M e d i a Production Services K a r y n S C H M I D , Circulation Services Joanna S P U R L I N G , Circulation Services Judy S T E A R , Circulation Services Deborah S W I G A R T , Circulation Services Jocelyn V A N N E S , A u d i o V i s u a l Services Library Hours - North Vancouver Campus M o n d a y - Thursday Friday Saturday - Sunday Audio Visual Services M o n d a y - Thursday Friday LIBRARY Administration Connie F I T Z P A T R I C K , B . M u s . , B . L . S . ( U B C ) A c t i n g College Librarian Faculty Karin H A L L , B . A . M . L . S . ( U B C ) David L A M B E R T , B . A . ( U of A ) , M . L . S . ( U B C ) Annette L O R E K , B . A . , M . L . S . ( M c G i l l ) George M O D E N E S I , B . A . , M . L . S . ( U B C ) Sidney M Y E R S , B . A . ( U B C ) , M . L . S . (Western) Maureen W I T N E Y , B . A . (Trent), M . L . S . ( U o f T ) Staff Kathleen C O S G R O V E , A u d i o - V i s u a l Services H e i k e F A E R B E R , A u d i o - V i s u a l Services Sharon F E Y E R , A u d i o - V i s u a l Services G l e n G R E E N L Y , Technical Services Karen K L A V E R , Circulation Services Dianella K N I G H T , M e d i a Production Services James K W O K , Circulation Services A n n e M O Y E , Secretary C a r o l N O O N A N , Technical Services N o l a O ' B R I E N , Technical Services A n n e O L S E N , Technical Services 8:00 am - 10:30 p m 8:00 a m - 4 : 3 0 p m Media Production Services M o n d a y - Friday 9:30 am - 4:00 p m Library Hours - Squamish Campus M o n d a y - Thursday Friday 9:00 am - 7:00 p m 9:00 am - 4:00 p m Library Hours - Sechelt Campus M o n d a y - Thursday Friday LEARNING SUPPORT SERVICES 8:00 am - 10:30 p m 8:00 am - 4:30 p m 1:00 p m - 5 : 0 0 p m 9:00 am - 7:00 p m 9:00 am - 4:00 p m Collections Students have access to a book collection o f over 100,000 volumes, periodical and newspaper collections of 750 current titles, and collections o f videos, compact disks, C D - R O M and online databases, maps, government documents, annual reports and pamphlets. The I N N O P A C online catalogue provides access to library materials and a gateway to a variety o f online indexes and other library catalogues. F o r instructions on how to access the catalogue from outside the Library, see the "Library G u i d e for Students" available i n the Library. Reference computers provide access to the Library Homepage, the Internet, C D - R O M databases, and other on-line information resources. Research Assistance and Instruction Students receive a library orientation and basic research methods class during the first year o f E n g l i s h , Psychology, and Communications courses. Other courses often include a class in the use o f library materials specific to the subject area. Individual research assistance and Internet research classes are also offered. Guides to resources and services are available in print and electronically through the Library homepage. General Information — Student Services 45 Circulation Services LEARNING SPECIALIST Students are required to present current Capilano College I.D. to borrow library materials. I.D. cards must be renewed each term. F o r loan periods and other policies see the "Library G u i d e for Students" available in the library. Faculty Alison, P A R R Y , B . A . (York) The office o f the learning specialist offers the following services to students attending Capilano College who wish to improve their learning efficiency: Note: Fines are charged on all overdue library materials. Hourly and daily charges vary depending on whether the item is on reserve, recalled, or on regular loan. Please note the due date on each item borrowed and return materials on time. Failure to return materials and pay all fines at the end of each term will result in debt listing (transcripts are withheld and further registration is prohibited). 2. Credit courses, team taught with counsellors, that help students adopt attitudes and methods that promote student success. Audio-Visual Services 3. Individual assistance to students with specific academic concerns and difficulties. A variety o f audio-visual software and equipment is available for use i n the library or may be booked for classroom presentations. F i l m s , videos, records, cassette tapes, and C D ' s are listed in the library's catalogue. Projectors, video players, cassette recorders, C D players and record players are available for individual use at library study carrells or for small group use i n the library's preview room. Overhead acetates, video and audio tapes can be purchased. Computers are available for use in the Library C o m p u ter L a b . Media Production Services Assistance i n the design, preparation, and production of audio-visual materials is provided. Selected equipment is available for laserprinting, laminating, photography, video and audio production on a self-help basis. M e d i a Production Services is located i n the N e w M e d i a Centre. Sechelt and Squamish A small collection of reference and information materials is housed at each regional campus. Access to the entire college library collection is provided v i a the online catalogue. Library orientation and basic research methods classes are provided at the beginning of each term. Inter-campus loans and telephone reference services are also provided. Adaptive Technologies The Library has a workstation designed for use by visually impaired students. This includes a large screen monitor and text enlarger, a digital scanner, a voice synthesizer and a Braille printer. General 46 Information — Student Services 1. Scheduled study skills workshops on topics such as T i m e Management, Lecture Notetaking, Textbook Reading, E x a m Preparation/Exam W r i t i n g , and G i v i n g Oral Presentations. 4. Support to students with documented learning disabilities i n the form o f classroom and exam accommodations, individual learning strategies instruction, and peer tutoring. For more information about the study skills workshops, the Student Success course or to make an appointment to see the learning specialist at the North Vancouver campus, visit the Counselling Department (Birch 267) during regular office hours or call 984-1744. F o r information on the services offered by the learning specialists at the Sechelt and Squamish campuses, please contact the local College receptionist in Squamish at 986-3515 (toll free from North V a n c o u ver) or 892-5322 (local) and i n Sechelt, call 987-1535 (toll free) or 885-9310. WRITING CENTRE A l l students registered at the College may visit the W r i t i n g Centre (FR402) for advice on written assignments or help with writing problems. The Centre is not a proofreading service, but aims to help students develop their writing ability. The Centre also offers resources for writing: quiet space, a collection o f reference books, information sheets and exercises, and computers with w o r d processing and printing facilities. The W r i t i n g Centre is staffed by faculty members from the English, E S L and A B E Departments. Hours o f operation are posted. THE MATHEMATICS LEARNING CENTRE Students studying mathematics at Capilano College benefit from one o f the most comprehensive learning centres in the province. The Mathematics Learning Centre ( M L C ) is located in the B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 289. D u r i n g scheduled hours students may obtain individual assistance from the lab supervisor or instructor on duty. The M L C also contains an extensive collection o f learning materials including software, videos, and reference texts. INTERNATIONAL STUDENT CENTRE Gary H E N K E L M A N N , Manager, B . E d . ( U o f Alberta) Ursel B R O W N , Support Staff The Centre provides information concerning student authorizations (visas), Canada's immigration regulations and policies, medical insurance, orientation, homestay needs, and so on. The International Student Centre is located on the third floor o f the B i r c h B u i l d ing, R o o m 337, T e l : (604) 990-7863. O r contact Gary Henkelmann, T e l : (604) 983-7544 or Ursel B r o w n , T e l : (604) 990-7863. Jean Berry, the International Student A d v i s o r , assists international students both prior to and after their admission to the College and w i l l provide specific assistance to students with program questions, student visa requirements, homestay accommodation, social and special programs, educational counselling, and orientation. T e l : (604) 983-7539. The International Student Counsellor, Ethelyn M c l n n e s - R a n k i n , provides a variety of counselling services designed to promote and support students' academic success, identification and achievement o f appropriate career goals, and personal growth. Services include educational counselling, career counselling, and personal counselling. T e l : (604) 983-7535. INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGES The College has been active for a number o f years i n promoting exchanges with colleges, universities and other agencies outside Canada. Students from Capilano College and Japanese institutions have exchanged as have faculty from Rajamangala Institute o f T e c h n o l ogy, Thailand, and Open University o f H o C h i M i n h C i t y in V i e t n a m . Capilano College and A i c h i Gakusen C o l l e g e o f Toyota C i t y , Japan established a special relationship i n 1983 w h i c h provides for the annual exchange o f students between the two colleges. U p to three Capilano College female students study and work at A i c h i Gakusen from late September until mid-winter. E a c h student is provided with a scholarship of Y 7 5 0 , 0 0 0 (approx. $7,500 Cdn.), a VancouverT o k y o - N a g o y a round trip ticket and free tuition i n a special program o f studies specifically tailored to the individual student. The total value o f the scholarship is approximately C d n . $20,000 C d n . for each student. Formal agreements have been signed with other postsecondary educational institutions i n C h i n a , M a l a y s i a , Thailand, Japan and other countries o f the Pacific R i m w h i c h w i l l continue to enhance opportunities for exchange. A special exchange agreement with K u s h i r o P u b l i c University i n Japan provides for faculty exchange annually. A s a member o f a number o f international education training associations in Canada and the United States, the College is able to provide a variety o f opportunities for students and faculty to study, travel, or work overseas. Capilano College encourages all international students to participate i n the International C l u b to meet Canadian and other international students and to participate i n a variety o f activities, on and off campus. Contact Ethelyn M c l n n e s - R a n k i n for details. T e l : (604) 983-7535. The Peer Support Centre offers a number o f programs including a Conversation Corner w h i c h allows the students to improve their English, and an international buddies program w h i c h pairs an international student with one o f the student volunteers. T e l : (604) 984-1744. General Information — Student Services Deadline: End of the first month of classes (while funds available) STUDENT FINANCIAL SUPPORT EMPLOYMENT CENTRE FOR STUDENTS Location: Birch Building, Room 270 Dave SHARROCK, Advisor (604) 984-4965 or Lynne SOMERVILLE, Advisor (604) 986-1911 Ext. 2392 Fax (604) 990-7866 The Student Employment Centre provides ongoing "career" coaching for students and alumni. Assistance is provided in the areas of: • resume/cover letter/application writing • how to research companies • practical self-assessment before you start the "search" • how to focus • tips on interviewing • basic "money matters" guidance • assessment of job offers • ongoing support and encouragement through all phases of the work search process All incoming "employment opportunities" (full-time, part-time, seasonal, casual, pick-up) are posted on a central job board located in Birch 276 — the Career Resource Centre. These same positions are also posted on the Student Employment Centre Web site (password and ID available at the Centre). The Centre is a drop-in service, with individual student appointments easily available. Students are encouraged to visit the Centre early in the semester, to establish an on-going connection of support for employment concerns throughout the duration of their studies. FINANCIAL AID A N D A W A R D S Direct Telephone: Fax: • Training Assistance Benefits (TAB)* Applications are processed on first-come, firstserved basis • Internal scholarship and awards Deadlines: Fall Term Spring Term Summer Term October 1 January 31 June 30 (subject to availability of funds) • Other government programs as they become available. Services Provided by the Financial A i d Office • Information and applications for British Columbia Student Assistance Programs British Columbia Student Assistance Program (BCSAP)* - Processing takes approximately six weeks - Deadline for applications is eight weeks prior to the end of study period Loan Remission Canada Study Grants for Students with Disabilities (SWD-CSG)* Work-Study Program Other government programs as they become available • Applications for the student assistance programs of other provinces Doug CAMERON, Financial Aid Officer Iris CUNNINGHAM, Financial Aid Assistant Valerie KENDRICK, Financial Aid Clerk Financial Aid Office General Office Hours: • Canada Study Grants for High-Need Part-Time Students (HNPT-CSG)* Deadline: End of the first month of classes in each term (while funds available) • Assistance in preparing reassessments or reviews for BC Student Assistance Programs Room 284 Birch Building 10:30 am to 4 pm Monday through Friday (604)984-4966 (604)983-7563 • Emergency Aid (limited). Includes: fee deferrals, advances of loans, emergency bursaries, and emergency loans • Emergency individual financial counselling Programs Administered by the Financial Aid Office • Workshops and information sessions: Financing your education Budgeting • Adult Basic Education Student Assistance Program (ABESAP)* • Application forms for external assistance and awards General 48 Information — Student Services *Note: Government loan/grant programs are intended to assist students who do not have the resources available to pay for their education. Student and, in some cases, family resources may be required to form the basis for funding. The amount of money a student will receive will not necessarily cover the entire costs associated with post-secondary education. It is expected that students create a financial plan and that they budget loan funds for each educational year. Students are expected to have arranged finances prior to registration. Publications • • • "Financial A i d and A w a r d s — A Student G u i d e " Government and internal pamphlets and brochures related to student financial aid External pamphlets and brochures related to student financial aid Scholastic A w a r d s Deans' List Full-time students completing a term and meeting the Deans' L i s t criteria w i l l receive a congratulatory letter from the College recognizing their achievement. To be eligible for the Deans' List, the student must have a 3.67 or higher grade point average, have no Incompletes, no Credit Granted or F a i l grades and completed a m i n i m u m o f 12 credits for that term. Merit List Part-time students with a cumulative grade point average o f 3.67 or higher upon the completion of 30 or 60 credits w i l l receive a congratulatory letter from the College recognizing their achievement. The Governor-General's Collegiate Bronze Medal This award is presented to a diploma graduate from a two-year program who has achieved the highest cumulative grade point average, and who has attained this grade point average on a m i n i m u m o f 15 credit hours per term, or full program load as outlined i n the Calendar, during attendance at Capilano College. The Lieutenant Governor's Silver Medal A w a r d e d for academic excellence and contribution to the College and community to a graduate i n a Career/ Vocational program o f less than two years' duration. Scholarships, Bursaries, and A w a r d s Various awards w h i c h recognize achievement, and/or financial need are available through general and individual application forms. A detailed listing of these awards is contained in the free booklet: "Financial A i d and A w a r d s — A Student G u i d e " . ALTERNATIVE LEARNING FORMATS DISTANCE EDUCATION Capilano College offers a variety o f courses by distance education. Some courses are offered on line. T o obtain a list o f courses currently offered, students can find the information at http://merlin.capcollege.bc.ca/ courselistings. html. Other distance education courses are offered v i a video conferencing with our regional campuses. Such courses are part o f our regular course offerings. Fish Culture Technician Program The F i s h Culture Technician program is available i n distance learning format only. Students may register i n one or more courses. U p o n completion the student is awarded the Fish Culture Technician Certificate. The distance learning program has been designed for individuals who are currently working or seeking employment i n the fish culture field and wish to upgrade their academic credentials. Individualized programs may be available. Legal Assistant Certificate On-Line Program The part-time Legal Assistant Certificate program is available in distance learning format for students l i v i n g outside the L o w e r M a i n l a n d . Students must be employed as a legal secretary while completing the program and have at least two years of such experience before starting the program. The content o f this program is identical to the content of the part-time Legal Assistant Certificate program. F o r more information, or to receive a brochure, call the Legal Assistant Department at 983-7594 local 2361, or visit the W e b site at: www.capcollege.bc.ca/programs/ legal_assistant/ or send e-mail to: de-lgas@capcollege.bc.ca. General Information — Student Services 49 CO-OPERATIVE EDUCATION Co-operative education integrates a period of classroom learning with periods of w o r k experience to enable students to apply their knowledge and skills. Students alternate periods o f full-time study with periods o f paid employment i n business, industry, government and non-profit organizations. The goal is to develop high calibre graduates, better able to assume productive jobs. Employers may use co-op students to assist in building a w o r k force that meets the short-term needs o f their organization. Students can undertake special projects and provide relief for permanent staff who may be undertaking other tasks. In the longer term, employers have a cost effective means o f evaluating potential future employees. The co-op experience provides students with a superior, well-rounded education enriched by the practical application o f their skills. They obtain valuable "handson" experience and are able to evaluate their career choices. The College receives immediate feedback on the quality and relevance o f the program areas and on the quality o f the students. C o - o p education also helps the College develop contacts with the business community in general. The following are co-operative education programs at Capilano College: A s i a Pacific Management Business Administration Accounting Computing General Management Marketing Retail Marketing Tourism Management Details on these programs are available in the appropriate program area of this Calendar. PERSONAL SUPPORT SERVICES COUNSELLING Faculty Daniel F R A N K E L , B . A . (Concordia), M . E d . ( M c G i l l ) D a v i d J O N E S , B . A . , M . A . (Dalhousie), P h . D . ( S F U ) Y v o n n e M c C O L L , B . A . (Simmons), M . E d . (Harvard) Ethelyn M c I N N E S - R A N K I N , B . A . (University o f Winnipeg), M . A . ( U B C ) Susan M I T C H E L L , B . S . E d . ( N . Illinois), M . A . ( U V i c ) Sukhi S O H I , M . A . ( U B C ) Suzanne W A L L S T E R , M . E d . (Montana) Support Staff L y n n e H A M I L T O N , D i v i s i o n a l Assistant Betty G E R E L A General Information The counsellors at Capilano College are professionals trained to provide a variety o f counselling services designed to promote and support students' academic success, identification and achievement of appropriate career goals, and personal growth. A t present, the Counselling Department offers the following services to Capilano College students: Educational Counselling is available to help students plan their college education according to their interests, aptitudes and career goals. Students are advised to consult with a counsellor when experiencing academic difficulties. Students m u s t see a counsellor before registering for an overload or when considering filing a formal grade appeal. Career Counselling offers help to students who are having trouble deciding on a career, who perhaps feel unsure, confused, or lacking motivation. Counselling and testing can help students make realistic career plans based on their interests, abilities and values. Personal Counselling is available to help students who are experiencing personal difficulties which affect their ability to succeed i n college. Counsellors can help students to clarify issues, overcome obstacles and find effective ways of dealing with their problems. Counsellors can also refer students to community agencies for further assistance. Workshops and Outreach Programs designed to help students succeed are offered throughout the term in such areas as career exploration, goal-setting, test anxiety, procrastination, stress management, c o m m u n i cation and assertion training. General 50 Information — Student Services Credit Courses that are a full term in length are cotaught by the counsellors on strategies for student success. The Counselling Department is located in R o o m 267 o f the B i r c h B u i l d i n g . Appointments to see a counsellor may be made through the receptionist, or by calling 984 -1744. Appointment times are available M o n d a y through Friday, from 9 a.m. to 4 p.m. D r o p - i n counselling is also available to accommodate students in crisis or emergency situations, or for short consultations. The advisor also offers presentations and workshops on campus on many topics, including harassment, conflict resolution, anger management, dating violence, crossgender communication, and assertiveness training. The advisor and her resource library are available to all student researchers with questions about harassment, conflict resolution and related topics. The advisor is located in the B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 329. Appointments may be arranged by calling 990-7863. A l l counselling is confidential. Those l i v i n g in the Pemberton - H o w e Sound region requiring the assistance o f a counsellor should contact the Squamish campus. Appointments may be arranged by calling 892-5322. Sunshine Coast region residents should call the Sechelt campus, 885-9310. Peer Support Centre Members of the Counselling Department are responsible for the training and supervision o f Peer Support Centre volunteers. These volunteers are students who can assist other students by providing information and through supportive listening. In addition, the Centre is engaged i n a number o f outreach activities designed to support student success and to foster a sense o f c o m - _ munity at Capilano College. The Centre is supported by the Capilano Students' U n i o n . CHILD CARE Capilano College offers child care for infants, toddlers and 3 - 5 year olds. Some part-time spaces are available. Priority is given to Capilano College students. Applications for child care are available at the C h i l d Care Centre or by calling 984-4950. CONFLICT RESOLUTION ADVISOR Janet K E E , B . A . , L L . B . ( U of T ) The primary work o f the Conflict Resolution A d v i s o r is to assist campus members to informally resolve disputes, including sexual harassment and other harrassment issues. This work can include discussing effective responses, facilitating communication between the concerned individuals, and helping complainants initiate a formal complaint under the College Sexual Harassment P o l i c y (see Policies and Procedures in this Calendar). HEALTH SERVICES A N D SPORTS MEDICINE CLINIC Dr. B i l l M A C K I E , B . S c , M . D . ( U B C ) , C C F P , Dip. Sport M e d . , Director o f M e d i c a l Services D r . Susan M A C K I E , M . D . C C F P D r . F . V . D E N H O E D , M . D . F . R . C . S . ( C ) Plastic Surgeon D r . Debbie C O L L I N S , B S R , M . D . , C C F P , D i p . Sport Med. Dr. M o n a L E E , M . D . , C C F P Heather M C C U L L O U G H , B . A . (Psychology, K i n e s i ology) Certified Fitness Consultant Located in the B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 2 4 9 A . General medical services are available to students at no charge on Tuesdays and Thursdays during the Spring and F a l l terms. Appointments may be made through the receptionist. Internal calls 4964, external calls 9844964. Physiotherapy Paige L A R S O N , B . S c . (PT), B P E , M C P A , Sports Physiotherapist Denise M O R B E Y , B . S c . (PT), M C P A Anne S T E V E N S O N , B . S c . (PT), M C P A Susannah M U N N S , B . S c . ( H o n s P T ) , M C P A Located in B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 2 4 9 A . Physiotherapy appointments may be made through the receptionist. Hours are: M o n d a y - Friday 7 a.m. to 7 p.m. Internal calls 7851, external calls 984-4964 or 990-7851. General Information — Student Services 51 First A i d First A i d is administered through the Facilities Department. Internal calls 1772, external calls 984-1772. First A i d Services are available on campus at the following times: During Spring and Fall Terms M o n d a y - Thursday: 8:30 a.m. - 2:00 a.m. Friday - Sunday: continuous coverage from 8:30 a.m. on Friday M a y to August: M o n d a y - Friday 8:30 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Evenings and weekends as required SECURITY Capilano College is concerned with the safety and security o f students, faculty, staff and visitors on campus. Security at the North Vancouver campus is provided by uniformed officers. These officers are available to escort any member of the College community. A d vance notice is appreciated, but not required. Campus security may be reached at 984-1763. A security awareness orientation is provided to every class at the beginning o f each term. Faculty, particularly those teaching evening classes, promote and actively encourage the buddy system. Students are advised to walk with a friend or, i f possible, travel i n groups to parked cars or to other locations, or get a ride to their vehicle i f they are parked some distance away from others. CAREER PLANNING INFORMATION CAREER RESOURCE CENTRE The College assists students considering career options by providing information and reference materials on a wide variety of occupations. The Career Resource Centre is located i n the B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 267. It houses a collection of self-help books, vocational literature and information on labour market trends. The Centre also contains calendars from Canadian and foreign universities and colleges, and free informational brochures on campus and community resources. Copies of past and current course outlines for Capilano College are available for reference i n choosing courses and instructors. In addition, there is a computer located in the Career Resource Centre to allow students to find career and occupational information on the Internet. For assistance, contact the receptionist. The Career Resource Centre is open from 8:30 - 5 p.m., M o n d a y through Thursday, and from 8:30 - 4:30 p.m. on Fridays. CAMPUS ACTIVITIES ATHLETICS A N D RECREATION Administration Joseph I A C O B E L L I S , B . P . E . , M . P . E . ( U B C ) , Manager Faculty M i l t o n W I L L I A M S , B . P . E . ( U B C ) , Programmer Support Staff John B R A I T H W A I T E , Weekend Attendant Dianne C O T T R E L L , Program Assistant M i c h a e l F R A N K O W S K I , B . P . E . ( U of C ) , Senior Attendant Geoff K E R S H A W , Attendant T o m S M I T H , E v e n i n g Attendant Athletics Capilano is a full member o f the British C o l u m b i a Colleges' Athletic Association, which is the governing body for all intercollegiate athletics in the province. Provincial championships are determined annually, with winners advancing to national finals. This affords our C o l l e g e ' s highly skilled student athletes an opportunity to meet with and compete against the best college athletes i n Canada. General 52 Information — Student Services Intercollegiately, Capilano Blues teams compete in soccer, basketball, volleyball, and badminton both for men and women. E a c h year, our many exceptional athletes, working with the experienced Blues coaching staff and managers, have combined to produce both provincial and national championship teams. F o r example, Capilano w o n both the men's and women's 96/97 National Soccer titles, and the women repeated this feat by winning another gold medal i n 1998. Capilano College is proud of the accomplishments of its student athletes and of its growing reputation for athletic excellence. Campus Recreation The department offers an expanding intramural program, utilizing the C o l l e g e ' s Sportsplex facility and the Weight Training Centre, together with recreation and fitness programs, w h i c h are available during Fall and Spring terms. Some examples of the scheduled activities are: co-ed volleyball, basketball, indoor soccer, badminton, aerobics, Tae K w o n D o , rowing, weight training and many more. The Sportsplex is located i n the south east corner of the south campus parking lot across from B i r c h B u i l d i n g . For detailed gym schedule and game times call 9841737. F o r intramurals, recreational programming call M i l t W i l l i a m s at 983-7532. F o r athletes seeking information about their sport status, call the Athletic Director, Joe Iacobellis at 983-7553. F o r general information please call Dianne Cottrell at 984-4977. The fax number is 984-1736. Sportsplex and Fitness Centre The Sportsplex is one o f the finest multipurpose facilities in the province. It houses the intramural programs, athletics, gymnasium-based programs, extension courses i n sports and recreation as well as general activity drop-in programs for those requiring flexibility. E a c h of these programs offer a variety of activities w h i c h w i l l satisfy the recreational needs o f the student body. Facilities include a 14,500 sq. ft. gymnasium with seating capacity for 1,700, suitable for basketball, volleyball, badminton, indoor soccer, wrestling, martial arts and many other activities; a 2,400 sq. ft. aerobics gym; weight and fitness centre; dressing rooms and sauna. A wide range o f services including towel service, locker rentals, first aid, laundry service and equipment loans are available. Current hours o f operation during the term (September to A p r i l ) are: M o n d a y to Thursday: 8:30 a.m. to 11 p.m. Friday: 8:30 a.m. to 7:30 p.m. Saturday/Sunday: Please call 984-1737 for schedule STUDENT UNION The Capilano Students' U n i o n is an organization comprised o f all registered full- and part-time students at the College. Membership i n the U n i o n commences at registration, upon payment o f the U n i o n membership fee*, and ceases at the end of the last semester of study. In 1981, a referendum was held at Capilano College i n which students voted by a 90.4% majority i n favour o f joining the Canadian Federation o f Students, a national alliance o f college and university students' unions. Provincial and national Federation fees* are calculated per credit per semester. O n campus, the Students' U n i o n works to protect the rights and advocate for the interests o f its members. The U n i o n appoints student representatives on College committees, providing student perspectives in the College decision-making process. The U n i o n also organizes on-campus social and cultural activities, and provides a variety o f services to its members. Provincially and nationally, the U n i o n works through the Federation to positively affect government and postsecondary education policies in such areas as tuition fees and student financial assistance. The activities of the Students' U n i o n are coordinated on a day-to-day basis by an elected Executive C o m m i t tee. Elections of all vacant and expiring positions on the U n i o n ' s Executive Committee are held during the first five weeks o f each College semester. One member of the Executive Committee sits on the provincial Executive o f the Canadian Federation o f Students. For more information about the U n i o n , or a copy of the U n i o n ' s Constitution and B y l a w s , please stop by the U n i o n office, R o o m 116 in the M a p l e B u i l d i n g . * Fees are currently under review and subject to change. Consult the Students' U n i o n for current information about fees. General Information — Student Services 53 CAMPUS PUBLICATIONS GENERAL CAMPUS SERVICES THE CAPILANO REVIEW The Capilano Review is a tri-annual magazine o f the arts, publishing poetry, fiction, fine art and drama from all over Canada and the world. Since its beginnings i n 1972 i n the Capilano College Humanities D i v i s i o n , the magazine has been recognized seven times for excellence by the National Magazine awards, three times by the Western M a g a z i n e awards, once by the Journey Prize Awards, and been cited by the Canadian Studies Association. Its distribution spans nine countries. The Capilano Review is published by the Capilano Press Society; it receives support funding from the Canada C o u n c i l , the B . C . Arts C o u n c i l , Capilano College, and the B . C . G a m i n g C o m m i s s i o n . Subscriptions are $25 for one year (three issues) or $45 for two years. The student rate for one year is $15. The Capilano Press Society welcomes donations to its Friends and Benefactors Program and its endowment fund, both of which are tax deductible through The Capilano College Foundation. Write to: The Capilano Review c/o Capilano College. Telephone: (604) 9841712. Fax: (604) 990-7837. W e b site: www.capcollege.bc.ca/departments/TCR/tcr.html STUDENT NEWSPAPER The student newspaper at Capilano College is the Capilano Courier, published every other week. The Courier is run by an independent staff o f student volunteers, autonomous from the student society and College administration. Since the Courier is written, organized, and laid out on campus, there is always a need for help. Students are encouraged to take part i n news and feature writing, reporting, editing, layout, photography, artwork, desktop publishing, graphic design, and advertising. The newspaper is not a "class project" and therefore offers the chance for all students to participate in the democratically-run collective staff. The Courier welcomes input from the entire College community. Classified ads (which are free to students, staff, and faculty), letters to the collective, and other contributions can be submitted to their offices. BOOKSTORE Located i n the southwest corner of the B i r c h B u i l d i n g , the Bookstore offers required and recommended texts, stationery, clothing and sundry items. The first six weeks o f classes, the Bookstore is usually open 8:30 a.m. to 8:30 p.m., M o n d a y through Thursday; and 8:30 a.m. to 4 p.m. on Fridays. After six weeks, closing time changes to 6:30 p.m. but remains 4 p.m. on Fridays. Summer session hours are 8:30 a.m. to 4 p.m., M o n d a y through Friday. The Bookstore accepts cash, V i s a , MasterCard, Interac and cheques with proper I D . For information regarding used books, please contact the Capilano Students' U n i o n . STUDENT STORE — CAP CORNER The student store, located in the Library building, is operated by the Retail Marketing students. The store serves as a teaching aid allowing students to put into practical use the skills they learn while i n the classroom. The store sells Capilano College sweatwear, school supplies, c o m m o n pharmaceutical items, gifts, candy, snacks and cold drinks. Special sweatwear orders for clubs, organizations, and various athletic teams can be arranged. Hours of operation are M o n d a y to Thursday from 10:15 a.m. to 4:15 p.m. Sept. 9 - Dec. 2 and Jan. 18 thru A p r i l 15. Occasionally the store is closed due to fieldtrips or exams. PARKING Pay parking is in effect 24 hours a day, seven days a week, all year. Pay parking applies to all parking spaces at the North Vancouver campus, including all those on College roadways, and is strictly enforced. Please Note: Parking on Purcell W a y is reserved for the residents o f Purcell W a y . General 54 Information — Student Services Northwest Boarding Kennels pay parking L o t is a private entity. Tickets purchased from their lot are not valid for parking on College property and vice versa. The following areas are not owned by the College and vehicles may park for free: East side o f Monashee, just north o f Northwest K e n nels is on District land and not under the C o l l e g e ' s pay parking program. Gravel road north o f Parking L o t 4 (east to west between Monashee and upper Lillooet Road). S m a l l area between L i l l o o e t R o a d Entrance 2 and Parking L o t 3. Some areas o f Lillooet R o a d allow parking. Observe signage i n areas near driveways. The administration and operation o f pay parking including permit sales, equipment, and administration of warning notices, fines, and towing is handled by Imperial Parking. (Telephone: 681-7311) Fees for Pay Parking • $2/day: D a i l y tickets are purchased from meters located throughout the campus (2 x $1 coins or 1 x $2 coin) • $30/month (first day - last day) • $100/term (four calendar months) • $ 180/twelve months (September - August) M o n t h l y , term and yearly permits are purchased from Imperial Parking L i m i t e d located i n the Arbutus Car Pooling = Free Parking Persons wanting to take advantage o f car pooling may obtain application forms from the Purchasing Department located in Arbutus B u i l d i n g , R o o m 018 (basement level). Registered groups of three or more individuals a r r i v i n g a n d u n l o a d i n g at the same time, i n one vehicle, i n the designated parking area, w i l l be provided with free parking. A computer car pool ride matching system is located i n the hallway o f the Arbutus B u i l d i n g , basement level, outside o f R o o m 018 — look for the E A S Y R I D E R sign. The computer scans the bar code on the back o f your student ID/library card and w i l l print a list o f persons i n your area who want to form a car pool. The system is free and easy to use! LOST A N D FOUND Students may inquire about lost or found items i n the Capilano Students' U n i o n office, located i n the M a p l e B u i l d i n g . There is also a Library lost and found i n the Library at the Circulation counter. FOOD A N D BEVERAGE SERVICE The F o o d Court (located main floor, B i r c h Building) Hours o f Operation: M o n d a y to Thursday: Friday: 8 a.m. - 8:30 p.m. 8 a.m. - 3:00 p.m. The Specialty Coffee B a r (located i n the F o o d Court) B u i l d i n g , R o o m 030 (basement level). Hours o f Operation: Pay parking permits are sold during the folowing times: M o n d a y to Thursday: Friday: E a c h month during the first and last five business days: M o n d a y through Friday 10:15 - 10:45 a.m., 12:15 12:45 p.m., and 2:15 - 2:45 p . m . A Food K i o s k (located foyer, second floor o f F i r Building) O n all other days during the month: M o n d a y through Friday 12:15 - 12:45 p.m. Additional extended hours w i l l be available and advertised during rush periods at the beginning o f F a l l and Spring terms. 7:30 a.m. - 2:30 p.m. 7:30 a.m. - 2:30 p.m. Hours o f Operation: M o n d a y - Friday 8 a.m. - 2 p.m. when classes are i n session. V e n d i n g services are available throughout the campus. Catering services for meetings or other on-site occasions are also available. Contact the Director of F o o d Services at 984-4970. General Information — Student Services College Policies 11. retain intellectual property concerning your assignments, essay, theses, and other written work. STUDENT RIGHTS A N D RESPONSIBILITIES Student Responsibilities Capilano College recognizes a set of student rights and holds students responsible for their understanding and conduct in view of College policies, rules and regulations. Student Rights Y o u are entitled to have your rights respected by fellow students, faculty, staff, administrators and other persons associated with the College. In addition to your rights guaranteed under the Canadian Charter of Rights, you have the right to: 1. a healthy and safe learning environment free from harassment and discrimination. 2. the confidentiality of information regarding all student records and grades unless you consent in writing to its disclosure. Y o u also have a right to ethical behaviour from College personnel who have access to your student records. 3. seek redress through appropriate College committees for any potential infringement o f your rights, according to the procedures in effect at the College. 4. access to documents contained in your student records, and to add pertinent comments or documents as appropriate. 5. be informed i n advance o f the basic content and general procedures o f a course and to be sure that the course w i l l not change substantially after registration. Y o u also have the right to receive at the beginning of a course a written outline and to receive written notification of changes i n the course outline. The course outline normally w i l l include course objectives, teaching methods, evaluation system, and due dates and late penalties for major assignments. 6. reasonable access to information on program and graduation requirements, academic regulations, and university admission. 7. be notified of class cancellations as soon as possible and to expect that classes w i l l start and end on time. 8. be informed o f your performance on occasions spaced throughout the semester. 9. have your instructor keep designated office hours. 10. review any of your examinations and major course assignments up to the beginning of the following semester. General Information — College Policies It is your responsibility to acquaint yourself with course outlines, content, evaluations and methodology. Y o u are also responsible for conducting yourself in a reasonable manner and i n accordance with College policies as set out in the Calendar. Y o u are responsible for: 1. inquiring into the availability o f your instructors (time and place). 2. communicating with instructors and/or counsellors in order to solve any o f the problems that you may encounter. 3. attending classes and being punctual. 4. submitting your assignments i n the required format to your instructors within the deadline; or, i f y o u cannot do so, for making other arrangements with the agreement o f the concerned instructor. 5. being familiar with the information contained in the course outlines and for seeking from your instructors clarification o f any areas o f concern. 6. undertaking to complete course requirements as described i n the course outline and to observe deadlines and schedules contained therein. 7. discussing any dissatisfactions with the instructor concerned before attempting further redress through appropriate College channels. 8. respecting the rights o f students, faculty, staff, administrators and other persons associated with the College. 9. respecting other people's health and their right to security and dignity. 10. adhering to College policies regarding improper student conduct including: a) cheating and plagiarism; b) improper behaviour; c) sexual harassment. ACCESS FOR STUDENTS WITH DISABILITIES College R e s p o n s i b i l i t y : Capilano College supports successful learning for all students and seeks to establish a supportive and inclusive educational environment. The College is committed to providing appropriate support services and accommodations for qualified students with disabilities. S t u d e n t R e s p o n s i b i l i t y : The approach used at Capilano College is one o f self-advocacy in which students are encouraged and supported to be responsible for meeting their o w n needs. A p p l i c a t i o n : Educational planning, classroom accommodations and service arrangements are to be made in the Office o f Disability Services from four to six months before classes begin. Students with disabilities requesting services from the Office of Disability Services are required to provide current documentation of the disability for w h i c h they are requesting accommodation. The documentation should include a recent diagnosis o f the condition as determined by qualified professionals w h i c h outlines the impact o f the disability on learning and which includes some recommendations for classroom accommodation. A d m i s s i o n : Students with disabilities must meet and maintain the same eligiblity criteria as all other students in courses and programs in order to continue to receive the services offered by the Office o f Disability Services. Services: Through the Office of Disability Services, the College arranges educational planning, registration support, classroom accommodation and a wide variety of on-campus services which contribute to the successful learning o f students with disabilities. STUDENT CONDUCT POLICY T o enhance their opportunities for educational success, the College expects all students to conduct themselves so as to help, not hinder, their fellow students, staff, and instructors in achieving their c o m m o n goals. 1. A i m s o f t h i s P o l i c y The College regards certain forms o f conduct as improper and unacceptable and w i l l deal with such behaviour following processes w h i c h regard both the rights and safety o f the College community. The purposes o f this policy are: 1.1 T o facilitate: • Creation o f an environment conducive to learning and teaching • Development o f a community based on c i v i l i t y and mutual respect • Respect for diversity and free intellectual inquiry • Respect for property • Maintenance of individual safety. 1.2 T o ensure that violations o f this P o l i c y are dealt with in an equitable, unbiased and timely manner. This policy does not cover behaviour which is subject of a complaint under the Sexual Harassment P o l i c y or the A c a d e m i c Policies o f the College. 2. A p p r o p r i a t e C o n d u c t The College recognizes that most students make considerable sacrifices to be able to attend classes. T o enhance their opportunities for success, the College expects everyone to conduct themselves so as to help, not hinder, their fellow students, staff, and instructors in achieving their common goals. One of the most important o f those goals is to develop the skill o f critical thinking through the free expression and exploration of a wide range o f ideas. This may involve challenges to students' and faculty's strongly held beliefs and values. A s long as such challenges are clearly directed at ideas, and are not merely personal attacks on those who hold them, the College accepts and encourages them as part of the learning process. Nothing in this policy shall be construed as to prohibit peaceful assemblies and demonstrations or reasonable expressions o f free speech. General Information — College Policies 57 3. I m p r o p e r B e h a v i o u r • Actions which are arguably violations o f the Improper behaviour is defined as either disruptive behaviour or as threatening and dangerous behaviour. • A i d i n g , inciting, abetting or acting as an C r i m i n a l Code o f Canada; accomplice i n the commission of any of the 4. foregoing acts. Disruptive Behaviour Some kinds o f expression and behaviour do not further the learning process; they may become disruptive to all concerned and may hinder the C o l l e g e ' s basic purpose: to foster both learning and a constructive, positive attitude toward learning. Therefore, the College w i l l not accept disruptive behaviour in any College-sponsored activities whether conducted on or off campus. 6. P r o c e d u r e s — S t u d e n t I m p r o p e r Behaviour College employees are governed by the H u m a n Resources policies o f the College. The following procedures and sanctions apply to students. 6.1 A t their o w n discretion, employees who observe improper behaviour should intervene and deal with the situation. In class, the instructor may make such determination as appropriate. 6.2 A l l members o f the College community who observe serious examples o f improper behaviour outside o f class should report these incidents with as much information as possible, including the names o f witnesses, to the Dean responsible for Student Services who w i l l deal with the incident and inform the complainant o f any outcomes. 6.3 In minor examples o f improper behaviour in class the instructor may consult with or refer the situation to the Coordinator, D i v i s i o n Chair, a Counsellor and Conflict Resolution A d v i s o r . The instructor may also immediately employ the sanction described in article 7.1 o f this policy. 6.4 If there are repeated minor examples o f i m proper behaviour (i.e., after a student has been given two explicit warnings) i n class or a major example o f improper behaviour in class, the instructor should report the incident(s) to the Coordinator, D i v i s i o n Chair, and to the Dean responsible for Student Services. 6.5 In incidents o f improper behaviour reported to the Dean responsible for Student Services, he/ she w i l l investigate the situation and may have recourse to the services o f the Counselling department for mediation purposes or may request the aid of the Conflict Resolution Advisor. 6.6 A m o n g the recourses available to achieve a mediated settlement of an improper behaviour issue are apology, restitution or community service. Disruptive behaviour may include but is not limited to: • Speech or action that seriously distracts others from the task at hand, or the hindrance o f others' work by failure to complete one's o w n work; • Speech or action that is clearly not part o f a learning process and that creates an atmosphere o f hostility, intimidation, ridicule, or anxiety among other students, staff or instructors; • A c t i o n that impedes the delivery of College services; • Falsification o f identification or provision of false information to any College employee or representative in the performance of his/her duties; • A c t i o n that abuses College property and services by using them for unauthorized purposes; • Excessive and unreasonable demand for attention or special treatment from faculty or staff, to the detriment of other students; • Actions which are arguably violations of the B . C . H u m a n Rights Code or municipal bylaws; • A i d i n g , inciting, abetting or acting as an accomplice in the commission o f any o f the foregoing acts. 5. T h r e a t e n i n g a n d D a n g e r o u s B e h a v i o u r A l l members of the College community are expected to show respect for the College and its students and employees. Behaviour that is threatening or dangerous to others is unacceptable and w i l l be dealt with quickly and firmly. The College w i l l protect its students and employees against such conduct. Threatening or dangerous behaviour may include but is not limited to: • Assaulting, threatening, physically or verbally abusing or intimidating another member of the College community; • A c t i n g in a way which endangers the health, safety or well-being of others; • Damage, misuse, or threat to, or the unauthorized removal of, College property or the property o f students or College employees; General 58 Information — College Policies 6.7 W h e n an incident o f improper behaviour is particularly serious or when danger may exist to students or others, an instructor or supervisor of a College-sponsored activity has the prerogative to cancel the class or activity in progress. 7.6 Refusal to enrol or re-enrol — Refusal of the College to enrol or re-enrol a student i n a course, courses or a program. The terms o f this measure w i l l be provided to the student in a written communication. 6.8 If the Dean responsible for Student Services does not believe the incident(s) o f improper behaviour can be successfully mediated or subject to conflict resolution, he/she may apply any o f the sanctions outlined in articles 7.2 through 7.6 or recommend that the President apply the sanction outlined in article 7.7 7.7 Suspension from the College — Immediate exclusion o f a student from all classes and C o l l e g e services. In future, the student w i l l not be permitted to re-enrol in any course or program or take advantage of any College-sponsored activity or service. The terms of this measure w i l l be provided to the student in a written communication. 6.9 In determining a sanction to be applied, the Dean responsible for Student Services w i l l consider whether a student has been previously involved i n incidents o f improper behaviour at the College. 8. A p p e a l Procedure 6.10 W h e n an incident of improper behaviour is particularly serious or when danger may exist to the student or others, the student may be i m m e d i ately excluded from all classes and College services pending further investigation and resolution o f the case. Individuals who wish to appeal may do so and be assured that the principles o f natural justice w i l l be observed, including the right for representation at all hearings. 8.1 A l l written communications informing the students o f sanctions w i l l outline the possible appeal procedure. 8.2 There is no appeal to the Dean's imposition o f sanctions 7.2 and 7.3 or an Instructor's imposition of sanction 7.1. 8.3 Students who wish to appeal the Dean's imposition o f sanction 7.4, 7.5 or 7.6 must make a written appeal to the Student Behaviour Appeals Committee within five working days after the imposition of the sanction. 8.4 The Committee is composed o f one academic administrator plus one faculty member, one staff member and two students, elected by their respective unions, who each serve a one-year term. The committee is chaired by the A c a d e m i c Vice-President. 8.5 Students who wish to appeal the President's imposition o f sanction 7.7 must make a written appeal to the C o l l e g e ' s Board within ten w o r k i n g days after the imposition o f the sanction. 7. S a n c t i o n s 7.1 E x c l u s i o n from a class — Requirement that a student immediately leave class. 7.2 Written reprimand — The student is advised in writing that further incidents o f improper behaviour may result i n more severe sanctions. Written reprimands w i l l be kept on file by the Dean responsible for Student Services. 7.3 Probation — Conditional permission for a student to enrol or re-enrol i n a course or courses. The terms o f this measure w i l l be provided to the student i n a written communication. 7.4 A c t i v i t y / A c c e s s Restriction — Restriction or exclusion o f a student from certain College activities; restricted, or denial of, access to certain areas o f the College or to the use o f certain facilities or equipment. The terms of this measure w i l l be provided to the student i n a written communication, but should not be designed to inhibit a student's ability to complete course requirements. 7.5 E x p u l s i o n — Immediate exclusion o f a student from one or more courses. The terms o f this measure w i l l be provided to the student i n a written communication. General Information — College Policies CHEATING A N D PLAGIARISM POLICY SEXUAL HARASSMENT POLICY The College is committed to providing a working and learning environment that is free from sexual harassment. T o that end, the College has adopted a formal policy and procedures to handle complaints and, i f appropriate, to impose discipline where sexual harassment occurs. The College believes that those who allege that they are victims o f sexual harassment must receive the necessary support and protection to encourage c o m plaints to be brought forward. The College believes that anyone against w h o m a complaint has been made should be given full opportunity to respond to those allegations, and that the principles o f natural justice should prevail. The Capilano College policy defines sexual harassment as comment or conduct o f a sexual nature, including sexual advances, requests for sexual favours, suggestive comments or gestures, or physical contact when any one o f the following occurs: 1. The conduct or comment has the effect o f creating an intimidating, hostile or offensive environment, and may include the expression of sexist attitudes, language and behaviour; 1. Definitions 1. I Cheating is an act of deceit, fraud, distortion o f truth, or improper use of another person's effort to obtain an educational advantage. 1.2 Plagiarism is the presentation o f another person's or source's words and/or ideas as i f they were one's own. It ranges from an entire assignment which is not the student's o w n work to specific passages within an assignment which is not the student's o w n work to specific passages within an assignment taken from a source without acknowledgement. 2. Responsibility for K n o w l e d g e of Proper Academic Practice 2.1 3. Responsibility for Development a n d A d m i n i s t r a t i o n of Policy 3.1 2. The conduct or comment exploits the fiduciary relationship between students and employees o f the College; 3. The conduct or comment is accompanied by a reward, or the express or implied promise o f a reward, for compliance; 4. The conduct or comment is accompanied by reprisals, or an expressed or implied threat o f reprisal, for refusal to c o m p l y ; 5. The conduct or comment is accompanied by the Procedures" are available from the Office o f the 3.2 Second incidents o f cheating or plagiarism, or first incidents deemed by a department/instructor to be particularly serious, w i l l be dealt with according to the College policy. 4. Informing Students 4.1 Students w i l l be provided with a copy o f the College Policy on Cheating and Plagiarism. 4.2 A l l course outlines must provide students with a clear definition o f cheating and plagiarism and a statement o f the sanctions for cheating and plagiarism which the department/instructor may apply. Conflict Resolution A d v i s o r or from Counselling. The Conflict Resolution A d v i s o r is available to receive complaints o f sexual harassment, to provide advice and information to the parties to such complaints, and to investigate complaints as necessary. Departments or divisions may develop their o w n sanction for first cases of cheating and plagiarism or they may refer to college policy (See this P o l i c y , 5.1,5.2) on such cases. Departments or divisions must inform students of the applicable sanctions. 3.1.1 Departmental or division policies on cheating and plagiarism w i l l be reviewed by the Education C o u n c i l . actual denial of opportunity, or the expressed or implied threat of the denial of opportunity, for failure to comply. Copies of the C o l l e g e ' s "Sexual Harassment P o l i c y and Students are responsible for ensuring that they understand and follow the principles and practices of proper documentation and scholarship. If i n doubt about these matters, students should consult their instructor, the W r i t i n g Centre or the Library. 5. Procedure 5.1 General 60 Information — College Policies Before assigning a grade to an assignment which is suspected as resulting from cheating or plagiarism, and instructor may require the student to take an oral examination on the content o f the assignment. 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 If an instructor or department determines that a student has cheated or plagiarized, the instructor may impose a sanction ranging from a failing grade for the assignment to a failing grade for the course. If it is determined that cheating or plagiarism has taken place, the instructor w i l l inform the student in writing o f the reasons for applying sanctions and w i l l indicate that the Dean responsible for Student Services w i l l be informed o f the instructor's decision. A record o f all cheating or plagiarism cases, with appropriate documentation, w i l l be kept i n the office o f the Dean responsible for Student Services for five years. The Dean responsible for Student Services w i l l review the case o f all students who are reported to have cheated or plagiarized on a second or subsequent occasion or i n first incidents deemed by a department/instructor to be particularly serious. The Dean responsible for Student Services may impose or recommend imposition of the following sanctions, singly or in combination, for a first incident deemed to be particularly serious or for a second or subsequent incident: 5.6.1 Notice o f the incident(s) placed in the student's file. The length o f time such a record is to be maintained in the file w i l l be specified. 5.6.2 Probation — Conditional permission for a student to enrol or re-enrol i n a course or courses. The terms o f this measure w i l l be provided to the student i n a written communication. 5.6.3 Expulsion — Immediate exclusion of a student from one or more courses. The terms o f this measure w i l l be provided to the student in a written communication. 5.6.4 Refusal to enrol or re-enrol — Refusal of the C o l l e g e to enrol or re-enrol a student i n a course, courses or program. The terms of this measure w i l l be provided to the student i n a written communication. 5.6.5 Suspension from the College — Immediate exclusion o f a student from all classes and college services. In future, the student w i l l not be permitted to re-enrol i n any course or program or take advantage o f any college-sponsored activity or service. The terms o f this measure w i l l be provided to the student in a written communication. 5.7 W h e n the Dean proposes to invoke a sanction for a first incident deemed to be particularly serious or for a second or subsequent incident, the student involved w i l l be interviewed by the Dean before a decision is made. 5.8 F o r a first incident deemed to be particularly serious or for a second or subsequent incident, the Dean may invoke sanctions 5.6.1 through 5.6.4 or may recommend that the President invoke sanction 5.6.5. 5.9 Appeals o f the Dean's decision to impose sanctions 5.6.1 through 5.6.4 for cheating or plagiarism must be made in writing to the College A c a d e m i c Vice-President within ten w o r k i n g days after the imposition of the sanction. 5.10 Appeals o f the President's sanction 5.6.5 must be made by written appeal the College's Board within ten working days after the imposition o f the sanction. 5.11 Appeals made under 5.9 or 5.10 may include the imposition o f a sanction and/or the extent o f a sanction. COPYRIGHT POLICY A copy o f the College copyright policy is available in the Library and i n all departments. This policy applies to all College departments, employees and students. Capilano College has a reprography licence agreement with C A N C O P Y , the Canadian Copyright Licensing A g e n c y . For further information, contact Supply and Services at 984-4915. MISUSE OF COMPUTER SYSTEM POLICY The misuse of a computer system (such as unauthorized access to other computer accounts or unauthorized use o f system software) is not only unfair to other students but can result, at the instructor's discretion, i n suspension of the offender's computer access i n a course, which may result in an " F " grade. Repeated offences may result in a permanent revoking o f all computer privileges. General Information — College Policies 61 Governance and Administration CAPILANO COLLEGE BOARD The Board of the College, established in conformity with the College and Institute A c t , consists of 17 members, including 10 appointed by the Minister of Education, Skills and Training, four elected from the College community, one ex-officio member drawn from the administrative group at the College, the president of Capilano College, and the president of the College's Education C o u n c i l . These members serve as trustees o f the College. The Board is responsible for governing the College, and in that capacity determines the policy by which the College operates and reviews the performance of the College and its component parts. Traditionally, the Board meets monthly to fulfd its statutory responsibilities and to conduct its general business. N a o m i Yamamoto, Chair Ernie Tjensvold, V i c e - C h a i r Students T w o - Y e a r T e r m s , S u p p o r t Staff Lauren M u l h o l l a n d Bob Walker Administrators Ex-Officio Members D a w n Greer Barbara H o w a r d David O'Leary Greg Lee Carol McQuarrie CAPILANO COLLEGE FOUNDATION Education C o u n c i l , established in conformity with the College and Institute A c t , is the advisory body to the College Board on major institution-wide issues and educational policy. V o t i n g members on Education C o u n c i l include 10 faculty members (elected by faculty), four students (elected by students), two support staff (elected by support staff), and four education administrators appointed by the College president. 62 One-Year Term, Geoffrey Rosen Sonja W a s y k B i l l Gibson Jim Cooke Itidal Sadek John Waters EDUCATION COUNCIL Information Yolande Westwell-Roper Education Richard Band Diane Blaney Shari Graydon Barry W i l l i a m s o n D a l Hothi Barbara H o w a r d Greg Lee Alexandra N i b l o c k Sonja W a s y k James C o o k e Paul M i e r Tarn Tran Donnaleen M i l l e r Sam W e l l e r E l v i r a Balakshin General T w o - Y e a r Terms, Faculty T w o vacancies Dave Bates Joyce Gee Frank Harris Paul M i e r (Chair) Susan M i t c h e l l Margot Rawsthorne D o u g Tait — Governance and The Capilano College Foundation was formed in 1970 to build community support for Capilano College. A s a volunteer community organization established under the Societies A c t , the Foundation raises and administers funds to assist students and enhance the development of a well-balanced learning environment. For information, or to make a tax-deductible contribution, contact: Capilano College Foundation, Capilano College, 2055 Purcell W a y , North Vancouver, B . C . V 7 J 3 H 5 . Telephone: (604) 984-4983; Fax: (604) 984-1714. Administration ADMINISTRATION Financial Services M a r k Vernon, B . A . , C A . President C h i e f Financial Officer and Bursar Greg F . Lee, B . S c . , M . S c , P h . D . Vice-President, Academic Affairs W i l l i a m Gibson, B . A . , P h . D . , D i p . E d Dean of Arts John Waters, B . A . (Hons.), M . A . Dean of Business, H u m a n Services, a n d International Education John Potts, B . A . , M . P . A . Dean of College/Community Stephanie Forsyth, B . A . , M . E d . Partnerships D e a n of Science a n d M e d i a T e c h n o l o g y Carol McCandless, B . A . , M . A . D e a n of S t u d e n t Services a n d Programs James E . Cooke, B . A . , M . A . Foundation Alan Ng, B . S c , C.G.A. Comptroller Greg Gates, M . C . P . C . M . A . Manager, Financial Reporting/Workload Systems Carole Selig, C A . Manager, Project Accounting H u m a n Resources Valerie Cochran, L L . B . Executive Director C i n d y Rogers Manager I n t e r n a t i o n a l Projects G a i l Keary, B . A . , M . A . Director International Student Gary Henkelmann, B . E d . Manager Athletics and Recreation Joseph Iacobellis, B . P . E . , M . P . E . Manager Centre Library Connie Fitzpatrick, B . M u s . , B . L . S . A c t i n g College Librarian College Foundation L a n a Robinson, B . A . Director, Development Executive Director, Capilano College Foundation C o m p u t e r a n d C o m m u n i c a t i o n s Services Steve Gallagher, B . A . Director Planning a n d Institutional Research A l a n P . D . Smith, B . A . , M . A . Executive Director Registrar's Office Itidal Sadek, B . A r c h . , B . S c . Registrar Richard Chadderton Manager Barb Robertson, B . E d . Continuing Education L y n n Jest, M . E d . Director S u p p l y a n d Services D a v i d Brewer, R . C . P . P . Director Associate Registrar Facilities Ian Robertson Director, Buildings and Grounds General Information — Governance and Administration 63 64 Preparatory Programs M a n y students who enter Capilano College require precollege level courses to meet entry level requirements for a particular college program, or to upgrade their academic skills from basic literacy to the Provincial L e v e l (Grade 12 equivalent standing D i p l o m a ) . Students who have been out o f school for a number o f years and want to resume their education often find that the A d u l t Basic Education program best meets their needs. Most courses i n the program are self-paced and may be taken on a part-time basis. Full-time students attend classes in which they work up to five hours a day in the classroom with college instructors. In addition, some courses require independent study outside o f class. The level o f courses in the A d u l t Basic Education program ranges from Basic Literacy to Provincial (Grade 12) level. M a n y of the upper-level courses, taken alone or as part o f a larger program o f studies, w i l l meet entry requirements for University Transfer and Career/Vocational programs. The pre-college level courses which are offered by a number of departments at the College are designed to upgrade students who lack course prerequisites for University Transfer and Career/Vocational programs. M a n y of these courses are taught i n two-hour classes that meet twice a week for an academic term (16 weeks). In addition, considerable independent study is required outside o f the formal instruction period. There are also some flexible self-study courses available in Math. Either the A d u l t Basic Education program or the preparatory courses offered in the University Transfer departments may satisfy your upgrading needs. Students should refer to the A d u l t Basic Education section o f the Calendar or contact the program coordinator. F o r information on other preparatory courses consult the A d v i s i n g Centre or Counselling Department. PRE-COLLEGE LEVEL COURSES For students who do not have some o f the course prerequisites for University Transfer or Career programs, the College offers upgrading and flexible selfstudy courses. Courses C H E M 030 — Introduction to Chemistry E N G L 010 — Language Skills M A T H 0 0 9 — Arithmetic M A T H 090 — Introductory A l g e b r a with Functions M A T H 095 — Intermediate A l g e b r a with Functions COLLEGE SUCCESS STRATEGIES CREDIT COURSES Instructional Faculty R. D ' H O L L A N D E R , B . C . Teacher's Cert., B . E d . , M . E d . ( M c G i l l ) , C . A . S . (Harvard) D . F R A N K E L , B . A . (Concordia), M . E d . ( M c G i l l ) D . J O N E S , B . A . , M . A . (Dalhousie), P h . D . ( S F U ) Y . M c C O L L , B . A . (Simmons), M . E d . (Harvard) E . M c I N N E S - R A N K I N , B . A . (Univ. o f Winnipeg), M . A . (UBC) S. M I T C H E L L , B . S . , E d . ( N . Illinois), M . A , ( U V i c ) S. M U R R A Y , B . E d . (T.E.S.L.)(Concordia), M . A . ( A p p l i e d Linguistics) (Concordia) A . P A R R Y , B . A . (York) S. S O H I , M . A . ( U B C ) S. W A L L S T E R , M . E d . (Montana) General Information College Success Strategies courses are intended for students who wish to increase their learning efficiency and develop attitudes and skills that w i l l help them to be successful students. Courses C S S . 092 — Success Strategies for the College Classroom C S S . 100 — A c a d e m i c and Personal Success Strategies C S S . 105 — Reading and Study Skills C S S . 110 — Reading D y n a m i c s Preparatory Programs 67 C . S C H O E N , M . E d . ( M c G i l l ) , B . A . (Carleton) A . G . T H O M L I N S O N , B.A., M.Sc. (UBC), B.C. ADULT BASIC EDUCATION Teacher's Cert. S. T R U D E L , B . S c , (Hons.), M . E d . ( U . of Ottawa) R . W E D E L , B . A . ( S F U ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert. D . E . Y O U N G , B . A . ( S F U ) , S . R . N . (London), S . C . M . (Scotland), D i p . T . N . (London), M . F . A . ( U B C ) Please note: Offerings and procedures at the Sechelt campus and Squamish campus are slightly different. Contact the local ABE coordinator. Instructional Faculty D J . A T H A I D E , B . S c , (Hons.) ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert. A . B E H M A R D , B . S c . (Hons.) U B C A . B E L S H A W , B . S c , U B C , M . A . (Princeton) D. B E N T L E Y General Information T.R. B R A N D , B.Sc.(SFU), B.Ed.(UBC), B . C . Teacher's Cert. M . C . C A I R N S , B . S c . (Math) (Calgary), A l t a . Teach. Cert. D. C A P O N D . D H A M M I , B . S c . (Hons.) Chemistry & Energy Studies ( U . of Brighton), Cert. Teacher Training, England. B . D R U R Y , B . S c . (Brock) J. F I E L D , B . S c . ( U V i c ) , P h . D . (University o f Queensland) V . G I E S B R E C H T , B . A . (Western Washington U ) , M . E d . ( U B C ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert. J. H I N D , B . A . (1st Class Hons.) ( S F U ) , M . A . ( U B C ) P. H O D G S O N , B . A . (Hons), B . E d . (Queen's) M . E d . The A d u l t Basic Education ( A B E ) program enables you to upgrade your knowledge o f English, mathematics, biology, chemistry, earth sciences, physics, geography, history, social studies and computers. Y o u may select from one to five subjects, depending upon your educational and occupational goals. Y o u can pursue any o f the following goals: • preparation for employment • personal desire to upgrade or refresh mastery o f a subject • secondary school qualifications demanded by employers • vocational training (including apprenticeships) • career training • technical training • academic studies (including college and university programs) (UBC) C. B. M A C L E A N , B.Ed. (SFU), M . E d . ( U B C ) G . N E W M A N , B . A . (Hons.), Post-graduate Certificate of Education (Leeds University), B . C . Teacher's Cert. J. P A S S , B . A . ( U B C ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert. J. R O S E , B . A . (Western), B . C . Teacher's Cert., M . E d . (UBC) G . B . R U D O L P H , B . S c . ( U B C ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert., M.Ed. (UBC) The program operates year-round, offering instruction in two-hour classes. Both self-paced and term-paced classes are offered. Placement i n courses is based on pre-registration assessment of academic background. M a n y students benefit by enrolling i n A B E courses while registered in university transfer or career/ vocational programs at the College. Students who need more than four months to complete a course may re-register i f they are attending and Courses Fundamental Intermediate Advanced Provincial Level BENG 021* 021 031* 032* 031* 040 or 0 4 1 * 042* 041 or 045 * 041 — *Choose 2 041 041 041 or 042 046 BSCI BMTH 021* BCHM BESC BPHY BBIO BGEO BHST 041 041 _ * Required for Certificate or D i p l o m a Advanced math is a prerequisite for Provincial L e v e l For further details please arrange an assessment/interview by phoning 984-4971 68 — *Choose 3 042 042 042 042 031* 031 BSOC BCMP Preparatory 042 Programs 042 or 0 4 3 progress is satisfactory. Students who finish a course before the end o f the term may immediately register for the next higher course i n the given subject. H i g h enrolment may necessitate limiting students to a m a x i m u m o f three classes in a subject area. Class times are as follows: M o r n i n g classes: 8:30 a.m. and 10:30 a.m. Afternoon classes: M o n d a y and Wednesday-12:30 p.m. and 2:30 p.m., Tuesday, and Thursday-2:30 p.m., F r i d a y - 1 : 3 0 p.m. Evening classes: 7 p.m. The program also offers instruction for students preparing for the General Education Development (Grade 12 equivalency) tests. A d v a n c e d and Provincial level A B E courses may also be used for transfer credit towards a B . C . A d u l t Senior Secondary School Graduation Certificate. Courses ENGLISH BENG O i l— B E N G 021 — Contact: North Vancouver Campus: Sechelt Campus: 983-7578 885-9310 (Toll Free: Squamish Campus: B E N G 031 — 987-1535) 892-5322 (Toll Free: 986-3515) B E N G 040 — Admission Requirements Students should be at least 18 years old and preferably out of the public school system for a m i n i m u m o f one year. Exceptions w i l l only be made with departmental approval. Students should apply at least three months prior to anticipated date o f entry. Registration Students are interviewed before registration i n order to determine the course(s) or program w h i c h best meets their educational goals. Regular attendance and satisfactory progress are conditions for re-registration in A B E courses. Students may be directed to other programs i f their attendance and performance in A B E does not match their stated educational goals. ABE Certificates & Diploma The A B E program offers courses at four levels as outlined i n the table: The Provincial Diploma, issued by the M i n i s t r y o f Education, Skills and Training, provides an alternate route for adults to achieve a Grade 12 standing to postsecondary institutions i n B . C . Intermediate & Advanced Certificates are issued by Capilano College and provide prerequisites for career and vocational programs throughout the province. Fundamental level instruction provides basic reading and writing skills and number skills. A B E certificates also satisfy most employers' requirements. Certain high school courses may qualify as transfer credit toward A B E certificates and the P r o v i n cial D i p l o m a . B E N G 041 — B E N G 042 — Basic Literacy L e v e l E n g l i s h Fundamental L e v e l English: Essential W r i t i n g S k i l l s , Spelling and W o r d Attack Intermediate L e v e l English: M e c h a n ics, Basic Skills and Paragraph Writing A d v a n c e d L e v e l English: Short Report Writing Advanced.English: A d v a n c e d Report Writing Provincial L e v e l E n g l i s h : C r i t i c a l Reading and Essay W r i t i n g SOCIAL STUDIES B S O C 031 — B S O C 041 — B G E O 042 — B H S T 042 — COMPUTER Intermediate L e v e l Social Studies A d v a n c e d L e v e l Social Studies Provincial L e v e l Geography Provincial L e v e l History STUDIES B C M P 031 — B C M P 041 — B C M P 042 — B C M P 043 — Introduction to Microcomputer A d v a n c e d L e v e l Computer Studies Provincial L e v e l Computer Science Provincial L e v e l Computer Studies MATHEMATICS B M T H 021 — B M T H 031 — B M T H 045 — Fundamental L e v e l Mathematics Intermediate L e v e l Mathematics Advanced Level Math - Algebra & Trigonometry B M T H 046 — Provincial L e v e l M a t h - A l g e b r a & Trigonometry SCIENCES B S C I 021 — B S C I 032 — B B I O 041 — B B I O 042 — B C H M 041 — B C H M 042 — B E S C 041 — B P H Y 041 — B P H Y 042 — Fundamental L e v e l General Science Intermediate L e v e l General Science Advanced Level Biology Provincial L e v e l B i o l o g y A d v a n c e d L e v e l Chemistry Provincial L e v e l Chemistry A d v a n c e d L e v e l Earth and E n v i r o n mental Sciences A d v a n c e d L e v e l Physics Provincial L e v e l Physics Preparatory Programs 69 ALTERNATIVE CAREER TRAINING Foundations Program Instructional Faculty Terry B Y R N E S , M . A . ( U V i c ) R. D A M O N Jann G I B B S , R . S . W . Priscilla S T A N B U R Y , B . A . ( U B C ) , Cert, o f E d . (London) Laverne T H O M P S O N , M . E d . (Lesley College) General Information The Alternative Career Training Foundations program is an employment exploration program with a unique focus and approach. The program is based on a developmental perspective and is committed to working with young adults with special learning needs. Students are educated to accept the responsibilities of independent l i v i n g as young adults, as w e l l as the demands o f competitive entry-level employment, and w i l l be able to address social or emotional issues w h i c h could act as barriers to employment. The A C T program combines in-class instruction with practical work experience, emphasizing the development or maintenance o f skills which may be used i n employment situations. Students meet with faculty to discuss an individual course plan that best fits their needs. Personal goals w i l l be set and monitored throughout the year. Contact: Terry Byrnes, Coordinator 984-1711 Student Profile Students who w i l l find the A C T program beneficial are learning or developmentally delayed, as well as individuals who have physical disabilities that still allow them to meet employment requirements. In addition, they may present any or all of the following characteristics: a) difficulty grasping academic information (for example, mathematical problem solving, reading print, writing) b) persons with a disability. Students who w i l l obtain the most benefit from the A C T program are those who have reached a moderate level o f independence (i.e. they are responsible for selfcare; they travel independently locally; they have had some work or volunteer experience; they can articulate several areas of interest or a willingness to try various work sites). Preparatory 70 Programs Admission Requirements The A C T Foundations program is i n session for eight months (two terms). Classes are offered for nine weeks, with community work/volunteer practicums offered for an additional six weeks i n the fall term. D u r i n g the spring term, classes w i l l be held for six weeks with an additional nine weeks o f work/volunteer practicums. Entry is by referral and interview. Students may combine their in-class work with self-selected volunteer or employment training sites based upon aptitude, attitude, ability and interest. E a c h candidate is interviewed by the program faculty, and a m a x i m u m o f 14 students w i l l be admitted. Some students may elect to take the program part-time, and students may be accepted for a second year by faculty permission. Appointments for interviews take place between January 15 and A p r i l 15, with interviews and letters to the successful candidates sent by M a y 30. Courses A C T P 001 — Job Search and Maintenance Techniques A C T P 002 — Occupational Preparation and Safety i n the Workplace A C T P 005 — V i s u a l and Print Communication Skills A C T P 006 — Leisure Education A C T P 007 — Consumer Preparation A C T P 008 — Interpersonal Communications A C T P 009 — W o r k Experience ENGLISH AS A SECOND LANGUAGE Instructional Faculty M . A C I M O V I C , B . A . (Belgrade), T E S L Cert. (George B r o w n College), M . E d . ( O I S E / U T ) J. A C O S T A , B . A . ( U C , Berkeley), E . S . L . Cert. (San Francisco State U . ) , Ontario Professional Teaching Certificate D . B O U V I E R , B . A . (London School of Economics), P G C E Postgraduate Certificate in Education ( L o n don University), M . A . ( U C S D ) , B . C . Professional Teaching Certificate E . C H A N G , B . A . (Calgary), M . E d . ( U B C ) N . J . C O L L I N S , B . A . (London), M . A . , Professional Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) J. F A R N A N , B . A . Hons. E n g l i s h ( S F U ) , P . D . P . ( B . C . Professional Teaching Cert. ( S F U ) , M . E d . ( U B C ) S. H A L S A L L , B . A . ( S F U ) , M . B . A . ( M c G i l l ) C. H O P P E N R A T H , B.A., M . E d . ( U B C ) W . H U G H E S , B.I.S. (Waterloo), M . F . A . ( U B C ) , T . E . S . L . Cert. ( V C C ) D . J O H N S T O N E , B . A . , M . A . , T E S L (American University in Cairo) C . J U N G , B . A . , T E S L Cert., M . A . ( U B C ) M . R E A G H , B . A . (Dalhousie U . — K i n g ' s College), M . A . T . E . S . O . L . (S.I.T. Vermont), Vermont Professional Teaching Certificate L . R E N E S , B . A . , M . A . ( U T ) , T . E . S . L . Cert. (George B r o w n College) J. R I T C H I E , B . A . , M . A . A d u l t Education (St.F.X.) A . S E D K Y , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . ( A i n Shams University) H . S L O A T , B . A . (Queen's), T . E . S . L . Cert. ( U V i c ) , M . A . — T . E . S . L . (Concordia) Admission Procedures/Requirements Application Application for A d m i s s i o n forms are available from the Registrar's Office. Applications and supporting official transcripts and documents should be submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office, by the following dates: F a l l Term (Sept. to D e c ) : July 1 Spring T e r m (Jan. to Apr.): October 1 Summer T e r m ( M a y to A u g . ) : February 1 Address all applications to: Registrar's Office Capilano College 2055 Purcell W a y North Vancouver, B . C . , Canada Telephone: (604) 984-4913 Fax (604) 984-1798 D o c u m e n t s a n d Official Transcripts Official records (grade reports, transcripts, etc.) o f all secondary, post-secondary or equivalent education must be submitted with the application, whether or not the course of study has been completed. These records should indicate the individual courses studied and the marks or grades received. If your records are in a language other than E n g l i s h , please provide certified E n g l i s h translations and the original documents. Replaceable documents submitted in support o f your application become the property o f the College and w i l l not be returned. Other documents w i l l be returned, upon request. A. SOUZA, B.A., M.A. (UBC) E . W I T K O W S K I , M . A . (Jaqiellonian), B . C . Professional Teaching Cert. If any document is in a name different to that under which application is made, proof o f change o f name (marriage certificate, court order, etc.) is required. L . Z H A N G , B . A . , M . A . , (Nanjing), M . E d . ( U . o f Alta.), B C / A l b e r t a Professional Teaching Cert. A p p l i c a t i o n Fee English as a Second Language ( E S L ) courses offer landed immigrants and international students a variety of Intermediate, A d v a n c e d and College Preparatory English courses to help them improve their competency in E n g l i s h for work, daily life, and post-secondary study. Courses cover reading, writing, grammar, speaking and listening skills. E S L courses are offered part-time and full-time. Contact: 984-4971 Fax: 984-1718 Canadian citizens or permanent residents: A non- refundable fee o f $20 and a $25 document evaluation fee must accompany your A p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s s i o n . International students: A non-refundable fee o f $100 (Canadian funds) must accompany your A p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s s i o n . Admission Once all documents and records have been received, we w i l l consider your application. If you are admitted, the College w i l l send you an official letter of admittance by mail. Preparatory Programs 71 English Language Requirements Canadian Citizens and Landed Immigrants Once students are accepted, they w i l l be contacted by the E S L Department to come i n and write the E S L placement test. Students who wish to enrol i n E S L as w e l l as other courses i n University Transfer, Career, Vocational, or A d u l t Basic Education courses should refer to the General Information - A d m i s s i o n section in this Calendar. International Students F o r the English as a Second Language ( E S L ) program the College requires one of the following: • a valid English Language Assessment ( E L A ) test score o f 5 5 - 144 O R • the E S L Department Placement Test. International students are strongly encouraged to register i n the full-time E S L program described below in order to obtain the utmost benefit from their experience at Capilano College. Courses Offered — Intensive Program These full-time courses are mainly intended for International students. Other students w i l l be allowed to register i f space is available. FIRST NATIONS COLLEGE PREPARATION P R O G R A M Instructional Faculty D. B E N T L E Y G . N E W M A N , B . A . (Hons) Post-graduate Cert, of Education (Leeds University), B . C . Teacher's Cert. S. M U R R A Y , B . E d . ( T . E . S . L . ) (Concordia) M . A . (Applied Linguistics) (Concordia) S. T R U D E L , B . S c . (Hons), M . E d . , University of Ottawa J. R O S E , B . A . (Western), B . C . Teacher's Cert., M . E d . (UBC), Coordinator Advising P. S H A N N O N , M . E d . ( U B C ) First Nations A d v i s o r D . G A D D I E , B . A . ( U . o f R.) L i a i s o n Officer General Information The First Nations College Preparation program has been developed at Capilano C o l l e g e ' s North V a n c o u ver campus in cooperation with the First Nations o f the C o l l e g e ' s region. The objective o f the program is to improve the participation and success rates o f First Nations students who are making the transition to post-secondary institutions. Upper Beginners L o w e r Intermediate Upper Intermediate Lower Advanced Upper A d v a n c e d (15 credits) (15 credits) (15 credits) (15 credits) (15 credits) ESLF020 ESLF030 ESLF040 ESLF050 ESLF060 These are full-time intensive E S L courses w h i c h cover all skills: speaking, listening, pronunciation, grammar, writing, reading and vocabulary building. Students attend class 20 hours a week. Courses -- Regular Offered Program The design and content of the program offers a holistic educational experience that integrates social and educational aspects of successful college preparation. The program helps students to gain confidence at college by developing college life skills while gaining academic qualifications. Contact: Judy Rose, Coordinator 983-7578 or 983-7573; Fax: 984-1718 COURSE CONTENT — Core Program Speaking & Listening Reading & Vocabulary Writing & Grammar Lower Intermediate Upper Intermediate ESL. 031 ESL. 041 ESL. 038 ESL. 048 ESL 039 ESL 049 Lower Advanced Upper Advanced ESL. 051 ESL. 061 ESL. 058 ESL. 068 ESL 059 ESL 069 C S S . 100 — 3 credits ESL. 071 College Prep Level I College Prep Level II ESL. 081 College Prep Level III — ESL. 078 ESL. 088 ESL. 098 ESL 079 ESL 089 ESL 099 Three multi-level classes per week in the A B E ' s See course descriptions for further information. FALL TERM English — 3 credits Intermediate (031), A d v a n c e d (041) or Provincial (042) English. Mathematics — 3 credits TOEFL * E S L . 066 — T O E F L Preparation I Three multi-level classes per week in the A B E ' s * E S L . 076 — T O E F L Preparation II Fundamental (021), Intermediate (031), A d v a n c e d (045) or Provincial (046) Mathematics. * These courses are funded solely by tuition fees and w i l l only be offered i f there are enough students. Preparatory 72 Programs Computer Studies — 2 credits Attendance T w o classes per week to improve keyboarding skills, SPRING TERM Due to the intense nature o f the program, regular attendance is essential. The Coordinator distributes attendance and progress reports to education coordinators twice each term i n order to provide both the students and the funding agents with ongoing feedback. C S S . 110 — 3 credits E n g l i s h — 3 credits Mathematics — 3 credits Computer Studies — 2 credits Fees are paid at the beginning o f each term at registration. gain experience with D O S and learn M S W o r d for W i n d o w s for credit i n A B E ' s A d v a n c e d (041), or Provincial (043) Computer Studies. Fees Admission Requirements Applicants should be at least 18 years o f age, be o f First Nations ancestry and have Grade 10 or equivalent. Placement in A B E courses is done through assessment and interview with the Coordinator. A Basic Skills Assessment is also required to assist education coordinators and College faculty i n predicting success and providing academic supports. How to A p p l y A l l students must complete an Application for A d m i s s i o n form, available from the Registrar's Office at the North Vancouver campus. F o r application information, contact: Judy Rose, Coordinator Foundation D i v i s i o n , Capilano College B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 344 2055 Purcell W a y , N o r t h Vancouver, B . C . V 7 J 3 H 5 T e l : (604) 983-7578 or 983-7573; Fax: (604) 984-1718 Applications must be submitted, together with the $20 application fee and official copies o f secondary and/or post-secondary transcripts to: Registrar's Office Capilano College 2055 Purcell W a y North Vancouver, B . C . , Canada V 7 J 3H5 Registration Students must participate i n an assessment interview before registration in the program. This interview offers an opportunity to plan the program which w i l l best meet the student's educational goals. F o l l o w i n g the interview, the Coordinator w i l l contact education coordinators to arrange registration. Preparatory Programs 73 SPEECH ASSISTED READING A N D WRITING Instructional Faculty J. B E N N E T T , B . A . ( S F U ) D.BENTLEY L . F O S S , B . A . (Carleton), M . A . Counselling Psych. (Adler School of Professional Psychology) D . K I R K B Y , B . E . D . (Winnipeg) J. T H E R I A U L T , B . A . (Waterloo) R . W E D E L , B . A . ( S F U ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert. General Information The S A R A W program, offered by the Foundations for Independent L i v i n g Department, offers literacy upgrading to students who have physical disabilities, limited or no speech and rely on the use o f low technological communication devices such as Cannon communicators, B l i s s y m b o l i c boards etc. Speech Assisted Reading and Writing ( S A R A W ) offers an unprecedented range of opportunities to explore and address the literacy needs of this unique group of learners. S A R A W classes at Capilano C o l l e g e ' s North V a n c o u ver campus enable students to upgrade their literacy level using computers with adaptive, voice synthesized technology. The classes are held over two semesters (fall and spring), offering students self-paced instruction i n various time slots. Students must attend a m i n i m u m o f 20 hours per week. Graduates have accomplished this through various combinations o f 1. in-lab instruction at the College 2. in-residence instruction 3. in-residence tutorials 4. independent in-residence time 5. independent lab time at the College. Students registered i n the class w i l l have a complete S A R A W computer station installed i n their residence. S A R A W can also be installed into a student's existing computer, provided it is a compatible system. This system w i l l be on loan from Capilano College to the students for the length o f their registration in the class. The S A R A W program uses trained tutors to assist students with the completion of course work as assigned by the instructor. A s the type of tutorial assistant required by S A R A W learners is unique, the department reserves the right to appoint specifically trained tutors to work with students registered i n the class. Students are encouraged to act i n a mature, independent manner regarding decision making, transportation and completion of assignments. Transportation ar- Students set goals for each semester which are evaluated on an ongoing basis. Some examples of goals set by students are: 1. to learn to read personal correspondence independently 2. to improve the reading and understanding o f employment related print material 3. to achieve high school equivalency. These goals are personal i n nature and represent the individual's o w n needs for literacy achievement. The accumulation o f individual achievements may lead to formal higher education such as that offered by an Adult Basic Education program. Preparatory 74 Programs rangements are the responsibility o f the student. Contact: Coordinator, 983-7552 Admission Requirements Students interested in enrolling in S A R A W classes must first arrange an interview with the department. They should be able to demonstrate a firm knowledge of the alphabet and the sounds related to each letter. They should also be able to articulate a goal for literacy upgrading. Students w i l l be asked to produce a short writing sample to identify strengths and weaknesses i n reading and writing. University Transfer University transfer courses at Capilano College provide students with a variety o f options. Students can select a full program o f study equivalent to the first two years of university (see note on Course Selection and A d v i s ing), and can enrol on a full-time or part-time basis. University transfer courses are of interest both to students who plan to transfer to a university and to students who do not intend to continue to upper-level studies. For those students who need extra help in basic skills, Capilano College offers preparatory courses and academic support services (see W r i t i n g Centre, the Achievement Resource Centre and the M a t h Learning Centre i n the Services section o f this Calendar). Students interested in special fields o f study such as Canadian Studies, Environmental Science, W o m e n ' s Studies, or Labour Studies can select from innovative programs in these areas (as offered from year to year). A c a d e m i c instruction at Capilano College is both disciplinary and inter-disciplinary and is o f a high intellectual calibre. The College carefully reviews the content and the delivery methods o f its university transfer courses to ensure that those courses are current and that they continue to meet university standards. Students i n university transfer courses should expect to work at least two to three hours outside o f class for every hour of class time. All courses English. require basic literacy in written and spoken That is, students must be able to understand texts and other written materials, and the spoken words, and must be able to write assignments correct English. Students who are not sure their is good enough should talk to the instructor before taking the the instructor's or an in English advisor course. The College offers a library collection and full media and reference services to complement the courses o f study. The Arts and Science D i v i s i o n offers a range of courses i n various disciplines w h i c h are grouped i n four divisions as follows: H u m a n i t i e s D i v i s i o n (984-4957): A r t History, C h i nese, E n g l i s h , French, German, Japanese, Linguistics, Philosophy, Spanish S o c i a l Science D i v i s i o n (984-4953): Anthropology, Commerce, C r i m i n o l o g y , Economics, Geography, History, Political Studies, Psychology, Sociology, W o m e n ' s Studies P u r e a n d A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n (984-4955): B i o l o g y , Chemistry, Computing Science, Engineering, Environmental Science (post-baccalaureate program), Geology, Kinesiology, Mathematics and Statistics, Physics V i s u a l a n d P e r f o r m i n g A r t s D i v i s i o n (984-4911): Textile Arts, Studio A r t , Bachelor o f M u s i c Transfer, Jazz Studies, Theatre, Performing Arts Management Associate in Arts and Science Degree Capilano College offers Associate Degrees i n Arts and in Science for two years o f university-level study i n accordance with the requirements outlined under the Graduation/Diplomas and Certificates section o f the Calendar. Diploma in Academic Studies Students who have completed the requirements o f any four-term College program may receive a D i p l o m a i n A c a d e m i c Studies, provided they have fulfilled the conditions as outlined under the Graduation/Diplomas and Certificates section of the Calendar. Transfer F u l l information on transfer o f specific courses is available from A d v i s i n g or Counselling, and i n the pertinent instructional division. T r a n s f e r to other i n s t i t u t i o n s : The Arts and Sciences D i v i s i o n maintains transferability of its courses with other post-secondary institutions. The C o l l e g e ' s representatives meet regularly w i t h those o f other institutions to ensure that C a p i l a n o ' s first and second year courses are fully transferable as university courses. T r a n s f e r f r o m other institutions: There is agreement among all public B . C . colleges to accept each other's credits upon transfer, i f applicable to a program given in the admitting college, and given suitable equivalency. Capilano College reserves the right to review individual course credit. Transfer credits are granted to students on admission for acceptable work done at other institutions; the transfer credits reduce the total number o f credits which are required at Capilano College for a certificate, diploma, or Associate Degree. Students wishing transfer credit should present suitable documentation to University Transfer 77 the Registrar's Office for adjudication by the appropriate faculty. A l l approved transfer credits are noted on the student's Permanent Student Record. Transfer information accurate to the time o f printing is to be found i n the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide. Students are urged to read this guide when establishing their programs o f study. The B . C . Transfer Guide is available on the Internet at www.bccat.bc.ca/menutg.html. The Capilano College Transfer Guide is available i n paper format at the Bookstore at a cost o f $2. University Transfer Course Descriptions F u l l descriptions o f all university transfer courses can be found i n the alphabetical listings i n the course description section o f this Calendar. Students are urged to read the general discipline information included in each section carefully. Students are responsible for being familiar with the special information needed to select university transfer courses. Course Selection and A d v i s i n g A d v i s i n g and Counselling assist students in selecting the best program of studies. The final responsibility for course selection, however, rests with students. A l l university transfer students are advised to see an advisor or a counsellor to plan their courses o f study. English Entrance Requirements Students who wish to enrol i n English courses may be required to write a placement test, B E F O R E R E G I S TERING IN A N Y ENGLISH COURSE. See the Registration section o f this Calendar for information about the English Diagnostic Test ( E D T ) . Self-Study Courses In keeping with the C o l l e g e ' s policy for development of alternative instructional modes, the Mathematics and Statistics Department offers a limited number o f selfstudy courses. These packaged courses, prepared for home study with the aid o f study guides, videotapes and computerassisted instruction, are designed for students who are unable to maintain regular attendance at the North Vancouver, Sechelt or Squamish campuses. They are also available to students who are attending any o f these campuses, providing them with a viable alternative to the usual classroom lecture/tutorial instructional format. R e g i s t r a t i o n Priority In some courses with high demand, registration priority w i l l be given to students who have not attempted the course previously at Capilano College. Students who have attempted the course within the last year may not be allowed to register without the instructor's permission. Registration procedures for A r t and M u s i c programs are detailed i n the Calendar section for the particular program. Lab/Course Relationship M a n y courses require that students complete a lab and/ or tutorial. Students should ensure that they are aware of lab/tutorial requirements and the timetable for these components. Students should note that it is necessary to pass both labs and lectures. The cost o f the lab is included i n the tuition fee, except for lab manuals and some field trip costs. SPECIAL P R O G R A M S M a t h Entrance Requirements 1. W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s P r o g r a m O n l y those students with sufficiently high grades i n prerequisite courses completed within the previous year w i l l be allowed to enrol directly i n Precalculus ( M A T H 105, 107) or Calculus I ( M A T H 108, 116) or Discrete Mathematics I ( M A T H 124) without writing a placement test. A l l other students wishing to enrol in one o f these courses must write a placement test prior to registration. Please refer to the Mathematics section of the Calendar for the direct entry and placement test requirements for each o f these courses. A W o m e n ' s Studies program, consisting o f a variety o f university transfer credit, college credit and credit-free courses, has been developed at Capilano College. These courses are taught from a perspective and with a methodology developed within Women's Studies. See the Registration section o f this Calendar for information about the M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) . In addition to the W o m e n ' s Studies program courses, there are career and university transfer courses i n other disciplines of special interest to women. 2. W r i t i n g A c r o s s t h e C u r r i c u l u m Sections In the fall term, a small number o f E N G L 100 (Composition) sections are paired with a section o f another University 78 Transfer course. Students planning to take E N G L 100 (Composition) should consider enrolling in one o f these W r i t i n g Across the C u r r i c u l u m sections as identified in the course timetable. Instruction i n the two courses w i l l be coordinated, with the writing assignments i n the English course growing out of the content of the other course. Students w i l l receive the full three credits for both courses, and w i l l benefit from having two o f their subjects connected with each other. Please consult the E n g l i s h Department for information on the paired sections for Fall 1999. 3. Canadian Studies Specialty Students who wish to concentrate their studies on Canadian content courses can choose courses from the list below. A l l courses (except some Labour Studies courses) hold full transfer credit and transfer into the Canadian Studies program at S F U . T o qualify for a Canadian Studies Specialty, complete a College diploma with at least 24 credits from the following list. Choose these credits from courses in at least three different departments. O f the 24 credits you choose, at least six must be numbered 200 or above. F o r a Canadian Studies Specialty to be applied to a General Studies D i p l o m a , an E n g l i s h or Communications course is required. Fall A N T H 204, 208 B I O L 204 E N G L 202 F R E N 270 G E O G 106, 108 H I S T 110, 111,205 L S P . 100, 110, 111, 115, 117, 119, 142, 170, 181, 182, 210 4. Ethnic and Cross-Cultural Relations Program The Ethnic and Cross-Cultural Relations program is a two-term, multidisciplinary program. It studies ethnic relations developed in the context o f the multicultural and polyethnic nature o f Canadian society. It also explores the cross-cultural interaction among Native people, the founding E n g l i s h and French Canadian people, and the various immigrant groups that constitute the Canadian "mosaic." These all help to shape the national character and the culture o f this country. The program also examines the international aspect of crosscultural communication, which is o f special meaning to Canada because immigrant communities here can maintain healthy contacts with their countries o f origin. The program includes the various disciplines involved in ethnic studies: history, geography, anthropology, sociology, political studies and urban studies, religious studies, communications, language and literature. There are no special criteria for student selection, although students must formally register for the two-term Ethnic and Cross-Cultural Relations Certificate, w h i c h w i l l be awarded upon completion o f the program. T o complete the program, a student needs to earn 30 credits. Specialized courses i n ethnic relations and two English courses are required; the rest can be chosen from a variety of electives. A l l the program's courses (except Labour Studies) have transfer credit to the provincial universities where the student can work towards a degree in Ethnic Studies. S i m o n Fraser University also has recently developed a graduate program i n this field. Capilano C o l l e g e ' s Continuing Education Department may offer additional courses during the evenings for people already w o r k i n g i n job-related fields. P O L . 104 S O C . 200 FIRST TERM Spring REQUIRED: A N T H 205, 206 B I O L 105, 205 E N G L 203 F R E N 271 G E O G 108 G E O L 111 E N G L 100 — Composition (or other E n g l i s h course i f approved). H I S T 110, 111,208, 209 L S P . 101, 110, 111, 116, 131, 140, 181 P O L . 104, 202, 204 S O C . 201 A N T H 204 — Ethnic Relations ELECTIVES: Language: French, German, Spanish, Japanese, Chinese. A N T H 200 — Intermediate Social Anthropology or P S Y C 200 — Social Psychology or G E O G 100 — Human Geography: People, Places, Culture Course descriptions appear under the appropriate discipline. G E O G 106 — British C o l u m b i a : A Regional A n a l y s i s or S O C . 200 — Canadian Society or A P P L Y T O T H E R E G I S T R A R to have the Specialty added to your diploma at the time o f graduation. H I S T 111 — P O L . 104 — Canadian Government Canada since Confederation or University Transfer 79 SECOND TERM ii. Science Students REQUIRED: E N G L 103 — Studies i n Contemporary Literature A N T H 205 — Multiculturalism ELECTIVES: Second term of the language course taken in first term. A N T H 206 — First Nations of British C o l u m b i a A N T H 208 — Indigenous Peoples of North A m e r i c a G E O G 205 — A s i a Pacific Geography L S P . 119 — C i v i l Rights and the Workplace L S P . 131 — Race and Ethnic Relations G E O G 201 — Urban Studies or S O C . 211 — Sociology o f the T h i r d W o r l d or Capilano College Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n offers a first and second year university transfer program in biology, chemistry, computing science, mathematics & statistics, and physics, and first year university transfer programs in engineering, geology and kinesiology. In addition, the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n offers science transfer requirements in the following: pre-Medicine, pre-Veterinary, preDentistry, Oceanography, Forestry, Agriculture, Pharmacy, H o m e Economics, Rehabilitation M e d i c i n e , and Dental Hygiene. iii. E n g i n e e r i n g P r o g r a m G E O G 108 — Canada: A Nation o f Regions H I S T 205 — S O C . 201 — B . C . Society or P O L . 202 — Government and Politics of B . C . 5. British C o l u m b i a Pure a n d A p p l i e d Sciences General Information The following options are available from a wide range of pure and applied sciences" A. University Transfer Courses i. Non-Science Students Students planning to continue studies at a university are advised to consider the following courses to fulfil their science requirement. It should be noted that transfer credit for a number o f these courses is limited to non-science students. Students should refer to individual discipline areas in this Calendar. B I O L 104, 105, 113 C H E M 101 C O M P 101 G E O L 110, 111 G E O G 112, 114 M A T H 101, 102, 105, 107, 108, 109 P H Y S 104 Please check the prerequisites given in the individual course descriptions. N o t e : BIOL 104 and CHEM 030 or CHEM 101 fulfil biology entrance requirements for the Nursing program at BCIT. Completion of BIOL 104 and'BIOL 113 permits students (upon entering Basic Health Sciences at BCIT) to receive creditfor BHSC 105. University Transfer 80 Capilano College offers a first year university transfer program in engineering. Bachelor degree completion generally requires three additional years o f study at U B C , S F U , or U V i c . For additional information, consult the Engineering program section o f this Calendar. iv. K i n e s i o l o g y P r o g r a m Capilano College offers a first year university transfer program in kinesiology designed for students planning to transfer to the Kinesiology Program at S F U for their second year. F o r additional information, consult the Kinesiology program section o f this Calendar. B. Post-Baccalaureate Diploma Program i. A s i a Pacific M a n a g e m e n t Cooperative Post-Baccalaureate Diploma Program * Refer to the A s i a Pacific Management Co-operative program in this Calendar. ii. E n v i r o n m e n t a l Science P r o g r a m Capilano College offers a one-year Post Baccalaureate D i p l o m a program in environmental science for students who have already completed a degree i n science or engineering and who are interested i n further practical studies i n environmental fields. F o r additional information, refer to the Environmental Science program i n the Post-Graduate section o f this Calendar. ANTHROPOLOGY ART HISTORY Instructional Faculty Instructional Faculty C . B I L L , B . A . (Hons.) ( U V i c ) , M . A . (Trent), P h . D . (Tulane) G . C R O W T H E R , B . S c . (Hons.) (London), M . P h i l . , J. J U N G I C , B . A . , M . A . ( U B C ) D . N E A V E , B . A . (Manchester), M . A . ( U V i c . ) P. S I N G E R , B . A . (George W i l l i a m s ) , M . F . A . (Concordia) Ph.D (Cambridge) K. LIND, B.A., M.A. (UBC) R. M U C K L E , B . A . , M . A . ( S F U ) D. S E X S M I T H , B . A . , M . A . (UBC), Ph.D. ( U C L A ) General Information General Information Anthropology is the study o f humankind, offering views on the human condition from evolutionary and comparative perspectives. B y developing an understanding and appreciation o f cultural and biological diversity, courses in anthropology should be beneficial to all students. Students who have career aspirations as anthropologists may find work in teaching, research, or museum studies. They may also work as consultants to governments, corporations, and native groups. Major branches of anthropology include Social Anthropology, Archaeology, and Physical Anthropology. Students intending to major or minor in anthropology or archaeology should take Anthropology 121 and one or both o f Anthropology 123 and 124. Students interested in a Canadian Studies Specialty should consider Anthropology 204, 206, and 208. The Ethnic and Cross-Cultural Relations program requires Anthropology 204 and 205. Art History concerns itself with visual culture both past and present. V i s u a l art is explored and analyzed in order to understand how it is composed and constructed and how it functions as a carrier and producer of meaning within society. A n a l y t i c a l tools that promote the critical decoding of images, so relevant in today's world, are emphasized in all A r t History courses. University Transfer Credit A l l A r t History courses offered at Capilano C o l l e g e are transferable to U B C , S F U , and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Courses A H I S 100 — The History of A r t I A H I S 101 — The History of A r t II A H I S 104 — Introduction to V i s u a l Culture I University Transfer Credit A H I S 105 — Introduction to V i s u a l Culture II A H I S 106 — Introduction to Non-Western A r t I A l l Anthropology courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. A H I S 107 — Introduction to Non-Western A r t II A H I S 109 — W o m e n , A r t and A r t History Courses A H I S 210 — History o f M o d e r n A r t (19th Century) A H I S 211 — History o f M o d e r n A r t (20th Century) A H I S 220 — Early Renaissance A r t in Italy A H I S 221 — H i g h Renaissance and Mannerist A r t i n Italy A N T H 121 — Introduction to Social Anthhropology A N T H 123 — Introduction to Archaeology A H I S 231 — History o f Textile A r t I A N T H 124 — H u m a n Origins A H I S 232 — History o f Textile A r t II A N T H 200 — Intermediate Social Anthropology A N T H 202 — Anthropology and the Environment A N T H 204 — Ethnic Relations A N T H 205 — Multiculturalism A N T H 206 — First Nations o f British C o l u m b i a A N T H 208 — Indigenous Peoples o f North A m e r i c a A N T H 241 — Archaeology F i e l d School A N T H 249 — Comparative Cultures: A F i e l d Study W M S T 122 — W o m e n in Anthropology University Transfer 81 BIOLOGY Instructional Faculty C . B E R E Z O W S K Y , B . S c . (Hons.), M . S c . (Sask.), P h . D . (Guelph) R . G . C A M F I E L D , B . S c . (Hons.) (Monash), P h . D . (UBC) M . D E J O N G - W E S T M A N , B . S c . (Hons.), M . S c . (UBC) M . F I T Z - E A R L E , B . S c . (Nottingham), M . S c , P h . D . (Toronto), C o o r d i n a t o r o f B i o l o g y S. E L L I S , B . S c , M . S c . ( U B C ) N . A . R I C K E R , B . A . (Calif.), M . S c , P h . D . ( U B C ) V . M . T R O U P , B . S c . (Hons.) (McMaster), M . S c . (UBC) L . K . W A D E , B . S c , M.Sc. (UBC), Ph.D. (Austral.Nat. U ) Laboratory Supervisors and Technicians C . B E A T S O N , B . Sc. (Waterloo), M . S c . (Western), Laboratory Supervisor J. C A N N I N G , B . S c , B . C . Prof. Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) , Laboratory Supervisor K . F U L L E R , B . S c . ( S F U ) , Laboratory Technician C . H A R R I S O N , B . S c . (Hons.) ( U V i c ) , Laboratory Technician J. R I C H A R D S O N , B . S c . ( U V i c ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) , R . P . B i o . , Laboratory Supervisor C . S A N D E R S O N , B . S c . (Hons) (Durham), Laboratory Supervisor N . S E G S W O R T H , B . S c . (Hons.) (Michigan), R . T . ( C . S . L . T . ) , Laboratory Supervisor L . W O N G , D i p l . Tech ( B C I T ) Laboratory Technician General Information Capilano College B i o l o g y Department offers courses to meet a variety o f educational needs. The B I O L 104/ 105 and 104/113 sequences meet the laboratory science requirements for Arts students as well as general interest biology courses. Students planning a major in B i o l o g y or another life science, such as Botany, C e l l B i o l o g y , Ecology, Genetics, Marine B i o l o g y , M i c r o b i o l o g y , Physiology, Oceanography or Z o o l o g y , should enrol in B I O L 106/ 107 or 110, and B I O L 111. Students lacking a " C + " in B I O L 12 (or B B I O 042) and/or Chemistry 11 should enrol in B I O L 106/107 rather than B I O L 110. University 82 Transfer A complete selection o f second year courses is available which meet the credit transfer requirements o f S F U , U B C and U V i c . Some o f these courses may be included in the requirements for pre-professional programs, and for specific life science programs. Students who intend to enter professions such as Agriculture, Dentistry, M e d i c i n e and Pharmacy should consult the institutions offering the programs to determine the specific B i o l o g y and other courses they require. Not all second year courses are offered each year. A l l biology courses except B I O L 200, B I O L 201 and B I O L 206 require weekly laboratory periods and/or field trips. L a b manuals for those courses requiring them must be purchased. Some courses also have field trips, which have extra costs associated with them. Some courses may have materials costs associated with them. University Transfer Credit A l l biology courses transfer to S F U , U B C , and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further information. U n i v e r s i t y T r a n s f e r P r o g r a m in B i o l o g y FIRST YEAR B I O L 106/107 or 110, and B I O L 111 C H E M 110/111 P H Y S 110/111 or 108/111 or 114/115 M A T H 116/117 and 126/127 English (six credits) SECOND YEAR A complete selection of second year courses which are transferable to all B . C . universities is available. Consult the B i o l o g y Department for the specific requirements to transfer into third year at the university o f your choice. Courses B I O L 104 — Human Biology I B I O L 105 — Environmental B i o l o g y B I O L 106 — Basic Introductory B i o l o g y I B I O L 107 — Basic Introductory B i o l o g y II B I O L 110 — Introductory B i o l o g y I B I O L 111 — Introductory B i o l o g y II B I O L 113 — H u m a n B i o l o g y II B I O L 200 — Genetics I B I O L 201 — Genetics II B I O L 204 — Ecology I B I O L 205 — Ecology II B I O L 206 — E c o l o g y o f the Western Pacific B I O L 210 — M o r p h o l o g y o f Vascular Plants B I O L 212 — Invertebrate Z o o l o g y B I O L 213 — Vertebrate Z o o l o g y B I O L 214 — Cell Biology B I O L 215 — Biochemistry B I O L 220 — B I O L 221 — Microbiology I N o t e : CHEM 110 and 111 students: students who lack mathematics prerequisite or corequisites should see a Chemistry instructor prior to registration to discuss possible prerequisite waivers. SECOND M i c r o b i o l o g y II YEAR C H E M 200/201 and 204/205/206 Transfer to U B C or S F U (consult a faculty member) P H Y S 210/218 and 222 M A T H 200 and 230 Elective CHEMISTRY Instructional E n g l i s h (six credits) Elective (six credits) Faculty S. A L B O N , B . S c , M . S c . ( U B C ) M . E . E V A N S , B . S c . (South Wales), P h . D . (London, UK) P . C . L E C O U T E U R , B . S c , M . S c . (Auckland), P h . D . (Calif.), Chair, Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n T. C U S A N E L L I , B . S c , P h . D . ( S F U ) K . G . T Y E R S , B . S c . (Hons), M . S c . (Western Ontario), Ph. D . ( S F U ) , C o o r d i n a t o r o f C h e m i s t r y , G e o l o g y and Physics Science elective from math or physics Students planning to pursue a major or honours course in chemistry should consult a faculty member as requirements differ with individual universities. Courses C H E M 030 — A n Introduction to Chemistry C H E M 101 — Fundamentals of Chemistry C H E M 110 — B o n d i n g and Structure Laboratory Supervisors and Technicians B . A D D I S O N - J O N E S , B . S c . (Hons) (Manitoba), Laboratory Supervisor K . B . H A C K , B . S c . ( U B C ) , Laboratory Supervisor B . J . M O I R , D i p . Tech. ( B C I T ) , Laboratory Technician D . F . S H E R A T O N , B . A . S c , P h . D . ( U B C ) Laboratory Supervisor I. S M I T H , H . N . C . (Aberdeen), Laboratory Supervisor General Information A l l chemistry courses include weekly three-hour laboratory periods unless otherwise stated. The cost o f the labs is included i n the course tuition fee except for lab manuals. Students are required to have and wear safety glasses i n a l l laboratory periods. C H E M 030 and C H E M 101 fulfil the entrance chemistry requirement for the Nursing program at B C I T . University Transfer Credit A l l chemistry courses, except 030, carry transfer credit to S F U , U B C and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further information. University Transfer Program in Chemistry FIRST YEAR C H E M 110/111 P H Y S 114/115 or 110/111 or 108/111 M A T H 116/117 and 126/127 C H E M 111 — C h e m i c a l D y n a m i c s and Energetics C H E M 200 — Organic Chemistry I C H E M 201 — Organic Chemistry II C H E M 204 — Introduction to Physical Chemistry C H E M 205 — Introduction to Inorganic Chemistry C H E M 206 — Introduction to A n a l y t i c a l Chemistry CHINESE Instructional Faculty T. Z . C H O W , B . A . Hons., (Beijing Foreign Studies U.), M . A . (SFU) Y . Q U , B . A . (Shandong Teachers' U . ) , M . A . (Beijing Foreign Studies U . ) , P h . D . ( U B C ) Language Associate F u , Z h i a i , B . A . (Beijing Language Institute) Y a n g , Joan, B . A . , (Central U . for Nationalities, Beijing), M . A . (Oregon State) General Information A l l courses i n M a n d a r i n Chinese consist o f four hours of lecture, one hour o f conversation, and assignments in the multimedia lab on a drop-in basis (involving approximately 45 minutes). Students with a competence i n the language beyond the level o f the course i n w h i c h they are registered w i l l be required to withdraw. F o r example, native speakers o f Mandarin and/or other Chinese dialects and those who have taken M a n d a r i n courses i n high school are not University Transfer 83 allowed in the first year courses. Students with some knowledge o f Chinese must consult with an instructor for placement. University rules governing such students differ within departments, but the Language Department has correspondence dealing with matters relevant to credit transfer and point o f entry. In order to avoid misunderstanding, students are invited to discuss these problems with the Department prior to enrolment. Students who are not sure o f their language level must consult an instructor. University Transfer Credit The following Chinese courses at Capilano College transfer to U B C , S F U and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further information. Courses C H I N 100 — Beginning Chinese I C H I N 101 — Beginning Chinese II C H I N 150 — Spoken M a n d a r i n I* C H I N 151 — Spoken M a n d a r i n II* C H I N 200 — Intermediate Chinese I C H I N 201 — Intermediate Chinese II * F o r speakers of other Chinese dialects. COMMERCE Instructional Faculty J.E. S A Y R E , B . S . , B . A . (Denver), M . A . (Boston) K . V . T O W S O N , B . S c , M.Sc. (SFU) J. W A T E R S , B . A . (Hons.) M . A . , P h . D . ( S F U ) C . W A T K I S S , B . S c (Carleton), M . S c , P h . D . (Toronto) J. W I L S O N , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , C A . M . Y A S E R I , B . A . (Hons.) (Thames), M . A . (Sask.) General Information The College offers a two-year transfer package to U B C consisting of Year I and Y e a r II as follows: Year I Students do not need to apply to the Commerce Department to enter the first year. S i m p l y apply to the University Transfer program through the Registrar's Office and ensure that the following courses are taken: a) E C O N 111 and 112; b) E N G L 100 followed by O N E o f E N G L 103, 104, 105, 106; c) M A T H 108 and 109 University 84 Transfer • the prerequisite to M A T H 108 is the M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R completion i n the past year o f M a t h 12 with a B grade or better, or M A T H 105, M A T H 107 or B M T H 046 with at least a C - grade. • Students not ready for M A T H 108 w i l l take M A T H 107, followed by M A T H 108 and 109. Students not ready for M A T H 107 should see an advisor at the C o l l e g e ' s A d v i s i n g Centre to plan a preparatory year. N o t e : MATH 110/111, or 116/117 and 126/127 may be substituted for MATH 108/109, but this combination is oriented more toward science than business; d) Four electives: any four university transfer courses; • Commerce students should N O T take M a t h 101 or 102. • Year II U p o n completion o f Y e a r I, students must A P P L Y for admission to the Commerce program by completing a "Commerce Program A p p l i c a t i o n " w h i c h can be obtained from the Social Sciences D i v i s i o n . There are 36 seats available i n Y e a r II and preference is given to students with the best Year I records who want to T A K E T H E E N T I R E Y E A R II P R O G R A M with the intention of transferring to U B C . Applications to the Commerce program should be made immediately i n late spring once the Y e a r I courses are complete and grades received. Students who wait until late summer may find that all spaces have been filled. In the fall term students admitted to Year II take: C O M M 290, 292, 293, E C O N 211 and one university transfer elective. A fall term Grade Point Average ( G P A ) o f 2.67 with no grade below C - m u s t be achieved to continue into the spring term, when the following courses are taken: C O M M 291, 294, 297, 392 and one university transfer elective. Transfer to University of British Columbia The current policy o f U B C is to automatically admit into Y e a r III all students who complete Capilano C o l l e g e ' s Y e a r II program (in one year) with a G P A i n Y e a r II o f 3.0 or higher. Transfer to Simon Fraser University or University of Victoria Some courses i n the U B C transfer package do not transfer to S F U or U V i c . Students wishing to transfer to either o f these institutions are, therefore, strongly urged to consult A d v i s i n g to determine an alternative course o f action. Courses satisfactory G P A for transfer to a university. C O M M 290 — Quantitative Methods for Business C O M M 291 — Applications of Statistics in Business C O M M 292 — Principles o f Organizational Behaviour Students w i l l not be allowed to retake a prerequisite once they have completed a subsequent course with a " C - " grade or better. C O M M 293 — Financial Accounting C O M M 294 — Managerial Accounting Courses C O M M 297 — Capital Markets and Institutions C O M P 101 — C O M M 392 — Labour Relations C O M P 120 — Introduction to Computer Science Computers and their Applications C O M P 125 — Fundamentals o f Computer Science C O M P 127 — Principles o f Computer Science COMPUTING SCIENCE Instructional Faculty J.D. B O N S E R , B . A . S c , M . A . S c . ( U B C ) , P h . D . (Waterloo), C . N . I . (Novell) P. C A R T E R , B . S c . (Hons) (Sheffield), M . S c , P h . D . (UBC), Coordinator K . C H A N , B . S c . ( S F U ) , M S E E (Wayne State) T. D A K I C , B . S c , M . S c . (Zagreb) E. K U T T N E R , B . S c , M.Sc. ( U B C ) C . W A T K I S S , B . S c (Carleton), M . S c , P h . D . (Toronto), C . N . I . (Novell) D. W E S T C O T T , B . S c , M.Sc. (UBC) General Information The Computing Science Department offers computing science courses at the first-year and second-year university level. Students enrolled in these courses have excellent access to the C o l l e g e ' s computing facilities. Students planning to major i n computing science and science students fulfilling computing science elective requirements normally take C O M P 120 and either 125 or 127 i n their first year. Other students wishing an introduction to computers and programming normally take C O M P 101. C O M P 210 — Data Structures and Abstraction C O M P 211 — Computer D e s i g n and Architecture I C O M P 212 — Computer Design and Architecture II C O M P 213 — Introduction to Software Engineering DIPLOMA IN COMPUTING SCIENCE Capilano College has identified the need to offer formal recognition for the completion o f a certain set of courses in Computing Science. The D i p l o m a in Computing Science provides both part-time and fulltime students an opportunity to obtain an understanding o f the fundamentals of computers and programming, enabling students to secure many o f today's computing career opportunities. Requirements: Completion of 60 credit hours of course work (the final 30 credits taken at Capilano College) with a m i n i m u m grade point average of 2.00. Courses must include the following: English: 6 credits Credits E N G L 100 Composition E N G L 103 or E N G L 104 or E N G L 105 3.0 3.0 Math: 10 credits Computing courses are continuously being updated. Please contact the Computing Science Department for current course offerings and transfer status, or see our W e b page at www.capcollege.bc.ca. M A T H 116/117 Calculus I/Applications of Calculus I M A T H 124 Discrete Mathematics I M A T H 126/127 Calculus II/Applications o f University Transfer Credit Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Prerequisites The Computing Science Department requires at least a " C - " grade i n a prerequisite before allowing a student to proceed with a subsequent course. Students should note that while a " C - " is the m i n i m u m required to proceed, a better grade is recommended to ensure the best chance o f success in the subsequent course and a M A T H 224 Calculus II or Discrete Mathematics II 3.0/1.0 3.0 3.0/1.0 3.0 Communications: 3 credits C M N S 250 Introduction to Technical W r i t i n g 3.0 Computing Science: 19 credits C O M P 120 Introduction to Computer Science 3.0 C O M P 125 Fundamentals o f Computer Science or 3.0 Principles o f Computer Science Data Structures and Abstraction 3.0 3.0 C O M P 127 C O M P 210 University Transfer 85 C O M P 211 C O M P 212 C O M P 213 Computer Design and Architecture I Computer Design and Architecture II Introduction to Software Engineering 3.0 A . J . M O R R I S , B . A . , (Hons.) (Manchester), M . A . (SFU) A.C.I.S. ( U K ) J.E. S A Y R E , B . S . , B . A . (Denver), M . A . (Boston) M . Y A S E R I , B . A . (Hons.) (Thames), M . A . (Sask.) 4.0 General Information 3.0 Notes: • The remaining credits must be made up of courses that transfer to at least one of the following universities: UBC, SFU, UVic. • Those with equivalent electives or experience may have the CMNS 250 requirement waived. Students wanting to take both COMP 125 and COMP 127 may apply credits from both courses towards the diploma. Students will not be allowed to take a prerequisite course for credit towards the diploma once they have completed a subsequent course with a "C-" grade or better. • • • Students transferring credits from another institution may not accumulate more than 22 transfer credits in Computing Science towards the diploma. CRIMINOLOGY Instructional Faculty Economics is the social science concerned with the allocation o f scarce resources and the production, distribution and consumption o f goods and services. E C O N 100 is an introductory course w h i c h raises and explores the kinds o f issues that economists deal with. It therefore serves both as a survey course for those students planning to major i n other areas o f the social sciences and as an introduction to the discipline for those who are undecided about their future plans. Students who plan to major i n Economics must complete E C O N 111 and 112 before proceeding to second year courses at the College or the universities. Students who plan to major i n economics at S F U are also advised to complete their second year economics requirements from E C O N 250, 252, 290 or 291. E C O N 250 and 252 are designed both for students majoring in Economics and for other second year social science students who need economic history courses to c o m plement their studies, e.g. Political Studies. Students who plan to enter the Commerce program must take E C O N 111 and 112 i n their first year. C. H A T H A W A Y , B . A . ( S . U . N . Y . ) M . A . (Wash U . ) University Transfer Credit General Information Criminology is the study of all aspects o f crime from an interdisciplinary and integrative approach. The goal of Criminology is to reveal the complexities o f c r i m i nal behaviour and society's reaction to crime. C r i m i nology also offers both theoretical and practical knowledge o f the Canadian criminal justice system. C R I M 101 transfers to S F U , U B C , and U V i c . Unless otherwise indicated after the course description, all Economics courses transfer to the universities. Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Courses E C O N 1 0 0 — Introduction to Economics E C O N 111 — Principles o f M i c r o e c o n o m i c Theory E C O N 112 — Principles of Macroeconomic Theory Courses E C O N 207 — Managerial Economics C R I M 101 — Introduction to C r i m i n o l o g y E C O N 210 — M o n e y and B a n k i n g N o t e : PHIL 140 and 141 transfer to SFU as criminology courses. E C O N 211 — Intermediate M i c r o e c o n o m i c Analysis ECONOMICS E C O N 212 — Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis E C O N 250 — E c o n o m i c History o f the Pre-Industrial Era E C O N 252 — E c o n o m i c History o f the Industrial E r a E C O N 2 9 0 — Public P o l i c y I Instructional Faculty N . A M O N , B . A . , (Hons.) (Kent), M . A . ( S F U ) J. C E K O T A , B . A . (Hamburg), M . A . (Waterloo), P h . D . (Calgary) K . W . M O A K , B.A. (UVic), M.P.A. (UVic) University 86 Transfer E C O N 291 — Public P o l i c y II ENGINEERING Instructional Faculty J.D. B O N S E R , B . A . S c , M . A . S c ( U B C ) , P h . D . (Waterloo), C o n v e n o r o f E n g i n e e r i n g General Information Capilano College offers a full first-year university transfer program in Engineering. Bachelor degree completion generally requires three additional years o f study at U B C , S F U or U V i c . Transfer to University of British Columbia The Capilano College first-year Engineering program is modelled after that o f U B C . Students who complete first-year Engineering are eligible to be considered for admission to second-year Engineering at U B C provided they have obtained an overall grade point average o f at least 2.5. Students who elect to take the program part-time are required to have completed all of the courses in the first year core program (except A P S C 120 and A P S C 121) to be considered as Engineering Transfer students on transfer to U B C . The Faculty o f A p p l i e d Science at U B C offers programs leading to the Bachelor o f A p p l i e d Science ( B . A . S c . ) degree in the following areas o f engineering: Bio-Resource, C h e m i c a l , C i v i l , Electrical, G e o l o g i c a l , M e c h a n i c a l , Metals and Materials, M i n i n g and M i n e r a l Process, and Engineering Physics. Students w i l l normally complete the B . A . S c . degree with three additional years o f study at U B C , except for Engineering Physics, w h i c h requires four additional years. Transfer to Simon Fraser University The School o f Engineering Science at S F U offers fouryear programs leading to a Bachelor o f A p p l i e d Science ( B . A . S c ) degree in Electronics Engineering, Computer Engineering, Engineering Physics, B i o m e d i cal Engineering and Systems Engineering. Students who complete first-year engineering at Capilano College with a grade point average of at least 3.0 may be eligible for admission to second-year engineering. E l i g i b l e students must contact S F U ' s School o f Engineering Science to arrange for a summer course in Basic Electronics Engineering to allow for direct entry into semester three of the Engineering Science common core. Transfer to University of Victoria The Faculty o f Engineering at U V i c offers programs leading to the Bachelor of Engineering (B.Eng.) degree in Electrical, M e c h a n i c a l and Computer Engineering. The B . E n g . degree consists o f eight academic and six work terms. Students who complete first-year engineering at Capilano College with a grade point average o f at least 2.5 may be eligible for admission to second year at UVic. Admission General In addition to satisfying the general admission requirements for the College (see " A d m i s s i o n " section in this Calendar), students must apply for admission to the engineering program itself by submitting an "Engineering Program A p p l i c a t i o n " , available from the Registrar's Office or the A d v i s i n g Centre. This form, together with official transcripts and other pertinent documents, should be received by the Registrar's Office before the end o f M a r c h . Enrolment is limited to 36 students, and students are selected on the basis o f their academic record. Students who apply to the engineering program after M a r c h risk having their applications denied due to lack o f available spaces. Note that students may be required to achieve an acceptable grade in a diagnostic test before enrolling i n some courses in the Engineering program (e.g. E N G L 100, M A T H 116). Please see the individual department sections o f the Calendar for details. Prospective students are encouraged to take these tests early to avoid delays in acceptance and/or registration. Admission from Secondary School Students entering the engineering program directly from secondary school must satisfy the general admission requirements o f the College (see " A d m i s s i o n " section in this Calendar) and have B . C . Grade 12 graduation (or equivalent) with at least a " B " in M a t h 12 and at least a " B " average in Chemistry 12 and Physics 12. H i g h school students are encouraged to graduate with E n g l i s h 12 and Calculus 12 i f they intend to study Engineering. Poor performance in E n g l i s h and M a t h hinders a student's ability to complete the program and ultimately to obtain employment as an engineer. University Transfer 87 A d m i s s i o n f r o m First Y e a r S c i e n c e Second Term Registration Students may apply for admission to the Engineering Transfer program after completion o f some or a l l o f first-year science. A m i n i m u m 2.5 G P A in transferable courses is required to be eligible. Exemptions w i l l be given from some first-year engineering courses i f the student achieved a grade of at least " C " in the equivalent science course. In that case, the student w o u l d then typically take a m i x o f first-year engineering and second-year science courses. Students require a G P A of at least 1.8 i n the transferable courses o f the first term of the Engineering program to remain i n the program for the second term. A d m i s s i o n as P a r t - T i m e o r M a t u r e S t u d e n t Students who have been out o f school for a number of years and those who wish to begin their studies towards an Engineering degree on a part-time basis are encouraged to apply. Applicants w i l l be considered on an individual basis. Prospective students who have not studied M a t h , Physics or Chemistry for several years, or who lack grade 12 equivalency in any of these subjects, are encouraged to upgrade their background before applying. A l l students who do not have a good current mark in grade 12 equivalent M a t h course must write the Math Placement Test. i Transfer to University U p o n completion of the first year, students require a G P A of at least 2.5 to be eligible for admission into second-year engineering at U B C and U V i c , and a G P A o f at least 3.0 for S F U . Since admission to engineering programs is very competitive, students should realize that the above m i n i mum G P A values do not guarantee a d m i s s i o n , and that specific engineering options may require values well in excess o f the m i n i m u m . Curriculum First Y e a r C o r e ( f o r d i r e c t e n t r y f r o m secondary school) Credits FIRST TERM A P S C 120 Introduction to Engineering APSC150 C H E M 110 Engineering Graphics Principles & Methods o f A d m i s s i o n in J a n u a r y Chemistry I Introduction to Computer 3.0 C O M P 120 A limited number o f places in the program are available for the spring term. Students must have successfully completed M A T H 116/117, C H E M 110 and P H Y S 114, with a m i n i m u m 2.5 G P A in transferable courses, to be considered for admission. W i t h completion o f Engineering courses usually offered in the summer at other colleges, it is possible to complete the first-year Engineering program before the following fall term. E N G L 100 Science Composition Calculus I Applications o f Calculus I Fundamental Physics I 3.0 3.0 Registration Qualified candidates are notified o f their acceptance into the program by mail. Acceptance begins in M a y , and continues through the summer until all places i n the program are taken. Students have two weeks from the date o f the acceptance letter to reply, submitting a non-refundable deposit, to ensure a seat in the E n g i neering Transfer program. Students who complete A d v a n c e d Placement ( A P ) courses with sufficiently high grades are eligible for advanced credit, and may choose to complete other electives instead of the A P credit course. Please see the" Admissions section o f the Calendar for more details. University 88 M A T H 116 M A T H 117 P H Y S 114 1.0 3.0 3.0 1.0 3,0 20.0 SECOND TERM A P S C 121 C H E M 111 M A T H 126 M A T H 127 M A T H 152 Society and the Engineer Principles & Methods o f Chemistry II Calculus II Applications of Calculus II Linear A l g e b r a & Differential Equations P H Y S 115 Fundamental Physics II Fundamental Physics III P H Y S 116 Complementary Studies Elective Credits 1.0 3.0 3.0 1.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 10 20.0 First Y e a r C o r e ( f o r s t u d e n t s t r a n s f e r r i n g f r o m first-year science) Students who have completed first-year science successfully may be exempted from certain Engineering courses i f they have achieved a grade o f " C " or better i n the equivalent Science courses. A typical course load may be: Transfer i FIRST TERM A P S C 120 APSC150 M A T H 200 M A T H 230 Electives Credits Introduction to Engineering Engineering Graphics Linear A l g e b r a Calculus III SECOND TERM A P S C 121 C M N S 250 M A T H 231 M A T H 235 P H Y S 116 Elective 1.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6,0 16.0 Credits Society and the Engineer 1.0 Introduction to Technical W r i t i n g 3.0 Calculus I V 3.0 Introduction to Differential Equations 3.0 Fundamental Physics III 3.0 3J) 16.0 Notes: M . H I N D M A R C H , B.A., M.A. (UBC) C. H U R D L E , B.A., M . A . (UVic) D. H . J A N T Z E N , B . A . ( U B C ) , M . A . (York) R . K N I G H T O N . B . A . (Hons.), M . A . ( S F U ) H . L E U N G , B . A . (Hons.) (Oxford), M . A . (Wisconsin) K . L E W I S , B . A . (Hons.) (Queens), M . A . ( U B C ) , P h . D . (UVic) D . M U N T E A N U , M . A . (Bucharest), M . A . ( U B C ) R . N I C K O L I C H U K , B . A . (Carleton), M . A . ( U B C ) J. P E N B E R T H Y , B . A . (Univ. o f Natal), M . A . , P h . D . (UBC) M . Q U A R T E R M A I N , B.A., L.L.B., M.A. (UBC) W . G . S C H E R M B R U C K E R , B . A . (Capetown), P.Grad.Cert. in E d . (London), M . A . , P h . D . ( U B C ) R.G. SHERRIN, B.F.A., M.F.A. (UBC) G . S T A N L E Y , B . A . , M . A . , (San Francisco State U . ) S. T H E S E N , B . A . , M . A . ( S F U ) K. W A L L , B.A., M . A . (SFU) 1. The above science transfer curriculum assumes that the student has obtained maximum exemption for equivalent science courses. Other course mixes are possible. A . W E S T C O T T , B . A . (Alberta). M . A . (Queens). P h . D . (Toronto) 2. Maximum exemption consists of the following courses: CHEM 110/111; MATH 116/117 and 126/ 127; PHYS114/115; COMP 100 LEVEL (EXCEPT COMP 101) 6 credits. Unless otherwise indicated after the course description, all E n g l i s h courses transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. 3. The electives will usually be "complementary studies" (i.e. non-science) electives. For first-year E n g l i s h transfer credit to the universities, students must take two courses of: a) E N G L 100, 103, 104, 105, or 106. Scholarships A number o f scholarships administered by the College are available to Engineering students. There are scholarships for both incoming high school students and students entering from first-year Science. These scholarships include tuition waivers, textbooks, calculators, as well as scholarship grants. Please refer to the Financial A i d Department. ENGLISH Instructional Faculty T. A C T O N , B . A . (Victoria), M . A . , P h . D . (Calgary) J. C L I F F O R D , B . A . , M . A . ( U B C ) , P h . D . ( Y o r k ) P.L. C O N N E L L , B.A., M . A . , Ph.D. ( U B C ) R . C O U P E , B . A . (Tasmania), P h . D . ( U B C ) P.L. C O U P E Y , B . A . (McGill), M . A . ( U B C ) M . L . F A H L M A N R E I D , B . A . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Toronto) G . N . F O R S T , B.A., Ph.D. ( U B C ) S.R. G I L B E R T , B . A . ( U V i c ) , M . A . ( U B C ) W . G O E D E , B . A . (Wisconsin), M . A . (Edinburgh), P h . D . (California) University Transfer Credit For second-year E n g l i s h transfer credit to the universities, E n g l i s h majors should take E n g l i s h 200/201; all other second year students can take any two secondyear level E n g l i s h courses. # English Diagnostic Test (EDT) Those students who wish to enrol in E n g l i s h courses must submit the results of the Language Proficiency Index Test or the C o l l e g e ' s E n g l i s h Diagnostic Test (EDT). Students with any one o f the f o l l o w i n g are exempt from this requirement: I. a final grade o f " A " or higher in E n g l i s h 12 or English Literature 12, or 2. a final grade o f 4 or higher in an Advanced Placement course in E n g l i s h Composition or E n g l i s h Literature, or 3. a final grade of 6 or higher in the International Baccalaureate course in E n g l i s h A or E n g l i s h B , or 4. a final grade o f " A " i n B E N G 042, or 5. a final grade of " B - " or higher in an E n g l i s h transfer course from another college or university, or 6. a degree from an English-speaking university. University Transfer 89 E D T s are scheduled monthly throughout the year. During registration periods, E D T s are scheduled almost daily. The times for these sittings are published in the timetables. Students wishing to write the E D T must pay the exam fee in advance at the Registrar's Office and bring receipts to the appropriate test sitting. If y o u need further information, please contact the Humanities D i v i s i o n (984-4957). FRENCH Instructional L . C A N T I N O R R - E W I N G , B . A . (Montreal), M . A . (SFU) L . G A R E A U , B . A . (Laval), M . A . ( S F U ) A. S I M P S O N , B . Ed, M . A . , Ph.D. ( U B C ) Instructional English as a Second Language See listing in the Preparatory Programs section. Writing Centre A l l students registered at the College may come to the W r i t i n g Centre for advice on work i n progress or help with writing problems. The Centre is not a proofreading service, but aims to help students develop their writing ability. The Centre also offers resources for writing: quiet space, a collection o f reference books, handout sheets and exercises, and computers with word processing, outlining, and editing programs. The W r i t i n g Centre is located i n F R 4 0 2 . It is staffed by faculty members from the English, E S L , and A B E departments. Open hours are posted. Courses E N G L 010 — Language Skills E N G L 100 — Composition Faculty Associates J. G A C I N A , B . A . , P . D . P . ( S F U ) H . L A C O U R S E , D i p . Court Interpreting ( V C C ) , D i p . Conflict Resolution (Mediation), Justice Institute (B.C.) Summary of Programs LEVEL COURSES Beginning French ( 0 - G r a d e 11) F R E N 100/101 U n i v . Preparatory French (Grade 12) FREN 120/121 1st year U n i v . French FREN 170/171 2nd year U n i v . French FREN 270/271 General Information A l l courses in French consist o f four hours o f lecture, one hour of conversation, and assignments i n the multimedia lab on a drop-in basis (involving approximately 45 minutes). E N G L 190 — Creative W r i t i n g E N G L 191 — Creative W r i t i n g Students with a competence in the language beyond the level o f the course i n w h i c h they are registered w i l l be required to withdraw. Students with an enhanced speaking ability should register i n the special section of F R E N 170 or 171 or i n F R E N 270 or 271. Students who are not sure o f their language level should contact an instructor. E N G L 200 — English Literature to 1660 E N G L 201 — E n g l i s h Literature Since 1660 University Transfer Credit E N G L 103 — Studies in Contemporary Literature E N G L 104 — Fiction E N G L 105 — Poetry E N G L 106 — Drama E N G L 202 — Canadian Literature - Beginnings to Modernism E N G L 203 — Canadian Literature - M o d e r n i s m and Beyond E N G L 205 — M o d e r n A m e r i c a n Literature E N G L 208 — Studies in Fiction (The N o v e l ) E N G L 209 — Studies in Poetry E N G L 210 — Studies i n D r a m a E N G L 211 — Studies in Short Fiction E N G L 212 — Traditions in Western Literature E N G L 213 — Readings in W o r l d Literature E N G L 290 — Creative W r i t i n g - Poetry E N G L 291 — Creative W r i t i n g - Fiction W M S T 104 — W o m e n Writers and Feminist C r i t i c i s m W M S T 106 — Contemporary A m e r i c a n W o m e n Writers University 90 Transfer A l l French courses are transferable to S F U , U B C and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further information. Courses F R E N 100 — Beginning French I F R E N 101 — Beginning French II F R E N 120 — University Preparatory French I F R E N 121 — University Preparatory French II F R E N 170 — First Y e a r University French I F R E N 171 — First Y e a r University French II F R E N 270 — Second Y e a r University French I F R E N 271 — Second Y e a r University French II GEOGRAPHY Instructional Faculty K . E W I N G , B . A . , M . S c . (Michigan) C. G R A T H A M , B . S c ,M.Sc. (UBC) G E O G 201 — U r b a n Studies G E O G 202 — U r b a n F i e l d Studies G E O G 205 — A s i a Pacific Geography G E O G 214 — O u r Atmospheric Environment G E O G 221 — M a p and A i r p h o t o Interpretation C . G R E E N B E R G , B . A . , M . A . , ( U . of Manitoba), P h . D . (UBC) S. M A C L E O D , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . ( U B C ) B. M C G I L L I V R A Y , B.A., M . A . (UBC) J. M E L I G R A N A , B . A . (Toronto), M . A . (Queens), Ph.D. (SFU) J. M I K I T A , B . A . , M . A . ( S F U ) S. R O S S , B . S c , M . S c . ( U B C ) C . S C H R E A D E R , B . S c . (Hons.) (Trent), M . S c . (McMaster) General Information Geography courses are offered for students w h o are interested i n pursuing a career i n geography as w e l l as for those students desiring both Arts and Science electives, or for those w h o wish to have a better understanding o f the cultural and physical landscapes. The study o f geography opens the doors for men and women i n a wide variety of fields including: teaching, urban planning, forestry, resource management, tourism, recreation, economic consulting, mining, fisheries, geographic information systems, meteorology, and map making. The focus o f geography is on the environment i n w h i c h we live. These courses i n geography w i l l give y o u a whole new perspective on the world. University Transfer Credit A l l Geography courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further information. Instructional Faculty D . J . A . A T H A I D E , B . S c . (Hons) ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) , B . C . Prof. Teacher's Cert. A . G . T H O M L I N S O N , B . A . , M . S c . ( U B C ) , B . C . Prof. Teacher's Cert. General Information Geology courses are designed for students planning a university degree program i n the geological sciences or in the arts, humanities or social sciences. G E O L 110 and 111 are especially appropriate for students in need of a laboratory science. They provide an understanding of the origin, structure, composition and history o f the earth. Courses include weekly laboratory investigations and several field trips, both local and distant (overnight). L a b tuition fees are included i n the course fee, however students must purchase a lab manual and testing kit, and share some field trip costs. University Transfer Credit A l l G e o l o g y courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further information. Geological Sciences (including G E O P H Y S I C S , G E O C H E M I S T R Y , GEOLOGICAL ENGINEERING, ENVIRONMENT A L STUDIES A N D OTHER E A R T H SCIENCES) Courses G E O G 100 — H u m a n Geography: People, Places and Cultures G E O G 101 — Environmental Geography: Perception and Change G E O G 102 — Environmental Geography: G l o b a l Concerns G E O G 106 — British C o l u m b i a : A Regional Analysis G E O G 108 — Canada: A Nation of Regions G E O G 112 — Introduction to Earth Environments G E O G 114 — GEOLOGY Weather and Climate FIRST YEAR ONLY G E O L 110/111 P H Y S 108/111 or 110/111 or 114/115 C H E M 110/111 M A T H 116/117 a n d 126/127 E N G L (six credits) Courses G E O L 110 — Physical G e o l o g y G E O L 111 — Historical G e o l o g y G E O G 200 — Technology and E c o n o m i c Environments University Transfer 91 GERMAN Instructional Faculty B . H A N K I N , B . A . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Wash.), Teach. D i p . The student wishing to major i n German fulfils department requirements with U B C G E R M 310, w h i c h may be taken i n the second year i f the student has first class standing i n G E R M 200 or third year by permission o f the department. (UBC) Instructional Courses Associate R. F R E I B E R G , B . E d . (Gottingen University, Germany) G E R M 100 — B e g i n n i n g German I G E R M 101 — Beginning German II G E R M 200 — General Information Intermediate German I G E R M 201 — Intermediate German II A l l courses in German consist of four hours of lecture, one hour o f conversation, and assignments in the multimedia lab on a drop-in basis (involving approximately 45 minutes). HISTORY Native speakers o f German are not allowed in first year Instructional courses. Those who wish to take a first- or second-year German course must consult with a German instructor first. University rules governing such students differ within departments, but the Language Department has correspondence dealing with matters relevant to credit transfer and point o f entry. In order to avoid any misunderstanding, such students are invited to discuss these problems with the department prior to enrolment. R. C A M P B E L L , B . A . (California), M . A . ( U B C ) , P h . D . (SFU) Students with a German A b i t u r are not permitted to enrol in the courses. Students with a competence i n the language beyond the level o f the course in which they are registered w i l l be required to withdraw. Students who are not sure o f their language level should contact an instructor. University Transfer Credit A l l German courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further information. S F U : Students who wish to proceed to S F U and to pursue further courses in German are reminded o f the present equivalency standards. Transfer and course challenge credit i n German w i l l be given at S F U for Capilano College German courses to a total o f 11 semester hours. Exemption from and placement in higher courses are determined by the results o f a placement test or other assessment procedure. U B C : In the case o f U B C , present equivalent standards provide transfer credit on the following basis: Capilano College G E R M 100 and 101 (3 credits each) G E R M 200 and 201 (3 credits each) University Transfer 92 UBC G E R M 100 (6) G E R M 200 (6) Faculty R. F U H R , B . A . ( U B C ) , M . A . ( M c G i l l ) H . J O N E S , B . A . (Hons.), M . A . ( U B C ) M . L E G A T E S , B . A . (Wash.), M . A . , M . P h i l . , P h . D . (Yale) D . S U T H E R L A N D , B . A . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Memorial) Ph.D. ( S F U ) General Information History teaches an understanding of the past that helps people cope with the present and suggests possibilities for the future. C r i t i c a l thinking and analysis form the core o f this discipline and are essential skills i n a rapidly changing society. Students planning to major i n History should have at least four History courses at the College. These can be A N Y four courses. A n intended major should also have a broad sampling o f courses i n Social Sciences and Humanities. Students planning to major i n History at S F U should take six History courses i n the first two years. For U B C the requirement is four History courses. Students planning to take honours should acquire a reading knowledge o f an appropriate nonE n g l i s h language. University Transfer Credit A l l History courses at Capilano (including W M S T 220) transfer to S F U , U B C , U N B C and U V i c and count as Humanities credit for the Associate Degree. Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further information. Courses H I S T 100 — History o f the Ancient W o r l d H I S T 102 — Europe from the Reformation to the French Revolution H I S T 103 — Europe in the 19th and 20th Centuries H I S T 108 — Issues and Themes i n U . S . History: 1607-1877 H I S T 109 — Issues and Themes i n U . S . History: 1865 - Present Students with competence i n the language beyond the level o f the course in w h i c h they are registered w i l l be required to withdraw. Students who are not sure o f their language level should contact an instructor. Courses J A P N 100 — Beginning Japanese II Intermediate Japanese I Intermediate Japanese II H I S T 110 — Canada Before Confederation J A P N 200 — H I S T 111 — Canada Since Confederation J A P N 201 — H I S T 205 — British C o l u m b i a H I S T 207 — Europe i n the M i d d l e A g e s and Renaissance H I S T 208 — Canadian-American Relations H I S T 209 — History o f the Native Peoples o f Canada W M S T 220 — W o m e n and the Past: A Historical Survey Beginning Japanese I J A P N 101 — KINESIOLOGY Instructional Faculty M . W A L S H , B.P.E., M . P . E . (UBC), Ph.D. (SFU) General Information JAPANESE Instructional Faculty K. MITO, B.A., M.A. (UBC) Instructional Associate T. B E R W I C K , B . A . (Kobe Gaidai) Y . S H I N B O , Associate o f Arts (Obirin) General Information A l l courses i n Japanese consist o f four hours of lecture, one hour o f conversation, and assignments i n the multimedia lab on a drop-in basis (involving approximately 45 minutes). In order to provide for the most appropriate student placement, students with Japanese 9, 10 or Beginners 11 credit should register in J A P N 100; students with Japanese 11 high school credit should register i n J A P N 101, not J A P N 100. Students with a Japanese 12 high school credit can register in either J A P N 200 or J A P N 101. The Capilano College Department o f Kinesiology and H u m a n Kinetics offers first-year university courses in kinesiology, designed for students planning on transferring to S i m o n Fraser University for second year for completion o f a major or a degree i n the subject. For more information regarding the Kinesiology program please contact the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n , 984-4955. Transfers to the University of British Columbia Human Kinetics program Capilano College Kinesiology courses transfer to the U B C Department o f H u m a n Kinetics, which offers four areas o f concentration: (1) Exercise Science, (2) Health and Fitness, (3) Physical Education, and (4) Leisure and Sport Management. Transfers to the University of Victoria Students who have studied Japanese elsewhere cannot register i n J A P N 100. The University o f V i c t o r i a Faculty o f Education, School o f Physical Education, also accepts transfer o f Kinesiology courses from Capilano College. T o determine w h i c h courses are transferable, advisors at U V i c and/or Capilano College should be consulted. The instructor is available for consultation regarding placements. Contact the department prior to registration i f you are not sure of your placement. Transfers to Simon Fraser University Kinesiology Program University Transfer Credit The following Japanese courses at Capilano College transfer to U B C , S F U , and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further information. The Kinesiology program at S F U offers four different areas o f concentration: (1) A c t i v e Health, (2) Health and Physiological Sciences, (3) H u m a n Factors/ Ergonomics, and (4) H u m a n Movement Sciences. Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. University Transfer 93 Entry Courses Courses K I N . 140 — Contemporary Health Issues K I N . 142 — Introduction to Kinesiology K I N . 143 — Exercise Management LINGUISTICS Instructional Faculty D. G A R D I N E R , B.A., M . A . , Ph.D. (SFU) Y . Q u , B . A . (Shandong Teachers' U . ) , M . A . (Beijing Foreign Studies U . ) , P h . D . ( U B C ) Courses L I N G 100 — Introduction to General Linguistics: Language Structure L I N G 101 — Introduction to General Linguistics: Language Use MATHEMATICS A N D STATISTICS Instructional Faculty A . E . T . B E N T L E Y , B . S c . (Hons.) ( U B C ) , M . A . , P h . D . (Missouri), C o o r d i n a t o r o f M a t h e m a t i c s R . C . B R E W S T E R , B . S c . (Hons.), M . S c . ( U V i c ) , Ph.D. ( S F U ) P. C A R T E R , B . S c . (Hons) (Sheffield) M . S c , P h . D . (UBC) L.F. H A R R I S , B.A., M . A . , (UBC), Ph.D. (Austral. Nat. U ) R. H A U S C H I L D T , B . S c . (Hons.) (Queen's), M . S c . (UBC) J. J O H N S T O N , B . M a t h (Waterloo), B . E d . (Toronto), M . M a t h (Waterloo) L . L A J E U N E S S E , B . M a t h (Hons.) (Waterloo), M . S c . (Carleton) C . M O R G A N , B . S c . (Hons.), M . S c , P h . D (Memorial) K . V . T O W S O N , B . S c , M.Sc. (SFU) R.H. V E R N E R , B . S c (UBC), M.Sc. (EWSU), B.C. Teaching Cert. A . W A T E R M A N , B.Sc. (UBC), M.Sc. (SFU), B.C. Teaching Cert. C . W A T K I S S , B . S c . (Carleton), M . S c , P h . D . (Toronto) Laboratory Supervisor W . L Y N N , B . S c . (Carleton), M . A . S c . (Waterloo) General Information The Mathematics and Statistics Department offers firstand second-year university level courses in mathematics and statistics as w e l l as preparatory courses. University 94 Transfer 1. P r e p a r a t o r y M A T H 009 is an individualized study course for students needing a basic arithmetic refresher. M A T H 090 and 095 are 1.5 credit courses designed for students needing introductory through intermediate level algebra. It is possible to complete both courses i n a single term. The combined M A T H 090/ 095 is recognized by post secondary institutions as a M a t h 11 equivalent. 2. P r e c a l c u l u s M A T H 107 is a precalculus course specifically designed for students planning to pursue a business or commerce program, whereas M A T H 105 focusses more on scientific applications. A l t h o u g h each o f M A T H 105 and 107 is recognized by post secondary institutions as a M a t h 12 equivalent, it is c o m m o n for students even with M a t h 12 completion to take one o f these precalculus courses in preparation for calculus. B o t h 105 and 107 receive individual transfer credit at S F U and U V i c A t U B C transfer credit is granted for a combined precalculus ( M A T H 105 or 107) and calculus ( M A T H 108 or 116) package (except those faculties at U B C which require M a t h 12 for admission). Check the Mathematics Placement Test ( M P T ) section and individual course listings for the prerequisite requirements for each o f M A T H 105 and 107. Based on their M P T results, some students w i l l be allowed to enrol i n M A T H 105 or 107 only i f they enrol i n M A T H 095 concurrently. 3. C a l c u l u s I M A T H 108 is a calculus course designed primarily for students planning to pursue a business or commerce program, whereas M A T H 116 and the associated applications course M A T H 117 are oriented to the sciences. A s enrolment permits separate engineering, life science and physical science streams o f M A T H 116/117 w i l l be offered with each stream covering the same core content but emphasizing examples relevant to the associated applications area. C h e c k the Mathematics Placement Test ( M P T ) section and individual course listings for the prerequisite requirements for each o f M A T H 108 and 116. 4. I n t r o d u c t o r y Statistics M A T H 101 is an introductory statistics course designed primarily for non-science students wanting to fulfil a science elective requirement. 5. Discrete Mathematics M a t h 124 is a discrete mathematics course for computing science. A strong mathematics background is recommended for students taking this as an entry course. Check the Mathematics Placement Test ( M P T ) section and individual course listings for the prerequisite requirements for M A T H 124. 6. Mathematics for Elementary Teachers M A T H 190 is a course designed for future elementary school teachers. This course is intended to transfer to S F U ' s M A T H 190 and to many university colleges' education programs. This course is not normally available for credit to students i n science programs. Specific Program Requirements Students should use the following three sections as guidelines for selecting math courses at the first-year level. Due to the specialized needs o f some programs at the universities, the Mathematics and Statistics Department advises students to consult the university calendars and to seek guidance from a College advisor or math instructor for appropriate course selection. 1. Science, Forestry, Engineering Students planning to pursue science or science related programs are required to take M A T H 116/117 and 126/127. Engineering students should consult the Engineering section in the Calendar. Students planning to pursue mathematics or statistics at U B C should take in their first year: M A T H 116/117 and 126/127 P H Y S 114/115 C H E M 110/111 (or 108/109) C O M P 120/127 E N G L (6 credits) 2. Arts, Social Science T o fulfil a one-year science elective requirement nonscience students typically take M A T H 101/102, although any o f the precalculus/calculus combinations also meet this requirement. Students planning to pursue a psychology program at S F U are required to take M A T H 107 i f they have not completed M a t h 12. 3. Commerce, Business, Economics Students planning to pursue a commerce, business or economics program are required to take M A T H 108 (and M A T H 107 i f the prerequisite requirements for 108 are not met; transfer credit w i l l be given for M A T H 107). In addition M A T H 109 is required for students planning to transfer to the commerce program or economics at U B C . For a detailed description o f commerce courses and program requirements see the Calendar section titled Commerce. University Transfer Credit Except where explicitly noted, all math and statistics courses numbered 101 or higher transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Math Placement Test (MPT) Students wanting to enrol in a Precalculus course ( M A T H 105 or 107), a Calculus I course ( M A T H 108 or 116), or a discrete mathematics course ( M A T H 124), must write a mathematics placement test i f either (or both) of the following two conditions apply: (a) Their mathematics prerequisite course was c o m pleted prior to 1998 for admission into Fall 1999 courses; prior to 1999 for admission into Spring 2000 and Summer 2000 courses. (b) Their mathematics prerequisite course was c o m pleted at a B . C . secondary school (or equivalent) with a final letter grade standing below: " C " in M a t h 12 for admission to M A T H 105 or M A T H 107; " B " in M a t h 12 for admission to M A T H 108; " A " i n M a t h 12, or at least a " B " in both M a t h 12 and Calculus 12, for admission to M A T H 116 or 124. To write the Precalculus placement test, students should have at least a " C " grade in M a t h 11 or at least a " C - " grade i n Math 12. To write the Calculus placement test, students should have at least a " C " grade in M a t h 12. W i t h i n a given year students are not allowed to rewrite the Calculus or Precalculus M P T . A study guide is available for the M P T which provides topic coverage and suggested review material as w e l l as a list o f the scheduled test dates. Please contact the A d v i s i n g Centre or the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n for more information. Graphing Calculator The Mathematics and Statistics Department believes that the graphing calculator greatly enhances mathematics instruction and learning. Students enrolling in M A T H 090/095 or any first year course, M A T H 105 or University Transfer 95 higher, are required to have a graphing calculator. Specific recommendations on make and model w i l l be available during the registration period. L . F A L L S , A . R . C . T . (Toronto), B . M u s . , M . M u s . (UBC) B. F E D O R U K , B.Mus. (UBC) J. G E E , B . M u s . , M . A . ( U B C ) H . H A Y , B . M u s . (Queens), M . M u s . (San Francisco Courses M A T H 009 — Arithmetic M A T H 090 — Introductory A l g e b r a with Functions M A T H 095 — Intermediate A l g e b r a with Functions M A T H 101 — Introduction to Statistics M A T H 102 — Statistical Methods Conserv.) P. H U T T E R , B . M u s . (Eastman), Perf. Cert. (Eastman) L . K A A R I O , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , M . M u s . (W.Wash.), Coordinator D. M C C O Y , B.Mus., M.Mus. ( U B C ) G. M C N A B , B.Mus., M.Mus. ( U B C ) M A T H 105 — Precalculus Mathematics K. M O O R E , B.Mus. (UBC) M A T H 107 — Precalculus for Business and Social Sciences N. NICHOLSON M A T H 108 — Calculus for Business and Social Sciences I A. N O D W E L L , B.Mus. (UBC), M.Mus. (UVic) M A T H 109 — Calculus for Business and Social Sciences II M A T H 116 — Calculus I M A T H 117 — Applications o f Calculus I M A T H 124 — Discrete Mathematics I T. N I C K E L S , B . A . ( U . C . L . A . ) D. O K E , B.Mus. (UBC) D. O V E R G A A R D , B.Mus., M.Mus. (UBC), D . M . A . (USC) G . R A M S B O T T O M , Principal Clarinet, C B C V a n c o u ver Orchestra M A T H 126 — Calculus II S. R E B A N E , D . M . A . (Kentucky) M A T H 127 — Applications of Calculus II P. S C H R E I B E R , B . M u s . ( U B C ) M A T H 152 — Linear A l g e b r a and Differential D. V A N D E R E Y K , B.Mus., M.Mus. ( U B C ) Equations M A T H 190 — Mathematics for Elementary Teachers S. W O O D Y A R D , B . M u s . (Victoria) M A T H 200 — Linear A l g e b r a General Information M A T H 204 — Probability and Statistics for Applications Capilano C o l l e g e offers four music programs: a two- M A T H 205 — Transfer program, a two-year D i p l o m a i n Jazz Studies, Introduction to Probability and Statistics M A T H 215 — Introduction to Analysis year D i p l o m a o f M u s i c from the Bachelor of M u s i c a four-year Degree i n Jazz Studies and a four-year Degree i n M u s i c Therapy. M A T H 224 — Discrete Mathematics II M A T H 230 — Calculus III TWO YEAR DIPLOMA A N D M A T H 231 — Calculus I V TRANSFERABILITY T O THIRD Y E A R M A T H 235 — Introduction to Differential Equations UNIVERSITY Career Opportunities BACHELOR OF MUSIC TRANSFER PROGRAM • Private M u s i c Teacher - with the completion o f the two year d i p l o m a program • first two years toward a M u s i c degree leading to a Instructional Faculty career in M u s i c Education or Performance G . A L C O C K , A . R . C . T . (Toronto) M . A R M A N I N I , A . R . C . T . (Toronto), B . M u s . , M . M u s . (UBC) University Transfer Capilano C o l l e g e offers the first two years of a B a c h - D. ASTOR, B.A. (UBC) elor o f M u s i c Degree. A l l courses i n the Bachelor o f J . B E R A R D U C C I , B . M U S . ( U B C ) , M . A . ( W . Wash.) M u s i c Transfer program are transferable to School o f J . B E R K M A N , B . M u s . (Oberlin), M . M u s . (Jiulliard) M u s i c at the University of British C o l u m b i a and to the N . B O H N A , B.Mus., M.Mus. ( U B C ) Faculty o f M u s i c at the University o f V i c t o r i a . Stu- S. B O S W E L L , A . R . C . M . ( R o y a l C o l l e g e o f M u s i c , dents wishing to transfer to the Faculty o f Arts at U B C , London) S F U , or U V i c with a major in M u s i c should take M U S . S. D E N R O C H E , B . M u s . ( U B C ) 100/101, 112/113, 120/121 i n their first year, and N . D I N O V O , B.Mus., M.Mus. (UT) M U S . 200/201, 212/213, 220/221 i n their second year. University 96 Transfer Our students have also received transfer credit to the following universities: Alberta, Calgary, Dalhousie, Regina, Brandon, Y o r k , Guelph, Western Ontario, M c G i l l and Western Washington. Admission Requirements Entering students should have a basic knowledge o f music rudiments (approximately at the level o f Toronto Conservatory Rudiments II). Registration 1. Returning students may pre-register during the month o f A p r i l . 2. N e w students demonstrating sufficient instrumental and/or theoretical accomplishment in their placement test may preregister during M a y and early August to ensure their enrolment. 3. Students may register during in-person registration. Students entering on piano must be at a grade 10 level (Toronto Conservatory). Piano students w h o require a qualifying term may enrol i n other courses. Graduation Requirements Students entering in composition must have a w o r k i n g knowledge o f diatonic harmony. The complete program requirements must be successfully completed to receive a D i p l o m a in M u s i c Transfer. Students entering i n voice or instruments other than piano must have a performance level acceptable to the faculty. Special Fees and Expenses Admissions Procedure A l l applicants must: 1. C o m p l y with the general admission requirements o f Capilano College and the specific admission requirements for University Transfer. 2. Participate in a private interview with the music coordinator or a program instructor. 3. Write a theory placement test and take an ear test. 4. Play an audition on their major instrument: this w i l l consist o f two contrasting pieces, technique, and sight reading. 5. Write the Capilano College E D T (English Diagnostic Test) or the Provincial L P I . See the E D T information in the Registration section in this Calendar. Please try to have your E D T or L P I mark before your audition and interview. The fees for Private M u s i c Instruction ( P M I . ) w i l l be announced at least one month prior to the beginning o f the fall term. M a x i m u m tuition for full-time study for the 1998/99 academic year was $ 1,225 per semester. Included in this m a x i m u m tuition are the costs o f all required Private M u s i c Instruction. Program Content FIRST TERM E N G L 100 Composition E N S M 100 C h o i r Ensemble I or E N S M 110 Orchestra I M U S . 100 M u s i c Theory I M U S . 112 * M U S . 114 M U S . 120 M U S . 122' Credits 3.0 1.0 3.0 Ear Training and Sight Singing I Class Piano I M u s i c History I L y r i c Diction: English and German or Arts elective 1.0 3.0 2 P M I . 1 xx L e v e l 6. Submit an Application for A d m i s s i o n to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official copies o f transcripts o f a l l secondary and post-secondary education. Early application is advised. 7. A l l interviews, auditions and placement tests are held i n M a y and August. Auditions w i l l involve the presentation o f two contrasting prepared pieces and a demonstration o f the student's instrumental technique and sightreading ability. 1.5 1.0 3.0 2M 15.5- 17.5 SECOND TERM E N G L 103 or 104 or 105 or 106 E N S M 150 C h o i r Ensemble II 3.0 or E N S M 160 Orchestra II M U S . 101 M u s i c Theory II M U S . 113 Ear Training and 1.0 3.0 Sight Singing II Class Piano II 1.5 1.0 3.0 * M U S . 115 M U S . 121 M u s i c History II M U S . 123 L y r i c D i c t i o n : French and Italian or Arts elective PMI.2xx Level 1 2 1.0 3.0 2.0 15.5-17.5 University Transfer 97 THIRD TERM 3 E N G L 200 or 212 or Arts elective C h o i r Ensemble III E N S M 200 or E N S M 210 Orchestra III M u s i c Theory III M U S . 200 Ear Training and M U S . 212 Sight Singing III Class Piano III * M U S . 214 M u s i c History III M U S . 220 L y r i c D i c t i o n : E n g l i s h and M U S . 122' German or Arts elective P M I . 3xx Leve' 2 3.0 1.0 3.0 Students planning on going into the Bachelor of M u s i c Therapy program in the third year w i l l take the following program for the first two years. 1.5 1.0 3.0 Students completing this program w i l l receive a diploma in M u s i c . They may then choose to transfer to university to finish a Bachelor of M u s i c or apply to the Bachelor of M u s i c Therapy program at Capilano College. 1.0 3.0 1Q 15.5- 17.5 FOURTH TERM 3 E N G L 201 or 2 1 3 or Arts elective C h o i r Ensemble I V E N S M 250 or E N S M 260 Orchestra I V M u s i c Theory I V M U S . 201 Ear Training and M U S . 213 Sight Singing I V BACHELOR OF MUSIC THERAPY COURSE STREAM 3.0 1.0 3.0 1.5 Credits FIRST TERM Composition E N G L 100 C h o i r Ensemble I E N S M 100 or E N S M 110 Orchestra I M u s i c Theory I M U S . 100 Ear Training and Sight Singing ; I M U S . 112 3.0 Class Piano I * M U S . 114 M u s i c History I M U S . 120 P M I . 1 xx Level 1.0 3.0 1 2 1 N o r m a l l y 58 credits are required to graduate with a D i p l o m a in M u s i c . However, V o i c e Concentrators are required to have 61 credits, two or three additional credits from the required course L y r i c D i c t i o n M U S . 122 and M U S . 123 or an Arts elective. This course is offered in alternating years. SECOND TERM E N G L 103, 104, 105, or 106 C h o i r Ensemble II E N S M 150 or E N S M 160 Orchestra II M u s i c Theory II M U S . 101 Ear Training and M U S . 113 Sight Singing II Class Piano II * M U S . 115 M u s i c History II MUS.121 P M I . 2xx L e v e l Intro to Psychology * * P S Y C 100 or P S Y C 101 Theories of Behaviour 2 Taking Arts electives is strongly recommended. However, a student must have a m i n i m u m G P A of 3.5 in order to be allowed into these electives. 3 In order to graduate, Arts electives may be substi- tuted for E N G L 200, 201 and 212, 213. Other courses which may be taken as electives with approval of the Coordinator are Class Strings M U S . 110, 111; Class Brass M U S . 218; Class Percussion M U S . 219; Class W o o d w i n d s M U S . 210, 211; and K o d a l y / O r f f Methodology M U S . 360, 361. *If the student is a piano major, then he/she may take a secondary P M I instead of Class Piano. Students may graduate with 58 or more credits depending on which options they choose. Guitar students must take Guitar Ensemble through Continuing Education. Such students may graduate with 58 credits. University 98 Transfer m 14.5 1.0 Class Piano I V * M U S . 215 3.0 M u s i c History I V M U S . 221 L y r i c D i c t i o n : French and Italian 1.0 M U S . 123 or Arts elective 3.0 P M I . 4xx Level 2J) 15.5-17.5 1.0 3.0 1.5 3.0 1.0 3.0 1.5 1.0 3.0 2.0 3,0 17.5 THIRD TERM Human Biology I B I O L 104 C h o i r Ensemble III E N S M 200 or E N S M 210 Orchestra III M u s i c Theory III M U S . 200 M U S . 212 * M U S . 214 M U S . 220 P M I . 3xx L e v e l P S Y C 204 Ear Training and Sight Singing III Class Piano III M u s i c History III Developmental Psychology 3.0 1.0 3.0 1.5 1.0 3.0 2.0 10 17.5 FOURTH TERM C h o i r Ensemble I V E N S M 250 or E N S M 260 Orchestra I V M u s i c Theory I V M U S . 201 Ear Training and M U S . 213 Sight Singing I V 1.0 3.0 1.5 * M U S . 215 Class Piano I V M U S . 221 M u s i c History I V P M I . 4xx Level P S Y C 205 The Psychology o f A g i n g 1.0 3.0 2.0 3^0 P H I L 221 — Existentialism in Literature P H I L 222 — Philosophy o f Culture (Aesthetics) P H I L 240 — Philosophy and Gender Relations 14.5 * If the student is a Piano Major, then he/she may take a secondary P M I instead of Class Piano. ** It is recommended that students take P S Y C 101 during the summer between second and third term. For a description o f the M u s i c Therapy program, see the M u s i c Therapy program section o f the Calendar. PHILOSOPHY Instructional Faculty M . B A T T E R S B Y , B . A . ( N Y U ) , Ph.D. ( U B C ) J. D I X O N , B . A . , P h . D . ( U B C ) S. G A R D N E R , B . A . (Hons.) ( M c G I L L ) . B . P h i l . (Oxford), P h . D . (Concordia) PHYSICS Instructional Faculty M . F R E E M A N , B . S c . (Hons.) ( U B C ) , M . S c . ( C a l . Tech.), P h . D . ( U B C ) S. G R E E N S P O O N , B . S c . (Hons.) ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c , P h . D . (Waterloo), Convenor of Physics J. K O L A C , M . S c . (Charles U . , Prague) F . P A R V A Z , B . S c . (Tehran), M . S . D i p . (San D i e g o State) Laboratory Supervisors and Technician K . F U L L E R , B . S c . ( S F U ) , Laboratory Technician V . M O E N , B . S c . ( S F U ) , Laboratory Supervisor B . S I M S O N , B . S c . ( S F U ) , Laboratory Supervisor Research Associate W . H E N R Y , B . A . (Hons.) ( U V i c ) , M . A . ( U B C ) , Ph.D. (Western) S. P E R S K Y , B . A . , M . A . ( U B C ) M . C R E N S H A W , B . S c . (Kansas State), B . A . (Evergreen), Physics Holography Research L a b Y . W E S T W E L L - R O P E R , B.Ed., M . A . , Ed.D. (UBC), D . P h i l (Oxford) General Information University Transfer Credit A l l Philosophy courses offered at Capilano College have transfer credit at every university in British C o l u m b i a . Critical thinking is taught in all philosophy courses. Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Courses P H I L 101 — Introductory Philosophy: Ethics P H I L 102 — Introductory Philosophy: K n o w l e d g e and Reality P H I L 110 — Critical T h i n k i n g A l l first-year physics courses except P H Y S 116 include a weekly two-hour laboratory period. The cost o f the labs is included in the course tuition fee except for lab manuals. University Transfer Credit A l l physics courses at Capilano carry transfer credit. Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Students with Physics 12 planning to transfer to UBC should take PHYS 114 or PHYS 114 and 115, depending on their plans. Consult the UBC Calendar for specific program requirements. P H I L 120 — Understanding Scientific Reasoning P H I L 140 — Philosophy and L a w : Canadian L a w P H I L 141 — Philosophy and L a w : C r i m i n a l Justice Recommended Sequence for Major in Physics P H I L 200 — Political Philosophy FIRST YEAR P H I L 201 — Political Philosophy P H I L 202 — Introduction to Formal L o g i c P H Y S 114/115 (preferred) or 110/111 or 108/111 C H E M 110/111 M A T H 116/117 and 126/127 E N G L (six credits) P H I L 207 — Business Ethics P H I L 208 — Environmental Ethics P H I L 209 — B i o m e d i c a l Ethics P H I L 210 — Metaphysics and Epistemology I P H I L 211 — Metaphysics and Epistemology II Philosophy in Literature P H I L 220 — Non-science Elective or G e o l o g y , B i o l o g y or Computing Science (six credits) University Transfer 99 SECOND University Transfer Credit YEAR P H Y S 200/201,210/211,218/222 M A T H 200, 230, 2 3 1 , 2 3 5 Elective (six credits) Students interested in honours physics should consult A l l Political Studies courses at Capilano are transferable to S F U , U B C and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Physics instructors. Courses Courses P O L . 100 — P H Y S 104 — Principles of Physics P H Y S 108 — Basic Physics Introduction to Politics and G o v e r n ment P O L . 102 — Comparative Government Canadian Government P H Y S 110 — General Physics I P H Y S 111 — General Physics II P O L . 104 — P O L . 110 — Introduction to Western Political Thought P O L . 111 — P O L . 201 — Contemporary Ideologies P O L . 202 — Government and Politics o f British Columbia P H Y S 201 — Electricity and Magnetism P H Y S 210 — Physics Laboratory I P O L . 203 — International Organizations P O L . 204 — Canadian Public P o l i c y P H Y S 211 — Physics Laboratory II P H Y S 218 — Computational Physics P O L . 206 — Political A n a l y s i s P O L . 207 — Issues in Contemporary Social and Political Theory P H Y S 114 — Fundamental Physics I P H Y S 115 — Fundamental Physics II P H Y S 116 — Fundamental Physics III P H Y S 200 — Thermal Physics and Waves P H Y S 222 — Mechanics POLITICAL STUDIES Instructional Faculty E . M . L A V A L L E , B.Comm., L L . B . (UBC), M . A . (Duke) P. M I E R , B . A . ( S F U ) , M . A . (Toronto) T. S C H O U L S , B . A . (Hons.) (Alberta), M . A . (Toronto) C . S Y L V E S T E R , B . A . (Gonzaga), M . A . (Notre Dame) D . W I N C H E S T E R , B . A . (Hons.) (Concordia), M . A . (UBC) General Introduction W o m e n and men preparing for careers in journalism, law, business management, international banking, market research, arbitration, urban and regional planning, the foreign service, consulting, labour negotiations, international development, and education enrol in Political Studies courses. So too those hoping to bring about change in their o w n communities in such areas as health, education and the environment, choosing politics as their vocation. That's because Political Studies is concerned with power — what it is and who gets it, how it is used and how it is abused. A l o n g with understanding power and the role it plays locally, nationally, and internationally, Political Studies students graduate with excellent research skills and effective oral and written communication skills — all very much in demand in the new global economy. University 100 Transfer International Relations PSYCHOLOGY Instructional Faculty P. A V E R Y , B . A . ( Y o r k ) , M . E d . (Toronto) E . B O Y L E , B . A . ( U . Chicago), P h . D . ( U B C ) R. H A W R Y L K O , B . A . (Hunter), M . A . ( S F U ) M . M A C N E I L L , B . A . (Alberta), M . A . (Manitoba), P h . D . (Calgary) S. M O E , B . A . , M . A . ( M e x i c o ) R . S N O W , B . A . (Hons.) M . A . , P h . D . ( S F U ) J. W A T E R S , B . A . M . A . , P h . D . ( S F U ) C. Z A S K O W , B . A . (UBC), M . A . , Ph.D. (SFU) University Transfer Credit A l l Psychology courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C , and U V i c . Please refer to the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Courses P S Y C 100 — Introduction to Psychology P S Y C 101 — Theories o f Behaviour P S Y C 200 — Social Psychology P S Y C 201 — Group Dynamics P S Y C 203 — History o f Psychology P S Y C 204 — Developmental Psychology P S Y C 205 — The Psychology of A g i n g P S Y C 206 — Adolescent Psychology P S Y C 212 — Research Methods in Psychology P S Y C 213 — Statistical Methods in Psychology Instructional P S Y C 220 — Theories o f Personality P S Y C 222 — A b n o r m a l Psychology J. G A C I N A , B . A . ( S F U ) , P . D . P . ( S F U ) K . M A T T S O N , B . A . ( S F U ) , Licenciatura (Barcelona) P S Y C 225 — Biopsychology o f Behaviour P S Y C 230 — Cognitive Psychology W M S T 110 — W o m e n and Psychology SOCIOLOGY Instructional Faculty G . B A I L E Y , B . Sc. ( M c G i l l ) , P h . D . (Oregon) N . G A Y L E , B . A . (Hons.) ( Y o r k ) , M . A . (Western), Ph.D. ( U B C ) C . H A T H A W A Y , B . A . ( S . U . N . Y . ) , M . A . (Wash U . ) R. I S O L A , B . A . , M . A . ( S F U ) A . R O J A S , M . A . , Ph.D. (York) General Information A l l courses in Sociology are geared to help the student comprehend personal and global events in a relevant and meaningful way. Sociology should thus help the student in his/her endeavour to cope with our increasingly complex society. A major i n Sociology leads to work in the following areas: social work, teaching, probation work, criminology, industrial sociology, communications, media, government research and related areas. University Transfer Credit A l l Sociology courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . A l l 200 level courses w i l l provide the S F U transfer student with assigned credit toward second-year courses. The U B C transfer student w i l l be provided with unassigned credit towards a major. Courses S O C . 100 — Social Structures S O C . 101 — Concepts and Theories of Society S O C . 200 — Canadian Society S O C . 201 — British C o l u m b i a Society S O C . 210 — Current Social Issues S O C . 211 — Sociology o f the T h i r d W o r l d S O C . 222 — Sociology o f the Arts S O C . 223 — M e d i a and Society SPANISH Instructional Faculty Associates General Information A l l courses in Spanish consist o f four hours o f lecture, one hour o f conversation, and assignments in the multimedia lab on a drop-in basis (involving approximately 45 minutes). Native speakers o f Spanish are not allowed in first year courses. If they wish to take second year courses in Spanish, they must consult with the Spanish instructor first. University rules governing such students differ within departments, but the Language Department has correspondence dealing with matters relevant to credit transfer and point o f entry. In order to avoid any misunderstandings, such students are invited to discuss these problems with the Department prior to enrolment. Students with a competence in the language beyond the level o f the course in which they are registered w i l l be required to withdraw. Students who are not sure o f their language level should contact an instructor. University Transfer Credit A l l Spanish courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . S F U : Students who wish to proceed to S F U and to pursue further courses in Spanish are reminded o f the present equivalency standards. Elective credit w i l l be given at S F U for all Capilano College Spanish courses. Exemption from and placement in higher courses are determined by the results of a placement test or other assessment procedure. A s a result of the placement test, area credit may be granted which w o u l d count toward a major in Spanish. Courses which do not qualify toward a major w i l l be awarded elective credit only. U B C : A t U B C , present equivalent standards equate S P A N 100 and 101 with S P A N 100; S P A N 200 and 201 with S P A N 200. The student who plans to major in Spanish may enter U B C ' s Spanish program when the student completes the Capilano courses. Courses S P A N 100- Beginning Spanish I S P A N 101 - Beginning Spanish II S P A N 200 - Intermediate Spanish I S P A N 201 - Intermediate Spanish II C. F U R S T E N W A L D , B . A . ( U . N . A . M . Mexico), M . B . A . (City U n i v . , Seattle) E. PEREIRA, B.A. (UBC), M . A . ( U B C ) University Transfer 101 W O M E N ' S STUDIES THAI Instructional Faculty J. P L A C Z E K , B . A . (Windsor), M . A . Linguistics ( U B C ) , P h . D . South East A s i a n Studies ( U B C ) P. P L A C Z E K , Language Associate, B . A . (Thammasat University) Bangkok Students with a competence i n the language beyond the level o f the course in w h i c h they are registered w i l l be required to withdraw. Students who are not sure of their language level should contact an instructor. The following Thai courses carry university transfer. Please refer to the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further information. Courses T H A I 100 — Beginning Thai I T H A I 101 — Beginning T h a i II Instructional Faculty M . D E N I K E , B . A . (Hons.) ( S F U ) , M . A . ( U B C ) , P h . D . (York) N . G A Y L E , B . A . ( Y o r k ) , M . A . (Western), P h . D . (UBC) R. H A W R Y L K O , B . A . (Hunter), M . A . ( S F U ) O. K E M P O , B . A . (Alberta), M . A . , P h . D . ( U B C ) P. L E C O U T E U R , B . S c , M . S c , (Auckland), P h . D . (Calif.) M . L E G A T E S , B . A . (Wash), M . A . , M . P h i l . , P h . D . (Yale) K. LIND, B.A., M . A . (UBC) S. M O E , B . A . , M . A . ( M e x i c o ) D . N E A V E , B . A . (Hons.) (Manchester), M . A . ( U V i c . ) P. S I N G E R , B . A . (Sir George W i l l i a m s ) , M . F . A . (Concordia) M . Y A S E R I , B . A . (Hons.) (Thames), M . A . (Saskatchewan) University Transfer Credit Students who w i s h to pursue further courses i n W o m en's Studies are advised that U B C , S F U and U V i c have programs i n W o m e n ' s Studies. Please refer to the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further information. Courses W M S T 100 — Introduction to W o m e n ' s Studies W M S T 102 — Political E c o n o m y o f W o m e n W M S T 104 — W o m e n Writers and Feminist C r i t i c i s m W M S T 106 — Contemporary A m e r i c a n W o m e n Writers W M S T 110 — W o m e n and Psychology W M S T 113 — W o m e n i n Politics W M S T 122 — W o m e n i n Anthropology W M S T 130 — W o m e n and A r t W M S T 140 — W o m e n , Science and Technology W M S T 220 University 102 Transfer W o m e n and the Past: A n Historical Survey Career/Vocational Programs Capilano College offers a variety o f employmentrelated programs. The programs offered are under constant review to make certain that students are taught the latest techniques and skills. A d v i s o r y committees, composed o f employers, review and recommend content o f all programs. A d m i s s i o n is limited and applicants are considered on the criteria established for each program area. In general, Grade 12 standing is required for students applying to two year D i p l o m a Programs, although others may be admitted on the basis o f their experience and abilities. Due to the timely nature of these programs, requirements and profiles may change. Contact the individual program areas for current information. All courses require basic literacy in written and spoken English. That is, students must be able to understand the texts and other written materials, and the instructor's spoken words, and must be able to write assignments in correct English. Students who are not sure their English is good enough should talk to the instructor or an advisor before taking the course. Graduate Employment Employment opportunities for graduates are excellent; however, the College does not guarantee jobs for its graduates. Admission Dates Enrolment is limited due to space and equipment limitations. Consequently, those students who contemplate entrance are encouraged to apply early. A p p l i cants may be required to have an interview with the Program Coordinator prior to admission. Unsuccessful applicants should contact an advisor to determine an appropriate educational alternative. Practicums For some practicums, students may be required to have a C r i m i n a l Records check. Co-operative Education Some Career programs include a co-op education option. Co-operative education integrates a period o f classroom learning with periods o f work experience to enable students to apply their knowledge and skills. Students alternate periods o f full-time study with periods o f paid employment i n business, industry, government and non-profit organizations. The goal is to develop high calibre graduates, better able to assume productive jobs. Student Course and W o r k Load Full-time programs are designed so that successful completion is a full-time task. Students are advised not to undertake other activities that require large time commitments, including employment, while undertaking full-time studies. Degree Completion Options Transfer to and from Other Institutions There is agreement among all public B . C . colleges to accept each other's credits upon transfer, i f applicable, to a program given at the admitting college, and given suitable equivalency. Capilano College reserves the right to review individual course credits. Transfer credits are granted to students O N A D M I S S I O N for acceptable work done at other institutions. Students wishing transfer credit should present suitable documentation to the Registrar's office for consideration. F u l l information on transfer o f specific courses is available from the advisors, counsellors and i n the program area. Opportunities for degree completion through the Open University o f British C o l u m b i a are available to students who have finished diplomas at Capilano College in the following areas: Business Administration (Bachelor o f Business Administration) Jazz Studies (Bachelor o f M u s i c i n Jazz Studies) M u s i c Therapy (Bachelor of M u s i c Therapy) Outdoor Recreation Management (Bachelor o f T o u r i s m Management) T o u r i s m Management C o - o p (Bachelor o f Tourism Management) For more information, please contact Open University's Education Information Services at (604) 431-3300 or 1-800-663-9711. Career/Vocational 105 ACCOUNTING ASSISTANT PROGRAM This program is presently under review and the detailed listing of courses and course content may be changed by the time the program is offered in September 1999. Instructional Faculty M . C R A G G , B . A . L a w (Durham), B . C . Teaching Cert. C . C R A M , B . A . , M . A . , Ont. Prof. Teaching Certificate L . C R O W E , B . S c . ( U o f Conn.) M . B . A . ( N . Eastern Univ.) M . G I O V A N N E T T I , B . S . A . (St. F . X . ) , B . E d . ( M t . St. Vincent), T E S L Cert., M . A . ( T E S L ) ( S F U ) S. G R E E N A W A Y , B . C o m . ( U B C ) , C A . C . G R I E V E S , B . E d . , Sec. ( U B C ) C . S C H N U R R E N B E R G E R , L a b Supervisor K. V I C K A R S , B.Ed., Lic.Acct. (UBC), C . G . A . G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . ( U B C ) , Standard Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered Psychologist Support Staff The Program The A c c o u n t i n g Assistant program is a full-time, tenmonth program offered from September to June. This program provides students with training i n manual and computerized accounting, general office procedures, and computer applications. A two-week work practicum is included i n this training program. E-mail: abt@capcollege.bc.ca Admission Requirements • Completion of Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status Program Content FIRST TERM O T E C 111 Business E n g l i s h I O T E C 115 O T E C 117 O T E C 146 Credits 3.0 Business Systems and Procedures 3.0 A c c o u n t i n g Procedures I 3.0 Microcomputer Applications I 15.0 Note: Students must achieve a minimum of aB grade in OTEC 117 to continue in this program. Faye Ulker, Clerk Typist Wendy Weberg, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant SECOND TERM O T E C 149 Microcomputer Business Career Opportunities Applications Business W r i t i n g or 4.5 O T E C 211 O T E C 212 O T E C 217 O T E C 220 Business E n g l i s h II A c c o u n t i n g Procedures II A c c o u n t i n g Procedures III 3.0 3.0 O T E C 252 Organizational Behaviour 10 16.5 THIRD TERM O T E C 149 Microcomputer Business Applications (continued) O T E C 215 Computerized A c c o u n t i n g O T E C 300 Directed W o r k Experience Credits Certificate Requirements: 36.0 The A c c o u n t i n g Assistant program provides students with an understanding o f both manual and computer accounting systems and the ability to apply this knowledge to business situations. Students are introduced to other computer applications and general office procedures. Graduates are finding employment as accounting assistants, accounts receivable or payable clerks, accountants for small and medium-sized firms, or they perform accounting functions i n their own businesses. In addition, graduates of this program may ladder into the Business Administration program to take more advanced financial courses, leading towards a degree and/or a professional accounting designation. Students who achieve a m i n i m u m grade of " B " in the following courses w i l l receive credit from Business Administration: • O T E C 252 is equivalent to B A D M 106 • O T E C 217 is equivalent to B F I N 141 • O T E C 146 & 149 are equivalent to B C P T 121 & 122. Credits 3.0 CIP* 3.0 15 4.5 *CIP — course in progress ACCOUNTING SUPPORT PROGRAM Instructional Faculty L . C R O W E , B . S c . ( U of Conn.) M . B . A . ( N . Eastern Univ.) M . G I O V A N N E T T I , B . S . A . (St. F . X . ) , B . E d . ( M t . St. Vincent), T E S L Cert., M . A . ( T E S L ) ( S F U ) Career/Vocational 106 S. G R E E N A W A Y , B . C o m . ( U B C ) , C A . C . G R I E V E S , B . E d . , Sec. ( U B C ) D . G U S P I E , Instructor/Lab Supervisor C . S C H N U R R E N B E R G E R , L a b Supervisor B . S M I T H , B . A . ( U B C ) , B . C . Prof. Teaching Cert., T E S L Cert. G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . ( U B C ) , Standard Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered Psychologist Support Staff Faye Ulker, Clerk Typist Wendy Weberg, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant The A c c o u n t i n g Support program is a full-time, sixmonth program offered from January to June. This program provides training i n manual and computerized accounting, general office procedures and computer applications. The A c c o u n t i n g Support program also includes a two-week supervised practicum. abt@capcollege.bc.ca Career Opportunities Graduates are finding employment as accounting assistants, accounts receivable or accounts payable clerks, and accountants for small and medium sized firms, or they perform accounting functions in their own businesses. In addition, graduates of this program may ladder into the Business Administration program to take more advanced financial courses, leading towards a degree and/or a professional accounting designation. Students who achieve a m i n i m u m o f " B " i n the following courses w i l l receive credit from Business Administration: • O T E C 217 is equivalent to B F I N 141 • O T E C 124 is equivalent to B C P T 121 & 122 Admission Requirements • SECOND TERM O T E C 215 O T E C 217 O T E C 218 O T E C 300 Credits 3.0 Computerized A c c o u n t i n g A c c o u n t i n g Procedures II (continued from first term) A c c o u n t i n g Comprehensive Project 1.5 Directed W o r k Experience I L5 6.0 25.5 Total Program Credits: The Program E-mail: Note: Students must achieve a minimum of a "B" grade in OTEC 117 to continue with this program. Completion o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANT PROGRAM Instructional Faculty M . C R A G G , B . A . L a w (Durham), B . C . Teaching Cert. C . C R A M , B . A . , M . A . , Ont. Prof. Teaching Certificate M . G I O V A N N E T T I , B . S . A . (St. F . X . ) , B . E d . ( M t . St. Vincent), T E S L Cert., M . A . ( T E S L ) ( S F U ) S. G R E E N A W A Y , B . C o m . ( U B C ) , C A . D . G U S P I E , Instructor/Lab Supervisor S. H O R N , I.D. ( U B C ) , M . E d . ( S F U ) C . S C H N U R R E N B E R G E R , L a b Supervisor K. V I C K A R S , B.Ed., Lic.Acct. (UBC), C . G . A . G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . ( U B C ) , Standard Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered Psychologist Support Staff Faye Ulker, Clerk Typist W e n d y Weberg, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant Career Opportunities The Administrative Assistant i n today's office provides a high level of technological and administrative support to management. Graduates o f this program are finding employment i n a wide range o f technological support positions including administrative and executive assistants, office managers, and computer applications trainers. Program Content The Program FIRST TERM O T E C 113 Business English and Communications O T E C 115 O T E C 117 O T E C 124 O T E C 217 Business Systems and Procedures A c c o u n t i n g Procedures I Microcomputer Applications A c c o u n t i n g Procedures II Credits 4.5 3.0 3.0 6.0 3^0 19.5 The Administrative Assistant program is a full-time, ten-month program offered from September to June. This program provides students with training in English grammar and composition skills, interpersonal skills, computer applications and much more. A valuable component of the training that students receive is a twoweek practicum in a business organization. E-mail: abt@capcollege.bc.ca Career/Vocational 107 Admission Requirements • Completion of Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status General Information Program Content FIRST TERM O T E C 111 O T E C 115 O T E C 117 O T E C 146 Credits Business English I 3.0 Business Systems and Procedures 3.0 A c c o u n t i n g Procedures I 3.0 Microcomputer Applications 1 6J) 15.0 Note: Students who do not achieve a minimum of a "C" in OTEC 111 and OTEC 146 must receive written permission from the program convenor to be able to continue in the program. SECOND TERM O T E C 118 O T E C 147 O T E C 148 O T E C 211 O T E C 252 O T E C 300 Organizational Behaviour Directed W o r k Experience THIRD TERM E-mail: infotec @ capcollege. be. ca Document and W e b Page Desig n Human Resource Management Skills 1.5 4.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 15 16.5 Credits 3.0 Certificate R e q u i r e m e n t s : 15 4.5 36.0 APPLIED INFORMATION T E C H N O L O G Y (INFOTEC) PROGRAM Instructional Faculty M . A N D E R S O N , D i p . ( E m i l y Carr College o f A r t & Design) M . B A T T E R S B Y , B.A. (NYU), PH.D. (UBC) B . C A L V E R T , B . A . (Sask) S. K A R M A L I C . K I L I A N , B . A . (Columbia), M . A . ( S F U ) A. L O R E K , B . A . , M.L.S. (McGill) D. R A N K I N , B.F.A. (SFU) D. TAIT L . W U , D i p . C o m m e r c i a l M u s . (Capilano) C o n v e n o r s : Lawrence W u (Program Convenor), Shirin K a r m a l i (Convenor) Career/Vocational 108 The I N F O T E C Program at Capilano College was established in 1990 with a mandate to provide students with the skills and knowledge to act as communicators in an emerging world o f computer-based information. W i t h a foundation in interactive multimedia and online services, the program constantly evolves to accommodate new directions i n technology and theory. Fundamentally, however, our educational focus is on providing students with the ability to communicate effectively in an interactive manner, no matter where their interests or the vagaries o f technological change may take them. Credits Introduction to Computerized Accounting Microcomputer Applications II Administrative Applications Business W r i t i n g O T E C 233 O T E C 254 L a b S u p e r v i s o r s : Lawrence W u / J . J. L u / Matt Anderson Staff: Cathy C o l e , 984-1727 Admission Requirements • Grade 12 graduation or equivalent with English 12 • Computer literacy and a modest keyboarding rate • Personal interview Note: Applications for Admission, together with official transcripts and other pertinent documents must be submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office. Special Fees and Expenses • Personal computer system capable o f performing tasks required i n this program. (See program brochure for further information) • Texts, software, cartridges • B B S online fees/program fees Important Note This is a general view o f the Infotec program. W h i l e we have made every effort to describe courses and requirements accurately as o f F a l l 1999, we work i n a rapidly changing field; new releases i n hardware and software may require changes in course content, credit and scheduling, and required equipment. DIPLOMA PROGRAM The D i p l o m a program is a 10-month, full-time program with a class limit of 20 students. Please contact the Infotec Department for application details and program information. Diploma Program Profile FIRST TERM—Foundation Credits 1.5 3.0 G R P H 141 I N F O 150 I N F O 151 I N F O 154 Infotec — Graphics II Contemporary Issues I Interactive Communications I Electronic Information 1.5 1.5 1.5 I N F O 166 I N F O 167 P H I L 170 Research Methods A p p l i e d Telecommunications Systems, Tools, Utilities Critical T h i n k i n g I 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 November, December C M N S 165 Technical Presentations I N F O 192 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 I N F O 155 I N F O 160 I N F O 171 I N F O 172 I N F O 177 I N F O 180 I N F O 185 I N F O 193 M U S . 090 Infotec — Graphics III 1.5 T i m e - B a s e d Data Integration II 1.5 Electronic Information Research Methods CIP* Interactive Communications II 1.5 Marketing 1.5 A p p l i e d Production Management 1.5 Technical Support: Concentration 3.0 Professional Development 4.5 Computer Mediated Communications 3.0 3 D Production for M u l t i m e d i a 1.5 Systems, Tools, Utilities II 1.5 Digitized Sound I 1.5 CIP BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMS A. BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION (BBA) DEGREE COMPLETION PROGRAM (OPEN UNIVERSITY) B. BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION CO-OPERATIVE EDUCATION DIPLOMA PROGRAM C. BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION — ADVANCED DIPLOMA PROGRAM D. BUSINESS COMPUTING CO-OPERATIVE DIPLOMA PROGRAM (BCOP) E. DIPLOMA PROGRAMS — TWO YEAR FULL TIME STUDIES F. RETAIL MARKETING CO-OP CERTIFICATE PROGRAM G. EVENING CERTIFICATE PROGRAMS January 4 - A p r i l 21, 2000 G R P H 142 I N F O 148 I N F O 154 CIP * C I P — course in progress. 1.5 Credits A p p l i e d Database Technology CIP (Nine credits awarded for pre/post-graduate work or experience) CIP* Infotec — Graphics I Internet Tools and Techniques Technical Support: Foundation Project Management Computer Managed Learning and Training I SECOND TERM—Exploration Professional Development Computer Mediated Communications September 7 - December 17,1999 C M N S 125 Communication Theory C M N S 165 Technical Presentations G R P H 140 I N F O 145 I N F O 156 I N F O 161 M D I A 142 I N F O 177 I N F O 180 - Business Administration Certificate - Advanced Business Administration Certificate - Business Computing Certificate H. ACCELERATED BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DIPLOMA PROGRAMS - Accelerated General Management March, April I N F O 148 Time-Based Data Integration II CIP* I N F O 158 Interactive Communications III CIP* I N F O 171 A p p l i e d Production Management 1.5 I N F O 172 Technical Support: Concentration 3.0 I N F O 177 I N F O 180 I N F O 192 Professional Development Computer Mediated Communications A p p l i e d Database Technology THIRD TERM — Professional CIP* 3.0 1.5 Development May 1 - June 25,2000 G R P H 143 I N F O 171 Infotec - A d v a n c e d Graphics I V A p p l i e d Production Management 0.75 CIP* - Accelerated Accounting Management - Accelerated Marketing Management I. PROFESSIONAL ACCOUNTING TRANSFER PACKAGE J. COMPUTER SPECIALIST PROGRAM (CSP) K. CERTIFIED FINANCIAL PLANNER'™' PROGRAM L. LOCAL GOVERNMENT ADMINISTRATION PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATE PROGRAM M . NETWORK SPECIALIST CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Career/Vocational 109 D e p a r t m e n t C h a i r : Charlene H i l l Instructional Faculty J.S. B R O W N L E E - B A K E R , B B A ( S F U ) , M B A ( A s i a Pacific International Institute) B . C A M P B E L L , (Seneca), C N I A . C A R T E R , B . S c , M . B . A . (U of A , City U ) , C N A G . F A N E , D i p . Tech., B . S c , M . B . A . , C . M . A . ( B C I T , City U . , U B C ) G. F A R R E L L , M B A , C M A , F C M A (SFU) D. G O O D W I N , M.B.A. F . G R U E N , B . M g t . E n g . , M . A . S c . (RPI, Waterloo) C . H I L L , B . A . (Santa Clara) P. H O L D E N , B . A . , L . L . B . , M . B . A . ( U B C , U . o f Ottawa, U B C ) S. I B A R A K I , ISP, C N I , C N E , M S S B , B E T A T E A M , NETeam, DpSc (CIPS, N O V E L L , M I C R O S O F T , IBM, OUC) W . I N G L I S , B . A . , D i p . M k t g . ( U B C , U . Montreal) W . I N K S T E R , C . G . A . , (Canada), A C S M (Capilano), CNI C. K I L I A N , B.A., M . A . (SFU) J.D. L O B L A W , B . A . ( U o f T ) R. L O N G W O R T H , B . S c , M . E d . (Concordia, St. Michaels) I.S.P. J. M A Y , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) C A R. M C B L A N E , B.Ed., M . E d . (Uof A ) C . M C K I E , B.Comm., M . B . A . , P.T.C. ( U B C , City Univ.) L . M I C H A E L S , B . S c , B.Ed., M . E d . ( U of A ) L.E. MILNER, M.B.A., C G A B . M O S E L E Y , B . A . , M . B . A . (Univ. o f C a l ) J. N A B L O R . C . N I C H O L S , B . C o m m . , C . M . A . ( U of A ) R. O ' C O N N O R , B . A d m i n . (Ryerson), I.S.P. D . O ' L E A R Y , B . A . E d . (Memorial), D i p . A d u l t E d . (Alberta), M . E d . ( U B C ) J. P E N D Y G R A S S E , B . S c , Teacher's Cert. (N.Dakota) H . P L U M E , C M A , A C S M (Capilano) A. RAJWANI J. S A R R E A L , B . S c , M . S c , Ph.D., A C S M , ( U . o f Philippines, U . o f Florida, N . Carolina U . , Capilano) D. S A U E R , B.A., M . B . A . (SFU, U B C ) G. SIMON, B . S c , M.Sc. (UBC) M . SPENCE, B.Sc, L.L.B C. STEPHENS M . T A Y L O R , B . S c . ( U of A ) L . T E E T Z E L , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , M P A (Queens) M . V A N H O R N , B . E d . ( U o f A ) , A C S M (Capilano) A . H . V I C K , B.Comm. (UBC) K . V I C K A R S , B.Ed., L i e Acct. ( U B C ) , C . G . A . A . W A T S O N , B . A . ( U of C), A I B C , M . B . A . (Asia Pacific International Institute) G . W A U G H , B . A . , M . A . - Reading, ( U B C ) R. W E I Z E L , B P E . , B . C o m m . ( U o f M ) , M B A (McMaster), C M A Career/Vocational 110 J. W I L S O N , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , C A . R. W I L S O N , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) H.B. Y A C K N E S S , B.Comm., M . B . A . (SFU), C A . Support Staff Carmen Orton, D i v . Assistant N a n c y Findlater, Receptionist Colleen Liptaj, Learning Assistant Arlene M i l l e r , Clerical Assistant Jillian Feist, C o - o p Assistant General Information The Department o f Business Administration at Capilano College stresses a balanced combination o f classroom learning and hands-on business education. A l l o f our faculty have first hand business experience and remain active in their specialties. W e continually review and update our programs according to market needs so that our graduates have the skills employers demand. A recent review o f our programs by our A d v i s o r y Board, graduates, students and faculty led us to accentuate our training in problem-solving, written and verbal business presentations, and team work. This gives our graduates an edge in today's highly competitive job market, and gives them the expertise to succeed in the workplace o f the future. Our graduates proceed to occupations such as: • Accountant • Advertising A c c o u n t Manager • Computer Programmer • Entrepreneur • Event Producer • Financial Analyst • Financial Planner • Lending Officer • Network Administrator • Operations Manager • Production Manager • Promotion Manager • Retail Specialist • Research Coordinator • Sales Representative/Sales Manager • Store Manager/Owner • Systems A n a l y s t In the past, many of our graduates have developed careers with large corporations such as K e l l o g g ' s , Hershey's, Chevron, I . C . B . C , B B D O Advertising, The Future Shop, Labatt Breweries, Brights Wines, B . C T e l , B . C . Ferries, and B . C . H y d r o . The entrepreneurial skills gained i n the program have also led many graduates to administrative jobs in smaller firms. These include M i n e r v a Technologies, Seanix Technology Inc., Western System Controls, Sierra Consulting and many other small and medium sized businesses. Contact: Telephone: E-mail: 984-4960, Fax: Articulation Agreements 984-1734 busadmin®capcollege.be.ca Web site: Secondary Schools http://www.capcollege.bc.ca/badm Admission Requirements • Grade 12 or equivalent with a minimum of C+ in English 12, or be eligible to enroll in English 100, and a C in "academic" Math 11, or • Mature student status with successful completion of testing in English and/or Math skills. • Submission of the Capilano College Application for Admission, together with official transcripts to Admissions, Registrar's Office. • Students currently enrolled in Grade 12 will be considered on the basis of interim grades. Additional program admission requirements are found in the specific program descriptions. Formalized agreements have been articulated with the Burnaby, Coquitlam, Vancouver, North and West Vancouver, and Sunshine Coast school districts whereby: Students attaining a "B" or better in Financial Accounting 12 or completion of Applied Accounting 12 with a challenge exam will receive dual credit for BFIN 141. Students attaining a "B" or better in Marketing 12 and Business Management 12 will receive dual credit for BMKT 161. University (other than the Open University) A block transfer agreement of 60 credits exists, for students who have completed the Business Administration diploma program, with the following universities: Royal Roads University, University of Northern B.C., Athabasca University, University of Lethbridge. For further information contact Richard Longworth in the Business Administration department. Articulation Agreements in the Business Administration Department Secondary School Districts Burnaby, Coquitlam, North Vancouver, Sunshine Coast, Articulation Vancouver West Vancouver BADM Department Block transfer Business Articulation Diploma Open University (BBA) Available in partnership with Capilano College ' Post-Graduate Diploma | Athabasca U. (BBA) and Master's of Business 1 Administration 1 Programs Royal Roads (BComm) - - • 1 U of Lethbridge (BMgt) Applied Business Technology UNBC (BBA) Programs | For example: | SFU I UBC 1 UVic 1 Athabasca U. (Capilano College) 1 SFU (BBA) WWU Nova | Southeastern WWU (BBA) Evening Certificate Retail Marketing 1 , Certificate Career/Vocational 111 Program Flexibility Prior Learning Assessment (PLA) Whether you choose part-time or full-time studies i n Business Administration, you w i l l be able to accumulate credits toward a certificate, d i p l o m a or degree. W e have designed our programs to suit your needs as w e l l as the needs o f employers. The flexibility o f our programs allows you to start with Capilano, build your own educational package today and continue to learn with us i n the future. This "laddering" concept proves your education can be adapted to fit your changing environment and those o f industry. The Business Administration Department is committed to the recognition o f prior learning. Prior learning assessment ( P L A ) recognizes demonstrated learning for credits which have been acquired through life or work experiences. Y o u can obtain P L A credits for all firstlevel courses. F o r further information contact the P L A Coordinator at Capilano College. There is a fee for P L A assessment equal to the regular course costs. The Business Administration Department at Capilano offers a variety o f programs from a Bachelor o f Business Administration ( B B A ) degree (in partnership with B . C . ' s Open University), to C o - o p and A d v a n c e d Diplomas, to General Business and Accelerated Diplomas, to numerous certificates. M a n y courses are transferable from one credential to another, making it easier for students to advance to higher levels. Our graduates have achieved an excellent reputation based on professional performance and positive attitude. O u r classes stress the importance o f maintaining that reputation. A s future leaders and business administrators, students must be prepared to model appropriate professional behaviour while engaged in College and College-related activities. This is the type of behaviour expected from a professional manager or leader. Business Aministration Department Offerings General Co-op and/or Advanced Diplomas OU BBA Degree Business and Accelerated Diplomas Certificates Professionalism at Capilano Costs Students should be prepared for extra costs other than textbooks i n some courses. These may include calculators, computer software or specialized course-related kits. Completion Level 4 30 credits Level 3 30 credits 30 credits Level 2 Up to 60 30 credits Timetables 30 credits Block Level 1 30 credits credits Min. 120 credits 30 credits 60 credits Accounting Computing General Mgt. Int'l Business Marketing 30 cr. Retail Mkting. Co-op Cert. 24 cr. Advanced Eve. Certl I | 18 cr. Evening Cert. 18 cr. Local Govt. CONCENTRATIONS Admin. Cert. Transferability Students who have already completed degrees or taken other university or college courses may apply to have those credits transferred towards the Capilano College Business Administration programs. T o ensure a smooth transition, please provide the Registrar's Office with transcripts and course outlines when y o u apply. A student must complete at least 50 percent o f the program requirements at Capilano College to receive a Capilano College certificate or diploma. Career/Vocational 112 Students should not rely on the (F,S,Su) indicators by individual course descriptions when planning their personal timetable. They should use the Registrar's published timetable for the term or other timetable information from the department. English Requirement A l l Business Administration d i p l o m a students must complete the English 100 course, or equivalent, to graduate. T o be eligible for E n g l i s h 100 you must have an " A " i n E n g l i s h 12 or attain a suitable mark in the Language Proficiency Index (LPI) or the college administered English Diagnostic Test ( E D T ) . See the E D T information in the Registration section i n this Calendar. It is preferred that you take the E n g l i s h 100 course in the F I R S T T E R M or prior to completing your first year as it is a general prerequisite for all second level courses. Accounting/Finance Designations M a n y of the courses offered in the D i p l o m a and Degree programs are transferable to the Chartered Accountant ( C A ) , Certified General Accountant ( C G A ) , and Certified Management Accountant ( C M A ) accreditation programs. See information included with specific course descriptions and refer to the B . C . Transfer Guide and the Capilano College Transfer Guide form more information. A. BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION (BBA) DEGREE COMPLETION PROGRAM (OPEN UNIVERSITY) Capilano College business diploma graduates have the option o f pursuing the Open University's Bachelor o f Business Administration ( B B A ) degree. Through a partnership arrangement, courses required to meet degree requirements are offered at the College. Graduates may be eligible for a transfer o f up to 60 credits toward the B B A degree. In addition, most 300 level business courses transfer to the Open University for upper level credit. The block transfer is available to recent graduates. Students who graduated prior to 1992 w i l l have their programs individually reviewed and may need to take additional courses to make up for any deficiencies in the block transfer. Students may also have to make up some courses i f they received exemptions in the Capilano College program or do not meet grade requirements as listed below. T o be eligible for the full block transfer of 60 credits toward the Bachelor of Business Adminstration, graduates must meet the following requirements: • an appropriate Capilano College business administration diploma • a m i n i m u m diploma G P A o f 2.67 (70%) • a m i n i m u m grade o f 6 0 % for introductory courses i n economics and statistics • completion o f specific course requirements within the diploma program D i p l o m a holders with an overall G P A o f less than 2.67 or who have graduated seven or more years ago may also apply to the Open University for entry into the degree completion program. These students may receive a reduced block transfer. Degree completion requirements may be met by taking approved business courses at Capilano College, university transfer courses at Capilano College, and/or courses offered by the Open University. A l l transfer credit is subject to the Open University's transfer credit policies. For more information, contact the Open University's Education Information Services at (604) 431 -3300 or 1-800-663-9711 or obtain a detailed program brochure from Capilano C o l l e g e ' s Business Administration department. B. BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION CO-OPERATIVE EDUCATION DIPLOMA PROGRAM W h a t is C o - o p e r a t i v e E d u c a t i o n ? Co-operative (Co-op) Education is a program that integrates classroom study with related on-the-job work experience. On-campus study alternates with periods o f paid work experience. The first work term takes place during the M a y to August term; the second term from January to A p r i l . Co-operative program concentrations include A c c o u n t ing, Business Computing, General Management, Marketing and Retail M a r k e t i n g . W h a t are the benefits of C o - o p Education? C o - o p education is a three-way partnership among students, employers and the College, with benefits for each partner. The • • • • Student Gains up to eight months o f valuable work experience. Earns a salary to help with educational costs. Is exposed to different jobs integrating classroom study with on-the-job experience. Develops a network o f contacts to enhance future employment possibilities. The Employer • • • Gains a highly motivated employee with good general and specialized skills. Is able to evaluate a co-op student as a potential employee. Provides input to the College, helping it to keep current and responsive in today's constantly changing market place. The College • Gains valuable input from business, industry and government that is used to maintain program excellence. How are s t u d e n t s selected for the C o - o p Diploma Program? Selection of students for the C o - o p D i p l o m a program in Accounting, Management or Marketing is based on: Career/Vocational 113 1. Completion of a minimum of first year general business (30 credits). Courses completed at other institutions may be acceptable. 2. A minimum cumulative grade point average of 2.67 calculated on Business Administration program courses. 3. References from two Business Administration instructors. 4. An interview with the Co-op Education Placement Officer. Selection is competitive and space in the Co-op program is limited. W h a t is t h e C o - o p t i m e p a t t e r n ? The Co-op Diploma program takes 22 months to complete. It commences in September and includes two work terms and four academic terms. The table below shows the sequence of study and work periods: Academic Term 1 Sept-Dec (4 mos.) Academic Term 2 Jan-Apr (4 mos.) Academic Term 3 Sep-Dec (4 mos.) Work Term 2 Academic Term 4 Jan-Apr May-June (4 mos.) (2 mos.) (Currently under Work Term 1 May-Aug (4 mos.) review.) W h a t h a p p e n s a f t e r a s t u d e n t is a d m i t t e d to the Co-op Diploma Program? Students admitted to the Co-op Diploma program in September will be eligible to participate in a work placement the following summer (May to August). Prior to registering in a work term, students must: 1. Attend the pre-employment seminar series offered by the Co-op Education office. 2. Maintain a minimum of 2.67 GPA. 3. Have completed 60 credits in the Business Administration program including the following prerequisites: Accounting Option BFIN 249 BFIN 341 BFIN 342 Marketing Option BMKT 161 BMKT 261 BMKT 263 General Management Option BFIN 244 Obtaining a Co-op work placement is a joint effort by the students and the Co-op Education office. Admission to the Co-op diploma program does not guarantee work placement. Every effort is made to secure placements for eligible Co-op students. Career/Vocational 114 H o w to Apply Students apply to the Co-op program after completion of the first 30 credits of the Business Administration program. For more information or to request an application kit contact: Business Administration Department Co-op Education Office Cedar Building, Office 311 or 342 Capilano College 2055 Purcell Way North Vancouver, B.C. V7J 3H5 Co-op Coordinator Tel: (604) 984-1735 Fax: (604) 984-1734 E-mail: doleary@capcollege.bc.ca Co-op Assistant Tel: (604) 983-7557 Fax: (604) 984-1734 E-mail: jfeist@capcollege.bc.ca Internet: http://www.capcollege.bc.ca/co-op/ C. BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION — A D V A N C E D DIPLOMA PROGRAM Students wanting more concentrated business knowledge may complete the Advanced Business Diploma. You will establish your area of specialization and gain specific training pertinent to management practices in General Management, Accounting or Marketing. An Advanced Diploma requires 30 credits in addition to a Business Administration Diploma. To obtain an Advanced Diploma you must complete the courses identified below and an appropriate number of electives for a total of 30 credits. Electives offered in this program can be any business course or any course required to complete the Bachelor's Degree (BBA). If you also plan to pursue the Business Administration Degree, you should carefully choose your electives to fit the Open University requirements. Contact the appropriate degree completion convenor in the Business Administration Department at Capilano College or the Open University Business Advisor. C O U R S E S REQUIRED FOR A L L A D V A N C E D DIPLOMAS BADM 304 IBUS 321 IBUS 334 Strategic Management International Business or Communication, Culture and International Business Credits 3.0 3.0 6.0 Required GENERAL M A N A G E M E N T ADVANCED DIPLOMA Credits BFIN 244 Management Accounting B A D M 302 H u m a n Resource Management B A D M 301 Operations Management Plus two approved electives Plus three additional electives 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 9.0 24.0 IBUS IBUS 321 334 Credits International Business Communication, Culture and International Business IBUS 340 International Trade L a w IBUS 357 International Marketing IBUS 399 International Trade Opportunities A c a d e m i c elective A c a d e m i c elective Business electives ADVANCED ACCOUNTING DIPLOMA Credits Required: BFIN 142 Financial Accounting I 3.0 Plus any six o f the following courses, at least four of which must be taken i n Y e a r 3: BFIN BFIN BFIN BFIN BFIN 341 342 346 347 249 Cost Accounting I Cost Accounting II Financial Accounting II Financial Accounting III A c c o u n t i n g Microcomputer Applications Advanced Financial Management Taxation BFIN 350 BFIN 351 Plus one elective 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 ADVANCED MARKETING DIPLOMA Credits Required: B M K T 261 B M K T 263 B M K T 360 Advertising Professional Selling Skills 3.0 3.0 Marketing Research 10 9.0 Plus any three of the following courses: B M K T 362 B M K T 364 Event Marketing & Management Consumer Behaviour B M K T 365 B M K T 367 Marketing Strategies & Decisions Promotion Strategy & Analysis IBUS 357 International Marketing Plus two electives N o t e : At least three of the six marketing 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 N o t e : This diploma is not available 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 27.0 in 1999/2000. A Second Option For Advanced Diplomas Y o u may complete a second option for any A d v a n c e d Business Administration D i p l o m a in the following ways: 1. Complete the Core courses required for all advanced diplomas, plus all the courses required as requisites for both options requested*. Indicate on your Request for Evaluation F o r m , that y o u wish to be evaluated for two options, and state what the options are. If you have successfully completed all courses, your diploma w i l l then read: "Business Administration A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a " . B o t h options you have completed w i l l be listed immediately below. In addition, your permanent student record and transcript w i l l bear this information. 2. Complete an A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a . A t a subsequent time, you decide to complete the additional courses ( m i n i m u m 15 credits) i n another option. Y o u complete these courses, then submit your Request for Evaluation together with your original diploma. Y o u r d i p l o m a w i l l then be reissued to read: " B u s i ness Administration A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a " . The options completed w i l l be listed immediately below, for example: "Accounting and Marketing Options." * Y o u must complete at least 15 additional credits for the second option. courses should be taken in year three. A D V A N C E D I N T E R N A T I O N A L BUSINESS D. BUSINESS COMPUTING CO-OPERATIVE DIPLOMA PROGRAM (BCOP) DIPLOMA Capilano College Business students who have a Capilano Business d i p l o m a (60 credits) or equivalent can qualify for the A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a i n International Business by completing the following courses: This three-year program combines co-operative workplace practicums with an innovative curriculum that starts with the first year o f the regular Business D i p l o m a program. Job placements for qualifying students are full-time for a four-month term and are made through arrangements between the College and employers. Students, in their second and third years, Career/Vocational 115 work closely with an advisor to gain the best possible placement. U p o n completion of their four academic terms and two work terms, graduates receive a B u s i ness D i p l o m a with C o - o p designation. Career Opportunities W i t h the comprehensive training provided, graduates w i l l secure positions as system analysts, programmers, computer network administrators, and computer user support. Contact: Colleen Tel: (604) Liptaj, Learning Assistant TERM 1 — FALL BCOP 131 Introduction to Programming & BCOP 171 BCOP BCOP 206 215 The Developmental Tools o f Information Systems Accounting for Managers 3.0 3.0 BCOP 240 Network I Computer Hardware & Software 3.0 3.0 Programming L o g i c — SPRING BCOP 204 Business Computing III BCOP BCOP BCOP CMPT 214 231 305 184 Business Computing I V Data Management Network II V i s u a l Basic 3 — SUMMER B A D M 299 Credits 3.0 15.0 • TERM Co-op Placement I 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 15.0 Credits M 4 — FALL BCOP BCOP CMPT CMPT 205 304 230 289 BCOP 329 TERM 5 - B A D M 399 6 - B A D M 304 BCOP 90.0 In the dynamic w o r l d o f computing, nothing is static! A s a result, we are constantly improving and updating the Business Computing C o - o p program in a balanced manner. W e strive to blend the mainstream of information processing with the leading edge o f the emerging technologies. Therefore, the components of the program and the details of the courses are subject to adjustment. 325 DIPLOMA PROGRAMS — T W O YEAR — FULL-TIME STUDIES (60 CREDITS) Students graduating with a Capilano College D i p l o m a w i l l have the skills and knowledge required to be effective managers. Courses are taught by instructors with practical, up-to-date business knowledge. M a n y o f the faculty hold full or part-time positions in their area of specialty. Class sizes are approximately 36 students, and the faculty are in direct contact with all their students. A full-time course load provides a m i n i m u m of 20 instructional hours weekly. W e suggest at least 40 hours weekly o f outside studies and preparation time w i l l be required. The first year has a common curriculum*. In the second year, students may concentrate on a particular area o f specialization that w i l l allow them to continue their studies beyond the two-year diploma. This includes the option to obtain a business degree (Bachelor of Business Administration, [ B B A ] ) at Capilano College through the Open University. D i p l o m a graduates may also be eligible to obtain up to a 60 credit block transfer toward undergraduate degrees at the following universities: University o f Northern B . C . , R o y a l Roads, University o f Lethbridge and more. Contact the department for more detailed information. 3.0 Business Computing V Operating Systems 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 * Students planning to pursue the Finance/Accounting option should take the B F I N 142 in year one and the B A D M 107 in year two. 15.0 FIRST YEAR — BADM BADM BCPT BFIN ENGL 101 106 121 141 100 Systems Implementation Network I V SPRING C o - o p Placement II Credits M SUMMER Strategic Management Network III Career/Vocational 116 Total Program Credits A p p l i e d Statistics for Business 3.0 TERM 3J) Credits 3.0 TERM Network V I 9.0 E. Prerequisite: First Y e a r Business Administration D i p l o m a Program or equivalent (30 cr.) 2 333 980-7871 Program Content TERM BCOP 3.0 3.0 FALL Management Organizational Behaviour Business Computing I Accounting* Composition Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 15.0 FIRST YEAR— SPRING BADM 102 BADM 107 BCPT 122 BMKT 161 CMNS 220 Quantitative Methods Business Law I* Business Computing II Marketing* Advanced Business Writing and Editing Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Credits 3.0 15.0 * Students planning to concentrate their studies in accounting must take BFIN 142 Financial Accounting I in place of BADM 107 Business Law I in the spring term. Business Law (BADM 107) will then be taken in the second year. Students not planning to take BFIN 142 may take Marketing (BMKT 161) in thefirstterm and Accounting (BFIN) in the second term. Note: For the daytime general BADM diploma program: Students must have completed either, all Level 1 courses prior to taking Level 2 courses, or, complete all their Level 1 courses concurrently in the term that they start their Level 2 courses. In special circumstances a prerequisite waiver can be applied. SECOND YEAR BADM 201 BADM 210 BFIN 241 ECON 111 Business Systems Business Statistics Finance For Managers Principles of Micro Economic Theory Business Elective Business Elective Business Elective Business Elective Academic Elective Academic Elective Total Diploma Credits The following is a partial list of Business elective courses. Students planning to continue their studies beyond the two-year Diploma should consult a coordinator to ensure they choose the appropriate electives. Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 30.0 60.0 Concentrate Y o u r Studies W i t h Business Electives The Capilano College Business Diploma allows you to choose courses that interest you. Six of the 10 secondyear courses are electives. You can use the electives to concentrate your studies, focus on career goals or broaden your education. No other two-year business diploma program gives you so much flexibility in designing your education. You can use the Business electives to commence specialization in any of these management areas: • Accounting • Computing • General Management • Finance • Marketing • International Business BADM 301 BADM 302 BADM 303 BADM 304 BADM 310 BCPT 221 BFIN 142 BFIN 341 BFIN 342 BFIN 350 BFIN 351 BMKT 261 BMKT 263 BMKT 360 BMKT 364 BMKT 365 IBUS 321 Operations Management Human Resource Management Industrial Relations Strategic Management Quantitative Methods III Business Computing Presentation Graphics Financial Accounting I Cost Accounting I Cost Accounting II Advanced Financial Management Taxation Advertising Professional Selling Skills Marketing Research Consumer Behaviour Marketing Strategies and Decisions International Business 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 We strongly recommend that the two general electives (non-business) be university transfer courses from Capilano. Students should consider courses in Geography, Economics, Sociology or any language course other than English 100; however, most non-business courses at or above the 100 level will be acceptable. Students should check with a coordinator to be sure. Students considering the option of obtaining the Open University's BBA degree should choose courses that carry transfer credit to the Open University and fulfill O.U. general education degree requirements. Please check the B.C. Transfer Guide and BBA program brochure or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for more information. Calculus is a requirement in the Bachelor of Business Administration (BBA) degree; therefore it is recommended that you take MATH 107 Pre-Calculus for Business and Social Sciences as a general elective in your second year, if you have not obtained at least a "C" grade in MATH 12. F. RETAIL MARKETING CO-OP CERTIFICATE (RMCP) PROGRAM General Information 1. After successfully completing the course requirements of this program a student will receive a Retail Marketing Certificate or Retail Marketing Co-op Certificate. Career/Vocational 117 2. U p o n successful completion o f the eight-month Certificate program, courses w i l l be transferable to the Business Administration D i p l o m a program. Students are encouraged to go on to complete the D i p l o m a requirements. 3. This exciting Retail Marketing C o - o p program offers something for everyone, including the opportunity to earn your tuition and more while y o u study the dynamic world o f retail marketing. 4. Retail Marketing students can use this area o f study as a foundation year for the Business Administration D i p l o m a . Students get a hands-on business education with numerous opportunities to work i n the dynamic world of retail marketing. M a n y other related career training courses are offered such as Retail Event Management, Retail B u y i n g and Creative Retail Strategies. The strength of this program is i n the combination o f real world work experience with the appropriate curriculum to support these areas of interest. A Retail Marketing student who completes a Business Administration D i p l o m a with a m i n i m u m G P A of 2.67 (70%) may be eligible for a transfer o f up to 54 credits toward the Open University's Bachelor o f Business Administration Degree ( B B A ) . Students wishing to complete their degree requirements may do so through Capilano College and the Open University. F o r more information on the Open University degree program please refer to the complete description i n the College Calendar. Contact: Marilyn Taylor, Charlene Hill, 984-1721 990-7814 Career Opportunities Managing your o w n business Store Manager—independent, chain or R . C . O . Department Manager Wholesale Sales Representative Manufacturer's Sales Representative Manufacturer's Agent Fashion Promotion Consultant Marketing Research-Field Operator Sales Manager Advertising Manager Buyer and Central Buyer V i s u a l Presentation Specialist Sales Promotion Manager Sales Representative Consumer Products Marketing Assistant Retail or Design Consultant Special Event Coordinator Career/Vocational 118 Admission Requirements • Grade 12 or equivalent with preference given to applicants with a m i n i m u m of C + i n English 12 and C in M a t h 11, or • Mature student status • A n interview may be required • Submission o f the Capilano College Application for A d m i s s i o n together with official transcripts to Admissions, Registrar's Office. Program Content FIRST YEAR — FALL Credits BMKT BCPT 161 121 Marketing Business Computing I 3.0 3.0 CMNS RMCP RMCP 152 164 172 Report W r i t i n g Creative Retail Strategies Retail Technology/ 3.0 3.0 Store Management I Instructional Credits 3J) 15.0 N o t e : The students will be given 12 hours of preemployment seminars prior to their co-op work experience period. CO-OP PLACEMENT— R M C P 190 December - January C o - o p W o r k Placement FIRST YEAR — SPRING 3.0 Credits B A D M 101 Management 3.0 B M K T 263 R M C P 155 R M C P 173 Professional Selling Skills Retail Event Management Retail Finance/ 3.0 3.0 Store Management II R M C P 181 Strategic Retail B u y i n g Instructional Credits Total Instructional Credits 3.0 31) 15.0 30.0 Total Co-op W o r k Credits 3.0 G. EVENING CERTIFICATE PROGRAMS The courses in these programs, beginning in September, January, M a y and July each year, w i l l teach the student basic managerial skills that are of practical value in a wide variety of jobs. Classes are conducted by Department faculty and industry specialists and offered M o n d a y to Thursday evenings. Those enrolled in the programs may take the courses at their chosen pace. A number o f credit courses from both the fulltime D i p l o m a programs and the part-time Certificate programs are offered in the evenings during the spring, summer and fall terms. A limited number o f senior (300 level) courses may be available i n the May/June and July/August terms. BUSINESS A D M I N I S T R A T I O N CERTIFICATE A Certificate in Business Administration will be awarded after successful completion of the two re- * Please contact the convenor for possible substitute for this course. Not all courses are offered each year. OPTIONAL Credits BADM 101 Management 3.0 quired courses and a choice of any four additional BADM Supervisory Skills 103 3.0 three-credit courses chosen from the Business AdminBADM 106 Organizational Behaviour 3.0 istration evening or daytime offerings. BADM 107 Business Law I 3.0 Substitution may be allowed at the discretion of the BMKT 161 Marketing 3.0 evening program coordinator. BFIN 141 Accounting 3.0 BFIN 142 Financial Accounting I 3.0 REQUIRED Credits BADM 101 Management 3.0 Other courses are offered by the Business AdministraBMKT 161 Marketing 3.0 tion Department. OPTIONAL BADM 102 BADM 103 BADM 106 BADM 107 BADM 201 BADM 210 BADM 268 BADM 307 BCPT 121 BCPT 122 BFIN 141 BFIN 142 Quantitative Methods I Supervisory Skills Organizational Behaviour Business Law I Business Systems Business Statistics Entrepreneurship/Small Business Management Advanced Business Law II Business Computing I Business Computing II Accounting Financial Accounting I 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Or other courses offered by the Business Administration Department. A D V A N C E D BUSINESS A D M I N I S T R A T I O N CERTIFICATE A second or advanced certificate will be awarded following successful completion of an additional four three-credit courses. These must be chosen from the Business Administration evening or daytime offerings. H. ACCELERATED BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DIPLOMA PROGRAMS These 12-month programs are designed to offer business training for mature students. Students have the opportunity to gain a clear understanding of business principles and to refine and add to the on-the-job experience they have previously acquired. A unique feature of the Accelerated Business Administration Diploma is the credit given for work experience through the Prior Learning Assessment (PLA) process. (For complete details refer to the PLA section under General Information — Admissions section in this Calendar). For a diploma, students must attain 60 credits, of which up to nine PLA credits are assigned for a minimum work experience of seven years. The remaining credits are earned from satisfactory completion of Business Administration courses. Students who do not have the minimum work experience are required to take additional courses so that they graduate with 60 credits. To allow for the particular educational needs of students who may have diverse working backgrounds, Note: A student must attain a 2.0 GPA or better to certain courses offered by the Department may be qualify for either certificate. substituted for others in the second and third term. The coordinator's approval must be obtained. BUSINESS C O M P U T I N G CERTIFICATE A Certificate in Business Computing will be awarded Admission Requirements after successful completion of the four required • Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status. courses and a choice of any two additional three-credit• Minimum of seven years business experience in courses chosen from the Business Administration industry, government or private business or an evening or daytime offerings. undergraduate degree and three years of experience. REQUIRED Credits BADM 201 Business Systems* 3.0 BCPT 121 Business Computing I 3.0 BCPT 122 Business Computing II 3.0 BCPT 221 Business Computing Presentation Graphics 3.0 • Personal interview conducted February to mid-April with final acceptance based on the applicant's work experience, maturity and aptitude for the program. • A personal resume. • Submit the Capilano College Application for Admission together with official transcripts and resume to Admissions, Registrar's Office. Career/Vocational 119 ACCELERATED GENERAL M A N A G E M E N T SUMMER BADM BCPT BCPT BFIN BMKT (Classes start early May) 102 Quantitative Methods 121 Business Computing I 122 Business Computing II 141 Accounting 161 Marketing FALL Business L a w I Business Statistics Finance for Managers Professional Selling Skills 2 Business Electives at the 200 or 300 level 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 Credits SPRING IBUS 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Credits B A D M 107 B A D M 210 B F I N 241 B M K T 263 BADM BADM BFIN IBUS Credits 302 304 244 321 Human Resource Management Strategic Management Management A c c o u n t i n g International Business or 334 Communication, Culture and International Business 2 Business Electives at the 200 or 300 level Plus applicable P L A credits or equivalent Total credit hours 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 9J0 60.0 ACCELERATED ACCOUNTING MANAGEMENT SUMMER (Classes start early May) Credits Quantitative Methods 3.0 3.0 B A D M 102 B A D M 201 B C P T 121 B F I N 141 B F I N 142 Business Systems Business Computing I Accounting Financial A c c o u n t i n g I * C M N S 220 A d v a n c e d Business W r i t i n g and Editing B A D M 107 Business L a w B F I N 241 Finance for Managers B F I N 341 Cost A c c o u n t i n g I B F I N 346 Financial A c c o u n t i n g II B M K T 161 Marketing Business Elective* Business Statistics Cost A c c o u n t i n g II Financial A c c o u n t i n g III Accounting Microcomputer Applications Career/Vocational 120 * Please see convenor i f a signature is required. ACCELERATED MARKETING MANAGEMENT SUMMER (Classes start early May) Credits Business Computing I Accounting Marketing Quantitative Methods Business Computing II 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 B C P T 121 BFIN 141 B M K T 161 B A D M 102 B C P T 122 Credits FALL B A D M 107 B M K T 261 B M K T 263 B M K T 360 B M K T 365 Business L a w I 3.0 Advertising Professional Selling Skills Marketing Research Marketing Strategies and 3.0 3.0 3.0 Decisions 1 Business Elective at the 200 or 300 level 3.0 3.0 SPRING Credits B A D M 304 Strategic Management BFIN 241 Finance for Managers B M K T 364 Consumer Behaviour 3.0 3.0 3.0 B M K T 367 Promotion Strategy & A n a l y s i s IBUS 334 Communication, Culture and International Business 1 Business E l e c t i v e * 3.0 Plus applicable P L A credits or equivalent Total credit hours 3.0 3.0 9J) 60.0 * Electives can be any appropriate Business A d m i n i s tration course o f 3 credits. I. 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Credits SPRING Plus applicable P L A credits or equivalent Total credit hours 3.0 3.0 6^0 60.0 3.0 Credits FALL B A D M 210 B F I N 342 B F I N 347 B F I N 249 3.0 3.0 B C P T 121 Business Computing I Business Elective* 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 PROFESSIONAL ACCOUNTING TRANSFER P A C K A G E A l l of the courses listed below transfer to professional accounting associations. Students can start taking the courses i n any term and work towards a designation at their o w n pace. It is very important to take B F I N 141 and 142 at the beginning because they are prerequisites for many courses. For more detailed information, call 984-4960 and request the Professional A c c o u n t i n g Transfer information package. In order to receive a certificate, diploma or degree, students must take other courses. It is crucial that courses are taken in the proper sequence to receive a diploma or degree. BADM BADM BCPT BCPT 102 107 121 Quantitative Methods Business L a w I 122 141 142 Business Computing I Business Computing II Introductory Accounting Financial Accounting I 170 111 Public Speaking Presentation Skills Principles of M i c r o e c o n o m i c s Theory 112 100 B A D M 201 B A D M 210 BFIN 241 BFIN 249 Principles of Macroeconomics Theory Composition Business Systems Business Statistics Finance for Managers BFIN BFIN CMNS ECON ECON ENGL CMNS BADM BFIN BFIN BFIN BFIN BFIN BFIN J. 220 310 341 342 346 347 350 351 Accounting Microcomputer Applications A d v a n c e d Business W r i t i n g and Editin Quantitative Methods III Cost Accounting I Cost Accounting II Financial Accounting II Financial Accounting III A d v a n c e d Financial Management Taxation Program Content TERM 1 January - February BCOP 215 BCOP CMPT CMPT 305 180 182 TERM 2 BCOP BCOP BCOP CMPT 3.0 3.0 Microcomputer Applications I Introduction to Systems 3.0 3.0 12.0 March - April 231 325 329 222 Data Management Network III Network I V Microcomputer Applications II BCOP CMPT 331 152 Network V Structured Programming CMPT CMPT 155 223 TERM 3 3.0 3.0 Quantitative Methods for Managers 3.0 Microcomputer Applications III 3.0 12.0 TERM 4 BCOP BMKT CMPT CMPT July - August 333 160 191 224 Network V I Marketing Accounting for Managers I 335 289 Network V I I Systems Implementation TERM 5 Each year, starting in January, Capilano College w i l l offer this ten-month computer program leading to a two-year diploma in Business Administration. The program is offered in two-month segments to enable you to concentrate more intensely over a shorter period of time. Capilano College is certified by Microsoft, N o v e l l , and The Canadian Information Processing Society ( C I P S ) . A l l certified courses are taught by our Microsoft and N o v e l l certified instructors. Students are advise to write Microsoft and N o v e l l certified exams to attain further certification. C a l l the Business Administration Department for a brochure and details. Appointments for interviews are conducted from M a r c h through January. Contact: Collen Liptaj, Learning Assistant Tel: (604) 990-7871 or see our Web Site for current information: http://www. capcollege. be. ca/badm/ cmpt.csp.html 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 12.0 May - June Microcomputer Applications I V C O M P U T E R SPECIALIST P R O G R A M Capilano College has developed this uniqure business computing program to address the challenge of emerging electronic commerce through microcomputers, business information systems, database management, networking, and web page design. Credits Network I Network II BCOP CMPT 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 12.0 September - October 3.0 3.0 6.0 P L A Credits 6.0 TOTAL CREDIT HOURS 60.0 K. CERTIFIED F I N A N C I A L P L A N N E R ™ PROGRAM A b o u t the Program Developed by the Canadian Institute of Financial Planning specifically for individuals who wish to become qualified professional financial planners, the program covers the full spectrum of financial products, services and strategies. Capilano College now offers the Certified Financial Planner™ Program ( C F P ) on the institute's behalf, with the approval of the Financial Planners Standards C o u n c i l o f Canada. After completing the program, students with two years work experience can write the professional proficiency examination in order to receive the C F P ™ certification mark. T h i s non-credit program is offered in partnership with the Canadian Institute of Financial Planning and the Capilano College Business Administration Department. Career/Vocational 121 The C F P programs are offered at various start dates throughout the year. F o r further information, contact the Continuing Education Department at 984-4901. Program Content Personal Financial Planning — An Introduction to Personal Financial Planning Wealth Accumulation — The Fundamentals of Investment Planning Controlling the Future — Creating Financial Security Strategic Investment Planning — Understanding Investment Products and Investment Strategies R i s k Management and Estate Planning — The Role of Insurance and Estate Planning in Personal Financial Management supplemented by work experience in B . C . local government, w i l l lead to Provincial Certification. The four courses described below are recognized by the M . O . A . and Board of Examiners as being transferable for credit toward the Intermediate Certificate in Municipal Administration. (For more details about the Board of E x a m i n e r s / M . O . A . Certificate Programs, contact D a v i d M o r r i s , Executive Director, M u n i c i p a l Officers' Association, V i c t o r i a at 250-383-7032.) O n completion o f the following four P A D M courses (Local Government Administration, L o c a l Government Services, M u n i c i p a l L a w , and M u n i c i p a l Finance i n British C o l u m b i a ) p l u s two other courses, successful candidates w i l l be eligible to receive a Capilano College Professional Certificate in Local Government Administration. r Contact: Linn Teetzel, 984-4960, ext. 2340 or 983-7570, ext. 2340, fax: 990-7878 Professional Practice — Comprehensive Financial Planning and Professional Ethics E-mail: Iteetzel @ capcollege. he. ca ™ Trademarks of the Certified Financial Planner Board of Standards, Inc., used under licence. P A D M 200 Neither the Canadian Institute of Financial Planning nor Capilano College award therightsto use the marks CFP™, Certified Financial Planner™ and CFP. The right to use the marks is granted under licence by the FPSCC to those persons who have met its educational standards passed by the FPSCC Professional Proficiency Examination, satisfied a work experience requirement and agreed to abide by the Code of Ethics. L. LOCAL GOVERNMENT ADMINISTRATION PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATE PROGRAM This program is designed with and for professionals currently employed by Municipalities, First Nations Governments, Regional Districts, Improvement Districts, or supporting agencies in British C o l u m b i a . The purpose o f the program is to provide opportunities for participants to gain increased knowledge of the political and organizational realities of local governments i n B . C . as w e l l as identifying opportunities for change within these systems. It is expected that participants w i l l be more effective managers, leaders and change agents as a result o f their involvement in the program. The Education Committee o f the M u n i c i p a l Officers' Association ( M . O . A . ) o f British C o l u m b i a and the Provincial Board o f Examiners has sanctioned several courses of study offered through the college and university systems i n British C o l u m b i a which, when Career/Vocational 122 COURSES Credits L o c a l Government Administration in B . C . 3.0 P A D M 201 L o c a l Government Services i n B . C . 3.0 P A D M 202 M u n i c i p a l Finance in B . C . 3.0 P A D M 203 M u n i c i p a l L a w i n B . C . 3.0 T w o B A D M , University Transfer or other courses approved by the Department. 61) 18.0 M. NETWORK SPECIALIST CERTIFICATE PROGRAM (NSP) This program is for people interested in a long-term computing career i n the hottest employment market available — networking. The Network Specialist Certificate Program is designed to train computing candidates i n cross-platform networking and to meet the specific needs o f the local market. A l l certified courses are taught by our N o v e l l and Microsoft certified instructors. Capilano College is the only college or university certified by both N o v e l l and Microsoft in Western Canada. W e are also accredited by C I P S , the Canadian Information Processing Society. Contact: Colleen Liptaj, Learning Assistant Tel: (604) 990-7871 Program Content TERM* Credits NSCP NSCP 305 325 Network II Network III 3.0 3.0 N S C P 329 N S C P 331 N S C P 333 N S C P 335 Self Study Network I V Network V Network V I Network V I I Networking Essentials (Microsoft designation) 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 18.0 • O T E C 146 is equivalent to B C P T 121 • O T E C 124 is equivalent to B C P T 121 and 122 Contact: Applied Business Technology: 984-4959 E-mail: abt@capcollege.bc.ca Admission Requirements • C o m p l e t i o n of Grade 12 or equivalent or mature The Network Specialist Certificate Program student status begins every September, October, January and March, • E l i g i b l e students w i l l attend an information meeting with every intake following the same sequence of and personal interview. courses as listed above. Each course is two months in duration and is offered on evenings and weekends. Program Profile *Note: In the dynamic world o f computing nothing is static! A s a result, we are constantly improving and updating the Network Specialist Program i n a balanced manner. Therefore, components of the program and the details of the courses are subject to adjustment without notice. BUSINESS FUNDAMENTALS PROGRAM Instructional Faculty D . B L A N E Y , I.D. ( U B C ) , C . P . S . , M . E d . ( S F U ) M . C R A G G , B . A . L a w (Durham), B . C Teaching Cert. L . C R O W E , B . S c . ( U o f Conn.) M . B . A . ( N . Eastern Univ.) M . G I O V A N N E T T I , B . S . A . (St. F . X . ) , B . E d . ( M t . St. Vincent), T E S L Cert., M . A . ( T E S L ) ( S F U ) D . G U S P I E , Instructor/Lab Supervisor C . G R I E V E S , B . E d . , Sec. ( U B C ) S. H O R N , I.D. ( U B C ) , M . E d . ( S F U ) C . S C H N U R R E N B E R G E R , L a b Supervisor K . V I C K A R S , B.Ed., Lic.Acct. (UBC). C . G . A . Support Staff Faye Ulker, Clerk Typist Wendy Weberg, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant The Program The Business Fundamentals program is a four-month program that may be taken on a full-time or part-time basis during the fall or spring semester. The Business Fundamentals program has been designed for students who require basic business skills training or who need to upgrade their skills. M a n y students take this program as a stepping stone to a more advanced program o f studies. Graduates o f this program may ladder into Business Administration to take more advanced courses leading towards a degree. Students w h o receive a m i n i m u m o f " B " i n the following courses w i l l receive credit from Business A d m i n i s tration: Credits O T E C 111 O T E C 113 O T E C 115 O T E C 117 O T E C 124 O T E C 146 Certificate Business English I o r Business E n g l i s h & Communications Business Systems & Procedures A c c o u n t i n g Procedures I Microcomputer Applications o r Microcomputer Applications I Requirements 3.0 3.0 3.0 6^0 15.0 COMMERCIAL ANIMATION PROGRAM Instructional Faculty J. D E L A N E Y , Head o f L a y o u t & Design, Delaney & Friends Cartoon Productions H . D E N N Y , D i p . Fine A r t (Southwark College o f A r t & Design), B . A . (Hons.), ( N o r w i c h School of A r t ) M . G H O R E I S H I , D i p . Animation/Television (Algonquin), Instructor's Cert. (Iran), Theatre Stage Design (Iran) K . K O H A T S U , Independent animator/animation designer D . M A R J A N O V I C , B . A . (Sarajevo), Theatre, F i l m and T V Direction (Middlesex Polytechnics in London) D . P E R R O , D i p . F i l m A n i m a t i o n ( E m i l y Carr College o f A r t & Design), Cert. Teacher Development Program (Ontario) E . T E I C H R O E B , Cert. Vancouver Vocational Institute W. V A N L U V E N , B.A., M.F.A. (UBC) Support Staff D . Holmes, Program Assistant General Information In the past 10 years, animation has exploded onto motion picture and television screens around the world. There has been an increasing demand for skilled animation artists caused by the continued success o f both limited animation television series and major film Career/Vocational 123 productions. C o m m e r c i a l animation companies i n British C o l u m b i a have been approached by both A m e r i c a n and European animation producers to provide services and/or co-produce animation projects. The only limitation on the industry to respond to these opportunities has been the shortage o f commerciallytrained animators. Contact: 983-7516; E-mail: toons®capcollege.be.ca The Program The C o m m e r c i a l A n i m a t i o n program prepares students for employment in the animation industry, specifically in the area of classical (character) animation. This intense program focuses on drawing skills and studio procedures i n the production o f animated commercials, television series, computer game design and feature films. The program works closely with producers o f traditional and computer animation, establishing and evolving the curriculum to meet the industry's need for skilled animators and animation designers. N e w students are admitted each September in a class o f 22. Part-Time Evening Courses Part-time, non-credit animation courses are offered through the Continuing Education Department. Courses are designed for prospective applicants who want to find out what a career i n commercial animation is like before they commit to a full-time animation program. Courses i n L i f e D r a w i n g and Computer Animation are also available. Part-time courses are taught by faculty i n the full-time program. Contact Continuing Education, 984-4901 for details. Admission Requirements and Procedures 1. A n Application for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted, together with official transcripts of all secondary and post-secondary courses to Admissions, Registrar's Office. 2. Requisites: • 18 years of age • Grade 12 completion or equivalent • Strong drawing skills Applicants must include five 8-1/2" x 11" drawings with their Application for A d m i s s i o n which must be sent to the Registrar's Office by m i d - A p r i l . The drawings should demonstrate an ability to draw accurately from life. Applicants deemed acceptable w i l l be invited to present a portfolio o f drawings i n person. The portfolio should show a diversity o f style Career/Vocational 124 and subject matter and demonstrate the applicant's aptitude for cartoon animation design. During the portfolio reviews, applicants w i l l complete a drawing exercise consisting o f a still life rendered realistically. The five drawings, portfolio, and drawing exercise w i l l be graded, and the top 22 applicants w i l l be accepted into the program. The remaining acceptable applicants w i l l be offered a place on a waiting list, ranked according to their respective scores. Prospective students should contact the A n i m a t i o n Department directly to receive the current admissions package which contains everything necessary to apply for admission to the C o m m e r c i a l Animation program. Information Meetings Information meetings w i l l be held between September and A p r i l . Please contact the department at 983-7516 for dates and times. Special Fees and Expenses Students may expect to pay approximately $4,000 for tuition, fees, materials and textbooks during the twoyear program. Graduation Requirements In order to graduate from the C o m m e r c i a l A n i m a t i o n program, the student must successfully complete all the component courses. Professional Standards A l l C o m m e r c i a l A n i m a t i o n students are required to adhere to high standards of academic performance and professional behaviour. Program Content Credits FIRST TERM A N I M 113 A N I M 114 Animation D r a w i n g I A n i m a t i o n Design I Life D r a w i n g for A n i m a t i o n I History o f Character A n i m a t i o n C M N S 115 Communications for A n i m a t i o n A N I M 111 A N I M 112 6.0 2.25 3.0 2.25 10 16.5 SECOND ANIM ANIM ANIM ANIM ANIM TERM 121 122 123 124 126 M D I A 120 A n i m a t i o n D r a w i n g II A n i m a t i o n Design II L i f e D r a w i n g for A n i m a t i o n II Anatomy for A n i m a t i o n Layout Design I F i l m Studies for Animation Credits 6.0 1.5 3.0 1.5 1.5 L5 15.0 THIRD TERM Credits A N I M 231 A N I M 232 A n i m a t i o n D r a w i n g III Storyboard Design 4.5 3.0 A N I M 233 A N I M 234 A N I M 236 L i f e D r a w i n g for A n i m a t i o n III Computer Animation Layout Design II 3.0 3.0 3X) 16.5 FOURTH TERM A N I M 241 A N I M 242 A N I M 243 A N I M 245 Credits Animation D r a w i n g I V Major Projects L i f e D r a w i n g for Animation I V C o l o u r and M e d i a 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 12.0 60.0 D i p l o m a Requirement COMMUNICATIONS Instructional Faculty C . K I L I A N , B . A . (Columbia), M . A . ( S F U ) B . R E I D , B . A . (Alberta) L . S A V A G E , B . A . ( M c G i l l ) , D i p . E d . , M . E d . (Alberta) A . S E D K Y , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . ( A i n Shams, Cairo) G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . ( U B C ) , Standard Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered Psychologist W. V A N L U V E N , B.A., M . F . A . ( U B C ) M . W I T T M A N , B . A . (Toronto), M . A . ( U B C ) The Communications ( C M N S ) Department provides training in writing and speech for students in University Transfer and Career/Vocational programs, as well as those wishing to apply specific skills to the world o f work. C M N S offers courses i n business and technical writing, public speaking, freelance writing, and English basics. Admission Requirements Students wishing to enrol in a specialized career program C M N S course must meet the admission standards of that particular program. In some cases students may wish to take the C M N S component before enrolling in the rest of the program. Such students w i l l require permission of the coordinators of both C M N S and the career program in question. Students wishing to enrol in open sections o f C M N S , must meet general College admission standards. Applications for A d m i s s i o n to individual programs must be submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office. Applicants who wish to enrol only in the open c o m m u nications courses must also submit an Application for A d m i s s i o n . Specify the program as Career — C o m m u nications courses only. A l l applicants must be admitted to the College before registration can be completed. University Transfer Courses Some Communications courses are eligible for full or partial university transfer credit. Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano C o l l e g e Transfer Guide for more information. Special Fees and Expenses Some C M N S classes require special fees. Consult the coordinator i f you have any questions about such fees in your course. Courses C M N S 080 — Career Program Communications Preparation for E S L Students C M N S 110 — Standard English Usage C M N S 111 — Administrative W r i t i n g Isavage@capcollege.be.ca C M N S 115— Communications for Animation or Crawford Kilian, 983-7585 E-mail: ckilian@hubcap.mlnet.com C M N S 120 — Effective W r i t i n g and Speech CMNS 125— Communication Theory C M N S 130 — Introductory M e d i a Communications C M N S 136 — Introduction to F i l m & T V Scriptwriting in Canada C M N S 137 — Elements o f F i l m and Television Scriptwriting C M N S 138 — Workshop i n F i l m and T V Contact: Leslie Savage, Coordinator, E-mail: 983-7515 Career Opportunities In an information-based economy, good communication skills are a vital asset i n any career. M a n y career program C M N S courses offer components on effective job search techniques, including resume writing and interviewing. Courses for freelance writers equip students with the basic skills needed to market their work to magazines, newspapers and book publishers. Scriptwriting for Canadian Markets C M N S 145 — Writing for the W o r l d w i d e W e b C M N S 152 — Report Writing C M N S 153— Communications and the Arts Career/Vocational 125 C M N S 154— Communications in Outdoor Recreation and T o u r i s m C M N S 159 — Communications for the L e g a l Secretary C M N S 165— Technical Presentations C M N S 170 — Public Speaking Presentation Skills CMNS 179— L e g a l Communications C M N S 190 — Magazine Article W r i t i n g C M N S 220 — A d v a n c e d Business W r i t i n g and Editing C M N S 250 — Introduction to Technical W r i t i n g C M N S 280 — Marketing C o m m e r c i a l Fiction C M N S 290 — Marketing a N o n - F i c t i o n B o o k C M N S 354 — A d v a n c e d Communications for Tourism Management C M N S 356 — Advanced M e d i a Communications C h i l d h o o d Care and Education program prepares students to work in various settings, including preschools and daycare centres. Contact: 984-4960 Career Opportunities Graduates o f the programs have found rewarding careers working in licensed preschool and daycare centres, in schools as Special Education Teaching Assistants, as C o m m u n i t y Care Licensing Officers, i n management positions in childcare organizations and as consultants. The placement record for our graduates is excellent. Credentials A w a r d e d A . E a r l y C h i l d h o o d C a r e and Education Certificate This is awarded to students who successfully complete the full-time or part-time basic program. EARLY CHILDHOOD CARE A N D EDUCATION P R O G R A M A. EARLY CHILDHOOD CARE A N D E D U C A T I O N CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M S B. INFANT A N D T O D D L E R CERTIFICATE C. F o l l o w i n g successful completion o f the Early C h i l d hood Care and Education Certificate program and the Infant & Toddler program, the student is awarded an Infant & Toddler Certificate from Capilano College. PROGRAM C . S p e c i a l Needs C e r t i f i c a t e SPECIAL N E E D S CERTIFICATE PROGRAM F o l l o w i n g successful completion of the Early C h i l d hood Care and Education Certificate program and the Special Needs program, the student is awarded a Special Needs Certificate from Capilano College. Instructional Faculty R. A N N E , B . S c . ( C o l u m b i a Pacific), D i p . E . C . E . (Ryerson) A . C A R R , M . A . ( S F U ) , D i p . E d . (London) J. C L A R K , R . N . (Regina General Hospital), Teaching D i p . (Sask.) J. M O S E S , B . A . , B . S . W . ( M c M a s t e r ) , M . E d . ( U B C ) , E . C . E . Cert. D . O ' K R A I N E T Z , B . E d . ( U B C ) E . C . E . Cert. M . R A W S T H O R N E , B.H.E., M.Ed. (UBC), R.D.N. L . J . R E N N I E B . S c , D i p . E . C . E . (Brigham Y o u n g ) Coordinator Support Staff Nancy Findlater, Arlene M i l l e r — Receptionists Diane M i l l s — Program Assistant Our society is recognizing the importance of the early years in children's development. There is an increasing need in communities for child care services, and for trained staff who can ensure that all children's interests and needs are met in a variety o f programs. The Early C a reer/Voca 126 B . Infant & T o d d l e r C e r t i f i c a t e tional E C C E Diploma A diploma in Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education is granted by Capilano College to students who have successfully completed the Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education Certificate and both the Infant & Toddler and Special Needs Certificates. The Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education Certificate and successful completion of the required 500 hours work experience enables students to register as an Early C h i l d h o o d Educator in British C o l u m b i a by applying to the Manager o f Early C h i l d h o o d Programs at the Community Care Facility Branch. Certificates in Infant & Toddler Education and Special Needs Education may also be acquired through the C C F B . Admission Requirements Enrolment in the Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education Certificate programs is limited to 25 students. Applicants must be at least 19 years of age, be a high school graduate, have college-level writing and academic skills and have 40 hours experience as an employee or volunteer i n a licensed early childhood setting within the last two years. A commitment to young children and their families and evidence o f interpersonal and life skills are also essential. A p p l i cants should be aware that a criminal record check is now required by practicum placements and employers. Due to the intensity o f the full-time program, it is recommended that applicants have at least one year o f college or university experience. In preparation for applying to the program, prospective students may choose to take some o f the following courses: E N G L 100, A N T H 121, A H I S 100, B I O L 104, P H I L 101, P S Y C 100, 101, S O C . 100, 101, W M S T 100. Application Procedure 1. Complete and submit an Application for A d m i s s i o n directly to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official transcripts for secondary and postsecondary education. A. EARLY CHILDHOOD CARE A N D EDUCATION CERTIFICATE PROGRAMS The North Vancouver campus offers both a full-time 10-month program and a part-time program which may be completed within two years. Sechelt and Squamish campuses may offer part-time programs. These programs are based on the "Competencies in Early C h i l d h o o d Education," and are approved by the C o m m u n i t y Care Facilities Branch o f the M i n i s t r y o f Health. The foundation of the E C C E programs is the study o f development from birth to school-age. The history and current philosophies of early childhood education are examined. A n interrelated series o f courses focus on the care and education of young children from an anti-bias perspective. Students also study program planning, curriculum content, health and nutrition, interpersonal skills and family-centre relationships. Theory and practice are closely related throughout the program. Students have practical experience in three practicum centres under the guidance o f qualified Early C h i l d h o o d Educators. In practicum centres students adhere to the Early C h i l d hood Educators of B . C . ' s Code of Ethics. 2. Attend the Information Meeting on M a r c h 1, 2000, 7:00 p m , R o o m C E 1 4 8 (Cedar B u i l d i n g ) . After the Information Meeting, you w i l l schedule a group interview time. Courses are presented in a manner which promotes active participation through demonstrations, oral reports, group projects, role play and discussions. 3. A t the interview, you must submit a resume, three letters o f reference, and complete a writing assignment. Program Content — North Vancouver Campus 4. A Reading Assessment w i l l be required. Upon Acceptance Submit a completed medical report on a form provided by the College, plus evidence o f absence of active tuberculosis. Continuation in the Program Continuation into each term o f the programs is dependent upon the demonstration o f satisfactory interpersonal, academic and teaching/guiding skills. " C - " is the m i n i m u m acceptable grade in all courses. Practicum grades must be " C " or higher. Due to possible licensing changes, courses may be restructured. Full-time FALL TERM Credits E D U C 155 H u m a n G r o w t h and Development I E D U C 170 Interpersonal S k i l l s E D U C 171 C a r i n g and L e a r n i n g Environments 4.5 1.5 1.5 EDUC EDUC EDUC EDUC 1.5 1.5 1.5 3J) 172 173 175 176 Guiding Young Children I C u r r i c u l u m Development I Observing and Recording Applied Theory—Practicum I 15.0 Special Fees and Expenses The student can expect to spend approximately $ 1,200 on books and supplies. A d d i t i o n a l costs w i l l be i n curred for a First A i d course and transportation to practicums. SPRING TERM Credits E D U C 220 Health, Safety & Nutrition 1.5 E D U C 254 Theoretical Perspectives E D U C 272 G u i d i n g Y o u n g C h i l d r e n II E D U C 273 C u r r i c u l u m Development II 3.0 1.5 1.5 Career/Vocational 127 H u m a n G r o w t h and Development II E D U C 276 A p p l i e d T h e o r y — P r a c t i c u m II SUMMER TERM*** E D U C 275 1.5 4J) 13.0 SUMMER TERM*** E D U C 270 Introduction to W o r k i n g with Families E D U C 271 Introduction to Centre Organization E D U C 273 C u r r i c u l u m Development II E D U C 277 A p p l i e d T h e o r y - P r a c t i c u m III Credits E D U C 271 Introduction to Centre Organization 1.5 E D U C 275 H u m a n G r o w t h and Development II 1.5 E D U C 277 A p p l i e d Theory — Practicum III 4.0 1.5 1.5 CIP* 4J) 7.0 Program Content — Squamish Please check Squamish calendar. Program Content — Sechelt Please check Sechelt calendar. Program Content — North Vancouver Campus Part-time — First Year FALL TERM Credits E D U C 166 H u m a n G r o w t h and Development — Part A E D U C 170 Interpersonal S k i l l s E D U C 171 C a r i n g & Learning 2.25 1.5 1.5 Environments SPRING TERM B. INFANT & TODDLER CERTIFICATE PROGRAM C. SPECIAL NEEDS CERTIFICATE PROGRAM These evening part-time programs are for the student who is certified as an Early C h i l d h o o d Educator or is i n the process o f completing the required 500 hours work Credits E D U C 167 H u m a n G r o w t h and Development — Part B 2.25 E D U C 172 G u i d i n g Y o u n g C h i l d r e n I 1.5 E D U C 173 C u r r i c u l u m Development I 1.5 SUMMER TERM*** Credits E D U C 173 C u r r i c u l u m Development I E D U C 177 Observing and Recording CIP* 4.5 * C I P : Course i n Progress *** A l l students must have E N G L 100 or C M N S 111 to graduate. C M N S 111 is offered i n the spring term i n the evening, one night per week. experience. Each program consists o f seven courses including two practicums. Courses are scheduled in the late afternoon and evening. Practicums are scheduled on an individual basis to meet students' needs. Courses in these programs are scheduled on a two-year rotation. Students may begin at any time i n the sequence. There are three core courses w h i c h are part of both programs. Infant & Toddler Certificate Program Program Content Part-time — Second Year FALL TERM 3.0 with Families E D U C 273 C u r r i c u l u m Development II 1.5 CIP* 128 E D U C 351* F a m i l y , School & C o m m u n i t y (Fall '99) Physical Care & Safety E D U C 355 E D U C 356 E D U C 357 (Fall 2000) Infant and Toddler Practicum Infant and Toddler Practicum 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.5 L5 8.5 Credits E D U C 254 Theoretical Perspectives E D U C 270 Introduction to W o r k i n g Career/Vocational A d v a n c e d C h i l d Development (Fall 2000) Credits E D U C 220 Health, Safety and Nutrition 1.5 E D U C 272 G u i d i n g Y o u n g C h i l d r e n II 1.5 E D U C 273 C u r r i c u l u m Development II 1.5 E D U C 276 A p p l i e d Theory — Practicum II 4.0 SPRING TERM Credits FALL TERM E D U C 350* SPRING TERM E D U C 352* E D U C 353 E D U C 356 E D U C 357 Centre Operations ( S p r i n g ' 0 1 ) Program Planning (Spring '01) Infant and Toddler Practicum Infant and Toddler Practicum Credits 2.0 1.5 1.5 L5 6.5 Special Needs Certificate Program R . W A Y T E , A s s o c . Arts ( O L U ) , N o v e l l Cert. J. W I L S O N , A s s o c . L i b . Arts (Malaspina) Program Content FALL TERM E D U C 262 E D U C 350* E D U C 351* E D U C 358 E D U C 359 Credits Special Education (Fall '99) A d v a n c e d C h i l d Development (Fall 2000) F a m i l y , School & C o m m u n i t y (Fall '99) Special Needs Practicum Special Needs Practicum SPRING TERM E D U C 352* E D U C 354 E D U C 358 Centre Operations (Spring '01) Program Planning for Special Needs (Spring 2000) Special Needs Practicum E D U C 359 Special Needs Practicum 2.0 A. 2.0 2.0 1.5 15 9.0 Credits 2.0 1.5 1.5 15 6.5 *These courses apply to b o t h the Infant/Toddler and Special Needs Certificates. N o t e : EDUC 350 and 352 are core courses and are therefore, components of both the Infant and Toddler and Special Needs Certificate programs. Due to possible licensing changes, courses may be restructured. (APPLIED) FISHERIES & FORESTRY SCIENCE A. FISH CULTURE TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATE — DISTANCE LEARNING FORMAT B. FISHERIES TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATE (STREAM REHABILITATION OPTION) C. Contact: Dave Bates, 987-1535 or 885-9310 POST-BACCALAUREATE IN FISHERIES SCIENCE D. STREAMKEEPERS TRAINING PROGRAM E. EXTENSION WORKSHOPS Sechelt Campus Instructional Faculty D . J. B A T E S , D i p . Tech. ( B C I T ) , B . S c , M . S c . ( S F U ) , R.P.Bio. FISH CULTURE TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATE — DISTANCE LEARNING F O R M A T Career Opportunities Graduates o f the program may find challenging careers with either the private or public fish culture sector. This includes the commercial aquaculture industry, government contracts with fisheries agencies, and consulting firms. A Fish Culture Technician, while w o r k i n g under the supervision o f a manager, is responsible for the w e l l being o f intensively reared salmonids. The Program The Fish Culture Technician program is available in distance learning format only. Students may register in one or more courses. U p o n completion the student is awarded the Fish Culture Technician Certificate. The distance learning program has been designed for individuals who are currently working or seeking employment in the fish culture field and who wish to upgrade their academic credentials. Individualized programs may be available. Admission Requirements Prospective applicants should inquire by telephone or by writing to the Sechelt campus. A n information package and application w i l l then be forwarded. Program Content Credits F S C I 100 F S C I 101 F S C I 102 F S C I 103 F S C I 105 Salmonid B i o l o g y Fish Culture I Fish Culture II Water Quality 3 3 Salmonid Nutrition, Feeding & Growth Fish Health 3 3 F S C I 106 F S C I 120 F S C I 140 Computers in Fisheries F i e l d Practicum I F S C I 141 F i e l d Practicum II 3 3 3 3 3 27 E . J. F I E L D , B . S c . ( U V i c ) , P h . D . ( U Q l d ) K. R E I M E R , B.Sc. (UVic) J. S U T H E R S T , B . S c . ( U V i c ) Career/Vocational 129 B. FISHERIES TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATE C. (STREAM REHABILITATION OPTION) Fisheries Technician Certificate This 28 week program gives participants the skills required to work as Fisheries Technicians on fisheries management and aquatic rehabilitation projects i n B C . Instruction in this program emphasizes the practical aspects o f salmonid habitat and population assessments and rehabilitation methodology, by guiding participants through working projects modeled from existing stream and riparian assessments. The assessment techniques follow the Resource Inventory Committee ( R I C ) standards and rehabilitation methods are M E L P - W R P accepted techniques. Instruction w i l l take place i n the field as participants are guided through working examples o f actual stream and riparian assessments and restoration projects. POST-BACCALAUREATE IN FISHERIES SCIENCE A post-degree program in the applied aspects o f fisheries management is currently under development. Courses available for future credit towards the postdegree program or undergraduate academic transfer to S i m o n Fraser University include: Credits F S C I 200 B i o l o g y o f Salmonids F S C I 210 Intensive Salmonid Culture 3 3 D. STREAMKEEPERS TRAINING PROGRAM The Streamkeepers program helps citizens protect and preserve freshwater habitats. Development pressures from our expanding populations threaten these environments. Admission Requirements Prospective applicants should inquire by telephone or by writing to the Sechelt campus. Students seeking advance credit for particular courses must apply i n writing and submit the appropriate documentation for a Prior Learning Assessment ( P L A ) . C a l l the Sechelt campus for the appropriate contact person. Applicants must also submit with their application, transcripts o f all secondary and post-secondary courses taken previously (except Capilano College). The Streamkeepers program encourages good watershed practices through productive, hands-on involvement. C o m m u n i t y stewardship is essential for longterm protection o f our environment. Workshops provide intensive training i n methods used to survey and map streams, as w e l l as to make assessments o f stream health based on habitat complexity, water quality, insect and fish populations. Streamside planting methods are also covered. Workshops are scheduled throughout the province as demand arises. Credits Graduation Requirements F S C I 150 T o receive a Fisheries Technician certificate from Capilano College, students must successfully complete all Fisheries Technician courses or their equivalents (27.0 credits). Note that at least 5 0 % o f these credits must be obtained via courses at this College. Program Content F S C I 100 F S C I 120 F S C I 150 R E C . 163 F S C I 190 F S C I 191 F S C I 192 F S C I 140 F S C I 141 Salmonid B i o l o g y Computers in Fisheries Streamkeepers W o r k s h o p I Wilderness First A i d I Fisheries Techniques I Fisheries Techniques II Aquatic Habitat Rehabilitation W o r k Practicum W o r k Practicum Career/Vocational 130 Credits 3 3 3 3 4.5 4.5 3 3 3 30 E. Streamkeepers I 3 FISHERIES A N D FORESTRY EXTENSION WORKSHOPS The A p p l i e d Fisheries and Forestry Science Department develops and delivers workshops and seminars for government, industry and public groups on a wide range o f related topics. These workshops cover such topics as riparian ecology and aquatic habitat assessment to introduction to computer use i n the resouce management field. Instructors are experienced practitioners with specialities i n the subject area. Groups looking for assistance i n developing extension workshops or requiring delivery o f workshops on specific topics should contact the Department directly. GRAPHIC DESIGN A N D ILLUSTRATION PROGRAM This program is a department within the Media Technology Division. Other Art programs in this Calendar include Studio Art, Textile Arts and Commercial Animation. Instructional Faculty C . D A H L , D i p . (Vancouver School o f A r t ) K . D I C K I N S O N , B . A . (Hons), F . A . ( W . Surrey College o f A r t & Design) J. E D G E , Alberta College o f A r t J. E D W A R D S G R I F F I N , B . A . (University o f Alberta) F. F O R S T E R , Alberta College of Art H . G R I B L I N , B . A . ( U B C ) , D i p . ( E m i l y Carr Institute of A r t & Design) M . H I C K S , California State University o f L o n g Beach K . H O L L A N D , D i p . (Johannesburg School o f A r t ) K . J A G E R , D i p . ( E m i l y Carr Institute o f A r t & Design) S. K I N A K I N , Capilano College J. L O N G , B . P . A . A r t Center (Los Angeles) D . M A C L A G A N , A . O . C . A . , I.D.C., F . C . A . R . M A R T I N , B . A . ( U . o f Washington) P. M I L E L L I , Alberta College o f A r t L . S A V A G E , B . A . ( M c G i l l ) , M . E d . ( U of A ) P . S I N G E R , M F A (Concordia University) D . T A I T , E m i l y Carr, D i p . V . S . A . ( E C C A D ) D. Y A S I N S K I The Program The Graphic Design and Illustration program is an intensive, three year full-time commitment. Students are expected to achieve and maintain the highest standards working independently and as a team member, developing time management and organizational skills. The curriculum encompasses historical, social, ethical and evolutionary developments in the visual c o m m u n i cations industry. Students are engaged in acquiring skills and sensitivity in various media and becoming effective in the creative and production process. Instruction encourages imaginative conceptual thinking, technical and business analysis, and expertise. Courses are taught by practising, professional artists and design consultants. Classes include projects, demonstrations, lectures and critiques, as well as scheduled professional and industrial presentations and tours. Graduates are prepared to practise independently or collaboratively and in a variety of employment opportunities such as design studios, illustration, computer graphics, multimedia, animation, f i l m , advertising and public relations agencies. Capilano College produces illustrators and designers prepared to shape the future o f visual communication, utilizing traditional and current electronic mediums. Contact: 990-7820 Admission Requirements This program requires a high level o f maturity and integrity. Students w i t h life experience following high school are usually more knowledgeable and mature i n their choice o f direction and better prepared; however, highly motivated high school graduates can succeed here, and we encourage those students to apply. Applicants to the program must supply the following documentation to the College by M a r c h 31, 1999. No late applications accepted. • • • Completed Capilano College A p p l i c a t i o n for Admission Secondary and post-secondary transcripts Certificate of English Language Assessment Test ( E L A ) or Test o f English as a Foreign Language ( T O E F L ) , i f applicable Note: All applications for admission must be submitted to the Registrar's Office. Official transcripts and other documents should be attached. Portfolio submission dates are A p r i l 26, 27 and 28, 1999. N o portfolio w i l l be reviewed i f proper documentation has not been received at the C o l l e g e by M a r c h 31, 1999. No late portfolio submissions accepted. Portfolios are reviewed by an Admissions Committee on the basis o f drawing, design, colour, creativity, media variety and presentation. Applicants whose portfolios meet the standards of the program are called for interviews and testing on M a y 10 and 11. Final decisions on the make-up o f the new class are made by M a y 21. Portfolio Requirements There is no formula for an acceptable portfolio. In general, you should submit your best and most recent work. There should be a m i n i m u m o f 10 and a m a x i mum of 15 original samples produced, drawn, designed, or photographed by the applicant representing their current abilities. Imaginative and experimental design and drawings in any medium and representing your personal interests and abilities are welcome additions to the portfolio. Samples must be flat, not rolled; they should not be framed or glassed. We will not accept portfolios larger than 20" x 26" (50 cm x 66 cm). Ca reer/Voca tional 131 Photographs or slides o f larger work or 3-D projects may be sent; however, they do not replace the required m i n i m u m o f 10 samples o f original work. The applicant's name and address must be on the outside of the portfolio in large letters. M a r k the back of each portfolio piece with your name. Please be sure to include the completed "Program Information Sheet". If a portfolio is to be returned, send either stamps or cheque to cover the cost o f return postage. D o not send any portfolios by bus system as they are not delivered to Capilano College. Parcel Post insured, A i r Parcel Post insured or prepaid courier service is usually the best way to have portfolios sent and returned. Capilano College cannot accept responsibility for loss or damage to an applicant's work. Program Content Credits Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements Credits FIRST TERM A H I S 104 C M N S 120 G R P H 152 G R P H 154 G R P H 155 G R P H 156 G R P H 158 Introduction to V i s u a l Culture Effective W r i t i n g & Speech Life Drawing I General D r a w i n g I M e d i u m s and Techniques I Principles o f V i s u a l Communications I Design I SECOND TERM A H I S 105 G R P H 157 GRPH GRPH GRPH GRPH GRPH 159 164 170 178 184 102.0 12.0 114.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3^0 21.0 Credits Introduction to V i s u a l Culture II Principles o f V i s u a l Communications II M e d i u m s and Techniques II 3.0 General D r a w i n g II Studio Production I Design II Life D r a w i n g II 3.0 3.0 3.0 10 21.0 3.0 3.0 Note: Students who wish to substitute English courses for CMNS 120 may do so with the Communications Coordinator's approval. THIRD TERM C M N S 153 G R P H 231 G R P H 232 G R P H 233 G R P H 234 G R P H 235 Typography I Graphic Design I D r a w i n g for Illustration I 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 A p p l i e d Design I Painting for Illustration I 3.0 3.0 Communications & the Arts Career/Vocational 132 Credits Computer Applications L i f e D r a w i n g III G R P H 236 G R P H 237 Credits FOURTH TERM Typography II D r a w i n g for Illustration II A p p l i e d Design II Painting for Illustration II Three Dimensional Graphic Design Illustration M e d i a II G R P H 241 G R P H 243 G R P H 244 G R P H 245 G R P H 352 G R P H 363 Graphic Design II Illustration M e d i a I A p p l i e d Design III Advertising Illustration I Studio Production II G R P H 365 G R P H 366 3.0 3.0 18.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 10. 15.0 Credits SIXTH TERM G R P H 246 G R P H 361 G R P H 364 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Credits FIFTH TERM G R P H 242 G R P H 353 G R P H 354 G R P H 355 G R P H 356 3.0 3.0 24.0 V i s u a l Communications III A d v a n c e d Typographic Design A p p l i e d Design I V Advertising Illustration II Business o f Design 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3_£ 15.0 H O M E SUPPORT ATTENDANT P R O G R A M F O U R - M O N T H CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M See also: Personal Care Attendant, Resident Care Attendant programs. A new, revised program (HSA/RCA combined program) is under development for Fall 1999. Please contact the department for details. Instructional Faculty T. A D L E R , B . A . (Toronto), M . S . W . ( U B C ) Coordinator P. D e S O U S A , R . N . , B . S c . N . B. ESTEY, R . N . M . D A Y A N , B . S . R . ( U B C ) , Registered Physiotherapist B. M I L L E R , R . N . Support Staff: Nancy Findlater, Arlene M i l l e r , Receptionists Diane M i l l s , Program Assistant Career Opportunities The H o m e Support Attendant program is designed to provide students with opportunities to develop the basic knowledge, skills and attitudes necessary to provide assistance to individuals and families i n the community. The environment in which the H o m e Support Attendant functions is usually the client's home; however, the graduate may be required to provide assistance to clients/families i n a variety o f community settings. Graduates are prepared to function collaboratively as members o f a multi-disciplinary community support team. Graduates work as front-line care providers under the direction and supervision o f a health professional. U p o n completion of the program, graduates are eligible for employment as a H o m e Support Attendant with a community H o m e Support A g e n c y . W i t h additional training and experience, the graduate may be able to assume other responsibilities appropriate to the job role. The Program A t the present time, the College does not offer an ongoing, full-time program. However, i f community demand is appropriate, the H o m e Support program may be offered on a full-time or part-time basis. Capilano College offers a Certificate program recognized throughout British C o l u m b i a . Contact: 984-4960. Admission Requirements 1. Grade 10 or equivalent. Students may be asked to complete a reading comprehension test. Some practicum placements require a criminal record check. 2. Applicants are required to attend an information meeting and have a student/instructor interview prior to acceptance into the program. 3. Applicants must be at least 19 years o f age and have a genuine desire to work with elderly people and their families in the health field. T w o references are required. 4. Applicants need good physical and mental health, and are required to complete a medical report on a form provided by the College, plus evidence o f absence o f active tuberculosis. 5. Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted directly to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official transcripts. Program Content Credits H S A . 110 H S A . 111 H S A . 112 H S A . 113 R C A P 100 R C A P 101 R C A P 102 W o r k Role Concepts in H o m e Support Healing: Personal Care Skills Special Needs i n H o m e Support 1.5 3.0 1.5 6.0 1.5 3.0 Practical Experience Health: Lifestyle & Choices Health & Healing: Concepts Human Relations: Interpersonal Communications Total Program Credits: 15 18.0 JAZZ STUDIES A. JAZZ STUDIES DIPLOMA PROGRAM B. BACHELOR OF MUSIC IN JAZZ STUDIES DEGREE PROGRAM Instructional Faculty M . A L L E N , M.Mus. (McGill) E. A N D E R S O N F. A R D I E L , B . A . (SFU) B. C O O N D. D U K E , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , M . A . ( U . of North Carolina), P h . D . ( U V i c ) L . F A L L S , A . R . C . T . (Toronto), B . M u s . , M . M u s . (UBC) S. G U N N K. H A M M E T - V A U G H A N C. H A N N E Y , B.Mus. ( U B C ) A. HAWIRKO F . H O U L E , B . M u s . ( M c G i l l ) , M . M u s . (Yale) S. K A R P , B . A . (Calif. State U . ) L . K A A R I O , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , M . M u s . (W.Wash.) L. K E L L E T T N . K O L E S N I K O V , B . A . (Gnessin's M u s i c a l College) I. K U K U R U D Z A A. L A C H A N C E S. M A D D O C K , D i p . (Peel School o f the Arts) R . M A R O I S , B . M u s . (Laval) R. M C K E N Z I E , B.Mus. (UBC), M . M u s . ( U B C ) G. M C N A B , B.Mus. (UBC), M.Mus. (UBC), Coordinator K. M O O R E C. N E L S O N T. N I C K E L S , B . A . ( U C L A ) P. O L F R E Y , B . M u s . ( U . Manitoba), M . M u s . (Ithaca) T. O X B O L , D i p . (Copenhagen) M . R E V E L E Y , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , D i p l o m a (Berklee School of M u s i c ) R. S A M W O R T H P. S C H R E I B E R , B . M u s . ( U B C ) Ca reer/Voca tional 133 C. S I G E R S O N R. T A G G A R T B . T U R N E R , B . M u s ( W . Wash.), M . M u s . ( N . Texas) A . W O L D , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , A . R . C . T . (Toronto) General Information Capilano College offers four music programs: a twoyear D i p l o m a i n Jazz Studies, a two-year Bachelor o f M u s i c Transfer program, and four-year degrees in Jazz Studies and M u s i c Therapy. The degree programs are offered in co-operation with the Open Learning A g e n c y ( O L A ) with degrees granted by the Open University. Facilities A s recording experience has become an essential part of today's musical training, the Jazz Studies program has now integrated multi-track recording into the curriculum. V o c a l , instrumental, and arranging/ composition students all make use o f our multi-track facilities. Composition and arranging students w i l l work with electronic instruments i n our M i d i Studio. Computer labs are available to students for supplemental help in ear training, sight reading, and other basic music skills, as w e l l as the printing and recording o f theory and arranging assignments. Faculty Jazz Studies Program Mission and Goals The Bachelor o f M u s i c i n Jazz Studies is an applied academic degree. The program's mission is to produce graduates with a broad-based academic background and comprehensive abilities i n music with j a z z as the main focus. A s j a z z is an eclectic art form that draws upon influences from many different musical genres, graduates w i l l have been exposed to music from diverse cultural sources, historical periods and media. Jazz is an applied art form; therefore, the achievement of specific high standards i n vocal and/or instrumental performance, improvisation, composition, and arranging are fundamental goals o f the program curriculum. Demonstration o f ability in these areas is a qualifying requirement for all graduates. Career Opportunities The two-year Diploma program is intended to provide its students with the skills necessary to develop careers as self-employed professionals i n the contemporary music industry. The four-year Degree program provides a curriculum which balances and integrates the instruction of j a z z , traditional music, and general academic electives to provide an enriched education at the degree level. It is an attractive option for those who wish to pursue music as self-employed professionals, for those who wish to continue their musical development as part o f a liberal arts education before pursuing other careers, and for those interested in teaching music in the public school system. Majors i n V o c a l Performance, Instrumental Performance, Arranging/Composition, and General Studies with an Education Stream are available. Those interested i n teaching w o u l d enrol in the Education Stream o f the General Studies program. Ca reer/Voca 134 tional The Jazz Studies program prides itself i n the number and quality o f specialized faculty it has on staff. M o s t instructors are also top professional musicians who bring extensive practical experience to their classes. Admission Requirements for First Year (Diploma) A l l applicants must: 1. Have Grade 12 graduation or equivalent or mature student status. 2. Demonstrate an adequate knowledge o f theory rudiments through a department test. 3. Display a sufficiently high level o f performance and sight-reading ability on their concentration instrument (see Auditions). 4. Pass a simple aural aptitude test i n v o l v i n g pitch and rhythm matching. 5. Submit two letters o f recommendation from music professionals or instructors. Admission Requirements for Transfer/ Returning Students (Diploma) A l l applicants must: 1. M e e t the general admission requirements o f Capilano College. 2. Display a sufficiently high level o f performance and sight-reading ability on their concentration instrument (see Auditions). 3. Take an aural test to determine their basic acceptability and placement within the ear training sequence (see Transfer o f Credit). 4. Take a keyboard proficiency test to determine their placement within the class keyboard sequence (see Transfer o f Credit). 5. Submit two letters o f recommendation from music professionals or instructors. The auditioning instructor w i l l make recommendations regarding acceptance, eligibility and placement in some performance classes, placement in Private M u s i c Instruction ( P M I ) , and required remedial work. Admission Prerequisites for Fourth Year Degree Program U p o n completion o f the two-year D i p l o m a i n Jazz Studies, students may register as a third-year student i n one o f the degree options. Permission to enrol in any major w i l l be based on completion o f prerequisite requirements, and the recommendation of the faculty concerned. Continuation i n the V o c a l Performance, Instrumental Performance and Arranging/Composition majors is subject to review at the end o f the third year of studies. Students may be accepted into some upper level courses before the completion o f their diploma on a part-time or probationary basis with the permission of the instructors involved, but official acceptance into the degree program is necessary before any opportunity to graduate should be anticipated. Transfer students should not anticipate immediate acceptance into the degree program, as there are normally some lower level music courses and/or general electives that must be completed before this can take place. Official acceptance into a major o f the degree program can be applied for once the requirements for the two-year Jazz Studies diploma have been met. (See Graduation Requirements, T w o - Y e a r Diploma.) Admission Procedures: 1. Submit the Application for A d m i s s i o n to A d m i s sions, Registrar's Office, together with official transcripts of all secondary and post-secondary education. 2. Information meetings, auditions and placement tests are held i n M a y . Please call (604) 984-4951 for meeting times and audition appointments. Auditions Auditions are required for all entrants. L i v e audition and testing is preferred. (Contact the Jazz Studies program for specific audition requirements.) Entrance into the Jazz Studies program is competitive as seats are restricted. Applicants are ranked in c o m parison with others who audition on the same concentration instrument with the entrance year applied for taken into consideration. Providing that all other entrance requirements have been passed, students w i l l be admitted i n the order o f their ranking until the seats available for that instrument have been filled. Separate auditions are held for the College Singers, Jazz Choirs, Stage Bands, and Studio V o c a l Performance Class. Acceptance into the program does not guarantee acceptance into these ensembles. It is the student's responsibility to sign up for and attend these auditions. Transfer of Credit The Jazz Studies program accepts credits from other post-secondary institutions i f they are applicable and have suitable equivalency. Because o f the wide variations that exist i n approach and emphasis i n various music programs, the Jazz Studies program reserves the right to examine for competency according to o u r course requirements before transfer credit is approved. Transfer o f concentration performance instrument course, keyboard and ear training credit w i l l only be possible up to the placement level determined by the auditioner and keyboard and ear training test results. Since the Capilano program emphasizes j a z z studies and most other Canadian music degree programs provide a study o f traditional music, block transfer of courses to other institutions is not available. Several individual courses have, however, been accepted by institutions with similar offerings. Special Fees and Expenses The fees for private music instruction ( P M I ) w i l l be announced at least one month prior to the beginning o f the fall term. In 1998-99 the fees for P M I were $430 ($215 per credit) for the Jazz Studies program and are subject to change without notice. P M I lab fees are $30. Satisfactory Standing Students considered to be i n "Satisfactory Standing" are entitled to pre-register in the next term o f the program. A student who has not maintained a satisfactory standing in a program in any term may be denied permission to register i n that program i n a subsequent term, or be required to re-audition. To maintain satisfactory standing, all Jazz Studies students must be enrolled i n a full-time course o f study (at least nine credit hours) that includes a reasonable number o f courses specific to their major (normally three) and must achieve a grade point average above 1.8. The grade o f " D " i n a course, although a minimal pass, is not sufficient to fulfil prerequisite requirements. Career/Vocational 135 Students should refer to the section on academic performance in the College Calendar for further information on " A c a d e m i c Probation". These required credits may be replaced with credits from any Jazz, M u s i c or General Electives. In addition, to qualify and continue in the specialized majors, Jazz Studies Degree students are expected to achieve a m i n i m u m grade o f " B - " in all courses directly related to that major. These courses are: Program Content Arranging/Composition Concentration P M I (Composition) A l l required Theory courses Arranging I, II, III, I V Rhythm Section W r i t i n g Instrumental Performance Concentration P P M I Improvisation I, II, III, I V A l l Small Ensembles V O C A L CONCENTRATION FIRST YEAR FALL Credits * E N G L 100 Composition J A Z Z 103 The Language o f M u s i c J A Z Z 114 Class Piano I J A Z Z 136 V o c a l Jazz Master Class I J A Z Z 184 Sight Singing/Ear Training I Large Ensemble J A Z Z 170 History o f Jazz P M I . 145 Jazz V o i c e 3.0 3.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.0 3.0 2J) 16.0 A l l Large Instrumental Ensembles SPRING Vocal Performance * E N G L 103, 104, 105 or 106 J A Z Z 105 R h y t h m Section W r i t i n g J A Z Z 106 Traditional Harmony and Composition J A Z Z 107 Jazz Theory and Composition I 3.0 1.5 J A Z Z 115 J A Z Z 137 J A Z Z 185 1.0 1.5 1.5 Concentration P P M I Improvisation I, II V o c a l Master Class I, II Studio V o c a l Performance I, II, III, I V V o c a l Jazz Master Class I, II, III, I V A l l V o c a l Ensembles " C " grades ( C - , C , C+) in these courses can only be applied for credit toward the Bachelor of M u s i c in Jazz Studies with the permission of the Jazz Studies Grade Appeals Committee. W h e n unusual circumstances have resulted in lower than expected grades in a student's first semester o f a continuing course, instructors may recommend to the Committee that the student be given probationary acceptance into the next semester o f the course. If the student fails to achieve a m i n i m u m o f " B - " in the next level of the course, no credit for either course can be applied toward the specialized degree. A. JAZZ STUDIES DIPLOMA PROGRAM T W O - Y E A R DIPLOMA Students w i l l be awarded a two-year diploma in Jazz Studies upon completion o f the first two years o f requirements for either the vocal or instrumental concentrations as outlined below. The General Elective credits are only required o f those planning on continuing toward a four-year degree. F o r the purposes o f the diploma, J A Z Z 271 and 273 may be replaced by six credits o f Jazz, M u s i c or i f approved by the coordinator, General Electives. U p o n demonstration o f sufficient piano skills a student may be given advanced placement in Class Piano. Career/Vocational 136 Credits Class Piano II V o c a l Jazz Master Class II Sight Singing/Ear Training II Large Ensemble P M I . 245 Jazz V o i c e SECOND YEAR FALL 1.5 1.5 1.0 21) 14.5 Credits *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 203 Jazz Theory and Composition II J A Z Z 214 Class Piano III J A Z Z 236 Studio V o c a l Performance I J A Z Z 238 V o c a l Jazz Master Class I J A Z Z 284 Sight Singing/Ear Training III 3.0 1.5 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 Large Ensemble * * J A Z Z 2 7 1 M u s i c History I 1.0 3.0 P M I . 345 2J0 16.0 Jazz V o i c e SPRING Credits * G e n . Elective J A Z Z 204 Jazz Theory and C o m p o s i t i o n III 3.0 1.5 J A Z Z 215 J A Z Z 237 1.0 1.5 Class Piano I V Studio V o c a l Performance II J A Z Z 239 V o c a l Jazz Master Class II J A Z Z 285 Sight Singing/Ear Training I V Large Ensemble * * J A Z Z 273 M u s i c History II P M I . 445 Jazz V o i c e 1.5 1.5 1.0 3.0 2J) 16.0 INSTRUMENTAL CONCENTRATION FIRST YEAR FALL * E N G L 100 J A Z Z 103 JAZZ JAZZ JAZZ JAZZ 114 170 184 194 B. BACHELOR OF MUSIC IN JAZZ STUDIES DEGREE P R O G R A M Credits Composition 3.0 The Language o f M u s i c Class Piano I History o f Jazz Sight Singing/Ear Training I S m a l l Ensemble I 3.0 1.0 3.0 Large Ensemble PMI. lxx 1.5 1.5 1.0 1Q 16.0 SPRING Credits * E N G L 103, 104, 105 or 106 J A Z Z 105 R h y t h m Section W r i t i n g J A Z Z 106 Traditional Harmony and 3.0 1.5 Composition Jazz Theory and Composition I J A Z Z 107 Class Piano II J A Z Z 115 J A Z Z 185 Sight Singing/Ear Training II J A Z Z 195 S m a l l Ensemble II Large Ensemble P M I . 2xx 1.5 1.5 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.0 m 14.5 SECOND YEAR FALL *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 203 Jazz Theory and Composition II J A Z Z 214 Class Piano III J A Z Z 282 Improvisation I J A Z Z 284 Sight Singing/Ear Training III J A Z Z 294 S m a l l Ensemble III FOUR-YEAR DEGREE Students must complete all courses outlined in one of the following major areas o f study to be eligible for the Bachelor o f M u s i c in Jazz Studies degree from the Open University. These major areas o f study may include Jazz or M u s i c electives which should be chosen in consultation with the Coordinator o f the program. Certain courses in the third and fourth years o f the degree program are offered on a rotational basis every two years. B e sure to consider the year that these courses are due to be offered when planning your course load for the year. The placement o f these rotating courses in your schedule w i l l not necessarily conform to the semester plans presented below. Please take every precaution to ensure that y o u have all the necessary prerequisites in place when you plan to take them. The courses offered on a rotational basis are subject to change, but presently are J A Z Z 410/411, J A Z Z 460, J A Z Z 370, J A Z Z 470, J A Z Z 336/337, J A Z Z 310, J A Z Z 300, M U S . 210/211 and M U S . 218/ 219. Credits 3.0 1.5 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 240 F o r m and A n a l y s i s J A Z Z 282 Improvisation I Large Ensemble 1.0 J A Z Z 336 * * J A Z Z 271 P M I . 3xx 3.0 V o c a l Jazz Master Class III J A Z Z 338 J A Z Z 370 Jazz Styles Large Ensemble P P M I 545 Performance M u s i c History I 1Q 16.0 SPRING Credits M A J O R IN V O C A L THIRD YEAR FALL PERFORMANCE 1.5 1.0 1.5 *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 241 Counterpoint J A Z Z 285 1.5 1.5 1.0 3.0 J A Z Z 339 J A Z Z 470 P M I . 4xx SPRING 1Q 16.0 *See A c a d e m i c Course Requirements. **Degree students must complete J A Z Z 271, 273 to fulfil their traditional M u s i c History requirement. 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 10 15.5 3.0 J A Z Z 295 S m a l l Ensemble I V Large Ensemble * * J A Z Z 273 M u s i c History II 3.0 Studio V o c a l Performance III *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 204 Jazz Theory and Composition III J A Z Z 215 Class Piano I V J A Z Z 283 Improvisation II Sight Singing/Ear Training I V Credits J A Z Z 283 J A Z Z 337 Credits 3.0 1.5 1.5 Improvisation II Studio V o c a l Performance I V V o c a l Jazz Master Class I V 1.5 1.5 1.5 World Music Large Ensemble P P M I 629 or 645 2.0 1Q Performance 15.5 Career/Vocational 137 FOURTH YEAR FALL * G e n . Elective J A Z Z 172 Arranging I J A Z Z 310 Jazz Pedagogy J A Z Z 410 Conducting I J A Z Z 460 C o m m e r c i a l Relations in M u s i c J A Z Z 494 S m a l l Ensemble V I I Large Ensemble P P M I 745 Performance Credits 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 3J) 15.5 SPRING Credits *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 272 Arranging II J A Z Z 300 20th Century Theory J A Z Z 411 Conducting II J A Z Z 495 S m a l l Ensemble VIII Large Ensemble P P M I 845 Performance 3.0 1.5 3.0 1.5 1.5 2.0 3X) 15.5 124.5 Total Credits * See Academic Course Requirements MAJOR IN INSTRUMENTAL PERFORMANCE THIRD YEAR FALL Credits Large Ensemble 2.0 P P M I 5 xx 3J) 15.5 Credits *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 241 Counterpoint J A Z Z 272 Arranging II J A Z Z 383 Improvisation I V 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 J A Z Z 395 S m a l l Ensemble V I J A Z Z 470 World Music Large Ensemble 1.5 1.5 2.0 P P M I 6xx 1Q 15.5 *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 310 Jazz Pedagogy J A Z Z 410 Conducting I Career/Vocational 138 SPRING Credits 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 3J) 15.5 Credits *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 300 20th Century Theory J A Z Z 411 Conducting II J A Z Z 495 S m a l l Ensemble VIII J a z z / M u s i c Electives Large Ensemble P P M I 8xx Total Credits 3.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 M 15.5 124.5 * See A c a d e m i c Course Requirements M A J O R IN ARRANGING/COMPOSITION THIRD YEAR FALL Credits Large Ensemble J A Z Z 271 M u s i c History I 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 FOURTH YEAR FALL Large Ensemble P P M I 7xx *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 370 Jazz Styles Jazz Electives *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 172 Arranging 1 J A Z Z 240 F o r m and A n a l y s i s J A Z Z 370 Jazz Styles J A Z Z 382 Improvisation III J A Z Z 394 S m a l l Ensemble V SPRING J A Z Z 460 C o m m e r c i a l Relations J A Z Z 494 S m a l l Ensemble V I I J a z z / M u s i c Electives P M I . 544 * * P M I . 5xx Composition I Secondary Requirement SPRING 3.0 1.5 3.0 1.0 3.0 2.0 10 14.5 Credits *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 300 20th Century Theory J A Z Z 372 Arranging III 3.0 Large Ensemble J A Z Z 273 M u s i c History II J A Z Z 470 World Music P M I . 644 Composition II * * P M I . 6xx Secondary Requirement 1.0 3.0 1.5 2.0 LQ 16.0 FOURTH YEAR FALL *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 310 Jazz Pedagogy J A Z Z 410 Conducting I J A Z Z 460 C o m m e r c i a l Relations i n M u s i c J A Z Z 472 Arranging I V Jazz Electives Large Ensemble P M I . 744 Composition * * * P M I . 7xx Secondary Requirement 3.0 1.5 Credits 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 1.0 2.0 LQ 16.0 SPRING * G e n . Elective J A Z Z 411 Conducting II J a z z / M u s i c Electives Large Ensemble P P M I 844 Performance * * * P M I . 8xx Secondary Requirement Total Credits Credits 3.0 1.5 SPRING *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 300 20th Century Theory 4.5 1.0 3.0 LQ 14.0 123.0 J A Z Z 411 Conducting II **Jazz/Music Electives ***Jazz/Music or N o n - M u s i c Electives Large Ensemble P M I . 8xx * * A r r / C o m p students are expected to complete the equivalent o f sixth term P M I . on their principal instrument through completion o f four terms o f secondary P M I . and a jury at a 600-level concentration o r through completion o f concentration P M I . at the 500 and 600 level O R complete four semesters of P M I . secondary piano. ***Students wishing to pursue the Arranging/Composition option w i l l replace J A Z Z 271/273 in the second year o f the D i p l o m a program with J A Z Z 240, 172 and J A Z Z 241, 272. M A J O R IN G E N E R A L S T U D I E S P M I . 5xx M A J O R IN G E N E R A L S T U D I E S - EDUCATION STREAM THIRD YEAR FALL *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 172 Arranging I J A Z Z 240 F o r m and A n a l y s i s Credits 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.0 J A Z Z 370 Jazz Styles ***Jazz/Music or N o n - M u s i c Electives **Jazz/Music Electives M U S . 210 Class W o o d w i n d s I Large Ensemble P M I . 5xx M Credits 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 4.5 1.0 IQ SPRING *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 241 Counterpoint J A Z Z 272 Arranging II Credits 6.0 1.5 1.5 ***Jazz/Music or N o n - M u s i c Electives M U S .211 Class W o o d w i n d s II J A Z Z 470 World Music 3.0 1.5 1.5 Large Ensemble P M I . 6xx 1.0 m Credits *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 241 Counterpoint J A Z Z 272 Arranging II **Jazz/Music Electives J A Z Z 470 World Music Large Ensemble P M I . 6xx FOURTH 2M 15.0 124.0 16.5 15.0 SPRING 3.0 1.0 Total Credits * See A c a d e m i c Course Requirements. THIRD YEAR FALL *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 172 Arranging I J A Z Z 240 F o r m and A n a l y s i s J A Z Z 370 Jazz Styles **Jazz/Music Electives Large Ensemble Credits 3.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 3.0 1.5 1.5 6.0 *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 310 Jazz Pedagogy J A Z Z 410 Conducting I **Jazz/Music Electives ***Jazz/Music or N o n - M u s i c Electives Large Ensemble P M I . 7xx FOURTH YEAR FALL * G e n . Elective Credits 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.0 J A Z Z 310 Jazz Pedagogy J A Z Z 410 Conducting I Large Ensemble 2& M U S . 218 16.5 * * * * M U E D 302/303 Instrumental/Choral YEAR FALL 18.0 Credits 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.0 Class Brass 1.5 Techniques . 4.0 4.0 M P M I . 7xx 18.5 1.5 3.0 3.0 1.0 M 15.0 Ca reer/Voca tional 139 SPRING *Gen. Elective M U S . 219 Class Percussion Credits 6.0 1.5 J A Z Z 300 20th Century Theory J A Z Z 411 Conducting II **Jazz/Music Electives Large Ensemble P M I . 8xx 3.0 1.5 1.5 10 Total Credits 1M 16.5 130.0 Humanities Social Sciences Science/Math Elective 6.0 6.0 3.0 3.0 24.0 It is expected that all English requirements w i l l be completed before entrance into the third year of the program. Note that the education stream requires 30 credits o f general electives. Ensemble Requirements **Jazz/Music Electives: In the General Studies Major, at least six credits must be numbered 300 level or above to fulfil graduation requirements; in the Education Stream at least two credits must be numbered 300 level or above. ***Jazz/Music or N o n - M u s i c Electives: General Studies program students may fulfil these requirements through any general, Jazz, M u s i c O R M u s i c Education elective acceptable to the program. * * * * M U E D 302/303 are taken at U B C . Substitution may occur on advisement by U B C M u s i c Education. Secondary Music Teaching Instrumentalists in the Education Stream who wish to enter secondary music teaching should include at least one year of a vocal ensemble and one year of secondary Private M u s i c Instruction (PMI.) in voice in their programs. Suitable V o c a l Ensembles would include the Capilano College Community Choir, Capilano Singers, Jazz Choir, and Jazz V o c a l Ensemble. Students whose major is a woodwind instrument may substitute secondary vocal P M I instruction for Class Woodwinds; brass majors may similarly substitute secondary vocal P M I for Class Brass, and percussion majors for Class Percussion. Pianists may substitute secondary voice P M I for the four credits of Class Piano normally required for the degree. Elementary Teaching Students interested in elementary teaching should be sure to include three credits of laboratory science, three credits of mathematics and three credits of history or geography. O f all general electives completed, six credits should be i n Canadian Studies. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS Academic Course Requirements *General Education Requirements E N G L 100, and 103, 104, 105 or 106 Career/Vocational 140 6.0 A l l large ensembles, regardless o f the actual number o f weekly hours of attendance required, have an assigned unit value o f one credit. A semester profile requiring two credit hours o f ensemble is met by enrolment in two separate ensembles. Students terminating i n the two-year d i p l o m a program may meet their ensemble requirements through the completion of any four ensemble courses. Students enrolled in the four year Jazz Studies degree program are required to complete a combination o f traditional and j a z z ensembles to complete their requirements. Instrumental Performance Ensemble Requirements T w o semesters of traditional ensembles: These can be met by enrolment in the Capilano College C o m m u n i t y C h o i r or Capilano Singers, or by participation in another approved community ensemble. Eight semesters of j a z z ensemble: Including: Jazz Ensemble I ( E N S J 135), Jazz C h o i r ( E N S J 105), Instrumental Ensemble ( E N S J 136) and Guitar/Bass Ensemble ( E N S J 220) at the 200 level and above. (Note the Guitar/Bass Ensemble l/II, while a prerequisite, is not acceptable for large ensemble credit in the degree program). T w o additional semesters of either j a z z or traditional ensembles. Piano, guitar and bass performance majors can sometimes substitute other courses to complete their ensemble requirements. This is done through special arrangement with the coordinator of the program. Percussion students are expected to complete two semesters of traditional ensemble, four semesters of jazz ensemble, and eight semesters o f percussion ensemble. Three o f these percussion ensembles can replace the normal improvisation requirement ( J A Z Z 282/283). Percussion students wishing to take J A Z Z 282/283 must gain permission o f both instructors to audition. LABOUR STUDIES Arranging/Composition Ensemble Requirements Instructional T w o semesters of traditional ensembles, four semesters of jazz ensembles, and two additional semesters o f either jazz or traditional ensembles. (See Major i n General Studies for lists o f appropriate traditional and jazz ensembles.) K . B R A I D , B . A . (Mount A l l i s o n U n i v . ) , M . A . ( S F U ) T. B Y R N E , M . A . ( U B C ) Vocal Performance Ensemble Requirements T w o semesters of concert choir: Capilano College Community C h o i r or the Capilano Singers. ( E N S M 100) Four semesters of jazz choir: Nite Cap or Capital Jazz. ( E N S J 105) Four semesters o f Jazz V o c a l Ensemble: ( E N S J 306) T w o additional semesters of either Jazz or Traditional ensembles. Major in General Studies Ensemble Requirements T w o semesters of traditional ensembles: These can be met by enrolment in the Capilano College C o m m u n i t y C h o i r or Capilano Singers, or by participation in another approved ensemble. Four semesters o f jazz ensemble, including Jazz Ensemble I ( E N S J 135), Jazz C h o i r ( E N S J 105) and Guitar/Bass Ensemble ( E N S J 220) at the 200 level or above. T w o additional semesters o f ensembles: for instrumentalists these may be Jazz or Traditional ensembles, for vocalists these w i l l be E N S J 305 and 306. Percussionists must also participate in four semesters of percussion ensemble; three o f these courses can replace J A Z Z 282, 283, Improvisation. Major in General Studies (Education) Ensemble Requirements Instrumentalists: Four semesters each o f traditional and jazz ensembles. Vocalists: T w o semesters of traditional ensembles, two semesters o f E N S J 305/306, four semesters of jazz ensembles. (See Major i n General Studies for lists of appropriate traditional and jazz ensembles.) Faculty C . A S K E W , B . A . ( W . Ontario), L L . B . ( U B C ) , M e m b e r of the B . C . B a r G. C O U S T A L I N , B . A . (UBC), L L . B . (UBC), Member of the B . C . B a r S. D A V I S , B . A . , L L . B . (Queen's), M e m b e r o f the B . C . Bar G . F I O R I L L O , L L . B . ( U V i c ) , M e m b e r o f the B . C . B a r D . G I B S O N , B . A . ( M c G i l l University), M . A . (Institute of Social Studies, The Hague) S. J A M E S , B . A . (Carleton University), L L . B . (Osgoode H a l l , U . o f Toronto) F. K E N N E D Y L . K U E H N , B . A . , M . A . (Reed College) E . L A V A L L E , B . C o m m . , L L . B . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Duke) L. L E C L A I R L . M C G R A D Y , B . A . (Toronto), L L . B . (Man.), M e m b e r o f the B . C . B a r J. O ' B R I E N , B . A . ( U B C ) J. P A T T E R S O N , B . A . , M . A . ( Y o r k ) , L L . B . ( U B C ) , M e m b e r of the B . C . B a r J. P R I C E , P h . D . ( U B C ) S. R U S H , Q . C . , B . A . ( W . Ontario), L L . B . ( U B C ) , M e m b e r o f the B . C . Bar L. S A V A G E J. S A Y R E , B . A . ( U . of Chicago), L L . B . (Toronto), M e m b e r of the B . C . Bar T. S I L L A N T A U S , D i p l , O H & S ( B C I T ) , B . S c . ( U . of Guelph L . S P E R L I N G , B . A . ( U . of Wisconsin) J. S T E E V E S , B . A . , L L . B . ( U B C ) , M e m b e r o f the B . C . Bar, M e m b e r o f the Y u k o n B a r B . S T R I N G E R , B . A . ( S F U ) , R . N . (Regina), M . S c . (McMaster), P h . D . ( M c G i l l ) (Faculty on leave) E . D E C K E R , B . A . (McMaster) S. D I A M O N D , B . A . (Hons.) ( S F U ) G . J A M I E S O N , B . A . ( U . Winnipeg), L L . B . ( U . Manitoba), L L . M . ( U B C ) , M e m b e r o f the B . C . B a r B . M E R R A L L , (Diploma) Labour College o f Canada S. O ' D O N N E L , B . A . , M . A . ( U B C ) J. P A T T E R S O N , B . A . , M . A . , ( Y o r k ) L L . B . ( U B C ) , Member of the B . C . B a r D. R O G E R S , Diploma (BCIT) Research Project C. L I V I N G S T O N E , B . A . (SFU), M . A . (York Univ.) R. F O X Career/Vocational 141 General Information L S P . 118 — H u m a n Rights L a w The Labour Studies program is committed to meeting the special education needs of B . C . workers, their organizations and the labour movement in general. L S P . 119 — C i v i l Rights and the W o r k Place L S P . 120 — Politics: Government Bureaucracy L S P . 122 — Politics: Labour P o l i c y in Canada Close relations with the labour movement are maintained through the Users' A d v i s o r y Committee which is open to representatives of unions who use the program. This hard-working group o f representatives actively engages in promoting and developing the program. L S P . 130 — Sociology of W o r k L S P . 131 — Race and Ethnic Relations L S P . 140 — History and the Labour Movement in Canada The Labour Studies Programme Certificate is awarded upon completion o f 15 credits. This is a part-time program offered in the fall from September to December, in the spring from February to A p r i l , and i n the summer during M a y and June. In addition, non-credit courses are offered throughout the year. L S P . 141 — U n i o n Story: A Course in Practical History L S P . 142 — History of the Labour Movement in B . C . L S P . 150 — W o m e n in the W o r k Force L S P . 151 — Each fall and spring, brochures describing the courses to be offered are issued. The brochures are available by contacting the Labour Studies Programme. Leadership S k i l l s , Assertiveness and Advocacy L S P . 155 — Indian L a n d C l a i m s and U n i o n Courses are scheduled in the evening and on selected M o n d a y s , Fridays, Saturdays and Sundays. L S P . 160 — Contact: 984-4954. Movement Organization L S P . 161 — W o r k i n g with Mass M e d i a L S P . 162 — W o r k i n g Culture and History of Labour Arts Bursary The George North F u n d was established by friends in memory o f this outstanding member of the trade union movement. The award is available to assist with registration costs for union members who wish to attend courses in the Labour Studies program. U n i o n members are first expected to seek sponsorship from their union i f they are eligible, before applying for a bursary. M e d i a for Trade U n i o n Education and L S P . 163 — M e d i a Workshops L S P . 170 — Communications: Public Speaking L S P . 180 — Stewards' Training L S P . 181 — Collective Bargaining L S P . 182 — U n i o n L o c a l Administration L S P . 190 — Contract Costing L S P . 191 — Introduction to Pension Plans Courses L S P . 100 — Introduction: Economics for Trade Unionists L S P . 101 — Labour Economics: Alternatives & L S P . 192 — Introduction to Health & Welfare Benefits L S P . 212 — A d v o c a c y Before Labour Tribunals L S P . 216 — Workers' Compensation Appeals - Intermediate L e v e l L S P . 226 — Advanced Workers' Compensation A p p e a l Preparation Options L S P . 105 — Corporate Financial Statement A n a l y s i s L S P . 109 — Legal Research Skills L S P . 110 — B . C . Labour L a w L S P . 111 — Canada Labour Code L S P . 112 — Arbitration L a w L S P . 113 — Public Service Staff Relations A c t L S P . 114 — Employment Standards A c t L S P . 115 — Occupational Health and Safety L S P . 116 — Workers' Compensation A c t and the W C B L S P . 117 — Introduction to U I C Procedures Career/Vocational 142 (APPLIED) LANDSCAPE HORTICULTURE P R O G R A M O N E Y E A R CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M Instructional Faculty L . K O S K I T A L O , B.Sc. (U. of M . ) , Ph.D. ( U B C ) R . W E L S H , D i p . Landscape T e c h . (B.C.I.T.) L . S C O T T , Cert. Landscape Horticulture 3. M u s t be 19 years o f age or older. 4. A genuine interest i n and desire for commencing or continuing a career in horticulture. 5. Reasonable health and physical condition. 6. Successful applicants w i l l demonstrate evidence o f development o f interpersonal skills and emotional health. Special Fees and Expenses Sharon Miletec, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant L . Scott, L a b Supervisor In addition to the program tuition, students w i l l incur further expenses o f approximately $1,700 for books, personal work gear and equipment, certification fees, field trip, conference and membership fees. Career Opportunities Graduation Requirements Graduates of the A p p l i e d Landscape Horticulture program find employment i n many areas o f horticulture including: municipal parks, golf courses, residential and commercial landscape installation and/or maintenance, garden centre sales, nursery and greenhouse operations, movie and film industry, arboriculture. Due to the intense nature o f the program, regular fulltime attendance is crucial. Students are expected to attend and participate i n all classes and program activities. Students with poor attendance may be required to withdraw. Participation in a l l field trips, including the three-day orientation field trip, is c o m pulsory. The Program Students must attain a m i n i m u m cumulative G P A o f 2.0, pass all courses, must possess a valid B . C . pesticide dispenser or applicator certificate, and attain a m i n i m u m 6 0 % standing i n plant materials, to successfully complete the program. Support Staff The objective of the Landscape Horticulture program is to provide individuals with the basic skills and k n o w l edge prerequisite to beginning a career i n landscape gardening and landscape-related industries. This full-time, eight-month certificate program integrates horticultural theory with practice; the first term emphasizing theory and the second term practical applications. Due to the popular nature of the program, and its limited enrolment, prospective students are advised to contact the Horticulture department by early A p r i l to arrange to attend an early M a y I N F O R M A T I O N M E E T I N G . Student/instructor interviews can be arranged at the conclusion o f this meeting. Contact: Program Content FIRST TERM H O R T 101 H O R T 102 H O R T 103 H O R T 105 H O R T 107 H O R T 115 Credits Introductory Horticulture Plant Materials I G r o w i n g M e d i a & Fertilizers Plant Production Park and T i l f o r d Gardens Practicum Basic Landscape Drafting 984-4960. Admission Requirements 1. Grade 10 completion with Grade 12 preferred. Students without proficiency i n basic mathematics and E n g l i s h may be required to take an upgrading course. 2. Attendance at an interview. Interviews are held i n m i d - M a y . Further interviews may be held i n m i d August, i f spaces i n the program are available. Applicants unable to attend during the scheduled interview period may contact the program coordinator to make alternative arrangements. 5.0 5.0 2.0 2.0 0.0 L5 15.5 Credits SECOND TERM H O R T 106 Landscape Irrigation HORT HORT HORT HORT 108 109 110 111 Landscape D e s i g n Plant Materials II Turfgrass Management Business Practices 1.5 4.0 3.0 1.0 H O R T 112 Landscape Installation & Maintenance 5.0 H O R T 114 Park and T i l d f o r d Gardens Practicum & Drainage 2.0 OO 16.5 Career/Vocational 143 LEGAL ASSISTANT PROGRAM A. T W O YEAR LEGAL ASSISTANT DIPLOMA B. L E G A L A S S I S T A N T CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Instructional M . C R A G G , B . A . L a w (Durham), B . C . Teaching Cert. W . E N W R I G H T , B.F.A. M.F.A. (UBC), LL.B.(McGill) J. F A I R L I E , B . M u s . L L . B . ( U B C ) S. G R E E N A W A Y , B . C o m . ( U B C ) , C . A . C . M A T T H E W S , B . A . ( U B C ) , L G A S Diploma D . P H I L L I P S , L G A S Certificate, M . A . Liberal Studies (SFU), Co-ordinator M . S P E N C E , B.Sc. L L . B . ( U B C ) G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . ( U B C ) , Standard Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered Psychologist Staff F . U l k e r , Clerk Typist W . Weberg, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant Career Opportunities A legal assistant, while working under the supervision of a lawyer, is capable o f originating work and making decisions. This person has knowledge of both procedural and substantive law. Some examples of work functions are: interviewing clients; drafting pleadings, wills, probate, conveyancing and corporate documents; legal research; file management; assisting in trial preparation. Graduates o f the program w i l l find challenging careers working as legal assistants i n law offices, government agencies, and corporate legal departments. The program has been in operation since 1976 and has a 9 0 % placement rate. (This figure may fluctuate for any one graduating class depending on the economy.) Contact: 983-7594; E-mail: lgas@capcollege.be.ca Programs There are two legal assistant programs offered at Capilano College. 1. The Legal Assistant D i p l o m a program. This is a two-year, full-time program designed for people without current legal experience. Career/Vocational 144 * The L e g a l Assistant Certificate program is available as a distance education program. E-mail: Faculty L . B A K E R , B . A . ( U B C ) , L L . B . ( U B C ) Teaching Cert. (SFU) N . B A W A , B . B . A . (SFU), L L . B . ( M c G i l l ) ) D . C O C H R A N , B . A . L L . B . ( U B C ) , Cert. Ed., M . A . E d . (SFU) Support *2. The L e g a l Assistant Certificate program. This evening program is designed for people who are presently w o r k i n g in a law office with at least two years legal secretarial or paralegal experience. lgas@capcollege.be.ca A . T W O YEAR LEGAL ASSISTANT DIPLOMA U p o n completion o f the two-year program, students must complete a six-month practicum under the supervision o f a lawyer. Students are paid during this practicum by their employer. A t the end o f a successful practicum, the student is eligible for graduation. Faculty work closely with students and with the legal community to assist in obtaining successful practicum placements. Faculty maintain close contacts with the legal c o m m u nity, and several faculty members are practising lawyers. A s w e l l , support is provided by an external A d v i s o r y Committee, w h i c h provides information on recent developments in the legal community, and offers advice on topics ranging from curriculum changes to graduate placements. Members o f the A d v i s o r y Committee include representatives from the L a w Society o f British C o l u m b i a , the Canadian B a r Association, private law firms, a government agency, and crown corporations. Admissions Requirements The successful applicant to the L e g a l Assistant program should have: 1. two years post-secondary university transfer elective or equivalent prior learning experience 2. work experience in an office setting (highly recommended) 3. good working knowledge o f computers. Applications, together with official post-secondary transcripts must be submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office. Incomplete applications w i l l not be processed. Prospective applicants may apply by telephoning 9837594. Names w i l l be recorded and applicants w i l l receive the formal admission procedure outline. Information meetings may also be held. The coordinators w i l l then review all applications for the 36 seats available in the program. Applicants who meet the program requirements w i l l be invited to have a personal interview. Academic Standards B. The L e g a l Assistant program requires students to maintain a cumulative 3.0 grade point average over the four terms. In addition, any student whose grade point average falls below 2.0 w i l l not be permitted to continue i n the program. T o be eligible to go out on practicums, students must maintain a cumulative 3.0 GPA. This is a part-time evening program designed for students with at least two years legal secretarial or paralegal experience who are presently w o r k i n g i n a law office. Special Fees and Expenses The student can expect to spend approximately $ 1,200 per year on books and photocopying expenses. Since regular use of a law library is necessary for research purposes, students should include necessary transportation expenses. T w o Year Legal Assistant Diploma Program Content FIRST TERM LGAS LGAS LGAS LGAS 150 152 170 176 L G A S 252 Credits Introduction to the Study o f L a w Litigation Procedures I L e g a l Research L e g a l Office Procedures 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Torts I 3XJ 15.0 LEGAL ASSISTANT CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Those without a legal background or the two years experience may be admitted to a particular course only after consultation with the coordinator. It is the student's responsibility to initiate the contact w i t h the coordinator prior to registration. Acceptance into a particular course does not mean a student has been accepted into the program as a whole. The Legal Assistant Certificate program courses usually start in September, although occasionally they may also start in January. Contact the Legal Assistant program area at 983-7594 for registration deadline information. The requirements for the certificate must be completed within five years o f commencing the courses. The fiveyear period may be extended for one year i n exceptional circumstances. (PLA) Prior Learning Assessment L G A S 151 L G A S 164 Evidence Litigation Procedures I V 3.0 1.5 L G A S 180 L G A S 254 Contracts I Torts II 3.0 3.0 The L e g a l Assistant Department is committed to the recognition of prior learning. Prior learning assessment ( P L A ) recognizes demonstrated learning for credits which have been acquired through life or work experiences. F o r further information contact the P L A coordinator at Capilano College. L G A S 256 C M N S 179 Family L a w L e g a l Communications 3.0 3XJ 16.5 Certificate Requirements SECOND TERM THIRD TERM Credits Credits L G A S 155 Conveyancing Procedures 1.5 L G A S 157 W i l l s & Probate Procedures 3.0 L G A S 179 L G A S 181 L G A S 255 L G A S 264 L e g a l Interviewing Contracts II R e a l Property Insurance L a w I 3.0 3.0 3.0 3J) 16.5 FOURTH TERM Credits L G A S 153 Basic Corporate Procedures 1.5 L G A S 172 L G A S 182 Legal Drafting I Creditors' Remedies 3.0 3.0 L G A S 253 Company L a w 3.0 L G A S 262 L G A S 265 Litigation Procedures III Insurance L a w II L G A S 199 Career Practicum D i p l o m a Requirement: 3.0 3.0 16.5 3.0 67.5 In order to attain the Legal Assistant Certificate students must successfully complete 30 credits. These credits must be chosen from substantive Legal Assistant courses. Legal Assistant Certificate Program Content Credits COURSES * + L G A S 150 Introduction to the Study of L a w 3.0 * + L G A S 151 * + L G A S 170 L G A S 172/174 Evidence Legal Research L e g a l Drafting I & II 3.0 3.0 L G A S 179 * L G A S 180/181 L e g a l Interviewing Contracts I & II Creditors' Remedies L G A S 182 L G A S 252/254 L G A S 253 Torts I & II Company L a w 3/3.0 3.0 3/3.0 3.0 3/3.0 3.0 Career/Vocational 145 L G A S 255 L G A S 256 L G A S 264/265 L G A S 268 L G A S 271 Real Property Family L a w Insurance I & II Criminal L a w Administrative L a w 3.0 3.0 3/3.0 3.0 3.0 * Courses marked with an asterisk are required courses and must be taken before a student is eligible to receive a certificate. + Students wishing to enter the program must first take L G A S 150 and then L G A S 170 before they w i l l be admitted to any course except L G A S 151. Transfer Credits Transfer credits w i l l not automatically be given for courses taken at other institutions. Students w i l l be required to demonstrate current knowledge before course exemption w i l l be granted. Requests for transfer credit must be submitted on the "Request for Transfer Credit" form and submitted to the Registrar's Office. LEGAL SECRETARIAL PROGRAM Instructional Faculty D . B L A N E Y , I.D. ( U B C ) , C . P . S . , M . E d . ( S F U ) M . C R A G G , B . A . L a w (Durham), Teaching Cert. (UBC) D . G U S P I E , Instructor D . P H I L L I P S , L G A S Cert., M . A . ( S F U ) K . Y I P , B . A . , L L . B . ( U B C ) Legal Systems Support Staff The L e g a l Assistant program requires Option students to have two years work experience as a legal secretary prior to enrolling in the first course. L e g a l Secretarial program graduates who have achieved a cumulative " B " average and who have obtained employment i n a law firm, government law department or corporate law department are now eligible to enter the L e g a l Assistant Part-time program. This allows them to further their education i n the evening while earning a salary and gaining valuable experience in the legal support field. The Program This nine-month vocational program covers five main areas o f law providing a fundamental understanding o f the legal system i n B . C . Students are trained in legal terminology and procedural rules. They w i l l review relevant legislation, and acquire necessary skills i n the formatting and handling o f legal documents. T y p i n g , legal office procedures, hands-on computer technology and a two-week legal office work practicum are included i n the curriculum. A Capilano College certificate is granted upon successful completion of the program. Contact: Applied Business Technology Division, 984-4959; E-mail: abt@capcollege.bc.ca Admission Procedures Students are admitted to the program twice a year, i n September and January. Applications for A d m i s s i o n may be submitted at any time to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official transcripts and any other pertinent documents. Faye Ulker, C l e r k Typist W e n d y Weberg, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant Career Opportunities The exacting field of law offers excellent career opportunities for students graduating as legal secretaries. This very specialized program provides intense training in traditional secretarial skills as well as legal procedural courses including: C i v i l litigation, w i l l s and probate, corporate law, conveyancing and mortgaging, family and legal office procedures. U p o n completion o f the program, students find employment in specialized, as w e l l as general, law offices. M a n y graduates o f the L e g a l Secretarial program proceed to the Part-time Legal Assistant Certificate program. T o ensure your name is on the list for the Information Meetings held throughout the year, call the Department of A p p l i e d Business Technology at 984-4959. Interested applicants are invited to attend an information meeting. A n evaluation o f keyboarding speed and E n g l i s h language'proficiency w i l l be conducted at this time. D u r i n g the meeting, an appointment for a personal interview may be arranged. D u r i n g your interview, you w i l l have an opportunity to ask further questions, and discuss your qualifications and career goals. Y o u r test results w i l l be reviewed with you at this time. The objective o f the personal interview is to assist i n selecting applicants who w i l l be most suited to the career o f legal secretary. Admission Requirements • Career/Vocational 146 Completion of Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status. • English language proficiency as demonstrated by the Business English Competency test results. • Keyboarding at 45 wpm. Please submit the following material prior to or during the pre-admission interview: (a) A resume describing your education, skills, and work experience. (b) Transcripts from all educational institutions you have attended (c) A letter of recommendation from a former employer or teacher. The Applied Business Technology Department is committed to the recognition of prior learning. Prior learning assessment (PLA) recognizes demonstrated learning for credits which have been acquired through life or work experiences. For further information contact the PLA coordinator at Capilano College. Special Fees and Expenses In addition to registration and tuition fees, students can expect to spend approximately $ 1,500 on textbooks and supplies. Program Content Credits FIRST TERM LGST 124 CMNS 159 SECOND LGST 105 LGST 107 LGST 110 LGST 112 LGST 114 LGST 117 LGST 119 LGST 122 Family Law Procedures Basic Litigation Introduction to the Legal System Legal Document Processing on the Microcomputer Organizational Behaviour Communications for Legal Secretaries TERM Keyboarding Speed and Skill Development Legal Machine Transcription Corporate Procedures Basic Conveyance & Mortgage Wills & Probate Procedures Legal Office Procedures Practicum Computer Applications in the Legal Office Credits Practicum 1.5 3.0 1.5 3.75 3.0 CIPS* 34.5 Total Program Credits: *CIP Course in Progress. MEDIA PROGRAM A. MEDIA PROGRAM - DIPLOMA B. M E D I A P R O G R A M - CERTIFICATE Instructional Prior Learning Assessment (PLA) LGST 108 LGST 109 LGST 116 LGST 123 THIRD TERM LGST 119 Faculty J.V. BIZZOCCHI, B.A. (Michigan), Teaching Cert. (Sec.) (Michigan), Video Production (Banff Centre) M. DOWDING, Dip. Media Resources (Capilano) P. KELLINGTON, Film Studies (UBC), A.A.S. Media Spec. Cert. (Capilano) A. KLAVER, A.A.S. Dip. (Capilano) B. REID, B.A. (Alta.), Advanced Theatre (Banff Centre) S. ROGERS, B.A.A. (Ryerson) K. WATT, B.A. (Trent) J. WESTENDORP, B.F.A. (UBC) Support Staff Alan Hovden, Program Assistant Laurie McLean, B.Sc.(SFU) Program Assistant Erica Brant, Program Assistant, DEC Prof. Theatre (Dawson) Technical Staff Bryan Christie Cam Willams Gary Pendygrasse, Dip. Media Resources (Capilano) Career Opportunities 10 15.75 Credits 1.5 3.75 3.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 3M 18.75 In 29 years of operation, the Media Program has graduated over 450 students. The majority of these graduates are employed as producers, directors, editors, writers, camera and audio operators, production assistants and equipment managers in video, film, audio, photography, and multi-media production formats. They work for educational institutions and private companies as well as non-profit organizations. In addition, a number of graduates have set up their own independent production companies. A. DIPLOMA PROGRAM FILM, PHOTOGRAPHY, VIDEO, AUDIO and COMPUTERS are vital components of the media mix used in all levels of educational, instructional, and entertainment communication. Career/Vocational 147 The M e d i a Program is a two-year program training students for current and developing applications o f media technologies. In areas of education, commercial and entertainment media, there is an increasing readiness to use new techniques to foster learning, growth, and social interaction. Capilano C o l l e g e ' s M e d i a Program prepares students for work and leadership in these growing media fields. The core o f the program is production training. Students are taught standards of excellence and effectiveness i n all forms of educational production work. Basic technical skills are taught in all media areas, and a large number o f projects are completed by students during their training. In this way students are prepared for a wide range o f practical work possibilities, rather than simply a proficiency in theory. The program teaches students more than the necessary technical skills. Students learn the critical process o f how to work a production through from concept to completion. This involves understanding learning theory and instructional design as w e l l as understanding the particular advantages o f each medium. 4. Attendance at an information meeting held once per month from November through M a r c h is required. 5. Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official transcripts of all secondary and postsecondary education. 6. Deadline for applications is M a r c h 31. Interviews for selected applicants begin in A p r i l , and all applicants w i l l be notified o f their admission status in writing by the end o f M a y . 7. A d m i s s i o n is based on general ability, noteworthy experience, previous work, education, interest i n and commitment to the M e d i a Program. Special Fees and Expenses Students may expect to pay approximately $7,000 for tuition, fees, materials and textbooks during the twoyear program. Graduation Requirements A major skill that the M e d i a Program emphasizes is that o f working effectively in groups. Students i n this program w i l l have worked in a large number o f production groups in a variety o f production formats by the time they graduate. In order to graduate from the M e d i a Program, the student must successfully complete all the component courses. The program's instructional design reflects its practical goals. W o r k s h o p methods, hands-on training and field trips are used throughout the program. A l l M e d i a students are required to adhere to high standards o f academic performance and professional behaviour (as described i n the booklet Media Program Department Guidelines). The C o l l e g e ' s training facilities are well equipped. They include a photography studio and lab, an audio recording studio, a television studio, computer and editing workstations and audiovisual production equipment that students can access through the Department's equipment check-out facility. The M e d i a Program consists o f four terms o f study. New students are admitted each September in a class of 28. Contact: 984-4940 FAX: 984-4946 Web: www. capcollege. be. ca/magic/media Admission Requirements Professional Standards Program Content FIRST TERM Credits C M N S 130 Introduction to M e d i a Communications 3.0 MDIA MDIA MDIA MDIA Introduction to V i d e o Production Project Design Basic A u d i o Production Theory and Application of Photographic Production Computers i n M e d i a Production Photography 3.0 1.5 3.0 100 105 181 183 M D I A 186 M D I A 195 M D I A 250 Documentary Scriptwriting 1. 18 years o f age or older. 2. Grade 12 graduation or equivalent or mature student status. 3. Applicants may wish to take some or all of the M e d i a Program Certificate courses. These courses are designed to give the student an introduction to media and to the M e d i a Program. SECOND TERM M D I A 150 Introduction to A n i m a t i o n M D I A 172 V i d e o Technology I M D I A 173 Educational M e d i a Applications: M D I A 182 M D I A 185 M D I A 200 M D I A 202 Career/Vocational 148 Audio Advanced A u d i o Production Advanced Photography Intermediate V i d e o I Intermediate V i d e o II 3.0 3.0 1.5 15 19.5 3.0 1.5 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 10 18.0 THIRD T E R M M D I A 231 Digital V i d e o Post - Production M D I A 271 Educational Television Systems M D I A 300 A d v a n c e d V i d e o Production M D I A 304 Educational M e d i a Applications: Computers 3.0 3.0 6.0 3J3 15.0 FOURTH TERM C M N S 356 A d v a n c e d M e d i a Communications 3.0 M D I A 263 Production Resources 1.5 M D I A 299 M D I A 303 M a j o r Projects M e d i a Specialist in Education and Training Total Program Credits 1.5 31) 9.0 assistant i n an office or clinic, or i n a hospital as an admitting clerk or department stenographer. The Program This M e d i c a l Office Assistant program offers preservice, specialized education for prospective students which includes: • M e d i c a l terminology and anatomy and physiology • • • • • • Pharmacology M e d i c a l ethics M e d i c a l transcription M e d i c a l office procedures Aseptic techniques Preparation, assisting and follow up o f patient for medical examinations Specimen collection and basic office diagnostic procedures 61.5 • B. CERTIFICATE PROGRAM This is a 15-credit, part-time certificate that consists of the following courses: M D I A 065 — M e d i a Studies M D I A 101 — N e w M e d i a Literacy M D I A 102 — Introduction to Photography M D I A 156 — Computers i n M e d i a A c a d e m i c Elective Students may take one or more o f these courses. MEDICAL OFFICE ASSISTANT PROGRAM Instructional Faculty J. C L A R K , R . N . (Regina G e n . Hosp.), I . A . Teaching D i p . (Univ. of Sask.) S. H O R N , I.D. ( U B C ) , M . E d . ( S F U ) • Financial record keeping and computerized medical billing • A two-week work practicum i n the medical field Contact: Applied Business Technology: E-mail: abt@capcollege.be.ca 984-4959 Admission Requirements Applicants must meet the following admission requirements: • Completion of Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status • 35 w p m keyboarding speed • • • Personal interview Aptitude for working i n a medical setting Appropriate E n g l i s h conversation and writing skills • St. John's Standard First A i d Certificate A l l Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official transcripts and other pertinent documents. S. L I V I N G S T O N E , R . N . , M . A . M . S . (London, Eng.) A . S E D K Y , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . ( A i n Shams, Cairo) B . S M I T H , B . A . , Prof. Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) , T E S L Cert. Support Staff Faye U l k e r , Clerk Typist W e n d y Weberg, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant Career Opportunities The health care industry is one o f the largest industries in Canada, and the M e d i c a l Office Assistant is a valued allied health professional. Graduates o f this program have the specialized training required to work i n a number o f medical settings: receptionist or medical Special Fees and Expenses In addition to tuition and registration fees, students can expect to spend approximately $1,000 on textbooks and supplies. Program Content FIRST TERM C M N S 110 M O A . 100 M O A . 105 Standard E n g l i s h Usage M e d i c a l Document Processing I M e d i c a l Administrative M O A . 107 Procedures I C l i n i c a l Procedures I Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 1.5 Career/Vocational 149 M O A . 109 MOA. I l l M O A . 121 Anatomy, Physiology and Pathology I M e d i c a l Terminology I M e d i c a l Document Processing II SECOND TERM M O A . 102 Keyboarding S k i l l & M O A . 112 M O A . 115 Speed Development M e d i c a l M a c h i n e Transcription M e d i c a l Administrative Procedures II C l i n i c a l Procedures II and Pharmacology Anatomy, Physiology and Pathology II M e d i c a l Terminology II Directed W o r k Experience M O A . 122 Computers i n Health Care M O A . 103 M O A . 106 M O A . 108 M O A . 110 Total Program Credits: 3.0 3.0 15 18.0 Credits 1.5 3.0 0.75 1.5 3.0 3.0 1.5 15 15.75 33.75 MUSIC THERAPY PROGRAM Instructional (P.U.), M T A K . B U R K E , B . A . (Antioch), D i p . M . T . (Capilano), MTA R. G U R R M . H O W A R D , B.M.T. (OUBC), M T A N . M C M A S T E R , B . A . ( U B C ) , D i p . M . T . (Nordoff & Robbins), M . A . ( N Y U ) , F A M I , M T A E. M O F F I T T , B.Mus. (McGill), M . A . (CPU), Dip. M . T . (Capilano), F A M I , M T A K. N I C H O L S O N , B.M.T., M . M . T . (OUBC), M T A M . R A W S T H O R N E , M.Ed. (UBC), R.D.N. S. S U M M E R S , B . P . E . , B . E d . , D i p . Sp. E d . (Calgary), D i p . M . T . (Capilano), M . M . T . ( O U B C ) , M T A J. W A T E R S , B . A . , M . A . ( S F U ) , P h . D . ( S F U ) W. WATTS, B.M.T. (OUBC), M T A S. W I L L I A M S , B . M u s . (Toronto), M . C . A . T . (Hahnemann), M T A , C M T , Program C o o r d i n a t o r Staff T i m Coffey, Stores C l e r k C a r o l Paskaruk, Receptionist John M c M u r r a y , Stores Clerk C a r o l M c Q u a r r i e , Secretary Career/Vocational 150 Graduates o f the Capilano College M u s i c Therapy program receive a Bachelor o f M u s i c Therapy from the Open University. M u s i c therapists use the creative process inherent i n musical participation to assist individuals and groups to improve their mental, physical and emotional functioning. M u s i c therapists work with deep emotions i n special therapeutic programs, run exercise and dance programs, lead choirs, instrumental ensembles and music appreciation groups as they contribute to therapeutic goals. M u s i c therapy is increasingly identified by health care professionals as an effective catalyst for client motivation, stimulation and communication. Career Opportunities Graduates of the program work with all age groups, with a wide range o f physiological, cognitive and emotional disorders, in a variety o f clinical settings or in private practice. They are trained to work as part o f a health care team. Faculty P. A V E R Y , B . A . (York), M . E d . (Toronto), Registered Psychologist S. B A I N E S , B . M u s . (Calgary), B . M . T . (Wilfrid Laurier), M . A . ( N Y U ) , M T A J. B E C K O W , B . M u s . ( U C L A ) , D i p . M . T . , M T A J. B R O D E U R , B . M u s . (Vincent dTndy), M . A . , P h . D . Support BACHELOR OF MUSIC THERAPY — OPEN UNIVERSITY The Program The M u s i c Therapy program at Capilano offers the third and fourth years leading to the Bachelor o f M u s i c Therapy granted by the Open University. This degree program is designed so that students may enter third year with a variety of backgrounds: music, general arts, education, or nursing etc. A l l four years may be completed at Capilano College. This program provides students with the opportunity to gain knowledge and develop competencies i n such areas as music therapy and practice; clinical disorders; assessment, planning and intervention; improvisation and music o f many eras and cultures; interpersonal skills and group dynamics; basic research, and documentation. The program blends academic and experiential course work. Students deepen their experience o f music, creative expression and the role o f the arts. They are encouraged to explore their values, beliefs, feelings and communication patterns, to increase their effectiveness in the field. They have field work in a different setting for each of the four terms, i n w h i c h they are given increasing responsibility to design, implement and evaluate their own treatment programs, under clinical supervision. Continuance i n the M u s i c Therapy program w i l l be contingent upon an adequate level o f personal, academic and clinical skills as jointly evaluated each semester by the M u s i c Therapy faculty. M u s i c therapy is a helping profession in which music therapists work with clients who are in a state o f disability. In the therapist/client relationship, there is an assumption that the therapist is in a well enough state o f health and well-being to mediate client difficulties with an appropriate clinical approach. In other words, the therapist must function i n clinically suitable ways, be emotionally stable and able to respond generally vis-avis the client's needs. The therapist is the helper. The role of the M u s i c Therapy program, i n addition to student education, is to safeguard the standards of practice o f the professional music therapy community through monitoring student readiness to work with members o f the community-at-large who are at risk because o f disability, disease, cultural and social deprivation, and otherwise disadvantaged. Safety o f clients is essential. Contact: 984-4951 E-mail: mtherapy @ capcollege. be. ca Admission Requirements to the Third Year N . B . F o r admission requirements to the first year, consult the entrance requirements to the M u s i c Department. A n interview w i l l also be required with the M u s i c Therapy faculty, however acceptance to the first year does not guarantee acceptance to the third year. A l l students entering the t h i r d year o f the M u s i c Therapy program must: 1. C o m p l y with the general College entrance requirements (see A d m i s s i o n and Readmission section of this calendar) and submit an A p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s s i o n to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official copies o f all secondary and post-secondary education (if not already on file with the College). 2. Participate in an interview with members of the M u s i c Therapy faculty. Interviews are held i n M a y . 3. Play an audition on his/her concentration instrument, demonstrating technique, repertoire, and musical sensitivity i n two contrasting pieces at an advanced level of proficiency. 4. Have completed one full year at the university level of M u s i c History, M u s i c Theory, Ear Training and Sight Singing. 5. Have successfully completed at least two years at the university level, including at least six credits o f English (Literature & Composition), 12 credits o f Psychology* (including Introductory Psychology, Developmental Psychology and Psychology Elective 200 level or higher), three credits o f Sciences/Math (preferably H u m a n B i o l o g y ) , and three credits of M u s i c Pedagogy. 6. Have completed nine elective credits. 7. Have some experience with people with special needs. 8. B e able to demonstrate a high level o f maturity, integrity, a clinical suitability and readiness to train as a therapist. 9. Have basic guitar and keyboard skills at the level o f University Class Piano. 10. Have word processing skills. * A b n o r m a l Psychology is offered within the M u s i c Therapy program. Graduation Requirements T o obtain the Bachelor of M u s i c Therapy degree candidates must fulfill the admission requirements to third year, complete the 73 credits i n the courses outlined below as well as the post basic requirements of the nine-credit internship. Accreditation This course work fulfills the educational requirements for professional accreditation by the Canadian A s s o c i a tion for M u s i c Therapy. A supervised internship is also required before graduation, to fulfil the accreditation requirement for clinical work. Program Content FIRST TERM M . T . 320 Improvisation I M . T . 330 M . T . 350 M . T . 360 M . T . 364 Credits 1.5 Basic C l i n i c a l Skills 3.0 The Influence of M u s i c 3.0 M u s i c Therapy I 3.0 Disabling Conditions — Adulthood3.0 M . T . 380 Interpersonal Skills for M u s i c Therapists P M I . 100 Concentration Instrument Secondary Instrument PMI. SECOND M . T . 361 M . T . 370 M . T . 391 M . T . 420 P M I . 200 PMI. P S Y C 222 1.5 2.0 LQ 18.0 TERM Credits M u s i c Therapy II 3.0 Disabling Conditions — C h i l d h o o d 3 . 0 Practicum II 6.0 Improvisation II — Guitar 1.0 Concentration Instrument Secondary Instrument A b n o r m a l Psychology 2.0 1.0 3J) 19.0 Career/Vocational 151 THIRD TERM M . T . 340 M i d i Synthesis Technology Credits 1.5 M . T . 450 M . T . 460 M . T . 490 P M I . 300 PMI. P S Y C 201 1.5 3.0 6.0 2.0 1.0 3J) 18.0 The Influence o f M u s i c II M u s i c Therapy III Practicum III Concentration Instrument Secondary Instrument Group Dynamics FOURTH TERM M . T . 451 M u s i c & the Creative Arts M . T . 461 M u s i c Therapy I V M . T . 462 Principles of Research M . T . 480 Improvisation III M . T . 491 Practicum I V P M I . 400 Concentration Instrument PMI. Secondary Instrument Credits 1.5 3.0 3.0 1.5 6.0 2.0 L0 Total 73.0 18.0 Post Basic Program Requirements M . T . 510 Internship compulsory upon completion of all above courses 9.0 OFFICE ASSISTANT PROGRAM* *This is a program for ESL students. This program is presently under review; the detailed listing of courses and course content may be changed by the time the program is offered in September 1999. Instructional M . G I O V A N N E T T I , B . S . A . (St. F . X . ) , B . E d . ( M t . St. Vincent), T E S L Cert., M . A . ( T E S L ) ( S F U ) S. G R E E N A W A Y , B . C o m . ( U B C ) , C A . C . G R I E V E S , B . E d . , Sec. ( U B C ) D . G U S P I E , Instructor/Lab Supervisor S. H O R N , I.D. ( U B C ) , M . E d . ( S F U ) A . S E D K Y , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . ( A i n Shams, Cairo) B . S M I T H , B . A . , Prof. Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) , T E S L Cert. G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . ( U B C ) , Standard Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered Psychologist Support Some Music Therapy Practicum Placements CHILDREN North Vancouver School B o a r d B o b B e r w i c k Preschool PSYCHIATRY R i v e r v i e w Hospital Westside Community Care T e a m GERIATRICS U B C Extended Care Yaletown House PALLIATIVE CARE L i o n ' s Gate Hospital St. Paul's Hospital Faculty Staff Faye Ulker, Clerk Typist W e n d y Weberg, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant Career Opportunities Graduates are finding employment in entry-level positions w h i c h include general office assistants, receptionists, accounts payable and receivable clerks. The Program The Office Assistant Program is a full-time, ninemonth program offered from September to M a y . This program provides students with training in general office skills, computer applications, accounting, and English speaking, listening, grammar and composition skills. Students are required to complete a work practicum as part o f their training program. C O M M U N I T Y SETTING Greater Vancouver Community M e n t a l Health Services M o u n t Pleasant Neighbourhood House Burnaby Parks and Recreation Contact: Applied Business Technology: E-mail: abt@capcollege.be.ca 984-4959 Admission Requirements E S L students who w i s h to take this program must have a personal interview with the Program Convenor and must meet these admission criteria: • Completion o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status. Career/Vocational 152 M i n i m u m o f College Prep English language skills as demonstrated by S L E P Test results, writing sample, and interview. Competent conversational English. FIRST TERM A d v a n c e d Speaking and Listening for Business A d v a n c e d Reading and Vocabulary for Business Business E n g l i s h and Communications Introduction to Microcomputer E S L . 062 E S L . 067 O T E C 113 O T E C 143 SECOND Credits Applications TERM O T E C 119 O T E C 140 A c c o u n t i n g Procedures I — Office Assistant E S L A c c o u n t i n g Administrative O T E C 144 O T E C 211 O T E C 212 O T E C 251 O T E C 300 Procedures Microcomputer Applications Business W r i t i n g or Business E n g l i s h II Interpersonal Skills Directed W o r k Experience THIRD TERM O T E C 118 O T E C 300 3.0 3.0 4.5 45 15.0 Credits 4.5 1.5 4.5 3.0 1.5 15 16.5 Credits Introduction to Computerized Accounting Directed W o r k Experience Certificate Requirements 1.5 CIP* 33.0 * C I P — Course in Progress Students who receive a m i n i m u m of " B " in the following courses w i l l receive credit from Business A d m i n i s tration: O T E C 143 and 144 are equivalent to B C P T 121 and B C P T 122. ONLINE PUBLISHING CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M Instructional Faculty M . A N D E R S O N , D i p . (Emily Carr College of Art & Design) C. G R A T H A M , B . S c , M . S c ( U B C ) T. J U R I M A E , D i p . Infotec (Capilano) M . L ' H E U R E U X , B . A . (Concordia) D i p . Infotec (Capilano) S. R O G E R S , B . A . A . (Ryerson) Career Opportunities The Online Publishing Certificate program is designed to keep pace with the rapidly changing W e b Publishing industry. W e offer you access to a wide range o f courses, all taught by professionals with extensive teaching and industry experience. The program covers all aspects o f creating and managing a W e b site, including design, production, and administration. U p o n completion o f the certificate students can expect to find work in all areas o f W e b Publishing. The Certificate Program The Online Publishing Program consists of a number of part-time courses leading to a 15-credit certificate i n W e b Publishing. The program follows a modular format a l l o w i n g students to build a program that suits their needs. Students may choose to take a single course or work towards the certificate. Students may also specialize in one specific area — design, production or administration — or build a foundation based on all three. Fees Students can expect to pay approximately $3000 for tuition and online costs to complete the certificate program. Courses are priced individually at $186 for a .80 credit course and $90 for a .40 credit course. Admission Requirements 1. 18 years of age or older. 2. Grade 12 graduation or equivalent or mature student status. 3. Submit an Application for A d m i s s i o n to the Registrar's Office. 4. Class size is limited to 15 students. Ca reer/Voca tional 153 Application Procedure Complete and submit an A p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s s i o n to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official transcripts for secondary and post-secondary education. Contact the Program Convenor to register for courses. Program Contact Sandi Rogers, P r o g r a m C o n v e n o r Phone: 604-990-7819 E - m a i l : srogers@capcollege.bcca W e b address: www.capcollege.bc.ca/magic/onlinepub Program Content N o t e : not all of these courses are offered each semester; check the timetable. Credits MTEC101 M T E C 102 M T E C 103 M T E C 104 M a c Operating System W e l c o m e to the Internet* W e b Design Fundamentals* Planning a W e b Site* .75 .75 .75 .38 M T E C 105 M T E C 106 Interface Design* Introductory W e b Site Production .38 .75 MTEC MTEC MTEC MTEC Intermediate W e b Design Photoshop for the W e b H T M L Authoring Web Animation .80 .75 .75 .40 M T E C 115 M T E C 116 Embedded M e d i a Sound for the W e b W e b Site Administration W e b Site — M a r k e t i n g * .80 .75 .75 M T E C 117 M T E C 118 M T E C 119 Javascript Advanced Photoshop for the W e b Advanced H T M L .80 .80 .80 108 109 110 112 M T E C 113 Career/Vocational 154 O U T D O O R RECREATION M A N A G E M E N T PROGRAM Instructional Faculty *D. B A S H A M , D M A T P , Coordinator * C . B O N I F A C E , B . S c , P G C E (Birmingham), M.Sc.(SFU), Convenor, Outdoor Recreation C . F I S H E R , D i p . Outdoor Rec. M g m t . (Capilano), C P R Instructor, C I S S R Wilderness Emergency Response Instructor, B C R C A L a k e Water Instructor S. F I S H E R , D i p . Outdoor Rec. M g m t . (Capilano), C P R Instructor, C I S S R Wilderness Emergency Response Instructor, B C R C A Lake and M o v i n g Water Instructor G . G J E R D A L E N , B . A . M R M (SFU), A P M C P (Capilano) C . K I L I A N , B . A . (Columbia), M . A . ( S F U ) D . L O B L A W , B . A . ( U of T ) R. M c B L A N E , B . E d . , M . E d . ( U . o f Alberta) H . P L U M E , C M A , D i p . Accelerated Computer Systems Management (Capilano) J. R O U S E , D M A T P , B . S c . ( M t . A l l i s o n U . ) , Cert. T o u r i s m M g m t . (Capilano), C o n v e n o r , T o u r i s m Mgmt., B. W H I T E , D M A T P , B . A . , M . A . (SFU), Convenor, T o u r i s m Degree Bachelor of Tourism Management Degree A Bachelor of T o u r i s m Management degree is offered through the Open University in collaboration w i t h Capilano College. The intent o f the degree is to provide the most up-to-date knowledge, innovations, technologies, and management techniques for administrators and entrepreneurs in the tourism industry. The degree requirements include core business and tourism foundation courses, general education requirements, specified and elective courses at the upper level, and a number of defined elective credits. The academic credentials earned in the Outdoor Recreation Management diploma satisfy most core business and tourism foundation courses, and elective requirements. Subject to approval from the Open University, Capilano College w i l l be offering a l l the necessary courses to earn an Open University Bachelor o f T o u r i s m Management Degree. For a detailed brochure about the degree, please contact Capilano College at (604) 984-4960 or fax (604) 984-1761. TWO-YEAR OUTDOOR RECREATION M A N A G E M E N T DIPLOMA • Applicants must be at least 19 years of age at the date o f entry into the program, should have good reading and writing skills, have previous relevant outdoor experience, and must be physically and psychologically prepared for the challenges o f the program and the demands o f the industry. Students applying for admission should be aware that attitude, field performance and participation are taken into account in the departmental evaluation process. • Prior to admission, a doctor's certificate o f health w i l l be required. A l l students need to be w e l l equipped with outdoor gear and must be prepared to pay additional costs for field trips. Students must obtain a 3.00 ( " B " ) cumulative G P A in the first three terms and be 21 years o f age i n order to be considered for a practicum outside Canada. B . C . ' s "super natural" environment is ideal for outdoor recreation, and with the growing tourism business and increase i n leisure time for many people, the demand for qualified, well-trained managers in the field o f outdoor recreation is expanding rapidly. Nestled on the forested slope o f the North Shore mountains, close to Whitewater rivers, wilderness lakes, ocean shoreline, and mountain back country, the College is ideally suited for the challenging two-year program. The Outdoor Recreation Department is relaxed and informal; however, we set and maintain high academic and outdoor leadership performance standards. Students w i l l appreciate the individual attention College faculty are able to provide. Career Opportunities The well-established Outdoor Recreation Management program provides excellent training for a wide range of careers i n federal, provincial and regional parks, resorts, social service agencies, adventure tourism, and environmental education. Careful practicum placements and an increasing variety o f career opportunities ensure that graduates readily find employment i n the field. The Program The curriculum includes several trips into B . C . ' s wilderness areas, including backpacking experiences i n the Coast Mountains, and West Coast environmental and cultural studies. Our program has earned an excellent reputation for its top-quality management and technical skills and employment contacts. Over the past two decades, we have expanded our network o f practicum placements, keeping us i n touch with the latest developments and providing access to career prospects. Contact: 984-4960; Fax: 984-1761 E-mail: outdoor® capcollege. be. ca Admission Requirements • • • Grade 12 graduation or equivalent or mature student status Personal interview Attendance at orientation meeting. Orientation meetings and interviews are scheduled i n February and M a r c h . Phone the department for dates and times. • Admission Procedure The Application for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official transcripts and other pertinent documents. Please bring the following documentation to your interview: • A t least two letters o f reference • A resume o f past experiences Program Content FIRST TERM C M N S 154 Communications i n Outdoor Recreation and T o u r i s m R E C . 143 Outdoor Recreation Delivery Systems R E C . 152 Environmental Stewardship I R E C . 156 Introduction to Environmental R E C . 157 R E C . 169 T O U R 139 Studies A p p l i e d Field Skills Landscape Interpretation Computer Applications in T o u r i s m II Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3J3 21.0 SECOND TERM R E C . 144 Outdoor Recreation Program Planning R E C . 151 The Outdoor Recreation Environment R E C . 153 Leisure Issues R E C . 163 Wilderness First A i d I B M K T 164 S m a l l Business Management I T O U R 111 R E C . 120 Credit 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Tourism: Industry Perspective 3.0 Selective Skills no credit 18.0 Ca reer/Voca tional 155 Credits THIRD TERM R E C . 178 H u m a n Relations in Recreation 3.0 T O U R 233 R E C . 252 T O U R 120 B M K T 163 R E C . 120 Cross Cultural T o u r i s m 3.0 Environmental Stewardship II 3.0 Adventure & E c o - T o u r i s m 3.0 S m a l l B u s . M g m t . II 3.0 Selective Skills no credit 15.0 FOURTH TERM R E C . 255 Outdoor Recreation Practicum Total Credits M 9.0 63.0 The first term begins i n mid-August and runs approximately 17 weeks (this may vary depending on the nature of the external practicum). The second term starts i n January and also runs about 17 weeks. Admission This program is open to students who have two years of post-secondary education or equivalent. Capilano College students with one year of postsecondary education may apply i f they have taken the following recommended courses: • P A M . 140 and 141 (formerly T H T R 240 and 241) • Selective Skills (No Credit) D u r i n g their time in the Outdoor Recreation Management program students are required to pursue two skills activities i n their particular area of interest. These seclective skills help provide our graduates with work in the outdoor recreation, adventure travel and ecotourism industries. PERFORMING ARTS M A N A G E M E N T PROGRAM • • E n g l i s h 100 and one other E n g l i s h course, or two writing courses from C M N S or O T E C one or more Performing Arts courses one or more courses i n accounting or microcomputer software applications from C O M P or O T E C or equivalent Graduates o f the following programs may apply with only one year o f post-secondary education: Business Administration Programs, The A c c o u n t i n g Assistant Program, The A c c o u n t i n g Support Program, and the Administrative Assistant Program. P A M . 140 and 141 are recommended. A l l students are selected for the program by interview. A D V A N C E D CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Instructional Faculty L . B A X T E R , B . A . (Hons) (Queens), M . B . A . ( U B C ) F. B L A C K , B . F . A . (SFU), B . A . (UVic) D. M O O R E , B.F.A. (UVic), M . A . (WWU), Coordinator D. P R I C E , B . A . (SFU), M . F . A . ( U B C ) C. S T E R N , B . Comm., B.Ed. ( U B C ) J. S T E T T N E R , Cert. Arts A d m i n . (Banff), B . A . ( U . o f Arizona, M . B . A . ( U B C ) This one-year A d v a n c e d Certificate program offers students a unique blend o f course work and practicum experience. The course work for the program is concentrated i n a three-week intensive period at the beginning of each of the two terms. This is followed by both an internal practicum working in various capacities in the Capilano College Performing Arts Theatre and an external practicum, i n w h i c h the students w i l l get onthe-job experience working for a professional performing arts organization. Past placements have included The Arts C l u b Theatre, Ballet B . C . , Vancouver Playhouse, Gateway Theatre, Coastal Jazz and Blues Society and Lucas Talent A g e n c y . Career/Vocational 156 Admission to Full-Time Studies Students who wish to enter the program on a full-time basis should arrange for an interview by contacting the V i s u a l and Performing Arts Office by the end o f M a r c h (for August). Prior to the interview, they should forward to the Department their college or university transcripts and a resume. Admission to Part-Time Studies Part-time students can apply to register i n any o f the Performing Arts Management courses. This is particularly suitable for those w o r k i n g i n the field who might want to upgrade their skills. This option is subject to the availability of seats i n the program and a successful interview. Inquiries and applications are accepted at any time through the year. Advanced Certificate in Performing Arts Management Curriculum PERSONAL CARE ATTENDANT WORKING WITH PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES PROGRAM 30 credits FIRST TERM P A M . 340 Internal Practicum i n Performing Arts Management I P A M . 342 Management Seminar and External Practicum I P A M . 344 Computer Applications i n Performing Arts Administration P A M . 345 Public Relations, M a r k e t i n g and Promotion P A M . 346 Organizational Structures i n the Performing Arts SECOND TERM P A M . 341 Internal Practicum i n Performing Arts Management II P A M . 343 Management Seminar and External Practicum II P A M . 347 Financial Management for the PerformingArts P A M . 348 Arts A d v o c a c y , Grantsmanship and Fundraising P A M . 349 Company and Tour Management Fees Fees for 1998/99 are estimated at $75 per credit. O p e n Courses The Performing Arts Management Department offers two introductory courses w h i c h are open to all students on a first-come, first-served basis, during in-person registration. These are P A M . 140 (formerly T H T R 240) and P A M . 141 (formerly T H T R 241). E I G H T - M O N T H CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M See also: Resident Care Attendant, Home Support Attendant programs. Instructional Faculty T. A D L E R , B . A . (Toronto), M . S . W . ( U B C ) L . C U T H B E R T S O N , B.H.Sc.(O.T.) (McMaster), M.Ed.(Brock), Reg. O.T. ( B C ) M . D A Y A N , B . S . R . ( U B C ) , Registered Physiotherapist P. D e S O U S A , R . N . , B . S c . N J. G I B B S , R . S . W . , Sp. E d . ( W W U ) , Coordinator Support Staff: Nancy Findlater, A r l e n e M i l l e r , Receptionists Diane M i l l s , Program Assistant Career Opportunities In response to the trend for people with disabilities to live i n the community rather than i n an institution, the Personal Care Attendant ( P C A D ) program prepares students to work with clients o f all ages i n a variety o f community settings. Students are trained to give clientdirected personal assistance in order that the individual may achieve the fullest possible participation i n society. Services offered by the graduate Personal Care Attendant differ from the traditional medically-modeled services i n many ways: • service goals are defined by the service user, not the service provider or medical personnel. • services are oriented towards promoting maximum independence for the client in all aspects o f life. • services are directed towards enhancing an individual's present strengths and enabling the development of further strengths. • services may be provided in a variety o f settings. Because graduates must be prepared to work effectively within the full continuum o f available settings, the Personal Care Attendant program prepares students to assist persons with disabilities i n a broad range o f activities o f daily living. The program ensures that students acquire knowledge and master skills necessary to deal with the functional, emotional, social and medical implications o f physical disabilities. Career/Vocational 157 Graduates of the program find employment in many areas o f the health field including: group homes, private homes, recreation programs, health care centres, and schools. Program The objective of the program is to provide the student with the basic skills and knowledge required for a career in the Health and Human Services field. This full-time, eight-month certificate program integrates health care theory with practice. Practicum experiences take place in a variety of community health care settings. Contact: 984-4960 G r a d u a t e s receive the f o l l o w i n g certificates: 1. Personal Care Attendant 2. H o m e Support Attendant 3. F o o d Safe 4. W H M I S Students may take additional courses for a Special Education Teacher Assistant ( S E T A ) Certificate. The P C A D program includes the core courses o f the Resident Care Attendant and H o m e Support Attendant programs. Admission Requirements 1. Grade 10 or equivalent, with Grade 12 preferred. Students may be asked to complete a reading comprehension test. 2. Applicants are required to attend an information meeting and have a student/instructor interview prior to acceptance into the program. Interviews are held in A p r i l . Further interviews may be held i f spaces in the program are available. 6. Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted directly to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official transcripts for all secondary and postsecondary education. Graduation Requirements Attendance: The Personal Care Attendant program courses are intensive; regular attendance is essential. T o receive a P C A D certificate students must pass all courses and achieve a m i n i m u m of 6 0 % in each graded course i n the program and achieve a 7 5 % " B - " average in all theory courses. A student who fails any course may not be allowed to continue i n the program. Fees and Expenses The fees are i n accordance with the College Calendar for a 30 credit program. The student can expect to spend approximately $200 on books and supplies. Additional costs w i l l be incurred for a First A i d course, transportation for practicums, and for a C r i m i n a l Record Check. Program Content FIRST TERM P C A D 013 P C A D 014 P C A D 019 P C A D 022 P C A D 049 R C A P 100 R C A P 101 R C A P 102 Credits Introduction: Physical Disabilities 3.0 Ethics and Values i n Health Care 1.5 A p p l i e d Theory — Practicum I 1.5 H u m a n Relations II 1.5 A p p l i e d Theory: L a b I 2.0 Health: Lifestyles and Choices 1.5 Health and Healing: Concepts 3.0 H u m a n Relations: Interpersonal Communications 15 Total 15.5 3. Applicants must be at least 19 years o f age and have a genuine desire to work with disabled people in the Health and H u m a n Services field. T w o references are required. SECOND TERM H S A . 110 W o r k Role Concepts in H o m e Support Special Needs in H o m e Support H S A . 112 Credits 4. Applicants need good physical and mental health, and are required to complete a medical report on a form provided by the College, plus evidence of the absence of active tuberculosis. Some practicum placements require a C r i m i n a l Record Check. P C A D 023 P C A D 024 5. Students need a valid standard First A i d Certificate which includes C . P . R . throughout the course. The student is responsible for obtaining this and presenting it to the coordinator before the first day of classes. The St. John's Emergency L e v e l Safety Oriented First A i d Certificate or any higher level is acceptable. Career/Vocational 158 G r o w t h and Development A d v a n c e d Physical Disability Concept A p p l i e d Theory: Practicum I A p p l i e d Theory: L a b II P C A D 029 P C A D 059 Term Total Program Total Part-time Courses Part-time courses are available. Prior Learning Credit may be granted for prior learning. 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 6.0 10 14.5 30.0 RESIDENT CARE ATTENDANT PROGRAM F I V E - M O N T H CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M See also: Personal Care Attendant, Home Support Attendant programs. A new, revised program (HSA/RCA combined program) is under development for Fall 1999. Please contact the department for details. Instructional Faculty T. A D L E R , B . A . (Toronto), M . S . W . ( U B C ) P. D e S O U S A , R . N . , B . S c . N S. E N G E L B E R T , B . A . , R . N . , Coordinator B. E S T E Y , R.N. B. MILLER, R.N. K. T A Y L O R , R.N. Support Staff N a n c y Findlater, Arlene M i l l e r , Receptionists Diane M i l l s , Program Assistant Career Opportunities The number o f elderly people in our community is increasing, and there is an ever-growing demand for qualified men and women to work full-time or parttime i n this field o f health care. Graduates o f this full-time program are qualified to work with residents i n various continuing care settings, including extended care facilities, intermediate care facilities and H o m e Support Agencies. The potential for employment is good. w i l l be offered in North Vancouver. Applications are considered i n October for the January program, and i n M a r c h or A p r i l for the September program. Graduates o f the program may transfer some R C A courses to the Licensed Practical Nurse program. R C A graduates can enter the L . C . A . program using the Access program, w h i c h is available at some colleges. Contact: 984-4960 Admission Requirements 1. Grade 10 or equivalent, with grade 12 preferred. Students may be asked to complete a reading comprehension test. 2. Applicants are required to attend an information meeting and have a student/instructor interview prior to acceptance into the program. 3. Applicants must be at least 19 years o f age and have a genuine desire to work with elderly people and their families in the health field. T w o written references are required. 4. Applicants need good physical and mental health, and are required to complete a medical report on a form provided by the College, plus evidence o f absence o f active tuberculosis. 5. Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted directly to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official transcripts o f secondary and postsecondary education. 6. C r i m i n a l Record C h e c k * Graduation Requirements Employers may require a C r i m i n a l Record check. Attendance: The Resident Care Attendant courses are intensive; regular attendance is essential. The Program The College offers a full-time certificate program recognized throughout B . C . , designed to provide students with the opportunity to qualify to work with continuing care clients i n many different settings. The program integrates health care theory with practice. Students learn the basics i n physical care with a focus on the spiritual and emotional well-being o f the resident. Practicum experiences take place in a variety o f intermediate care and extended care facilities. A l l students who are interested i n the R C A program must attend an information meeting and have an interview with an R C A instructor. T w o programs are offered each year from September to January, and January to June. In the 1999/2000 academic year, the August ' 9 9 and January 2000 programs Graduation requires a valid standard First A i d Certificate which includes C . P . R . The student is responsible for obtaining this and presenting it to the coordinator before the first day o f classes. The St. John's Emergency L e v e l Safety Oriented First A i d Certificate or any higher level is acceptable. Students must obtain a " B - " (2.67 G P A ) , with completion o f all courses i n the program. Fees and Expenses The fees are i n accordance with the College Calendar. The student can expect to spend approximately $200 on books and supplies. Additional costs w i l l be i n curred for a First A i d course, transportation for practicums, and for a C r i m i n a l Record Check. Career/Vocational 159 * C l i n i c a l placements require a criminal record check. The student must present this to the coordinator before the first day o f classes. • attending to and providing personal assistance to students i n toileting, positioning, mobility, feeding, grooming and dressing • transferring and assisting students to and from wheelchairs, desks, special equipment and work areas • supporting all students in classroom environments Program Content Credits FIRST TERM 1.5 Health: Lifestyle and Choices R C A P 100 3.0 Health and Healing: Concepts R C A P 101 H u m a n Relations: Interpersonal R C A P 102 1.5 Communications W o r k Role Concepts i n R C A P 110 1.0 Resident Care RCAP111 R C A P 112 A p p l i e d Theory: L a b and C l i n i c a l 7.0 Special Needs in Resident Care M 17.0 Credits SECOND TERM A p p l i e d Theory: C l i n i c a l Practice 4.0 R C A P 113 21.0 Total Program Credits SPECIAL EDUCATION TEACHER ASSISTANT PROGRAM Instructional Faculty S. A L T M A N , M . A . , B . A . M . D A Y A N , B . S . R . ( U B C ) , R e g . Physiotherapist J. G I B B S , R S W , Sp.Ed., W W U D. K O C H , B.Ed., M.Ed, Coordinator R. P E A R S O N , B.Ed., M . E d . A . S T E V E N S , B.Ed., M.Ed. General Information The Special Education Teacher Assistant ( S E T A ) program prepares students to work in inclusive educational settings with children and adolescents, Kindergarten to grade 12, who have diverse learning needs. S E T A students are trained to support children with special needs so that these children can participate fully as members o f a community o f learners. This program prepares students for a variety o f paraprofessional duties i n school, and includes theoretical studies and practical applications for working with children and adolescents who need extra support. Contact: Diane Mills, Program Assistant Room CE373; Tel: 990-7802 or Diane Koch, Coordinator Room CE353; Tel: 986-1911, local 2209 W h o Should Apply? Successful S E T A applicants have an aptitude for working with children or adolescents, are patient, interested i n education and learning, consider schools to be interesting and exciting places, and show initiative while w o r k i n g in a world o f rapidly changing ideas. Admission Requirements Applicants are required to attend an information session and w i l l be assessed on the basis o f an interview with faculty, past academic experience and relevant experience working with children and adolescents. • Prospective applicants must have completed Grade 12 (transcript required) or equivalent work experience. • Submission o f the Capilano College A p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s s i o n form together with official transcripts must be submitted to the Registrar's Office. • Applicants are required to demonstrate successful experience w o r k i n g with children/adolescents, as a volunteer or paid employee. Applicants w i l l be asked to submit letters from employers or responsible persons in the community certifying this experience. • Applicants must demonstrate the ability to c o m m u nicate effectively i n spoken and written English. A short diagnostic English test w i l l be administered during your interview session. • A personal interview with the program faculty is Special Education Teacher Assistants ( S E T A ' s ) work under the direction o f classroom teachers or resource teachers and give special attention to students with physical, learning or emotional needs by: • • implementing individualized or group instruction i n communication skills, life skills, behaviour management techniques and adaptive physical education. assisting in the modification o f curriculum, assignments and tests to accommodate students' special needs Career/Vocational 160 required. Graduation Requirements STUDIO ART P R O G R A M T o qualify for the practicum placement and S E T A credit certificate, students must have a current Standard First A i d and C P R Certificate, criminal record check and T B test. U p o n successful completion of all S E T A requirements, a credit certificate w i l l be awarded at the C o l l e g e ' s convocation. Courses Fall Term S E T A 100 Credits S E T A 101 S E T A 105 History, Philosophy and Issues in Special Education W o r k i n g i n Schools Developmental Challenges for 1.5 1.5 S E T A 106 SETA's Technology for S E T A ' s 3.0 1.5 S E T A 102 S E T A 103 S E T A 104 Interpersonal Skills for Teachers Challenging Behaviours C h i l d G r o w t h and Development 1.5 1.5 S E T A 107 for S E T A ' s Instructional Strategies 1.5 3.0 Spring Term Summer Term S E T A 108 Instructional Strategies * S E T A 109 Practicum 1.5 6.0 22.5 *The 120-hour practicum is taken once all theoretical coursework has been completed and is offered in both terms. Certificate requirements equal 22.5 credits at 450 hours. Studio Art is a department within the Visual and Performing Arts Division. Other art programs in this Calendar include Textile Arts, Graphic Design and Illustration, and Commercial Animation. Instructional Faculty M . B O W C O T T , A . O . C . A . (Ontario), M . A . ( R . C . A . London) N . B O Y D , B . A . (Waterloo) B . C O G S W E L L , N . D . D . (Hammersmith) ( R . C . A . ) W . E A S T C O T T , Sr. Cert. ( V . S . A . ) ( R . C . A . ) J. J U N G I C , B . A . , M . A . ( U B C ) S. K W A N ( E . C . C . A . D . ) T . M U L V I H I L L , M . F . A . ( U . o f Calgary), M . A . ( U . o f Idaho), B . F . A . (Idaho) D . N E A V E , B . A . Hons. (Manchester), M . A . ( U V i c ) G. R A M M E L L , (E.C.C.A.D.) General Information Studio A r t offers a program of studies leading to a twoyear diploma. Studio A r t has a limited number o f openings i n many of its courses for part-time study and in advanced ceramics. It also offers individual credit courses i n A r t Institute advanced studies. See Art Institute in the Postgraduate programs section of this Calendar. The Program The Studio A r t program at Capilano C o l l e g e provides a thorough, high quality foundation in the fundamentals of art. It enables students to make informed decisions regarding future career choices and enables them to prepare high quality portfolios to aid them in gaining acceptance to the advanced art and design programs o f their choice. Graduates o f the Studio A r t program usually complete their education at university, art school or in a college design program. The Studio A r t program provides studio experiences in 2-D Studies, 3-D Studies and D r a w i n g and courses in V i s u a l Literacy, A r t History, and English. Through exposure to a broad range o f concepts, materials, techniques, and processes, students are assisted in developing personal interests, directions, and creative maturity. The emphasis o f the program is on preparing students to function effectively within the context o f current thought and practice within the fine arts, while preparing them for further studies in art and design-related fields. Because the program also exposes students to creative thinking and problem- C a r e e rl Vo ca tio n a I 161 solving, it may also serve as a foundation for further Admission Requirements general education. Students interested i n study w i t h the S t u d i o A r t p r o g r a m s h o u l d contact the A r t D e p a r t m e n t at 9844911 o r w r i t e to: T h e A r t D e p a r t m e n t , C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e , 2055 P u r c e l l W a y , N o r t h V a n c o u v e r , B . C . V7J 3H5 Contact: Art Department, 984-4911 Part-time Courses There are a limited number of positions open i n many of the credit courses offered in Studio A r t . These courses may be credited toward either a D i p l o m a i n Studio A r t , a D i p l o m a i n A c a d e m i c Studies or a D i p l o m a i n General Studies, depending on the student's educational objectives. F o r diplomas other than Studio Art, see Graduation section in this Calendar. Students taking Studio A r t courses must be available for the labs attached to Ceramics, Sculpture and Printmaking which take place on the afternoon of scheduled classes. Students must ensure that courses taken outside of Studio A r t w i l l not conflict with these labs. The Department encourages students to take both terms of any given discipline (i.e. both D r a w i n g I and II) i n the interests o f effective university transfer status. The program w i l l try to pre-register returning students into spring term courses. FULL-TIME STUDENTS Completion o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status required. Applicants are admitted on the basis o f an interview and portfolio presentation. The candidate decides on the nature and scope o f work presented, but should provide a representative picture o f past and current artistic activities. In addition to completed work and sketchbooks, research material and preliminary studies should be included wherever possible. Slides, photographs or any other supporting evidence may also form part of the portfolio. It is not necessary for prospective students to mount work for the portfolio, since the quality of work is more important than the presentation. PART-TIME STUDENTS Career and Educational Opportunities The fields o f further study listed below lead to specific career or job opportunities. It is recommended that an education in these specific careers should follow a high quality broad art foundation such as that offered by Studio A r t . Students may find they need to study out o f the province to pursue these educational goals. Applicants may be eligible to take courses where space is available. A few places are available for part-time students in all courses. Before the end o f A p r i l , interested applicants should contact the A r t office at 9844911 regarding portfolio interviews. Students wishing to register into the open D r a w i n g classes may do so during the normal registration period, space permitting. F I N E A R T S : sculptor, printmaker, painter G A L L E R I E S A N D M U S E U M S : curator, restorer, illustrator I N D U S T R Y : industrial, interior, furniture designer C R A F T S : ceramic, textile, jewellery artist Application Procedure Prior to the portfolio interview, all applicants must supply the following documentation to the R e g i s t r a r ' s Office b y the e n d o f A p r i l : • I L L U S T R A T O R : fashion, medical, advertising, publishing A R C H I T E C T U R E : model maker, renderer, restorer E D U C A T I O N : instructor, art therapist, consultant Students who study full-time or part-time and acquire either a D i p l o m a in Studio A r t or a D i p l o m a in A c a demic Studies (including art courses) should find that educational opportunities exist i n these and other fields. • • Completed Capilano College Application for Admission Secondary and post-secondary transcripts (indicating 6 credits E n g . 100 i f applicable). Certificate o f E n g l i s h Language Assessment test ( E L A ) or Test o f English as a Foreign Language ( T O E F L ) , i f applicable. APPLICANTS MUST PHONE T H E A R T D E P A R T M E N T A T 984-4911 B E F O R E T H E E N D OF APRIL T O A R R A N G E A PORTFOLIO INTERVIEW FOR EARLY M A Y . Please return your Studio Art questionnaire to the Art Department Office (AR 202) prior to your interview. Career/Vocational 162 Special Fees and Expenses A l t h o u g h the Studio A r t Department can supply some of the materials required for the courses, the student can expect a financial outlay for some basic supplies, as indicated in the course outlines. University Transfer A l l Studio A r t courses are university transferable to many other institutions. Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for more information. Program Content Major Program Requirements Credits 60 FIRST TERM Credits A H I S 104 Introduction to V i s u a l Culture 3 S A R T 150 Drawing I 3 and 3 o f the following: 9 S A R T 163 3-D Studies: Ceramic A r t I (3) S A R T 167 3 - D Studies: Sculpture I (3) S A R T 171 2 - D Studies: Painting I (3) S A R T 182 2 - D Studies: Printmaking I (3) _ 15 SECOND TERM Credits A H I S 105 Introduction to V i s u a l Culture II 3 S A R T 151 D r a w i n g II 3 and 3 o f the following (with prerequisites):* 9 S A R T 165 3-D Studies: Ceramic A r t II (3) S A R T 172 2 - D Studies: Painting II (3) S A R T 174 3-D Studies: Sculpture II (3) S A R T 183 2 - D Studies: Printmaking II (3) _ 15 THIRD TERM Credits History o f M o d e r n A r t 3 (19th Century) S A R T 262 D r a w i n g III 3 and 3 of the following (with prerequisites):* 9 S A R T 250 2 - D Studies: Painting III (3) S A R T 257 3-D Studies: Sculpture III (3) S A R T 273 3-D Studies: Ceramic A r t III (3) S A R T 282 2 - D Studies: Printmaking III (3) FOURTH TERM A H I S 211 History o f M o d e r n A r t Credits 3 (20th Century) S A R T 263 Drawing I V and 3 o f the following (with prerequisites):* S A R T 255 2 - D Studies: Painting I V (3) S A R T 265 3-D Studies: Sculpture I V (3) S A R T 274 3-D Studies: Ceramic A r t I V (3) S A R T 283 2 - D Studies: Printmaking I V (3) 3 9 _ 15 * Where scheduling permits, second-year students may elect to drop one o f their three selected disciplines, then pick up both terms o f the first year discipline not previously studied. Acceptance into Second Year Courses Due to space limitations in the second year, completion of first-year courses does not guarantee acceptance into individual second-year courses. W h e n more students require a course than space allows, acceptance i n the course w i l l be based on the grades received in the prerequisite course. A l l studio courses include slide/lectures, demonstrations, individual and group critiques, field trips and guest artist speakers. English Requirement Six credits o f English are required as prerequisite to Studio A r t , and therefore to receiving a Studio A r t D i p l o m a . A student accepted into the program without the English requirements must complete the two E n g l i s h courses prior to applying for a Studio A r t Diploma. Students who complete all of the major program requirements but fail to take E n g l i s h w i l l be granted a D i p l o m a i n General Studies. A H I S 210 15 Advanced Courses S A R T 300 S A R T 301 S A R T 310 S A R T 311 A r t Institute I — Sculpture & Printmaking A r t Institute II — Sculpture & Printmaking 12 A d v a n c e d Ceramic Studies Advanced Ceramic Studies II 3 3 12 Career/Vocational 163 TEXTILE ARTS PROGRAM The Textile Arts Program is a department within the Visual and Performing Arts Division. Other art Programs in this Calendar include Studio Art, Graphic Design and Illustration, and Commercial Animation. Instructional Faculty N . B O Y D , B . A . (Waterloo) E . H A N N A N , B . F . A . ( U o f Manitoba) K . H O L L A N D , D i p . (Johannesburg School o f A r t ) A . M A L L I N S O N , (Westdean College, Sussex, England) L . R I C H M O N D , Teach. Cert. (Trent Park, L o n d o n , Eng.) M . A r t E d . ( W . W a s h . U . ) R. S C H E U I N G , B . F . A . ( N o v a Scotia College o f A r t & Design) P. S I N G E R , B . A . (Sir George W i l l i a m s ) , M . F . A . (Concordia) Y . W A K A B A Y A S H I , B.Ed., M.Ed. ( U B C ) General Information The Textile Arts program offers a full-time, two-year program leading to a D i p l o m a . It also offers a one-year A d v a n c e d Textile Arts Certifi- work and also provide practical information on how careers are built. Practicums with artists, crafts people, related businesses or organizations take place as part o f the course in "Professional and Business S k i l l s " . They provide a useful work experience for students i n the Textile Arts program. Career Opportunities Past graduates are working professionally as artists, crafts people or designers in fashion or interior design. Some graduates have found employment in f i l m or theatre productions or work for arts organizations or related businesses. The Textile Arts program can also be a stepping stone toward further studies in degree granting programs and previous students have transferred to institutions across Canada and the U S A to pursue studies in V i s u a l Arts, Design, Fashion, Textile Conservation and A b o r i g i n a l Arts. Options also exist to combine Textile Arts with studies i n academic areas such as Anthropology and Art History. Textile Arts form an important aspect o f the cultural life in any community and many ways exist to apply the skills learned and build a professional career. cate program. Occasional evening part-time courses are also offered. For non-credit courses i n Textile Arts, please contact Continuing Education at 984-4901. Contact: Ruth Scheuing, Coordinator, 986-1911, ext. 2008 The Program Students learn about textile arts by exploring many different processes and by studying historical and contemporary works. The core content of W e a v i n g and Textile Surface Design is complemented by courses i n D r a w i n g , Design, V i s u a l Literacy, Communications and Textile History. N e w courses in "Professional and Business Skills in Arts and Crafts" and "Precision D y e i n g " provide students with information and hands-on experience that w i l l facilitate entering a professional career. A critical and analytical approach to their own work w i l l enable graduates to be proficient i n a range of professional activities. Gallery and studio visits, as well as guest lectures by visiting artists and other professionals working in textiles or related areas, augment regular teaching sessions. They show distinct approaches to an artist's Career/Vocational 164 Admission Requirements Textile Arts Diploma Program C o m p l e t i o n o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status. Prospective students are admitted on the basis o f an interview. N o previous experience i n textile arts is required. Students should bring up to 20 pieces o f work to the interview. A n y combination o f media are accepted, such as textiles, painting, photographs, ceramics, drawing etc. Slides or photographs can be shown instead o f actual works. Students without previous art background, but with suitable academic experience w i l l also be considered. Advanced Textile Arts Certificate Program A two year D i p l o m a i n V i s u a l Arts or equivalent studies with courses i n the following areas for a combined total of 24 credits: Painting, Photography, Printmaking, Sculpture, Ceramics, W e a v i n g , Surface Design and Fashion Design. In addition, six credits i n each o f the following areas are also required: Design, D r a w i n g , A r t History or V i s u a l Literacy, English or Communications. Students also need to show a portfolio and come for an interview to be admitted. N o previous experience i n textile arts is required. Students who miss some prerequisites may be admitted into the advanced program on condition that they take the missing courses before graduating. Application Procedures Contact the V i s u a l and Performing Arts Department to arrange an interview. Interviews are held i n M a y and some additional interviews may be scheduled i n August, space permitting. E v e n i n g interviews are available. Send the following documentation to the Registrar's Office, prior to M a y 1: • Completed Capilano College A p p l i c a t i o n for Admission • • Secondary and post-secondary transcripts Official copies of English Language Assessment ( E L A ) Test or Test of E n g l i s h as a Foreign L a n guage ( T O E F L ) , i f applicable • Questionnaires Transfer Credits Courses marked with an asterisk (e.g. A H I S 105*) carry transferability to U B C , S F U , U V i c and other academic degree-granting institutions. Other courses can be transferred to programs w h i c h include textile arts in their curriculum. Students should understand that advanced standing i n any institution is usually based on an interview and a portfolio submission, as w e l l as credits. Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e or contact the V i s u a l and Performing Arts Department for more specific information. Special Fees and Expenses Some materials needed for the courses are supplied and are covered by a supply fee. In addition, students should expect an outlay for midterm, final projects, basic supplies, and textbooks. T X T L 160 T X T L 168 Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements Credits 42.0 18.0 60.0 FIRST TERM A H I S 104* Credits Introduction to V i s u a l Culture I C M N S 120 Effective W r i t i n g & Speech or a 100-level E n g l i s h course T X T L 158 Design I 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 M 15.0 SECOND TERM A H I S 105* T X T L 178 T X T L 154 T X T L 161 T X T L 169 Credits Introduction to V i s u a l Culture II Design II Introductory D r a w i n g I Textile Surface Design II W e a v i n g II 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 10 15.0 THIRD TERM A H I S 231 * History o f Textile A r t I C M N S 153 Communications & the Arts or a 100-level English Course T X T L 267 W e a v i n g III T X T L 284 T X T L 290 FOURTH Textile Surface Design III Precision D y e i n g TERM A H I S 232* T X T L 153 T X T L 268 T X T L 285 T X T L 230 History o f Textile A r t II Introductory D r a w i n g II Weaving I V Textile Surface Design I V Professional and Business Skills i n Arts and Crafts Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 15.0 Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 ^ 0 15.0 Advanced Textile Arts Certificate Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements Credits 24.0 6JJ 30.0 FIRST Credits TERM T X T L 384 T X T L 367 A H I S 231 Textile Surface Design V Weaving V History o f Textile A r t I or A r t H i s t o r y * T X T L 290 Precision D y e i n g SECOND Program Content Textile Surface Design I Weaving I T X T L 385 T X T L 368 TERM Textile Surface Design V I Weaving V I 4.5 4.5 3.0 3.0 15.0 Credits 4.5 4.5 A H I S 232 History o f Textile A r t II or A r t History* T X T L 230 Professional and Business Skills i n Arts and Crafts 3.0 3.0 15.0 Note: Students with a Textile Arts Diploma require another Art History (beyond AHIS 104/105, 231/ 232). All other students require History of Textile Art I and II. Career/Vocational 165 THEATRE P R O G R A M A. D I P L O M A IN T H E A T R E B. A D V A N C E D C E R T I F I C A T E IN T H E A T R E Instructional Faculty S. A T K I N S , B . A . , M . F . A . ( S F U ) F. B L A C K , B . F . A . (SFU), B . A . (UVic) P. C O N N E L L , B . A . , M . A . , P h D ( U B C ) T. F O R R E S T , B . F . A . ( B . C . O . U . ) D. M O O R E , B.F.A. (UVic), M . A . ( W W U ) B. M U R D O C H , B.F.A. (UVic), M . F . A . ( U B C ) D. PRICE, B.A. (SFU) M . F . A . ( U B C ) D. W I N S T A N L E Y General Information The Theatre Department offers a two-year D i p l o m a program and a one-year A d v a n c e d Certificate program. Theatre has openings in some o f its courses for parttime study. registering in a practicum course. Students who wish to participate in productions should not register in non-theatre courses which are scheduled Monday Friday, 4:30 - 10:30 p.m. or Saturdays, 10:00 a.m 6:00 p.m. A . DIPLOMA IN THEATRE The Theatre D i p l o m a program provides a two-year, comprehensive training i n theatre, with experience i n a full range of theatre specialties, i n a pre-professional program. Students may choose to focus on either performance or technical courses. U p o n graduation, students w i l l have successfully participated i n acting and other studio courses, technical theatre, theatre history, criticism and dramaturgy, as w e l l as performance. They w i l l be able to transfer to a university or university college and pursue a further, more specialized degree in theatre, or apply their theatre skills to further study i n Arts or Education faculties. Graduates are also eligible to apply for a place in the Advanced Certificate in Theatre. Mission and Goals a) Part-time Non-diploma Thorough grounding in all aspects of Theatre training for students is the goal of the Theatre Department. The Department values academic and professional training with practical application i n acting, technical, and management laboratory situations. Competence, adaptability, and leadership are the values the department instils i n its emerging Theatre artists. Part-time students are encouraged to register in the courses and to participate in department productions. They w i l l be included in the same classes as full-time program students. Seats available to part-time students are listed in the timetable. The goal is to foster literacy in the art o f theatre. b) Part-time Diploma Studies Facilities Performance classes are held i n the Arbutus Studio adjacent to the Capilano College Performing Arts Theatre, which houses the Department's season o f plays. The theatre is complete with a rehearsal hall, changing rooms, costume and technical workshops, a fly-tower, and a 380-seat house. Students i n Theatre enjoy exceptional access to these facilities, and assist i n running the theatres in a handson, educational experience. Some seats are available for part-time study leading to the Theatre D i p l o m a . The goal is to provide the same comprehensive training i n theatre as for full-time students, but spread over a longer period of time. University Transfer Credit D i p l o m a courses transfer to universities and universitycolleges. Please consult the B . C . Transfer G u i d e for the most recent transfer information. Students may have to audition for placement in other programs, and should consult with the specific institution regarding these requirements. Productions Each year, Capilano College Theatre produces a season of full length plays i n the Performing Arts Theatre and in the Arbutus Studio. Auditions are open to A d v a n c e d Certificate and D i p l o m a program students, the College community, alumni, and members o f the community at large. These productions also offer students practical experience i n technical theatre and design, as w e l l as exposure to guest directors and designers. N o n program students may participate i n productions by CareerlVoca 166 tional Admission a n d Registration Procedures A l l students must meet the admission requirements for post-secondary programs. F o r Theatre, a student's Grade 12 Fine Arts grades w i l l also be considered. Prospective full-time and part-time D i p l o m a students must contact the V i s u a l and Performing Arts Office by the end o f A p r i l to set up an audition/interview time. Late applicants w i l l be considered i f space permits. 1. Students must submit the results o f the Language Proficiency Index Test or the C o l l e g e ' s English Diagnostic Test (See Registration section o f this Calendar) to register i n an English course. D o not delay obtaining these results. 2. Students applying for first year w i l l be asked to submit a letter outlining why they want to study theatre and an interim transcript showing high school courses and marks. A letter o f recommendation from a theatre professional or instructor is an optional submission. 3. Students wishing to enter the second year directly, and those applying to study for the Diploma parttime, w i l l be assessed for admittance on an individual basis, subject to the availability o f places in the program and a successful audition/interview. SECOND TERM (both Performance Technical/Design Stream) Stream and Credits T H T R 101 T H T R 121 T H T R 151 A c t i n g II Elements o f Theatre II Introduction to Production 3.0 3.0 and Design II English Literature Elective (students are advised to take electives which fulfil transfer requirements) 3.0 3.0 3.0 and/or: T H T R 193, 194, 195 3.0 Practicums (may be taken as an elective or to replace T H T R 101 or 151. A p p r o v a l required.) 4. D i p l o m a students w i l l be pre-registered on a specific date. All other students may register during In- person Registration in any Theatre Department course with seats available. THIRD AND FOURTH TERMS (Technical Design Stream) Theatre/ Special Fees M i n . 24 credits in Theatre plus six credits o f electives. Technical Theatre classes are assessed a lab fee o f $30 each. T H T R 220 Some courses are non-base funded. Consult the timetable. Fees for these courses are not refundable after the first day o f classes. Required T H T R 221 T H T R 250 T H T R 251 Diploma Program Curriculum 60 credits, including English 100 and one other 100level English course. FIRST TERM (both Performance Technical/Design Stream) ' T H T R 255 T H T R 260 Stream and Credits T H T R 100 T H T R 120 T H T R 150 Acting I Elements of Theatre I Introduction to Production and 3.0 3.0 E N G L 100 Elective Design I Composition (students are advised to take 3.0 3.0 3.0 electives w h i c h fulfil transfer requirements) and/or: T H T R 190, 191, 192 T H T R 252 T H T R 253 T H T R 254 3.0 Practicums (may be taken as an elective or to replace T H T R 100 or 150. A p p r o v a l required.) Uo courses: Credits Conceptual Approaches to Theatre I Conceptual Approaches II Senior Production Responsibilities I Senior Production Responsibilities II A d v a n c e d L i g h t i n g and Sound I A d v a n c e d L i g h t i n g and Sound II 3.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 4.5 . Technical Theatre/Design I Technical Theatre/Design II Analysis for Directing and Design 4.5 3.0 Electives 6.0 30.0 THIRD AND FOURTH TERMS Stream) (Performance M i n . 24 credits i n Theatre plus six credits o f electives. Required Courses Credits T H T R 200 T H T R 201 T H T R 205 Script and Stage Acting I V Bodywork 3.0 3.0 3.0 T H T R 207 T H T R 220 V o c a l Communication I Conceptual Approaches to 3.0 Theatre I T H T R 221 Conceptual Approaches II T H T R 260 Analysis for Directing and Design plus two course selected from: T H T R 250 Senior Production Responsibilities I T H T R 251 Senior Production Responsibilities II 3.0 3.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 Career/Vocational 167 T H T R 252 T H T R 253 Electives A d v a n c e d L i g h t i n g and Sound I A d v a n c e d L i g h t i n g and Sound II 1.5 1.5 6.0 Contact the V i s u a l and Performing Arts Office by the end o f A p r i l (for August) or the end o f October (for January) to arrange for an audition/interview. 3O0 Admission to Part-Time Studies B. A D V A N C E D CERTIFICATE IN THEATRE (ACT) This unique certificate program bridges theatre training and professional theatre practice. It is run i n partnership with the Arts C l u b Theatre. The A d v a n c e d Certificate in Theatre is open to students who have completed the Capilano College Theatre D i p l o m a or equivalent studies at another institution, or who have equivalent experience. The purpose o f the advanced certificate is to give students practical experience in a specialized area of theatre. In a mentored situation with faculty and renowned guest artists, a mix of performance, directing, production and design specialists w i l l produce theatre i n the Studio and the 378 seat Capilano College Performing Arts Theatre. A d v a n c e d certificate students, by special arrangement with the Arts C l u b Theatre, w i l l also be eligible to audition for non-equity parts i n selected Arts C l u b Productions. The Arts C l u b Theatre also provides possible placements for directing, design, and production students as assistants on some o f the Arts C l u b productions. Students must apply and be approved for all A d v a n c e d Certificate i n Theatre positions offered at the Arts C l u b Theatre. The A d v a n c e d Certificate program can be taken i n modules which permit part-time study. This is particularly suitable for theatre educators who wish to upgrade their skills. This option is subject to the availability o f places i n the program and a successful audition/ interview. Enquiries and applications are accepted at any time though the year. Contact the V i s u a l and Performing Arts Office to arrange for an audition/ interview. Advanced Certificate in Theatre Curriculum Students must concentrate on one o f five specialized areas: performance, technical production, stage management design or direction. They receive instruction through: 1) a series o f master classes conducted by faculty and guest artists 2) involvement in the Capilano College Theatre Department Productions 3) i f selected, involvement i n Arts C l u b Theatre productions. FIRST TERM T H T R 360 U p o n completion of the A d v a n c e d Certificate i n Theatre, students w i l l have been exposed, through practice, to the skills necessary either to create their own work or run their o w n theatre company, or to find employment i n the performing arts. The certificate can be completed i n two terms, or students may opt for part-time studies. Please note the full-time program begins mid-August. Full-time students may commence the program in January i f seats are available. Part-time students may apply at any time. Admission to Full-Time Studies Students w i l l be selected on the basis of resume, an interview and: • • • • • Performance: audition Directing: a written proposal outlining objectives Technical Production: a written proposal outlining objectives Design: a portfolio Stage Management: a written proposal outlining objectives Career/Vocational 168 SECOND Credits Directed Studies in Theatre I 15.0 TERM T H T R 364 Directed Studies in Theatre II Total credits 15.0 30.0* PART-TIME OPTIONS T H T R 361 T H T R 362 T H T R 363 T H T R 365 T H T R 366 Project 1 Project 2 Project 3 Project 4 Project 5 Credits 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 T H T R 367 Total credits Project 6 _LQ 30.0* C o m m e n c i n g with T H T R 361, students progress through the projects at their o w n pace. These 30 credits are equal to T H T R 360 and 364. •Students may have to take additionalcourses i f there are educational deficiencies i n the area o f speciality. Fees Fees for 1999/2000 are estimated at $1,250 per term for full-time study or $500 per part-time course. TOURISM MANAGEMENT CO-OP PROGRAM A. TOURISM MANAGEMENT CO-OP DIPLOMA PROGRAM B. BACHELOR OF TOURISM MANAGEMENT DEGREE C. ADVANCED CERTIFICATE IN TOURISM STUDIES Instructional Faculty D . B A S H A M , D M A T P , Coordinator C . B O T T E R I L L , B . S o c . Sc. (Waikato)', M . A . (hons), (Canterbury, N . Z . ) P. B R A N D , B . A . , M . A . (Alberta) D . C A T R O U N , B . A . (Concordia), C H S , C F M , C F B E , DMATP G . F A N E , B . S c . (City U . ) , M . B . A . ( U B C ) , C . M . A . G . G J E R D A L E N , B . A . ( S F U ) , A C M C P (Capilano), M R M (SFU) W . I N G L I S , B . A . ( U B C ) , D i p . Marketing ( U . o f M . ) C . K I L I A N , B . A . (Col.), M . A . ( S F U ) M . L E E , B . A . B . E d . ( U B C ) , T S L Certificate R . M c B L A N E , B . E d . , M . E d . (Alberta) L . M O R A N , Hospitality D i p l o m a (Ryerson), D M A T P J. P E N D Y G R A S S E , B . S c . ( N . Dakota), Teacher's Cert. (Manitoba), Tour. M g m t . Cert. (Capilano), D M A T P H . P L U M E , C M A , D i p . Accelerated Computer Systems Management (Capilano) T. P O W E R , B . A . (St. M a r y ' s ) , L i b . , M . P . A . (Dalhousie) J. R O U S E , B . S c . ( M t . A . ) , Tour. M g m t . Cert., (Capilano College), D M A T P , Coordinator L . S A V A G E , B . A . ( M c G i l l ) , D i p . E d . , M . E d . (Alberta) S. S T A N G E R , B P E ( U B C ) , D i p . H u m a n Resources (BCIT) B . W H I T E , B . A . (hons), M . A . ( S F U ) , P h . D . ( S F U ) , D M A T P , Coordinator Contact: 984-4960; Fax: 984-1761 E-mail: tourism @ capcollege. be. ca A. TOURISM MANAGEMENT CO-OP DIPLOMA PROGRAM Capilano College's accelerated Tourism Management C o - o p program is on the leading edge o f tourism education. O u r mission is to train students in the management skills necessary for the successful operation o f travel generators, including resorts, adventure tourism, attractions, conferences, and special events. Marketing, research and entrepreneurial skills i n tourism business are also emphasized. Recognition o f our curriculum by the Pacific R i m Institute o f T o u r i s m provides access to industry certification. Intensive technical skills courses, contact with the industry, and a four and a half month supervised co-op work term encourages a professional attitude to the industry. The program's pragmatic business approach combined with creative teaching promises a rewarding educational investment for students. Capilano College Tourism Management offers top quality faculty, a beautiful campus, and an exciting learning environment. If you are actively considering a career in tourism and think you have what it takes to be successful as a professional in the field, give us a call! B. BACHELOR OF TOURISM MANAGEMENT DEGREE A Bachelor o f Tourism Management degree is offered through the Open University in collaboration w i t h Capilano College. The intent o f the degree is to provide the most up-to-date knowledge, innovations, technologies, and management techniques for administrators and entrepreneurs in the tourism industry. The degree requirements include core business and tourism foundation courses, general education requirements, specified and elective courses at the upper level, and a number of defined elective credits. The academic credentials earned in the Tourism Management C o - o p D i p l o m a and the Outdoor Recreation Management D i p l o m a satisfy most core business and tourism foundation courses, and elective requirements. Upper level course requirements include the courses listed under the advanced certificate in tourism studies curriculum plus T O U R 440, the graduating seminar. Courses subject to approval by the Open University. Capilano College w i l l be offering all the necessary courses to earn an Open University Bachelor o f T o u r i s m Management Degree. F o r a detailed brochure about the degree and an Open University application form, please contact Capilano College at (604) 984-4960 or fax (604) 984-1761. Admission Requirements for the Diploma In order to be considered, applicants should have sound reading and writing skills, and ideally some tourism industry work experience. Previous post-secondary education is a definite asset. C a l l the T o u r i s m Department in August or September for dates o f the information meetings and follow-up interviews. Career/Vocational 169 Interview Procedure Please bring the following documentation to your interview. • At least two letters of reference • High school or post-secondary education transcripts • A resume of past experiences Program Content TERM 1 (January to April) C M N S 154 T O U R 100 T O U R 111 T O U R 112 T O U R 113 T O U R 131 T O U R 139 Credits Communications in Recreation and Tourism Tourism Co-op Preparation Tourism: An Industry Perspective Tourism Marketing Human Resource Management in Tourism Tourism Product Development Computer Applications in Tourism II 3.0 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 10 Total 19.5 TERM 2 (May to September) Credits T O U R 130 10.5 TERM 3 (September to December) Credits T O U R 120 T O U R 123 T O U R 127 T O U R 239 Financial Planning in Tourism I 3.0 3.0 3.0 Tourism Resource and Community Planning 3.0 Advanced Computer Applications in Tourism 10 18.0 Term 4 (January to March) T O U R 125 T O U R 231 T O U R 232 T O U R 233 Students will select six from the following core courses, or one specialty course may be substituted for one of the core courses. Core Courses C M N S 354 Credits Tourism Financial Planning — Tourism II 3.0 3.0 Tourism Research and Consultancy 3.0 International Tourism Policy and Planning 3.0 Cross Cultural Tourism 1Q 15.0 Program Total 63.0 Career/Vocational Credit Advanced Communications T O U R 422 for Tourism Management Organizational Leadership in Tourism People Management — T O U R 423 T O U R 424 T O U R 425 T O U R 426 T O U R 427 T O U R 428 Human Relations in Tourism 3 Tourism Planning and Policy 3 Entrepreneurship in Tourism 3 Financial Management in Tourism 3 Cultural and Community Issues 3 Marketing Research for Tourism 3 International Tourism Marketing 3 T O U R 421 Specialty Courses T O U R 441 T O U R 442 Advanced Tourism Product Development Environmental Stewardship T O U R 443 T O U R 444 for Tourism International Eco-Tourism* Cultural Tourism Management* Organizational Behaviour in Total 170 A high proportion of tourism industry managers lack the time and/or prerequisites to successfully complete the requirements for the Bachelor of Tourism Management degree. Ongoing professional development is critical to maintain the international competitiveness of British Columbia as a tourism destination. The Tourism Professional Development Program provides an accessible professional development opportunity for full-time industry managers by offering evening courses downtown, and on weekends at the North Vancouver campus. 3.0 Special Events — Tourism Generators Adventure and Eco-Tourism Tourism Advertising Total T O U R 114 The Tourism Professional Development Program Co-op Work Term Total T O U R 116 T O U R 118 C. A D V A N C E D CERTIFICATE IN TOURISM STUDIES Total credits required for certificate: * Under development 3 3 Credit 18 Post-Graduate Programs ART INSTITUTE Submissions 1. Resume — to include pertinent travel and other life The A r t Institute, specializing in Sculpture and Printmaking, is a one-year, post-graduate certificate program unique i n the college system. Comparable to artist-in-residence programs, the Institute offers advanced studies to artists with several years experience in sculpture or printmaking, or to recent college, university or art school graduates. experiences. Members of the Institute have access to well-equipped studios and specialized equipment, plus auxiliary facilities such as a darkroom, computer lab and media centre. Supplies and materials are available at cost. of work. This should be as specific as possible. Lectures, seminars and tutorials feature guest artists and faculty who are professionals i n their fields. W i t h the permission of the instructor, and at no additional cost, members may also pursue individual research beyond the one-year certificate. A major component o f the Institute experience is the interchange among the participants, which may include critiques, encouragement o f w o r k i n progress, or exposure to new materials. A l o n g with providing the artist with studio space, the Institute offers the expertise of special speakers and workshop experiences. The atmosphere is stimulating and supportive o f the individual's aesthetic development. Contact: Art Department, 984-1911 Admission Requirements Completion o f art school d i p l o m a or B F A studies are required to enter this program. Exceptional students with equivalent work experience may be accepted at the discretion o f the instructors. Note that it is not absolutely necessary to be specifically proficient i n the chosen area of study. Parallel experience w o u l d be considered, i.e. painting to printmaking. 2. Portfolio — original works where possible; however, slides, photographs or other printed material w i l l be acceptable. Where appropriate, and with the coordinator's permission, the portfolio requirement may be waived. 3. Proposal — an outline of the anticipated directions Submissions should be addressed to: The A r t Department Capilano College 2055 Purcell W a y North Vancouver, B . C . V7J 3H5 T e l . 984-4911 Fees The 1997/98 tuition fees for the A r t Institute were $678 per term. Total fees were $743.20. There are two terms per year. A l t h o u g h the normal shop supplies are provided, students can anticipate charges for materials directly involved with the production o f work. A d v a n c e d Options Courses S A R T . 300 — A r t Institute I - Sculpture and Printmaking S A R T . 301 — A r t Institute II - Sculpture and Printmaking Enquiries and applications are accepted at any time throughout the year, although the normal registration periods are M a y and December for the first and second terms, respectively. Phone 984-4911 by the end of A p r i l for an interview i n early M a y . Post-graduate Programs 173 ASIA PACIFIC M A N A G E M E N T COOPERATIVE PROGRAM Instructional Faculty N i g e l A M O N , B . A . (Kent), M . A . ( S F U ) , Economics Robert B A G S H A W , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Colorado), Emeritus B a w n C A M P B E L L , C N I (Seneca), Computer Systems T o n g C H O W , B . A . (Beijing Foreign Studies U ) , M . A . ( S F U ) , Chinese Language Tuyet C O L L A C O T T , B . A . ( U . of Ottawa), Vietnamese Charles G R E E N B E R G , B . A . , M . A . (Manitoba), P h . D . ( U B C ) , Development Issues Barbara H A N K I N , B . A . ( U . B . C ) , M . A . ( W A S H . ) , Directed Studies, L a n g u a g e C o n v e n o r Tineke H E L L W I G , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . Indonesian Literature (Leiden U . ) , Indonesian B i l l I N G L I S , B . A . ( U B C ) , D i p . M a r k e t i n g (Montreal), Marketing B i l l I N K S T E R , C . G . A . (Canada), A S C M (Capilano), C N I , Basic Financial M a t h Skills Francis K I E M , B . B . A . , P h . D . E d . (Jakarta), Indonesian Language Scott M a c L E O D , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . ( U B C ) , E c o n o m i c Geography, P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r L l o y d M I C H A E L S , B . S c , B.Ed., M . E d . ( U of A ) , Personal Presentations Terry M I L L S , C I T T , B . G . S . , M . E d . ( S F U ) , Trade Logistics K a z u k o M I T O , B . A . , M . A . ( U B C ) , Japanese Language T o m P E T E R S E N , B . A . ( A U , Washington, D C ) , M B A (Monterey Inst, of IntT Studies), B u s i n e s s C o n venor Jim P L A C Z E K , B . A . ( W i n d s o r ) , M . A . ( U B C ) , P h . D ( U B C ) Thai Language Pontip P L A C Z E K , B . A . (Thammasat), Thai Language Terry P O W E R , B . A . (St. M a r y ' s U ) , L L . B . , M . P . A . (Dalhousie), M . B . A . , D . B . A . in progress ( A s i a Pacific Int'l U ) , Marketing Charles P R I E S T E R , F C B A B . C o m m . , M . A . ( U B C ) , International Finance Y a y o i S H I N B O , Associate Arts (Obirin T a n k i Daigaku), Japanese Language Margot S U T C L I F F E , B . A . , M . A . ( U B C ) , International Career Management Cameron S Y L V E S T E R , B . A . (Gonzaga), M . A . (NotreDame), Analysis, C o n v e n o r A n n e W A T S O N , B . A . ( U . of Calgary), M . B . A . ( A P I U , New Zealand), Marketing Joan Y A N G , B . A . (Central University for Nationalities), M . A . (Oregon State U ) , Chinese Language Karen Y I P , B . A . ( U B C ) , L L . B . ( U B C ) , Legal Systems Post-graduate 174 Programs General Information This diploma program has been developed to offer training to Canadians who are considering careers i n A s i a . It is a joint-venture in educational programming, bringing employers together with students and the College to form a unique blend o f experiential and academic training. The emphasis is on Canada's relationships with A s i a n countries and the potential to extend our linkages through trade, business, applied technology and development projects. Contact: Scott MacLeod, E-mail: smacleod® 984-4981; capcollege. Fax: 984-4992 be. ca The Program Students who are interested in a career in the A s i a Pacific region w i l l follow an integrated program o f study. Each student w i l l take the core courses i n A s i a n Studies and International Business, Trade and Finance. In addition, students w i l l choose an A s i a n language such as Japanese, Chinese (Mandarin), Indonesian, Vietnamese or Thai. After nine months of study, eligible students w i l l complete a work internship. This co-op work term is 12 months i n duration. Students w i l l be evaluated by the College and the employer, and this w i l l become part o f the student's permanent record. D u r i n g their 12-month internship i n A s i a , associates are expected to carry out credit course work while i n the field. This work w i l l equate to 9 credits (approx. four courses) per year. It w i l l involve submitting required reports, electronic work with faculty, and meetings such as the mid-term conference. Every effort w i l l be made to secure co-op internships for students. Jobs w i l l be sought i n A s i a n countries and in international Canadian organizations. The work term w i l l finish with debriefing and re-entry sessions. Career targets o f the current class include areas such as Finance, Marketing, Trade, T o u r i s m , Communications, H u m a n Resources, Development, Journalism, Urban L a n d Development, Government and Non-Government organizations. Inquiries for application/information packages should be directed to the A s i a Pacific Management Cooperative Program office, telephone 984-4981, fax 9844992. Admission Requirements A P M C 534 — International Management II Applications for the program are invited from: A P M C 540 — A s i a Pacific Perspectives I a) Those who have completed a degree/degrees in Arts, Sciences or a professional area such as B u s i ness Administration, L a w , Engineering, B i o t e c h n o l ogy, Forestry, or Computer Applications. A P M C 541 — A s i a Pacific Perspectives II OR b) Those who are currently employed and who are eligible for company sponsorship into the program. Sponsorship may come from a wide range o f business and development organizations which have the c o m m o n factor of wanting their employees trained for international work. C H I N 110 — Basic Chinese I C H I N 111 — Basic Chinese II C H I N 202 — Introduction to Chinese III C H I N 203 — Introduction to Chinese I V I N D O 110 — Basic Indonesian I I N D O 111 — Basic Indonesian II J A P N 110 — Basic Japanese I J A P N 111 — Basic Japanese II • • • • • A d m i s s i o n m a x i m u m is 32 students per year. Students are selected on the basis o f their academic record, relevant work and A s i a n experience, a written submission and an interview. A P M C 550 — Cross Cultural C o m m u n i c a t i o n A P M C 560 — Workshops J A P N 280 — Introduction to Japanese V Successful applicants w i l l have strong written, mathematical and interpersonal communication skills. J A P N 281 — Introduction to Japanese V I T H A I 100 — B e g i n n i n g Thai I Applicants who demonstrate proficiency i n language acquisition and who have solid business experience w i l l have preference. T H A I 101 — Beginning T h a i II V I E T 110 — Basic Vietnamese I V I E T 111 — Basic Vietnamese II Applications for A d m i s s i o n , together with offical transcripts for all post-secondary education, must be submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office. Courses A P M C 503 — International Career Management A P M C 505 — C o - o p W o r k T e r m A P M C 515 — Directed Studies A P M C 518 — International Finance I A P M C 519 — Introduction to International Business and Trade A P M C 520 — E c o n o m i c Geography I A P M C 524 — Business Development Project A P M C 525 — International Management I A P M C 531 — International Finance II A P M C 532 — E c o n o m i c Geography II A P M C 533 — International Business and Trade Post-graduate Programs ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE PROGRAM E N V I R O N M E N T A L SCIENCE POST- B A C C A L A U R E A T E D I P L O M A Inquiries for admission and further information should be directed to the Environmental Science program, Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n , 983-7562. Instructional Faculty D . P . B E R N A R D , B . S c . ( U . Alberta), M . S c . ( U B C ) J.D. B O N S E R , B . A . S c , M . A . S c . ( U B C ) , P h . D . (Waterloo) A . D U F F Y , B . A . (Hons.) (Guelph), M . C . S . (Calgary) S. G R O V E S , A . B . (Radcliffe), P h . D . ( U B C ) , C o o r d i n a t o r o f E n v i r o n m e n t a l Science L. H . N I K L , B . S c , M . S c . (SFU), R.P. Bio. R. K . P A I S L E Y , B . S c . ( U B C ) , M . S c . (Washington), J.D. (California), L L . M . (London School of Economics) A . R O J A S , M . A . , Ph.D. (York) G . S E A G E L , B . S c . ( U . London), M . S c . ( U . Alberta) D . F. S H E R A T O N , B . A . S c , P h . D . ( U B C ) , P. E n g . V . M . T R O U P , B . S c . (Hons.) (McMaster), M . S c . Admission Requirements The normal requirement for admission is a degree in a science or engineering discipline. Volunteer or paid work related to environmental issues is also an asset. Successful applicants w i l l have strong written and interpersonal communication skills and w i l l be selected on the basis o f academic record, relevant experience and a personal interview. The m a x i m u m enrolment is 26 full-time students per year. Some opportunities for part-time studies also exist. T o apply for the program, students must submit two application forms: (1) a general College admission form (see " A d m i s s i o n " section in this calendar), and (2) Environmental Science program application form. Forms are available through the Environmental Science office or the Registrar's Office. These applications, together with the official transcripts and other pertinent documents, should be received by the Registrar's Office by M a r c h 31. Program Content FALL TERM E N S C 500 E N S C 502 ( U B C ) , C o o r d i n a t o r o f E n v i r o n m e n t a l Science A . W H I T E H E A D , B.Sc. ( U V i c ) , M.Sc. (UBC), R.P. Bio. E N S C 503 E N S C 507 S. W I L K I N S , B . A . , M . S c . (McMaster) E N S C 508 Laboratory Supervisors and Technicians Applied Ecology Environmental Ethics Environmental L a w Credits 4.5 3 3 Computer Applications in Environmental Science 3 Seminar: Selected Topics i n Environmental Science I 3 16.5 J. E . C A N N I N G , B . S c , Professional Teaching Certificate ( U B C ) , Laboratory Supervisor J. T H O M P S O N , Laboratory Technician SPRING T E R M E N S C 501 Environmental T o x i c o l o g y & S. Y E E , B . S c . ( U B C ) , R . P . B i o . , Laboratory Supervisor E N S C 504 General Information The D i p l o m a program in Environmental Science is intended for students who have already completed a degree in science and who wish to acquire the knowledge and practical skills necessary for dealing with environmental issues and projects in the workplace. This is a full-year program designed to prepare students to accept leadership roles in environmental problem solving through a combination of academic studies and field assignments. Areas o f emphasis include applied ecology, toxicology, project management, environmental assessment, law, and ethics. Completion o f an in-depth assignment i n v o l v i n g work placement or directed studies is also required. Post-graduate 176 Programs E N S C 505 E N S C 506 E N S C 509 Credits Waste Management 4.5 Environmental Planning & Project Management 3 Environmental Impact Assessment 3 L a n d Use Impact & Sustainability 3 Seminar: Selected Topics in Environmental Science II 3 16.5 SUMMER TERM F i e l d School E N S C 510 E N S C 511 Practicum Credits 4.5 45 9 Continuing Education Contact: 984-4901, fax: 983:7545 (Lower Mainland) 892-5322, fax: 892-9274 (Howe Sound) 885-9310, fax: 885-9350 (Sunshine Coast) Program Consultants J. BEREZOWSKY, B.A. (UA); general programs and Contract Services, Squamish campus T. BYRNES, M.A. (UVic); Coordinator, Continuing Education P. FORST, B.Rec.Ed. (UBC); Arts Program, Sechelt Campus G. HOFMANN, B.Ed. (UBC), Cert. TESL/TFSL (Laval Univ.), M.A. (SOAS, Univ. London), Prof. Teaching Cert. (UBC); International Programs L. JEST, M.Ed. (SFU); Director of Continuing Education K. LIND, B.A. (Mus) (UBC); Community Music School R. MOON, M.A. (UBC); general programs, Sechelt Campus R. MORRIS, M.A. (UBC) Film Studies C. RUDY, B.A. (UBC), Prof. Teaching Certificate (UBC); Career Development Programs, Occupational Certificate R. STEC, B.A. (UVic); M.A. (UVic); Eldercollege, International Programs, general programs M. DE JONG WESTMAN, M.Sc. (UBC); Natural History, Educational Tours Support Staff M. KETCHEN, Administrative Assistant B. COOPER, W. DANSIE, G. MITCHELL, B. SOEDER, C. TANG, Program Assistants S. SPIERS, Receptionist L. MULHOLLAND, Publicist Continuing Education The College offers a variety of continuing education courses and programs. There are no prerequisites for admission to non-credit courses but occasionally a certain level of proficiency is recommended for admission. The majority of continuing education offerings are an outgrowth of the College's academic and career/ vocational programs whose faculties contribute to the high level of instructional competence of the programs. Courses and programs are drawn from the areas of arts, music, film and television studies, social sciences, natural sciences, career development, business, computer science, personal development, media, and modern languages. Educational study/travel tours are also available through Continuing Education. Continuing Education courses are not listed in the College Calendar — they are advertised in seasonal calendars distributed throughout the community, and by direct mail. Community Music School The Capilano College Community Music School offers group instruction for students of voice, theory, and a wide variety of instruments. Group music instruction for children includes: Robert Pace Group Piano; Strings for Children; and Kodaly-Orff classes. The Community Music School also offers a Community Choir, a Women's Choir — "Cecilia Ensemble," and vocal instruction classes. Adult instruction on instruments includes piano, violin, guitar and others. Classes are held on campus and in other community locations. Programs are advertised in the local media each May and listed in the Continuing Education calendar published three times yearly. E-mail: cms@capcollege.bc.ca Eldercollege Eldercollege is a year-round educational community, open to men and women, 55 and older. Eldercollege provides learning opportunities for older adults who wish to enrich their lifestyle through selfdirected education and contribute to the social and cultural development of the community. Eldercollege participants design and offer quality educational activities to stimulate interest in learning and to provide a forum for sharing ideas and knowledge with others. Members can lead study groups, serve on the Advisory Board and its committees, and be study group participants. Activities are both planned and operated by members to maintain a high quality offering at a minimum cost. E-mail: eldercollege@capcollege.bc.ca Certified Financial Planner™ Program Developed by the Canadian Institute of Financial Planning (CIFP) specifically for individuals who wish to become qualified professional financial planners, the CFP program covers the full spectrum of financial products, services and strategies. It is offered at Capilano College on the institute's behalf, with the Continuing Education 179 approval of The Financial Planners Standards C o u n c i l of Canada. After completing the program, students with two years' work experience can write the professional proficiency examination in order to receive the C F P certification mark. Film Studies Continuing Education offers a variety o f evening and weekend courses in F i l m Studies, some of w h i c h may be applied to a Certificate i n Professional F i l m Studies. Developed specifically to meet the industry's training needs, the program focuses on three areas identified through consultation with unions, professional organizations and College faculty: • introductory seminars that offer a source o f accessible and reliable information for those considering a future in the f i l m and television industry; • courses in production management, production crafts, directing, cinematography, film, screenwriting, acting and other areas o f interest; • a series o f upgrading workshops for industry professionals. Courses at Capilano College emphasize a "hands-on" approach to the skills needed to succeed in the technical and creative areas o f film, television, video and commercial production. W o r k i n g professionals from the industry teach all courses and workshops. E - m a i l : fitc@capcollege.bc.ca Educational Travel: Natural History, Arts and Languages Continuing Education offers a wide variety o f travel and study opportunities ranging from island-hopping i n the Galapagos to Summer Workshops in France at Paul and Babette Deggan's Centre Estival des Arts. Natural History tours vary from year to year, but may include a wildlife and wine appreciation tour o f the Okanagan i n the fall or a float d o w n the Cheakamus and Squamish rivers to view the annual congregation of bald eagles. Contracts and Educational Partnerships Various employment training and other programs funded through the provincial and federal government may also be developed and administered through this office. Continuing Education works in partnership with other faculties, colleges and community organizations to jointly develop and deliver high-quality training and career development opportunities for the community. Organizations and societies are encouraged to cosponsor their educational activities with Capilano College. The College can provide facilities, program design and administrative services and welcomes the opportunity to foster public understanding on social, business, artistic and technological issues. E - m a i l : partner@capcollege.bc.ca Custom-Designed Programs F r o m time to time, the College offers specific programs designed to meet the needs o f particular groups, industries, governments or agencies. In recent years, these included programs in international tourism management, E n g l i s h language culture, the Chinese Summer School and small business entrepreneurship. Career Assessments Benefit from comprehensive career change assessments. Choose from a complete range o f assessments including: vocational inventories, aptitude tests, achievement tests, personality and emotional inventories, including emotional intelligence, and many others. E - m a i l : assess@capcollege.bc.ca Provincial Rafting Exams A l l commercial river rafting guides are required to be certified and licensed prior to conducting rafting trips on rivers located i n British C o l u m b i a . Certification and licensing are obtained by passing both a written an practical certification examination. E - m a i l : rafting@capcollege.bc.ca The Special Lectures in Science series is new this year. Arts and Language tours also include art appreciation tours to N e w Y o r k with K i f f Holland, and a trip through A n d a l u c i a in Southern Spain with popular Spanish instructor, K i r k Mattson. E - m a i l : edtravel@capcollege.bc.ca International Programs International Programs provide training for Canadians and international students. Programs are available for Canadians to learn cross-cultural communication skills and prepare for overseas placement. International students may enrol in programs that offer short-term Continuing 180 Education E S L and Canadian culture homestay, or E S L combined with career skills training in professional areas such as business administration, computers, tourism and others. E - m a i l : international@capcollege.bc.ca Continuing Education Fee Policies Fees Continuing Education course fees vary from the standard tuition fee and are outlined in Continuing Education calendars and brochures. Refunds Refunds w i l l be given i n full for courses/programs/ workshops cancelled by the College. • Application for withdrawal/refund w i l l not be accepted after the second session o f a course. For workshops o f short duration (up to three consecutive days) withdrawal applications must be received at least one working day before the workshop c o m mences. • • Refunds are subject to a $20 administration charge. Refunds w i l l not be given, under any circumstances, after the end o f a course, program, or workshop. A n y change from the foregoing policy w i l l be clearly stated in the course or workshop description. For further information, telephone 984-4901. • 182 Course Descriptions C o u r s e D e s c r i p t i o n C o d e : O n the right hand side of each course description there is a series o f code letters and numbers, for example: BIOL 105 Environmental Biology (3) (4,3,0) (S) Each course is designated by the department name and course number (e.g. B I O L 105). The number in parentheses following the course designation— i.e. (3) i n the above example—indicates the number o f credits for the course. The second set i n parentheses includes the lecture, lab and other hours for the course. For B I O L 105, for example, there w i l l be 4 lecture hours, 3 lab hours, and no other hours per week. In some courses the department may convert the fourth lecture hour to another scheduled instructional activity. Where this occurs, students w i l l be advised by the course instructor and i n the course outline given out at the beginning o f the term. The third set of parentheses indicates the term i n which the class is usually offered. Example: F — Fall, S — S p r i n g , Su—Summer. B I O L 105 is offered i n the Spring term. Please check the Timetable to confirm the term offered as this may change after the Calendar is printed. The course title (Environmental B i o l o g y ) is indicated on the line below the department name and course number. The nominal length o f a term is 16 weeks. Please see the A c a d e m i c Schedule for the first and last days o f classes and for the dates o f the examination period. ACTP 002 (3) (F) Occupational Preparation and Safety in the Workplace The focus o f this course is to provide students with practical experience i n a work situation including preparation prior to placement and follow-up concluding the practicum. Emphasis w i l l be placed on m a k i n g students aware of and knowledgeable about W H M I S , W C B rules and occupational health and safety. ACTP 005 (3) Visual and Print Communication Skills (F) The focus o f this course is to extend students' awareness, knowledge and understanding of communication skills required for obtaining employment and to improve their ability to communicate effectively using a variety o f media (eg. computer, printed words, signs). Class time is comprised o f discussions, talks, worksheets, field trips, role-plays and hands-on experience. Students w i l l be given instruction i n computer skills. Students w i l l be given opportunities to prepare resumes, cover letters and thank-you letters using the Microsoft W o r d software program. ACTP 006 Leisure Education (3) (F) T o assist students to clarify their leisure interests and values and use their leisure time more constructively. Students w i l l be encouraged to become more aware of their o w n feelings and beliefs about leisure so that future leisure decisions w i l l be by their o w n choice and from their o w n value system. Emphasis w i l l be placed on project work within the community. ACTP 007 Consumer Preparation (3) (F) This course provides students with strategies and opportunities to practice and improve a range o f consumer related skills. F i e l d trips are incorporated in the program. ACTP 001 (3) Job Search and Maintenance Techniques (F) The focus o f this course is to encourage students' needs to develop and use j o b search techniques and appropriate employment behaviours. Students w i l l also be encouraged to practice self-advocacy in terms of their employment needs. A n emphasis w i l l be placed on developing interview skills with confidence. ACTP 008 (3) Interpersonal Communications (F) This course provides students with an opportunity to discuss and develop the skills involved with effectively communicating in a diverse range of interpersonal roles and relationships (friend, neighbour, consumer, citizen). Course Descriptions 185 ACTP 009 Work Experience (6) (F) T o give the student a practical experience i n a work situation including preparation prior to placement and follow-up concluding the practicum. AHIS 100 The History of Art I (3) (4,0,0.) (F) This course studies the history of art beginning with the pyramids o f Egypt and concluding with the Gothic Cathedrals and Italian fresco paintings of the H i g h M i d d l e Ages in Europe. A n understanding and appreciation of art are the aims o f the course, and through lectures and class discussions, students w i l l develop an "eye" for seeing and appropriate terms to describe the works shown. Our involvement with the art o f the past clearly reveals how changing styles i n architecture, painting, and sculpture are influenced by the historical context and the political, social, and religious thought of each period. AHIS 101 The History of Art II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Beginning with the art of the Italian Renaissance, this course studies the history of painting, sculpture, and architecture to the present day. Individual artists including Leonardo, Michelangelo, Rembrandt, G o y a , V a n G o g h and Picasso are studied in addition to the larger period styles. Because works o f art so perfectly reflect their age, the economic, social, and religious ideas o f each period w i l l be closely considered. AHIS 104 (3) Introduction to Visual Culture I (4,0,0) (F) This course is designed to encourage students to become visually literate and confident in the analysis/ interpretation of all aspects o f the visual arts. Confrontation with a wide range of ideas, images and media w i l l stimulate discussion and provide a deeper understanding of the creative process. The purposes of art w i l l be discussed and the relationships between art and society explored. The interdisciplinary nature of art w i l l be examined as well as the achievements of Canadian artists. AHIS 105 (3) Introduction to Visual Culture II (4,0,0) (S) What is the impact of advertising on the viewer? What are the achievements o f women artists? What are the current issues concerning art and censorship? These and other topical subjects relating to the arts w i l l be addressed in this course. Attention w i l l also be given to such themes as magic and ritual i n art, the body i n art, the artist as observer, the landscape i n art and aspects of photography. The material w i l l include the Course 186 Descriptions art of the past as w e l l as the current art scene. C o n s i d eration w i l l also be given to the achievements o f Canadian artists. This course is designed to help students decode their visual world and become visually literate. AHIS 106 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Introduction to Non-Western Art I This course introduces the student to aspects of PreC o l u m b i a n art, Northwest Coast Indian art and African art. The art, architecture and performing arts o f indigenous peoples w i l l be examined i n the context of cultural, religious and social issues. Students w i l l learn about civilizations that flourished in M e x i c o prior to the Spanish Conquest. A section on the art o f the Northwest Coast Indian w i l l illuminate the achievements o f local indigenous cultures and their inherent relationship with the environment. In the component on African art, students w i l l study the early history o f African art and later artistic developments i n a variety of regions ranging from Senegal to Zaire. AHIS 107 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Introduction to Non-Western Art II Explore exotic Indian temples, ancient Chinese burials and Japanese shrines i n this introductory course to A s i a n art. Indian, Chinese and Japanese works of art w i l l be examined in the light o f cultural, religious, social and political issues to emphasize the close connections between art and society. In particular, the impact o f H i n d u i s m , B u d d h i s m and Confucianism on the arts w i l l be examined. Students w i l l gain insights into the evolution o f important periods, styles and artistic traditions i n A s i a n art. Consideration w i l l be given to a wide range o f art forms, including the performing arts and the Japanese tea ceremony. AHIS 109 (3) Women, Art and Art History (4,0.0) This course w i l l present a broad historical survey o f women's involvement in Western art. It w i l l focus on the woman artist in society and consider the social, cultural and economic background o f each period i n order to understand the conditions under w h i c h women artists have worked from Antiquity to the 20th century. The course w i l l also investigate the "image of w o m a n " in the tradition o f art history. Students taking this course cannot receive duplicate credit for W M S T 130. AHIS 210 (3) (4,0,0) (F) History of Modern Art (19th Century) This course studies the mainstreams of modern art beginning with the paintings o f Jacques L o u i s D a v i d produced during the French Revolution and concluding with the art o f Cezanne. Emphasis is given to individual artists, and works by G o y a , Delacroix, Monet, V a n G o g h , Gauguin and others are studied in depth. Aesthetic revolutions and counter-revolutions are explored i n conjunction with the social and political upheavals o f the 19th century. AHIS 211 (3) (4,0,0) (S) History of Modern Art (20th Century) This history o f 20th century art begins with the work of Picasso and Matisse and studies the impact o f revolutionary movements o f art such as Futurism, Constructivism, Dada, and Surrealism. A m e r i c a ' s post war contribution— Abstract Expressionism, Pop, M i n i m a l i s m , Conceptual and Earth A r t — i s studied, leading to a full discussion of Post M o d e r n i s m and the art o f the 90's. The aim o f this course is to demystify modern art by studying the underlying concepts and theories, w h i c h w i l l reveal how closely art expresses the ethos o f contemporary life. AHIS 220 (3) Early Renaissance Art in Italy (4,0,0) (F) This course traces the origins o f the Early Renaissance in Italy, beginning with the art of Giotto and focusing attention on the creators of the new style, the architects, sculptors and painters o f Florence, A r e z z o , Mantua and Venice. The intellectual, religious and political climate of the fifteenth century, linked to the expression i n this new art, w i l l also be considered, as w i l l be the emerging importance o f private patronage. AHIS 221 (3) (4,0,0) (S) High Renaissance and Mannerist Art in Italy This course studies the art o f the H i g h Renaissance and the emerging v i e w o f the artist as sovereign genius. The work o f Leonardo, Michelangelo and Raphael is examined i n depth. Focus is then given to the artists o f the Mannerist School, whose highly subjective and artificial style dominates the latter part o f the 16th century. The contributions o f the Venetians as w e l l as the architecture o f Palladio w i l l also be considered. AHIS 231 History of Textile Art I (3) (4,0,0) (F) This course first studies the textile traditions of the Near East by considering Ancient Egypt and its great linen manufactories, and the silk guilds of the B y z a n tine E m p i r e , as w e l l as tracing the influence o f Sassanian designs. Cotton and the central role it played in the struggle for Indian independence is highlighted as we move further east to consider the evolution o f the Dragon Robes o f C h i n a and the kimonos o f Japan. This study concludes with textile designs and tapestries produced i n M e d i e v a l and Renaissance Europe where the important contributions of such leading artists as Raphael and Rubens are fully considered. AHIS 232 History of Textile Art II (3) (4,0,0) (S) This course first explores the textile traditions o f A f r i c a and the Americas. The textiles of the K u b a o f Zaire, Ancient Andean cloth and Contemporary M a y a n textile designs are examined as important artistic expressions of these cultures. Navaho weaving and the great tradition o f the Chilkat D a n c i n g Blanket o f the Pacific Northwest are studied as examples o f cross cultural expressions. O u r attention then focuses on the effects o f the Industrial Revolution on textile practices and the contributions o f W i l l i a m M o r r i s and the Arts and Crafts Movement. The course concludes with a discussion o f 20th century textiles and explores the work o f some o f the leading contemporary textile artists. ANIM 111 Animation Drawing I (6) (8,0,0) (F) A n introduction to creating animated movement. Basic animation timing skills, animation principles and procedures used to produce character animation w i l l be introduced. ANIM 112 Animation Design I (2.25) (3,0,0) (F) Students w i l l learn design skills as they relate to commercial animation. Strong posing, drawing "on model", and character design w i l l be introduced. Perspective drawing w i l l be reviewed. ANIM 113 (3) Life Drawing For Animation I (4,0,0) (F) This course w i l l demonstrate the importance of life drawing in the creation o f animated movement. Students w i l l learn to accurately draw what they see. H u m a n proportions and the human form i n action w i l l be studied. Q u i c k gesture drawing w i l l be practised intensively to build on the student's ability to create simple line drawings that communicate weight, structure and feeling. ANIM 114 (2.25) History of Character Animation (3,0,0) (F) This course w i l l cover the development o f character animation from W i n s o r M c C a y to the present. E m p h a sis w i l l be on the Disney, Fleischer, Warner Brothers, M G M and U . P . A . studios o f the 1930's and 40's and w i l l include major developments and the work o f important directors. Current trends i n animation w i l l be discussed. Course Descriptions 187 ANIM 121 Animation Drawing II (6) (8,0,0) (S) Students w i l l learn how to animate more complex movement o f more diverse characters. A n i m a t i o n timing is emphasized. Special effects animation w i l l be taught. A c t i n g i n animation and animating to prerecorded dialogue w i l l be introduced. ANIM 122 Animation Design II (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) ANIM 232 Storyboard Design (3) (4,0,0) (F) Students w i l l be taught to create storyboards that communicate film narratives effectively. In this class, students w i l l be expected to design animation sequences to be produced i n the fourth term, eventually becoming a major part o f their demo tape. ANIM 233 (3) Life Drawing For Animation III (4,0.0) (F) Students w i l l gain more practical experience i n the posing o f animation and w i l l work with a wider range of characters. B r i n g i n g out the character's emotions w i l l be practised. In this course, the student w i l l learn to create a full design package for an animated production. Students w i l l continue to improve their life drawing skills while working primarily with sequential studies. The ability to accurately depict emotion and mood, particularly o f the face, eyes and hands w i l l be the main objective o f this course. Practise i n the use o f foreshortening and tone w i l l be included. ANIM 123 (3) Life Drawing for Animation II ANIM 234 Computer Animation (4,0,0) (S) Students w i l l build on the skills learned i n A N I M 113 and they w i l l increase their ability to accurately render the human form i n movement. Structure and anatomy of humans w i l l be emphasized. A n i m a l anatomy and movement w i l l be studied. ANIM 124 Anatomy for Animation (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) This course introduces students to the anatomical design o f the human form. Students w i l l study the bones and muscles as w e l l as the relationships o f bone and muscle o f the human body i n action and at rest. ANIM 126 Layout Design I (1.5) (2.0,0) (S) Students w i l l be introduced to the skills o f animation background design. The animation camera stand and its functions w i l l be demonstrated. Design and composition skills w i l l be introduced and perspective drawing w i l l be developed further i n order to produce complex and detailed layouts. ANIM 231 Animation Drawing III (4.5) (6,0.0) (F) A n i m a t i n g characters that act is the focus o f this course. Dialogue breakdown and animating to dialogue w i l l continue to be emphasized. A n i m a t i o n involving several characters i n the same scene w i l l be covered and students w i l l work with more complex and realistic character designs. (3) (4,0.0) (S) Students w i l l be introduced to computer generated animation. The students w i l l use traditional animation and design skills acquired i n the first two terms o f the program to create quality computer animation using 3D software. This course w i l l provide students with a strong foundation o f computer animation skills enabling them, i f they wish, to begin to focus on a career in computer animation. ANIM 236 Layout Design II (3) (4,0.0) (F) This course w i l l further develop the student's layout design skills, enabling them to produce finished animation layouts o f high quality. Technical skills concerning camera moves w i l l be included and students w i l l work to industry standards. Actual layout tests from major animation studios w i l l be part o f the curriculum. ANIM 241 Animation Drawing IV (3) (4.0.0) (S) This course w i l l focus on the production o f students' demo tapes meant to showcase their animation skills. Students w i l l be focused on "feature-quality" key animation involving a variety o f characters and actions. Character and personality i n animation w i l l be emphasized. ANIM 242 Major Projects (3) (4.0,0) (S) In this course, students w i l l be allowed to concentrate their efforts on a specific career such as layout artist, computer animator, character designer or key animator. W o r k i n g one-on-one with an instructor, students w i l l design and produce their o w n projects i n order to achieve success in their specific fields in the industry. Course Descriptions 188 ANIM 243 (3) Life Drawing For Animation IV (4,0,0) (S) ANTH 202 (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) Anthropology and the Environment Movement and sequential drawing studies w i l l be emphasized. The main objective of this course w i l l be to make use o f the skills and techniques learned in previous life drawing classes to create a diverse range of excellent portfolio pieces tailored to the expectations of the animation industry. The study o f the interaction o f people, culture and environments, emphasizing human adaptive strategies. Focus of the course w i l l vary each semester, exploring such topics as subsistence patterns, systems o f k n o w l edge in traditional cultures, modernization and globalization, and current issues. ANIM 245 Colour And Media ANTH 204 Ethnic Relations (3) (4,0,0) (S) Basic colour theory w i l l be taught using a variety of painting materials and techniques used in the animation industry. Students w i l l learn the specific skills required o f animation background painters and w i l l create finished backgrounds from original layout designs. ANTH 121 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Introduction to Social Anthropology A survey o f social anthropology to include the study of communication, economic systems, kinship and family patterns, social control, political organization, religion, and the arts. A l s o includes understanding the methods and effects o f culture change. Examples o f different cultural practices w i l l be drawn from societies throughout the world. ANTH 123 (3) Introduction to Archaeology (4,0,0) (F or S) A n introduction to the theoretical foundations and methods o f Archaeology, including the techniques used to discover, reconstruct, and interpret the past. Examples w i l l be drawn from archaeological research around the world. ANTH 124 Human Origins (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) A n introduction to the theoretical foundations and evidence for human origins as presented by A r c h a e o l ogy and Physical Anthropology. The biological and cultural evolution o f humankind as indicated through a study o f evolutionary theory, primate behaviour, skeletal remains, and archaeological discoveries. ANTH 200 (3) Intermediate Social Anthropology (4,0,0) (F) A study o f the social structure and organization o f various cultures of the world. Emphasis on the dynamics of culture, the cross-cultural approach, the theoretical issues in Anthropology. (3) (4,0,0) (F) A study o f the relations between ethnic groups. The construction, maintenance and expression o f ethnic boundaries and identities w i l l be examined within a variety o f cultural contexts, including Canada. The course w i l l address the social construction o f difference and w i l l offer perspectives on racial stereotyping, the politics o f representation, the expression o f ethnic popular culture and its wider consumption. Processes, such as de-colonization and globalization w h i c h have been involved in the rise o f ethnic consciousness w i l l be analysed, together with theoretical concepts through w h i c h ethnicity may be comprehended. ANTH 205 Multiculturalism (3) (4,0,0) (S) The course w i l l examine multiculturalism within Canada and utilize comparative material from A u s tralia and N e w Zealand. The creation and impact o f multiculturalism w i l l be addressed from historical and cultural perspectives. The scope w i l l move from broader Canadian issues to looking specifically at British C o l u m b i a n ethnic relations and the changing cultural landscape. ANTH 206 (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) First Nations of British Columbia A study o f the cultural history, diversity, and complexity o f the Native Peoples o f British C o l u m b i a . The archaeological past, traditional lifeways, and current issues are examined. ANTH 208 (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) Indigenous Peoples of North America A survey o f the cultural history and social organization of native peoples o f the North A m e r i c a n continent including Canada, the United States and M e x i c o . A n examination o f traditional lifestyles including family, political, religious and ecological patterns; and current issues. Course Descriptions 189 ANTH 241 (6) Archaeology Field School Prerequisite: (6,0.0) (Su) permission o f the instructor. A course in archaeological methods, techniques and theories dealing with excavation, recovery, analysis and interpretation of archaeological material. This is a practical field course, participants acquiring such skills as mapping, surveying, photography, computer applications, preparation of reports and interpretation. This course usually w i l l be i n cooperation with other colleges as a joint endeavour. ANTH 249 (3) (4,0,0) (Su) Comparative Cultures: A Field Study Prerequisite: permission o f the instructor. A n interdisciplinary course to consider in depth a particular geographic area and its people. Comparative institutions, cultural ecology, contemporary issues, methods o f observation and study. Students and instructor study i n the field. APMC 503 (3.0) (2,0,0) (F)(S) International Career Management This course w i l l help students develop skills and an understanding for networking and working in an A s i a n environment. APMC 505 Co-op Work Term (9) (F.S.Su) This course covers the work expected during the W o r k Term. It has four major modules: 1) M i d - t e r m Conference; 2) International Career Development; 3) Sectoral Focus Groups; 4) N e w s Analysis. Associates w i l l be expected to maintain a high level o f c o m m u n i cation with the program through electronic means. Failure to pass each individual element o f the course w i l l result i n failure o f the co-op term and thus the program. APMC 515 Directed Studies (.25) (0,0,2.5) (S) This two-fold course allows students, through directed research and a written paper, to explore an area of special interest or need. It also includes preparation for the final comprehensive exam. APMC 519 (1.5) (2,0.0) (F) Introduction to International Business and Trade This course provides students with an understanding of the basic concepts involved in marketing products and services, as well as with a familiarity with marketing terminology and the application of the "marketing concept". APMC 520 Economic Geography I (2.25) (3,0,0) (F) This course w i l l introduce students to current concepts in socio-economic analysis and w i l l emphasize the spatial aspects o f economic processes. Emphasis is on the dynamism of economic change and how this change interacts with local social, political and environmental matrices. The course w i l l be issue oriented. There w i l l be a m i x o f theoretical background, actual case studies, and training in analytical skills. APMC 524 (1.5) Business Development Projects (2,0,2) (S) These are supervised team projects working with Vancouver-based companies. Business plans and projects are prepared for A s i a n opportunities chosen i n conjunction with the companies. APMC 525 (2.25) International Management I (3,0,0) (F) This course provides students with a broad understanding o f the management process and functions as w e l l as with the interrelatedness o f these topics with human hehaviour i n organizations. Students also study the application o f this learning i n an international context - particularly with respect to the A s i a Pacific region. APMC 531 International Finance II (2.25) (3,0,0) (S) This course is a continuation o f A P M C 518. APMC 532 Economic Geography II (2.25) (3.0,0) (S) This course is a continuation o f A P M C 520. APMC 533 (1.5) International Business and Trade (2,0,0) (S) This course w i l l focus on case studies. APMC 518 International Finance I (2.25) (3,0,0) (F) This course w i l l aim at providing students with an understanding o f financial concepts and strategies that influence business i n the conduct o f international commerce. Course 190 Descriptions APMC 534 (1.5) International Management II (2.0,0) (S) This course is a continuation of A P M C 525, but places a greater emphasis on guest presentations by senior executives whose companies actually are operating i n the A s i a Pacific region. APMC 540 (5.25) Asia Pacific Perspectives I (7,0,0) (F) This series o f courses is designed to introduce students to the historical and current social, political and cultural patterns o f the A s i a Pacific region. Students w i l l review and develop skills i n cross-cultural c o m munication. They w i l l also develop skills in regional analysis that w i l l help them understand relationships within A s i a and with the West. techniques; principles, practices and conventions o f engineering graphics; descriptive geometry and graphical solution methods to engineering problems; use o f microcomputer based graphics tools. BADM 101 Management (3,0,1) (F,S) (3) This course is a continuation of A P M C 540. Students study modern management practices, current events, ethics and problem solving. In addition, students w i l l study and practice effective business presentations and public speaking. The course instructors w i l l facilitate discussion and integrate topics through the use o f contemporary business issues. APMC 550 (1.5) Cross Cultural Communication BADM 102 Quantitative Methods APMC 541 (3.75) Asia Pacific Perspectives II (4,0,0) (S) (2,0,0) (S) This course w i l l develop an understanding o f the process o f communication, including appreciation of the fact that communication is significantly affected by the culture, personality and experience o f the c o m m u nicator. This course w i l l also develop an understanding of the students' o w n culture and its effects on behavior. APMC 560 Workshops (0) (1,0,0) (F) This course uses guest speakers, videotaped material and field trips to provide students with an orientation to a career as a professional engineer. Attendance at scheduled activities is the only course requirement. Final "grades" are reported as C R (Credit Granted) or N C (No Credit Granted). APSC 121 (1) Society and the Engineer (1,0,0) (S) This course deals with the social context within which engineering is practised. Topics w i l l include the history o f engineering, engineering ethics, professionalism, gender issues, employment equity, environmental issues, multiculturalism. APSC 150 Engineering Graphics (3) (3,0,1) (F,S,Su) Prerequisite: Acceptance into a Business Administration full-time program or a m i n i m u m C + i n M a t h 11 or equivalent. This course provides a strong foundation i n the mathematics o f finance and business. The student w i l l utilize standard financial models i n analysis, problem solving, and decision-making. Computer spreadsheet applications are utilized. (4,0,0) (F) (S) This series allows students to "customize" the program by selecting from a range o f courses which offer an opportunity to develop special skills or to study special issues concerning A s i a . APSC 120 (1) Introduction to Engineering (3) (1,4,0) (F) BADM 103 Supervisory Skills (3.0,1) (3) This is a study of the human elements i n organizations, with emphasis on group behaviour. Concepts include persuasion, guidance and understanding o f the individual within the group. Students w i l l learn applications i n human relations management, i.e. leadership, power, authority, group dynamics, formal and informal organization, c o m m u n i cations, conflict and the introduction o f change. T h i s course is offered at the Sechelt and Squamish campuses only. BADM 106 (3) Organizational Behaviour (3,0.1) (F.S.Su) The objective o f this course is to allow the student to develop the necessary skills and conceptual tools to both understand and deal effectively with human behaviour in organizations. These skills are o f at least two kinds: 1. interpersonal, that is, relating more effectively with other individuals and groups, and 2. analytical, to be able to perceive and understand situations accurately, and make effective decisions based on this understanding. A n introduction to engineering graphics emphasizing the development o f spatial visualization and graphical communication skills; technical sketching and engineering drawing using projection and sectioning Course Descriptions 191 BADM 107 Business Law I (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) Students w i l l be introduced to the components o f the Canadian legal system, and w i l l examine the effect of both common and statute law on business relationships. A study of the basic principles o f commercial law w i l l provide the foundation for a detailed examination of Contract L a w , including the sale o f goods, consumer protection legislation, and employment and labour law, as w e l l as an examination o f tort law, intellectual property, insurance, company and partnership law, and creditor remedies. BADM 108 (3) Introduction to Business (3.0.1) This course w i l l explain the five key tasks in managing an enterprise: Planning, Acquisition of Resources, Organization, Activation and Control. In addition, the key organizational functions o f Marketing, Production, Finance and Personnel are covered. The course is essentially an overview o f the theoretical framework o f the task o f management. This course is currently offered at the Squamish and Sechelt campuses only. BADM 201 Business Systems Prerequisite: C grade. (3) (3,0.1) (F.S.Su) B C P T 121 or C O M P 101 with m i n i m u m Students w i l l be required to apply the concepts and theories learned i n their first year courses to solve integrated business problems i n a logical and literate manner. The importance o f accurate, dependable, management information for problem solving w i l l be illustrated through case study analysis and a major group project. BADM 210 Business Statistics (3) (3,0.1) (F.S) This course provides a strong foundation in basic business statistics emphasizing analysis and decisionmaking i n the face o f certainty and uncertainty. Spreadsheet applications of descriptive, inferential, and bivariate models are utilized. A working knowledge of spreadsheets (Excel) is required. BADM 268 (3) (3.0,1) (F.S) Entrepreneurship/Small Business Management Skills needed in problem solving and researching the small business environment w i l l be learned and applied. Business owners, managers and w o u l d be decision makers are encouraged to take this course. The instructor and guest lecturers from the business community w i l l lead students through detailed aspects Course Descriptions 192 of business from finance to human relations. The production o f the business plan w i l l be discussed and part o f a plan w i l l be written. BADM 299* Co-op Placement I (3) (Su) The first co-op work experience is designed to provide students with a four-month, full-time w o r k term in business, industry or government. The main thrust of this course is the opportunity to put into practise the major aspects o f the students' business education. Special emphasis w i l l be placed on assessing the attitude and work ethic o f the "co-oping" student. Students w i l l be encouraged to network i n the industry and to participate in professional organizations. * B A D M 299 can be accepted as a lower level general business elective in D i p l o m a programs only. BADM 301 (3) Operations Management Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (F.S) B A D M 210 with m i n i m u m C + grade. O f special interest to generalist managers and operators of small businesses, this one term course familiarizes the student with the principles, practices and functions of production-operations management, using modern decision-making aids. Foundation skills i n production and control (inventory, quality and cost control) are examined using computing devices and procedures. BADM 302 (3) Human Resource Management Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (F.S) 45 credits This course provides the student with a basic, functional understanding of current personnel/human resource-management concepts and applications in developing small and larger business. Special emphasis w i l l be placed on the concept o f human resource management being the responsibility o f A L L management, not just the personnel department. BADM 303 Industrial Relations Prerequisite: (3) (3,0,1) (F.Su) 45 credits This course introduces the student to labour unions and their relationship with management. Topics covered include the Labour Code, collective bargaining and dispute resolution. BADM 304 Strategic Management Prequisite: (3) (3.0,1) (S.Su) 75 credits The student gains a basic understanding of the concepts, purposes, and procedures of business policy, and an integrated view o f the strategic management o f business enterprise. Participating i n a practical business simulation game is a major component o f the course. For accelerated, C o - o p D i p l o m a , A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a and Open University students only. BADM 307 (3) Advanced Business Law II (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: Business L a w I, or an introductory college or university course i n commercial or contract law, or by permission o f the instructor. A second law course w i l l examine the effect o f both c o m m o n and statute law on business relationships. A review o f the basic principles o f commercial law w i l l lead to the examination of more complex contractual relationships such as discharge of contract, agency, bailment, real property, commercial tenancy, legal devices for securing credit including mortgages, and bankruptcy. Other topics include competition law, management and operation o f a corporation and intellectual property. This course is available every second year. BADM 310 (3) Quantitative Methods III This course provides the student with a practical understanding of the application and theoretical foundation o f commonly used techniques i n statistical modeling. It includes basic descriptive statistics, inferential statistics, regression and time-series analysis, and other quantitative models such as decisiontrees, multiple regression, and the fundamentals o f linear programming. The student w i l l analyse business situations i n order to develop the appropriate statistical models, and w i l l apply spreadsheet software to develop solutions used i n recommending appropriate management action. Prerequisite: (3) (F.S.Su) Prerequisite: B S C I 032 or Science 10 and E n g l i s h 11 or equivalent or B E N G 031 as co-requisite. Topics include cell structure and function, cell division, evolution, microbe and plant structure and diversity, behavioural ecology, biosphere, ecosystems, human population concerns. Laboratory exercises are i n cluded. Prepares students for many career/vocational programs. BBIO 042 Provincial Level Biology (1) (F.S.Su) Prerequisites: S C I 032 or Science 10 and E n g l i s h 11 or equivalent or B E N G 031 as a co-requisite Topics include cell structure and function, cell division, cell metabolism, photosynthesis, human biology, including reproduction genetics, digestion, circulation, immunity, respiration, excretion, nervous system, hormones. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares students for college level post-secondary programs for which B i o l o g y 12 is a prerequisite. (3,0,1) (F.S) Prerequisite: B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods (Pass), B A D M 210 Business Stats. (C+), B C P T 122 Business C o m p u t i n g II BADM 399 Co-op Placement II BBIO 041 (1) Advanced Level Biology (S) B A D M 299 The second co-op work experience is designed to provide students with a four-month, full-time work term in business, industry or government. The main thrust o f this course is the opportunity to put into practise the major aspects o f the students' business education. Special emphasis w i l l be placed on assessing the attitude and work ethic o f the "co-oping" student. Students w i l l be encouraged to network in the industry and to participate in professional organizations. BCHM 041 (1) Advanced Level Chemistry (F.S.Su) Prerequisites: B M T H 031 or M a t h 10, and B S C I 032 or Science 10 Introduction to atomic theory, periodicity, bonding, naming compounds, mole concept, chemical reactions, gases, solutions. Optional topics include organic chemistry, nuclear chemistry, industrial chemistry. Includes laboratory exercises. Prepares students for college science courses and many career/vocational programs. BCHM 042 (1) Provincial Level Chemistry (F.S.Su) Prerequisite: B C H M 041 or Chemistry 11 Corequisite: B M T H 045 or Math 11 Topics include shapes o f molecules, thermochemistry, rates o f reactions, chemical equilibrium, solubility, acids and bases, oxidation-reduction, electrochemistry. Optional topics include nuclear chemistry, organic chemistry. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares students for college chemistry and technology programs for which Chemistry 12 is a prerequisite. BCMP 031 (1) Introduction to Microcomputers (F.S) A paced, credit course offering an introduction to c o m m o n l y used business software such as word processing, spreadsheets and the Internet. A l s o i n cluded is an introduction to Windows disk and file management. Course Descriptions 193 BCMP 041 (1) Advanced Level Computer Studies (F,S) A paced, graded course offering both an introduction to commonly used business software and essential computer concepts and terminology. Software used includes: word processing, spreadsheets, graphics, W i n d o w s and the Internet. Computer concepts include examination of: processors, storage devices, input/ output devices, computer communications, security, ethics, ergonomics, and purchasing considerations. BCMP 042 (1) Provincial Level Computer Science (S) Prerequisite: B C M P 041 and M a t h 10 or B M T H 031 with a m i n i m u m " B - " standing, or permission of the instructor. A paced, graded course offering an introduction to computer programming. Students w i l l analyse problems, design solutions, develop Q B A S I C programs, test, debug and document the software they write. BCMP 043 (1) Provincial Level Computer Studies Prerequisite: standing. A paced, graded course offering an introduction to fundamentals o f the Internet. Topics include: e-mail, discussion groups, listservs, web search engines, and web page creation. (3,0,1) (F) This is the foundation course for all programming skills developed by the program. Design techniques using hierarchy charts, flowchart, and pseudo code w i l l be studied. The course w i l l use a computer language to demonstrate the structured programming skills necessary for good programming. BCOP 171 (3) (3,0,1) (S) The Developmental Tools of Information Systems A traditional look at the systems life cycle process. M o d e l i n g and charting w i l l be included. The tools and methodology applied by the systems analyst w i l l be studied. The course covers an overview o f the system life cycle, system flow charting, Data F l o w Diagrams, Normalization, Bubble Diagrams, P E R T / C P M Networks. Course 194 Descriptions (3) (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: B C P T 122 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. This course extends the students knowledge of O/S batch fdes to configure the modern P C for best performance. The course also provides more i n depth instruction on graphic presentations and desktop publishing in the W i n d o w s environment. BCOP 205 (3) Applied Statistics for Business (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: Acceptance into the full time Business Computing C o - o p Program or a m i n i m u m C + in M a t h 11 or equivalent. A working knowledge o f W i n d o w s . This course provides a strong foundation i n business statistical models and techniques emphasizing analysis and decision making i n the face o f certainty and uncertainty. Data Analysis software ( S P S S ) is utilized for applications o f descriptive, inferential, bivariate and multiple regression models. (S) B C M P 041 with a m i n i m u m " B - " BCOP 131 (3) Introduction to Programming and Programming Logic BCOP 204 Business Computing III BCOP 206 (3) Accounting for Managers (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: B F I N 141 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. Study o f managerial and financial information requirements and controls necessary to support specific decisions with an emphasis on budgeting, forecasting, controlling and decision making. BCOP 214 Business Computing IV (3) (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: B C O P 204 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. Students w i l l explore advanced database concepts, including automation techniques, using popular Windows-based D B M S software. The following topics are included i n the course: the planning, creation and maintenance o f databases, the development of information retrieval techniques, the design and customization of forms, the creation and use o f macros and modules in an automated system. BCOP 215 Network I (3) (3,0.1) (S) Prerequisite: BCOP 131 and BCOP 204 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. A n introduction to the field o f data communications and networking, covering networking hardware/ operating system concepts, modem, W A N , and L A N standards and protocols, with server installation. BCOP 231 Data Management (3) (3,0.1) (S) Prerequisite: C M P T 182 or B C O P 121 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. The structure, design and control o f hierarchical, network and relational databases. Emphasis is on modeling tools as applied to business case studies. BCOP 240 (3) Computer Hardware and Software (3,0,1) (F) user maintenance, server maintenance, the file system, establishing systems security, and print setup. After the course, the student may write the optional 4.x C N A exam for their Certified N o v e l l Administrator designation. BCOP 326 C + + Level II Prerequisite: (3) (3,0,1) (Su) B C O P 306 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. Prerequisites: B C P T 121 and B C P T 122 or equivalents with a m i n i m u m o f ' C grade. Continuing introduction i n the design and use o f object- T o provide students with an understanding o f P C hardware and troubleshooting and its relationship with D O S and W i n d o w s operating system. The course w i l l be hands-on. Included in the course w i l l be " C o m m a n d line interface" commands and the hardware/software interface with operating systems. BCOP 329 Network IV BCOP 304 Business Computing V (3) (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: B C O P 214 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. Development o f solutions to mission critical business problems using advanced development tools. BCOP 305 Network II (3) (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: B C O P 215 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. A computer industry certified course providing a foundation for the daily tasks o f network administration. Topics include: client setup and maintenance, user maintenance, server maintenance, the file system, establishing systems security, printing set-up, E - m a i l and backup. The successful student may apply their knowledge towards the optional certification exam. BCOP 306 C ++ Level I (3) (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: B C O P 131, C M P T 184, B C O P 214 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. This course is an introduction to programming using the C++ Language. T o p i c s include functions, structures, classes and arrays. This course gives a foundation for B C O P 326. BCOP 325 Network II (3) (3,0,1) (Su) Prerequisite: B C O P 215 or B C O P 305 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. A N o v e l l Certified course providing a foundation for the daily tasks of network administration using Netware 4.x. Topics include: client setup and maintenance, global directory services setup and maintenance, oriented programming principles using C + +. (3) (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisites: B C O P 215 with a ' C grade or better. This course provides the advanced skills to install, configure, optimize, administer and perform the day-today management tasks i n a Microsoft W i n d o w s N T environment. Fault tolerance, NetWare integration and migration, server-based installation and troubleshooting w i l l be introduced together with advanced administration techniques. The student is also introduced to T C P / IP, D H C P , W I N S , D N S , R A S Server, and client administration. BCOP 331 Network V (3) (3,0,1) (F,S,Su) Supporting M S Server 4.0—Enterprise Technologies (MS#689) This course allows networking professionals to support Microsoft W i n d o w s N T in an enterprise environment. Y o u w i l l learn to design, implement and support the W i n d o w s N T Server Network Operating System i n a multi-domain enterprise environment. BCOP 333 Network VI (3) (3,0,1) (Su) Prerequisites: B C O P 215 with a ' C grade or better. This course covers T C P / I P i n a Microsoft W i n d o w s N T environment. It provides students with the knowledge and skills required to set up, configure, use, and support Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol ( T C P / IP) or Microsoft W i n d o w s N T operating system version 4.0. BCOP 335 Network VII (3) (3,0,1) (F,S,Su) Creating and M a n a g i n g a W e b Server using M S IIS 4.0 (MS#936) Learning to install and configure a web server. Y o u w i l l gain an understanding o f the product's architecture and perform the procedures to install, configure and support an Internet Information Server. Course Descriptions 195 BCPT 121 (formerly BSMG 180) (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Business Computing I BENG 040 (1) (F.S.Su) Advanced Level English: Short Report Writing Prerequisite: None Prerequisite: B E N G 031 A n introduction to the use o f microcomputers i n business. This course provides hands-on experience with w o r d processing, data management and graphic user interface software. It also looks at the operating system and its functions. Students w i l l examine the uses o f computers today and the selection process for acquiring hardware and software. A short-report writing course with a vocational/ technical emphasis i n its subject matter and approaches to writing. Students develop the summarizing, notetaking, and outlining skills necessary to organize information from a variety of sources into well-written reports. BCPT 122 (formerly BSMG 222) (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Business Computing II Prerequisite: B C P T 121 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade or O T E C 146 with a m i n i m u m ' B \ or by permission o f the instructor. This course is a continuation o f B C P T 121, providing further uses o f microcomputers in business. Students w i l l receive hands-on experience with spreadsheets and presentation graphics and graphical user interface software. BCPT 221 (3) (3,0.1) (F,S) Business Computing Presentation Graphics Prerequisite: B C P T 122 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade or better This course is an introduction to sophisticated presentation, graphics and desktop publishing software, and related hardware, for the purpose of producing high quality business presentations and advertising materials on a personal computer. BENG 011 (1) Basic Literacy Level English A course i n basic reading and writing. Students focus on the composition o f words and basic sentences. BENG 041 (1) (F.S.Su) Advanced English: Advanced Report Writing Prerequisite: B E N G 031 A n advanced course i n short-report writing. Students develop the summarizing, note-taking, and outlining skills necessary to organize information from a variety of sources into well-written reports. B E N G 041 has a technical/academic emphasis i n its subject matter and approaches to writing and includes introductory work in literary analysis and evaluation for students proceeding to B E N G 042. BENG 042 (1) (F.S.Su) Provincial Level English: Critical Reading and Essay Writing Prerequisite: 7 0 % i n B E N G 041 A Provincial level course i n essay writing. Students study and write a variety o f essays to prepare for written work at the university-transfer level or equivalent i n diploma programs. B E N G 042 has an academic/ literary emphasis i n its subject matter and approaches to writing. BESC 041 (1) (F.S) Advanced Level Earth and Environmental Sciences Prerequisites: B S C I 032 or Science 10 BENG 021 (1) (F.S) Fundamental Level English: Essential Writing Skills, Spelling and Word Attack. BENG 031 (1) (F,S,Su) Intermediate Level English: Mechanics, Basic Skills and Paragraph Writing. A n introduction to the earth sciences, with environmental applications and a British C o l u m b i a emphasis. Areas of study include earth materials, notably minerals, rocks and mining; water, including sources, processes and contamination, and natural earth hazards, such as earthquakes and volcanoes, landslides and flooding. Laboratory investigations and field trips are involved. Prepares students for further courses i n physical and social sciences. A n Intermediate course in writing. M o s t A B E students enter the E n g l i s h program at this level. Students write a series of paragraphs and two longer compositions. BFIN 141 Accounting A n introductory Fundamental course i n reading and i n writing o f sentences and short paragraphs. (3) (3,0.1) (F.S) This course is an introduction to financial concepts and business principles. Students w i l l record business transactions and create financial statements. A l s o they w i l l be exposed to a broad range of topics including legal compliance, asset management and financial statement analysis. Course 196 Descriptions This course is designed to prepare the student for courses i n Managerial Accounting and Financial Management. W e recommend that students with weak math skills take B A D M 102 (Quantitative Methods) before, or at the same time as, B F I N 141. BFIN 142 Financial Accounting I (3) (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: B F I N 141 with at least a C - grade or O T E C 217 with at least a C + grade. Students w i l l apply generally accepted accounting principles to the establishment and maintenance o f accounting systems, including the preparation, analysis and interpretation o f financial statements. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . , and C A . transferable). BFIN 241 Finance for Managers Prerequisite: (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) B F I N 141, B A D M 102 & C M N S 220. In this practical financial management course students study financial management techniques. They apply this knowledge to business decisions. Topics i n this course include: evaluating business performance, financial institutions and markets, valuation o f financial assets, obtaining financing, managing assets and international finance. Contemporary financial issues are discussed throughout this course. BFIN 244 (3) Management Accounting Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (F) B F I N 141 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. This course introduces students to the specialized area of Management Accounting. It provides an overview o f controls affected internally by management using the tools o f budgets, costing and analysis. Planning for an organization w i l l be examined from both the capital and operations perspectives. BFIN 249 (3) (3,0,1) (S) Accounting Microcomputer Applications Prerequisite: B F I N 142 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. Students w i l l complete microcomputer accounting implementation projects using A C C P A C accounting software. They w i l l be expected to demonstrate their understanding o f the practical constraints of internal control in the A C C P A C environment. Systems covered w i l l include general ledger, A / R and A / P (inventory optional). There w i l l be additional costs for printing and disks. Students i n this course should expect to spend approximately $75.00 for materials and group activities. BFIN 341 Cost Accounting I Prerequisite: (3) (3,0.2) (F) B F I N 142 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. A study o f organizational decision making and planning using accounting tools. Topics include the nature of accounting controls, c o m m o n control methods, measures o f management performance, and the role o f the management cost accountant. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . , and C A . Transferable with B F I N 342) BFIN 342 Cost Accounting II Prerequisite: (3) (3,0.1) (S) B F I N 341 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. A more in-depth study o f subjects covered i n Cost Accounting I. Cost determination for manufacturing operations, planning and cost control systems, performance evaluation methods, and strategic decisionmaking methods. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . Transferable with B F I N 341) BFIN 344 (3) Personal Investment Management Prerequisite: (3.0.1) (S) B F I N 241. A central theme of this course is investors using securities to increase personal wealth. This is accomplished by studying such topics as: types of securities, security markets, modern portfolio theory, active asset management, balancing risk and return, and security valuation techniques. BFIN 346 Financial Accounting II Prerequisite: (3) (3.0,1) (F) B F I N 142 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. This course studies the theories underlying financial statement presentations, and is a logical continuation and reinforcement of the material covered i n B F I N 142. The course encompasses the study of Financial Accounting at the intermediate level. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . Transferable with B F I N 347) Transferable to S F U . BFIN 347 Financial Accounting III Prerequisite: (3) (3.0,1) (S) B F I N 346 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. A sequel to B F I N 346 which examines current developments in financial accounting and their effects on financial statement presentation. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . Transferable with B F I N 346) Transferable to S F U . Course Descriptions 197 BFIN 350 (3) Advanced Financial Management (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: B F I N 141 and B F I N 241 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. The content o f this course concentrates on the development o f analytical and conceptual skills for financial decision-making. The course places emphasis on capital asset pricing models, capital budgeting and capital structures. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . Transferable with B F I N 241) BFIN 351 Taxation (3) (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: B F I N 142 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. This course familiarizes the student with the Canadian income tax system as it applies to corporations, shareholders, and unincorporated businesses, so that the student can identify potential tax problem areas, complete the basic compliance forms, and appreciate its impact on some business decisions. (Transferable to C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . ) BIOL 105 Environmental Biology Prerequisite: (S) A study o f the peoples of British C o l u m b i a , their physical environments and the basis o f their economies. Students w i l l learn to assess the adaptation of people to their physical environment and to the natural resources it provides. A prime objective w i l l be to judge the sustainability of British C o l u m b i a communities, their landscapes and resources. 0) (S) A survey o f 20th century history including major issues in present day geopolitics. BIOL 104 Human Biology I Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (F.Su) None This is the first term o f a course designed primarily as a laboratory science elective for non-science students not planning to take further courses in biology. The basic concepts o f human biology and the position o f man as an organism are examined. Major topics include: the evolution o f man, the structure and function o f human cells and tissues, cell division, human genetics, human reproduction, development, digestion, and nutrition. B I O L 104 fulfils the entrance biology requirement for the Nursing program at B C I T . Course Descriptions 198 None BIOL 106 (1.5) Basic Introductory Biology I (2,0,0) (F,Su) B I O L 107 This course is designed for the student who has not received a m i n i m u m o f "C+" standing i n B i o l o g y 12 (or B B I O 042) or who has not taken Chemistry 11 (or B C H M 041). U p o n successful completion o f B I O L 106 and B I O L 107, students are qualified to take B I O L 111. The course topics for B I O L 106 and B I O L 107 together are the same as for B I O L 110. BIOL 107 (3) Basic Introductory Biology II Corequisite: BHST 042 Provincial Level History (4,3,0) (S.Su) This course, designed primarily as a laboratory science elective for non-science students, examines a wide range o f environmental issues from a biological perspective. Basic principles o f ecology are developed and the impact of modern society on the environment is assessed. The overall focus is global; however, the basic ecological principles are developed using primarily British C o l u m b i a n and other Canadian examples. Major environmental issues relevant to Canada are also stressed. Major topics include: ecological concepts, conservation and endangered species, air pollution and global warming, water resources and water pollution. This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit and, together with B I O L 104, as a prerequisite for B I O L 204 and 206. Corequisite: BGEO 042 (1) Advanced Level Geography (3) (4,3,0) (F, Su) B I O L 106 This course is designed for the student who has not received a m i n i m u m of ' C + ' standing i n B i o l o g y 12 (or B B I O 042) or who has not taken Chemistry 11 (or B C H M 041). U p o n successful completion o f B I O L 106 and B I O L 107, students are qualified to take B I O L 111. The course topics for B I O L 106 and B I O L 107 are the same as for B I O L 110. BIOL 110 Introductory Biology I (3) (4.3.0) (F) Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 12 (or B B I O 042) with a m i n i m u m o f "C+" standing and Chemistry 11 (or B C H M 041) or with permission o f the instructor. The standard introductory biology course for students who plan to take further courses in science. Major topics w i l l include biochemistry, the origin o f life, cell structure and function, cell division and introductory genetics. BIOL 111 Introductory Biology II (3) (4,3,0) (S.Su) Prerequisite: B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 110. A continuation o f B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 110 which further develops the discussion o f biological concepts including development, biological systems, evolution and ecology. BIOL 113 Human Biology II (3) (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: B I O L 104 or permission o f the instructor. A continuation o f the study o f human biology c o m menced i n B I O L 104. The course focuses on the anatomy and physiology o f the following organ systems: cardiovascular, respiratory, musculoskeletal, nervous, and urinary. Special emphasis w i l l be given to health and fitness as w e l l as discussion o f disease and treatment. The laboratory sessions w i l l provide c o m plementary practical study of the systems, and introduce techniques used to make physiological evaluations (e.g. heart rate, E K G , blood pressure, urine analysis). Completion o f B I O L 104 and B I O L 113 permits students upon entering Basic Health Sciences at B C I T to receive credit for B H S C 105. BIOL 200 Genetics I (3) (4,0,0) (F) (3) (4.3.0) (F) Prerequisite: B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 110, and 111; or B I O L 104/105. A n introduction to the principles o f ecology with emphasis on ecosystem and community dynamics and structure; ecosystem concepts, components, interrelationships, energy flow and nutrient cycling. Introduction to vegetation analysis in the B . C . context. B o t h plants and animals w i l l be considered but plants w i l l be emphasized. W e e k l y field trips examine local biogeoclimatic zone structure and composition, while a southern B . C . field trip introduces several inland biogeoclimatic zones. This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. BIOL 205 Ecology II (3) (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: B I O L 204. A continuation o f ecological principles, with the introduction and application o f quantitative concepts. The emphasis w i l l be on animal ecology including population dynamics, animal behaviour, competition, predator-prey relationships, and other aspects o f interactions of plant and animal populations. W e e k l y field trips and a three-day field trip to the Pacific R i m National Park area w i l l be included i n the course. This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. Prerequisite: B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 110, and 111; and C H E M 108/109 or 110/111. A n introduction to the principles and mechanisms o f heredity. Emphasis w i l l be placed on an analytical approach to transmission genetics, genetics of humans, introductory molecular genetics, quantitative genetics and population genetics. There is no laboratory for this course. BIOL 201 Genetics II BIOL 204 Ecology I (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: B I O L 200. B I O L 214 and concurrent registration (if not already completed) i n B I O L 215 are recommended. A continuation of the principles and mechanisms of heredity, with emphasis on the genetics o f microorganisms, molecular genetics, genetic engineering and developmental genetics. There is no laboratory for this course. BIOL 206 (3) Ecology of the Western Pacific (4,0.0) (F) Prerequisite: B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 110, and 111; or B I O L 104/105; or G E O G 112/114; or by permission of the B i o l o g y coordinator. This course examines the complex ecology and biogeography o f the lands bordering the western Pacific Ocean. Basic principles o f biogeography and ecology w i l l be presented with reference to the regions concerned. Selected environmental issues and biogeographic characteristics w i l l be discussed for the following regions: the A s i a n M a i n l a n d , with emphasis on Japan and C h i n a ; the M a l a y Peninsula and Indonesia; and Australasia, focusing on Australia, Papua N e w Guinea and N e w Zealand. There is no lab for this course. BIOL 210 (3) Morphology of Vascular Plants (4.3.0) (F) Prerequisite: B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 110, and 111. A comparative study of the vascular plant groups, the pteridophytes, gymnosperms and angiosperms with emphasis on the evolution, morphology, ecology and function o f each of the groups. Discussions o f problems in plant morphology. Course Descriptions 199 BIOL 212 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Invertebrate Zoology Prerequisite: B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 110, and 111. BIOL 220 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Microbiology I Prerequisite: B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 110, and 111; A comparative survey o f the major phyla and classes o f invertebrates with emphasis upon phylogeny, adaptive biology and ecology of each group. The course is designed around the major unifying concept o f evolution. Problems o f contemporary interest in the field o f invertebrate zoology. The laboratory complements the lecture components and the course includes a three-day field trip to the Bamfield M a r i n e Station. C H E M 108/109 or 110/111. (4,3,0) (S) (3) BIOL 213 Vertebrate Zoology Prerequisite: B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 110, and 111. Prerequisite: B I O L 220 A comparative survey o f the major classes of vertebrates, emphasizing evolutionary trends especially i n development and morphology o f organ systems. Adaptive features in vertebrates are considered. The laboratory complements the lecture component with representative vertebrates being examined. The lab component includes several half day field trips. (4,3,0) (F) (3) BIOL 214 Cell Biology Prerequisite: B I O L 106/107 or 108 or 110, and 111. Corequisite: C H E M 200 A comprehensive treatment o f introductory microbiology. The origin, basic structure, growth and metabol i s m o f micro-organisms w i l l be discussed. The lab provides practical experience in standard microbial techniques. BIOL 221 Microbiology II (3) (4,3,0) (S) A continuation o f B I O L 220, emphasizing genetics, immunological aspects, and ecology o f micro-organisms. The role of micro-organisms i n agriculture, various industries, health and sanitation is considered. BMKT 160 Marketing (3) (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: Same as eligibility for E N G L 100, i.e. EDT=100 A n overview o f marketing as applied to computer and related markets and products. Students w i l l participate in class discussions related to product planning, research, promotion and distribution systems. Each student w i l l make a sales presentation. Transfer to U B C requires C H E M 200/201. A n integrated study of the structure and function o f cells and their components. Ultrastructure o f cell organelles as determined by electron microscopy w i l l be related to the molecular functions o f cells. Emphasis w i l l also be placed on the techniques used to study cells, the evolutionary origin of cells and their components, and on comparisons between specialized cell structure and function. The laboratory exercises w i l l use modern methods o f microscopy and separation techniques i n a detailed study of cell structures and their functions. BIOL 215 Biochemistry (3) (4,3,0) (S) BMKT 161 Marketing (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) Prerequisite: Same as eligibility for E N G L 100, ie. EDT=100. This course covers the full spectrum of Canadian marketing o f consumer products and services including: Market segmentation, consumer behaviour, products, packaging, distribution and promotion. Students w i l l analyze case problems and prepare a strategic marketing plan. V i d e o s , guest speakers and in-class discussion about marketing topics w i l l assist in the learning experience. Prerequisite: B I O L 214 Corequisite: C H E M 201 BMKT 163 (3) Small Business Management II A n examination o f the fundamental principles and basic facts o f biochemistry starting with protein structure and enzyme functions. C e l l energetics, biosyntheses and mechanisms which control cell metabolism w i l l also be considered. The laboratory w i l l involve detailed experimental analyses, using the current techniques o f biochemistry, o f the molecular functions o f cells and tissues. This course w i l l allow the student to develop a business plan utilizing workshops in specific areas o f sound business planning. U p o n completion o f this course the student w i l l have a plan ready for submission to financial advisors. Course 200 Descriptions (3,0) (F) This course is available only within the Outdoor Recreation Management Program. BMKT 164 (3) Small Business Management I (3,0,0) (S) A n introduction to marketing, market research and financial record keeping. These foundation topics w i l l provide a base upon w h i c h students w i l l develop knowledge and skills related to operating a business o f their o w n . This course is available only within the Outdoor Recreation Management Program. (3) BMKT 261 Advertising Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (F.S) B M K T 161 This course w i l l examine the Canadian and A m e r i c a n advertising industry from both micro and macro perspectives. It w i l l enable the student to grasp the basic theoretical and practical approaches to advertising and provide an insight into the various aspects o f advertising history, creativity, communication systems, media choice, and other functions. T h i s is not a course on designing, creating, and preparing specific types o f advertising, but is meant to serve as an overview of what advertising is and how it relates to other marketing concepts and operations. Students w i l l participate in an advertising campaign simulation project. BMKT 263 (3) Professional Selling Skills (3,0,1) (F.S) Every business professional starts with an introduction to professional selling. Communication basics, including effective listening, probing, problem finding and solving, and creativity w i l l be covered. Specific techniques o f professional selling including prospecting, qualifying and contracting prospects. The course w i l l also explore, in depth, the organization and management of sales activities. BMKT 360 Marketing Research (3) (3.0,1) (S) Prerequisites: B M K T 161 and B A D M 210. A n introductory course indicating how to make the most out of marketing research. Through the practical applications of a research project, students w i l l learn the elements of research design, basic methods o f collecting data, analysis and reporting. Applications of Canadian and A m e r i c a n research w i l l be studied. BMKT 362 (3) Event Marketing and Management Prerequisite: (3,0,1) B M K T 161 The trend i n business today is to extend marketing dollars into the area of event marketing. T h i s course w i l l introduce students to the skills and concepts necessary to create, finance, and manage a special event. Students w i l l be expected to demonstrate an understanding of how to choose and develop a specific event, demonstrate a knowledge o f specific budget elements and their relationship to revenue generating, develop an understanding of event marketing and understand the administrative structure and skills necessary to manage a special event. BMKT 364 Consumer Behaviour Prerequisite: (3) (3,0,1) (S) B M K T 161, B M K T 360 Today, as never before, studying the behaviour of consumers is paramount for anyone pursuing a business career, especially i n the marketing area. A blend of both concepts and applications from the field of consumer behaviour w i l l form the basis o f this course. Students should find this subject very interesting and motivational when applied to several aspects o f business management including marketing research, creative advertising, team building and environmental marketing. Research projects, case discussions and problem solving w i l l be stressed in both individual and team activities. This course is offered every two years. BMKT 365 (3) (3,0,1) (F) Marketing Strategies and Decisions Prerequisite: B M K T 161 This course w i l l explore in greater depth the concepts of values and lifestyles, product development, service marketing, positioning, strategic planning, tactical promotion, international marketing and marketing notfor-profit organizations. The focus w i l l be on analyzing marketing problems, developing strategic decisionmaking skills and applying "hands-on" tactical solutions for results. Guest lecturers, projects and a computer simulation w i l l be used to enhance the classroom components. BMKT 366 (3) Professional Sales and Management Prerequisite: (3,0,1) B M K T 263 This course w i l l cover two main topics, advanced professional selling techniques and sales force management. Students w i l l develop and practise their selling skills i n class and on a real-life sales project. The tools and systems of sales management w i l l also be explored to prepare the' individual for the human resource factor related to that type of position. Course Descriptions 201 BMKT 367 (3) Promotion Strategy and Analysis Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (F) B M K T 261 This is a course dealing with the development o f an advertising campaign ( C A P - A D S ) . Students w i l l study campaign strategy including how it is planned and organized i n cooperation with the production, marketing, sales and finance departments as well as the use o f outside agencies. Some time w i l l be spent with advertising research as a pre and post control factor. BMTH 021 (1) Fundamental Level Mathematics (F,S,Su) W h o l e numbers, fractions, decimals, ratio and proportion, percent, powers and roots, averages and graphs. This course is designed to prepare students for an Intermediate course in mathematics. BMTH 031 (1) Intermediate Level Mathematics (F,S,Su) Introductory algebra and elementary plane and solid geometry. This course is designed to prepare students for an A d v a n c e d course i n mathematics. BMTH 045 (1) Advanced Level Math — Algebra & Trigonometry Prerequisite: "B-" (F.S.Su) B M T H 031 or equivalent with at least a Review o f real numbers, powers, laws o f exponents; polynomials and rational expressions, factoring, quadratic equations, m a x i m a and m i n i m a ; functions and relations; quadratic functions; transformations o f relations; circle geometry, theorems and proofs; trigonometry, right and oblique triangles, functions o f angles i n standard position. A n A B E A d v a n c e d Certificate course, B M T H 045 is designed to prepare students for a precalculus course. It is the equivalent o f M a t h 11 or M a t h 090/095. BMTH 046 (1) (F.S.Su) Provincial Level Math — Algebra and Trigonometry Prerequisite: "B-" B M T H 045 or equivalent with at least a Solving linear, absolute value, quadratic, and rational inequalities; analyzing, manipulating and graphing functions, approximating the roots of polynomial; graphing rational functions; exponential and logarithmic functions; trigonometric functions, analytic trigonometry; series and sequences; complex numbers; conic sections. A n A B E Provincial Certificate course, B M T H 046 is a precalculus course for students intend- Course 202 Descriptions ing to enrol i n a first year program i n sciences or mathematics. It is the equivalent o f M a t h 12 or M a t h 105. BPHY 041 Advanced Level Physics (1) (F.S.Su) Prerequisites: B M T H 031 or Mathematics 10, and B S C I 032 or Science 10 Corequisite: B M T H 045 Introduces motion, forces, vectors, gravitation, momentum, work, power, energy, electricity, series and parallel circuits, electric fields, rotational motion, light, magnetism, waves, heat. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares students for college courses and many career/vocational programs. BPHY 042 Provincial Level Physics (1) (F.S.Su) Prerequisites: B P H Y 041 or Physics 11 Corequisite: B M T H 045 or M a t h 11 Topics include kinematics, dynamics, vectors, work and energy, circular motion, momentum, rotational motion, equilibrium, electrostatics, circuits and instruments, electromagnetic induction, waves, sound, electromagnetic waves, optics. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares students for college physics and technology programs for which Physics 12 is a prerequisite. BSCI 021 (1) Fundamental Level General Science (F.S.Su) A n introduction to the basic scientific concepts and language o f general science. BSCI 032 (1) Intermediate Level General Science (F.S.Su) Basic scientific principles in biology, chemistry and physics needed to progress to higher level science courses. BSOC 031 (1) Intermediate Level Social Studies A n introduction to the fundamental principles of Economics, Canadian history, government legal system and the development o f analytical and interpretive skills. BSOC 041 (1) Advanced Level Social Studies (F) A study of economic, political, and social issues i n Canada and i n some neighbouring countries. Students w i l l learn basic skills o f social analysis that w i l l enhance their ability to participate in decisions and policies that affect their economic, political and social interests. CHEM 030 (3) Introduction to Chemistry (4,0,0) (F) This course is designed for those students who have had no previous chemistry, and who wish to go on in sciences. A t o m s , molecules, the mole, chemical formulas, ionic and covalent bonding. B a l a n c i n g equations, simple stoichiometry problems, solutions, acids, bases and salts, equilibrium, gas laws. CHEM 101 (3) Fundamentals of Chemistry (4,1.5,0) (F,S) A study o f chemical principles, nomenclature, stoichiometry and solutions, gases, chemical bonding, thermochemistry; an introduction to acids and bases and nuclear chemistry. (3) (4,3,0) (F, S) Prerequisite: C h e m 12 (C+ or greater) and M a t h 12; C h e m 11 ( A ) and M a t h 12 ( A or B ) ; B C H M 042 (C+ or greater) and M a t h 12; or C h e m 101 (C or greater) and M a t h 12. Corequisite: M A T H 105 or 116/117. A course for students who plan careers in science. A brief review of stoichiometry, nomenclature and the gaseous state; atomic structure; periodic trends; chemical bonding and molecular structure; an introduction to organic chemistry; solutions and colligative properties. CHEM 110/111 may be completed by guided self-study format; however, this option is not available in 1999/2000. CHEM 111 (3) (4,3,0) (S.Su) Chemical Dynamics and Energetics Prerequisite: Corequisite: C H E M 108 or 110. M A T H 116/117. Kinetics; equilibrium; acids, bases, salts and buffers; thermodynamics; solubility; redox equations and electrochemistry; recovery of metals from ores. CHEM 110/111 may be completed by guided self-study format; however, this option is not available in 1999/2000. CHEM 200 Organic Chemistry I (3) Prerequisite: (4.3.0) (F) Prerequisite: C H E M 105, 109 or 111. A n y student who has attempted the course previously w i l l not be allowed to register without the instructor's permission. (3) (4.3,0) (S) C H E M 200 Aromatic chemistry, aldehydes, ketones, acids and their derivatives, carbanions; amines; nitro, azo, diazo and related compounds; heterocyclics; carbohydrates, protein chemistry; polymers; natural products. CHEM 204 (3) Introduction to Physical Chemistry Prerequisite: Prerequisite: C h e m 11 or C h e m 12 (C or less) or C H E M 030 or B C H M 041; M a t h 11 required, M a t h 12 preferred. CHEM 110 Bonding and Structure CHEM 201 Organic Chemistry II (4,3,0) (F) C H E M 109 or 111, or C H E M 105 w i t h a " B " standing, M A T H 111 or 126/127. This course is an introduction to chemical thermodynamics and its application to gas behaviour, chemical and phase equilibria, colligative properties, ionic solutions, electrochemistry and chemical kinetics. CHEM 205 (3) (4,3,0) (S) Introduction to Inorganic Chemistry Prerequisite: C H E M 109 or 111, or C H E M 105 w i t h a " B " standing. A n introduction to the properties, bonding, structure and reactivity o f coordination complexes o f the first row elements. M o d e r n spectroscopic methods and chemical kinetics w i l l also be covered. The laboratory component emphasizes the synthesis o f inorganic compounds and the use o f modern analytical instruments. CHEM 206 (3) (4,3.0) (S) Introduction to Analytical Chemistry Prerequisite: C H E M 109 or 111, or C H E M 105 with a " B " standing. The basic principles and techniques o f analytical chemistry, including neutralization, complex-formation and gravimetric reactions. Various types o f chromatography w i l l be introduced along with an introduction to visible and ultraviolet spectroscopy., atomic absorption spectroscopy and electrochemical methods o f analysis. This course is not offered in 1999/2000. CHIN 100 Beginning Chinese I (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) Introduction to M a n d a r i n Chinese using the P i n y i n system o f pronunciation in M a i n l a n d C h i n a . F o r complete beginners (spoken and written) i n Chinese. This course starts with basic tones and pronunciation to prepare students to speak the language. It also teaches basic grammar and the writing o f about 150 Chinese characters. A study o f nomenclature, structure, and spectroscopy of organic molecules; alkanes, alkenes, alkynes, organometallic compounds, alcohols, ethers, alkyl halides; mechanisms and stereochemistry. Course Descriptions 203 CHIN 101 Beginning Chinese II Prerequisite: (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) C H I N 100 or permission o f instructor. CHIN 151 Spoken Mandarin II: (3) (4,1.75,0.) (Su) Prerequisite: C H I N 150 or the equivalent or permission of instructor. C H I N 101 takes students who have learned basic Mandarin phonetics and about 150 Chinese characters. This course stresses conversational skills and listening comprehension using situational dialogues. Students w i l l learn more grammatical structures and Chinese characters. They w i l l also learn how to use a Chinese dictionary as a tool for further study. This conversational course continues with the development o f aural comprehension and oral fluency i n Mandarin for speakers o f other Chinese dialects. Contrasts between M a n d a r i n and other dialects w i l l be made. Perfection o f M a n d a r i n pronunciation "Pinyin" w i l l be stressed. CHIN 102 (1.5) Introduction to Chinese I (3,1,0) (F) CHIN 200 Intermediate Chinese I For Asia Pacific Management students only. program Prerequisite: Cooperative This course introduces A P M C P students to the basics of Mandarin and develop basic communication skills through the study o f vocabulary, grammar, sentence structure and culture. CHIN 103 (3) Introduction to Chinese II For Asia Pacific Management students only. Prerequisite: tor. (3) (4,1.75,0) (Su) C H I N 101 or permission of instructor. This course is for students who know the basics o f Mandarin phonetics and grammar and approximately 600 Chinese characters, or for those who have c o m pleted C H I N 100 and 101. It teaches more Chinese characters, focusing on reading and writing o f simple Chinese texts. Chinese literature is also introduced. (3,1,0) (S) Cooperative program CHIN 201 Intermediate Chinese II Prerequisite: C H I N 102 or permission o f the instruc- (3) (4,1.75,0) (Su) C H I N 200 or permission o f instructor. Continues the work o f C H I N 200. This course is a continuation o f C H I N 102 . CHIN 202 (1.5) Introduction to Chinese III (3,1,0) (F) CHIN 110 Basic Chinese I For Asia Pacific Management students only. program (3) (4,2,0) (F) This course introduces students to the basics o f M a n d a rin. This course is designed to maximize the acquisition of oral fluency and comprehension. The course w i l l lay the foundation for further understanding and study i n an immersion environment. CHIN 111 Basic Chinese II Prerequisite: (3) (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: Completion of one year o f Chinese or instructor's permission. This course is designed to provide A P M C P students with functional Chinese communication skills for daily and job-related circumstances in C h i n a and other Mandarin-speaking countries and regions. CHIN 203 (3) Introduction to Chinese IV C H I N 110 This course is a continuation of Chinese 110. Students w i l develop communicative competence around themes For Asia Pacific Management students only. and situations such as work, family, food, interests, Prerequisite: making appointments, asking for directions, etc. CHIN 150 Spoken Mandarin I (3) (4,1.75,0) (Su) This is a Mandarin conversational course for speakers of other Chinese dialects. Students should have a good command o f Chinese characters and grammar. This course is designed for students to gain fluency i n spoken M a n d a r i n Chinese, particularly in the areas o f aural comprehension and oral fluency. Course 204 Descriptions Cooperative (3,1,0) (S) Cooperative program C H I N 202 or instructor's permission. This course is a continuation o f C H I N 202. CMNS 080 (3) (4,0,0) (Su) Career Program Communications Preparation for ESL Students A i m s at bridging the gap between E S L courses and communications courses required by Career/Vocational programs. The course assignments include letters, memos, proposals and a resume. Emphasis throughout the course is on audience, style, tone and formats appropriate to business writing, with little focus on English mechanics. (3,0,1) (F,S) CMNS 137 (1.5) (4,0,0) (S) Elements of Film and Television Scriptwriting A course i n grammar, spelling, punctuation, and diction. Students also gain experience in proofreading, correcting and revising short written assignments. A n examination o f successful Canadian trends and strategies in scriptwriting as demonstrated by accomplished cinematic artists. Focus w i l l be on understanding effective techniques required to transfer the writer's dramatic concept into a compelling cinematic script. CMNS 110 Standard English Usage CMNS 111 Administrative Writing (3) (3) (3.0,1) (S) Intended for writers who work i n corporate c o m m u n i cations or administration, this course covers the basics of memorandums, internal reports, evaluations, briefs, and proposals. Some attention to online communications, and strong emphasis on developing a clear writing style. CMNS 115 (3) Communications for Animation (3,0.1) (F) (3,0.1) (F) A course emphasizing structure and style i n spoken and written communication, with some review of E n g l i s h basics as w e l l . B y writing and editing short essays, students develop a writing style both concise and precise. CMNS 125 Communication Theory (1.5) Prerequisite: C M N S 137 or the permission o f the instructor. A workshop i n developing a Masterscene script. The focus is on applying concepts and observations from C M N S 137 i n the development of a script for a personal portfolio. Marketing strategies w i l l be discussed. Students w i l l be taught various communications skills necessary for success i n the animation industry. Content w i l l include presentation, writing and research skills, and script writing for animation. CMNS 120 (3) Effective Writing and Speech CMNS 138 (1.5) (4,0,0) (S) Workshop in Film and TV Scriptwriting for Canadian Markets (3.0.1) (F) CMNS 145 (3) Writing for the Worldwide Web W r i t i n g , editing and revising technical information for the computer medium, especially hypertext for W e b sites. Attention to concise style, logical organization and the limitations of the computer screen. CMNS 152 Report Writing (3) reports. R e v i e w o f E n g l i s h basics in the context o f business writing. A survey o f principles influencing interpersonal communication as w e l l as mass media: print, Prerequisite: film, as it applies to digital media. CMNS 130 (3) (3,1,0) (F,S) Introductory Media Communications A n introduction to writing and speaking for M e d i a (3.0.1) (F.S) W r i t i n g for the workplace: letters, memorandums, and CMNS 153 (3) Communications and the Arts video, and audio. Exploration o f communication theory (3,0,1) (F.S) (3,0,1) (S) C M N S 120 or proven E n g l i s h skills. The use of language i n combination with graphic and other arts. Attention to job-search strategies suitable for artists and craftspersons. W r i t i n g assignments include an article on some aspect o f art w h i c h the student w i l l submit for publication. A spoken presentation may be required. Resources students. CMNS 136 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Introduction to Film & TV Scriptwriting in Canada A n application o f proven trends and strategies i n commercial scriptwriting with focus on the transfer o f the writer's concept into cinematic script. The goal is to apply techniques observed in screenings to the development of a Masterscene script intended for portfolio development. Marketing strategies i n the Canadian f i l m , television and new media industries w i l l also be discussed. CMNS 154 (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Communications in Outdoor Recreation and Tourism W r i t i n g and speech related to Outdoor Recreation and Tourism Management: reports, memorandums, press releases, article briefs and proposals. A spoken presentation may be required. CMNS 159 (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) Communications for the Legal Secretary Strong emphasis on E n g l i s h basics (grammar, spelling, punctuation, correct usage), proofreading skills, and business writing. Course Descriptions 205 CMNS 165 Technical Presentations (3) (4,0,0) (F) Communications 165 is intended to foster writing and presentation skills for work in the new media industries. In written work, the focus is on the ability to use correct syntax and appropriate style, to use plain language to express technical concepts, and to master various business formats, including projects for electronic display. Presentation and interpersonal skills are fostered in classroom discussion and in a series of planned presentations. The course encourages students to explore current problems and career trends i n technical and professional writing. CMNS 170 (3) Public Speaking Presentation Skills (0,0,4) (F) The dynamics o f organizing material, overcoming shyness and developing poise as a speaker i n a variety of contexts. Attention to research, voice training, nonverbal communication, and strategies for timing presentations. This course uses the television laboratory whenever possible, enabling students to see themselves on camera, as well as to benefit from feedback from others, as they refine their ability to project, to organize their thoughts, and to address audience needs. CMNS 179 Legal Communications (3) (4,0.0) (S) For students in the L e g a l Assistant program, C M N S 179 emphasizes clear legal usage and style, as w e l l as business writing formats i n law. Some attention as w e l l to the fine points o f English basics. CMNS 190 (3) Magazine Article Writing (3,0,1) (F.S) Researching and writing articles for publication i n news media and magazines. Analysis o f magazine readership, techniques o f researching and interviewing, the current market for articles and development o f an effective prose style. Students w i l l write three articles in suitable format and submit them for publication i n established periodicals. CMNS 220 (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Advanced Business Writing and Editing Prerequisite: Successful completion o f E N G 100. Researching, organizing, writing and editing extensive business documents: reports, proposals, memorandums, press releases. Particular attention to clear style and logical organization. CMNS 250 (3) Introduction to Technical Writing (4,0,0) (S) Technical writing for science, engineering and the professions. Emphasis on definitions, process analysis, writing instructions, resume preparation, and an extended formal report. The course includes examination o f technical reports and study o f the role o f technical writing i n corporate and scientific settings. CMNS 280 (3) Marketing Commercial Fiction (3,0,1) (F.S) Preparing short stories and novels i n commercial genres such as mysteries, romances, thrillers and science fiction. Discussion o f the market for such fiction i n Canada and the U . S . Students w i l l submit three assignments (such as three short stories or a novel synopsis and two chapters) i n marketable form. Students should discuss their plans with the instructor before registering. CMNS 290 (3) Marketing a Non-Fiction Book (3,0,1) (F.S) Planning, organizing, researching and writing a publishable non-fiction book. Survey of potential markets, development o f a detailed outline, and production o f a proposal including a query letter, outline, and sample chapters for submission to an appropriate publisher. Students should discuss their plans with the instructor before registering. CMNS 354 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Advanced Communications for Tourism Management Prerequisites: C M N S 154 or its equivalent, plus computer literacy and Internet access. Intended for students registered i n the Open University T o u r i s m Management degree program, C M N S 354 is aimed at developing advanced skills in written and verbal communications, including technical writing, presentation skills, and information technology applications. CMNS 356 (3) Advanced Media Communications (3,0,1) (S) A continuation o f C M N S 130 with emphasis on interviewing techniques in applied situations. The course also deals with public speaking and group leadership techniques. F o r M e d i a Program Students. CMPT 152 (3) Structured Programming (3,0,1) (S) Introduction to programming logic and program design. This course concentrates on planning, designing and charting programs for business related prob- Course 206 Descriptions lems. The main part o f the course is theory based with some hands-on practical work i n the latter weeks using a modern programming language. CMPT 153 (1.5) Object Oriented Programming I Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (S) C M P T 152 or B C O P 131 with a m i n i - mum ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. A n introduction to object oriented programming using CMPT 222 (3) Microcomputer Applications II (3,0,1) (S) Prerequisite: C M P T 180 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. Provides a basic understanding o f microcomputer concepts, hardware and software selection criteria, and system and application software. Provides hands-on experience with W i n d o w s , spreadsheets, presentation graphics and data base management. V i s u a l Basic in the W i n d o w s environment. CMPT 154 (3) Object Oriented Programming II Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (Su) C M P T 153 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. Continuation of object-oriented programming and design using C + +. CMPT 155 (3) (3,0,1) (S) Quantitative Methods for Managers Prerequisite: Acceptance into the full-time program or permission o f the instructor. A survey o f the basic quantitative tools used to aid decision making. Financial and statistical concepts, methods and applications w i l l be examined. CMPT 180 (3) Microcomputer Applications I (3,0,1) (S) Provides an orientation to microcomputers i n business; including w o r d processing, communicating with operating systems and spreadsheets. CMPT 182 (3) Introduction to Systems and development o f specific skills: form design, coding, flow charting, life-cycle phases and related written communication. CMPT 184 Visual Basic (3) (3,0,1) (Su) Prerequisite: C M P T 152 and C M P T 180 with a m i n i m u m *C" grade or permission o f the instructor. A p p l i c a t i o n o f object oriented visual development techniques to produce W i n d o w s applications. A l s o a foundation o f the W i n d o w s programming tools. (3,0,1) (S) (3,0,1) (Su) Prerequisite: C M P T 222 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. Students w i l l explore advanced database concepts, including automation techniques, using popular Windows-based D B M S software. The f o l l o w i n g topics are included in the course: the planning, creation and maintenance o f databases, the development o f information retrieval techniques, the design and customization of forms, the creation and use of macros and modules i n an automated system. CMPT 224 (3) Microcomputer Applications IV (3,0.1) (F,Su) Prerequisite: C M P T 223 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. This course covers the application o f graphics and desktop publishing development techniques i n the production of presentations in a Windows and web pages environment. A solid foundation i n computer hardware and trouble shooting techniques is also included. (3,0,1) (S) Provides a basic understanding o f systems concepts CMPT 191 (3) Accounting for Managers I CMPT 223 (3) Microcomputer Applications III CMPT 230 Operating Systems (3) (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: C M P T 184, C M P T 223 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. Comprehensive knowledge o f the widely used operating systems: U N I X , M S - D O S and W i n d o w s - N T . Some emphasis on file structures and recovery from hardware/software errors as w e l l as the operating system's Job Control Language and web server installation. CMPT 276 (1.5) (1.5,0,.5)(F) Projects in Industry — Practicum W o r k experience with host companies for the purpose of applying knowledge to complete an industryoriented project. Develops an understanding o f the elements of the accounting cycle. Introduces basic accounting concepts and procedures as a basis for financial decisions. Emphasis w i l l be placed on accounting information, systems and control. Course Descriptions 207 CMPT 289 (3) Systems Implementation (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: C M P T 293 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. A project based course where students implement an on-line computer system applying analysis and design concepts from the System Development Life C y c l e . COMM 290 (3) Quantitative Methods for Business (4,0,0)(F) A study of standard quantitative methods used i n business and industry, including decision theory and basic probability. The study o f computer software packages is included. COMM 291 (4) (6,0,0) (S) Applications of Statistics in Business Prerequisite: C - or better i n C O M M 290 The methods and applications o f statistics i n business; continuous random variables; sampling; estimation o f parameters; hypotheses testing and regression analysis. COMM 292 (4) (6,0,0) (S) Principles of Organizational Behaviour Behaviour i n organizations as it affects people or individuals, their relationships with others, their performance i n groups and their effectiveness at work. COMM 293 Financial Accounting (3) (4,0,0) (F) A n introduction to the construction and interpretation of financial statements and reports including the balance sheet, income statement, statement o f retained earnings and the statement o f change i n financial position. COMM 294 Managerial Accounting Prerequisite: (4) (6,0,0) (S) C - or better in C O M M 293 Introduction to the development and use o f accounting, information for management planning and control and the development o f cost information for financial reports. COMM 297 (3) Capital Markets and Institutions (4,0,0) (S) Introduction to the economic environment i n w h i c h businesses operate including the role o f the B a n k o f Canada. A n a l y s i s of domestic and international money markets and institutions and the basic capital asset valuation models. Course 208 Descriptions COMM 392 Labour Relations (3) (4,0,0) (S) A n introduction to union-management relations which includes the study of trade union history and structure, the collective bargaining process and labour legislation. COMP 101 (3) (3,0,1) (F,S,Su) Computers and their Applications Prerequisite: M a t h 11 with at least a " B " grade, or at least a " C - " grade i n M a t h 095, or permission o f the instructor. N o t e : Although no formal Computing Science prerequisite is listed, students are expected to have reasonable keyboarding skills and to have some familiarity with the use of computers running Microsoft Windows. A n introduction to the basic concepts o f computer hardware and software, operating systems, applications software and programming, and a study of some of the social and ethical implications o f the increasing use o f computers. Students w i l l gain experience with a microcomputer operating system, various software packages including word processor and spreadsheet, and an interpreted programming language environment. Students w i l l be introduced to the Internet, web searching techniques and web page development. The course also includes an introduction to problem solving, algorithm design and computer programming. This course serves as a good science option for students i n Arts or Commerce. COMP 120 (3) (4,0,1.3) (F.S.Su) Introduction to Computer Science Prerequisite: M a t h 12 with at least a " B " O R M A T H 105 with at least a " C - " . Keyboarding skills and familiarity with W i n d o w s environment required. A n introduction to the development of algorithms, computer program design, program implementation and testing. The course also exposes students to the discipline o f computer science. Topics include computer hardware and software, programming languages, representation and manipulation o f data, numerical analysis, programming paradigms, and theory o f communication. COMP 125 (3) (4,0,1.3) (F.S) Fundamentals of Computer Science Prerequisite: C O M P 120 with at least a " C - " grade. A study o f software development, maintenance and documentation. Data abstraction and object-oriented programming are emphasized. Introduction to data structures, sorting and searching algorithms. The course further exposes students to the discipline o f computer science. Topics include software engineering, modelling and simulation, programming paradigms, and theory o f computation. languages, project management, user and system documentation. COMP 127 (3) Principles of Computer Science CRIM 101 (3) Introduction to Criminology (4,0,1.3) (S) Prerequisite: C O M P 120 with at least a " C - " grade. Fundamental computing concepts w i l l be studied through the features o f a functional programming language. Topics include recursion, complexity, abstraction, list processing, models o f computation, object-oriented programming and design, programming paradigms, programming language evaluation and computation, and logic programming. COMP 210 (3) Data Structures and Abstraction (4,0,1.3) (F) Prerequisite: C O M P 125 with at least a " C - " grade O R C O M P 127 with at least a " C - " grade. A study of frequently used data structures and algorithms for manipulating them. This course emphasizes abstract data types and generic abstraction in objectoriented programming. Topics include lists, stacks, queues, sets, tables, trees and graphs, recursion, searching, sorting and analysis o f algorithms. COMP 211 (3) (4,0,1.3) (F) Computer Design and Architecture I Prerequisite: C O M P 125 with at least a " C - " A N D M A T H 116 with at least a " C - " grade A N D M A T H 124 with at least a " C - " grade. A n introduction to some fundamental concepts o f computer design and architecture: data representation and coding, combinational and sequential digital logic, microprocessor operation, memory organizations and addressing schemes, instruction sets, assembly language, and operating system interfaces. COMP 212 (3) (4,0,1.3) (S) Computer Design and Architecture II Prerequisite: C O M P 211 with at least a " C - " grade. A study o f the architecture and organization o f current microprocessor-based computers, relating the instruction set architecture at the programmer's level o f abstraction to the digital logic implementation at the hardware designer's level o f abstraction. COMP 213 (4) (4,0,1.3) (S) Introduction to Software Engineering Prerequisite: C O M P 210 with at least a " C - " grade. A n introduction to the concepts and practice o f software engineering: systems analysis, user interface design, debugging, profiling, and testing methods, operating system interface, support tools and scripting (4,0,0) (F.S) This course is intended to introduce students to the analysis o f the relationship between crime and society. The core concept is that " c r i m e " is embedded i n social structure and process and therefore must be understood in relation to rather than apart from " n o r m a l " social activity. A variety of classical and contemporary perspectives on the definition, causes and consequences o f crime w i l l be explored and student analysis of contemporary issues i n v o l v i n g crime i n Canadian society w i l l be encouraged. CSS. 092 (1.5) Success Strategies for the College Classroom Students registered in this course w i l l be new students to Capilano College who are newcomers to Canada and who have English language skills at the College preparatory level. Through both personal development and study skills, this course w i l l help students to build toward success in their studies at Capilano College. CSS. 100 (3) (4,0.0) (F.S) Academic and Personal Success Strategies This course is co-taught by a learning specialist and a counsellor. Topics include: time management, memory techniques, stress management, reading a textbook with improved retention, test taking tips, note taking strategies, goal setting, communication skills, using College resources, and career exploration. Students may not enrol in CSS. 100 and CSS. 105 concurrently. CSS. 105 (3) College Reading and Study Skills (4.0,0) (F.S) Students learn and adopt methods and attitudes that promote success in college. This course includes: memory techniques, time management, test taking and note taking. The reading component addresses problems college students have with textbook comprehension, vocabulary, critical reading and retaining information from texts. Students may not enrol in CSS. 100 and CSS. 105 concurrently. CSS. 110 Reading Dynamics (3) (4.0,0) (F.S) Participants learn and practice flexible and efficient reading skills. Strategies for increasing speed, improving vocabulary and reading comprehension are also included. Course Descriptions 209 ECON 100 (3) Introduction to Economics (4,0,0) (F.S) This course traces the development of, and conflicting views on, the nature o f the capitalist economic system. It focuses on the historical development o f capitalist society and the divergent interpretations o f the operation o f capitalism as found in the writings of such economists as A d a m Smith, D a v i d Ricardo, K a r l M a r x , J . M . Keynes and M i l t o n Friedman. It deals with contemporary issues and such basic concepts as supply and demand. ECON 111 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Principles of Microeconomic Theory ECON 211 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis Prerequisite: or 116/117. E C O N 111 and 112, M A T H 108 or 110 This course presents an in-depth look at such topics as consumer behaviour, production, exchange, equilibrium o f the firm under different market structures, factor markets, and economic welfare. Not transferable to S F U . (Students registered i n the Commerce program w i l l be given priority.) ECON 212 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis This course presents a study of the theoretical constructs o f consumer behaviour and the operation of business firms in the market economy under conditions o f perfect competition, oligopoly, monopoly and monopolistic competition. Included is the analysis of the firm's equilibrium condition and the determinants o f income distribution. The course presents an in-depth look at such topics as income and employment theory, monetary theory, the open economy, economic fluctuations and growth. Not transferable to S F U . ECON 112 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Principles of Macroeconomic Theory ECON 250 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Economic History of the Pre-lndustrial Era Prerequisite: Prerequisite: instructor. E C O N 111 This course presents the formal Keynesian theory o f income determination and its contemporary critiques. Included is the study of the possible causes and solutions to unemployment and inflation and the importance o f the international economy. Government fiscal and monetary policies are examined in detail. ECON 207 Managerial Economics Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) E C O N 111 and 112. This course is an application o f microeconomics theory to a variety o f management and planning decisions such as output maximization and cost minimization given the constraints faced by firms. ECON 210 Money and Banking Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F) E C O N 111 and 112. This course is designed to facilitate an understanding of financial markets and financial institutions both in Canada and in other major industrial countries. The course w i l l examine current issues i n the regulation o f financial institutions and analyze the factors behind the determination o f exchange and interest rates. Prerequisite: 116/117. E C O N 111 and 112, M a t h 108 or 110 or E C O N 111 and 112. or permission of the This course provides a broad sweep o f economic history from the O l d Stone A g e to the Industrial Revolution. The economics o f the prehistoric era, the R i v e r Civilizations, Classical Antiquity and Europe i n the M i d d l e Ages are studied, while emphasis is placed on the transition from feudalism in Europe to early forms o f capitalism. (Students cannot receive credit for both E C O N 250 and the former 120.) ECON 252 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Economic History of the Industrial Era Prerequisite: instructor. E C O N 111 and 112, or permission o f the T h i s course provides a study o f the Industrial R e v o l u tion and subsequent economic growth in the context o f several countries, including Canada. Contrast is made between the paths o f development o f today's industrial economies and those nations now attempting to industrialize. (Students cannot receive credit for both E C O N 252 and the former 121.) ECON 290 Public Policy I Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) E C O N 111 and 112. The course involves an examination of current government microeconomic policies, including resource management, utility regulation and pricing, international trade, income distribution, taxation, education and health care. Course 210 Descriptions ECON 291 Public Policy II Prerequisite: (3) (4,0.0) (F) E C O N l l 1 and 112. The course involves an examination o f current government macroeconomic policies, including fiscal and monetary policies, debt management policies, international finance and exchange rate management, federal provincial relations, etc. EDUC 155 (4.5) (6,0,0) (F) Human Growth and Development I Course material spans the period from conception through the preschool years and examines physical, cognitive, language, and social-emotional growth and development. A n introductory study of theories, principles o f development, and child study techniques is included. EDUC 166 (2.25) (3,0) (F) Human Growth and Development — Part A A n introductory study o f theories and principles o f development focusing on conception through 24 months. EDUC 167 (2.25) (3,0) (S) Human Growth and Development — Part B Theories, principles o f development and child study techniques focusing on physical, cognitive, language and social-emotional growth and development from 24 through 60 months. EDUC 170 Interpersonal Skills (1.5) (2,0.0) (F) A n introductory course in w h i c h students focus on the development o f self awareness and increased understanding o f others. Students w i l l learn basic c o m m u n i cation concepts and practice skills w h i c h contribute to effective interpersonal relationships. EDUC 171 (1.5) Caring and Learning Environments (2,0,0) (F) This course introduces the student to various programs for young children. The role of the Early C h i l d h o o d Educator, learning environments and the value o f play are examined. EDUC 172 (1.5) Guiding Young Children I (2,0,0) (F) This course develops a theoretical framework o f guidance principles and techniques w h i c h support children's optimal development. EDUC 173 (1.5) Curriculum Development I (2,4,0) (F) Based on the philosophy that play provides the foundation for children's growth and development, this experiential workshop course focuses on learning environments, curriculum planning and teaching strategies. EDUC 175 (1.5) Observing and Recording (2,0,0) (F) A course w h i c h develops skill i n objectively observing and recording the behaviour o f young children. W e e k l y supervised observations form the major part o f the course. Different kinds o f observational techniques are explored. The uses o f teacher observations are examined. EDUC 176 (3) Applied Theory — Practicum I (2,0,6) (F) This introductory practicum is arranged by the College. It provides the student with opportunities to observe young children and, at a beginning level, to plan, implement and evaluate activities under the supervision of a qualified sponsor teacher. W e e k l y seminar discussions help students integrate theory and practice. EDUC 177 (4.5) Observing and Recording (S) (Part-time programs only) The student w i l l develop s k i l l in observing, recording and documenting the behaviour o f young children. Based on observations, the student w i l l begin to interpret behaviours and develop program strategies while participating i n this introductory practicum. EDUC 220 (1.5) Health, Safety and Nutrition (2,0,0) (S) Through the use o f lecture, videos and assignments, the student w i l l be able to recognize the c o m m o n signs and symptoms o f childhood illness and plan health care appropriate to a centre setting, recognizing situations requiring emergency care; understand the role of healthy eating as it relates to normal c h i l d development within the context o f the preschooler's daily life and environment; and follow valid nutrition guidelines for their o w n optimum health. EDUC 254 (3) Theoretical Perspectives (4,0,0) (S) This course provides an introduction to the history and philosophy o f E C C E . Major contemporary issues are examined. International childcare is discussed. Course Descriptions 211 EDUC 262 Special Education (2) (2.5,0,0) (F) Students w i l l develop an awareness o f the early childhood educator's role and responsibility in preparing a safe and healthy environment that meets the needs o f children requiring extra support. The course w i l l examine the history and current perspectives on inclusion and family centred approaches. EDUC 270 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Introduction to Working with Families This course is designed to develop a beginning understanding o f an effective relationship between the Early Childhood Educator and the c h i l d ' s family. C o m m u nity resources w i l l be researched. EDUC 271 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Introduction to Centre Organization A n introductory look at some o f the administrative aspects o f operating a centre for young children. T h i s course assumes a knowledge of curriculum and daily program planning, and identifies necessary functions relating indirectly to children; e.g., handling finances, hiring staff, leadership and management, cleaning and maintenance, policies and procedures, etc. Provincial legislation regulating child care is examined. Steps to opening a centre w i l l also be discussed. EDUC 272 (1.5) Guiding Young Children II (2,0,0) (S) This course w i l l extend the student's repertoire of guidance/teaching techniques. The focus is on responding to the needs o f the individual child, on promoting a positive self concept and on fostering prosocial behaviour. EDUC 273 (1.5) Curriculum Development II (2,4,0) (S) The student w i l l acquire further knowledge, experience hours are required. W o r k i n g with a qualified Early C h i l d h o o d Educator students extend their competencies in program planning and evaluation. W e e k l y seminar discussions focus on integrating theory and practice. EDUC 277 (4) Applied Theory — Practicum III This is, generally, a five-week, full-time practicum. If taken, however, on a part-time basis, the same number of hours are required. In this practicum, students integrate and consolidate knowledge and skills gained throughout the program. The student w i l l be involved in all aspects o f providing quality care and education for young children. EDUC 290 (4.5) EDUC 291 (4) EDUC 292 (4) Directed Independent Studies (F,S,Su) (F.S.Su) (F.S.Su) Directed individual practicums. See coordinator. EDUC 351 (2) Family, School and Community (2.5,0,0) (F) The teacher/family/community partnership w i l l be examined with the focus being on families with infants, toddlers and children who need extra support. EDUC 354 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Program Planning for Special Needs This course w i l l examine strategies for collaborating with parents, adapting programs, implementing individual intervention goals and helping children to communicate with one another. EDUC 356 (1.5) Infant and Toddler Practicum (F) Through work experience in an infant/toddler centre the student learns and practises how to protect, support and enrich the lives o f young children. and skill in planning, implementing and evaluating learning environments for groups o f children. EDUC 275 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Human Growth and Development II This course reviews the major theories o f human development and changes that occur during middle childhood in the areas o f physical, social-emotional and cognitive development. EDUC 276 (4) Applied Theory — Practicum II This is a five-week, full-time practicum. If taken, however, on a part-time basis, the same number o f Course 212 Descriptions EDUC 357 (1.5) Infant and Toddler Practicum (F) This practicum focuses on working with parents and the evaluation o f a quality program. These broader aspects o f group care are central to the provision of quality care for infants and toddlers. EDUC 358 (1.5) Special Needs Practicum (F) Under the guidance of a qualified Special Needs Early Childhood Educator the student practises how to program activities which include children who need extra support. EDUC 359 (1.5) Special Needs Practicum (F) This practicum focuses on working with parents and the evaluation o f a quality program. Students refine their skills o f inclusive programming for groups o f children. ENGL 010 Language Skills (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) A n intensive course in basic language skills to enable the student to meet the demands of an academic college program. Curriculum w i l l evolve from the assessed needs o f the students. This course is not transferable to the universities. A student w i l l receive credit or no credit (not a letter grade) for the course. Certain sections o f E N G L 010 are designed for the needs o f students o f English as a Second Language. ENGL 100 Composition Prerequisite: Test. (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) See information on English Diagnostic A course i n the fundamentals o f good writing, giving students intensive practice i n writing for a variety of purposes, with emphasis on the essay form. Progressively increasing emphasis is given to effective organization and development o f material. Research techniques and documentation are taught. Problems in mechanics o f writing are dealt with individually, in group discussion and by revision of essays. Certain sections o f E N G L 100 are designed for the needs o f students o f English as a second language. ENGL 103 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Studies in Contemporary Literature A study of selected and representative 20th century literature, including poetry, fiction, and drama. W o r k s studied w i l l be chosen for their intrinsic literary merit and may, i n certain sections, also reflect a particular theme o f significance i n the contemporary world. (When material is selected for theme, the issue under consideration w i l l be announced during the registration period.) The chief aim o f the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation o f literature, is to encourage original responses i n w e l l developed oral and written criticism. W h i l e E N G L 100 is not a prerequisite, competence i n essay writing and research is expected. ENGL 104 Fiction (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) A study of selected 20th century short stories and novels o f intrinsic literary merit. The chief aim o f the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation o f literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression i n well-developed oral and written criticism. W h i l e E N G L 100 is not a prerequisite, competence i n essay writing and research is expected. ENGL 105 Poetry (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) A study of selected major and significant minor 20th century poets whose poetry is o f intrinsic literary merit. The chief aim of the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation o f literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression in well-developed oral and written criticism. W h i l e E N G L 100 is not a prerequisite, competence in essay writing and research is expected. ENGL 106 Drama (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) A study o f selected and representative plays primarily of the 20th century. The chief a i m of the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation of literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression i n well-developed oral and written criticism. W h i l e E N G L 100 is not a prerequisite, competence in essay writing and research is expected. ENGL 190 Creative Writing (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) A n intensive workshop course designed to help students develop expressive skill and craftsmanship i n poetry, fiction, and drama. Students must have good compositional skills and are required to write extensively in their chosen genre (approximately 10 hours per week). They w i l l also develop an awareness, through written practice, o f at least one o f the other genres. Students are required to submit their writing regularly for group discussion. Students w i l l be encouraged to develop their work to the point where it w o u l d become acceptable for publication. ENGL 191 Creative Writing (3) (4.0.0) (S) Course Descriptions A continuation of E N G L 190. 213 ENGL 200 (3) English Literature to 1660 (4,0,0) (F) ENGL 208 (3) Studies in Fiction (The Novel) (4,0,0) (F.S) Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year E n g l i s h courses or instructor's written permission. Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A study of texts i n all major genres by representative authors, from the medieval period to the middle 17th century. This course w i l l provide the student with a broad historical and critical frame o f reference, and the opportunity to study selected major works in detail. A study o f the novel from various perspectives which consider the evolution and diversity o f the novel as a literary form. Texts and critical approaches may vary from section to section. The aims o f the course are to give the student an awareness o f the cultural context i n which the novel came into being and became popular, and to study selected texts closely. ENGL 201 (3) English Literature Since 1660 (4,0,0) (S) (4,0,0) (F.S) Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year E n g l i s h courses or instructor's written permission. ENGL 209 Studies in Poetry A course similar to E N G L 200, but covering the later period since 1660. Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. ENGL 202 Canadian Literature Modernism (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Beginnings to Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year E n g l i s h courses or instructor's written permission. A study of texts i n all major genres from the origins o f Canadian literature into the modernist era. This course w i l l investigate various motifs and forms o f writing w h i c h have evolved through early Canadian literature and which continue i n contemporary work. ENGL 203 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Canadian Literature — Modernism and Beyond Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. The continuation of E N G L 202, becoming more intensive i n the investigation of individual, major, contemporary authors o f poetry, novels and plays in Canada . This course w i l l study the emergence o f significant contemporary motifs and approaches to writing. ENGL 205 (3) Modern American Literature (4,0,0) (F.S) Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A course which explores the works o f major representative authors from the late 19th century to the present day. Students w i l l closely examine selected texts as literary achievements and set them within the history o f A m e r i c a n literature and the framework o f A m e r i c a n culture. Course 214 Descriptions (3) A study o f individual poets or schools o f poetry selected by the instructor and drawn from any era between Chaucer's time and the present. Prosody, poetic forms, and critical approaches w i l l be studied, as w e l l as the historical and cultural contexts of the poems and of poetic movements. The aims o f the course are to increase the student's knowledge of the craft o f poetry and to study selected texts closely. ENGL 210 Studies in Drama (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A study o f dramatic literature from various perspectives: the examination of dramatic types from various periods with reference to the history and development of dramatic forms, o f sub-genres o f drama, of techniques i n dramatic literature and performance, and o f the relationship o f literary text to performance. Major plays from various periods and national theatres w i l l be considered. The aim o f the course is to increase the student's knowledge of drama as an art form which has evolved out o f literary and cultural history and out o f performance. ENGL 211 Studies in Short Fiction (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A study o f the development of the short story and novella form, through an exploration of the cultural and literary history i n which the genre developed and through a detailed analysis o f representative texts. Texts and critical approaches may vary from section to section, although examples from both the 19th and 20th centuries w i l l be studied. The aim o f the course is to give the student an understanding o f the development o f the genre in context and of writers o f major significance to the genre. ENGL 212 (3) Traditions in Western Literature (4,0,0) (F.S) Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year E n g l i s h courses or instructor's written permission. A study o f the literary traditions in w h i c h Western literature has developed. The course studies influential works o f literature (often i n translation) from various periods and countries with reference to mythology, religion, and history. Emphasis w i l l be placed on the way i n w h i c h these works have helped to form Western literary convention and a Western construction of history. The aim o f the course is to familiarize the student with these traditions so the student may understand how Western literature has evolved, and to present to the student an objective history o f literary convention against w h i c h to read literature. ENGL 213 (3) Readings in World Literature (4,0,0) (F.S) Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A course i n w o r l d literature beyond the Western tradition. The specific focus w i l l be announced at the time o f registration. ENGL 290 (3) Creative Writing — Poetry (4,0,0) (F.S) Prerequisites: E N G L 190 and 191 or instructor's written permission. A n intensive workshop i n the writing o f poetry, concentrating on furthering the student's knowledge o f current poetic forms while at the same time increasing awareness o f her or his own voice, her or his individual ground for writing, and the development o f her or his own poetic. Students w i l l be expected to read a variety o f contemporary work, both poems and statements that poets have made about their o w n poetics. Students w i l l have the opportunity to try a variety of forms, for instance, the short lyric, the serial poem, narrative verse, prose poetry. ENGL 291 (3) Creative Writing — Fiction (4,0,0) (F.S) Prerequisites: E N G L 190 and 191 or instructor's written permission. A n intensive workshop i n the writing o f fiction. The course w i l l concentrate on furthering the student's knowledge o f the state o f current fiction and give students the opportunity to develop an awareness of voice, rhythm, dialogue, diction, character, and pointof-view. Students w i l l be expected to read a variety o f works o f contemporary fiction and to discuss various techniques. They w i l l have the opportunity o f trying out these techniques i n both short and extended forms o f fiction. ENSC 500 Applied Ecology (4.5) Approaches to applying ecological concepts to the critical analysis o f a variety of environmental issues and problems are examined through discussions, lectures, small group work, written assignments andfield/laboratory investigations. Teams o f students undertake field work in a nearby watershed to completean ecological profile o f the study area. A n i n depth assignment allows each student to focus on an environmental topic o f personal interest. ENSC 501 (4.5) Environmental Toxicology and Waste Management A n applied examination o f the effects o f toxic substances on living organisms with particular focus on the aquatic environment. Tools used to measure adverse effects and to predict harm to organisms are examined. Measurement, monitoring and remediation techniques for environmental contaminants i n air and soil are also examined. The course includes laboratory, field and classroom components. ENSC 502 Environmental Ethics (3) A n examination of environmental ethics, environmental thought and environmental advocacy. Readings, class discussions and individual written assignments w i l l encourage students to explore the moral relationship o f humans to other life forms, nature, ecosystems and future generations. The course w i l l assist students in clarifying their personal ethical positions, identifying ethical issues i n their professional practice, and understanding the history and role of environmental advocacy in the workplace. ENSC 503 Environmental Law (3) This course deals with the law and legal issues associated with the environment. Aspects o f environmental law including jurisdictional issues, courts and the legal system, environmental regulation, environmental litigation and the evolving role o f First Nations are introduced. Skills necessary for legal research, critical analysis, written and verbal presentations and team work are emphasized and applied through student presentations on selected topics. Students w i l l be strongly encouraged to conduct their research and develop their presentations in innovative and imaginative ways. Course Descriptions 215 ENSC 504 (3) Environmental Planning and Project Management ENSC 508 (3) Seminar: Selected Topics in Environmental Science I A n introduction to basic management skills and approaches w h i c h have practical value i n environmental planning and decision-making. Critical thinking, risk management, project planning, proposal preparation, budget management and community involvement in environmental planning w i l l be discussed. This seminar series is designed to provide a forum for discussion between faculty, students and invited guests. Topics w i l l be chosen on the basis of student interest, current environmental issues and the availability of guest speakers. Students w i l l be exposed to a wide range of current environmental topics and associated career opportunities. Skills directed towards identifying, communicating with and organizing presentations by key individuals involved i n environmental issues from a variety o f perspectives w i l l be emphasized. ENSC 505 (3) Environmental Impact Assessment A n examination of the environmental impact assessment ( E I A ) process as a tool i n environmental decision making. This course w i l l review current Canadian federal and provincial procedural requirements as well as local and international applications. Representative field methods, the relationship between E I A and other regulatory processes, integration of E I A and social issues, and the role o f public involvement w i l l also be discussed. Case studies and a field trip w i l l be used as focal points for discussion. ENSC 506 (3) Land Use Impact and Sustainability Introduction to advanced tools for assessing complex ecosystem challenges. Students w i l l use applied systems analysis, simulation modelling, technical workshops, and other tools for tackling issues related to ecosystem sustainability. W o r k i n g as an integrated team, the class w i l l devise recommendations for improving sustainability in a local watershed; results w i l l be presented i n a variety o f formats, including a public forum for local decision-makers and watershed residents. ENSC 507 (3) Computer Applications in Environmental Science A n introduction to the use o f computers for network communication, simulation modelling and geographically-based information storage in environmental science. Students w i l l develop skills i n the use o f spreadsheets for recording and manipulating data, prepare a web page, work with simple simulation models, and learn the basics o f geographic information systems (GIS) with applications to environmental information using P A M A P G I S in the computer lab. ENSC 509 (3) Seminar: Selected Topics in Environmental Science II A continuation o f E N S C 508. ENSC 510 Field School (4.5) Prerequisites: E N S C 509. Successful completion o f E N S C 500 - Practical experience in project development, data collection and analysis, and report preparation. W o r k ing at a site i n the Vancouver area, small teams o f students prepare technical proposals to address specific environmental problems, undertake data collection and analysis in the field and laboratory, and complete formal reports documenting their work and results. Study findings are also presented at a public forum. ENSC 511 Practicum (4.5) Prerequisites: E N S C 509. Successful completion o f E N S C 500 - A n opportunity to apply classroom theory through work experience. This is an in-depth assignment i n v o l v i n g work placement or directed studies with a strong environmental focus in the private, public or non-profit sectors. Students work with the practicum coordinator throughout the year to identify potential practicum opportunities for the summer term. Students sponsored by a specific sector or employer may be able to fulfil this requirement under supervision i n their normal place o f employment. ENSJ 105, 155, 205, 255, (1) 305, 355, 405, 455 Jazz Choir (by audition only) (3,0,*) (F.S) Rehearsal and performance i n one of Capilano C o l lege's Jazz Choirs. The intent o f the class is to build group singing abilities in such areas as phrasing, blending and intonation. *Performances are a mandatory part of the course. Course 216 Descriptions ENSJ 120,170 (1) Guitar/Bass Ensemble I, II (3,0,0) (F.S) Performance i n guitar/bass ensemble for the development of sight reading and phrasing skills. Emphasis w i l l be on single-note reading i n a l l areas o f the neck. Credit from this course is not applicable to the Degree progam. ENSJ 135, 185, 235, 285, (1) (3,0,*) (F.S) 335, 385, 435, 485 Jazz Ensemble I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII (by audition only) Participation i n the Capilano College large Jazz Ensemble for development o f phrasing and sight reading skills. *Performances are a mandatory part o f the course. ENSJ 136, 186, 236, 286, (1) (2,0,*) (F.S) 336, 386, 436, 486 Instrumental Ensemble I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII (by audition only) Students rehearse i n small " l i k e instrument" ensembles under an instructor's supervision i n preparation for a number o f performances. *Performances are a mandatory part o f the course. ENSJ 140, 190, 240, 290, (1) (4,0,*) (F.S) 340, 390, 440, 490 Percussion Ensemble I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIM A n ensemble comprised exclusively of percussion instruments o f both definite and indefinite pitch. Students w i l l develop their sight reading and interpretive skills. *Performances are a mandatory part o f the course. ENSJ 220, 270, 320, 370 (1) Guitar/Bass Ensemble III, IV, V, VI Prerequisite: (3,0,0) (F.S) E N S J 170 or audition A performance ensemble comprised primarily o f bassists and guitarists. Students w i l l develop their sight reading and interpretive skills. ENSJ 306, 356, 406, 456 (1) (2,0,0) (F.S) Jazz Vocal Ensemble (by audition only) This course includes performance o f various styles o f a cappella and accompanied vocal ensemble repertoire with an emphasis on j a z z literature and small group performance, i.e. one singer per part. ENSM 100 Choir Ensemble I (1.0) (4,0,0) (F) A n exploration of choral music from the Renaissance to the present. Emphasis w i l l be placed on ensemble, tuning, tone quality, musical phrasing, balance, diction and professional presentation. A varied concert program w i l l be learned and several performances w i l l be given each semester. A n audition is required. ENSM 110 Orchestra I (1.0) (4,0,0) (F) Rehearsal and performance o f concert repertoire. Prospective students must contact the M u s i c Department at least one week before classes commence to arrange for an audition. Persons winning a position through audition w i l l be allowed to register. ENSM 150 Choir Ensemble II (1.0) (4,0,0) (S) (1.0) (4,0,0) (S) (1.0) (4,0,0) (F) (1.0) (4,0,0) (F) (1.0) (4,0,0) (S) (1.0) (4,0,0) (S) A continuation of E N S M 100. ENSM 160 Orchestra II A continuation of E N S M 110. ENSM 200 Choir Ensemble III A continuation of E N S M 150. ENSM 210 Orchestra III A continuation o f E N S M 160. ENSM 250 Choir Ensemble IV A continuation of E N S M 200. ENSM 260 Orchestra IV A continuation of E N S M 210. ESL. 031 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Lower Intermediate Conversation This course helps students develop the listening and speaking skills required for entry into the Upper Intermediate L e v e l . Course topics include idioms, formal/informal English, oral reports, listening practice, vocabulary and pronunciation. Course Descriptions 217 ESL. 038 (3) Vocabulary and Reading (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) ESL. 058 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Lower Advanced Reading and Vocabulary The focus o f this course is on the development o f basic reading, comprehension and vocabulary skills while learning skimming and scanning, identifying main ideas, using the dictionary, using context clues, and understanding and stating pronoun referents. This course introduces students to reading skills and vocabulary development at the Advanced L e v e l . Stress w i l l be placed on improving comprehension, increasing reading speed, using context clues and making inferences. ESL. 039 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Lower Intermediate Writing and Grammar ESL. 059 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Lower Advanced Grammar and Writing This course prepares students with the grammar and writing skills required for higher level courses such as E S L . 049. This course introduces more complex grammatical structures used in controlled and free paragraph writing. It prepares students for the sentence and writing skills required for E S L . 069. ESL. 041 (3) (4,0.0) (F.S.Su) Upper Intermediate Speaking and Listening This course helps students develop the listening and speaking skills required for entry into the A d v a n c e d L e v e l . Course topics include idioms, impromptu speeches, oral reports, relaxed conversational forms, pronunciation, and listening practice. ESL. 048 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Upper Intermediate Reading and Vocabulary ESL. 061 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Upper Advanced Speaking and Listening This course assists students in developing the listening and speaking skills required for entry into College Preparatory E n g l i s h courses. The focus w i l l be on the comprehension and discussion of academic lecture material, idioms and relaxed speech structures, oral reports, debates, listening improvement, rhythm and intonation. This course is designed to improve students' reading comprehension and vocabulary in preparation for the A d v a n c e d L e v e l . Course topics include identifying main ideas and details, vocabulary development, word families and context clues. This course is only open to students in the Office Assistant program. ESL. 049 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Upper Intermediate Writing and Grammar This course assists students in improving their communications skills up to the level required for w o r k i n g in a business/office environment. ESL. 062 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Advanced Speaking and Listening for Business This course helps students develop the grammar and writing skills required for the A d v a n c e d L e v e l . Stress is on sentence structure, grammar, and short writing assignments. ESL. 051 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Lower Advanced Speaking and Listening This course assists students in developing the listening and speaking skills required for entry into the Upper Advanced L e v e l . The focus w i l l be on idioms, relaxed speech structures, listening to lectures and note taking, oral presentations, rhythm, stress and intonation. ESL. 054 (3) Intermediate Pronunciation (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) In this course students w i l l learn to discover, recognize and use E n g l i s h word stress, sentence stress, intonation patterns, and high frequency vowels and consonants. Course 218 Descriptions *ESL. 066 TOEFL Preparation I (3) (4,0,0) (F,Su) This course helps students improve their T O E F L scores. Students w i l l learn how to enhance their grammar, as w e l l as the listening and reading skills needed for the T O E F L test and other E n g l i s h proficiency tests. * These courses are fully funded by tuition fees paid, and w i l l be offered only i f there are enough students. ESL. 067 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Advanced Reading and Vocabulary for Business This course is only open to students in the Office Assistant program. This course assists students i n developing their vocabulary and reading skills up to the level required for working in a business/office environment. ESL. 068 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Upper Advanced Reading and Vocabulary This course is designed to raise students' reading and vocabulary skills to the level where they can enter College Preparatory English courses. Focus w i l l be on recognizing different types o f writing, organizational patterns, identifying point-of-view and making inferences. ESL. 069 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Upper Advanced Writing and Grammar The emphasis in this course is on composing at the paragraph level. The aim o f this course is to bring E S L students' writing skills up to the level required for College Preparatory E n g l i s h courses. ESL. 071 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) College Preparatory English Level I — Speaking and Listening This course helps students improve their oral and listening skills to prepare them for college studies. Students w i l l practise speaking through oral reports, summarizing, and debates. Through group work, both formal and informal speech patterns w i l l be explored. Vocabulary development w i l l also be stressed as students incorporate new words and expressions i n their speech. ESL. 074 (3) Advanced Pronunciation (3) This course w i l l focus on the paragraph as the standard medium for written communications. It w i l l also introduce students to the essay as the standard medium for academic writing. The course w i l l continue to refine the usage of a l l grammatical structures. ESL. 081 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) College Preparatory English Level II — Speaking and Listening Students w i l l learn to gain confidence i n public speaking and listening to academic lectures. Various rhetorical techniques, such as debating, w i l l be introduced. Through group work and formal presentations, students w i l l have many opportunities to become more effective speakers and listeners. ESL. 088 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) College Preparatory English Level II — Reading and Vocabulary This course continues the development o f reading and vocabulary skills necessary for entry into the University Transfer and Career/Vocational divisions. The stress w i l l be on inferencing skills, context clues and critical reading. Students w i l l w o r k with sample reading texts from various content areas. (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) In this course students w i l l refine E n g l i s h word stress, sentence stress, intonation patterns, sound/spelling patterns, as w e l l as production/recognition o f syllables and word endings. *ESL. 076 TOEFL Preparation II ESL. 079 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) College Preparatory English Level I — Writing and Grammar (4,0,0) (S.Su) A continuation of E S L . 066 * These courses are fully funded by tuition fees paid, and w i l l be offered only i f there are enough students. ESL. 078 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) College Preparatory English Level I — Reading and Vocabulary This course introduces the E S L student to the basic reading and vocabulary skills necessary for entry into the University Transfer and Career/Vocational d i v i sions. Focus w i l l be on reading comprehension at the literary, inferential and critical levels. Course material w i l l include sample texts from various content areas. ESL. 089 (3) (4,0.0) (F.S.Su) College Preparatory English Level II — Writing & Grammar This course assists students i n achieving proficiency in writing essays at pre-college and pre-university level with a m i n i m u m o f E S L errors. Students w i l l develop strategies for a variety o f essay requirements for college and university courses. ESL 098 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) College Preparatory III — Reading and Vocabulary The primary aim of this course is to provide E S L students with the necessary reading skills for entry into the University Transfer and Career/V ocational d i v i sions. The focus of this course w i l l be on academic reading strategies, determining an author's tone/point of view and critical reading. Sample readings from various content areas w i l l be used. Course Descriptions 219 ESL. 099 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) College Preparatory English Level III — Writing & Grammar This course refines students' awareness o f the strategies for a variety o f essay structures required for college and university courses. The course w i l l also focus on sequencing o f ideas, essay organization skills, summarizing, paraphrasing, critical reading, evaluating sources and preparing a 1,000-word processed research paper. ESLF020 (15) (20,0,0) (F.S) Upper Beginner Intensive Course This intensive, 20-hour-per-week course provides students with basic language skills to the L o w e r Intermediate level. It includes reading (paragraphs, forms, materials from daily life), vocabulary building (word parts, using a dictionary), grammar (accurate and meaningful use o f structures), writing (at the sentence level), listening (comprehending simple questions, statements, commands and expressions of courtesy), speaking (basic communicative exchanges), and pronunciation (vowels, consonants, stress). ESLF030 (15) (20.0.0) (F.S) Lower Intermediate Intensive Course This intensive 20-hour-per-week course provides students with basic language skills to the Upper Intermediate level. It includes reading (skimming and scanning, predicting, drawing conclusions), vocabulary building (word structure, synonyms and antonyms), grammar (accurate and appropriate use o f structures), writing (simple sentences), listening (learned elements in standard content areas), speaking (initiating and responding to simple statements, handling a variety o f task-oriented and social situations), and p r o n u n c i a t i o n (word stress, sentence stress and rhythm, intonation). level. It includes reading (improving comprehension, improving speed, using context clues), vocabulary building, grammar (form and appropriate use), writing (controlled and free paragraph writing), listening (lectures, note taking, understanding details of discussions on a variety o f topics), speaking (idioms, relaxed speech structures, group discussions), and pronunciation (rhythm, stress and intonation). ESLF060 (15) (20,0.0) (F.S) Upper Advanced Intensive Course This intensive 20-hour-per-week course provides students with advanced language skills to the College Preparatory L e v e l 1. It includes reading (relating reading to o w n knowledge, determining accuracy o f information), vocabulary building (expanding vocabulary recognition skills, context clue knowledge, making inferences), grammar (accurate and appropriate use of structures), writing (complex sentences, narrative/ descriptive paragraphs), listening (lectures, note taking, oral presentations), speaking (handling complicated tasks and social situations, discussions, narration techniques, debates), and pronunciation (pause fillers, rate of speech, improving diction). FREN 100 Beginning French I (3) (4,1.75.0) (F) F R E N 100 is for absolute beginners and those who do not have Grade 11 French or the equivalent. It provides an intensive introduction to the French language, enhanced by computer practice, and an introduction to francophone culture. It aims to develop profiency i n all areas o f communication: listening, reading, speaking, and writing. FREN 101 Beginning French II Prerequisite: (3) (4,1.75.0) (S) F R E N 100. ESLF040 (15) (20,0.0) (F.S) Upper Intermediate Intensive Course This course, together with F R E N 100, covers high This intensive 20-hour-per-week course provides students with basic language skills to the L o w e r A d v a n c e d level. It includes reading (skimming and scanning, predicting, drawing conclusions), vocabulary building (word structure, synonyms and antonyms), grammar (meaningful and appropriate use o f structures), writing (compound sentences), listening (discussions on a variety o f topics), speaking (general conversations, social situations, levels of speech), and pronunciation (vowels, consonants, word stress and rhythm). student for F R E N 120. ESLF050 (15) (20,0.0) (F.S) Lower Advanced Intensive Course This intensive 20-hour-per-week course provides students with language skills to the Upper A d v a n c e d Course 220 Descriptions school French Grades 8, 9, 10 and 11 and prepares the FREN 120 (3) University Preparatory French I (4.1.75.0) (F) Prerequisite: F R E N 100/101 or French 11 or permission o f the instructor. F R E N 120 together with F R E N 121 constitutes Grade 12 French. The comprehensive approach to this course consists of instruction in basic grammar and the development o f students' speaking, understanding and writing skills. Computer practice is included as is learning about francophone culture. FREN 121 (3) University Preparatory French II (4,1.75,0) (S) Prerequisite: FREN 120 (minimum Grade C-) or permission of the instructor. FSCI 101 Fish Culture I (3) This course, together with FREN 120, constitutes Grade 12 French. A continuation of FREN 120, this course is designed to give a limited fluency in speaking and reading as well as writing skills. An introduction to the theory and techniques used in the fresh water culture of salmon and trout. Course content covers collection, incubation and rearing of salmonids. The major emphasis is on hatchery production of salmonids for commercial aquaculture and enhancement purposes. FREN 170 (3) First Year University French I FSCI 102 Fish Culture II (4,1.75,0) (F) Prerequisite: Grade 12 French, FREN 120/121 or permission of the instructor. FREN 170 should be taken by all students intending to proceed to a major or honours program at another institution. It continues the linguistic development of the student by means of grammar revision, weekly written and oral exercises, compositions and appreciation of francophone literature. FREN 171 (3) First Year University French II (4,1.75,0) (S) Prerequisite: FREN 170 (minimum Grade C-) or permission of the instructor. A continuation of the work done in FREN 170. FREN 270 (3) Second Year University French I (4,1.75,0) (F) Prerequisite: FREN 170/171 with a grade of "C" or better, or permission of the instructor. This advanced course is an introduction to a variety of fiction and non-fiction texts (short stories and poems) by francophone authors. It offers a review of French grammar aimed at developing writing skills through practice in composition, translation and exercises. Videos and music will enhance students' awareness of francophone culture. FREN 271 (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) Second Year University French II Prerequisite: FREN 270 with a grade of "C" or better, or permission of the instructor. A continuation of the work of FREN 270. FSCI 100 (3) Introduction to Salmonid Biology Identification (adults and juveniles), external and internal structures and their functions, life cycles and reproduction, osmoregulation, food organisms, water quality requirements, habitat, ecological role. Emphasis on practical applications in the field. (3) A continuation of FSCI 101. This course examines the intensive culture of salmonids reared in the marine environment. Content includes an introduction to the marine environment, smolt transport, salt water adaptation, cage culture and harvesting and processing. FSCI 103 Water Quality (3) An introduction to water quality with respect to intensive salmonid culture. Course content examines water quality parameters that impact on fish production and methods for measuring these parameters. FSCI 105 (3) Salmonid Nutrition, Feeding and Growth An introductory course in the applied aspects of salmonid nutrition. Course content includes nutritional requirements of cultured salmonids, feed formulation and manufacture, feeding methods and strategies, biology of growth and growth estimation. FSCI 106 Fish Health (3) An introduction to the science of fish health. This course examines the pathogens that frequently infect cultured salmonids. Course content examines the various groups of pathogens and methods used to prevent, minimize the impact or treat these pathogens. FSCI 120 Computers in Fisheries (3) Introduction to Windows environment; basics of word processing, spreadsheet and data management programs using an integrated package such as Microsoft Office. FSCI 140 Field Practicum I (3) Practicums involve the student working for two 10-day periods at a fish culture facility. The student will be involved in the daily activities of these facilities working with fish culture staff. Course Descriptions 221 FSCI 141 Field Practicum II (3) Practicums involve the student working for two 10-day periods at a fish culture facility. The student w i l l be involved i n the daily activities o f these facilities working with fish culture staff. FSCI 150 (3) Streamkeepers I (Introduction to Watershed Stewardship) Basic techniques for watershed mapping; stream survey; identification o f impacts; assessments o f stream condition based on physical characteristics, water quality and invertebrates. Introduction to stream and riparian restoration. The emphasis is on urban stream environments and the methods to assess and develop management and rehabilitation strategies. FSCI 190 Fisheries Techniques I A techniques course that introduces the student to methods and procedures used i n the field to evaluate aquatic habitat and rearing salmonid populations. Topics include planning and procedures using current Resource Inventory Committee ( R I C ) standards; juvenile fish trapping; enhancement methods; recording and reporting data. Emphasis on practical applications in the field. FSCI 191 Fisheries Techniques II (3) A techniques course that introduces the student to methods and procedures used in the field to evaluate adult salmonid populations i n freshwater habitats. Topics include: adult enumeration and capture methods including tagging methods; spawning assessment and production potential; enhancement methods; recording and reporting data. Emphasis on practical applications in the field. FSCI 192 (3) Aquatic Habitat Rehabilitation Review o f fish habitat requirements; installation of boulder weirs; large woody debris, fry cover, spawning gravel, off-channel habitat, etc.; restoration methods for machine accessible and for remote locations; safety considerations; timing o f work; preparation of proposals; permitting process. FSCI 200 Biology of Salmonids (3) This course is designed to introduce the students to the biology of the fish species found i n the subfamily Salmoninae (Salmon, Trout and Charr). Course content w i l l deal with evolution, identification, life history, ecology, basic anatomy and physiology o f these animals. Course 222 Descriptions FSCI 210 (3) Intensive Salmonid Culture This course is designed to introduce the student to the art and science o f intensive salmonid culture. Course content deals with the theory and current techniques utilized i n modern salmonid culture. Students are exposed to practices currently used by governmental agencies for enhancement of salmon stocks as w e l l as practices used in the commercial aquaculture industry. GEOG 100 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Human Geography: People, Places and Cultures Different cultures i n different landscapes are compared and contrasted to our own. This course examines the many issues o f human population, perception o f the environment, diffusion o f ideas, and cultural aspects o f resource use and urban growth, to give students a view into the many concerns on the human side of geography. GEOG 101 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Environmental Geography: Perception and Change There are numerous environmental issues that reach a crisis from time to time. This course examines how we perceive the environment, our lifestyles, and how our attitudes affect the environment. Such issues include our use o f water, the food we eat, herbicides and pesticides, and our overall use o f energy. T h i s is an excellent course for those concerned about the world we live i n . Lectures, seminars, informal discussions, and audiovisual materials are used to make students aware of, examine and analyze some of the most serious concerns i n the world today. The environment is i n jeopardy from our actions — what can we do about it? GEOG 102 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Environmental Geography: Global Concerns The focus o f this environmental course is the recognition that environmental issues are not restricted to isolated regions; rather, they have become global crises. A c i d rain, the greenhouse effect, depletion of the world's resources are but a few of the examples illustrating the global scale o f our environmental problems. Identifying and understanding the processes responsible for the problems are most important; however, finding solutions is also critical to this course. GEOG 106 (3) (4,0,0) (F) British Columbia: A Regional Analysis A body o f information that is frequently missing from our education is that o f the province i n which we live. This course informs y o u about B . C . — its physical environment, the risks o f l i v i n g i n this province, the variety o f peoples, and the economics involved i n its resources. F r o m an economic, political, historical, and cultural perspective one learns that contemporary problems are frequently a function o f the past. F o r those interested i n business, teaching, or wanting a basic knowledge o f B . C . , this is an excellent course. Note: This course also serves as Canadian Studies credit to SFU and is a component of the Professional Development Program for teachers. GEOG 108 (3) Canada: A Nation of Regions Note: This course carries Canadian Studies credit to SFU and is a component of the Professional Development Program for teachers. GEOG 112 (3) (4,2,0) (F,S) Introduction to Earth Environments A n introductory, physical geography course about the earth's various land forms. Plate tectonics, volcanism, weathering and erosion w i l l be explained in order to understand how a landscape develops. Studies o f glacial, coastal and fluvial features w i l l be placed in a Canadian context. Environmental changes due to human activities w i l l also be emphasized. Note: Both GEOG 112 and 114 are lab science courses and fulfil university science requirements. GEOG 112 can be taken either prior to, or after, GEOG 114. It is not recommended that they be taken concurrently. (3) A n examination o f the concepts and themes of economic geography in terms of production and consumption. The traditional primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary divisions in economic geography are reviewed i n terms of contemporary issues. The purpose of this course is to illustrate the importance of economic processes and tools to understand our environment. (4,0,0) (F,S) The understanding o f Canada and Canadians is becoming more and more important to our economic and social well being. This course examines Canadian problems and issues in terms o f the different regions in Canada. Topics include the changing economy, cultural diversity, urban growth, and resource management, as we focus on the Maritimes, Quebec, Ontario, the Western provinces, and the Northern frontier. GEOG 114 Weather and Climate GEOG 200 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Technology and Economic Environments (4,2,0) (F,S) A n introductory, physical geography course about our atmosphere. Principles o f meteorology and climatology w i l l be explained i n order to understand the weather we experience daily and seasonally. Further studies w i l l examine how the atmosphere is connected with the w o r l d ' s oceans and plant communities, and how humans are modifying these natural environments. Emphasis w i l l be placed on Canadian examples. Note: Both GEOG 114 and 112 are lab science courses and fulfil university science requirements. GEOG 114 can be taken prior to, or after, GEOG 112. It is not recommended that they be taken concurrently. GEOG 201 Urban Studies (3) (4,0,0) (S) M o r e and more o f us are living in an urban world. This course is designed to examine problems and issues that arise with urban l i v i n g ; including psychological problems, the cost o f housing, transportation issues, slums, suburban l i v i n g , and the future direction o f cities. W h i l e this course uses local examples, it also draws on examples from other cities in the world. This course approaches these topics through field trips into the city, slides, films, and field research. Urban studies leads to careers i n urban planning, real estate, land management, architecture, and urban politics as well as giving general community awareness. GEOG 202 Urban Field Studies (1.5) (2,0,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: Permission o f the instructor. Prerequisite or Corequisite: G E O G 201 The course is designed to engage students in the practical application o f urban planning. U s i n g principles from urban geography and urban planning, students w i l l become acquainted with the development of an Offical C o m m u n i t y Plan, while working in partnership with planners from the local district planning office. The course involves field study work and attendance at district public meetings. This is an excellent course for those interested i n urban and/or regional planning or those intending to continue i n Geography. GEOG 205 Asia Pacific Geography (3) (4.0.0) (S) This course examines the A s i a Pacific in terms of its social, economic, physical, historical and political geography. The emphasis is placed on the historical development and present day relationships in both East and Southeast A s i a . This course introduces the concept of the Pacific Century and recognizes British C o l u m bia's position on the Pacific. This is an excellent course for those interested in the past, present and future of the A s i a Pacific region and especially for those considering a business career i n this region. Course Descriptions 223 GEOG 214 (3) Our Atmospheric Environment (4.2,0) (S) GEOL 111 Historical Geology (3) (4,2,0) (S) G E O G 114 or permission o f the instruc- Prerequisite: G E O L 110 or equivalent; or G E O G 112 with instructor recommendation. This course w i l l provide an intermediate understanding o f the processes at work in our atmospheric environment. Broad topics to be covered are atmospheric energy, moisture, and winds. These concepts w i l l be applied to phenomena such as urban climates and air pollution at the small scale, weather and forecasting at the intermediate scale, and climate change, ozone depletion, and E l Nino/Southern Oscillation on a global scale. This course w i l l involve lectures, labs, and field work. This course examines the methods geologists use to deduce the origin, age and evolution o f Earth and its life. These methods are then used to investigate how Earth's lithosphere, hydrosphere and atmosphere evolved before giving rise to life, and how ever since, life has interacted with land, water and air. Next, the origin and growth o f our "home" continent and adjacent ocean basins are studied. Finally, the processes and events that shaped (and are still shaping) our immediate environment are looked at i n more detail. Uses and abuses o f Earth resources and environments since the arrival o f human beings also form part o f the course. Prerequisite: tor. GEOG 221 (3) Map and Airphoto Interpretation Prerequisite: (4,2,0) (S) A t least one other Geography course. This is a second year course that is essential for those intending to make Geography their academic major. It is also appropriate for those considering careers i n environmental studies, forestry, geology, archaeology, history and other disciplines that rely extensively on maps and air photos. This course uses lectures, labs and field work to cover the basic principles of map and photo interpretation, surveying and satellite imaging. Both human and physical landscapes w i l l be analysed. Students w i l l undertake a research project on a L o w e r M a i n l a n d neighbourhood. The project w i l l involve archival research, census data analysis and field studies. It w i l l examine how this information can be displayed through the use o f various mapping techniques. GEOL 110 Physical Geology (3) (4,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: None. However, experience in secondary level chemistry and physics w i l l contribute greatly to mastering physical geology. This course views the Earth as a heat engine which continuously recycles air, water and solid earth materials. It examines how nature's recycling o f these materials results i n both the origin and the eventual transformation o f igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic rocks. Next, it investigates how lithospheric plates interact with each other and with external recycling (atmospheric and hydrospheric cycles). Finally it considers ways people may best adapt to these ever-changing Earth environments and act as stewards o f Earth's environments and resources. Course 224 Descriptions This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. GERM 100 Beginning German I (3) (4,1.75,0) (F.S) A comprehensive introduction to the German language: comprehension and speaking are reinforced through reading, writing and computer programs. F i l m s , tapes, activities, etc. help develop an awareness of the cultures o f the German-speaking countries. GERM 101 Beginning German II (3) (4.1.75.0) (S) Prerequisite: G E R M 100 ( m i n i m u m Grade C ) , German 9 or 10, Beginner's German 11, or the equivalent with written permission o f the instructor. This course is a continuation o f G E R M 100 and must be taken i n order to realize first year level college/ university German. G E R M 101 should be taken, whenever possible, i n the term following G E R M 100. GERM 200 Intermediate German I (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) Prerequisite: G E R M 101 ( m i n i m u m Grade C+), Grade 11 or 12 German or the equivalent with written permission o f the instructor. Placement tests are available. G E R M 200 reviews basic German grammar and usage, and introduces students to modern German literature. It aims through the discussion o f the cultures and concerns o f the German-speaking peoples to increase the ability to communicate in the fullest sense o f the term. GERM 201 Intermediate German II (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) Prerequisite: G E R M 200 (minimum Grade C ) , German 12 (or its equivalent with written permission o f the instructor.) Placement tests are available. Continues the review and development o f German language skills at the Intermediate level. Together with G E R M 200 it completes the requirements for second year college/university German. GRPH 140 Infotec — Graphics I (1.5) (3.0.0) (F) Enhancement o f visual literacy through the development of generic graphics skills and abilities. Students develop a critical awareness o f different presentation formats, learn to make an effective visual analysis, and develop facility i n solving graphic problems within the computer environment. The focus is on the graphical aspects in the design o f the user interface and the production o f effective b/w graphics for the design of an interactive multimedia project. GRPH 141 Infotec — Graphics II (1.5) (1.5) (3.0,0) (S) In addition to layout for print publication, students extend graphic exploration to focus on "time" as a design element in interactive multimedia. Sequential presentations are coupled with the basic rules learned from G R P H 140 and 141. Students learn to produce graphics for use with M a c r o m i n d Director. GRPH 143 (.75) Infotec - Advanced Graphics IV (3.0,0) (Su) Graphics production requires a combination o f technological and aesthetic skills. Augmenting the graphics design skills developed so far, the student is introduced to advanced graphics production techniques and tools in this workshop-based course. GRPH 152 Life Drawing I (3) GRPH 154 General Drawing I (3) (4,0,0) (F) A n introduction to representational drawing, mediums and techniques. D r a w i n g as an expression o f observation and perception of visual aspects o f environment and visual thinking. Study of graphic means o f representing objects, structure, planes, volumes, space and surface characteristics. Learning to perceive, isolate and select visual elements for descriptive rendering in pencil and charcoal. GRPH 155 (3) Mediums and Techniques I (4,3,0) (F) A n introduction to basic painting and illustration techniques. F i e l d location drawing and wash studies using watercolour, pencil, coloured pencil, ink and combinations of the above. D e v e l o p i n g location studies into more controlled, finished classroom works. (3.0.0) (F) Further investigation of basic graphic skills introduced in G R P H 140, Graphics I. In addition, students learn to produce graphics for interactive multimedia using colour, objects and paths. Introduction to layout for print publication. GRPH 142 Infotec - Graphics III and charcoal techniques. Contour, cross-contour, gesture and volume drawings from draped and undraped models. (4,0,0) (F) GRPH 156 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Principles of Visual Communications I Introduction o f various graphic design styles, their historic significance, the social environments in w h i c h these styles were conceived and technical innovations which designers used to advance modern graphic design. Application o f selected styles to practical, contemporary assignments with techniques o f conceptualizing and layout composition demonstrated in a lecture form. Introduction o f basic photography darkroom techniques (b/w print processing and the photogram). Students are introduced to various c o m munication problems and solve these problems with specified b/w mediums. GRPH 157 (3) (4,3,0) (S) Principles of Visual Communications II Prerequisite: G R P H 156 with at least a " C " grade. The further study o f graphic design styles and designers such as A r t Deco, Post M o d e r n , Swiss and N e w Y o r k design movements are examined. Introduction to basic 3 5 m m camera operations, basic b/w f i l m processing, print enlarging and photo applications. Students are given specific problems to solve utilizing photography and various mediums. Drawing from observation o f the human figure; exercises i n developing visual perception, memory and basic drawing skills. Study o f the proportions o f the human body. L i n e characteristics in pencil, pen, conte Course Descriptions 225 GRPH 158 Design I (3) (4,3,0) (F) Introduction to design elements and application to design projects which solve communication problems. A l l the beginning design exercises use black and white only. Assignments are produced using conventional drawing/inking tools. C o l o u r studies involving the production o f colour charts w i l l be given with appropriate design projects, i n colour. The ability to verbally explain concepts w i l l be stressed throughout the semester. A n emphasis towards actual work situations w i l l be stressed. Graphic design business procedures w i l l be explained throughout the semester. GRPH 159 (3) Mediums and Techniques II Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) G R P H 155 with at least a " C " grade. A continuation with further drawing analysis techniques. Consideration and use o f various mediums as they relate to specific subjects from location studies and classroom development o f same. GRPH 164 General Drawing II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: G R P H 154 with at least a " C " grade. Exploration of drawing with emphasis on expressive and interpretive approaches. Developing themes and drawings aimed at illustration, for both reproduction and individual expression. Stylization, distortion and caricaturization are explored in relation to the study o f line, mass, value and contrast. Various pen and ink drawing techniques are explored. Emphasis on initiative i n researching, investigating and exploring drawing theories, schools and techniques. GRPH 170 Studio Production I (3) (4,3.0) (S) A n introduction to the basic concepts of computer hardware and software. Students w i l l gain experience with the operating system and programs for desktop publishing. T h i s is an ideal first course for students with little or no computer experience and serves as the basis for future courses in electronic composition, computer illustration, typography and pre-press. (3) GRPH 178 Design II (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: G R P H 158 with at least a " C " grade. A continuation with more sophisticated design, composition and colour applications. Assignments are produced using conventional drawing/inking/painting tools. A d v a n c e d design concepts are explained using various visual methods (videos — blackboard — paper — Macintosh computer using A d o b e Illustrator/ Course 226 Descriptions Photoshop software — film, etc.). The class w i l l move toward actual design/communication problems and business procedures and verbal skills in presentation w i l l be stressed. GRPH 184 Life Drawing II Prerequisite: (3) (4.0,0) (S) G R P H 152 with at least a " C " grade. Further study o f drawing from direct observation o f the human figure. Exercises in perceiving and interpreting plane, mass, rhythm and form as they relate to perceptual elements o f drawing media. Investigation o f more complex drawing techniques and materials; drawing from memory and imaginative reflection of visual experience. GRPH 231 Typography I (3) (4,3,0) (F) Historical origins o f the alphabet, numerals and letter forms. Proportion and spacing. Lettering indication in pencil, brush, chalks and felt markers. Comprehensive lettering indication and reproduction art to improve craftsmanship and drawing skills. GRPH 232 Graphic Design I (3) (4,0,0) (F) A n introduction to the pragmatic, formal, and contextual issues involved in the creation o f visual messages. A n emphasis is placed on the development o f a philosophical and practical foundation for critical, creative thinking as applied to visual problem solving. The grammar and the elements o f visual language are explored in relation to perception, semiotics, and psycholinguistics. Students gain experience using both traditional and desktop publishing methods. GRPH 233 (3) Drawing for Illustration I (4,0,0) (F) The purpose is to develop the students' awareness and capacity to perceive objects correctly and the skills necessary to draw with quality and creativity. Introduces the students to skills that must be developed i f they are to visually communicate consciously and effectively. Basic drawing and wash media w i l l be used. GRPH 234 Applied Design I (3) (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: G R P H 178 with at least a " C " grade. A n introduction to visual communication and the role of professional advertising, art directors and graphic designers. Design principles and layout techniques, with emphasis on concept and comprehensive finish using basic marker rendering skills. GRPH 235 (3) Painting for Illustration I (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: GRPH 159 with at least a "C" grade. This course offers expanded skills in perception, visualization and continued practice in control of various painting media. It gives the student the opportunity to develop similar styles to the old masters as well as experiment with his/her own drawing and painting. GRPH 236 Computer Applications (3) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: GRPH 170 with at least a "C" grade. Introduction of computer software programs for the application of electronic composition and imaging. Students will use an advanced page layout program and drawing program. GRPH 237 Life Drawing III (3) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: GRPH 184, Life Drawing II, with at least a "C" grade. Develop advanced drawing and painting skills in rendering and graphically interpreting the human figure from direct observation. Provide greater understanding and enhanched abilities in figure illustration relevant to a career in a professional market. GRPH 241 Typography II (3) (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: GRPH 231 with at least a "C" grade. This course expands upon the major role typography has on advertising layouts and graphic design. Construction of various styles of letter forms in pencil, felt marker and brush will be studied. Basic application of typography in advertising and graphic design using computers will be investigated. GRPH 242 Graphic Design II (3) (4.0,0) (F) Prerequisite: GRPH 232 with at least a "C" grade. Further development of understanding and application of visual problem solving methods as related to graphic design; students explore ideas and concepts which precede the making of design. An emphasis is placed on application of typography and photography as major components of visual messages. Further exploration of the applications of computer technology in contemporary graphic design. GRPH 243 (3) Drawing for Illustration II (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: GRPH 233 with at least a "C" grade. The students play an advanced role in the choices of reference materials, mediums and techniques used. The skilful and imaginative use of illustrative methods is stressed using lighting, negative shapes, depth, abstractions for emphasis, perspective and correct perception. Uses of drawing and wash mediums will be expanded. As well, the student will be expected to become familiar with current uses of illustration. GRPH 244 Applied Design II (3) (4.3,0) (S) Prerequisite: GRPH 234 with at least a "C" grade. A continuation relating to presentation of ideas at a professional level representing real advertising agency and client situations. Making rough layouts and finished comprehensives of ideas that are evaluated against established client criteria. GRPH 245 (3) Painting for Illustration II (4,0.0) (S) Prerequisite: GRPH 235 with at least a "C" grade. The student's personal style of drawing and painting is pursued to a much finer degree. Structured tutorials in the use of various mediums and student/instructor criticisms of work-in-progress are emphasized. Experimentation in both style and medium is encouraged. GRPH 246 (3) Visual Communications III (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: GRPH 236 with at least a "C" grade. In this course students are introduced to colour photography applications and basic artificial lighting techniques. Students must solve communication problems using the 35mm camera and colour transparencies. Art direction and conceptualization for assignments is stressed. Students are introduced to digital photography and computer photo imaging. GRPH 352 (3) Three Dimensional Graphic Design (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: GRPH 232 and GRPH 234 with at least a "C" grade. An introduction into the procedures involved in the design of small retail environments such as boutiques and service shops in shopping centres and malls. Point of purchase design is introduced and model-building techniques are studied as well as the use of colour in merchandising and display. Course Descriptions 227 GRPH 353 Illustration Media I Prerequisite: a " C " grade. (3) (4,2,0) (F) G R P H 243 and G R P H 245 with at least A continuation o f drawing skills needed to explore the mediums necessary for illustration. The course develops through stages from pencil, pen and ink, ink and wash, watercolours and eel v i n y l . The use of the illustrator's tools and processes such as repellents, air brush, mixed media, etc., are reviewed. GRPH 354 Applied Design III Prerequisite: a " C " grade. (3) (4,3,0) (F) G R P H 242 and G R P H 244 with at least The application of design and rendering skills to the development of solutions to print advertising. Explores companies, products, services, corporate identification and their relationship to print advertising layouts and tight comps prepared for class critiques. Comprehensives are developed with the computer as well as traditional approaches. GRPH 355 (3) Advertising Illustration I Prerequisite: a " C " grade. (4,2,0) (F) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: G R P H 353 with at least a " C " grade. Further developing finished illustrations for advertising, books, magazines, etc. A n expansion o f the uses o f mediums to include mixed media while concept is stressed as an emphasis on self-expression and relevant professional solutions. GRPH 364 Applied Design IV Prerequisite: (3) (4,2.0) (S) G R P H 354 with at least a " C " grade. The interrelationship o f illustration, photography and graphic design into advertising, packaging and point o f purchase with extensive consultation on student portfolios and the needs o f advertising agencies and graphic design studios. GRPH 365 (3) Advertising Illustration II Prerequisite: (4,1.0) (S) G R P H 355 with at least a " C " grade. Further exploration o f advertising illustration techniques with the emphasis on actual studio and advertising agency working methods. A bridge between the G R P H 243 and G R P H 245 with at least GRPH 356 Studio Production II (3) (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: G R P H 236 with at least a " C " grade. Familiarization with various print processes and prepress operations including preparation o f art, photos, typography, halftone screening, colour separations, image stripping, assembly and proofing; paper and its effect upon printing. Includes the use of Macintosh computers for digital pre-press production. GRPH 361 (3) Advanced Typographic Design (4,1,0) (S) Prerequisite: G R P H 241 with at least a " C " grade. Assignments demonstrate visual concept and economy of thought i n advanced graphic forms, with emphasis on typography as a medium and message o f design. Advanced application o f the grid to facilitate the integration o f both typography and visuals, underscored by sound use o f conceptual thinking. 228 (3) educational experience and working in the field. A comprehensive study o f contemporary advertising illustration styles, techniques and materials with projects developed from original concept to final presentation. Emphasis on working with an art director with attention to specifications, deadlines and professionalism. Course GRPH 363 Illustration Media II Descriptions GRPH 366 Business of Design (3) (4.0,0) (S) H o w to establish and operate a free-lance design/ illustration business. Emphasis is upon client relations, suppliers contact, estimating, project management, taxation and accounting practices and industry ethics. The designer's role in an advertising agency, design studio and production or printing facility w i l l be investigated. HIST 100 (3) History of the Ancient World (4,0,0) (F) This course examines a range o f topics including the origins o f civilization i n Egypt and Mesopotamia, the civilizations of Ancient Greece and Rome, the origins and development of Judaism and the early Christian Church. HIST 102 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Europe from the Reformation to the French Revolution A survey o f European history beginning with the 16th century Protestant Reformation and including absolutism, the scientific revolution, the Enlightenment, the old regime and the French Revolution. HIST 103 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Europe in the 19th and 20th Centuries HIST 208 (3) Canadian-American Relations Topics include the Industrial Revolution, the rise o f political ideologies, social classes, nationalism and imperialism, the Russian Revolution, the two world wars, and the inter-war period. This Canadian history course examines the major events and themes that have shaped the CanadianAmerican relationship. F r o m the A m e r i c a n Revolution, the war that ultimately created both countries, to recent years, we analyze the influence that the United States has had on Canada. HIST 108 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Issues and Themes in U.S. History: 1607 - 1877 American history from 1607 to 1877 examines the development o f the United States from early settlement through the C i v i l W a r era. Emphasis is placed on the evolution o f A m e r i c a n politics, race relations, economic and social trends, and western expansion. HIST 109 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Issues and Themes in U.S. History : 1865 present U . S . history from 1865 to the present. A study o f the development o f A m e r i c a as a world power after the C i v i l War. Special emphasis is given to U . S . foreign policy, domestic politics, and urbanization. HIST 110 (3) Canada Before Confederation (4,0,0) (F,S) A study o f Aboriginal-European relations, N e w France and British North A m e r i c a . Special emphasis is placed on issues and ideas which have been significant in the creation o f Canada and, in particular, the making of Canadian society before 1867. HIST 111 (3) Canada Since Confederation (4,0,0) (F.S) This course examines the development o f Canada since 1867. In particular it emphasizes prosperity and poverty; class, gender, aboriginal, and regional relations; FrenchEnglish tensions; the influence o f the United States; and Canada in the world community. HIST 205 British Columbia (3) (4,0.0) (F) F r o m the first contact between First Nations and Europeans i n the 18th century to the present, this course analyses the main issues that have affected B r i t i s h Columbians. It also examines some aspects of the development of the North Shore. HIST 207 (3) (4.0,0) (S) Europe in the Middle Ages and Renaissance This course covers a colourful and creative period in European history from the 3rd to the 15th century. Topics include the late Roman Empire and rise o f Christianity, monasticism and the church, feudal society and politics, the rise o f towns, the crusades, the B l a c k Death, and the art, culture and society o f Renaissance Italy. (4,0.0) (S) HIST 209 (3) (4,0,0) (S) History of the Native Peoples of Canada U s i n g ethnohistorical approaches, this course examines the history o f Canadian Indian, Inuit and M e t i s peoples. It gives particular emphasis to the attitudes, practices, policies and experiences that have shaped native-white relations and affected native peoples from 1450 to the present. HORT 101 (5) Introductory Horticulture (6,6.0) (F) This course details commercial horticulture in B . C . , covers basic plant science theory, deals with work site safety and develops basic horticultural skills including the use and proper care o f hand tools, power equipment, day to day greenhouse operations, planting and watering techniques. Students participate i n a three-day orientation field trip near the beginning o f this course. Students also participate in a W C B certified occupational first aid practicum. HORT 102 Plant Materials I (5) (6,0,0) (F) A n introduction to woody and herbaceous ornamentals including deciduous trees and shrubs, conifers, broadleaf evergreens, bulbs, and ground covers. This course emphasizes identification, landscape values and requirements o f the plant materials studied. HORT 103 (2) Growing Media and Fertilizers (3,1.0) (F) This course is designed to provide students with the media science knowledge necessary for the production and maintenance o f plants in the greenhouse, nursery and landscape. HORT 105 Plant Production (2) (3.1.0) (F) To acquaint students with greenhouse and nursery production systems and methods. Topics w i l l include: plant propagation, greenhouse production and nursery stock production. Students w i l l successfully produce a number of specific greenhouse and nursery crops. Course Descriptions 229 HORT 106 (2) Landscape Irrigation a n d Drainage (3,1,0) (S) This course is designed to familiarize the student with the basics of turf and drip irrigation systems as well as basic landscape drainage systems. Students learn how to install, operate and maintain landscape irrigation systems. Environment General Dispenser and Landscape Applicator pesticide certification examinations. The majority of the course time is spent on field installation and maintenance work. HORT 114 (0) (0,0,2) (S) Park a n d Tilford Gardens Practicum A continuation of H O R T 107. HORT 107 (0) (0,0,2) (F) Park a n d Tilford Gardens Practicum This is an optional landscape maintenance work experience at Park and Tilford Gardens. The objectives of the practicum are to develop a professional work ethic, to master basic gardening skills and to learn to complete tasks effectively and in a timely manner. HORT 108 Landscape Design (1.5) (1.5,3,0) (S) A highly practical introductory course in design theory and practices; plan reading and revisions; and basic design skills. Course materials are presented by means of lectures, visuals, projects and specific practicum labs. HORT 115 (1.5) Basic Landscape Drafting (1.5.3,0) (F) Course topics include: drafting skills and equipment, site measurement and evaluation, plan reading, graphic presentation and introductory quantity take-offs. HSA. 110 (1.5) (2,0,1) (S) W o r k Role Concepts in H o m e Support This course provides an introduction to community care, the home support industry and the role of the H o m e Support Worker. Students also learn home management skills needed for beginning home support practice. (4.5,0,0) (S) HSA. 111 (3.0) (0,4,14) (S) Healing: Personal Care Skills f o r H o m e Support A continuation o f H O R T 102 with the emphasis on conifers, broadleaf evergreens, annuals and perennials. This practical course offers students the opportunity to learn basic assistance skills following the Personal Assistance Guidelines section 1 and section 2. HORT 109 Plant Materials II HORT 110 Turfgrass M a n a g e m e n t (4) (3) (4.5,1,0) (S) A n introductory turfgrass course dealing with the selection o f grasses for turfs, turfgrass installation, and maintenance (includes fertilization, irrigation, moving, cultivation, pest control practices) for residential and large area turfs. HORT 111 Business Practices (D HORT 112 (5.0) (5,6,0) (S) Landscape Installation a n d M a i n t e n a n c e A largely applied course covering plant installation and common landscape maintenance practices. Landscape installation topics include: site preparation, use o f aggregates, and construction o f walks, steps, retaining walls, fences, trellises, and use o f paving materials. Maintenance topics include: pruning, planting and transplanting, pest management, mulches, and methods of fertilization. Students write the B . C . M i n i s t r y o f 230 Descriptions (2,0,1) (S) This course builds upon other course materials and provides an introduction to the basic concepts and approaches involved i n the care o f clients experiencing changes i n mental functioning. Students also learn the role o f the H o m e Support Attendant in special needs family situations. (1.0,1,0) (S) Deals with business establishment, business organizations, business operations, landscape estimating, quotations and contracts. Job search, job applications, resumes and interviews are also discussed. Course HSA. 112 (1.5) Special Needs in H o m e Support HSA. 113 Practical Experience (6.0) (0,54,0) (S) This practice course provides an opportunity to apply the caring philosophy with individuals and families at various stages o f the life cycle. Experience may be obtained in community and institutional settings with an emphasis on the application and integration of knowledge and skills learned i n other courses. IBUS 321 International Business (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) This course w i l l be a blend of lectures, case studies and discussions of current events affecting business. Students w i l l learn the terminology o f international business and the process managers go through i n "internationalizing" their business, including how uncontrollable elements o f international markets can impact business. IBUS 334 (3) (3,0,1) (F.Su) C o m m u n i c a t i o n , Culture a n d International Business The objective o f this course is to increase the student's cross-cultural awareness i n business settings. It looks at how different cultures negotiate and regard contracts, interpret commitments and deal with suppliers and consumers. IBUS 340 International Trade Law (3) (3.0,1) (S) International trade conventions and agreements, the legal processes o f importing and exporting, and the challenge o f dealing with conflicting domestic laws between countries w i l l be studied. Prerequisite: I N D O 102 or permission o f the instructor. This course is a continuation of I N D O 102. INDO 110 (3) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: I B U S 321, B M K T 161 This course is an in-depth study o f marketing internationally. It assumes the student understands uncontrollable variables i n a foreign market (as covered in I B U S 321) and goes directly into the controllable variables and the management o f marketing programs. IBUS 399 (3) International Trade Opportunities This course develops basic oral and reading skills i n bahasa Indonesia through the study o f grammar, vocabulary and culture. Industry leaders as w e l l as government experts w i l l discuss topics which are relevant to the Canadian business people. Case studies w i l l be used to apply the concepts covered in the lectures. INDO 102 (1.5) Introduction to Indonesian I (3) (3,1,0) (F) For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative program students only. This course helps prepare A P M C P students to function in daily life i n Indonesia by helping them to master basic language skills, sensitizing them to cultural differences, and teaching them to begin to read and write Indonesian. (4,2,0) (S) Basic Indonesian II Prerequisite: INDOllO This course is a continuation o f I N D O 110. (3,0,0) (F) This course w i l l provide students with the necessary knowledge and experience with browsing and publishing on the Internet. INFO 148 (1.5) Time-Based Data Integration II (3,0.0) (S) Data capture, compression, assembly and editing techniques and the issue o f synchronization are part of this course. INFO 150 This course w i l l be delivered as a seminar series, and is designed to provide students with a broad perspective of the trade opportunities available and the strategies required to be successful i n the world markets. (4,2,0) (F) (3) Basic Indonesian I INFO 145 (1.5) Internet Tools a n d Techniques This course is available every second year. (3,1,0) (S) For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative program students only. INDO 111 Prerequisite: B A D M 107 IBUS 357 International M a r k e t i n g INDO 103 (3.0) Introduction to Indonesian II (1.5) (3,0,0) (F) C o n t e m p o r a r y Issues I A study o f cultural, ethical, political, economic and aesthetic issues arising with the increasing use o f computers, as w e l l as the impact o f new information systems on human understanding and society. Students survey print and electronic media to research current comment on these issues; synthesize and analyze their findings; and present their work in both written and spoken forms. INFO 151 (1.5) Interactive Communications I (3,0,0) (F) This course first examines the concept of interactive communications—the active involvement of a human mind with a computer—and the history o f developments in the field to date. User interface design forms the basis for a model designed by each student. Course Descriptions 231 INFO 154 (1.5) (3,0,0) (F.S) Electronic Information Research Methods INFO 167 Systems, Tools, Utilities This course w i l l explore research methods for the effective use o f print and electronic information sources, such as online library catalogs, periodical indexes, C D - R O M s , commercial databases and resources on the Internet. This course familiarizes students with the design, structure and operation of the M a c i n t o s h computer system software, the basic concepts and use o f local area networks, and related peripheral equipment. Students w i l l examine system-related utility programs and begin an introduction to data integration. INFO 155 (1.5) Interactive Communications II (3,0,0) (S) This project-based course expands on concepts covered in I N F O 151 and expands to include critical evaluation techniques for interactive communications products. INFO 156 (1.5) Technical Support: Foundation (3,0,0) (F) (1.5) (3,0,0) (F) INFO 171 (1.5) (3,0,0) (S,Su) Applied Production Management This course w i l l allow the students to apply the project management skills they learned in I N F O 161 to integrated projects they undertake i n the spring term. The students w i l l receive the benefit of an instructor's expert experience, guidance and supervision throughout the planning and production o f these projects. This is an introduction to programming concepts. Students learn about components in programming and the approaches to structured programming using these components. INFO 158 (1.5) Interactive Communications III (3,0,0) (S) A continuation of I N F O 155, the concept o f Beta testing is introduced and applied. Students design, produce, test and revise projects using the authoring tool M a c r o m i n d Director i n this course. (1.5) INFO 160 Marketing (3,0,0) (S) This course focuses on the basic principles of marketing yourself and your ideas to the business community. It includes an overview o f marketing theory, application o f the theory into job market evaluation, preparation of a personal marketing plan, and a selling skills workshop. INFO 161 Project Management (1.5) (3,0,0) (F) This course teaches skills necessary to manage and produce interactive communications projects. Students consider management issues such as administration, pre-production and production planning, copyright clearance, collaboration and team building. INFO 166 (1.5) Applied Telecommunications (3,0,0) (F) This course provides an introduction to the basics o f modems, communications software, telecommunications protocols, the use o f electronic mail and bulletin board systems. INFO 172 (3.0) (3,0,0) (S,Su) Technical Support: Concentration The focus o f this course is i n developing expertise i n the primary interactive multimedia authoring tool chosen for the program; currently, M a c r o m i n d Director is our choice. In addition to concentrating on the specifics o f this development tool, concepts in structured programming from I N F O 156 w i l l be applied i n support o f projects from I N F O 155/158. INFO 173 (1.5) Technical Support: Augmentation (3,0,0) (F) After developing expertise i n a primary multimedia development tool, students w i l l be given the opportunity to expand their repertoire o f development tools. The focus is on the efficient application o f authoring knowledge from one environment to a different environment. Authorware is currently our choice o f development tool for courseware and computer-based training. B u i l d i n g on structure programming concepts gained in I N F O 156 and the expertise i n Director developed i n I N F O 172), students turn their focus on Authorware. INFO 177 (4.5) Professional Development (3,0,0) (S,Su) This course prepares the student for work i n the field o f information technology by establishing professional contacts, cultivating a professional work ethic, and developing a professional portfolio for presentation to the public. INFO 180 (3) (3,0,0) (S.Su) Computer Mediated Communications This course is designed to introduce the student to the various aspects and issues o f computer mediated Course 232 Descriptions communications. It w i l l enable the student to understand collaborative work i n the world o f telecomputing, experience a variety o f planned computer mediated systems and link to other computer networks (via Internet and Telnet). INFO 185 (1.5) 3-D Production for Multimedia (3,0,0) (S) This hands-on course introduces students to the world of 3-D graphics. Through a series o f projects, the course material w i l l present students with concepts of modeling, lighting, textured creation and use, and 3-D animation. Finally, the students w i l l integrate the 3-D material into multimedia documents. INFO 192 (1.5) Applied Database Technology (3,0,0) (S.Su) This course provides instruction i n the key processes related to the development and maintenance of database architectures and applications. Students are introduced to relational database technology and learn how to organize data in a manner that facilitates easy maintenance, retrieval and reporting. INFO 193 (1.5) Systems Tools, Utilities II (3,0,0) (S) The main objective of this course is to provide participants with the basic skills necessary for transferring computer-based interactive programs between the Macintosh and M S W i n d o w s operating environments. Additionally, this course aims at providing participants with the skill necessary to produce and deliver a M a c / P C hybrid C D - R O M . JAPN100 Beginning Japanese I (3) (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) Prerequisite: J A P N 100 or the instructor's permission. This course is a continuation o f J A P N 100 and must be taken i n order to complete First Y e a r level o f Japanese. Students w i l l learn more about the structure of modern Japanese and further develop their language skills i n a socio-culturally functional way. JAPN 102 Beginning Japanese I (1.5) (3,1.0) (F) For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative program students only. This course develops basic oral and written c o m m u n i cative skills in Japanese through the study of vocabulary, grammar and culture, including business culture. JAPN 103 Beginning Japanese II (3) (3,1,0) (S) For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative program students only. J A P N 103 continues developing basic oral and written communicative skills i n Japanese. (3.0,0) (S) This course is designed to provide the student with technical skills and knowledge to set up and maintain the W i n d o w s 98 operating system and to integrate their W i n d o w s 98 O S computer into the Infotec lab's computer network. INFO 194 (.75) Cross Platform Conversion JAPN 101 Beginning Japanese II (4,1.75,0) (F,Su) This course offers a comprehensive introduction to modern Japanese through the study o f vocabulary, grammar and culture. The beginning o f the course w i l l be devoted to learning the Japanese writing systems (hiragana and katakana). Fifty to 100 Chinese characters (kanji) w i l l also be taught. Students w i l l develop basic language skills in a socio-culturally functional way * This is a very demanding course w h i c h requires serious commitment. JAPN 110 Basic Japanese I (3) (4,2,0) (F) This course develops basic oral and written c o m m u n i cative skills in Japanese, through the study o f vocabulary, grammar, culture, and introduction to w o r d processing. JAPN 111 Basic Japanese II Prerequisite: (3) (4,2,0) (S) J A P N 110 This course is a continuation o f Japanese 110. JAPN 200 Intermediate Japanese I Prerequisite: (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) J A P N 101 or the instructor's permission. This course provides students with further sociocultural knowledge at an intermediate level o f Japanese. Emphasis w i l l be placed on developing a comprehensive knowledge o f modern Japanese through authentic materials and w i l l include reading and writing practice. JAPN 201 (3) Intermediate Japanese II Prerequisite: (4,1.75,0) (S) J A P N 200 or the instructor's permission. This course continues to develop higher skills at the intermediate level and provides the students with a solid foundation on which to base further study o f the language and to develop socio-culturally functional competence. Course Descriptions 233 JAPN 202 (3) Introduction to Japanese III For Asia Pacific Management (3,1,0) (F) Cooperative program JAZZ 106 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Traditional Harmony and Composition Prerequisite: JAZZ 103 or equivalent. students only. Corequisite: JAZZ 107. Prerequisite: Equivalent o f " L e v e l III" (Advanced Beginner's Level) o f the Japanese Proficiency Test or higher, and instructor's permission. A study o f traditional principles of voice leading with harmonic vocabulary extending to the secondary dominant, and b l l aug. 6th and including tonicization, simple modulation and pivot chords. Binary and ternary forms w i l l be introduced. This course is designed to provide A P M C P students with intermediate practical Japanese communication skills for daily and job-related circumstances i n Japan. JAPN 203 (3) Introduction to Japanese IV For Asia Pacific Management (3,1,0) (S) Cooperative program students only. Prerequisite: J A P N 202 or instructor's permission. This course is a continuation o f J A P N 202. JAPN 280 (3) Introduction to Japanese V (4,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: Equivalent of " L e v e l Three" (Advanced Beginners Level) o f the Japanese Proficiency Test or higher and instructor's permission. A n intermediate course designed to provide students with functional Japanese communication skills. JAPN 281 (3) Introduction to Japanese VI Prerequisite: (4,2,0) (S) J A P N 280 This course is a continuation o f Japanese 280. JAZZ 103 The Language of Music Corequisites: 114. (3) A n examination of the basics of tonal music including the study o f the overtone series, intervals, scales, modes, chord symbols, figured bass, roman numeral analysis, melodic inharmonics, phrase structure, diatonic triads and voice leading. Prerequisite: JAZZ (1.5) Prerequisite: JAZZ Corequisite: J A Z Z 106. (2,0,0) (S) 103. Students w i l l undertake the study o f score preparation, notation, basic musical terms and articulations, and writing for the rhythm section instruments. JAZZ 114 Class Piano I Corequisite: 234 (1) (2,2,0) (F) J A Z Z 103. This course is designed for students who w i s h to learn basic keyboard skills. Reading, improvisation, transposition and harmonization are the skills developed during this course and the three subsequent levels. Theoretical concepts are applied at the keyboard and . include diatonic triads and sevenths o f the major key, all major, minor and modal tetrachords. A weekly lab evaluates material covered in class. Students practise on the department's pianos. JAZZ 115 Class Piano II Prerequisite: Corequisites: (D (2,2,0) (S) J A Z Z 114. J A Z Z 106 and 107. A continuation of J A Z Z 114. In addition, keyboard sequences, arpeggios and major scales are introduced along with easy original repertoire. JAZZ 136 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Vocal Jazz Master Class I (by audition only) A n introductory course intended to develop the student's solo vocal performance capabilities through exploration o f various popular and j a z z musical styles. Material is prepared for performance with a keyboard accompanist. This class is open to students not majoring i n V o i c e . Vocalists who are judged to be at a sufficiently advanced level at their audition may substitute music electives for this course. Successful does not guarantee level vocal courses. Descriptions 103 or equivalent. A n introduction to j a z z theory including: chord scales, extended chords, functional analysis o f chord progression, primary and secondary root motion, and analysis and composition of music in the style of jazz standards and the blues. completion Course (2,0,0) (S) (4,0,0) (F) J A Z Z 184 (or M U S . 112) and J A Z Z JAZZ 105 Rhythm Section Writing JAZZ 107 (1.5) Jazz Theory and Composition I acceptance into higher JAZZ 137 (1.5) Vocal Jazz Master Class II (2,0,0) (S) JAZZ 204 (1.5) Jazz Theory and Composition III (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: JAZZ 136. Prerequisite: JAZZ 203. A continuation o f J A Z Z 136. Continued exploration o f chord progression and melody including: analysis o f modern j a z z chord progression, parallel harmony, 70s j a z z theory o f modal areas, modern voicing techniques, reharmonization. JAZZ 170 History of Jazz (3.0) (4,0,0) (F) A survey of jazz through styles and stylists from its roots i n A f r i c a to the present. JAZZ 172 Arranging I (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) JAZZ 214 Class Piano III Prerequisite: Prerequisite: JAZZ 103, to be taken with or after J A Z Z 107 and 105. A study o f four-part block harmonization arranging techniques. JAZZ 184 (1.5) Sight Singing/Ear Training I (2,2,0) (F) Corequisite: JAZZ 10.3 A u r a l and sight training concentrating on melodic, rhythmic dictation and sightsinging. JAZZ 185 (1.5) Sight Singing/Ear Training li (2,2,0) (S) (1) (2,2,0) (F) J A Z Z 115. For students who have taken J A Z Z 115 or have had previous keyboard experience. Students are introduced to c o m m o n idiomatic accompaniment patterns as w e l l as four-part chorale studies, keyboard sequences, minor scales and chords. Basic keyboard techniques are emphasized including relaxation, touch, rotation, weight transfer and their musical application i n simple repertoire. The lab hour is utilized to develop sight reading skills at the keyboard. Emphasis w i l l be on < developing the skills necessary to use the piano as a tool in writing and arranging. JAZZ 215 Class Piano IV (D (2,2,0) (S) Corequisite: JAZZ 106 and 107 Prerequisite: A continuation o f J A Z Z 184. A continuation of JAZZ 214 with increased complexity of repertoire and technique. JAZZ 194 Small Ensemble I (1.5) J A Z Z 214. (0,3,0) (F) For a l l instruments, requirements include several hours of rehearsal a week plus a number of performances. The styles studied are varied. Students are expected to develop individual and ensemble performance abilities and a professional attitude to both performance and rehearsal. JAZZ 236 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Studio Vocal Performance I (by audition only) Prerequisite: JAZZ 137. A course designed to develop the student's studio performance ability through preparation and performance o f selected solo and ensemble material i n the College's recording studio. JAZZ 195 Small Ensemble II (1.5) (0,3,0) (S) A continuation of J A Z Z 194. JAZZ 203 (1.5) Jazz Theory and Composition II Prerequisites: instructor. JAZZ 237 (1.5) Studio Vocal Performance II (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: JAZZ 236. (2,0,0) (F) JAZZ 106 and 107 or permission o f the Continued exploration o f chord progression and melody including: analysis of popular chord progression, mixed mode chord progression, augmented 6th chords, tonicization, chord scales/harmonic extensions. A continuation of J A Z Z 236. JAZZ 238 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Vocal Jazz Master Class I (by audition only) Prerequisite: JAZZ 137. This course is intended to develop the live performance abilities o f the student through the study o f j a z z repertoire. Students w i l l study style and interpretation and perform with some o f Vancouver's top j a z z musicians. Course Descriptions 235 JAZZ 239 (1.5) Vocal Jazz Master Class II (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 238. A continuation of J A Z Z 238. JAZZ 240 Form and Analysis (1.5) (2.0,0) (F) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 106 or M U S . 101. A study of complete works exhibiting the most significant formal designs of the 18th and 19th centuries, using a variety of visual means to clarify the roles of harmonic, melodic, and rhythmic structure in the articulation of musical form. JAZZ 241 Counterpoint (1.5) (2,0.0) (S) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 240, 203. (3) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisites: J A Z Z 106, 170, E N G L 100 or 102 plus one of E N G L 103, 104, 105 or 106. A chronological exploration of the repertoire, style, and social history of music to 1770 for undergraduate students in the Jazz Studies program. Repertoire will be contextualized both within the framework of European cultural history and in the broader context of world music. JAZZ 272 Arranging II (1.5) (2,0.0) (F) Prerequisites: J A Z Z 172 and J A Z Z 105. Corequisite: JAZZ 203. Arranging projects for various combinations of instruments, plus a study of two and three-part writing. JAZZ 273 Music History II (3) (4,0,0) (S) (1-5) (2,2,0) (S) A continuation of J A Z Z 282. This term will be devoted to analysis of chord progressions and more advanced chord-scale analysis. At the end of this term, students should have the basic theoretical knowledge necessary to analyze and learn to improvise on any "standard" jazz tune. JAZZ 284 (1.5) Sight Singing/Ear Training III (2,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 185. Corequisite: J A Z Z 203. JAZZ 285 (1.5) Sight Singing/Ear Training IV A continuation of History I covering the classical period through the 20th century. As in Music History I repertoire will be contextualized both within the framework of European cultural history and in the broader context of world music. (1.5) (2,2,0) (F) (2,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 284. Corequisite: J A Z Z 204. A continuation of J A Z Z 284. JAZZ 294 Small Ensemble III (1.5) (0,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: JAZZ, 195. A variety of jazz styles/eras will be studied, advancing chronologically from "bebop" and "mainstream" standards, through contemporary jazz of the 60s and 70s and jazz-rock fusion, to current jazz styles. Course operation is on two levels of study; instructional and lab performance. JAZZ 295 Small Ensemble IV (1.5) (0.3,0) (S) (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: JAZZ 294. A continuation of J A Z Z 294. JAZZ 300 20th Century Theory Prerequisite: Music History I JAZZ 282 Improvisation I JAZZ 283 Improvisation II A continuation of J A Z Z 185. A study of tonal counterpoint emphasizing its use from late Baroque through the common practice period. JAZZ 271 Music History I concepts, basic chord-scale relationships and development of technical exercises for basic chord progressions. Prerequisites: J A Z Z 240, 204. A survey of compositional techniques and theoretical principles utilized from 1890 to the present coupled with an examination of various major composers and masterpieces of their music. JAZZ 310 JAZZ Pedagogy (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Prerequisites: J A Z Z 107, 115 and 185. Prerequisite: JAZZ 204. A course to teach the basics of improvisation on chord changes. The first term will be devoted to rhythmic Concepts, methods, and resources; examination and comparison of textbooks, recordings, tapes, and materials related to the study of jazz. Course 236 Descriptions JAZZ 336 (1.5) Studio Vocal Performance III Prerequisite: (2,0,0) (F) J A Z Z 237. A continuation of J A Z Z 237. Seats may be restricted to vocal majors. relationships, outside playing, the philosophy o f free jazz. JAZZ 394 Small Ensemble V Prerequisite: JAZZ 337 (1.5) Studio Vocal Performance IV Prerequisite: (2,0,0) (S) J A Z Z 336. A continuation o f J A Z Z 336. JAZZ 338 (1.5) Vocal Jazz Master Class III Prerequisite: (2,0,0) (F) J A Z Z 295. JAZZ 395 Small Ensemble VI (0,3,1) (S) (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) J A Z Z 394 JAZZ 410 Conducting I Prerequisites: JAZZ 339 (1.5) Vocal Jazz Master Class IV (2,0,0) (S) J A Z Z 204, 215, 240, 285 A study o f basic conducting techniques. JAZZ 411 Conducting II J A Z Z 338. A continuation of J A Z Z 338. Prerequisite: Prerequisite: (1.5) A continuation o f J A Z Z 394. J A Z Z 239. (1.5) JAZZ 370 Jazz Styles (0,3.1) (F) A t this level the student w i l l receive instruction i n ensemble performance for the recording studio. Students w i l l perform and produce under supervision. Prerequisite: A continuation of V o c a l Jazz Master Class II instruction w i t h more emphasis on individual contribution and responsibility. Seats may be restricted to vocal majors. Prerequisite: (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) J A Z Z 170. A follow-up to J A Z Z 170. Detailed study o f the major figures i n j a z z from 1940 to the present, such as Charlie Parker, John Coltrane, B i l l Evans. (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) J A Z Z 410. A continuation o f Conducting I with emphasis on v o c a l and instrumental approaches. JAZZ 460 (1.5) Commercial Relations in Music (2,0,0) (F) A course involving aspects o f the music industry including copyright, contracts, performing rights (1.5) JAZZ 372 Arranging III Prerequisites: (2,0,0) (S) JAZZ 470 World Music J A Z Z 204, 272. A study of vocal writing styles and techniques. T h i s course is not always offered. JAZZ 382 Improvisation III Prerequisite: (1.5) (1,2,0) (F) J A Z Z 283. This course contains both a lecture and lab component. Content w i l l include: substitution o f chord scales, tonicization, diminished chord scales, riff blues melodies, analysis and composition o f solos in various styles. JAZZ 383 Improvisation IV Prerequisite: (1.5) organizations and the recording industry. (1,2,0) (S) J A Z Z 382. (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) A study o f the musics o f the w o r l d outside the realm o f the Western European tradition. JAZZ 472 Arranging IV Prerequisite: Corequisite: (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) J A Z Z 272. J A Z Z 204. Course content includes writing techniques for large j a z z ensemble. T h i s course is not always offered . JAZZ 494 (1.5) (0,3,0) (F) Small Ensemble VII (by audition only) A j a z z performance ensemble for more advanced players. Students w i l l be required to perform i n public several times during the semester. A continuation o f J A Z Z 382. Content w i l l include; altered and symmetrical scales, exploration o f the harmonic resources o f scales, pentatonic and altered pentatonic scales, 4th chord stacks, polychordal triad Course Descriptions 237 JAZZ 495 Small Ensemble VIII (1.5) (0,3,0) (S) A continuation o f J A Z Z 494. KIN. 140 (3) Contemporary Health Issues (4,0,0) (Su) Examination of current health issues from a holistic perspective with emphasis on the role o f personal behaviours and other factors influencing health. Critical analysis and evaluation o f health information w i l l also be covered. KIN. 142 (3) Introduction to Kinesiology (4,2,0) (S.Su) A n introduction to the range o f subject areas encompassed in the discipline o f kinesiology, with basic assessment procedures for individual status and performance according to growth and development, functional anatomy, biomechanics, exercise physiology, and motor learning. KIN. 143 Exercise Management (3) (2,2,0) (F,Su) A n introduction to exercise management and exercise physiology; conditioning methods, exercise techniques and fitness appraisal LGAS 150 (3) Introduction to the Study of Law (4,0,0) (F) Transferable to S F U . (3) (4,0,0) (S) A n introduction to the law o f evidence. A l t h o u g h some statutes w i l l be considered, emphasis w i l l be on case law and current developments i n the law. Transferable to S F U . LGAS 152 Litigation Procedures I (3) (4.0.0) (F) Introduction to procedures i n the courts o f B . C . The course covers basic procedures i n pre-trial preparation of documents, and the use o f precedents in litigation. LGAS 153 (1.5) Basic Corporate Procedures (2,0.0) (S) A n examination o f the B . C . Company A c t and the C . B . C . A . and the various documents required to incorporate a company and attend to routine filings and Course 238 Descriptions LGAS 155 (1.5) Conveyancing Procedures (2,0,0) (S) Introduce students to basic conveyancing procedures i n B . C . , including the role o f the conveyancing assistant, the structure o f a real estate sale, the system o f registration i n B . C . , and basic procedures when acting for a purchaser and/or vendor. LGAS 156 (1.5) Introduction to Evidence (2,0,0) (S) This course is an introduction to the law of evidence including relevancy, materiality, admissibility, opinion evidence, etc. LGAS 157 (3) Wills and Probate Procedures (4,0,0) (S) A n examination of the W i l l s A c t , the Estate A d m i n i s tration A c t , and W i l l s Variation A c t . Students w i l l prepare the necessary documents to obtain Letters Probate and Letters o f Administration. Students w i l l also learn how to deal with assets after Letters Probate or Administration have been obtained. LGAS 164 Litigation Procedures IV (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: L G A S 152. Introduction to legal concepts and legal reasoning. The course w i l l cover the historical development of legal institutions and the principles of c o m m o n law and equity, the interpretation o f statutes, and an analysis o f the system; its strengths and weaknesses. LGAS 151 Evidence resolutions. Differences between reporting and nonreporting companies w i l l be studied. A n introduction to Alternate Dispute Resolution, practice and procedure in the S m a l l C l a i m s Court, use of the Freedom of Information and Privacy A c t as a tool for discovery, and Chambers practice and procedures i n the Supreme Court of British C o l u m b i a . LGAS 170 Legal Research (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Provides the student with the techniques and methodology o f legal research and w i l l include functions such as reading briefs and legal documents; using encyclopedia, annotated reports, law reviews, case comments; locating decisions. LGAS 172 Legal Drafting I (3) (4,0,0) (F) Course work includes drafting o f agreements, statements of c l a i m and defences, letters and memos, and a study o f the rules o f statutory interpretation. Emphasis w i l l be placed on developing different writing styles, rather than obtaining a detailed knowledge o f specific areas o f law. LGAS 174 Legal Drafting II Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) L G A S 172. A continuation o f the work begun in L G A S 172; students w i l l draft more complex documentation. LGAS 176 Legal Office Procedures (3) (4,0,0) (F) Practical information about the organization of legal offices. Instruction i n timekeeping, filing and c o m m u nications systems, use o f data processing equipment i n law offices, ethical responsibility o f legal assistants and legal terminology w i l l be covered. LGAS 179 Legal Interviewing (3) (4,0,0) (F) This course w i l l give an understanding o f the role o f the legal assistant and o f the process o f legal interviewing. Students w i l l acquire skills i n conducting various types o f interviews. LGAS 180 Contracts I (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) The objective o f this course is to give the students a general understanding o f the fundamental principles o f contract law, including offer and acceptance, certainty, intention, consideration, and privity. (3) LGAS 181 Contracts II Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F.S) (3) (4,0,0) (F) A n introductory study of torts. Principal topic to be studied is the law o f negligence. LGAS 253 Company Law (4,0,0) (F) (3) The law relating to business associations. A n examination o f rights and duties of officers, directors, and shareholders, as w e l l as an analysis o f provincial securities practice. LGAS 254 Torts II Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) (3) L G A S 252. This is a continuation of L G A S 252. Recovery of pure economic loss, nuisance, liability o f statutory authorities, intentional torts and other areas are studied. LGAS 255 Real Property (4,0,0) (S) (3) A review o f the common law relating to real property as modified by legislation w i l l be studied i n this course using the case analysis method. LGAS 256 Family Law (4,0,0) (S) (3) L a w and the family: marriage and its dissolution; rights and duties o f spouses and parents; custody; access, guardianship, and adoption. L G A S 180. This course is a continuation of L G A S 180. Topics include misrepresentation, interpretation, mistake, duress, and remedies. LGAS 182 Creditors' Remedies (3) (4,0,0) (F) Discussion o f the principles, practice and information gathering procedures necessary to realize on j u d g ments. The case method w i l l be used and students are expected to be familiar with the documentation used i n the above process. LGAS 199 Career Practicum Prerequisite: LGAS 252 Torts I (3) (2,0,0) (F,S,Su) 3.0 Cumulative G P A . This includes the work portion of the Career Practicum which consists o f six months in a law firm. It also includes classroom seminars and instructor/student consultations. Students w i l l be assisted by the instructor i n finding a practicum, but it is the student's responsibility to obtain a practicum position. This practicum must be commenced within two years of completing the Legal Assistant course requirements. LGAS 257 Wills and Estates (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) This course w i l l cover substantive law issues that arise in a w i l l s and estates practice. Important practice issues w i l l also be covered, as w e l l as a review o f applicable legislation. LGAS 262 Litigation Procedures III Prerequisites: (3) (4,0.0) (S) L G A S 152, 162. This course covers divorce, F a m i l y Relations A c t , and small claims procedures. LGAS 264 Insurance Law I (3) (4,0.0) (F.S) A n overview o f Canadian insurance law including structure o f the industry, insurable interest, valuation, subrogation, contribution and indemnity and duty to disclose. Course Descriptions 239 LGAS 265 Insurance Law II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Continuation o f L G A S 264 covering agents' duties and responsibilities; form and formation o f the insurance contract; cover, including exceptions to cover; the claims process; I C B C insurance issues. LGAS 268 Criminal Law (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Substantive elements o f selected criminal offenses and consideration o f various defences. The effect o f The Charter o f Rights on rights of the accused w i l l be also studied. Transferable to S F U . LGAS 271 Administrative Law (3) (4,0.0) (F.S) The law relating to administrative tribunals in Canada. The rules o f natural justice and fairness w i l l be examined as well as judicial review o f decisions and administrative tribunals. Emphasis w i l l be on provincial administrative tribunals and the effect o f The Charter o f Rights i n this area. LGST 105 (1.5) (2.0,0) (S.Su) Keyboarding Skill and Speed Development This course w i l l build keyboarding speed and accuracy skills using both general business and legal materials. LGST 107 (3.75) Legal Machine Transcription (5,0,0) (S.Su) Students w i l l gain experience i n preparing legal materials on a microcomputer from recorded material which has been dictated as i f from the desk o f a lawyer to a competent legal secretary. LGST 108 Family Law Procedures (1.5) (2,0,0) (F.S) Introduction to the procedures, rules and legislation applicable to divorce and family law litigation. LGST 109 Basic Litigation (3) (4.0,0) (F.S) Introduction to court procedures in the Supreme Court of B . C . The course w i l l cover procedures in pre-trial preparation, the preparation of documents, the use o f precedents i n the Supreme Court. LGST 110 Corporate Procedures (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) A n examination o f the B . C . Companies A c t and the various documents that a legal secretary must be familiar with in order to incorporate a company and attend to routine filings and resolutions. Records Office Course 240 Descriptions requirements, annual proceedings, preparing share certificates and registration, etc., w i l l also be covered. LGST 112 (3) (4,0,0) (S.Su) Basic Conveyance and Mortgage This course covers the contract o f purchase and sale, L a n d Title A c t requirements for registration of title i n B . C . , search procedures, preparation of primary and secondary documents and forms involved in conveying title and registering charges. Emphasis w i l l be on preparing documents acceptable to the L a n d Title Office, such as transfers, mortgages, and related forms for a residential conveyance. LGST 114 (1.5) Wills and Probate Procedures (2.0.0) (F.S) A n examination of the W i l l s A c t , and Estate A d m i n i s tration A c t . Students w i l l prepare the necessary documents to obtain Letters Probate i n the Supreme Court of B . C . and be familiar with documentation required for issuance of Letters o f Administration. LGST 116 (1.5) Introduction to the Legal System (2.0.0) (F.S) This course acquaints students with a working k n o w l edge o f the Canadian and B . C . Court System, ethics o f the legal profession and the rules o f the L a w Society relating to trust accounts, with added emphasis on legal vocabulary. LGST 117 Legal Office Procedures (1.5) (2,0,0) (S.Su) A course to prepare legal secretarial students for positions in law offices. Instruction in time keeping, diary systems, use o f law library, ethical responsibilities, filing, and other procedures particular to the profession. Emphasis w i l l be placed on the structure o f a law office, the differences between large and small offices, and the office procedures unique to the practice of law. LGST 119 Practicum (1.5) (2.0,60) (S.Su) W o r k experience involving 24 lecture hours and at least 60 hours o f related office experience in the legal field. A l s o covered is the resume, j o b application, cover letter and interview. LGST 122 (3) (4,0,0) (S.Su) Computer Applications in the Legal Office The student w i l l learn to identify the components o f office automation. The student w i l l also require a practical knowledge and an understanding o f basic spreadsheet and data base concepts. LGST 123 (3.75) (5,2,0) (F,S) Legal Document Processing on the Microcomputer U s i n g WordPerfect software on an I B M compatible microcomputer, the student w i l l be introduced to basic through advanced word processing concepts. Proficiency working with the program w i l l be acquired through the production o f various legal documents. LGST 124 (3) Organizational Behaviour (4,0,0) (F.S) This course looks at the effects o f individual and group behaviour i n organizations. Topics include leader behaviour and power, motivation, attitude development, perception, work stress and conflict. Students w i l l also learn how to apply communication, problem solving and conflict resolution skills toward an organization's overall effectiveness. LING 100 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Introduction to General Linguistics: Language Structure This course w i l l provide an introduction to the study o f human language and ultimately the human mind. Linguistics 100 is designed to introduce the field o f linguistics, and develops the course areas that are involved i n the description and analysis o f language morphology, syntax, phonetics and phonology. W e w i l l develop an understanding o f the concepts o f linguistics by looking at data from various languages around the world. LING 101 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Introduction to General Linguistics: Language Use Prerequisite: L I N G 100 or permission o f instructor. This course is a continuation of Linguistics 100 and explores the relationship o f language to other systems — social, biological and cognitive. It explores the relationship between language and social systems (sociolinguistics), language change (historical linguistics), first and second language acquisition, language meaning and use (semantics and pragmatics), language typology and the nature o f writing systems. the idea o f competition and the reality o f monopoly power, the potential benefits and costs o f "free trade", and the causes and consequences o f inflation and employment. LSP. 101 (1.5) (S) Labour Economics: Alternatives & Options This course builds on the material from L S P . 100 to provide information on alternative economic models including Marxist economic theory. Discussion focuses on the development and nature o f capitalist economics and the causes o f short and long term economic crises. LSP. 105 (1.0) Corporate Financial Statement Analysis (F,S) A general introduction to reading and understanding financial statements focusing on corporate income statements and balance sheets. There is discussion o f concepts such as the definition o f profit and investment return and h o w to determine the cost o f employee benefits. LSP. 109 Legal Research Skills (1.0) (S) T h i s course provides students with a general understanding o f the fundamental principles o f legal research. Students learn the basics o f legal research by doing a series o f specific research problems. The Labour Relations Board library and computers are used by the participants to undertake hands-on research assignments. LSP.110 B.C. Labour Law (1.5) (F) A basic but comprehensive course designed to acquaint union members as w e l l as officers and staff with the essentials o f the provincial labour law. The course covers organizing, unfair labour practices, arbitration, strikes, lockouts and picketing, amongst other topics. The sessions include detailed examination o f the Labour Relations Code, important Labour Relations Board decisions, as w e l l as court decisions dealing with labour law issues. (1.5) (S) LSP. 100 (1.5) (S) Introduction: Economics for Trade Unionists LSP. 111 Canada Labour Code A n economics course emphasizing both the simplicity of most economic ideas, and the relevance o f economics to an understanding of the way Canadian society operates. It focuses on the reasons why economists disagree about free trade, the role o f government i n the economy and the role o f unions, and isolates the political nature o f most economic arguments. Topics discussed include the workings o f the market system, A broad examination o f the Code and decisions which affect unions under federal labour jurisdiction. Introduction o f labour law research methods and their application. Emphasis is placed on the policy underlying the code and the creation and effect o f the collective agreement. Course Descriptions 241 LSP. 112 Arbitration Law (1.5) (F) This course is designed to introduce trade unionists to the basics of labour arbitration law. The students w i l l acquire the knowledge and skills needed to identify the legal issues i n c o m m o n labour disputes, and to apply arbitration law to real or hypothetical cases, identify the essential facts i n dispute and what evidence can help prove them, and to create a closing argument, arguing both the facts and the law. LSP. 113 (1.5) (F.S) Public Service Staff Relations Act (PSSRA) A wide examination o f the federal labour laws dealing specifically with the public sector worker and their impact. Emphasis on labour law research methods and their application, collective agreements, grievances and back-to-work legislation for "essential" service workers. LSP. 114 (1.0) Employment Standards Act (F.S) This course provides an in-depth review of the E m ployment Standards A c t with a view to understanding the requirements o f this A c t as it relates to collective agreements. Unions may not contract out o f the m i n i m u m standards but four sections of the A c t allow collective agreements some flexibility. B y the end o f the course, participants should have a good understanding o f whether a collective agreement has deficiencies when compared to the requirements o f the A c t . LSP. 115 (1.5) Occupational Health and Safety LSP. 116 (1.0) (F) Workers' Compensation Act and the WCB The course provides a general understanding of the Workers' Compensation A c t and the W C B The statutory and administrative framework of the W o r k ers' Compensation Board and all phases of claims handling are examined. Students are provided with information required to represent workers with c o m pensation appeals with special emphasis on reviewing W C B c l a i m files, securing evidence, presenting the evidence by written submissions and at oral hearings. 242 Descriptions (F.S) The Employment and Insurance A c t is a basic part o f Canada's "social safety net". H i g h unemployment makes employment insurance more important than ever to working people. This course is intended to help union officers and ordinary workers understand how employment insurance works. M a n y topics are covered, from the determination of insurable employments to types of benefits, avoiding trouble with a claim, and termination. The complex appeal system is thoroughly discussed, and students are offered a chance to take part i n a simulated Board o f Referees hearing at the final session. Students become familiar with the E m p l o y ment and Insurance A c t and Regulations, policy manual, umpire's decisions, and other research tools. LSP. 118 Human Rights Law (1.0) (F.S) A n examination of the essential practices and procedures in human rights law focusing on sexual harassment and the duty to accommodate. This course offers up-to-date legal information from the provincial and federal jurisdictions. It provides an assessment of legal protection under the Human Rights Code o f British C o l u m b i a , the Canadian Human Rights A c t , and the Canadian Charter o f Rights and Freedoms, as well as collective agreements and institutional policies. The course provides the participant with a thorough understanding o f liability, the process of filing a complaint, and appropriate remedies in human rights law. (F) A general background to and overview o f the main social, medical, economic, technical and legal issues facing B . C . workers in the field o f health and safety. Special attention is given to the W o r k e r s ' Compensation Board. Course LSP. 117 (1.0) Introduction to UIC Procedures LSP. 119 (1.0) Civil Rights and the Work Place (F.S) Specific c i v i l rights problems arising in the workplace, including issues o f political, economic and legal rights of the worker; examination of legal remedies available to trade unions and the employee to prevent infringement o f c i v i l rights in the work place; protection o f c i v i l rights under the provincial and federal legislation through contracting and in collective agreements. A problem-solving format with discussions o f current c i v i l rights issues, "right-to-work" legislation, race and sex discrimination. LSP. 120 (1.0) Politics: Government Bureaucracy (F.S) A course which outlines how government operates i n various spheres, the impact it makes on the citizen, how to utilize procedures for redressing grievances that result from bureaucracy, and what channels are open for citizen participation. In addition, the course looks at the c i v i l servant and his/her relationship to other workers. LSP. 122 (1.5) Politics: Labour Policy in Canada (F.S) Provides a basic understanding of the structures and processes o f policy making in Canada with a direct focus on the formation of labour policy. The participant gains a specific knowledge of the structures o f government in Canada, learns the impact federalism has on policy formation, and becomes familiarized with channels o f policital input. LSP. 130 Sociology of Work (1.5) (F.S) This course assists i n the understanding of the social context i n which work occurs. A n attempt to develop tools to understand the various social settings i n which work has been placed is undertaken. The different ways in which w o r k i n g people have been manipulated by the new social engineers is also studied. LSP. 131 (1.5) Race and Ethnic Relations (F.S) The issue o f racism has been used in the past to weaken and divide unions. This course w i l l help unionists become sensitive to complexities of race and ethnic relations; give practical advice on integrating minority workers into the union and develop techniques to deal with biases and prejudice at the work place and i n the community. Approaches to combatting the disruptive effects of racism w i l l be discussed. LSP. 140 (1.5) History of the Labour Movement (S) LSP. 142 (1.5) History of the Labour Movement in B.C. (S) The birth and growth o f trade unionism i n B . C . Through a wide collection o f printed and visual materials participants analyze the raw and vital struggles between B . C . ' s w o r k i n g people and the industrialists who opposed them. The major economic and political issues of the movement are traced; the right to organize, the right to bargain, the demand for the nine and eight-hour day, the problems o f racism and immigration, the struggle to organize the industrial, public and clerical sectors, the fight for women's rights, political expression. LSP. 150 (1.0) Women in the Work Force (S) This course focuses on the impacts o f workplace restructuring and trends women face i n the workforce. A fundamental restructuring has been taking place, with a shift away from manufacturing to service sector and a dramatic rise i n contract, temporary and part-time work. The course examines what these trends mean for the wage gap, for women's abilities to unionize and for women's unpaid work. These w i l l be put into a historical and global context. W o m e n ' s experiences i n B . C . w i l l be compared with the experiences o f other provinces and countries. The course explores the responses unions have made to these trends and women's organizing in communities, across the country and across borders. LSP. 151 (1.0) (F.S) Leadership Skills, Assertiveness and Advocacy A survey o f the history o f the labour movement i n Canada from the formation o f the working class in the 19th century through to mass industrial unionism. B y looking at specific conflicts, a good overview is obtained of the struggles of the labour movement to gain the right to organize, obtain union recognition, bargain collectively and provide decent wages and working conditions. Attempts not only to provide women with the skills they need to take a leadership role i n their trade union, but also takes a careful look at the way sex role stereotyping inhibits us from developing these skills. This course covers the following areas: W o m e n and Power, Assertiveness, A d v o c a c y , Organizing and Group Dynamics. LSP. 141 (1.0) (F.S) Union Story: A Course in Practical History LSP. 155 (1.0) (F.S) Indian Land Claims and Union Movement This is a companion course for the larger course i n Labour History, but it can be taken separately. It is designed to give some basic research skills, skills that can be applied toward learning the history o f your union - its development, policies, past struggles and victories. It is meant to be a practical course: the participants learn how to use resources, how to apply them, and how to present the results to others. This course acquaints the participant with the position of native people on the issue of land claims. A n understanding of the implications of native land claims for the trade union movement and the history o f native people i n Canada and British C o l u m b i a is gained. This history is studied i n relation to the whole question o f land. Course Descriptions 243 LSP. 160 (3.0) Media for Trade Union Education and Organization (F.S) The objective o f this course is to become familiar with simple media production skills for use in the labour movement. The participant learns how to record and dub audio material, use an instamatic or 3 5 m m still camera for slides, produce a simple slide-audio show, use portable video equipment for basic recording, write news releases, pamphlets, and internal newsletters and edit audio and video tape. LSP. 161 (1.5) Working with Mass Media (F.S) This course is designed to acquaint trade unionists with the nature of print and electronic mass media with a view to improving techniques for relating to the media. Specific topics which emerge from the classes w i l l be dealt with, typical o f w h i c h might be media ownership and the process o f "newsmaking". LSP. 162 (1.0) (F.S) Working Culture and History of Labour Arts Since its beginning, Canadian labour has worked to build a cultural life supportive o f the concerns o f working people. A t the same time, visual artists, film makers, dramatists, musicians, writers and other cultural workers have identified with the movement for social change embodied in organized labour. and speech anxiety while m a x i m i z i n g organization, objectives and analysis o f impact. 2. effective meetings: effective chairing, preparation of agendas, and building a good "process" with the assistance o f rules o f order. LSP. 180 Stewards' Training (1.5) (F.S) This course is intended to assist stewards and union members in developing confidence in their ability to adequately represent their fellow workers at the office or job site as well as provide the m i n i m u m technical skills in advocacy and contract interpretation. In addition, the course provides a brief overview o f the history o f the North American labour movement and its institutions as they have developed. LSP. 181 Collective Bargaining (1.5) (F.S) This course provides technical and practical information for the union negotiator. Includes instruction on the bargaining process including preparation and development o f proposals; contract language and costing. Bargaining table advocacy skills are explored. Material is available for the specific needs o f public and private sector bargaining. A bargaining simulation is held as an integral part of the course. LSP. 182 (1.5) Union Local Administration (F.S) This course explores the history o f Canadian labour culture, the influence o f various ethnic and international currents i n creating a rich cultural identity and the limits and possibilities opened by the advent o f mass media. Examples o f film, video, television, song, literature and visual art are used as focal points for discussion. This course is designed to provide union activists and local officers with basic skills in parliamentary procedures as w e l l as the administrative duties of officers and committee members i n local unions. The course requires considerable student participation to develop debating and advocacy skills. LSP. 163 Media Workshop LSP. 190 Contract Costing (1.5) (F.S) The aim o f this workshop is to acquaint learners with current multi-media presentation techniques. LSP. 170 (1.5) Communications: Public Speaking (F.S) A l l the skills and techniques necessary for effective communications in active union involvement. Designed to meet the needs of active unionists and officers, this course combines principles and practice i n a "learn while d o i n g " format. Training in the following skills areas: 1. effective public speaking: including methods of oral communication, effective listening and response, confidence building, and style development. Role plays aid the participant i n overcoming fears Course 244 Descriptions (1.0) (F.S) This course evaluates the "numbers game" played at the bargaining table and in the media around bargaining issues. It deals with union and employer approaches to costing the different elements o f bargaining proposals and settlements. Topics discussed include: • wages and benefits and the concept of total compensation; • the effects o f inflation and design of C O L A clauses; • sources of information for monetary negotiations and the uses and limitations o f external comparisons. Participants also consider issues such as strategy, the public relations aspects o f costing, and the relationship of costing to pay equity. LSP. 191 (1.0) Introduction to Pension Plans (F,S) This course, useful for Pension Trustees, potential Trustees, union officers and pension plan administrative staff, is a thorough examination of pension plans and pension issues. Topics developed and discussed include defined benefit and money purchase plans; regulation of pensions; the law of trusts; investment principles and practices; the design, financing, administration and communication of pension plans; strategic planning for pensions. LSP. 192 (1.0) (F.S) Introduction to Health & Welfare Benefits This course has been developed to provide a working understanding of the various aspects of health & welfare/benefit plans. The following topics are incorporated: what is contained in a health & welfare plan; government involvement; designing a benefit plan, costing components; methods of financing a benefit plan; benefit plan administration. LSP. 212 (1.5) Advocacy Before Labour Tribunals (S) This course is open to students who have previously completed LSP. 110, 111 or 112. The course is also designed for trade unionists who have presented or assisted in hearings before grievance arbitration boards, labour relations boards and human rights tribunals. Students will acquire a knowledge of advocacy techniques and skill, and the preparation requirements needed to effectively act as counsel at hearings before tribunals. Students will have opportunities throughout the course to practice their advocacy skills. LSP. 216 (1.5) Workers' Compensation Appeals — Intermediate Level (F.S) This course is open to students who have previously completed LSP. 116 or have experience in representing workers with compensation appeals. The course provides an understanding of the Workers' Compensation appeals process with special emphasis on policies, procedures and practice by preparing and presenting appeals at the Workers' Compensation Review Board. Students are provided with practical skills for reviewing medical evidence and requesting medical legal opinions. A key part of the course is a case study that involves preparation of an appeal and the presentation of the appeal to a panel of the Workers' Compensation Review Board. LSP. 226 (1.0) (F.S) Advanced Workers' Compensation — Appeal Preparation The course is open to students who have previously completed LSP. 116, LSP. 216 or have experience in representing workers with compensation at the appeal level. This course provides detailed review of Advanced Workers' Compensation Appeals to the Appeals Tribunal (Commissioners) and to the Medical Review Panel. Students review appeals procedures and policies for advanced appeals and complete practical skills exercises. MATH 009 Arithmetic (1.0) (0.3*,0)(F.S,Su) A review of the basic arithmetic operations. Applications to percentage, ratio, proportions, areas and volumes. This is a self-paced course primarily intended for returning students who require a basic math refresher. * Students are generally required to attend three scheduled hours per week for this course. MATH 090 (1.5) (4*,0,0) (F.S.Su) Introductory Algebra with Functions Prerequisite: Math 11 with at least a "C-" grade or permission of a mathematics instructor. Develops the concepts of introductory algebra with emphasis on the real number system, the algebra of exponents, and polynomial arithmetic at the elementary level. This course is intended for students who require a basic introduction to algebra. * This course meets four hours per week for seven weeks (half a term). MATH 095 (1.5) (4*,0,0)(F,S,Su) Intermediate Algebra with Functions Prerequisite: MATH 090 or BMTH 045 with at least a "C-" grade, or Math 11 with at least a "C" grade, or permission of a mathematics instructor. Develops the concepts of intermediate algebra including polynomials, rational expressions, radical expressions, quadratic equations and an introduction to logarithms. This course is intended for students who have already completed a basic introduction to algebra. * This course meets four hours per week for seven weeks (half a term). Course Descriptions 245 MATH 101 (3) Introduction to Statistics (4,0,0) (F.S) Prerequisite: M a t h 11 or M A T H 090 or B M T H 045 with at least a " C - " grade, or permission o f the instructor. A n introduction to the language o f statistics and some statistical methods, including random variables and their distribution; random sampling, normal distribution, estimation o f parameters and testing hypotheses. MATH 102 Statistical Methods Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) (3) M A T H 101 with at least a " C - " grade. A study of important statistical methods commonly used in the analysis o f research data, including t-tests and their non-parametric competitors, one and two-way analysis of variance, chi-square tests and regression analysis. MATH 105 (3) Precalculus Mathematics (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Note: This course is not transferable to UBC except if combined with MATH 108 or 116 (for some faculties). Prerequisite: M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R completion within the past year of: M a t h 12 with at least a " C " grade; B M T H 045 with at least a " B " grade; or M A T H 095 with at least a " C + " grade. Students who have completed within the past year M A T H 090 with at least a " B - " grade O R M A T H 095 with a " C - " or " C " grade are permitted to enrol in M A T H 105 only i f they enrol in M A T H 095 concurrently. A review of algebra and a discussion o f functions, graphs, mathematical models, trigonometry, logarithms and exponential functions. Primarily for students who anticipate taking calculus courses or who require a M a t h 12 equivalent course. N o duplicate credit for M A T H 105/107. MATH 107 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Precalculus for Business and Social Sciences Note: This course is not transferable to UBC unless combined with MATH 108 (for some faculties). Prerequisite: M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R c o m pletion within the past year of: M a t h 12 with at least a " C " grade; or B M T H 045 with at least a " B " grade; or M A T H 095 with at least a " C + " grade. Students who have completed within the past year M A T H 090 with at least a " B - " grade O R M A T H 095 with a " C - " or " C " grade are permitted to enrol in M A T H 107 only i f they enrol in M A T H 095 concurrently. Course 246 Descriptions The mathematical models/applications i n this course w i l l be mainly business/finance oriented. Linear and quadratic equations and inequalities, absolute value, systems o f linear equations, functions and graphs, inverse functions, mathematical modelling, exponential and logarithm functions, circular and trigonometic functions, right-triangle trigonometry, arithmetic and geometric progressions, compound interest and annuities, summation notation, binomial theorem. N o duplicate credit for M A T H 105/107. MATH 108 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Calculus for Business and Social Sciences I Prerequisite: M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R c o m pletion within the past year of: M a t h 12 with at least a " B " grade; or M A T H 105 or M A T H 107 or B M T H 046 with at least a " C - " grade. A n introduction to the mathematics of change; the concepts o f calculus and the application o f these concepts to business and the social sciences using a technology-based modelling approach; mathematical models o f data sets using continuous functions; using the derivative and integral to investigate change; interpreting and communicating results. N o duplicate credit w i l l be given for M A T H 108/110/ 116. MATH 109 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Calculus for Business and Social Sciences II Prerequisite: " C - " grade. M A T H 108 or 110 or 116 with at least a Trigonometric functions, applications o f the definite integral, integration techniques. Functions of several independent variables, partial derivatives, extrema, Lagrange multipliers, multiple integrals, some techniques for solving differential equations, systems o f linear equations and matrix algebra. N o duplicate credit w i l l be given for M A T H 109/111/ 126. MATH 116 Calculus I (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Prerequisites: M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R completion within the past year of: M a t h 12 with an " A " grade; or M a t h 12 and Calculus 12 with at least a " B " grade i n each; or M A T H 105 or B M T H 046 with at least a " C - " grade. Corequisite: M A T H 117 Course content: L i m i t s , continuity, the derivative, rules of differentiation, implicit differentiation, parametric curves, related rates, curve sketching, optimization, linear approximations, transcendental functions, indeterminate forms, anti-differentiation. Throughout the course a strong emphasis is placed on the geometric interpretation of the concepts of calculus. Note: Duplicate credit will not be given for MATH Note: This course is intended for students in the Engineering program. 108/110/116. MATH 117 (1) Applications of Calculus I Corequisite: (1,1.0) (F.S.Su) M A T H 116 Course content: Applications of differential calculus with an emphasis on the use of technology in mathematics. Topics include: models, curve fitting, Taylor polynomials, numerical stability, numerical derivatives, rates of change, optimization. Note: Duplicate credit will not be given for MATH and MATH 117. MATH 124 Discrete Mathematics I (3) 110 (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Prerequisite: Math Placement Test (MPT) OR completion within the last year of: Math 12 with an A " grade; or Math 12 and Calculus 12 with at least a "B" grade in each; or M A T H 105 or B M T H 046 with at least a "C-" grade. M A survey of fundamental topics in discrete mathematics including: mathematical proofs using direct arguments, indirect arguments, and induction; the algebra of sets; combinatorics; functions and relations; and graph theory. This course stresses the special role of discrete mathematics in computing science. MATH 126 Calculus II (3) (4,0.0) (F.S.Su) Prerequisites: M A T H 110 or 116 with at least a "C-" grade. Corequisite: M A T H 127 Course Content: A study of the anti-derivative, the integral, techniques of integration, applications of the integral, differential equations, polar coordinates, sequences, infinite series and Taylor's Theorem. Continued emphasis on the geometric interpretation of the concepts of calculus. Note: Duplicate credit will not be given for 109/111/126. MATH 127 (1) Applications of Calculus II MATH 152 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Linear Algebra and Differential Equations MATH (1,1,0) (F,S,Su) Prerequisite: M A T H 110 or 117 with at least a'"C-" grade or permission of instructor. Corequisite: M A T H 126 Course content: Applications of integral calculus with an emphasis on the use of technology in mathematics. Topics include: numerical integration, introduction to a computer algebra system, applications in science, differential equations, sequences and series. Corequisite: M A T H 126 An introduction to systems of linear equations and matrices, vector spaces and linear transformations, determinants, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, inner product spaces. The theory will be applied to first order linear differential equations, first order linear systems and engineering topics. MATH 190 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Mathematics for Elementary Teachers Prerequisite: Math 11 with at least a " C " or permission of the instructor. A study of selected topics in mathematics so that future elementary teachers gain an appreciation of the power, beauty, and importance of mathematics. Topics include: problem solving, number systems, geometry, measurement, probability and statistics. This course does not normally count for credit in science programs. The M a t h Department offers a full secondyear university transfer program in math. Students planning to take 200 level math should seek advice from M a t h instructors. MATH 200 Linear Algebra Prerequisite: grade. (3) (4.0,0) (F) M A T H 111 or 126 with at least a " C - " An introduction to systems of linear equations and matrices, vector spaces and linear transformations, determinants, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, inner product spaces. Theorems and proofs are an important component of the course. MATH 204 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Probability and Statistics for Applications Prerequisite: M A T H 108 or 110 or 116 with at least a " C - " grade or permission of the instructor. A calculus-based introduction to classical and nonparametric techniques for inferences about means, variances and analysis of variance. The emphasis will be on problem formulation, models, assumptions and interpretation. Regularly scheduled "labs" will introduce course participants to appropriate supporting statistical software. Note: Duplicate credit will not be given for MATH 111/127. Course Descriptions 247 MATH 205 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Introduction to Probability and Statistics Prerequisite: grade. M A T H 111 or 126 with at least a " C - " A calculus-based study o f probability, discrete and continuous random variables, mathematical expectation, moment generating functions, Central L i m i t Theorem, sampling from normal populations, confidence intervals, hypothesis testing. MATH 215 (3) Introduction to Analysis (4,0,0) (F.S)* Prerequisite: M A T H 111 or 126 with at least a " C + " grade or permission o f instructor. A course for students who plan to proceed in mathematics. L o g i c , sets, functions, limits o f sequences and series; introduction to continuity, the derivative, Riemann Integral. * M A T H 215 to be offered i n the fall or spring term when sufficient student demand is evident. MATH 224 Discrete Mathematics II Prerequisite: (3) (4,0.0) (F) MDIA 065 Media Studies (3) (3,0,0) (F) A n introductory analysis and historical overview o f media, especially f i l m , combining aesthetic concepts, production techniques, and theoretical foundations. See admission requirements in the M e d i a Resources Section. This is a M e d i a Resources Certificate program course. MDIA 100 (3) Introduction to Video Production (3,0,0) (F) This course concentrates on the basic skills involved in video production with an emphasis on camera techniques and visual sequencing. MDIA 101 New Media Literacy (3) (3,0,0) (F) This course is an introduction to digital technology and multimedia. It w i l l introduce students to the characteristics, applications and analysis o f multimedia. This is a M e d i a Resources Certificate program course. M A T H 124 with at least a " C - " grade. A continuation o f the study o f discrete mathematics from M A T H 124. The emphasis is on combinatorial analysis, including generating functions, set theory and graph theory, with applications to computing science including representations, algorithms, and complexity. (3) MATH 230 Calculus III Prerequisite: grade. Corequisite: tions; linear systems; power series techniques; Laplace transform method; the phase plane, applications. (4.0.0) (F) M A T H 111 or 126 with at least a " C - " MDIA 102 (3) Introduction to Photography (3,0,0) (F) This course is an introduction to photographic skills, emphasizing fundamental skills i n camera and image control. This is a M e d i a Resources Certificate program course. MDIA 105 Project Design (1.5) (1.5,0,5) (F) A n introduction to project design. Through the analysis M A T H 200 or permission of instructor. Analytical geometry o f three dimensions; partial differentiation, applications; double and triple integrals; transformations to various coordinate systems. (3) MATH 231 Calculus IV (4,0,0) (S) of media production, students learn how to write an effective design plan for a media project. MDIA 120 (1.5) Film Studies for Animation Prerequisite: M A T H 230 and M A T H 152 or 200 with at least a " C - " grade in each. This course w i l l familiarize students with structural elements and basic principles o f filmmaking. Students w i l l develop a " f i l m sense" which is a basic s k i l l of storyboard artists and filmmakers. Vector calculus; line and surface integrals; Green's Theorem; vector fields; divergence theorem; Stokes's Theorem; applications. MDIA 142 (1.5) (3,0,0) (F) Computer Managed Learning and Training MATH 235 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Introduction to Differential Equations Prerequisite: M A T H 200 and 230 with at least a " C - " grade in each. A n introduction to ordinary differential equations; first order equations; higher order linear differential equa- Course 248 Descriptions This course examines the concepts underlying the learning process and how the computer can be used to enhance this process. The instructional design process w i l l be examined and w i l l provide a platform for the investigation and application o f a process to plan, produce, implement, and evaluate computer-delivered learning and training strategies. MDIA 150 (3) Introduction to Animation (3,0,0) (S) A n introduction to the theory and application o f animation techniques. Computer animation is the primary medium in this course. MDIA 156 Computers in Media (3) (1.5) of video technology, components o f a complete video system, and a comparison o f different formats. MDIA 173 (1.5) (3,0,0) (S) Educational Media Applications: Audio A n introduction to the fundamental principles o f sound generation and reproduction, and to the terminology, hardware, and systems related to audio components. Applications o f audio technology, equipment maintenance, and critical analysis o f product specifications are given special emphasis. (3) (3,6,0) (F) A n introduction to basic production techniques; components include interviewing, scripting, dubbing, editing, m i x i n g , and packaging. The course also covers the operation of microphones, tape recorders and dub/ mix facilities. MDIA 182 (3) Advanced Audio Production (3,6,0) (S) The application of photographic techniques, with emphasis on combining shot sequences to tell a story, as w e l l as editing, layout, presentation, and basic studio operation. MDIA 186 (3) Computers in Media Production (3,3,0) (S) A n introduction to the use of computers i n pre-production to increase productivity. Emphasis is placed on computer application i n graphics, budgeting, storyboarding and planning for the media. (1.5,0,0) (S) A n introduction to video systems, including a history MDIA 181 Basic Audio Production (3) (3,0,0) (S) Basic computer skills in w o r d processing and introductory training i n graphics and desktop publishing applications as they relate to media production. This is a M e d i a Resources Certificate program course. MDIA 172 Video Technology I MDIA 185 Advanced Photography MDIA 195 Photography (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (F) A n introduction to the areas of darkroom maintenance, photographic chemistry, print finishing, small and medium format copy camera, and relevant copying materials used in a variety o f media applications. MDIA 200 Intermediate Video I (3) (3,6,0) (S) This course is designed to build on the basics o f video recording and sequencing taught i n M D I A 100. Students w i l l focus on lighting, audio recording and editing for single camera productions. Workshops and exercises w i l l form a major part o f this course as w e l l as a final production w h i c h students w i l l produce in production groups. MDIA 202 Intermediate Video II (3) (3,3,0) (S) In this course students w i l l learn the fundamentals o f developing, writing, and presenting material suitable for basic video documentary productions. (3,0,0) (S) The application of production techniques i n a variety of situations, including multi-track recording and m i x i n g , documentaries, location recording, radio plays, film and video soundtracks and music recording, often using the department's sound production studio. MDIA 183 (3) (3,6,0) (F) Theory and Applications of Photographic Production A n introduction to the photographic base relative to audiovisual production, including the camera and its controls, darkroom techniques, photosensitive materials and their control, and visual reproduction. MDIA 231 (3) Digital Video Post Production (3,0,0) (S) This course provides the student with a hands on introduction to digital image manipulation for commercial video production. The A v i d non linear editing system w i l l be the main vehicle for teaching digital editing and effects. MDIA 250 (1.5) Documentary Scriptwriting (1.5,0,0) (F) A n overview of the production planning process with an emphasis on the roles o f scripts, concepts, treatments and storyboards i n documentary production. Course Descriptions 249 (1.5,6,0) (S) MOA. 102 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Keyboarding Skill and Speed Development The comparative study o f media technical systems and their operation; evaluation o f various resources available i n the L o w e r M a i n l a n d ; design and/or modification of systems for media production and delivery; and interface o f different types of systems. Remedial drills, power drills, short and sustained timed MDIA 263 Production Resources (1.5) MDIA 271 (3) Educational Television Systems (3,6,0) (F) writings to increase speed and accuracy i n medical keyboarding. MOA. 103 (3) Medical Machine Transcription (4.2,0) (S) Prerequisite: M O A . 100 & 111 Practice i n transcribing medical consultation letters and This course assumes background in basic portable video tape equipment and operations covered i n M D I A 200 and 202 and is designed to develop the students' ability to effectively use multi-camera studio setups for the production of educational programs. These programs are of a quality suitable for cablecast or broadcast on the Knowledge Network. hospital reports from dictation equipment. This course MDIA 299 Major Projects ethics, appointments, patient record, filing, reception entails a mandatory two-hour lab. MOA. 105 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Medical Administrative Procedures I Students w i l l learn office procedures specific to the medical office including time management, medical (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (S) skills, and medical billing. Students w i l l work in production groups to produce programs for outside clients. Students are responsible for all aspects o f these productions from contact to completion. MDIA 300 (6) Advanced Video Production (6,3,0) (F) This advanced production course develops students' basic production skills (taught i n M D I A 100, 200 & 202) to a level suitable to produce for cablecast, broadcast and instructional and corporate settings. MDIA 303 (3) (3,6,0) (S) The Media Specialist in Education and Training A course concerned with the uses o f media for motivation, information transmission, emotive learning, and self-awareness. A field practicum course exploring the relationship o f the media specialist to education in genera] and the role of the media generalist in educational and instructional communication. MOA. 106 (0.75) (2,0,0) (S) Medical Administrative Procedures II Prerequisite: M O A . 105 Continuation o f M O A . 105. Students w i l l be able to perform financial recordkeeping specific to the medical office. MOA. 107 Clinical Procedures I (1.5) (2,4,0) (F) Prerequisite: St. John's Standard First A i d Certificate Students w i l l learn about clinical procedures pertinent to the doctor's office and the hospital setting. The course includes general information about physical and mental health; medications and health products. Students w i l l learn how to use and maintain medical office equipment. There is a mandatory lab component. MOA. 108 (1.5) (2,4,0) (S) Clinical Procedures II and Pharmacology Prerequisite: M O A . 107 MDIA 304 (3) (3,0,0) (S) Educational Media Applications: Computers Continuation o f M O A . 107. There is a mandatory lab component. A theoretical and hands-on introduction to the use o f computers i n education. Includes producing and evaluating computer-assisted instruction packages and computer-assisted video instruction. MOA. 100 (3) Medical Document Processing I (4,2,0) (F) MOA. 109 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Anatomy, Physiology and Pathology I A study o f structure, function and interrelationships of the organic systems of the body. C o m m o n medical disorders, operative procedures and related terminology w i l l be studied in conjunction with the systems. Prerequisite: Keyboarding speed of 35 w p m Keyboarding skill development and introduction to M S W o r d 6.0; basic to advanced applications. MOA. 110 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Anatomy, Physiology and Pathology II Prerequisite: M O A . 109 A continuation o f M O A . 109. Course 250 Descriptions MOA. 111 Medical Terminology I (3) (4,0,0) (F) Introduction to Greek and Latin prefixes, suffixes, roots, and combining forms c o m m o n to medical terminology. Students w i l l aquire the necessary skills to define, pronounce and correctly spell medical terms. MOA. 112 Medical Terminology II Prerequisite: M O A . I l l (3) (4.0,0) (3) M.T. 350 The Influence of Music (3) (3,0,0) (F) A study o f the physical and psychological impact o f music, and its components for music therapy. A study of healing and music in various cultures. M.T. 360 Music Therapy I (3) (4.0.0) (F) Continuation, reinforcement of terminology in M O A 111. This course presents the development o f music as therapy, the clientele groups and their needs, and the potential of music as a therapeutic medium. MOA. 115 (1.5) Directed Work Experience M.T. 361 Music Therapy II (2,0,54) (S) F o l l o w i n g successful completion of term two, a medical office/clinic or hospital work practicum is arranged for the student. Before the work placement, the student w i l l be required to attend career preparation lectures w h i c h w i l l include practice sessions for the employment interview. MOA. 121 (1.5) Medical Document Processing II Prerequisite: M O A . 100 (2,2,0) (F) Advanced w o r d processing applications are used i n a medical environment. MOA. 122 (1.5) Computers in Health Care Prerequisite: M O A . 105, M O A . 100. (2,0,0) (S) (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) A n experiential study o f free and structured improvisation forms for groups and solo work. M.T. 330 Basic Clinical Skills (3) (4,0,0) (S) This course presents three music therapy styles w i t h a focus on theory, analysis, and practice. Included are Developmental M u s i c Therapy, Nordoff/Robbins improvisational style, and the use of music therapy i n in-patient psychotherapy. M.T. 364 (3) (3,0,0) (F) Disabling Conditions — Adulthood A n introduction to anatomy and physiology, normal and abnormal, and practical elements o f standard treatment. M.T. 370 (3) Disabling Conditions — Childhood (4,0,0) (S) A basic introduction to abnormal child development and some major intervention approaches. Students w i l l be introduced to the use o f computers in the medical office. Students w i l l acquire skills using a microcomputer to gather patient demographic data, set up appointments, process claims for submission to M S P , process remittance reports and accounts receivable. M.T. 320 Improvisation I (3) (3,0,3) (F) A n introduction to the basic concepts o f observation, assessment and goal setting, including six weeks o f introductory field work and in-class observations. M.T. 380 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Interpersonal Skills for Music Therapists Communication and observation exercises to increase awareness o f ingrained skills and habits, and to introduce new alternatives. M.T. 391 Practicum II (6) (2.0,6) (S) Field work, in w h i c h students design, lead and document music therapy sessions, in consultation with staff supervision. W e e k l y seminars examine practicum issues. M.T. 420 Improvisation II - Guitar (1.0) (1.5,0,0) (S) Group leading using guitar improvisation, plus exploring current popular styles and idioms. M.T. 340 (1.5) Midi Synthesis Technology (2,0,0) (F) A n introduction to the use o f m i d i technology for the therapeutic setting. M.T. 450 (1.5) The Influence of Music II (2.0,0) (F) A continuation o f lecture and experiential exposure to the influence o f music i n conjunction with the expressive arts. Course Descriptions 251 M.T. 451 (1.5) Music and the Creative Arts (2,0,0) (S) A n experiential exposure to leading creative arts activities which can be used in conjunction with music: eg. dance, visual arts, poetry. M.T. 460 Music Therapy III (3) (4,0,0) (F) A continuation o f the presentation o f music therapy styles, for psychiatry, palliative care, music education and in healing, including the work o f Helen B o n n y and M a r y Priestley. Assessment and treatment planning w i l l be covered in depth. MTEC 102 (.75) Welcome to the Internet (taught M.T. 461 Music Therapy IV (3,0,0) (S) This course focuses on professional attitudes, skills and awareness including a significant section on counsell i n g skills for music therapists. Students learn j o b hunting/creation skills and practise leading inservices and workshops. M.T. 462 Principles of Research (3) (3,0,0) (S) over the internet) This course introduces the Internet and the W o r l d W i d e Web including: protocols, ISPs, web browser configuration, and search engines. Prerequisite: Access to a networthy computer with a direct or dial-up account with an ISP, Netscape N a v i gator v. 4 or Internet Explorer v. 4 and an e-mail address. MTEC 103 (.75) Web Design Fundamentals (taught (3) online (online) (F.S) online over the (online) (F.S) internet) In this course students w i l l learn the fundamental design principles used when publishing on the W o r l d Wide Web. Prerequisite: Access to a networthy computer with a direct or dial-up account with an ISP, Netscape N a v i gator v. 4 or Internet Explorer v. 4 and an e-mail address. MTEC 104 Planning a Web Site (taught basic statistical procedures. (1,0,0) (S) In this course students w i l l study content mapping, project planning and information design as it relates to web site production. Students w i l l write a web site design plan suitable for a client. (2,0,6) (F) Prerequisite: Access to a networthy computer with a direct or dial-up account with an ISP, Netscape N a v i gator v. 4 or Internet Explorer v. 4 and an e-mail address. (1.5) A continuation of Improvisation II. M.T. 490 Practicum III (6) over the (online) (F.S) A n introduction to elementary research designs and M.T. 480 , Improvisation III online (.38) internet) F i e l d work and weekly seminars. (Refer to M . T . 391.) M.T. 491 Practicum IV (6) (2.0,6) (S) (taught F i e l d work and weekly seminars. (Refer to M . T . 391.) M.T. 510 Internship (9) l ,000 hours of clinical field work, including monthly seminars. MTEC 101 MAC Operating System (two 4-hour (.75) (3,0,1) (F,S) sessions) A n introduction to the M a c operating system for students new to the Macintosh computer or in need of a refresher course. Course 252 Descriptions MTEC 105 Interface Design online over the (.38 (online) (F.S) internet) Interface design involves the presentation o f information on the computer screen and the interaction of the user with that information. This course examines the principles o f interface design as it relates to a web site. Prerequisite: Access to a networthy computer with a direct or dial-up account with an ISP, Netscape N a v i gator v. 4 or Internet Explorer v. 4 and an e-mail address. MTEC 106 (.75) (3,0,1) (F.S) Introductory Web Site Production (four 4-hour sessions) This course teaches the web page authoring program A d o b e P a g e m i l l . Students w i l l create a personal web page using this software and in the process learn the basics o f web page production. Prerequisite: basic computer skills and online experience. MTEC108 (.80) Intermediate Web Design (3,0,1) (F.S) MTEC 115 (.75) Web Site Administration (3,0,1) (F.S) (four 4-hour sessions) (four 4-hour sessions) A n intermediate course i n designing for the W e b screen. C o l o u r theory and palettes, image compression and screen layout are covered. This course covers site administration including: locating a host ISP, D o m a i n Name registration, posting a site using F T P , analysing server logs and site security. Y o u sill also learn how to work with U N I X and N T web servers. Co-requisite: M T E C 109 Prerequisite: W e b Design Fundamentals M T E C 103 or Prerequisite: previous experience. MTEC 109 Photoshop for the Web (.75) (3,0,1) (F.S) M T E C 106 or equivalent experience. MTEC 116 Web-Site Marketing (.75) (online) (F.S) (four 4-hour sessions) (taught online over the internet) Learn how to prepare J P E G and G I F graphics for the web using A d o b e Photoshop. Covers basic features o f Photoshop including tools, layers, resolution and colour palettes. Includes an introduction to reflective and transparency image scanning. Marketing a web site is one o f the most important aspects of web publishing. In this course you w i l l learn how to write a marketing plan for your web site. Prerequisite: M T E C 103 or equivalent experience. Experience with M a c i n t o s h or W i n d o w s operating systems. MTEC 110 HTML Authoring (.75) (3,0,1) (F.S) A n intermediate course i n web authoring. Learn the H y p e r t e x t M a r k - u p Language used to create web pages. Covers the following tags: anchors, links, image maps, background and inline graphics, tables, frames, and embedded media. M T E C 106 or equivalent experience. MTEC 112 Web Animation MTEC 117 Javascript (.80) (3,0,1) (F,S) (four 4-hour sessions) (four 4-hour sessions) Prerequisite: Prerequisite: Access to a networthy computer with a direct or dial-up account with an ISP, Netscape N a v i gator v. 4 or Internet Explorer v. 4 and an e-mail address. (.40) (3.0.1) (F.S) (two 4 -hour sessions) Learn how to turn simple graphics into a G I F animation for your web page. U s i n g Photoshop and G I F B u i l d e r software y o u w i l l learn the basics o f animation and create a G I F animation. Prerequisite: Experience with M a c i n t o s h or W i n d o w s operating systems and A d o b e Photoshop. Javascript is a scripting language developed by Netscape used to include interactive components on a web page. In this course you w i l l learn how to write javascript and incorporate it into H T M L . Prerequisite: M T E C 110 or equivalent experience. MTEC 118 (.80) (3,0,1) (F.S) Advanced Photoshop for the Web (four 4-hour sessions) A n advanced course using A d o b e Photoshop for web graphics. Includes image compositing and retouching, progressive J P E G and P N G graphic formats, masks and channels. Prerequisite: M T E C 109 or equivalent experience. MTEC 119 Advanced HTML (.80) (3,0.1) (F.S) (four 4-hour sessions) MTEC 113 (.80) (3.0,1) (F.S) Embedded Media Sound for the Web (four 4-hour sessions) Increasingly, sound is being incorporated into web pages. Learn how to digitize, edit and compress audio for inclusion i n a web page using M a c r o m e d i a Sound Edit 16 software. Prerequisite: A n advanced course in H T M L coding. Learn how to add interactive components to your web page. Including forms, counters, calls to external media, secure sockets layer, embedding javascript and cookies. Prerequisite: M T E C 110 or equivalent experience. M T E C 106 or equivalent experience. Course Descriptions 253 MUS. 090 Digitized Sound (1.5) (3,0.0) (S) A u d i o is an important component in computer-based multimedia. In addition to the fundamental concepts of digital audio, students learn the techniques for digitizing and editing sound samples for use in interactive multi-media presentations. MUS. 100 Music Theory I Corequisite: M U S . I I 2 . (3) (4,0,0) (F) A study of music from c. 1600 to 1800 with an emphasis on diatonic harmony up to simple modulation. The student w i l l learn control o f chord progression and voice leading. MUS. 101 Music Theory II Prerequisite: M U S . 100. Corequisite: M U S . 113. (3) (4,0,0) (S) Continued study of diatonic harmony, to include treatment of all diatonic triads and sevenths, principles of voice leading, and techniques o f contrapuntal expansion. Analysis o f works in binary and ternary forms. MUS. 110 Class Strings I (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) during this course and the three subsequent levels. Theoretical concepts are applied at the keyboard and include diatonic triads and sevenths o f the major key, all major, minor and modal tetrachords. A weekly lab evaluates material covered i n class. Students practise on the department's pianos. MUS. 115 Class Piano II Prerequisite: M U S . 114. (D (2,2,0) (S) A continuation of M U S . 114. In addition, keyboard sequences, arpeggios and major scales are introduced along with easy original repertoire. MUS. 120 Music History I (3) (3,0,*) (F) The study o f music as an acoustical and structural phenomenon. T o survey the major monuments o f world music history i n relation to the function o f music in a given culture. The aim w i l l be to introduce music as a global concept, drawing on musics from Eastern and Western musical traditions. * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. MUS. 121 Music History II Prerequisite: M U S . 120. (3) (3,0,*) (S) A study o f music history o f the M e d i e v a l and Renaissance periods. A practical study o f the violin family. * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. MUS. 111 Class Strings II (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) MUS. 122 (1.0) Lyric Diction: English and German A continuation o f M U S . 110. (2.0,0) A n exploration of the application o f the principles o f MUS. 112 (1.5) Ear Training and Sight Singing I Corequisite: M U S . 100. (3.0,0) (F) medium o f the International Phonetic Alphabet ( I P A ) . Study of the aural recognition o f intervals, chords, and harmonic movement. The student w i l l learn to: transcribe melodies and rhythms; sight sing using Solfege and scale degrees; read rhythms. MUS. 113 (1.5) Ear Training and Sight Singing II Prerequisite: M U S . 112. Corequisite: M U S . 101. (D 254 (2,0,0) A n exploration o f the application o f the principles o f diction for singers in French and Italian through the medium o f the International Phonetic Alphabet ( I P A ) . MUS. 200 Music Theory III Prerequisite: M U S . 101. Corequisite: M U S . 212. (2,2,0) (F) This course is designed for students who wish to learn basic keyboard skills. Reading, improvisation, transposition and harmonization are the skills developed Course Descriptions MUS. 123 (1.0) Lyric Diction: French and Italian (3,0.0) (S) A continuation o f M U S . 112. MUS. 114 Class Piano I diction for singers i n English and German through the (3) (4,0,0) (F) A study of advanced tonal procedures: review o f nonchord tones, mixture, seventh chords, applied V and V I I , diatonic modulation, seventh chords with added dissonance. A detailed study o f compound ternary and rondo forms. Investigation of the fugue. MUS. 201 Music Theory IV Prerequisite: Corequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) M U S . 200. M U S . 213. (1.5) (2.0,0) (F) (1.5) MUS. 220 Music History III Prerequisite: (2,2,0) (S) (2.0.0) (S) (3) (3,0,*) (F) M U S . 120 and M U S . 121. A survey of music history o f the Baroque period and Classical period. * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. MUS. 221 Music History IV A practical study o f the w o o d w i n d family. MUS. 211 Class Woodwinds II (1.5) A practical study o f the percussion family. A study o f chromaticism: the phrygian II, augmented sixth chords, other chromatic chords, chromatic voiceleading techniques, chromaticism i n larger contexts. A detailed study o f sonata, sonata-rondo, and variation forms. MUS. 210 Class Woodwinds I MUS. 219 Class Percussion Prerequisite: (3,0.*) (S) (3) M U S . 220. A survey of music history o f the Romantic period and the 20th century. A continuation of M U S . 210. * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. MUS. 212 (1.5) Ear Training & Sight Singing III Prerequisite: Corequisite: (3,0.0) (F) MUS. 360 Kodaly Methodology M U S . 113. M U S . 200. MUS. 213 (1.5) Ear Training and Sight Singing IV (3.0.0) (S) M U S . 212. M U S . 201. A continuation of M U S . 212. MUS. 214 Class Piano III (1) (2,2,0) (F) For students who have taken M U S . 115 or have had previous keyboard experience. Students are introduced to c o m m o n idiomatic accompaniment patterns as w e l l as four-part chorale studies, keyboard sequences, minor scales and chords. Basic keyboard techniques are emphasized including relaxation, touch, rotation, weight transfer and their musical application in simple repertoire. The lab hour is utilized to develop sight reading skills at the keyboard. MUS. 215 Class Piano IV (1) (2,2,0) (S) A continuation of M U S . 214 with increased complexity of repertoire and technique. MUS. 218 Class Brass (1.5,0.0) (F) This w i l l provide a knowledge o f K o d a l y methodology and the skills necessary to use this teaching method i n a classroom. A continuation o f M U S . 113. Prerequisite: Corequisite: (1.5) (1.5) (2,2,0) (F) MUS. 361 (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (S) Method Studies in Music Education: Orff Methodology This w i l l provide a knowledge o f Orff methodology and the skills necessary to use this teaching method in a classroom. NSCP 305 Network II (3) (3,0,1) (F,S,Su) Administering Microsoft N T Server ( M S #803). Learn and gain experience on the many features of the W i n d o w s N T server including user accounts, group accounts, file and folder permissions, shared folders, printing, and security. NSCP 325 Network III (3) (3,0,1) (F.S.Su) N o v e l l 4.11 NetWare Administration ( N o v e l l #520). This course is your introduction to the field o f local area network administration, protocols and standards, hardware and software components and P C links. U p o n successful completion of this course, you may elect to write your N o v e l l exam w h i c h grants a C N A — Certified NetWare Administrator — designation. A practical study o f the brass family. Course Descriptions 255 NSCP 329 Network IV (3) (3,0,1) (F.S.Su) OTEC 112 (1.5) Language Skill Development (2,0,0) (F) W i n d o w s N T Core Technologies ( M S #922). This course w i l l train students to apply the correct This course provides the advanced skills to install, configure, optimize, administer and perform day-to-day management tasks i n a Microsoft W i n d o w s N T environment. Fault tolerance, NetWare integration and migration, server-based installation and troubleshooting w i l l be introduced together with advanced administration techniques. The student is also introduced to T C P / I P , D H C P , W I N S , D N S , R A S Server, and client administration. techniques o f written communications to their proof- NSCP 331 Network V (3) (3.0,1) (F.S.Su) reading, verifying, and editing. OTEC 113 (4.5) (6,0,0) (S) Business English and Communications This course w i l l train students i n grammar, spelling, punctuation, correct w o r d usage, proofreading skills and business writing. OTEC 115 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Business Systems and Procedures This course w i l l review basic math skills and train Supporting M S Server 4.0 — Enterprise Technologies students to correctly compute and accurately maintain ( M S #689). business records. This course allows networking professionals to support Microsoft W i n d o w s N T i n an enterprise environment. Y o u w i l l learn to design, implement and support the W i n d o w s N T Server Network Operating System i n a multi-domain enterprise environment. NSCP 333 Network VI (3) (3.0,1) (F.S.Su) Internetworking M S T C P / I P on W i n d o w s N T 4.0 ( M S #688). T C P / I P is "the" internetworking protocol and this course w i l l cover the fundamentals o f this protocol with Microsoft W i n d o w s N T . Topics include the subnet mask, static/dynamic IP routing, D H C P , W I N S , D N S , S N M P and more. NSCP 335 Network VII (3) (3.0,1) (F,S,Su) Creating and M a n a g i n g a W e b Server using M S IIS 4.0 ( M S #936). Learn to install and configure a web server. Y o u w i l l gain an understanding o f the product's architecture and perform the procedures to install, configure and support an Internet Information Server. Self Study Networking Essentials (#578) This is a self-study course providing a foundation i n network design, architecture, standards and protocols. The self-study guide by Microsoft Press enables you to harness the power on networking technologies. OTEC 111 Business English I (3) (4,0,0) (F) The course w i l l review the fundamental principles o f grammar, spelling, and punctuation. M e m o writing w i l l be covered. Course 256 Descriptions OTEC 117 (3) Accounting Procedures I (4,0,0) (F.S) This course introduces students to the theory o f accounting and to tasks performed i n the basic accounting cycle. Emphasis is placed on correct analysis, accuracy, and thoroughness as w e l l as on independent decision making. OTEC 118 (1.5) (2.2,0) (S.Su) Introduction to Computerized Accounting A n introduction to S i m p l y A c c o u n t i n g . This course provides hands on experience using G L , A P , A R and Payroll modules. OTEC 119 (4.5) (6.4.0) (S) Accounting Procedures I — Office Assistant ESL This course introduces E S L students to the theory o f accounting and the basic accounting cycle. Emphasis is placed on correct analysis, accuracy, and on independent decision making. OTEC 123 (4.5) Word Processing Procedures (6.2.0) (S) This course w i l l instruct students i n the theory and practical applications o f a word processing program. This course w i l l also build keyboarding speed and accuracy skills. OTEC 124 (6) Microcomputer Applications (8.2.0) (S) This course w i l l provide a survey of M S Office 95 ( W o r d 7, Access 7, E x c e l 7 and Power Point 7) and improve keyboarding skills. OTEC 140 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S.Su) Accounting Administrative Procedures Through simulations, students w i l l learn accounting administrative procedures for accounts payable, accounts receivable, payroll, and bank reconciliations. OTEC 143 (4.5) (6,2,0) (F) Introduction to Microcomputer Applications T o introduce students to some o f the theoretical aspects of microcomputers, hardware and software, theory and practice o f word processing, and correct keyboarding techniques to increase speed and accuracy on a microcomputer. OTEC 144 (4.5) Microcomputer Applications (6,2,0) (S) Prerequisites: O T E C 143 or equivalent. This course provides students with an overview o f technological advances in office automation, the use o f database and spreadsheet microcomputer applications. OTEC 146 (6) Microcomputer Applications I (8,2,0) (F) This course w i l l train students in the theory and practical applications o f a word processing software program and a database program. This course w i l l also build keyboarding speed and accuracy skills. OTEC 147 (4.5) Microcomputer Applications II (6,2,0) (S) OTEC 150 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Administrative and Business Procedures This course w i l l introduce students to the basic office administrative procedures associated with the modern business office. The students w i l l develop the skills to correctly compute and accurately maintain business records. OTEC 211 Business Writing (4,0.0) (S) (3) Prerequisite: O T E C 111 or equivalent. This course utilizes the computer to improve the student's quality o f grammar, spelling, and w o r d usage, and to develop and/or improve composition skills. OTEC 212 Business English II (4,0,0) (S) (3) Prerequisite: O T E C 111 or equivalent. This course utilizes the computer to assist students i n developing/improving their letter and memo writing skills. Emphasis w i l l be placed on sentence and paragraph structure and composition skills. OTEC 215 (3) Computerized Accounting (4,0,0) (Su) Prerequisite: O T E C 117 or equivalent. Prerequisites: O T E C 146 or equivalent. Students w i l l become proficient in the use of a w o r d processing windows program. Students w i l l also be introduced to spreadsheet programs for both D O S and w i n d o w environments. T h i s course w i l l introduce students to technological developments and advances in office automation. OTEC 148 (3) Administrative Applications window environments. Students w i l l also receive an overview o f technological advances in office automation. (4,0,0) (S) Students w i l l apply their knowledge o f records control, time management, and other administrative procedures to office simulations. T h i s course w i l l provide reinforcement of procedures used in word processing by producing complex documents which require formatting, computer software operations, and language s k i l l decisions. OTEC 149 (4.5) (6,2,0) (S) Microcomputer Business Applications The students w i l l review the math functions related to spreadsheets. In addition, the students w i l l become proficient users of spreadsheets in both D O S and This course is designed to instruct the student in the use o f the accounting application program, A C C P A C , for entering, storing and retrieving records, and producing standard financial reports. OTEC 217 (3) Accounting Procedures II (4,4,0) (S,Su) Prerequisite: O T E C 117 with a m i n i m u m o f a " B " grade or permission of the instructor. This course is a continuation o f O T E C 117 with emphasis on accounting systems and procedures. Business simulations are used extensively throughout the course. OTEC 218 (1.5) (2,2,0) (S.Su) Accounting — Comprehensive Project Students w i l l continue the study o f the accounting fundamentals begun in O T E C 117 and 217. Emphasis w i l l be placed on the application o f these fundamentals to a comprehensive simulated business situation representative of those encountered in business. Course Descriptions 257 OTEC 219 Computer Accounting (4.5) (6,0,0) (Su) Prerequisite: O T E C 117 or equivalent. A hands-on course to develop proficiency i n the use o f A C C P A C for completing accounting procedures, including accounts receivable, accounts payable, payroll, general ledger, and inventory control. (3) O T E C 220 (4,2,0) (S) Accounting Procedures III Prerequisite: O T E C 117. This course provides students with business simulations handling accounts payable, accounts receivable, payroll bank reconciliations, and an integrated small business simulation. O T E C 233 (3) (4,2,0) (Su) Document and Web Page Design Prerequisites: lents. O T E C 146 and O T E C 147 or equiva- Students w i l l use the graphics capabilities o f desktop publishing to enhance the appearance of letterheads, reports, tables, brochures, news releases, etc. O T E C 245 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Introductory Microcomputer Applications Students w i l l learn to use spreadsheets for specialized office procedures including the creation o f forms, reports, and spreadsheets. OTEC 251 Interpersonal Skills (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) This course w i l l provide students with an understanding of interpersonal communication techniques that can positively influence job performance. Students w i l l practice in-person and telephone responding, customer service and issue resolution skills in a supportive environment. OTEC 252 (3) Organizational Behaviour (4,0,0) (S) This course w i l l provide students with an understanding of interpersonal communication techniques that can positively influence performance on the job. This course w i l l also identify the positive administrative and supervisory skills that program graduates w i l l need as they wish to assume additional career responsibility i n the future. OTEC 254 (1.5) (2,0,0) (Su) Human Resource Management Skills This course describes the key activities o f a human resources department. A n H R assistant requires the Course 258 Descriptions ability to help employees with personnel issues. Problem solving, staff training, and interviewing are some o f the employee relations skills that w i l l be examined. OTEC 300 (1.5) (2,0,70) (S.Su) Directed Work Experience This course involves both lectures on j o b search techniques and resume preparation. In addition, at least a 30-hour work practicum must be completed i n an industry placement related to the student's program of study. PADM 200 (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) Local Government Administration in B.C. Prerequisite: Current employment in a M u n i c i p a l i t y , First Nations Government, Regional District, Improvement District or Supporting A g e n c y , and permission o f the instructor. This course w i l l include discussion of the structures and administration o f local governments, as w e l l as current issues i n local governance. Topics include: the history and purposes o f local government; how local governments are organized and administered, their powers and limitations; issues o f sustainability; relations with aboriginal governments; and issues o f public participation such as interest group lobbying and public consultation. PADM 201 (3) (3.0.1) (F.S) Local Government Services in B.C. Prerequisite: Current employment i n a M u n i c i p a l i t y , First Nations Government, Regional District, Improvement District or Supporting A g e n c y and permission of the instructor. This course w i l l examine the services that municipalities provide to their citizens in British C o l u m b i a . Services to be discussed include: Public W o r k s , Protective Services including Fire and Police, Regulatory Services, Water and Sewer Services, Refuse Collection and S o l i d Waste disposal, Recreation and Cultural Services, Environmental Protection Services, and Health Services. PADM 202 (3) Municipal Finance in B.C. (3,0,1) (F or S) Prerequisite: Current employment i n a M u n i c i p a l i t y , First Nations Government, Regional District, Improvement District or Supporting A g e n c y , and permission o f the instructor. This course w i l l examine the practices and issues o f M u n i c i p a l Finance i n British C o l u m b i a and w i l l include discussion o f the M u n i c i p a l A c t as it pertains to Financial Administration; the role o f provincial government i n Financial Administration, the role o f the M u n i c i p a l Finance Authority; the Finance Function at the Municipal/Regional levels; A c c o u n t i n g and Financial controls in Municipalities and Regional Districts; The Financial Planning Process including Short T e r m Budgets and L o n g T e r m Financial Planning; Financing Options; General Accounting/Treasury Functions; Assessment, Taxation, Collection. PADM 203 Municipal Law in B. C. (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Prerequisite: Current employment in a M u n i c i p a l i t y , First Nations Government, Regional District, Improvement District or Supporting A g e n c y , and permission of the instructor. This course focuses on legal principles pertaining to municipal government, with particular emphasis on its status, functions, and legal powers and constraints. It w i l l also introduce the principles o f administrative law, how legislation is created, and the powers and duties o f administrative agencies. classroom. A seminar is held at the end o f the practicums i n w h i c h the students meet and share what they learned from their placement. PAM. 343 (6) (0,0,16) (S) Management Seminar and External Practicum II Prerequisite: A continuation o f T H T R 342. PAM. 344 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Computer Applications in Performing Arts Administration Prerequisite: (2,0,4) (F) A n introduction to the skills and organizational systems necessary to run a performing arts organization. A major emphasis w i l l be company and season marketing strategies. PAM. 141 (3) Performing Arts Management II (2,0,4) (S) A continuation o f T H T R 240 with an emphasis on resource development. PAM. 340 (4.5) (0.0,12) (F) Internal Practicum in Performing Arts Management I Prerequisite: interview. This courses teaches the applications for computers i n Performing Arts Management. Students gain an understanding of basic word processing, database/ spreadsheet programs and desktop publishing. PAM. 345 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Public Relations, Marketing and Promotion Prerequisite: PAM. 140 (3) Performing Arts Management I interview. interview. In this course students examine how the image presented by an arts organization to the public affects their revenue potential. They learn how to shape that image and how to target and market to their potential audience. PAM. 346 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Organizational Structures in Performing Arts Prerequisite: interview. This course provides students with an understanding o f the organizational structures o f a performing arts organization. It examines the role o f boards o f directors, volunteeers, and paid personnel, and teaches the skills necessary to build successful relationships between these sectors. interview. This is a seven-week practicum in which students rotate through various positions in the Capilano PAM. 347 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Financial Management for the Performing Arts College Performing Arts Theatre. Prerequisite: PAM. 341 (4.5) (0,0.12) (S) Internal Practicum in Performing Arts Management II This course is designed to teach fundamental accounting procedures such as the preparation o f a general ledger, balance sheet, and income statement. Financial planning, budgeting, cash management, and payroll w i l l also be covered. Prerequisite: interview. A continuation o f T H T R 340. PAM. 342 (6) (0,0,16) (F) Management Seminar and External Practicum I Prerequisite: interview This is a seven-week placement with a professional performing arts organization in which the students can apply the knowledge and skills they learned i n the interview. PAM. 348 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Arts Advocacy, Grantsmanship and Fundraising Prerequisite: interview. This course teaches the skills necessary to become an effective advocate for the arts. The students learn how to successfully complete grant applications and how to plan and execute a successful fundraising campaign. Course Descriptions 259 PAM. 349 (1.5) Company and Tour Management Prerequisite: (2,0,0) (S) interview. The purpose o f this course is to provide students with an understanding of how a performing arts organization operates and how tours are planned and executed. PCAD 013 (3.0) (4,0.2) (F) introduction: Physical Disabilities Concepts Students learn the theoretical basis for the procedures needed by the Personal Care Attendant working with physically disabled clients o f all ages. The procedures include the principles o f body mechanics, medical asepsis, disabling conditions and their functional limitations. Both course content and assignments are integrated with lab and practicum placements in P C A D 019 and P C A D 039. PCAD 014 (1.5) Ethics and Values in Health Care (2.0,1) (F) In this course the student develops the knowledge and skills required to fill the role o f a Personal Care Attendant i n a professional, ethical and caring manner to ensure that people with disabilities are valued. This course assists students to respect differences, demonstrate effective communication skills and understand the principles o f normalization, and integration. PCAD 019 (1.5) Applied Theory — Practicum I (0,4,11) (F) The first part of the practicum course is a series of field trips designed to increase the student's awareness o f community resources. In the second part of the course students spend two weeks in a practicum placement arranged by the College. A clinical instructor visits and observes the student working in the practicum setting. Assignments are integrated with the lab instruction and course work in P C A D 013. PCAD 022 Human Relations II (1.5) (2,0,1) (F) This is the second course in human relations, in which the student continues to develop knowledge, skills and values related to the needs o f clients with disabilities. Students explore behaviour, learning strategies, gentle teaching, I E P / I P P and community integration. PCAD 023 (1.5) Growth and Development (2,0,1) (S) This course is designed to introduce students' to the major changes which occur in normal and abnormal Course Descriptions 260 development. The learner identifies basic developmental human needs, disabling conditions and techniques to empower people with mental handicaps and cognitive disorders. Course content includes role o f the family, sexuality, abuse and resources for support. PCAD 024 (3.0) (4,0,2) (S) Advanced:Physical Disability Concept This is a continuation of P C A D 013. Students learn the theoretical basis o f advanced procedures essential to the role o f the Personal Care Attendant. The course content is also integrated with lab and practicum placements i n P C A D 029 and P C A D 039. PCAD 029 (6.0) Applied Theory: Practicum I (0,35,0) (S) The student spends seven weeks i n three different practicum settings arranged by the College. A clinical instructor visits and observes the student while on practicum. Assignments are integrated with lab instruction and course work in P C A D 024 A N D 059. PCAD 049 Applied Theory: Lab I (2.0) (0,4,2) (F) This course exposes students through simulations and paper problems/case histories to the functional limitation o f medical and physical conditions that may be encountered working as a personal atttendant. Students demonstrate and practice skills that they need to work with clients who have a physical disability. PCAD 059 Applied Theory: Lab II (1.0) (0,4,2) (S) This course enables students to integrate and apply the knowledge and skills of a personal attendant w o r k i n g with physically disabled clients. Students demonstrate, practice, and gain feedback on their skills. The purpose of the lab is to prepare students for working with physically disabled clients on practicum placements. PHIL 101 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) introductory Philosophy: Ethics A n introduction to ethical theory and applied ethics. The course addresses questions such as: What are the origins o f conscience? W h y should I be moral? A r e there objective moral values? What is good for human beings? What makes right actions right and wrong actions wrong? Issues o f applied ethics that may be addressed include capital punishment, abortion, assisted-suicide, c i v i l disobedience and environmental responsibility. The emphasis of the course varies among instructors. PHIL 102 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Introductory Philosophy: Knowledge and Reality A n introduction to the part o f philosophy concerned with questions about the ultimate nature o f the world we live i n and our knowledge o f it (traditionally called Metaphysics and Epistemology). The issues discussed include: the existence and nature o f God, the place o f human beings in the universe, the nature o f reality, human nature, human knowledge and skepticism, freedom and determinism, the relationship between m i n d and body, and others. The emphasis o f the course varies from instructor to instructor. PHIL 110 Critical Thinking (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) A n introduction to the basic rules of clear and rational thought. The student w i l l be taught, through extensive examples, how to detect false reasoning, illegitimate appeals to emotions, inconsistencies and contradictions. The goal is to develop our logical awareness to the point that we can no longer be victimized by the rhetoric of everyday life, and can develop our o w n arguments with clarity and confidence. PHIL 120 (3) Understanding Scientific Reasoning (4,0,0) This course w i l l provide students with an introduction to modern formal logic, and then utilize that skill to explore such topics as the nature and testing of scientific theories in both the natural and social sciences, the difference between causal relations and correlations, and rational decision making. Attention w i l l be given to both the problem-solving and philosophical aspects of scientific reasoning. There are no prerequisites, but the course is a natural continuation o f P H I L 110, and w i l l appeal especially to students who have an interest in either the natural or social sciences. PHIL 140 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Philosophy and Law: Canadian Law A general introduction to the fundamental principles of jurisprudence and to the basic legal institutions o f Canada. In addition to addressing such philosophical questions as, "What is a l a w ? " , "Is it the case that law is what legislatures say it is, or what courts say it is?", and " H o w do you tell whether a law is good or bad?", the course also examines the history and theory o f Canadian law (including the development o f the Canadian Constitution), the system o f Canadian courts, and the roles o f members o f the legal profession. A s well, consideration is given to the nature o f legal reasoning, the doctrine o f precedent, and principles o f statutory interpretation, and an introduction is provided to the fields of contract, torts, administrative and family law, as w e l l as to the process o f law reform. PHIL 141 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Philosophy and Law: Criminal Justice A n introduction to an analysis o f theories o f punishment and rehabilitation through an examination o f the operational practices of the Canadian criminal justice system. In the course o f studying the structure and operations of the criminal justice system in its various stages from the moment of initial police involvement to the correctional disposition of convicted offenders, the course focuses on both theoretical and practical decision making. Theoretical concerns include: individual c i v i l liberties in relation to police procedures, notions o f evidence, sentencing theory, and current correctional strategies. The above two courses are modelled on S F U ' s C r i m i nology 131/135 and are intended for both philosophy students and those interested i n pursuing further studies in the field o f criminology. PHIL 170 (1.5) Infotec - Critical Thinking I (3,0,0) (F) Basic concepts o f critical thinking and argumentation students examine the concepts o f argument, premise, conclusion, and argument structure and develop facility in using these concepts. This course is specifically designed for A p p l i e d Information Techology program students. PHIL 200 Political Philosophy (3) (4,0,0) (F) This course provides an analysis of the rationale for political institutions and action. Some o f the questions considered: A r e we really obliged to obey the law? C a n the law be justifiably represented as authoritative, or is the real foundation o f law in the policeman's holster? Does the state have good reason for involving itself i n compulsory programs of education? This is not a study in the history o f political thought and every effort is made to view problems from a contemporary perspective. Open to anyone i n first or second year; no prerequisites. Course Descriptions 261 PHIL 201 Political Philosophy (3) (4.0,0) (S) This course examines the values and assumptions behind the ideologies o f liberalism, communism, meritocracy, conservatism, democratic socialism and anarchism. Topics include liberty and equality, power and authority, private rights and the public good, sovereignty, democracy and justice. PHIL 202 (3) Introduction to Formal Logic (4,0,0) (F.S) A standard introduction to the formal techniques of argument analysis. F o r m a l logic was invented to mirror and evaluate mathematical reasoning and is now a branch o f Mathematics o f its o w n . O u r interest in it w i l l , however, not be mathematical. Instead we w i l l concentrate on the relation o f formal logic to everyday reasoning and language i n general. The course is essential for students thinking o f majoring in Philosophy, but also very useful to Computing Science and Mathematics majors. It is designed to transfer to S F U as their Philosophy 210 (required for both Philosophy and Computing Science majors), and to U B C as Philosophy 302. There are no prerequisites, although students may find Philosophy 110 provides useful background. Please note that this is not an introductory philosophy course, but one which introduces mathematical methods of argument analysis. It is not suitable for students merely seeking a general understanding of what philosophy has to offer. PHIL 207 Business Ethics (3) (4,0,0) This course is an introduction to contemporary philosophical thinking on ethical issues in business. It covers such topics as the power o f multinational corporations, bribery and extortion in international business, the ethics o f hiring practices, advertising and behaviour control, the conflict between employee loyalty and moral independence, and the responsibilities o f corporations and business professionals. The course w i l l also introduce students to a number of classical ethical theories and theories o f economic justice. Open to anyone in first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 208 Environmental Ethics (3) (4,0,0) This course deals with ethical and political issues arising from the relationship between humans and their natural surroundings. T y p i c a l questions that w i l l be addressed are: D o animals have rights? Is using Course 262 Descriptions animals for food and clothing morally wrong? D o we have an obligation to the natural environment such as an obligation to preserve species? What are our obligations to future generations? What is sustainable development? A r e environmental problems fundamentally personal or are they fundamentally political and social? Open to anyone in first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 209 Biomedical Ethics (3) (4,0,0) This course w i l l focus on ethical issues that arise i n the health sciences, especially i n medicine, but also in biology, psychology and other professions. A m o n g the topics to be considered are abortion and reproductive technology; euthanasia; paternalism and autonomy; resource allocation; involuntary hospitalization and behaviour control. A l l moral problems w i l l be examined from both an applied and theoretical point o f view. Open to anyone i n first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 210 (3) Metaphysics and Epistemology I (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: A t least one Philosophy course or permission of the instructor. A n introduction to some of the traditional problems o f metaphysics and epistemology. Some o f the questions considered are: Does G o d exist? What is the relationship between faith and reason? Does free w i l l exist? Is sense perception a reliable source o f knowledge? What is the nature o f causality? Is materialism true? What is the nature o f mind? What is the relationship between m i n d and body? What is the scientific method? W h i l e this is not a course i n the history of philosophy, it w i l l cover many o f the classical attempts to answer these questions. PHIL 211 (3) Metaphysics and Epistemology II Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) P H I L 210 or permission of instructor. A continuation of P H I L 210. PHIL 220 Philosophy in Literature (3) (4.0,0) (F) A n examination of the lively relationship between philosophy and literature. Philosophical theories w i l l be approached and discussed v i a literary work w h i c h either embodies the theories or grounds them in human experience. Textual sources w i l l range from the classical Greek plays to last month's best seller. Open to anyone in first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 221 (3) Existentialism in Literature (4,0,0) This course is, i n spirit, a continuation o f P H I L 220, but it is centred on the Philosophy o f Existentialism i n literature. There w i l l be an introductory set o f lectures on Existentialism as a philosophy. Textual sources w i l l range from Dostoyevsky's "Notes from the Underground" to Sartre's "Nausea." Open to anyone i n first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 222 (3) Philosophy of Culture (Aesthetics) (4,0,0) (S) A n introduction to philosophical analysis o f cultural works. The course w i l l provide an exploration o f aesthetic theory, examining both traditional works of art as w e l l as contemporary cultural productions i n a variety o f media. One o f the objectives o f the course is to make sense of what a society is "saying" through its popular culture. Open to anyone i n first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 240 (3) Philosophy and Gender Relations (4,0,0) Founded on a wide range o f philosophical readings, this course w i l l focus on questions such as: What is the good life and its relation to intimacy and family? What is the good person? A r e there different models for different genders? What constitutes a good relationship? H o w important are mutuality, respect, affection, sex, and interdependence to such a relationship? What counts as equality/equity? H o w should the answers to such questions influence our views on such social issues as affirmative action, prostitution and pornography? The impact o f " W o m e n ' s Liberation" and the " M e n ' s Movement" w i l l be discussed, as w i l l varying suggestions for overcoming the "gender gap". This course should be o f interest to men and women equally; indeed, it is assumed that the quality o f class discussion w i l l be a function o f the degree to w h i c h the perspectives o f both genders are w e l l represented. Open to anyone i n first or second year. PHYS 104 Principles of Physics (3) (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: N o physics prerequisite. M a t h 12 or B M T H 046 or M A T H 105. M A T H 105 may be taken concurrently. This course serves as an introduction to physics for students with little or no background i n the subject. Topics include mechanics, energy, geometrical optics and heat. PHYS 108 Basic Physics Prerequisite: Corequisite: (4.5) (6,2,0) (F) M a t h 12 or B M T H 046 or M A T H 105. M A T H 116/117. The course covers the material o f P H Y S 110, together with those topics from high school physics needed by a student with no previous background in physics. A student passing this course should be able to enter P H Y S 111 i n the Spring. PHYS 110 General Physics I Prerequisite: Corequisite: (3) (4.2.0) (F) Physics 11 or B P H Y 042. M A T H 116/117. A survey o f mechanics covering vectors, statics, kinematics, dynamics, energy, momentum, rotation, gravitation, vibration, and special relativity. PHYS 111 General Physics II (3) (4.2.0) (S) Prerequisite: A t least a " C - " i n either P H Y S 110 or 108; and M A T H 110 or 116/117. Corequisite: M A T H 126/127. A n y student who has attempted P H Y S 111 within the last year w i l l not be allowed to register without the instructor's permission. Electricity and magnetism, waves, physical optics, sound, and atomic and nuclear physics. PHYS 114 Fundamental Physics I Prerequisite: Corequisite: (3) (4,2,0) (F.S) Physics 12 or B P H Y 042 or P H Y S 104. M A T H 116/117. A survey o f mechanics covering vectors, kinematics, dynamics, energy, momentum, rotation, gravitation, vibration, waves and special relativity. This course, together with P H Y S 115, is particularly suitable for students going into the physical sciences or engineering. PHYS 115 Fundamental Physics II (3) (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: A t least a " C - " i n P H Y S 114 or with the permission o f the instructor. Corequisite: M A T H 126/127. Electricity and magnetism, A C circuits, physical optics, and atomic and nuclear physics. Course Descriptions 263 PHYS 116 Fundamental Physics III (3) (4,0,0) (S) Note: This course is intended for Engineering program students transferring to UBC. Prerequisite: A t least a " C - " i n P H Y S 114, or with permission of instructor, P H Y S 108 or 110. Corequisites: P H Y S 115 and M A T H 126/127. Statics o f particles, force-couple systems and rigid body statics. Extension o f principles from P H Y S 114 and application to practical and more advanced problems. Thermometry, thermal properties o f matter, heat. Geometrical optics. The Physics Department offers a full second-year university transfer program in physics. Students planning to continue in a physics program at university may wish to consult with a Physics instructor. PHYS 200 (3) Thermal Physics and Waves Temperature, heat, the zeroth, first, second and third laws o f thermodynamics, kinetic theory, and a mathematical treatment o f waves. This course, together with P H Y S 201, 210, 211, 218 and 222 is required for students majoring i n physics. (4.0.0) (S) Prerequisite: A t least a " C - " in P H Y S 111 or 115; M A T H 230. Corequisite: P H Y S 211, M A T H 231 (recommended). The study o f electric and magnetic fields; D C and A C circuits; L R , R C , L R C circuits; resonance; M a x w e l l ' s Equations, Fourier A n a l y s i s and electromagnetic waves. PHYS 210 Physics Laboratory I Corequisite: (D (0,3,0) (F) P H Y S 218. A weekly three-hour lab i n mathematical methods, thermodynamics, electrical measurements and mechanics. PHYS 211 Physics Laboratory II (1) (0,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: A s for P H Y S 201, which must be taken concurrently. A weekly three-hour lab i n electricity and magnetism, electronics and mechanics. Course 264 Descriptions (3) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: A t least a C - i n either P H Y S 111 or 115; and M A T H 111 or 126/127. Corequisite: P H Y S 210, M A T H 200, 230. Use o f computer software to solve numerical problems in physics. Applications include drag forces, the driven, damped oscillator, simulations of chaotic systems, random variables, techniques for handling digital data and signal processing. PHYS 222 Mechanics (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: A t least a C - i n P H Y S 111 or 115; M A T H 200, 230. Newtonian mechanics o f particles and rigid bodies. Topics include rocket propulsion, collisions, central forces, rotating frames o f reference, and rotation o f rigid bodies. (4,0.0) (F) Prerequisite: A t least a " C - " in either P H Y S 111 or 115; and M A T H 111 or 126/127. Corequisite: M A T H 230. PHYS 201 (3) Electricity and Magnetism PHYS 218 Computational Physics PMI. (Various Numbers) (2) (1,0,0) (F,S) Concentration Private Music Instruction A course designed to permit students to pursue study o f his/her o w n music specialty. The course consists of. a series o f one-hour lessons. PMI. (Various Numbers ) (1) (.5,0,0) (F.S) Secondary Private Music Instruction This course consists o f a series of half-hour lessons o n the student's secondary instrument. Note: To enrol in any PMI. courses students must receive written permission from the program Coordinator. PMI. Lab This lab involves attendance at a number of concerts and is intended to broaden the musical experience of students by exposing them to performances in a variety of jazz and popular styles. Attendance is mandatory for graduation i n the Jazz Studies program. POL. 100 (3) (4.0.0) (F.S) Introduction to Politics and Government This survey course is recommended for both Political Studies majors and those students interested in discovering how politics affects their lives and how they i n turn can affect politics. Students are introduced to the basic concepts of Political Theory, Comparative Politics, International Relations, Public P o l i c y , and Canadian Government, offering Political Studies majors a firm foundation in the methods, approaches and issues inherent i n the discipline. Non-majors w i l l find the course w i l l help them understand the local, national, and international political events w h i c h shape their world. (This course is required for all students planning to transfer into the Political Science Department at S F U . ) POL 102 (3) Comparative Government (4,0,0) (F,S) Throughout history, humans have organized themselves into many different types of political systems, from tribes to empires, city-states to nation-states. This course w i l l introduce students to the wide range of political systems that exist throughout the w o r l d today, be it A s i a , A f r i c a , Europe, or the Americas. B y studying these systems i n detail, students w i l l gain an appreciation for how political behaviour varies throughout the world, as w e l l as develop a better critical understanding o f their own. POL. 104 Canadian Government (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) This course introduces students to the formal institutional structures and processes o f Canadian government and politics. Topics to be explored w i l l include political culture, the constitution, federalism, Quebec sovereignty and A b o r i g i n a l self-government and an examination o f the institutions of government, political parties and their impact on the quality o f Canada's parliamentary democracy. Regardless of career goals or preferred disciplines, all students w i l l benefit from an exposure to the politics of their immediate society. This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. POL. 110 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Introduction to Western Political Thought A n introductory examination of the tradition o f Western political thought from the Ancient Greeks to the emergence o f the Nation State. The significance and contributions of Plato, Aristotle, the medieval thinkers, and M a c h i a v e l l i concerning fundamental questions about the relationship between the individual and the state w i l l be explored from an historical and philosophical perspective. This course is of particular relevance to those i n the Humanities — literature, drama, fine arts, philosophy — as the shared themes provide for an interesting comprehensive analysis o f Western C i v i l i z a t i o n . POL. 111 (3) Contemporary Ideologies (4,0,0) (F,S) This course explores the historical development o f the commonly recognized ideologies of the modern era: Liberalism, Conservatism, A n a r c h i s m , M a r x i s m , Fascism and Social Democracy. These underlying political ideas w i l l provide the backdrop for a critical discussion of the more recent ideological formations such as Feminism, E c o l o g i s m , Nationalism and the different movements associated with religious fundamentalism. Students w i l l be encouraged to think critically about the role and impact o f political ideas i n the world i n which they live. POL. 201 International Relations (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) G l o b a l warming, the debt crisis, child poverty, militarism, human rights violations, c i v i l , regional and global war - what are the causes o f these international problems and what are the possible solutions? Students who take this course w i l l examine these and many other international issues i n detail. In short, International Relations is for those students wishing to explore events - and the explanations for those events - in a global system so much i n flux since the collapse of the C o l d W a r and the rise of the global division o f labour. POL. 202 (3) (4.0.0) (S) Government and Politics of British Columbia This course w i l l provide an understanding of the political institutions, dynamics, and socio-economic processes o f the provincial, regional, and municipal governments in B . C . Specifically, it is intended to familiarize students with the activities o f political parties and government institutions i n B . C . It is designed to develop students' skills i n critically analyzing the B . C . political process from several methodological perspectives within the discipline o f political studies. This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. POL. 203 (3) International Organizations (4.0,0) (F,S) M o r e and more these days, international organizations are no longer content with playing bit parts on the world stage. B e it the U N i n C a m b o d i a , N A T O in the former Yugoslavia, Greenpeace on the high seas, or the increased power o f regional organizations like the European U n i o n , A S E A N , and the O A S , international organizations seem to be challenging the sovereignty o f nation-states at every turn. B u t are international organizations really taking on a life o f their own? A r e new forms of organization at the international level (such as international law or economic regimes) really taking root? O r is the state-centric system destined to continue as it has since 1648? These are some o f the issues explored i n this, the complementary course to International Relations. Course Descriptions 265 POL. 204 Canadian Public Policy Prerequisites: (3) (4.0,0) (F,S) P O L . 100 or 104 recommended. The centre o f the political process o f any society is the creation o f public policy. H o w governments arrive at and select policies from the various competing demands placed upon them - in the areas o f health, education, environment, economic development, immigration etc. - is the focus of this course. Students are introduced to the basic concepts and theories associated with the making o f public policy as well as an analysis of the processes by w h i c h policy is defined, addressed and implemented. This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. POL. 206 Political Analysis (3) (4,0,0) (F) This course introduces the student to the variety o f approaches and tools available to those studying politics. Students w i l l become familiar with the nature of and debates inherent to contemporary political studies, as well as the strengths and weaknesses o f the various methods employed by students o f politics. B y developing their o w n research project, students w i l l struggle first-hand with the issues central to all types of social science research: selecting from alternative models o f explanation, attempting to isolate variables, and dealing with questions o f cause and effect to name but a few. Students may have the opportunity to develop and work on a proto-type political studies journal as w e l l . N o t offered i n 1998/99. POL. 207 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Issues in Contemporary Social and Political Theory Prerequisite: P O L . 111. This course transfers as a 300 level course at S F U . Current themes and controversies in contemporary social and political thought is the subject of this course. Topics w i l l shift from term to term to reflect either important issues or individual theorist's contributions to contemporary society. Areas o f interest might include, for example, the role of the state in late capitalist societies, the significance o f the Frankfurt School, the contradictions of the welfare state, the current debates i n democratic theory, the role and place of "new" social movements in contemporary society, an examination o f the meaning o f liberty i n complex societies, the renewal o f nationalism, the place o f religion (Islamic fundamentalism), the persistence of violence i n c i v i l society. Alternatively, or i n conjunction with these themes, students w i l l develop a thorough analysis of a particular theorist: for example, Course Descriptions 266 Arendt, Gramsci, Marcuse, Foucault, Habermas, Offe, W i l l i a m s , R a w l s , Rorty, Pateman, G o r z and M e l u c c i to name a few. PPMI (various numbers) (3) (1.5,0,0) (F,S) Concentration Private Music Instruction for Performance Majors A course designed to permit students i n the Performance Majors to pursue in-depth study o f his/her o w n music specialty. The course consists o f a series o f one and one-half hour lessons or equivalent. PSYC 100 (3) Introduction to Psychology (4,0,0) (F,S) A course designed to introduce the beginning psychology student to some o f the major concepts and approaches necessary to an understanding o f human behaviour from a psychological perspective. Learning, development, and other selected issues are included. N o t e : Students transferring from other institutions with one semester of introductory Psychology should consult with Advising for transferability. PSYC 101 Theories of Behaviour Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) P S Y C 100. A course for those students who desire a complete survey o f the basic areas o f psychology (when c o m bined with P S Y C 100), before proceeding to an i n depth study of particular areas. Course content may include topics such as research methods, biological basis o f behaviour, consciousness, health, psychological disorders, and therapeutic approaches. N o t e : Students transferring from other institutions with one semester of introductory Psychology should consult with Advising for transferability. PSYC 200 Social Psychology Prerequisite: (3) (4,0.0) (F.S) P S Y C 100; P S Y C 101 recommended. A study o f the dynamics and effects o f social influences on individual human behaviour. The course looks at such topics as attitudes and attitude changes, social beliefs, roles, conformity, group processes, prejudice, interpersonal attraction and psychological effects of the physical environment. PSYC 201 Group Dynamics Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Prerequisite: P S Y C 100 and 101. A study o f the behaviour of individuals i n social groups and institutions, such as friendship groups, work groups, and families. This course provides an intellectual and experiential approach to small group theory and allows the student to practice constructive interpersonal skills and leadership skills in a supportive, small group setting. PSYC 203 History of Psychology Prerequisite: (3) (4.0,0) (S) P S Y C 100; P S Y C 101 recommended. This course w i l l examine the development o f psychological thought to gain a critical understanding o f contemporary psychology. Issues w i l l range from the mind-body problem, and the nature o f science, to an analysis of historical and contemporary schools i n psychology. PSYC 204 (3) Developmental Psychology PSYC 212 (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) Research Methods in Psychology (4,0,0) (S) P S Y C 100 and 101. A course for students who intend to major i n one o f the social sciences; psychology majors should take this course and P S Y C 213. This course w i l l introduce the student to current research methods in major areas o f psychology. Students should understand the principles of research methodology, and be able to evaluate, design and conduct research in psychology. PSYC 213 (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) Statistical Methods in Psychology Prerequisite: M a t h 12 or equivalent, P S Y C 100, 101. A course recommended for psychology majors. This course deals with descriptive and inferential statistics as applied i n psychology. These w i l l be considered as they are used i n psychological research. PSYC 220 Theories of Personality Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) P S Y C 100; P S Y C 101 recommended. Prerequisite: P S Y C 100; P S Y C 101 recommended. A study o f the c h i l d ' s development from infancy to adolescence, including the development o f social behaviour, personality, language and cognitive processes. Students w i l l be encouraged to do research projects and observations. This course w i l l examine theories o f personality from Freud and Feminist revisions to Humanistic approaches, including an Eastern tradition. Included w i l l be a consideration o f the historical/cultural development o f the theory, what the theory says about the development, structure and dynamics of personality and examples o f empirical research. PSYC 205 (3) The Psychology of Aging PSYC 222 Abnormal Psychology Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: P S Y C 100 and 101. A course dealing with the psychological development of the individual from early adulthood to death, with emphasis on intellectual and personality changes, and the social context of aging. A s w e l l as being exposed to basic research i n the area, students w i l l be encouraged to develop an empathic understanding of the aging process through such means as community projects. PSYC 206 Adolescent Psychology Prerequisite: (3) (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) P S Y C 100 and 101. A study of the various models and perspectives for viewing patterns and treatment o f abnormal behaviour. Included w i l l be an examination o f the research as to how the medical model, behaviouristic school, humanistic school, psychoanalytic school, cognitive school and biological school view normal and abnormal behaviour. This course w i l l also focus on the historical and contemporary approaches to treatment. (4,0,0) (F) P S Y C 100 and 101. This course examines the biological, cognitive and social transitions o f adolescence and how they affect such developmental areas as identity, autonomy, intimacy, sexuality and achievement. A s w e l l as being exposed to basic research i n the area, students w i l l be encouraged to explore their o w n identity development through group research. PSYC 225 (3) Biopsychology of Behaviour Prerequisite: (4,0.0) (S) P S Y C 100 and 101. This course w i l l expand on material introduced i n introductory psychology dealing with the biological basis o f behaviour. Students w i l l examine functions of the nervous system, as w e l l as studying brain anatomy and brain chemistry in relation to both normal and pathological behaviour. A s w e l l , students w i l l discuss mind-body issues and develop an understanding of broader ethical and other issues in neuroscience. Course Descriptions 267 PSYC 230 Cognitive Psychology Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) P S Y C 100 and 101. This course w i l l address many o f the issues relating to the thinking processes. Research into memory, language imagery, problem solving, creativity and artificial intelligence w i l l be examined, as well as experiments in social cognition and cognition across the lifespan. RCAP 100 (1.5) Health: Lifestyle and Choices (2,0,1) (F,S) This course is an introduction to the concept o f health and the concepts o f a health enhancing lifestyle. Students reflect on their o w n experiences of health, challenges and resources that may effect their lifestyle choices, and consequently, their health. RCAP 101 (3.0) Health and Healings: Concepts (4,0,2) (F,S) This course provides a theoretical framework for practice. Students examine significant philosophical beliefs and theoretical, psychological and physiological understandings o f competent practice. RCAP 102 (1.5) Human Relations: Interpersonal Communications (2,0,1) (F,S) This course focuses on the development o f self awareness and increased understanding of others. Students explore basic communication concepts and practical skills w h i c h contribute to effective interpersonal relationships. RCAP 110 (1.0) (2,0,1) (F.S) Work Role Concepts in Resident Care This course introduces students to the health care system including the roles and responsibilities o f the resident care and personal care attendants within the health care system. RCAP 111 (7.0) (2,4,14) (F.S) Applied Theory: Lab and Clinical In this practical course students learn the basic personal and clinical skills required by the resident care attendant i n intermediate and extended care facilities. Students spend one day a week in the College health lab learning the practical skills needed to work with continuing care residents. The first part o f the course may include field trips designed to increase students' awareness o f community facilities. In the second part of the course, the students spend two weeks in an intermediate care facility. In the last part o f the course, Course 268 Descriptions the students spend two days a week i n an extended care unit placement, supervised by a clinical instructor. Assignments are integrated with the lab instruction and course work. A l l practicum and clinical placements are arranged by the College. RCAP 112 (3.0) Special Needs in Resident Care 2.0,1) (F.S) This course builds upon content in the other R C A courses, to help students to understand concepts and approaches which apply to the care o f residents experiencing changes i n mental functioning. RCAP 113 (4.0) (0,35.0) (S,Su*) Applied Theory: Clinical Practice This four-week practical course provides an opportunity to apply the caring philosophy with older adults i n an intermediate and/or extended care facility. Select, supervised experiences w i l l emphasize the application and integration o f knowledge and skills learned in other courses. The final two weeks of the course provide an opportunity for the student to become better prepared to take on the role of the Resident Care Attendant. Opportunities w i l l be provided for the learner to gain increased self confidence i n the work setting and to become socialized as a member o f the health care team. REC. 120 Selective skills (0) During their time in the Outdoor Recreation Management program students are required to pursue two skills activities i n their particular areas of interest. These selective skills help provide our graduates with work in the outdoor recreation, adventure travel and ecotourism industries. REC. 143 (3) (3,0) (F) Outdoor Recreation Delivery Systems A n introduction to various outdoor recreation delivery systems in British C o l u m b i a , the past and present issues influencing and affecting their direction, and their career opportunities. The course w i l l examine the inter-relationships o f the various delevery systems, including the role of government. REC. 144 (3) (3,3) (S) Outdoor Recreation Program Planning Topics w i l l include: philosophy of programming, concepts o f planning, community interests inventory, the relationship o f programming to customer service. REC. 151 (3) (3,3) (S) The Outdoor Recreation Environment REC. 178 (3) Human Relations in Recreation Weather and climate and the impact o f weather on outdoor recreation activities. Mountain and marine weather and personal forecasting w i l l be examined using field work. This course focuses on leadership, motivation, c o m m u nications and group dynamics. It also deals with human resource development including employee recruitment, selection, training and development, and performance appraisal. REC. 152 (3) Environmental Stewardship I (3,3) (F) A n examination o f the role o f the outdoor recreation professional i n environmental stewardship. Topics include: conservation issues, environmental ethics, policy and planning and sustainability. The course w i l l include field work. REC. 153 Leisure Issues (3) (3,0) (S) W o r k and leisure i n the human life cycle, adolescence, aging, special needs and leisure, cultural variations in leisure, leisure-related social problems, lifestyle-based variation i n work and leisure, factors i n lifestyle choice, consumerism and outdoor recreation, sociological perspectives on present and future trends. REC. 156 (3) (3,3) (F) Introduction to Environmental Studies A n introduction to ecological principles and their application to environmental issues. L o c a l ecosystems and their indicator species w i l l be examined through field work. REC.157 Applied Field Skills (3) (3,0) (F) Develops skills, knowledge and attitudes i n overland travel, outdoor living, navigation and trip planning i n a temperate climate. REC. 163 Wilderness First Aid I (3) (3,0) (S) Designed to meet the needs o f the outdoor recreation leader or professional whose work takes them into isolated environments. Outdoor practical sessions play a large part in the delivery o f the course content which addresses basic life support techniques, situation and patient assessment, recognition and treatment o f injuries, medical emergencies, and environmental emergencies. REC. 169 (3) Landscape Interpretation (3,0) (F) (3,0) (F) Interpretation o f mountain and coastal environments, local geology and landforms. The course w i l l include field work. REC. 252 (3) Environmental Stewardship II (3,3) (F) A n examination of environmental stewardship concepts and issues, and the development o f nature interpretation skills. This course w i l l include a field trip. REC. 255 (9) Outdoor Recreation Practicum (9,0,0) (S) The practicum is designed to integrate classroom theory with working experience i n the field. Students w i l l arrange with the faculty liaison person to spend three and one-half months in an acceptable agency placement, and w i l l be responsible to a specific agency supervisor. Students w i l l be provided with terms of reference for the practicum experience. Student work performance and potential w i l l be evaluated by the faculty liaison person and agency supervisor, and students w i l l make a major presentation to the department at the conclusion of the practicum. RMCP 155 (3) Retail Event Management (3,0,1) (S) The emphasis in this course w i l l be to learn how to promote and produce a major event such as a trade show. This course w i l l involve the planning, execution and promotion o f such a retail event. RMCP 164 (3) Creative Retail Strategies (3,0,1) (F) This course is the creative component in the Retail Marketing program. Students w i l l learn visual marketing, colour and design, retail store design, and a full range o f merchandising skills. They w i l l relate product and placement within a store environment and learn to develop comprehensive display strategies. RMCP 172 (3) (3,0,1) (F) Retail Technology/Store Management I Retail Technology is the introductory segment to Store Management I. This course provides the student with a working knowledge of cash register systems and point of sale terminals as w e l l as the latest i n Interac technologyStore Management I is a practical application to retail marketing. Students w i l l be entirely responsible for operating the student store. The students act as store Course Descriptions 269 managers. They w i l l do buying, display, promotion, accounting, scheduling and all those managerial skills involved i n operating a successful retail store. RMCP 173 (3) (3,0,1) (S) Retail Finance/Store Management II Prerequisite: R M C P 172 A continuation o f Store Management I. This extension of the Store Management course exposes the student to daily systems analysis, banking procedures, monthly accounting practices and money management i n a practical setting. The students w i l l be responsible for making financial decisions as w e l l as buying and promotional decisions for the student store. RMCP 181 Strategic Retail Buying (3) (3,0,1) (S) SART 151 Drawing II Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) S A R T 150. A continuation o f S A R T 150, with the inclusion o f the following specifics: composition and further design exploration, colour, collage and image development. A n emphasis is placed on balance between control and expression. SART 163 (3) 3-D Studies: Ceramic Art I (4,3,0) (F) A n introduction to the use o f clay as an expressive medium. H a n d construction and wheel forming w i l l be presented as w e l l as glazing, firing and clay body technology. Design, history and conceptual theory w i l l be reviewed as it relates to the ceramic object and to general art applications. SART 165 (3) 3-D Studies: Ceramic Art II (4,3,0) (S) This course teaches the students to access their target and primary markets and to develop a strategy to enable them to be successful retail buyers. Prerequisite: The retail buying component involves teaching the student to buy for department stores, chain stores, regional chain operations, and independent retail stores. What to buy, when to buy, from w h o m to buy, and how much to buy w i l l all be covered i n this course. A continuation o f S A R T 163 with greater emphasis on personal development. Casting, mould making, glaze preparation and application and firing technology w i l l be fundamental aspects o f this course. Contemporary applications o f ceramics w i l l be explored. RMCP 190 Co-op Work Placement SART 167 3-D Studies: Sculpture I (3) (F) Students w i l l gain direct practical work experience through a paid co-op placement with an employer that is part of our Retail Registry. D u r i n g December and January the student w i l l work some 200 hours i n a business related to their preferred area o f retailing, merchandising or marketing. A faculty member w i l l oversee this three credit course and both employers and the co-op employees w i l l complete written reports. Students w i l l return to their full-time studies at the end of the co-op placement. (3) SART 150 Drawing I (4,0,0) (F) A n investigation o f the conceptual, technical and perceptual aspects of the drawing process through a wide variety o f methods, materials and stimuli. D e s i g n elements are a major component o f this course. E x p e r i ences in current approaches and concerns, including representational, interpretive and experimental drawings i n assorted media. Emphasis w i l l be on developing the student's confidence, knowledge, graphic sensitivity and control o f media. Specifics to this course w i l l be: study of design elements (line, tone etc.), media investigation, perspective, structural analysis (of natural form), life study. Course 270 Descriptions S A R T 163. (3) (4,3,0) (F) A n introduction to three-dimensional work as a means of expression, communication and discovery. Some basic sculptural techniques and materials w i l l be explored; these w i l l include: w o o d assemblage, clay modelling, m o u l d making and casting. Sculptural content and subject matter w i l l be considered i n the context of the student's o w n work. A n examination o f historical sculpture developments w i l l be a feature o f the class; however, the emphasis w i l l be upon developing an understanding o f contemporary sculptural concerns. SART 171 2-D Studies: Painting I (3) (4,0,0) (F) Through a combination o f assigned studio work, personal research projects and an introduction to recent and current trends in the visual arts, students w i l l gain an understanding o f how both abstract and concrete concerns may be expressed in terms o f imagery and through a variety o f methods and materials. Participants w i l l learn about the dimensions of colour and how to effectively indentify and replicate colour and form. A c r y l i c s w i l l be the preferred medium but students w i l l be encouraged to investigate the characteristics and possibilities o f other media according to their individual needs. Guest speakers, field trips and slide-lectures w i l l be a feature of the course and both individual and group critiques w i l l be conducted at regular intervals. SART 172 2- D Studies: Painting II Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) S A R T 171. A continuation o f S A R T 171 with added emphasis on developing personal areas o f interest and research i n addition to designated painting problems which w i l l require students to express their ideas i n multiple or mixed-media techniques o f a more ambitious nature. There w i l l be opportunities for students to relate their painting activities to other areas of study within the program and to become more responsible for determining their o w n priorities and goals. There w i l l be further exposure to contemporary philosophies and activities in the visual arts. SART 174 (3) 3- D Studies: Sculpture II Prerequisite: (4,3,0) (S) S A R T 167. A continuation o f S A R T 167, but with the inclusion of the following materials and techniques: w o o d construction and jointing, steel welding, and plaster modelling. SART 182 (3) 2-D Studies: Printmaking I (4,1.5,0) (F) A foundation course for those with little or no experience. A n introduction to the basic techniques o f hardground, softground, drypoint and acquatint. Discussions regarding the image-making potential o f printmaking and the creative processes i n general w i l l be ongoing. Particular emphasis w i l l be given to the relationship between printmaking and painting with the student producing a number of pieces demonstrating technical competency and creative potential. M o s t work w i l l be executed in black and white. SART 183 (3) 2-D Studies: Printmaking II Prerequisite: (4,1.5,0) (S) S A R T 182. A continuation o f S A R T 182 with emphasis on printing procedures both in black and white and colour. The student w i l l also be introduced to mono and relief printing methods (including lino/wood blocks and etched plates) and editioning procedures. Discussion of historical and contemporary approaches to imagemaking w i l l be ongoing. SART 250 (3) 2-D Studies: Painting III Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F) S A R T 172. Students w i l l be assigned painting problems relating to historically familiar genres; portrait, still life, landscape, figure and abstraction. W i t h i n these structured projects, students w i l l be given as much freedom as possible regarding content, methods, scale etc. Students w i l l be encouraged to re-define the painting process i n terms of their o w n needs and priorities. Emphasis w i l l be placed on relating work i n this course to other areas of the program and to current trends in the visual arts. SART 255 (3) 2-D Studies: Painting IV Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) S A R T 250. A continuation o f S A R T 250 but with an increased need for students to define their o w n areas o f interest and to extend their thinking i n an innovative, selfchallenging fashion. A s in S A R T 250, guest speakers, field trips, slide lectures etc. w i l l be a feature o f the course. There w i l l be a continuing stress on relating work i n this course to contemporary activities i n the visual arts and to other areas o f the program. E x p e r i ments with images, methods and materials w i l l be encouraged, with a view to the development o f personal modes o f expression. Towards the end of the course, students w i l l be required to define their o w n areas o f research and visual articulation as they embark on a thematically linked series o f work. (3) SART 257 2-D Studies: Sculpture III Prerequisite: (4,3,0) (F) S A R T 174. A resumption of the investigation o f ideas, materiality and form, to broaden the participant's visual, tactile and conceptual abilities. Traditional and current sculptural ideologies and techniques w i l l be examined in the context of 20th century developments. (3) SART 262 Drawing III Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F) S A R T 151. Continued study of drawing as a means of discovery, expression and communication. Conceptual, perceptual and technical aspects o f drawing w i l l be examined. Specifics to this course w i l l include advanced graphic elements, unconventional media, objective/subjective research. Course Descriptions 271 SART 263 Drawing IV Prerequisite: (3) (4.0,0) (S) Prerequisite: S A R T 262. Further study of drawing with an emphasis on the development of personal modes o f expression and image transformation. Orthographic drawings comprise a small portion o f the course. The work o f the three previous courses w i l l be reviewed, with the addition o f perceptual exploration and portfolio presentation in the form o f a small series o f thematically linked work. SART 265 (3) 3-D Studies: Sculpture IV Prerequisite: (4,3,0) (S) S A R T 257. A further study o f historical and current sculptural ideologies. Assignments require individual strategies to respond to social/environmental and interactive issues. Participation i n group debates and critiques w i l l foster constructive dialogue and criticism. SART 273 (3) 3-D Studies: Ceramic Art III Prerequisite: SART 283 (3) 2-D Studies: Printmaking IV (4.3.0) (F) (4,1.5,0) (S) S A R T 282. Designed for the advanced printmaking student, the main concern w i l l be combined colour printing techniques based upon the individual's need. A folio o f work w i l l be produced to document this research. Technical aspects that surface w i l l include photographic possibilities and dimensional prints. SART 300 (12) (4,0,0) (F) Art Institute I — Sculpture and Printmaking The Institute is designed to meet the needs o f students with several years o f experience i n sculpture or printmaking or who have left college, art school or university and may no longer have access to specialized equipment and facilities. The A r t Institute w i l l emphasize access to w e l l equipped studios as w e l l as lectures, seminars and tutorials with instructors and invited professional artists. The format w i l l be one day of class time and four or more days o f studio time. The studios are available during the evenings and weekends. S A R T 165. Students w i l l undertake further exploration o f processes and materials, including the development o f original glazes and manipulation o f glaze characteristics. Students w i l l be encouraged to explore ways to bring to ceramic art their personal expressive interests within the context o f contemporary ceramic usage. SART 301 (12) (4,0,0) (S) Art Institute II — Sculpture and Printmaking (4,3,0) (S) A post diploma studio workshop course. F o r students with considerable previous experience o f wheel and hand building techniques. This course w i l l focus on the development o f clays and glazes i n soda and salt firings, as well as over and underglaze and swp decoration. SART 274 (3) 3-D Studies: Ceramic Art IV Prerequisite: S A R T 273. The course w i l l include an increased emphasis on craftsmanship and design of functional and nonfunctional forms. Architectural ceramic applications w i l l be explored i n greater depth. Glazes and other methods o f decoration w i l l continue to be examined. SART 282 (3) 2-D Studies: Printmaking III Prerequisite: (4,1.5.0) (S) S A R T 183. A comprehensive study o f intaglio and relief printing methods, this course is primarily designed for the advanced printmaking student. Other areas that come under consideration w i l l include collographs, uninked embos-sing and the practical application o f colour theory. Discussion of current directions i n printmaking and their relationship to painting and sculpture w i l l be ongoing. Course 272 Descriptions A continuation o f S A R T 300. SART 310 (3) Advanced Ceramic Studies SART 311 (3) Advanced Ceramic Studies II (4,0,3) (F) (4,0,3) (S) A continuation o f S A R T 310 with the introduction o f the formulation and development o f metallic lustres. SETA 100 (1.5) History, Philosophy and Issues in Special Education (F) A n overview o f the history o f the field of special education including key figures who have contributed to the development o f this field. This introductory course includes opportunities to discuss main ideas, social trends and controversies that have had an effect on special education with the intent o f helping students form their o w n philosophies around these issues. SETA 101 Working in Schools (-) 1 5 (F) Introductory course provides an understanding o f the public school system and the role of the S E T A within , tetna Overviews nf p r o v i n d nl policies, district and school-based proram at the elementary and secondary levels are discussed i n detail. SETA 102 (1.5) Interpersonal Skills for Teachers (S) This course presents interactive communication techniques for working with both adults and children. Students w i l l learn about: • types of behaviour disorders and practical classroom behavioural management techniqes • conflict resolution — diffusing and managing anger, negotiating and compromising, listening and summarizing • multicultural communication skills • communication skills to effectively work i n a team environment SETA 103 Challenging Behaviours (1.5) (S) Students learn about various behaviour profiles and develop a practical understanding o f how to support children or adolescents with behavioural challenges i n a school setting. SETA 104 (1.5) (S) Child Growth and Development for SETA's This course explores the social, emotional, physical, language and expressive stages from birth to adolescence. Students w i l l gain understanding o f the diversity in learners and how observational and recording methods support critical documentation often used i n the role o f a S E T A i n school settings. SETA 105 (3.0) Developmental Challenges for SETA's (F) Students w i l l explore current issues emphasized i n inclusive education through definition, etiology and implications for learning i n the various areas o f exceptionality: challenging behaviours, depression, intellectual disabilities, F A S , A D H D , E S L , giftedness, communication disorders, physical and chronic health disorders, home, school and community issues such as abuse, homelessness etc. T w e l v e hours o f practical skills; an introduction to physical transfer, lifting , feeding and medical management is included. SETA 106 Technology for SETA's (1.5) (F) disabilites. C o m m o n computer hardware and software used in schools are explored. Students learn how the school system and related agencies assess the needs o f students with special needs and how to provide appropriate technological adaptations. Educational planning and implementation of plans are also discussed. SETA 107 & 108 (1.5) Instructional Strategies I 8: II (F.Su) These courses must be taken one after the other. They provide students with a range of instructional strategies that w i l l assist i n meeting the learning needs o f the diverse population of students i n our classrooms. Students experience the application of both teaching and learning strategies that facilitate the inclusion of children into mainstream settings. SETA 109 Practicum (6.0) (F.S) A n intensive 120-hour period which provides opportunites for students to integrate and consolidate the theory and skills developed through the S E T A program i n a classroom setting ( K - 1 2 ) w o r k i n g with children or adolescents who have special needs. Students are under the direct supervision of a classroom teacher and practicum supervisor: and are required to attend one-on-one consultations and small group seminars. Students must have current Standard First A i d / C P R certificate, criminal records check and T B test prior to being placed i n practicum schools. SOC. 100 Social Structures (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) The course systematically covers major topics and issues o f concern to anyone who wishes to begin to understand and come to terms with the modern world in a personally and sociologically relevant way. The basic theme o f the course is that we are, to a greater extent than generally imagined, produced, structured and run by the "social machine" or social or societal determinants. This structured aspect o f society is comprised of institutions such as the family, religious institutions, the mass media, educational institutions, for example, as w e l l as rules, customs, laws, ideologies, etc. O u r society is also embedded with structural inequalities related to gender, social class and ethnicity. U t i l i z i n g what has been termed "the sociological imagination," the course looks at how we are influenced by these aspects o f society and in turn how we react to these influences. Both S O C . 100 and 101 are required for students intending to major i n Sociology at S F U or U B C . Students w i l l become familiar with the wide range o f low and high technology adaptations for students with Course Descriptions 273 SOC. 101 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Concepts and Theories of Society W i t h current social conditions i n mind, this course analyses the general development o f sociological thought i n the 19th and 20th centuries. W e w i l l look at a variety of sociological theories and approaches to understanding society (structural functionalism, conflict theory, symbolic interactionism, feminism and others) and employ these approaches to analyze events of current interest, importance and impact i n society. B o t h S O C . 100 and 101 are required for students intending to major in Sociology at S F U or U B C . SOC. 200 Canadian Society Prerequisite: instructor. (3) (4,0,0) (F) S O C . 100 or 101 or permission o f the A n introduction to the study o f Canadian society and culture, including an analysis o f the major Canadian institutions studied on a national basis, with special emphasis on the dynamics of change i n a complex multicultural society. Issues that explore the intersection o f state, capital and labour with gender, class and ethnicity w i l l be discussed as they relate to such concerns as multiculturalism, A b o r i g i n a l peoples and Quebec society. SOC. 201 (3) British Columbia Society Prerequisite: instructor. (4,0,0) (S) S O C . 100 or 101 or permission o f the A sociological approach to the dynamics o f Canadian society with special emphasis on British C o l u m b i a . Close attention w i l l be given to economic, historical and cultural developments w h i c h have shaped British C o l u m b i a from its early years into a modern industrial society. Contemporary social questions surrounding such issues as education, health, labour, Native land claims and resource questions w i l l be discussed. SOC. 210 Current Social Issues Prerequisite: instructor. (3) (4,0,0) (S) S O C . 100 or 101 or permission of the A study of social concerns and cultural problems common to current conditions i n the 20th century in our society and i n global perspectives. Classical sociological concepts w i l l be used to examine current social issues i n a global framework o f political, economic, and cultural analysis, such as mass violence, the economics o f the arms race, the sociology o f war and peace, social inequality, etc. Current issues are placed i n the context o f the student's daily world, as it is happening now — this should develop the student's Course Descriptions 274 sociological imagination. This course can be taken by itself, or as a complement to S O C . 211, Sociology o f the T h i r d W o r l d . SOC. 211 (3) Sociology of the Third World Prerequisite: instructor. (4,0,0) (F) S O C . 100 or 101 or permission of the A study of the major theories o f development and under development, social and cultural responses to under development, and the interrelationship o f social institutions i n and between the "developed" and "under developed" societies. This course w i l l provide students with an opportunity to better understand the social, economic and political causes and effects o f under development. Both sociological and "non-sociological" literature on the meaning and effects o f "under development" w i l l be considered. T h i s course may be taken by itself or as a complement to S O C . 210, Current Social Issues. SOC. 222 Sociology of the Arts Prerequisite: instructor. (3) (4,0,0) (F) S O C . 100 or 101 or permission o f the A sociological study of art and artists i n western and non-western societies. The course w i l l relate the various art forms (painting, music, literature) to the social context in w h i c h they exist and to their social production; hence it w i l l develop an understanding o f the interrelationships between ideas (aesthetic codes), social institutions, cultural politics and political economy. This course is particularly recommended as a complement to S O C . 101 or 223. SOC. 223 Media and Society Prerequisite: instructor. (3) (4,0,0) (S) S O C . 100 or 101 or permission o f the A n intensive study o f the relationship between a society's communication systems as media and its technological, economic and political base, its ideology, its behaviour patterns and its cultural life. This w i l l encompass current forms of television, radio, magazines, all forms o f advertisement, news production and the movies. This course is particularly recommended as a complement to S O C . 222 or 100. SPAN 100 (3) Beginning Spanish I (4,1.75,0) (F.S) This is a beginners' course which offers a comprehensive introduction to the Spanish language. Emphasis is placed on grammar and the development of the students' speaking, understanding and writing skills. SPAN 101 (3) Beginning Spanish II (4,1.75,0) (S) Prerequisite: S P A N 100, Grade 10 Spanish c o m pleted, or permission from instructor. A continuation of the work o f S P A N 100, this course should be taken, whenever possible, i n the term following S P A N 100. Recommended also for those who are considering taking S P A N 200 at a later date and need review work. SPAN 200 Intermediate Spanish I (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) Prerequisite: S P A N 100/101, Grade 12 Spanish completed with a m i n i m u m o f a " C " grade, or permission o f instructor. A review o f Spanish grammar with special emphasis on problematic areas normally encountered by students of the language. The reading, writing and oral fluency of the student w i l l be improved through translations, compositions and extensive conversation practice. A l s o , the student w i l l be introduced to Hispanic Literature. SPAN 201 Intermediate Spanish II (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) Prerequisite: S P A N 200 with a m i n i m u m o f a " C " grade, or permission from the instructor. M o r e complex structures are introduced, along with more idioms, c o m m o n expressions, and exceptions to basic rules. Classes are conducted almost a l l i n T h a i , except for occasional detailed historical or technical explanations. A t the end o f the course students k n o w how to respond to typical situations i n Thai and to elicit basic everyday information from Thais. They can read simple T h a i passages and the basic road signs and are at a level of reading and writing equivalent to T h a i grade four students. THAI 102 Introduction to Thai I (1.5) (3,1,0) (F) For Asia Pacific Management students only. Cooperative program This course is designed to provide A P M C P students with basic Thai language skills and sensitize them to important cultural differences i n concept and behaviour. THAI 103 Introduction to Thai II (3) For Asia Pacific Management students only. Cooperative Prerequisite: (3,1,0) (S) program T H A I 102 or instructor's permission. This course is a continuation o f T H A I 102. A continuation o f the work o f S P A N 200. This course should be taken, wherever possible, i n the term following S P A N 200. THTR 100 Acting I THAI 100 Beginning Thai I A n introduction to a methodical approach to script, and the basic skills necessary to perform and stage contemporary monologues and scenes. (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) This course provides instruction and practice both i n beginning language and i n the cultural background which is so necessary to place the examples into meaningful contexts. The international phonetic alphabet is used to avoid confusion o f sounds. The basic vocabulary and sentence structures are covered, and social routines and c o m m o n idioms are stressed as well. Students have time to practise all structures introduced, and are encouraged to initiate their o w n conversations. A t the end of the course students have better than survival-level fluency, and use only Thai for basic classroom routines. They are ready to learn to write. THAI 101 Beginnning Thai II Prerequisite: (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) T H A I 100 or equivalent. THTR 101 Acting II (3) (3) (2,4,0) (F) (2,4,0) (S) Develops skills i n non-scripted theatre. Areas o f exploration include improvisation, mask work, and playmaking. Y o u w i l l perform self-created work i n class. THTR120 Elements of Theatre I (3) (4,0.0) (F) A n introduction to play study and the history o f theatre from its ritual beginnings to the 17th century. Lectures, seminars, play reading, and theatre attendance are part of this course. T H T R 120 is normally taken with E N G L 100 i n a combined seminar. This course reviews the basic material o f T H A I 100, and introduces the script. Students learn how to write the words they already k n o w . Course Descriptions 275 THTR 121 Elements of Theatre II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Plays in the context o f the history o f theatre from the Restoration to the beginnings o f modern theatre. Lectures, seminars, play reading and theatre attendance are part o f this course. THTR 150 (3) (2,4,0) (F) Introduction to Production & Design I A n introduction to the basic elements o f technical theatre and theatre design. Topics include stage management, scenic carpentry, theatre lighting, and scenic design. THTR 151 (3) (2,4,0) (S) Introduction to Production & Design II A continuation o f T H T R 150. Topics include properties, sound, costumes, scenic painting, and makeup. THTR 190, 191, 192, 193, 194, 195 (1 each) (F,S) Practicum Prerequisite: Application to the coordinator at any time during the term. Students receive credit for intensive practical work on productions. The nature o f the work and the amount o f credit w i l l be determined by the Department in consultation with the student. A l l who are cast i n a department production or who are assigned to a production crew must register i n this course. THTR 200 Script and Stage Prerequisite: tor. (3) (2,4.0) (F) T H T R 100 or permission of the instruc- A n intermediate scene study course focusing on text analysis and the performance o f scenes and very short one-act plays. THTR 201 Acting IV Prerequisite: (3) (2.4,0) (S) T H T R 200 or permission o f instructor. (3) THTR 205 Bodywork (2,4,0) (F) Course Descriptions (2,4,0) (S) A course i n voice production and oral interpretation expressive communication. THTR 210 (3) Acting for Film and Television Prerequisite: (2,4,0) (F.S) T H T R 100 or 101 or 110 or post- secondary acting experience. A n introduction to the acting techniques and technical skills needed to perform for the camera. THTR 211 (3) Acting for Film and Television II Prerequisite: (2,4,0) (F.S) THTR210. A continuation of T H T R 210. Topics include script interpretation and emotional portrayal. THTR 220 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Conceptual Approaches to Theatre I Prerequisite: course. T H T R 120 or 121 or a 100-level Arts A n in-depth study o f a specific theatre topic w h i c h w i l l be set each term by the Department. T h i s is a thematic, rather than a chronological, approach to the study o f plays and theatre. Both theoretical and practical class methods may be used. THTR 221 (3) Conceptual Approaches II Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) T H T R 120 or 121 or a 100-level Arts course. The same format as T H T R 220. This course studies a different topic. THTR 250 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Senior Production Responsibilities I T H T R 150 or 151. Introduction to the duties o f senior production personnel including the Technical Director, Stage Manager, Stage Carpenter, Head Electrician, Head Wardrobe, Head Sound, Head of Flys, and Head of Properties. THTR 251 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Senior Production Responsibilities II Prerequisite: A course in movement techniques. Students focus on body awareness, alignment, strength, flexibility and coordination. (3) designed to free the speaking voice and develop Prerequisite: A scene study course w h i c h explores style i n classical and contemporary p l a y s . Scene study w i l l emphasize acting styles i n groups of representative plays. Topics, set by the Department, w i l l vary each term. 276 THTR 207 Vocal Communication I T H T R 150 or 151. A continuation o f T H T R 250. THTR 252 (1.5) Advanced Lighting & Sound I Prerequisite: (2,0.0) (F) THTR 150 or 151. Teaches the advanced skills required to design and run the lighting and sound for both simple and complex shows. THTR 253 (1.5) Advanced Lighting & Sound II Prerequisite: (2.0.0) (S) (0,12.0) (F) Students receive credit for intensive practical work on the technical or design areas of productions. Prerequisite: (0,12,0) (S) T H T R 150 or 151. A continuation o f T H T R 254. THTR 260 (3) Analysis for Directing and Design (4,0,0) (F) Teaches script analysis for students o f directing and design. THTR 290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295 (1 each)(F,S) Practicum VII - XII Prerequisite: Three credits o f T H T R 190 series and application to the coordinator at any time during the term. Students receive credit for intensive practical work on productions. The nature o f the work and the amount o f credit w i l l be determined by the Department i n consultation with the student. A l l who are cast i n a department production or who are assigned to a production crew, and who have three credits in the T H T R 190 series, must register i n this course. (15.0) THTR 360 Directed Studies in Theatre I Prerequisite: audition or interview. Prerequisite: (4,0,32) (F,S) audition or interview. A continuation of T H T R 360 T H T R 150 or 151. THTR 255 (4.5) Technical Theatre/Design II Prerequisite: THTR 364 (15.0) Directed Studies in Theatre II A continuation o f T H T R 252. Prerequisite: THTR 361, 362, 363, 365, 366, 367 Directed Studies in Theatre — Projects I - VI M o d u l e s o f T H T R 360 and T H T R 364. T H T R 150 or 151. THTR 254 (4.5) Technical Theatre/Design I faculty and guest artists, 2) involvement i n the Performing Arts Theatre season, and 3) the A d v a n c e d Certificate in Theatre ( A C T ) season, which is chosen and mounted by A C T students. (4,0.32) (F.S) audition or interview. This intensive course is designed to meet the needs of students with several years o f post-secondary training/ experience i n theatre. Students w i l l concentrate on one of the four specialized areas of performance, production, scenography or direction. They receive instruction through: 1) a series of master classes conducted by TOUR 100 (1.5) Tourism Co-op Preparation (1.5,.5)(S) This course w i l l include a general overview o f the coop work experience. The specific areas covered w i l l be goal setting, skills analysis, researching sectors and employers, job search techniques and preparation o f resume, cover letter and thank you letter. Assistance w i l l be given i n j o b search by faculty. TOUR 111 (3.0) Tourism: An Industry Perspective (3.0,1) (S) A n introduction to the key concepts, language, and issues facing the tourism industry. Trends, market profiles and demographic factors, key industry sectors, tourism geography and key regional products i n B . C . , tourism's role i n community development, social impacts of tourism, transportation, communication, and legal issues i n tourism. TOUR 112 Tourism Marketing (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) The objectives of this course are to examine the existing tourism marketing system i n Canada; to develop the student's understanding of Canadian tourism marketing and the basics o f consumer marketing; and to enable the student to relate to current aspects of tourism business and how they affect Canadian tourism marketing. TOUR 113 (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) Human Resource Management in Tourism H u m a n resource issues, job analysis, recruitment, interviewing, orientation, training and development, performance management, legislation, and labourmanagement relations. Course Descriptions 277 TOUR 114 (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) Organizational Behaviour in Tourism Individual behaviour, interpersonal communication skills, decision-making, group dynamics and team building, service management, conflict resolution, negotiation, and giving performance feedback. TOUR 116 (3.0) Financial Planning in Tourism I (3.0,1) (F) Financial control methods, inventory control, labour costs and controls, employee scheduling, payroll, loss prevention, reporting, accounting applications, financial statements, cash/credit transactions, basic financial planning. TOUR 118 (3.0) (3.0.1) (F) Special Events — Tourism Generators This course w i l l cover all aspects o f event management and event marketing: choosing the right event, designing a business (event) plan, event/cause marketing, sponsor proposals, managing the pre-event, event day(s) management, and post event activities. Students w i l l design a new special event and prepare a business plan for that event. The course w i l l also include case studies from existing events. TOUR 120 (3.0) Adventure and Eco-Tourism (3.0.1) (F) Adventure tourism products w i l l be examined; economic impact o f the industry, selling adventure tourism, identifying markets, packaging, legal liability, organization and structure o f the industry, government's role i n area and activity management, resource management issues, protecting resource areas, ecotourism issues, land use planning, and product opportunities. TOUR 123 Tourism Advertising (3.0) (3.0.1) (F) This course is designed to give the student an understanding o f the major aspects o f Canadian tourism advertising. The course w i l l cover advertising planning, creative strategies and execution as well as developing "real life" advertising campaigns. TOUR 125 (3.0) Financial Planning in Tourism II (3.0,1) (S) Designing a business plan, financial planning techniques, financial goal setting for tourism managers. TOUR 127 (3.0) (3.0,1) (F) Tourism Resource and Community Planning A n overview o f tourism resource management issues and approaches, including heritage and cultural tourism planning, tourism resource inventory and planning Course 278 Descriptions methods including G I S (Geographical Information System) techniques, community tourism planning, and sustainability issues i n tourism. TOUR 130 (10.5) (10.5,0) (Su) Tourism Co-op Work Term The co-op work term is designed to apply classroom theory and skills through work experience. Students w i l l spend four and one-half months in an acceptable industry placement and w i l l be responsible to a specific industry supervisor. The goal is to develop h i g h calibre graduates who are better able to assume productive jobs. Summer work placements are sought by the students, with faculty co-op advisors assisting them to find placement. Students apply for positions and are selected by the employees and the College. Students' work performance and potential w i l l be evaluated by the faculty and industry supervisor. U p o n completion o f the co-op work term, each student w i l l make a major presentation to the class and faculty at a department retreat. TOUR 131 (3.0) Tourism Product Development (3.0.1) (S) W i t h today's intense global competition for tourists combined with the subjective and tangible nature o f the tourism experience, operations and destinations are now compelled to analytically and methodically develop appropriate tourism products. This course w i l l examine h o w to effectively develop, package and position tourism products for success in the marketplace. TOUR 139 (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) Computer Applications in Tourism II This course introduces participants to the creation o f word processed documents using PC-based W i n d o w s / Graphical software Microsoft W o r d 7.0, an introduction to spreadsheet concepts using Microsoft E x c e l 7.0, an Introduction to PowerPoint—a graphic presentation package. The course also introduces the student to W i n d o w s 9 5 and the graphical user interface, to the basic computer hardware requirements and the use o f Internet Explorer to access the Internet and send mail. TOUR 231 (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) Tourism Research and Consultancy The role and function o f consultants in tourism w i l l be examined including the nature o f the consulting business, business ethics, politics o f consulting, business planning, staffing, marketing your services, consultant resumes, nature o f competition, types of clients and client expectations. A n a l y z i n g and responding to requests for proposals, researching R F P s and writing proposals. TOUR 232 (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) International Tourism Policy and Planning TOUR 423 Tourism Planning and Policy A geographical overview o f the Asia-Pacific region including demographics, physiography, environmental issues, tourism destinations and travel patterns. A review o f politics in tourism and Asia-Pacific region national tourism policies. Methodology and approach to tourism policy analysis, comparative tourism development case studies, regional tourism policy and planning. R o l e o f development agencies and tourism organizations. Use and apply planning and policy knowledge specific to tourism, including planning and policy negotiation skills, advanced policy and planning writing skills, and organization and leadership o f planning initiatives. TOUR 233 Cross Cultural Tourism (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) A n overview o f cross-cultural issues in tourism. The nature o f prejudice and racism is examined as are effective communication skills and behaviours in selected cultures: gender relationships, business and social customs, body language, negotiation skills and others. In addition to acquiring practical knowledge about culture in general, participants research and present information on a variety of specific cultures, with the link between cultural knowledge/skills and the success of Tourism or Outdoor Recreation activities being stressed. TOUR 239 (3.0) (3.0,1) (F) Advanced Computer Applications in Tourism This course introduces participants to the production o f spreadsheet documents using PC-based W i n d o w s / Graphical software, as w e l l as database concepts using database management software. TOUR 421 (3,0,1) (F.S) Organizational Leadership in Tourism A d v a n c e d skills i n organizational leadership, including leadership approaches, motivation, understanding o f organizational culture, and management o f working relationships. TOUR 424 Entrepreneurship in Tourism (3.0.1) (F.S) (3,0.1) (F.S) A d v a n c e d capabilities i n tourism product development, including innovation within the entrepreneurial process and through existing organizations with the intrapreneurial process. TOUR 425 (3.0,1) (F.S) Financial Management in Tourism A p p l i e d financial management and planning capabilities, including financial ratios, budgets, pro forma statements, risk management, and working capital management. TOUR 426 Cultural and Community Issues (3,0,1) (F,S) A b i l i t y to apply cross-cultural communications skills and knowledge, including conflict resolution and negotiation skills, with employees, clients and customers from different cultures. A b i l i t y to apply leadership and negotiation skills to community issues in tourism. TOUR 427 Marketing Research for Tourism (3,0,1) (F,S) A b i l i t y to use market research skills needed for the effective management of tourism operations, including survey techniques. TOUR 428 International Tourism Marketing (3,0,1) (F,S) Students w i l l develop the capability to manage tourism operations i n an international context — economic, political, legal, cultural, and financial environments. TOUR 422 (3.0,1) (F.S) People Management— Human Relations in Tourism TOUR 440 Graduating Seminar Advanced human resource management skills and professional knowledge for application to the tourism workforce including the "best practices" of recruitment and selection, motivating and managing performance, compensation and benefits, and employee and labour relations techniques w h i c h align with the business strategy o f the tourism operation. ing project with direct application to the tourism (3,0.1) (F.S) Participants w i l l research and present a major graduatindustry under the guidance o f a faculty supervisor. TOUR 441 (3,0,1) (F.S) Advanced Tourism Product Development Students w i l l develop advanced skills in product development based on market and demographic research, including marketing, pricing, competitive analysis, and conceptualizing new products across a range o f industry sectors. Course Descriptions 279 TOUR 442 (3,0,1) (F.S) Environmental Stewardship for Tourism TXTL 160 (3) Textile Surface Design I Students w i l l review principled negotiation, the ethics of environmental stewardship, the environmental legislative regime and provincial resource policy, geographical information system applications, negotiations o f land use agreements, co-management approaches, and sustainability issues using case studies. This is an introduction to traditional methods o f printing on fabric using found objects, blocks and stamps with pigment and dyes. B o u n d and tied resists w i l l also be used with natural and fibre-reactive dyes and discharge effects. Design possibilities w i l l be studied for each medium and traditional dye techniques from many cultures w i l l be examined. TXTL 153 (3) Introductory Drawing II (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: T X T L 154 or any other drawing courses or by portfolio. This course is a further exploration o f drawing media and techniques i n w h i c h students explore a balance between technical/perceptual skills and personal expression. Study includes both representational and interpretive work i n assorted media, including charcoal, conte, ink and collage. Students w i l l develop confidence, knowledge, graphic sensitivity and facility with media while learning more about line, value, structure, depth and space and composition as they work with various still life set-ups and the human figure. TXTL 154 Introductory Drawing I (3) (4,0,0) (S) This course offers students drawing skills that w i l l be useful in their practice. Concentration w i l l be given to the study o f primary drawing media and basic techniques, including pencil, pen and ink, brush and ink, marking pens, conte and pastel. It includes the study of perspective drawing from direct observation and representational rendering techniques o f objects, structures, surfaces and textures. Students w i l l learn how to visualize i n graphic terms, to symbolize and to stylize in terms o f line and line characteristics, and to develop power of observation and graphic sensibility. TXTL158 Design I (3) (4,0,0) (F) Basic design elements and principles o f colour theory w i l l be studied. Sources o f inspiration and imagery w i l l be explored using a variety o f materials and processes. Two-dimensional repeat design w i l l be studied for application to surface decoration and compositional elements w i l l be investigated and adapted for textiles. M a i n project w i l l be presented i n textiles. Course 280 Descriptions (4,3,0) (F) (3) TXTL 161 Textile Surface Design II Prerequisite: (4,3,0) (S) T X T L 160. This is an introduction to printing fabric with stencils using pigments, fibre-reactive and natural dyes. Katazome techniques with rice paste resists w i l l be demonstrated. Applique and stitching techniques w i l l be used for surface decoration and design possibilities for each medium w i l l be explored. Fabrics from different cultures and time periods w i l l be studied. TXTL 168 Weaving I (3) (4,3,0) (F) This course is divided into two parts. One segment deals with basic fibre properties and construction techniques such as felting, yarn construction, dying and various off-loom weaving techniques. T w i n i n g and coiling for basketry w i l l be studied and historical as well as contemporary objects from various cultures w i l l be discussed. Tapestry is the subject o f the second half of the course. A sampler is woven to learn the basic vocabulary of traditional techniques. A n a l y s i s o f techniques used by medieval and contemporary artists helps students to explore the application o f the basic techniques. Studies i n tapestry include the discussion of the great mural tapestries o f medieval Europe and the rebirth o f tapestry during the 20th century. One finished piece is woven. TXTL169 Weaving II (3) (4,3,0) (S) This introduction to loom weaving includes warping the loom and drafting pattern weaves on four harnesses. It w i l l include samples and finished pieces, with an emphasis on colour relationships, textures, and use of different fibres. Controlled dye techniques w i l l be introduced and historical and contemporary weaving from different cultures w i l l be studied. TXTL 178 Design II Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) T X T L 158. Prerequisite: Elements o f 2 - D and 3-D design w i l l be explored. Concepts o f two-dimensional composing such as grid and other layout structures, creative uses o f positive negative space, issues o f emphasis and colour theory as w e l l as text orientation with image and image on field w i l l be studied. Three-dimensional issues involving installation and materiality offer a broad perspective o f study. Cultural sources for new ideas in design including your o w n personal references w i l l form the backbone o f the course. A n optional introduction to computer design and image manipulation w i l l be included. M a i n projects w i l l be presented first on paper then i n textile form. TXTL 230 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Professional and Business Skills in Arts and Crafts Prerequisites: One year full-time study i n a visual arts program or equivalent experience. Students w i l l receive an overview, resources and information, as w e l l as practical hands-on experience in setting up a self-employed business or professional practice i n the arts. They w i l l learn basic self-management practices and gain a basic understanding o f business practices, marketing, financial management, legal and copyright issues and contracts. Students w i l l also find out about different galleries and granting agencies. A practicum with an artist, crafts person, arts organization or business is an integrated part o f this course. Students w i l l also prepare a portfolio. TXTL 267 Weaving III Prerequisite: TXTL 268 Weaving IV (3) (4,0,0) (F) T X T L 169. Hand-manipulated structures, ikat and painted warps w i l l be explored. The first part o f the course emphasizes weave structures for use i n three-dimensional work or for imagery, i.e. double weave and weft brocade; the second part looks at graphic imagery and weaving. B o t h technical skills and personal expression w i l l be developed, and traditional and contemporary textiles w i l l be discussed i n class and through research. (3) (4,3,0) (S) T X T L 267. This is a further exploration o f techniques and ideas in weaving and/or combinations with other methods o f textile constructions. Students w i l l develop a personal focus and necessary techniques for individually designed projects, involving sampling, research and final projects. Techniques can include rug-weaving, advanced multi-harness weaving, supplementary warp/ weft, as w e l l as advanced projects i n felt, basketry and off-loom techniques. Critical discussions w i l l be encouraged i n class. TXTL 284 (3) Textile Surface Design III Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F) T X T L 161. This study o f screen printing techniques using paper, wax, screen filler and direct emulsion stencils involves a variety of methods for producing a repeat design with different registration possibilities. There w i l l be an option for using photographic stencils for projects. Light sensitive dyes w i l l be used for direct effects on fabric and hand-painting with different dyes and pigments w i l l be combined with screening techniques. TXTL 285 (3) Textile Surface Design IV Prerequisite: (4,3,0) (S) T X T L 284. Basic paper-making techniques w i l l be studied, exploring the possibilities of paper collage, cast paper, use o f different pulps, colouring and making pulps from plants. R e l i e f and 3-D fibre construction methods w i l l be used with fabric embellishment techniques and direct dying techniques to create fibre structure. Direct hand-painting techniques w i l l be introduced and different dyestuffs and pigments for natural and synthetic fabrics w i l l be used. C h e m i c a l processes w i l l be introduced which alter the structure o f the cloth by distressing, shrinking, and destroying parts o f it. TXTL 290 Precision Dyeing Prerequisite: equivalent. (3) (4.0,0) (F) First year o f Textile Arts program or This course teaches precision dye methods with a range of synthetic and natural dyes for use with different yarns and fabrics. It provides technical knowledge for the safe use of dyes, how to achieve a colour match and how to create various aged looks for applied situations in film or theatre or for a special project. Course Descriptions 281 TXTL 367 Weaving V (4.5) (4,6,0) Students w i l l expand their knowledge o f basic weaves through experimental pieces and finished projects. Hand-manipulated structures, such as double weave and brocading, w i l l be explored as well as working with colour through ikat, painted and printed warps. This course emphasizes graphic approaches to weaving; the use of figurative and symbolic imagery or abstract patterning. B o t h technical skills and personal expression w i l l be developed and traditional and contemporary textiles w i l l be discussed i n class and researched. (4.5) TXTL 368 Weaving VI (4,6,0) VIET 102 (1.5) Introduction to Vietnamese I (3,1,0) (F) For Asia Pacific Management students only. program Cooperative This course is designed to offer A P M C P students a basic knowledge o f Vietnamese and to enable them to gain an appreciation o f the Vietnamese culture and society. VIET 103 (3) Introduction to Vietnamese II (3,1,0) (S) For Asia Pacific Management students only. program Prerequisite: Cooperative V I E T 102 or instructor's permission. This course is a continuation of V I E T 102. This is a further exploration o f techniques and ideas i n weaving and/or combinations with other methods of textile constructions. Students w i l l develop necessary techniques for individually designed projects, involving sampling, research and final projects. Topics can include loom-weaving such as rug-weaving, computer assisted designing for advanced pattern weaving and special techniques designed for threedimensional weavings; non-woven techniques include felting, basketry and off-loom techniques. Students w i l l be encouraged to combine weaving with surface design processes and other media. TXTL 384 (4.5) Textile Surface Design V (4,6,0) VIET 110 Basic Vietnamese I (3) (4,2,0) (F) This course introduces students to the basics of V i e t namese conversation, culture, and language structure. VIET 111 Basic Vietnamese II Prerequisite: (3) (4,2,0) (S) V I E T 110 This course is a continuation o f Vietnamese 110. WMST 100 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Introduction to Women's Studies The study of screen printing using paper, wax and direct emulsion stencils involves a variety o f methods for producing single images as w e l l as repeat designs with different registration possibilities. Photographic effects w i l l be explored in combination with discharge and resist processes. Light sensitive chemicals w i l l be used for direct effects on fabric and hand-painting with different dyes and pigments w i l l be combined with screening techniques. This course w i l l examine the status and role o f women in Canadian society. Topics w i l l include the impact o f W o m e n ' s Studies on traditional academic disciplines; the nature and origins of patriarchy; women and work; reproductive rights, pornography and sexuality. It w i l l investigate issues of power centering around race, class and sexuality. It w i l l trace the development o f gender role divisions i n the family and other social institutions; examine the influence of education, media and art on the development o f women's social and legal status. TXTL 385 (4.5) Textile Surface Design VI WMST 102 (3) Political Economy of Women (4,6,0) Basic paper-making techniques w i l l be studied, exploring the possibilities o f paper collage, cast paper, use o f different pulps, colouring and making pulps from plants. R e l i e f and 3-D fibre construction methods w i l l be used with fabric embellishment techniques and direct dying techniques to create fibre structure. Direct hand-painting techniques w i l l be introduced and different dyestuffs and pigments for natural and synthetic fabrics w i l l be used. C h e m i c a l processes w i l l be introduced which alter the structure of the cloth by distressing, shrinking, and destroying parts of it. Course 282 Descriptions (4,0,0) This course w i l l examine women's work from the preindustrial time until today. Topics such as participation in the workplace, inequality in the labour markets, exclusion o f household production in the system o f National Accounts and attempts to measure unpaid work w i l l be covered. The course w i l l also examine the impact o f free trade, technology, privatization, and economic restructuring on women. Topics w i l l also include an examination o f the effects o f the mounting debt and economic crisis on women i n the less devel- oped countries. Issues o f current interest such as the comparable worth movement and the child care industry w i l l be discussed. WMST 104 (3) (4,0,0) Women Writers and Feminist Criticism A discussion-oriented course intended to broaden the students' awareness of, and appreciation for, literature produced by women writers with emphasis on contemporary writers. It w i l l also introduce students to current feminist literary theory. WMST 106 (3) (4,0,0) Contemporary American Women Writers A discussion-oriented literature course intended to broaden and intensify the student's awareness of and appreciation o f contemporary and recent important American women authors. There w i l l be brief consideration o f 19th and early 20th century works, but the focus w i l l be on works published since W W I I , including works o f the 1990's. A l t h o u g h the focus w i l l be on plays, stories, novels, and poetry, there w i l l be some exploration of those biographical matters and issues of critical status that mark the rise o f women's writings from a sub-genre to full status acceptance by the best critics today. WMST 110 (3) Women and Psychology (4,0,0) In this course we examine the psychological construction o f gender-roles, their development i n childhood and maintenance in adulthood. The course w i l l examine current research in biology, socialization, personality and mental health, and w i l l include issues o f current interest such as sexuality, aging, violence against women, gender relations and the workplace. WMST 113 Women in Politics (3) (4,0,0) This introductory course i n W o m e n ' s Studies w i l l examine women's political participation i n the political process from a multidisciplinary feminist format. The course w i l l focus on Canadian examples and encourage students to examine the difficulties that affect women in particular. Students w i l l be encouraged to research possible solutions to increasing women's political participation. WMST 122 (3) Women in Anthropology (4,0.0) In this course the anthropological perspective w i l l be applied to women i n different cultures o f the world: their role in economic, political, religious, kinship, and expressive systems; exploration o f the work o f women anthropologists and the effect o f theory on understanding women; women's experience in cultures o f the world. WMST 130 Women and Art (3) (4.0.0) This course surveys the history o f women's involvement i n Western art. The position o f women i n the visual arts and art history w i l l be discussed and the methodological issues involved i n reclaiming the history o f women artists explored. W o m e n ' s role as producers o f art w i l l be considered from Antiquity to the 20th century and the social, cultural and economic background o f each period w i l l be examined i n order to understand the conditions under w h i c h these artists worked. The image o f women in art w i l l be looked at to reveal the underlying ideologies o f each period. Students taking W M S T 130 w i l l not receive duplicate credit for A H I S 109. WMST 140 (3) Women, Science and Technology (4.0.0) This course w i l l provide an insight into the role that science and technology play in our society and their impact on the lives o f women. Topics w i l l include an historical review o f the role women have played in the development o f science, investigation o f the reasons for the traditionally low participation o f women i n scientific and technical fields, the relationship between science and gender and discussion sessions on a variety of topics such as ecofeminism, ecology and the environment, reproductive technologies, sociobiology, information technology. WMST 220 (3) (4,0,0) Women and the Past: An Historical Survey W e w i l l examine the lives o f women i n the western world from the ancient times to 20th century North A m e r i c a . Private lives as w e l l as public and political activities w i l l be studied. Topics w i l l include the origins o f patriarchy, the role o f women in Early Christianity, women in monasticism, women and the family i n pre-industrial Europe, the impact o f industrialization, pioneers and pathbreakers, and the rise and nature o f women's movements. Course Descriptions 283 i Course 284 Descriptions I ! I Index Academic probation Academic schedule Accelerated Accounting Management program Accelerated General Management program Accelerated Marketing Management program Accounting Assistant program Accounting Support program Add/Drop period Administration Administrative Assistant program Admission/readmission Admission requirements Adult Basic Education Advanced placement Advising Centre Alternative Career Training Anthropology Application dates Applied Information Technology program Art History Art Institute Asia Pacific Management Cooperative program Associate degree requirements Athletics and recreation Attendance Audio-Visual Services Awards Bachelor of Business Administration Bachelor of Music in Jazz Studies Bachelor of Music Therapy Bachelor of Music Transfer Bachelor of Tourism Management Biology Bookstore Bursaries Business Administration Accelerated Diploma programs Advanced Certificate Advanced Diploma Certficate Co-operative Education Diploma program Degree Diploma programs Evening Certificate programs Business Computing Certificate Business Computing Co-operative Diploma Business Fundamentals program Cafeteria Campus addresses Campus maps Canadian Studies Specialty Cap Corner (student store) Capilano College Foundation Capilano Courier Capilano Review Capilano Students' Union Car pool Career Assessments Career Resource Centre 43 19 120 120 120 106 106 30 62 107 20 21 68 27 44 70 81 21 108 81 173 174 35 52 39 46 49 113 133 98,150 96 169 82 54 49 109 119 119 114 119 113 113 116 118 119 115 123 55 1 5,7 79 54 62 54 54 53 55 180 52 Career/Vocational programs Certificate and diploma requirements Certified Financial Planner program Cheating and plagiarism policy Chemistry Child care Chinese College Board College Success Strategies (credit courses) Commerce Commercial Animation program Communications Community Music School Computer Specialist program Computer system, misuse policy Computing Science Conflict Resolution Advisor Continuing Education Contracts Co-operative education Copyright policy Counselling Course challenge Course change procedures Course descriptions Course overload Criminology Daycare Diploma requirements Disability Services Distance education Early Childhood Care and Education program Economics Education Council Educational Travel Eldercollege Employment Centre Engineering English English as a Second Language English Diagnostic Test (EDT) English language requirements Enrolment status Environmental Science program Ethnic and Cross-Cultural Relations program Examination Period Exemption 105 35 121,179 60 83 51 83 62 67 84 123 125 179 121 61 85 51 179 180 50,105 61 50 32 31 185 32 86 see Child Care 35 44 49 126 86 62 180 179 48 87 89 71 29 21,72 39 176 79 39 40 Faculty see specific program/departments Fees 33 Film Studies 180 Financial Aid and Awards 48 First aid 52 First Nations College Preparation program 72 First Nations Student Services 45 Fisheries and Forestry Science 129 Fitness Centre 53 Food and beverage service 55 Freedom of Information and Protection of Index 287 Privacy Act French 40 90 Geography Geology German Governance Graphic Design and Illustration program Grades Graduation 91 91 92 62 131 41 35 Health Services History Home Support Attendant program Humanities Division 51 92 132 77 Instructional year International exchanges student information International Student Centre Infotec program 29 47 see Admission 47 108 Japanese 93 Jazz Studies 133 Kinesiology 93 Labour Studies program 141 Landscape Horticulture program Learning Specialist Legal Assistant program .". Legal Secretarial program Library Linguistics Loans Local Government Administration Professional Certificate program Lost and Found Math Placement Test (MPT) Mathematics and Statistics Mathematics Learning Centre Media Production Services Media program Medical insurance Medical Office Assistant program Mission and Values Music Therapy, Bachelor of Music Transfer, Bachelor of 143 46 49,144 146 45 94 48 122 55 29,95 94 47 46 '47 20 149 11 98,150 96 Network Specialist program 122 Office Assistant program Online Publishing program Outdoor Recreation Management program 152 153 154 Parking Peer Support Centre Performing Arts Management program Personal Care Attendant program Personal Education Number (PEN) Philosophy Physics Physiotherapy Plagiarism policy 54 51 156 157 40 99 99 51 60 Index 288 Policies Political Studies Post-graduate programs Pre-college level courses Preparatory programs Prior learning assessment Professional Accounting Transfer Package Protection of privacy Provincial Rafting Exams Psychology Pure and Applied Sciences Division 39,56 100 130,173 67 67 28 120 40 180 100 77,80 Readmission Recreation Refunds Registrar's Office Registration Required to Withdraw Resident Care Attendant program Retail Marketing Co-op program 20 52 see Fees 44 29 43 159 117 : SARAW program 74 Scholarships 49 Security 52 Sexual harassment policy 60 Social Science Division 77 Sociology 101 Spanish 101 Special Education Teacher Assistant program 160 Speech Assisted Reading and Writing program 74 Sports see Athletics Sports Medicine Clinic 51 Sportsplex 53 Streamkeepers Training 130 Students conduct policy 57 employment centre 48 loans 48 newspaper + 54 records 39 rights and responsibilities 56 services 44 student-operated store 54 student union 53 students with disabilities 57 Studio Art program 161 Substitution 40 Summer session 29 Telephone numbers - departments Textile Arts program Thai Theatre program Tourism Management Co-op program Transcripts (student records) Transfer credit Tuition 9 164 102 166 169 39 27,40 see Fees University Transfer 77 Visual and Performing Arts Division 77 Web site: www.capcollege.bc.ca Withdrawal period Women's Studies Writing Across the Curriculum Writing Centre 30 78,102 78 46 Continuing Education Division at Capilano College Innovative Programming Small Business Professional & Personal Development Development Lifelong Learning Opportunities Tel 984-4901 Fax 9 8 3 - 7 5 4 5 www.capcollege.bc.ca Providin ity Since 1968 The Cactus Club Cafe Presents: A TRIP INSIDE THE STUDENT BRAIN Short Term Memory Department Exam cramming file. Contains temporary memory of student loan payment schedule. Forgets where parking S P°' i s - Right Hemisphere Creative.Where well thoughtout, convincingly written and completely incorrect exam answers c o m e from. • Full Frontal Lobe Where nudity decisions c o m e from. Left Hemisphere Analytical. G o o d for calculating hours between now and your next deadline /due date/ exam, Sometimes remembers useful and attractive phone numbers. Long Term Memory Lobe No proof of existence at this time. See credit card bill lobe Nutrition Sortacortex Knows that ydre what y'eat, Don't be a Twinky. Be a hot wing or a bandera salad or a rack of ribs or something else tasty. Win YOUR TUITION BRAIN Sweet Love Tom Tom Room Should know that the Cactus Club C a f e is a nice place for meetings of minds and other body parts (until someone tells you to get a room). ALERT Just lobotomize this entry from this publication, bring it into your favorite Cactus Club Cafe and enter for your chance to win a year's tuition absolutely free. No purchase, hypnotism, migraine causing details or cruel and unusual punishment necessary. Winning brains however, must answer a skill testing question. ENTRY Name FORLi : Addre ss• Phone Number! Educational Institution: FEED YOUR MIND! E n j o y 6 f r e e h o t w i n g s when y o u p r e s e n t t h i s c o u p o n a t any C a c t u s C l u b C a f e . Draw Late The F i n e P r i n t : Lecember 1 No purchase n e c e s s a r y . Draw winners must answer a s k i l l t e s t i n g q u e s t i o n . C o n t e s t a n t s must he c u r r e n t l y enrolled at a p o s t - secondary i n s t i t u t i o n . One grand p r i z e w i n n e r . Maximum v a l u e $2,000. See u s t o r l u l l contest d e t a i l s .